I 


LIBRARY 

UNIVERSITY  • 


A 


'm.-^ 


THE 

COMBINED  SPANISH  METHOD. 

A  NEW 

PRACTICAL  AND  THEORETICAL  SYSTEM  OF  LEARNING 

THE  CASTILIAN  LANGUAGE, 

BMBEACING  THE   MOST   ADVANTAGEOUS    FEATUEES   OF   THE   BEST   KNOWN- 
METHODS. 

WITH  A 

PROIOUNCIXG  VOCABULARY, 

CONTAINING    ALL   THE  WORDS   USED  IN   THE   COURSE   OF  THE   WORK,   AND  REFERENCES 

TO   THE   LESSONS   IN    WHICH   EACH   ONE    IS   EXPLAINED,    THUS   ENABLING 

ANY   ONE   TO   BE    HIS    OWN    INSTRUCTOR. 

BY 

ALBERTO  DE  TORNOS,  A.M., 

POBMEBLT    DIRECTOR    OF    frORMAL   SCHOOLS    IN    SPAIN.   AND    NO"W    TEACHER    OF    SPANISH    \V 

THE  NEW   YORK   MERCANTILE   LIBRARY,   NEW   YORK    EVENING   HIGH   SCHOOL,   AND 

THE  POLYTECHNIC  AND  PACKER  INSTITUTES,  BROOKLYN. 

JOH|«  S.  PRELL 

Civil  &  Mechanical  Engineer. 

SAN  FKANCISCO,  CAL. 

NEW    YOEK: 
D.    APPLETOIsr    AND    COMPANY, 

1,    3,    AND    6    BOND     STREET. 

1892. 


Bntbbbd,  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  186T,  hy 

D.  APPLETON  &  COMPANY, 

Ijx  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  the  United  States  for  tne  Sonthem  District 

of  New  York, 


IrdMtolfo^ 


KoTiCE. — ^A  Kej^  to  the  Exercises  of  this  Grammar  is 
published  in  a  separate  volume. 


Add  toliib. 


I  i  1 


PREFACE. 


It  is  an  undoubted  fact  that  in  teaching,  not  only  lan- 
guages, but  any  other  science  or  art,  there  neither  is,  nor 
can  be,  any  other  method  than  that  of  uniting  theory 
with,  practice  ^  and  the  various  modes  of  applying  the  one 
to  the  other,  the  extent  of  the  application,  and  the  time  at 
which  it  should  be  commenced,  have  produced  the  great 
number  of  methods  hitherto  published. 

This  fact  is  now  universally  acknowledged,  and  each  new 
author  proclaims  himself  to  be  the  only  one  who  has  put  it 
into  execution.  The  most  insignificant  little  phrase-book 
does  not  fail  to  announce,  in  its  introduction,  that  it  com- 
bines theory  and  jpractice  /  and  grammars  containing  noth- 
ing more  than  confused  masses  of  rules,  heaped  one  upon 
another,  are  entitled  "  Theoretical  and  Practical^  It  is 
admitted  on  all  hands  that  much  progress  has  been  made 
within  the  last  few  years  in  the  art  of  teaching  languages ; 
and,  in  testimony  of  this,  we  have  only  to  mention  the  ex- 
cellent oral  and  practical  methods  of  Jacotot,  Manesca,  Ollen- 
dorff, Boulet,  Hobertson,  and  others  who  have  followed  in 
their  footsteps,  all  of  which  are  ably  treated,  and  have  done 
much  good  in  their  way.  But  each  one  of  the  grammarians 
referred  to,  satisfied  with  his  own  invention,  looked  with 
disdain  upon  that  of  his  predecessor.      Hence  the  enmity 

747 


iV  PEEPACE. 

and  the  almost  unaccountable  diversity  of  opinion  which  we 
observe  amongst  them.  Had  they  studied  each  other  with 
impartiality,  and  endeavored  to  profit  by  the  experience 
and  even  the  defects  of  the  several  systems,  their  labors 
would  certainly  have  been  attended  with  still  more  favora- 
ble results,  and  of  course  more  considerable  benefit  would 
have  accrued  thereby  to  the  art  in  general.  Numberless 
points  of  excellence  are  to  be  found,  scattered  here  and 
there,  throughout  the  various  ancient  and  modern  systems, 
and  chiefly  those  abeady  alluded  to;  and  it  has  been 
thouglit  that,  if  carefully  sifted  out  and  judiciously  com- 
bined, they  would  foi-m  a  new  method  which  would  be  in 
details  essentially  superior  to  any  of  the  old  ones. 

This  conviction,  joined  to  twenty  years'  experience 
in  teaching  the  Spanish  language,  sometimes  through  the 
medium  of  one,  sometimes  of  another  of  the  before-men- 
tioned systems,  has  led  the  author  to  prepare  and  publish 
the  Combined  Method,  which  he  now  offers  to  those  desir- 
ing to  learn  the  noble  language  of  Cervantes. 

Wliether  he  has  successfully  attained  his  object,  the  pub- 
lic will  decide. 


OBSEEYATION"S 

ON 

SOME  OF  THE  ADVANTAGEOUS  FEATURES  OF  THE  "  DE  TORNOS'S 
COMBINED  METHOD." 


1st.  The  advantage  of  presenting  the  verb  as  the  first  and 
principal  part  of  speech,  which  serves  as  the  axis  upon  which 
all  the  other  parts  revolve.  These,  too,  have  been  introduced 
in  their  turn,  not  in  grammatical  order,  nor  by  mere  chance, 
but  in  the  logical  and  natural  order  in  which  they  occur  in 
discourse,  whether  written  or  spoken. 

2d.  That  of  explaining  these  parts  of  speech  in  the  order 
just  mentioned,  not  in  an  isolated  manner,  but  united  to  form 
a  homogeneous  whole,  and  in  such  a  way  that  the  learner  will 
have  no  difficulty  in  finding  the  explanation  relative  to  the  use  of 
each  one  of  them  respectively,  as  often  as  occasion  may  require. 

3d.  These  explanations,  which  embrace  the  whole  theory, 
and  form  a  complete  grammar  of  the  language,  are  separate 
from  and  independent  of  the  exercises  ;  the  latter  being  com- 
posed in  strict  accordance  with  the  examples  accompanying 
each  lesson,  in  such  a  manner  that  those  unacquainted  with 
grammar  in  general,  and  those  who  have  no  desire  to  enter 
into  the  theory  of  the  language,  or,  finally,  those  who  are  too 
young  or  too  old  to  learn  grammar,  may  acquire  a  thorough 
conversational  knowledge  of  Spanish,  by  merely  committing  to 
memory  the  Vocabulary,  studying  the  Compositions,  and  care- 
fully writing  the  Exercises. 

4th.  From  the  arrangement  alluded  to,  arises  another  great 
advantage,  namely,  all  the  elements  are  found  in  the  vocabu- 
lary of  each  lesson,  separated  and  detached  from  the  examples 
and  rules  given  in  the  explanation  ;  thus  enabling  the  student 
to  see  at  one  glance  all  that  he  has  to  commit  to  memory  for 
each  recitation. 


Vi  OBSBBVATIONS. 

6th.  And  this  division  of  the  lessons  into  Elements,  Compo- 
sition, Explanation,  Version,  and  Exercise,  enables  the  teacher 
to  divide  each  lesson  into  two,  three,  or  even  four  parts,  accord- 
ing to  the  age  and  capacity  of  the  learner. 

6tll.  Repetition,  and  constant  repetition,  is  indispensable  for 
acquiring  any  language ;  but  by  repetition  should  not  be  under- 
stood the  simple  reiteration  of  single  words  and  easy  phrases ; 
but  repetition  of  the  idioms,  and  of  those  forms  of  expression 
differing"  most  widely  from  the  idiomatical  construction  of  the 
learner's  native  tongue.  It  is  true,  that  though  this  is  the 
proper  plan  for  acquiring  a  thorough  knowledge  of  a  language, 
that  feature  might  tend  to  make  the  present  work  appear,  at 
first  sight,  more  difficult  than  the  books  hitherto  used ;  but 
such  will  not  be  found  the  case ;  for  when  there  is  frequent 
change  of  matter  there  cannot  be  monotony ;  and  variety  ren- 
ders study  at  the  same  time  easy  and  agreeable.  This  repetition, 
then,  of  useful  forms  of  expression,  and  contrast  of  idiom,  will 
be  found  in  every  page  of  our  "  Combined  Method,"  in  which 
it  has  been  our  endeavor  to  introduce  gradually  and  with  the 
necessary  explanations  of  each,  the  most  important  idioms  of 
the  Spanish  language. 

7th.  Although  we  are  of  opinion  that  to  learn  a  language, 
and,  above  all,  to  learn  to  pronounce  it,  it  is  always  preferable 
to  have  the  assistance  of  a  skilful  teacher,  and  one  who  speaks 
his  native  tongue  with  purity  and  correctness ;  yet,  as  it  is  not 
always  possible  to  procure  such,  we  have  placed  at  the  end  a 
Vocabulary,  containing  all  the  words  used  in  the  course  of  the 
work,  and  the  pronunciation  of  each,  so  that  nothing  may  be 
wanting  to  second  the  efforts  of  those  who,  from  choice  or 
necessity,  may  be  their  own  instructors. 

8th.  The  Vocabulary,  besides  giving  the  pronunciation  and 
meaning  of  the  words,  indicates  the  lesson  in  which  the  expla- 
nation of  each  has  been  given  in  the  Grammar.  By  this  means 
the  learner  can  with  ease  refer  to  the  explanation  of  all  those 
words  of  which  it  has  been  deemed  essential  to  give  one. 


CONTENTS. 


rkon 
PRKFACE, iii,  iv 

A  FEW  REMABK3  ON  THE  CoifBIKED  METHOD,        .  .  .  .  .  V,  vl 

Contents,       ..........  vii-xvi 

Pbeliminart  Lesson  on  Orthography  and  Pbonunciation,  .  xvii-xxiv 

LESSON    I. 

BUI.B 

1.  Regular  verts,  classified  in  three  conjugations,    .....       1 

2.  Eoots,  ..........  a 

8.    Terminations  of  the  three  model  verbs,  corresponding  to  all  the  regular  verbs,       2 

— .    Suppression  of  the  nominative  pronouns,    .  ....  2 

4.    F.  iUiied)  requires  the  verb  in  the  tliird  person,  .....       8 

LESSON    II. 

6.    Senor,  senorito,  sefiora,  senorita,  use  of  these  words, .  .  ,  .  4 

6.  Don  and  Bona,  use  of  these  words,  .......       5 

7.  iV'o,  placed  before  the  verb,         .......  5 

LESSON    III. 

8.  The  conjunction  y  changed  into  I,    ....  ,  ,7 

9.  Que,  interrogative  pronoun,        ...  .  .  7 

10.  Sino.—Wheu  but  is  to  be  translated  by  sino,  .  .  .  .  .7 

11.  P^ro.— When  ftz/Ms  to  be  translated  by  pen),  .....  7 

12.  jE'*:pam);,  iM5'/es,  &c.,  one  word  may  belong  to  different  parts  of  speech,         ,       7 


LESSON    IV. 


13 


10 


A,  preposition  to,  used  after  active  verbs,  when  the  object  is  a  person,  .  lu 

14.  De,  used  to  express  position  or  the  material  of  which  any  thing  is  made  10 

15.  ^,  the  article  <A€,  used  to  determine  a  noun  masculine  singular              '      *  10 
^.    Contraction  of  the  article  el  and  the  prepositions  a  and  de  into  al,  del,          .  10 

16.  ^«,  the  indefinite  pronoun  used  before  masculine  nouns,    .          .  10 
— .    t/«o  Is  only  used  as  a  numeral  adjective, .10 

LESSON   y. 

17.  Gender,  how  ascertained,            .......  1.<J 

— .     Una,  used  before  feminine  nouns,    ....,,.  13 

18.  Tour,  how  translated,       .          .          .          .          .          .','.'  IZ 


VIU  CONTENTS. 

LESSON    VI. 

BULK  rxOB 

19.  The  terminations  of  the  persous  of  the  present  indicative ;  how  they  differ 

in  the  three  conjugations,   .           .           .           .           .           .      *     .  .16 

20.  Muy^  how  translated,        ........  16 

21.  Noons  ending  in  o  change  that  vowel  into  a  for  the  feminine,  .          .  .17 

LESSON    VII. 

22.  Adjectives  ending  in  o,  an,  or  on  form  their  feminine  in  a,  .  .  20 
— .  Adjectives  signifying  nationality  and  ending  in  a,  .  .  .  .20 
— .  Adjectives  are  generally  placed  after  their  nouns,  ....  20 
— .  Adjectives  used  metaphorically  are  always  placed  before  the  nouns,  .  .  20 
— .    Some  adjectives  drop  their  last  letter  or  syllable,      ....  20 

LESSON    VIII. 

23.  The  endings  of  the  second  and  third  conjugations,  how  they  differ,    .  .     28 

24.  The  conjunction  b  when  changed  into  w,         .          .          .          .          .  23 

25.  iW,  how  translated,      .........     23 

26.  The  plural  of  nouns,          ........  23 

27.  Adjectives  agree  with  their  nouns  in  gender,  number,  and  case,         .  .     24 

28.  The  article  agrees  also,      ........  24 

— .    Feminine  nouns  that  take  the  masculine  article, 24 

.89.    The  neuter  article  fo, 34 


LESSON    IX. 

80.  Papd^  mama,  pie,  are  exceptions,     .......     27 

81.  Nouns  which  are  not  monosyllables  and  end  in  s,  their  plural,      .  .  28 
— .  Words  ending  in  z,  their  plural,        .......     28 

82.  Words  which  are  compounds  of  two  nouns,  their  plural,     ...  26 
33.  The  days  of  the  week,  when  they  take  the  article,           .           .           .           .28 

84.  Donde,  adonde,  cuando,  placed  before  the  verb,  ....  28 

85.  Donde,  adonde,  cuando,  in  interrogations  require  an  accent,     .  .  .28 

LESSON   X. 

86.  trregular  verbs,       .........  31 

— .  Tener  not  included  in  the  seven  verbs,       .  .  .  .  .  .81 

— .  Objective  case  of  the  third  person  fe,  los,  la,  las,  lo,    .          .          .          .  ^ 

87.  Lo  and  le,  the  difference  between  them,      ,,....  82 
— .  If.  and  so  are  translated  sometimes  by  to,         .          ,          .          .          .  82 

88.  Q>/ien,  curd,  qiie,  de  quien,  used  interrogatively  do  not  take  the  article,         .  32 

89.  When  the  interrogative  is  governed  by  a  preposition,  the  same  preposition 

must  be  repeated  in  the  answer,  .  .  .  .  .  .  .88 

LESSON    XI. 

W.  Alrrt/ien,  akruno,  the  difference  between  them,      .          .          .                     .85 

— .  Any  one  or  any  body,  when  translated  by  cualquiera,            ...           86 

41.  Nadie,  ninfruno,  their  distinction,     .  .          .          •          •          .     8R 

42.  Alfjuno  and  nin/funo,  when  they  lose  the  o,     .  ~.          .          »          .           86 
48  Algo,  alguna  cosa,  used  affirmatively,          ...>..     86 


CONTENTS.  ix 

44.  I^ada,  ninguna  cosa,  used  negatively,    ......  36 

45.  Negatives,  when  placed  before  the  verb,     .  .           .           .           .           .36 

— .  Two  negatives  render  the  negation  more  emphatic  than  one,         .          .           36 

46.  A  or  an,  when  not  translated,  .......     36 


LESSON    XII. 

47.  Tener  and  haber,  their  distinction,        ......  39 

— .    To  have  and  to  be,  followed  by  an  infinitive,  how  they  are  translated,  .  .     39 

48.  Preterit  Indefirdte,  .........  40 


LESSON    XIII. 

49.    Mio,  tuyo,  «&c.,  change  the  0  into  a  for  the  feminine,        .  .  .  .43 

BO.    Possessive  pronouns  agree  in  gender  and  number  with  the  name  of  the  thing 

possessed,  .........  43 

51.  As  pronominal  adjectives,  mio,  tuyo,  myo  precede  the  noun  and  drop  their 

final  syllable,  ..........     43 

52.  Mio,  when  placed  after  the  noun,  .....  44 

53.  Possessives  used  as  pronouns  agree  in  gender  and  number  with  the  nouns 

they  represent,  and  take  the  article,        .          .          .          .          .  ,44 

54.  When  used  indefinitely  they  take  the  neuter  article,            ...  44 

55.  Whenconnected  with  the  verb  to  &e,  the  article  is  omitted,       .          .  .44 

56.  Vuestro,  vuestra,  when  used,       .......  44 


LESSON    XIY. 

57.  Formation  of  compound  numbers,    .......     48 

58.  Numbers  are  indeclinable,  except  ujio  and  the  compounds  of  dento,        ,  48 

59.  Uno,  its  agreement ;  when  it  loses  the  0,    .  .           .           .           .           .48 

60.  Ciento,  its  agreement ;  when  it  loses  the  last  syllable,  ...           48 


LESSON    XV. 

61.  Ordinals,  their  agreement  and  place,  .  .  .  .  .  .51 

— .  Primero  and  tercero,  when  they  drop  their  final  letter,         ...  52 

62.  Ordinals,  when  used,  .........     52 

— .  N.  B.— When  ordinals  do  not  require  the  definite  article,    ...  52 


LESSON   XVI. 

63.  Preterit  Definite, 56 

64.  Ante,  its  meaning,  .......•,  57 

65.  Mas  and  menos,  how  used,     ....«.,.  57 

LESSON    XVII, 

66.  Qiiien,  how  used,    .........  61 

67.  Who,  when  translated  by  que,  and  when  by  quien^  .  ,  .  .61 

68.  0>/al  and  qve  relate  to  persons  and  things,      .....  61 

69.  Cijyo  refers  tc  persons  and  things :  its  agreement,           .           .           ,           • .  61 
— .    It  partakes  of  the  nature  of  the  relatives  and  of  the  possessives,  .          .  61 


CONTENTS 


BULK 


rA«< 


70.  The  preposition  placed  before  the  relative,  .  .  .  •  .61 

71.  Relative  pronouns  can  never  be  suppressed  in  Spanish,       ,  ,  •  61 


LESSON    XVIII. 

72.  Declension  of  the  demonstrative  pronouns  este,  ese,  aqud,         .          .  .66 

78.  Esie,  how  used,      .....••••  66 

74.  Este,  ese,  forming  one  word  with  the  adjective  otro^        .          •          •  .67 

75.  The  demonstrative  pronouns  used  as  neuter,  .....  67 
78.  The  former  and  the  latter,  translated  by  aqud  and  este,  .  .  -  .67 
T7.  That  of,  that  who,  or  that  which,  translated  hYelde,elqm,            .          .  67 

78.  English  personal  pronouns  rendered  in  Spanish  by  demonstrative  pronouns,     67 

79.  Aqui,  ahi,  oca,  aUd,  how  employed,     .       .          .          .          •          •  .     6» 


LESSON    XIX. 

80.  Para  and  ;?or,  how  they  diflTer,    .......  TO 

81.  Entre,  its  meaning,       .........  "73 

^    Hasta^  its  meaning,          . 73 


LESSON    XX. 

83.  Tanto  and  cuanto,  when  they  lose  the  last  syllable,         .  .  .  .77 

84.  Comparison  of  equality,  how  formed,    ......  77 

85.  Cuan  may  be  employed,          ........  77 

86.  Comparison  of  superiority,  how  formed,         .....  77 

87.  Comparison  of  inferiority,      ........  77 

88.  Mayor,  menor,  m^or,  peor,  are  already  in  the  comparative  degree,           .  77 

89.  Than,  translated  by  de  and  que,        .......  78 

90.  Comparison  relating  to  nouns,  verbs,  and  adverbs.     ....  78 


LESSON    XXI. 

91.  Superlatives  ending  in  est,  or  formed  by  most,  how  translated,             .  .     82 

92.  3fost,  or  most  of,  when  translated  by  la  mayor  parte,  or  by  mas,     .           .  83 

93.  In,  preposition,  when  translated  hy  de,       ,           .           .           .           .  .83 

94.  Superlatives  formed  by  very,  most,  etc.,  when  formed  in  Spanish  by  muy  and 

when  by  isim/),    .........  83 

95.  Adjectives  drop  the  last  vowel  on  taking  the  termination  isimo,          .  .     83 

96.  Other  superlatives  ending  in  errimo,     ......  83 

97.  Adjectives  which  change  their  endings  before  the  termination  isimo,  .  .     83 

98.  Superlatives  in  isimo  irregularly  formed,         .....  84 

99.  Irregular  comparatives  and  superlatives,    .          .          .          .          .  .84 

— .  These  make  also  a  superlative  in  isimo,           .....  84 

— .  Also  with  muy,  and  a  comparative  with  mas  or  rTienos,    .          .          .  .84 

100.  Substantives  used  adjectively  admit  the  degrees  of  comparison,    .          .  84 


LESSON     XXII. 

101.  Ser  and  estar,  the  distinction  between  them, 

102.  "  "       their  employment, 


CONTENTS.  XI 

LESSON    XXIII. 

V.VL*  PAOI 

103.  Ihiture  simple,    ..........     96 

IW.  The  definite  article  used  with  numerals,  indicating  the  hour  of  the  day,  .  96 

105.  Evening  and  night,  translated  by  noche,      .  .  .  .  .  .96 

106.  The  conjunction  si,  when  it  governs  the  subjunctive,  and  when  the  indica- 

tive, ..........  90 


LESSON     XXIV. 

107.  Compound  future,        .........    100 

108.  Acabar  de,  its  meaning,    ........  100 

— .    N.  B.— How  the  pupil  may  learn  a  great  number  of  words  with  little  or  no 

difficulty,  101- 

109.  Nouns  ending  in  tion  are  the  same  in  Spanish,  changing  the  letter  t  into  c,       101 

110.  The  days  of  the  month  are  counted  by  the  cardinal  numbers,  preceded  by  the 

article,  ..........    101 


LESSON    XXV. 

111.  Saber  and  conocer,  how  they  differ,         .           .....  107 

112.  Aun,  ya,  todaiyh,  their  different  meaning  and  uses,  .  .  .  .107 
— .  Once,  twice,  &c.,  translated  by  una  vez,  dos  veces,  &c.,  .  .  .  107 
— .  Mzedo,  valor,  &c.,  take  the  preposition  de  after  them,      .          .          .  .107 

11.3.  To  be  afraid,  to  be  thirsty,  &c.,  how  translated,          ....  107 

114.  Jamas  and  nunca,  how  used,  ........    107 


LESSON    XXVI. 

115.  Pronoun  subject,  or  nominative,  ......  112 

116.  Two  objective  cases  of  the  personal  pronouns,  how  used,         .  .  .113 

117.  The  objective  case,  when  not  preceded  by  a  preposition,  is  affixed  to  infini- 

tives, gerunds,  &c.,        ........  113 

118.  When  the  verb  drops  the  final  letter  followed  by  nosoros,        .  .           .    113 
— .  The  reason  of  this,            ........          113 

119.  When  the  objective  case  may  follow  the  verb,       .  .          .          .          .113 

120.  When  the  objective  may  be  placed  before  the  first  verb,  or  after  the  second,      113 

121.  Prepositions,  when  expressed,  always  govern  the  second  objective  case,       .    113 

122.  Mi,  ti,  si,  when  preceded  by  con,  .          .          .          .          .          .Hi 

123.  Entre,  how  used,  .........    114 

124.  The  second  objective  case  is  used  after  comparatives,  ...          114 

125.  When  the  first  objective  case  is  used,  .           .           .           .           ,           .114 

126.  The  objective  case  of  the  third  person  is  rendered  by  le,  les,  if  the  preposition 

to  govern  it  in  English, 114 


LESSON    XXVII. 

127.  The  third  person  rendered  in  Sp^-nish  hy  se,  .  .  .  .  .    119 

128.  The  object  of  the  verb  is  to  be  placed  last,  when  two  first  objective  cases 

occur  in  the  sentence,    ......  .119 

129.  Placed  first  when  the  object  of  the  verb  is  the  reflective  pronoun,       ,  .    12G 

130.  Both  of  the  objective  cases  belonging  to  the  same  person  used  together, .         120 

131.  The  expressions  a  ei  quiero,  a  ti  amo,  are  incorrect,  .  .         .120 


Xii  CONTENTS 


132.  The  pronouns  U,  la,  lo,  los,  and  las,  how  dibtingulshed  from  the  artldes  el,  la, 

lo,los,la8, ^20 

133.  The  adjective  mismo,  how  used,       .,..•..    120 

LESSON    XXVIII. 

134.  When  the  imperfect  is  used,        .......  125 

135.  When  the  pluperfect  is  used,  ........    126 

136.  How  the  expressions  to  have  just  and  to  be  just  are  translated  before  a  past 

participle, ^26 

LESSON     XXIX. 

137.  The  preterit  anterior,  its  use, 130 

138.  Derivation  of  adverbs  of  manner  and  quality,  ....  131 

139.  How  adverbs  are  formed  from  adjectives,    .  .  .  .  .  .    131 

140     Adverbs  terminating  in  mente  admit,  like  adjectives,  the  degrees  of  compari- 

181 

141.  How  these  adverbs  can  be  substituted,       .  .  .  .  •  .131 

LESSON    XXX. 

142.  What  impersonal  verbs  are,        ....•••  ^^T 


143. 
144, 


Amanecer  and  anocher,  used  in  the  three  persona,          .          .          .  .137 

jEfofter  and /tocer,  and  other  verbs  used  impersonally,           ...  137 

145.    The  pronoun  it,  accompanying  impersonal  verbs,  not  translated,        .  .    138 

— .    Nouns  taken  in  a  definite  sense  require  the  article,    ....  138 

— .    Nouns  used  in  their  most  general  sense  take  the  article,           .          .  .138 

J46,    Names  of  nations,  countries,  mountains,  &c.,  take  the  article,      ,          ,138 
147,    Nations,  countries,  and  provinces,  when  preceded  by  a  preposition,  do  not 
take  the  article,         ,..••'••* 
— .    Names  of  some  places  that  always  take  the  article 


138 
138 


LESSON    XXXI 


148 
144 


148.  Gttstar,  Bignifying  to  give  pimmre  to,  hocused,  .... 

149.  G^^^ar,  followed  by  the  preposition  rfe,  .  -  •  •  ^^ 

152.    The\eThpesar,vfhenmiiaams  to  regret, 


LESSON    XXXII 


149 


163,    How  the  passive  voice  is  ^"^^^^  ,  \^  ^,,i„  tbe  present  "and  im'perfeci 

154.  When  the  passive  form  is  used  with  tne  vero  set  iu  k,     i'  ^^^ 

tenses  of  the  indicative,  •  •  •  '  *     ,     '  haq 

155.  When  the  preposition  d.  or  por  is  to  be  used  after  passive  verbs,  ^     '     .     '  1^ 

156.  Passive  voice  formed  by  ^e,         •  •  '        /  '  '  .150 

157.  When  the  passive,  formed  with  ^€,  is  to  be  preferrca,      . 


LESSON    XXXIII. 
168.    Elective  verbs,  what  they  are,     . 


165 


CONTENTS.  XIU 

BULB  PAOB 

159.  When  are  the  verbs  made  reflective  ?          .          .  ,          .          .          .156 

160.  When  a  verb  denotes  reciprocity^  how  it  is  conjugated,  ...          156 


LESSON    XXXIV. 

161.  Which  are  the  irre^lar  verbs, 161 

162.  Verbs  which,  although  they  undergo  slight  changes  in  their  radical  letters, 

are  not  to  be  considered  as  irregular,            .....  161 
163, 164.    Verbs  which  change  i  into  y,      .          .          .          .          .           .          .162 

165.  How  the  irregular  verbs  are  divided,     ......  162 

166.  What  is  to  be  observed  relative  to  the  object  of  the  verb  pagar,         .          .  163 


LESSON    XXXV. 

167.  Irregularity  of  the  verb  acostar,  .......  168 

168.  Imperative  mood,  when  used,  .......    168 

169.  The  s  of  the  first  person  plural,  and  the  d  of  the  second,  suppressed  before 

nosaxidos,  ...  ......  168 

170.  The  subjunctive,  used  when  the  imperative  is  negative  in  English,     .  .    168 

171.  The  future  of  the  indicative,  used  for  the  imperative,  ...  168 

172.  Adjectives  ending  in  ous,  how  rendered  into  Spanish,     .  .  .  .168 

173.  Nouns  and  adjectives  ending  in  Englie'h  in  ic  or  iccU,  how  rendered  into 

Spanish,    ..........  169 

LESSON    XXXVI. 

174.  Irregiilarity  of  the  verb  tnoKer,  •  .  .  .  .  173 

175.  Se,  as  the  Spanish  indefinite  personal  pronoun,         .  .      *    ,      *    .      *    173 

176.  The  pronoun  se,  in  its  four  functions,  .  .  .'.'.'  174 

177.  Nouns  ending  in  English  in  «y,  how  rendered  into  Spanish       *  *  174 

178.  Doler,  how  used,  ...  *^         '  '  *  .'* 

LESSON    XXXVII. 

179.  Irregularity  of  the  verb  a<fen(?er,  ,  .  ^^ 
180,181,182,183.    Subjunctive  Mood,  when  UBed  in'spanish,  .    '      .'          '         iso 

184.  Present  tense  of  the  subjunctive  «-  »  '  '    ^Z 

185.  Perfect  tense,     .  .  ' l^ 

•••.....    181 

LESSON    XXXVIII. 

isa    Present  Participles,  . 

187.     Oerunds,  .  .  ^ ^^^ 

1^'    ^.^ '^^'^^^^^^^^'l^t*^  the  gerund  in  Spanish,  '    .*.'.*.*  iS 
iby.    When  m  English  the  present  participle,  preceded  by  a  preposition,  is  used 

how  rendered  into  Spanish ;,87 

190.  The  infinitive  used  as  a  verbal  noun,    .          .          .*.*.'  187 

191.  The  infinitive  governed  by  an  other  verb,  how  rendered  into  English,     '      .  187 

LESSON   XXXIX. 

192.  Irregularity  of  the  verb  pedir, jgg 

193.  The  usual  forms  of  salutations,        .  .  .    *      .    *      .     *     .    *      .    192 


XIV  CONTENTS. 

LESSON    XL. 

194.  Conducir,  its  Irregularity,            .......  197 

195.  iSegun  as  a  preposition  and  an  adverb,        .          .          .          ,          .  .198 

196.  CoUective  nouns,    .........  198 

LESSON    XLI. 

197.  Defective  verbs  podrir,  placer,  &c.,  .          .          .          .          .          .  .903 

198.  Yacer,  its  use,        .........  203 

199.  Soler,  its  use, 203 

200.  Desde,  its  meaning  and  use,        .......  203 

201.  Contra,  rendered  into  English  by  against,  .          .          .          .          .  .204 

202.  Sobre,  its  signification,      ........  204 

203.  7'ms,  its  meaning,       .........    204 

204.  Tlie  conjunction  pues,  its  use,     .......  204 

LESSON    XLII. 

305.  Conjunctions,  their  classification,      .          .          .          .          .          .  .209 

206.  What  is  to  be  observed  in  relation  to  the  government  of  conjunctions,    .  210 

207.  Some  conjunctions  that  govern  the  subjunctive  mood,    .          .          .  .210 

208.  Compound  conjunctions  which  require  the  infinitive  mood,           .          .  210 

209.  Compound  conjunctions  which  require  the  indicative,    .          .          .  .210 


LESSON    XLIII. 

210.  Imperfect  and  pluperfect  of  the  subjunctive,    .....  215 

211.  How  to  render  into  Spanish  the  auxiliaries  maj/,  might,  can,  could,  will, 

would,  and  shotdd,    .........    217 

212.  What  the  imperfect  subjunctive  denotes,         .....  217 

213.  What  the  pluperfect  denotes, 217 

ESSON    XLIV. 

214.  Augmentative  and  diminutive  nouns,   ......  fi2S 

215.  Irregular  terminations  of  certain  diminutives,      .  .  .  .  .294 

216.  Diminutives  may  be  formed  from  adjectives,  participles,  gerunds,  and  ad- 

verbs,      ..........  234 

217.  Some  of  the  primitive  words  do  not  admit  all  the  diminutive  terminations,  .    224 

218.  There  are  derivatives  which,  although  they  appear  to  be  augmentatives  or 

diminutives,  are  not  so,  .......  S2S 

LESSON    XLV. 

219.  The  fhture  simple  of  the  subjunctive,         .  .  .  .  .  .230 

220.  How  the  present  of  the  subjunctive  may  be  substituted  by  the  future,     .  230 

221.  The  future  compound,  .........    890 

222.  The  compound  present  of  the  subjunctive  may  be  Babstitated  by  the  future 

compound,  .........  SSI 

828.    What  is  to  be  observed  in  order  not  to  misapply  the  imperfect  and  plu- 
perfect, ..........    881 

194.    Gtovemment  of  the  fhture  simple  and  compound  fhtnre  of  the  subjunctive 

mood,       ..........         SSI 


CONTENTS.  XV 

LESSON   XLVI. 
226-226.    Inteijections, 237 

LESSON    XLVII. 

227.  Use  of  the  article,  .........  242 

228.  The  definite  article  used  with  common  nouns  taken  in  a  general  sense,        .    242 

229.  The  article  before  the  names  of  the  four  parts  of  the  globe,  names  of  empires, 

kingdoms,  &c.,    .........  243 

230.  Nouns  of  measure,  weight,  &c.,  when  they  require  the  article,            .  .243 

231.  The  article  repeated  before  every  noun  enumerated,            ...  243 

232.  The  definite  article  used  before  nouns  indicating  rank,  oflace,  &c.,      .  .    243 

233.  Used  instead  of  the  possessive  adjective,         .....  244 

234.  Used  as  in  English,  before  nouns,  taken  in  a  particular  or  definite  sense,  .    ^4 

LESSON    XLVIII. 

235.  Correspondence  of  the  tenses  with  each  other,  ....  249 

236.  When  the  determined  verb  is  put  in  the  Infinitive,  .  .  .  .250 

237.  When  the  determining  verb  is  ser^  or  any  impersonal  verb,  and  the  governing 

verb  has  no  subject,      ........  250 

238.  Put  in  the  subjunctive  when  the  determining  verb  has  a  nominative,  .  .  251 

239.  When  the  governing  verb  is  put  in  the  present  or  future  of  the  subjunctive,  251 

240.  Government  of  the  preterit  indefiBite,  and  compound  future  of  the  indica- 

tive,      251 

341.    The  nominative  being  the  same  for  both  verbs  and  the  governing  one  in  the 

indicative,  in  what  mood  the  determining  verb  is  put,     ...  252 

LESSON    XLIX. 
942,  243,  244,  245,  246,  247,  MS,  249,  250,  251,  252.    Derivative  nouns,        .  .    257 

LESSON    L, 
253.    Compound  nouns,  ..••■••* 
LESSON    LI. 


254.    The  natural  construction, 


264 


270 


255,  256.    Figurative  construction,      '          *          *          *          *          '  071 

257.    Which  of  the  two  constructions  Is  preferable, *^ 

LESSON    LII. 


258.  Past  Participles,     .....•••' 

259.  Agreement  of  past  participles,  .  .  .  •  •  •  * 

260.  When  a  verb  has  two  past  participles,  one  regular  and  the  other  Irregular, 

how  they  are  used,         ....•••* 

261.  Irregular  past  participles  that  may  be  used  with  the  verb  Mber, 

262.  Extraordinary  irregularity  of  the  verb  rrwrir,  .  .  . 

263.  Some  past  or  passive  participles  take  an  active  siernification,   . 

264.  Past  participles  may  sometimes  take  the  place  of  substantives,     .  .  278 

265.  Other  tenses  in  the  infinitive  mood, ^"^^ 


276 

277 
277 
277 
278 


XVI  CONTENTS. 


LESSON    LIII. 


5J66.    Idiomatic  expresBlons,  in  which  the  English  preposition  differs  In  meaning 

tirom  that  which  most  generally  constitutes  Its  proper  signification,    .         284 

LESSON    LIV. 

267.  Conjunctions  In  English  that  are  frequently  used  as  substitutes  for  other 

words,  how  rendered  into  Spanish,         ,  .  .  .  ,  .289 

268.  Spanish  conjunctions  used  as  substitutes  for  other  words, ...  289 
— .    Different  uses  of  the  conjunction  si,           ......    289 

LESSON    LV. 

269.  Some  of  the  principal  uses  of  the  conjunction^?^,         .  .  .  .396 

LESSON    LVI. 

270.  Epistolary  correspondence,  .......        801 


LESSON    LVII. 

271.  Observation  in  regard  to  verbs  that  change  their  meaning  according  to  the 

preposition  by  which  they  are  followed,       .....         310 

LESSON    LVIII. 

272.  The  verbs  to  be  glad  and  to  be  r^oiced,  how  translated,    .  .  .  .814 

273.  The  verbs  to  be  sorry  and  to  grieve,  how  translated,     ....        814 

274.  How  the  verb  caber  is  used,    .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .814 

LESSON    LIX. 

275.  Idioms  with  the  verbs  caer,  dar,  decir,  echar, .....        820 

LESSON    LX. 

276.  Idioms  with  the  verbs  entrar,  hacer,  ir,  Uevar,  mandar,  oler  a,  saber  4,  salir, 

servir,  tardar,  and  volver,     ...  ....    828 

LESSONS    LXI    TO    LXV. 
On  the  Principal  Idioms  of  the  Spanish  Language,  .  .  .  .  .  829  to  8B4 


General  observations  on  some  grammatical  and  idiomatical  peculiarities  of  the 
Spanish  language,  not  hitherto  treated  of  In  the  Grammar,  .  .  .  .365 

Recapitulation  of  all  the  rules  of  the  Grammar,  ....  866  to  888 

Complete  list  of  the  conjugations  of  all  the  Spanish  verbs,  .  .  .    883  to  438 

List  of  all  the  Irregular  verbs,       ........  439,  440 

VocABUiiABT,  containing  all  the  Spanish  words  used  In  the  grammar,  .    441  to  470 


ly 


PRELIMINARY  LESSON 

ON 

ORTHOGRAPHY  AND  PRONUNCIATION^. 


THE   AL.PHABET. 

The  Spanish  Alphabet  contains  twenty-seven  letters,  ex- 
clusive of  IT  and  W,  which  are  used  in  foreign  words  only, 
and  are  pronounced  as  in  English.  The  W  appears  in  a  very- 
few  historical  names,  like  Wamba,  Witiza.  The  letters  are  all 
of  the  feminine  gender,  and  theii'  names  and  pronunciation  are 
as  follows : 


A, 

a, 

ah. 

B, 

•h, 

lay. 

c, 

c, 

thayl 

CH, 

ch, 

chay. 

D, 

d, 

day. 

E, 

e, 

ay. 

F, 

f, 

ay-fay. 

G, 

g, 

hay. 

H, 

h, 

at-chay. 

I, 

h 

e. 

J, 

J, 

hotah. 

L, 

1, 

a-lay. 

LL, 

11, 

ail-yay. 

M, 

m, 

dymay. 

N, 

n, 

aynay. 

% 

fi, 

ain-yay. 

0, 

0, 

0. 

P, 

P, 

pay. 

Q, 

q, 

Jcoo. 

R, 

r, 

air-ray. 

s, 

s, 

ayswy. 

T, 

t. 

tay. 

XT, 

"'. 

00. 

V, 

V, 

my. 

X, 

X, 

ayJciss. 

Y, 

y, 

e-gree-ay'-gah. 

z, 

z, 

thay-tah. 

XVlll  PEELIMINAEY     LESSON. 

All  the  letters  are  invariable  in  sound,  except  c  and  ^,  which 
have  each  two  sounds,  as  will  be  seen  in  the  proper  place;  and 
every  letter  is  pronounced  in  all  positions,  except  the  A,  w^hich 
is  always  silent,  and  the  w,  which  is  not  sounded  in  the  sylla- 
bles ffue,  gui,  and  que,  qui. 

So  that,  with  a  few  exceptions,  the  Spanish  language  is 
pronounced  exactly  as  it  is  written,  and  does  not  present  those 
difficulties  met  with  in  the  orthography  and  pronunciation  of 
most  other  languages.  The  system  of  representing,  in  each  les- 
son, the  pronunciation  of  each  word  by  an  incorrect  orthography 
only  augments  the  doubts  and  labor  of  the  learner,  besides  in- 
creasing unnecessarily  the  size  of  the  work ;  one  lesson  of  an 
hour's  duration  with  a  native  Spanish  teacher  will  do  more  toward 
the  acquisition  of  a  pure  Castilian  pronunciation,  than  all  the 
works  that  could  be  written  on  the  subject. 

As  the  English  vowels  differ  in  sound  from  those  of  all 
other  languages,  great  care  ought  to  be  taken  to  learn  the 
true  sound  of  the  Spanish  vowels ;  they  are : 

a,        e,        i,        o,        u. 

ah,       ay,      c,        o,       oo. 

Y  is  sometimes  a  vowel.     (See  the  letter  Y.) 

A  has  an  invariable  sound,  as  heard  in  the  words  art,  father; 
as,  arte,  padre  (not  varying  as  in  the  English  words  fare,  fat, 
far,  fall,  swallow,  many,  courage,  mustard), 

E  has  the  sound  of  a  in  made ;  as,  hecho, 

I  sounds  like  the  first  e  in  even ;  as,  ingles.     (See  letter  3^.) 

O  is  pronounced  like  the  English  o  in  the  word  ode ;  as,  amo, 

XJ  sounds  as  the  English  u  in  bull;  as,  bula:  it  is  silent  in 
the  syllables  gue,  gni,  guerra,  except  it  has  a  diaeresis  marked 
over  it,  agiXero.     In  the  syllables  que,  qui,  it  is  always  silent. 


SOUNDS  OF  THE  CONSONANTS. 

B  has  the  same  sound  as  in  English ;  but  in  Castile  and 
Aragon  (where  in  other  respects  the  Castilian  language  is  most 


PEELTMINAEY     LESSON.  XIX 

purely  spoken  and  pronounced),  they  do  not  press  the  lips 
quite  so  close  as  the  English  do,  which  causes  it  very  frequent- 
ly to  be  confounded  with  the  v,  although  they  are  distinct 
letters,  and  should  be  pronounced  as  in  English. 

O,  when  followed  by  a,  o,  u,  or  any  consonant,  sounds  like 
/c ;  before  e  and  i,  it  sounds  like  th  in  thanks ;  as,  graclas,  lee- 
cion,  caballero.     (See  letter  Z.) 

CH  is  not  a  double  consonant,  but  a  letter  which,  although 
of  a  double  form,  has  by  itself  a  particular  denomination  and 
sound ;  it  is  pronounced  like  ch  in  chess ;  as,  chico,  chocolate. 
Formerly,  in  words  of  Hebrew  and  Greek  origin,  it  had  the 
sound  of  k,  when  the  vowel  following  it  was  marked  with  the 
circumflex  accent ;  as,  archmigel,  chimica :  but  this  practice  is 
obsolete,  and  such  words  are  now  written  arcdngel,  quimica. 

D  is  pronounced  like  the  English  <7,  except  when  found  be- 
tween two  vowels  or  at  the  end  of  words,  when  it  sounds 
softer  than  the  English  c?,  like  th  in  the  article  the^  but  not  like 
th  lisped,  as  in  thin,  as  Madric?  (like  the),  not  Madrid  (like 
thin)  ;  Ustec?  (like  the),  not  Ustes;  (like  thin).  This  lisped 
pronunciation  on  the  d  is  considered  vulgar. 

P  is  always  pronounced  like  the  English/,  and  is  now  used 
instead  of  jo/i ;  2^,^,  Filosofia,  Filadelfia,  iustesid  of  JPhilosophia, 
Philadelphia. 

G  has  two  distinct  sounds :  one,  before  a,  o,  u,  or  a  conso- 
nant, is  the  same  sound  as  in  English  go,  good',  as,  gato,  gra- 
cias :  before  e  and  i  it  has  another  strong,  guttural,  aspirated 
sound,  for  which  the  English  has  no  equivalent,  and  which 
even  a  very  strongly  aspirated  h,  as  in  the  words  hot,  holy,  does 
not  represent ;  as,  gente,  people ;  gesto,  gesture  ;  gigante,  giant. 

H  is  never  pronounced  in  the  Spanish  language ;  as,  hace, 
higo,  pronounced  as  if  no  such  h  were  there.  It  is,  properly 
speaking,  only  a  sign  used  to  mark  the  etymology  of  words, 
and  is  now  omitted  in  many  words  in  which  it  was  formerly 
used ;  as,  Crista,  Filosofia,  Teatro,  Pitdgoras,  Filadelfia. 


XX  PEELIMINAEY     LESSON. 

This  letter  is  always  written  before  the  words  that  begin 
by  ue  and  ^6,  and  here  it  has  a  very  soft,  almost  imperceptible, 
aspiration  ;  as,  huevo,  egg;  hueso^  bone;  huesped,  guest;  hierro, 
iron ;  hielo,  ice :  but  great  care  must  be  taken  not  to  pronounce 
it  too  strong,  as  the  lower  classes  of  certain  provinces  do,  pro- 
nouncing juevo,  or  guevo ;  jueso,  or  giieso,  which  is  considered 
vulgar. 

J  has  always  an  aspirated  guttural  sound,  like  that  which 
the  g  has  before  e  and  *,  and  is  written  before  the  vowels  a,  o, 
M,  instead  of  the  letter  ic,  which  formerly  represented  the  same 
aspirated  sound  ;  as,  Alejandro^  Alexander ;  Don  Quijote,  Don 
Quixote. 

li  always  sounds  as  in  English. 

LL  is,  like  the  cA,  a  single  letter,  although  of  double  form, 
which  therefore  cannot  be  divided  at  the  end  of  a  line.  It  has 
a  liquid  sound,  resembling  that  of  the  English  U  in  William, 
brilliant;  as,  Guillermo,  hrillante. 

M,  N,  and  P  have  the  English  sound. 

N  is  always  pronounced  like  ni  in  the  English  word  pinion. 

Q  is  pronounced  like  the  English  k  before  W6  and  ui,  in 
which  combination  alone  it  is  now  used ;  in  all  other  positions 
it  has  been  replaced  by  c ;  as,  cuando,  cama,  comer,  quien,  qiierer, 

R,  when  single,  is  sounded  soft,  as  in  English ;  as,  querido, 
oro:  and  when  double,  or  at  the  beginning  of  a  word,  and 
when  it  comes  after  /,  w,  or  5,  or  in  compound  words,  in  which 
the  second  begins  by  r,  it  is  pronounced  with  a  very  strong 
rolling  sound ;  as,  reloj\  malrotar,  enriquecer,  Israel,  prerogati- 
va,  maniroto,  cariredondo,  &c. 

S  is  pronounced  like  the  English  8  in  say\  as,  sahio,  -^jise; 
solo,  alone ;  senor,  sir. 

T  is  pronounced  as  in  English. 

V  has  the  sound  of  the  English  v.     (See  letter  B.) 


PRELIMINAEY     LESSON.  XXI 

X  has  the  sound  of  the  x  in  the  English  word  tax\  as, 
exdmen^  extrangero.  It  no  longer  represents  its  former  guttu-' 
ral  sound,  as  has  been  observed.  (See  letter  J.)  Some  replace 
it  by  the  letter  «,  when  it  comes  before  a  consonant,  and  write 
estrangero  instead  of  extrangero.  The  grammar  of  the  Span- 
ish Academy  does  not  authorize  this  practice. 

Y  is  a  consonant  letter,  but  use  makes  it  serve  as  a 
vowel  when  it  stands  alone,  used  as  a  copulative  conjunction 
(meaning  and)  ;  it  is  also  used  instead  of  the  vowel  ^,  in  the 
combinations  «^,  ei^  ui  at  the  end  of  a  word ;  as,  verdegag,  reg, 
leg,  convog,  mug. 

When  used  in  its  proper  place,  that  is  to  say,  as  a  conso- 
nant, it  has  the  same  sound  in  Spanish  as  in  the  English  words 
goung,  gear. 

Z  has  always  the  sound  of  th,  as  heard  in  thank,  hath. 


SYL.L.ABLES. 


Such  syllables  only  will  be  noted  here  as  may  be  subject 
to  doubt  as  to  the  pronunciation  and  orthography. 


ca, 
kah. 

que, 
Tcay. 

qui, 
lee. 

CO, 

ho. 

cu, 
koo. 

za, 

thah. 

ce, 
thay. 

ci, 

thee. 

zo, 
tho. 

zu, 
tlioo. 

az, 
ath. 

ez, 

aith. 

iz, 

eeth. 

oz, 
oth. 

uz, 
ooth. 

S^ 

gue, 

g"i, 

go, 

g^» 

gah. 

gay. 

ghee. 

go. 

goo. 

ja, 
hah. 

ge, 
My. 

hee. 

jo, 
U. 

J", 
hoo. 

ya, 

ye. 

yi. 

yo. 

yii. 

This  sound  cannot  be 

properly  repre8eBt*^-d 

in  English, 

(See  letter  T). 

cha, 
tchah. 

che, 
tchay. 

Chi, 

tehee. 

cho, 
tcho. 

chu, 
tchoo. 

XXll  PEELIMINAEY     LESSON, 


Ua, 

Ue, 

) 

m, 

Uo, 

Un, 

lyah. 

lyay. 

lyee. 

ly'o. 

lyoo. 

na, 

fie, 

> 

fii, 

DO, 

flu, 

nydh. 

nyai. 

7iy«. 

nyO, 

nyoo. 

cua, 

cue, 

cui, 

cuo, 

Tcwah 

kway. 

ifct^^. 

hwo. 

gua, 

giie, 

gtli, 

gao, 

gwah. 

gway. 

DIP] 

P'MJ^. 

gwo» 

HTHOXGS. 

ai, 

as  in 

dabais, 

dah'-hah-eess. 

Yon  gave. 

ay, 

(I 

hay, 

ah'-e. 

There  is. 

au, 

u 

pawsa, 

pah'-oo-sa. 

Pause. 

ei, 

a 

veis, 

vai'-eess. 

You  see. 

ey. 

u 

%, 

lai'-e. 

Law. 

ea, 

u 

linea, 

U'-nai-a. 

Line. 

eo, 

ii 

virgfneo, 

teer-he' -nai-o. 

Virginal. 

eu, 

i( 

dewda, 

dai'-oo-da. 

Debt. 

ia, 

i( 

gracia, 

grah'-the-a. 

Grace. 

ie, 

(( 

cielo, 

the-ai'-lo. 

Heaven. 

io, 

(1. 

precio, 

prai'-the-o. 

Price. 

iu, 

ik 

ciwdad, 

the-oo-dath 

.', 

Citj. 

oe, 

u 

h6r6>^, 

ai'-ro-ai. 

Hero. 

oi, 

u 

sois, 

8o'-ee88. 

You  are. 

oy, 

u 

Yoy, 

To-e. 

I  go. 

ua, 

u 

{rsigua, 

frati-gwa. 

Forge. 

ue, 

il 

dwefio, 

doo-ain'-yo 

Owner. 

ui, 

a 

rwido, 

roo-e'-do. 

Noise. 

«y, 

(( 

mwi/, 

moo'-e. 

Very. 

uo, 

(( 

ard?/o, 
TRII 

ar'-doo-o. 

\, 

Ai-duous. 

•HTHOIVOS 

iai. 

1 

as  in 

L        prcc?Vig,                prai-t?ie-ah'-ee98. 

H 

(( 

vacms,                  mh-the-ai'-eess. 

uaU 

i( 

BRnti^itais,            mn 

-fe-fpraTi' -eess. 

vny, 

(t 

Tarnpvny,             pal 

i-raTi-girah 

'-f. 

uei, 

i( 

averigwtfts,            n^- 

mi-r^-gwai-eeM, 

twy, 

u 

bw^y, 

hwai-i. 

DE  TOEI^OS^S 

SPANISH   GRAMMAR 


LESSOISr    I. 

REGULAR  YERBS.— First  Conjugation, 
Eabl-ax,  |  To  speak. 


INDICATIVE  PEESENT. 

Yo  habl-0. 

I  speak. 

Tti  habl-as. 

Thou  speakest. 

El  or  ella  habl-a. 

He  or  she  speaks. 

Usted  (Y.)  habl-a. 

You  speak. 

Nosotros,  or    )  ,   , , 
Nosotras,        [taW-amos. 

"We  speak. 

Yosotros,  or    )      ,,    . 
Yosotras,        [  ^^^^■^^^• 

You  speak. 

Ellos,  or  ellas,  habl-an. 

They  speak. 

Ustedes  (Yds.)  habl-an. 

You  speak. 

Si  (adverb). 

Yes. 

No      " 

No,  or  not 

Sefior. 

Sir. 

COMPO 

3ITI0N. 

iHablaV.? 

Do  you  speak  ? 

Si,  aenor,  yo  hablo. 

Yes,  sir,  I  speak. 

i  Hablan  Yds.  ? 
1 

Do  you  soeak  ? 

LESSON     I, 


No,  senor,  ellas  hablan. 

^  Hablais  vosotras  ? 

No,  senor,  ellos  hablan. 

I  Habla  elk  ? 

No,  senor,  ella  no  habla. 

i  Hablas  tu  ? 

No,  senor,  ^1  habla. 

i  Habla  V.  ? 

Si,  senor,  hablo. 

I  Hablan  ellas  ? 

No,  senor,  no  hablan. 

6  Hablamos  nosotros  ? 

Si,  senor,  hablamos. 

I  Hablais  vosotras  ? 

Nosotras  no  hablamos. 


No,  sir,  they  speak. 

Do  you  speak  ? 

No,  sir,  they  speak. 

Does  she  speak  ? 

No,  sir,  she  does  not  speak. 

Dost  thou  speak  ? 

No,  sir,  he  speaks. 

Do  you  speak  ? 

Yes,  sir,  I  speak. 

Do  they  speak  ? 

No,  sir,  they  do  not  speak. 

Do  we  speak  ? 

Yes,  sir,  we  speak. 

Do  you  speak  ? 

We  do  not  speak. 


EXPLANATION. 

1.  Regular  Veebs. — All  the  verbs  of  the  Spanish  language 
have  their  endings,  in  the  infinitive  mood,  either  in  ar,  er,  or 
ir;  hence  their  classification  in  three  conjugations:  1st,  those 
ending  in  ar;  2d,  those  ending  in  er;  and  3d,  in  ir;  as,  habl-ar, 
aprend-er^  escrib-ir. 

2.  Roots. — The  letters  before  the  terminations  «r,  er,  iV,  in 
the  preceding  verbs,  are  hahl^  aprend,  escrlb,  and  are  called  the 
roots. 

3.  Terminations. — All  regular  verbs  of  the^r^f  conjugation 
vary  the  endings  in  their  respective  tenses,  so  as  to  correspond 
with  those  of  the  A^erb  hahl-ar;  all  those  of  the  second  conjuga- 
tion correspond  to  the  terminations  of  ap)'e7id-er ;  and  all  those 
of  the  third  correspond  to  escrib-ir. 

Consequently,  when  the  student  has  learned  how  to  conju- 
gate one  of  the  regular  verbs  of  each  conjugation,  lie  can  con* 
jugate  all  the  regular  verbs  of  the  Spanish  language  (about 
8,000).  For  this  reason  we  recommend  the  scholars  to  devote 
|;beir  attention,  in  the  Jirst  place,  to  committing  to  memory  the 
different  moods  and  tenses  of  these  three  model  verbs.  They 
will  be  found  complete  at  the  end  of  the  book. 

The  terminations  of  the  verbs  being  diffiirent  for  each  per- 
son, as  well  in  the  plural  as  in  the  singular  number,  the  nomina- 
tive pronouns  are  ordinarily  dispensed  with,  and  are  only  used 


LESSON     I.  3 

i 

to  give  emphasis  ;  except  the  pronoun  ZTsted^  which  must 
always  be  expressed. —  Usted,  meaning  You,  is  a  contraction 
from  vtcestra  merced.  Your  Honor ;  and,  being  a  title,  its  omis- 
sion would  be  considered  impolite. 

4.  You. — In  addressing  an  individual  in  Spanish,  the  third 
person  is  used  with  the  pronoun  Usted:  as,  Usted  hahla,  you 
speak ;  the  second  person  is  employed  only  in  speaking  to  rela- 
tives or  intimate  friends. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  ^Hablan  ellas?     Si,  sefior,  ellas  hablan. 

2.  I  Hablais  vosotros  ?     No,  sefior ;  ellos  hablan. 

3.  I  Hablamos  nosotras  ?     NTo,  sefior ;  ella  habla. 

4.  I  Hablais  vosotros  ?     No,  sefior ;  ^1  habla. 

5.  I  Habla  ella  ?    Si,  sefior,  habla. 

6.  2  Habla  61?    No,  sefior,  no  habla. 

7.  ^Hablas  tii?     Si,  sefior,  yo  hablo. 

8.  ^Hablais  vosotras?     Si,  sefior,  nosotras  hablamos. 

9.  I  Hablo  yo  ?     Si,  sefior,  Y.  habla. 

10.  ^  Habla  61?    No,  sefior,  no  habla. 

11.  ^No  hablan  ellos?     Si,  sefior,  ellos  hablan. 

12.  I  Habla  Y .  ?     No,  sefior,  yo  no  hablo. 

13.  ^No  habla  Y.?    No,  sefior,  yo  no  hablo. 

14.  ^No  hablan  ellas?     Si,  sefior,  hablan. 

15.  I  No  hablais  vosotras  ?     No,  sefior,  nosotras  no  hablamos. 

EXCERCISE. 

1.  Do  you  speak?    I  speak. 

2.  Do  they  speak  ?     Yes,  sir,  they  speak. 

3.  Dost  thou  speak?    No,  sir,  he  speaks. 

4.  Do  you  speak  ?     No,  sir,  we  do  not  speak. 

5.  Dost  thou  speak  ?    No,  sir,  I  do  not  speak. 

6.  Does  he  not  speak  ?    Yes,  sir,  he  speaks. 

v.  Do  you  not  speak  ?    No,  sir,  we  do  not  speak. 

8.  Does  she  not  speak  ?     No,  sir,  she  does  not  speak. 

9.  Do  we  not  speak  ?    Yes,  sir,  we  speak. 

10.  Do  they  {fern.)  not  speak?    No,  sir,  they  {fern.)  do  not  speak. 

11.  Do  we  {fern.)  not  speak?    Yes,  sir,  we  {fern.)  speak. 

12.  Do  you  speak?    No,  sir,  I  do  not  speak;  they  {fem.)  speak. 


LESSON     II, 


LESSON    II. 


MASOTTLnfE  NOrNS. 

FEMININE   NOUNS. 

Sefior  (Sr.). 
Oaballero. 
Sefiorito. 
Don.  (Dn.jOr 

Sir,  Mr.,  or 
Gentleman, 
Young  geni 
D.).  Mr.,  Esq. 

Emanuel. 

Lord. 
Sir. 
ieman. 

Sefiora  (Sra.).     Madam,  or  Mrs. 

Lady,  or  My  Lady. 
Sefiorita  (Srita).  Miss,  or  younglady. 
Dofia  (Da.)         Mrs. 

Manuel. 

Espafiol. 

Ingl6s. 

Frances. 

Spanish. 
English. 
French. 

Luisa.                Louisa. 

Aleman. 

German. 

COMPO 

3ITI0N. 

Sefiorita,  ^  habla  Y.  espanol  ? 
Sf,  senor,  bablo  espanol. 
Luisa,  ^  hablas  frances  1 
No,  senor,  no  hablo  frances. 
6  Hablan  Vds.  ingl6s  ? 
Hablamos  ingles. 
l  Hablan  alios,  6  ellas,  frances  ? 
Sefiora,  i  habla  V.  espanol  ? 
Don  Manuel,  ^  habla  V.  aleraan? 
Caballero,  i  habla  V.  espanol  ? 
Sefiorita  Luisa,  i  habla  V.  frances  ? 


Do  you  speak  Spanish,  Miss  ? 
Yes,  sir,  I  speak  Spanish. 
Louisa,  dost  thou  speak  French  ? 
No,  sir,  I  do  not  speak  French. 
Do  you  speak  English  ? 
We  speak  English. 
Do  they  speak  French  ? 
Madam,  do  you  speak  Spanish  ? 
Mr.  Emanuel,  do  you  speak  German  ? 
Sir,  do  you  speak  Spanish  ? 
Miss  Louisa,  do  you  speak  French? 


EXPLANATION. 

B.  SeS^or. — ^This  word,  used  alone,  i.  e.,  in  the  vocative  case, 
implies  inferiority  on  the  part  of  the  speaker,  and  answers  to 
the  word  Xorc?  in  English.  It  is  used  in  addressing  God,  or 
the  King ;  or  by  servants  when  speaking  to  their  masters. 
With  an  equal,  the  proper  term  is  caballero,  gentleman  ;  never- 
theless, Sefior  may  also  be  used  among  equals :  in  the  affirma- 
tive, Si,  sefior,  or  in  the  negative,  no,  sefior,  in  which  cases  it 
means  sir ;  or  together  with  the  name  of  the  person  ;  as,  Sefior 
Kemp,  which  means  Mr.  Kemp. 

Sefiora,  Sefiorita. — In  addressing  ladies,  the  word  Sefiora, 
Madam,  and  Sefiorita,  Young  Lady,  or  Miss,  mny   bo   used 


LESSON     II.  6 

alone;  as,  Senora^  or  Senmnta,  ^hahla  V.  espanolf  Madam, 
or  Young  Lady,  or  Miss,  do  you  speak  Spanish  ? 

Senorito,  like  Senoi\  implies  inferiority  on  the  part  of  the 
speaker,  for  which  reason  it  is  seldom  used,  except  by  servants. 
6.  Don,  Mr.,  applies  to  gentlemen,  and  Dona^  Mrs.,  to  la- 
dies. These  terms  are  only  used  in  conjunction  with  the  Christ- 
ian names ;  as,  Don  Manuel^  Dona  Luisa^  and,  still  more  re- 
spectfully, Senor  Don  Manuel^  Senora  Dona  Duisa.  This 
title,  conferred,  in  old  times,  only  upon  members  of  noble 
families,  is  now  used  in  addressing  all  persons,  except  those 
of  very  humble  station,  and  is  written  in  abbreviation  thus, 
Dn.,  Da. 

7.  The  negative  no^  is  always  placed  immediately  before 
the  verb. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  ^Habla  y.  espafiol?    Hablo  espafiol. 

2.  Luisa,  ^hablas  frances?    Hablo  frances. 

3.  I  Habla  Manuel  ingles  ?    Habla  ingles. 

4.  Caballero,  ^  habla  V.  aleman?     Si,  sefior,  hablo  aleman. 

5.  I  Hablan  Vds.  frances  ?       Hablamos  frances. 

6.  I  Hablan  eUos  ingI6s?    No,  sefior,  no  hablan  ingles, 

7.  I  Hablan  eUas  espafiol  ?    No,  sefior,  no  hablan  espafiol. 

8.  ^ Habla  Luisa  frances?  No,  sefior,  no  habla  frances;  ella  habla 
espafiol. 

9.  I  No  habla  Manuel  aleman  ?  No,  sefior,  no  habla  aleman ;  61  Labia 
ingles. 

10.  I  Habla  Y.  espafiol  ?    No,  sefior,  no  hablo  espafiol. 
H.  ^  Habla  Manuel  espafiol  ?    Si,  sefior,  61  habla  espafiol. 

12.  Don  Manuel,  i  habla  Y.  frances  ?    No,  sefior,  no  hablo  frances. 

13.  Sefiora  Da.  Luisa,  ^ habla  Y.  espafiol?    No,  sefior ;  hablo  ingles. 

14.  Sefiorita  Da.  Luisa,  ^ habla  Y.  frances?    Yo  hablo  frances. 
i5.  Caballero,  i  habla  Y.  aleman  ?    No,  sefiorita,  hablo  espafiol. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Do  they  speak  French?    They  speak  French. 

2.  Do  you  speak  English  ?     "We  speak  English. 

3.  Do  they  speak  Spanish  ?     No,  madam,  they  do  not  speak  Spanish. 

4.  Sir,  do  you  speak  German  ?    Yes,  madam,  I  speak  Gennan. 

5.  Does  Emanuel  speak  French?    No,  sir;  he  speaks  English. 


6 


LESSON     III. 


6.  Do  you  speak  Spanish  ?    No,  sir,  I  do  not  speak  Spanish. 

7.  Does  not  Louisa  speak  German  ?    No,  sir,  she  does  not  speak  Ger- 
man ;  she  speaks  French. 

8.  Emanuel,  dost  thou  speak  EngUsh  ?    I  speak  English. 

9.  Does  Louisa  speak  Spanish  ?     Yes,  sir,  she  speaks  Spanish. 

10.  Do  you  speak  French  ?     No,  sir,  I  speak  English. 

11.  Sir,  do  you  speak  French?    No,  sir. 

12.  Miss  Louisa,  do  you  speak  Spanish  ?     Yes,  madam. 

13.  (Don)  Emanuel,  do  you  speak  English?     Yes,  sir,  I  speak  Eng- 
lish. 

14.  Do  we  speak  Spanish?    We  do  not  speak  Spanish;   we  speak 
French. 


LESSON    III 


Eatudi-Qi. 

To  study. 

Estudi-o. 

I  study. 

Estudi-as. 

Thou  studiest. 

Estudi-a. 

lie  studies. 

Estudi-amcs. 

We  study. 

Estudi-aia. 

You  study. 

Estudi-an. 

They  study. 

El  {masc.  sing.),^ 

/              . 

The. 

Y  or  6.  (i  '  ^.C 

.)M**-f*'^ 

z . 

And. 

Qu6  {interrogative  pronoun). 

What  or  which. 

Pero,  sino.^,   ■  c 

But. 

Bien  {adverl). 

WeU. 

Mai        " 

Badly. 

( 

ADJECTIVES. 

Espanol. 

Spaniard. 

Ingles. 

Englishman. 

Frances. 

Frenchman. 

Aleman. 

German. 

Americano. 

American. 

MASCULINE  NOUNS. 

FEMININE  NOUNS. 

aXv 


Alejandro.    Alexander. 


I  Margarita.     Margaret. 


LESSON     m, 


COMPOSITION. 


I  Estudia  V.  espanol  ? 

No,  senor,  el  Frances  estudia  espanol ; 

pero  yo  estudio  ingles. 
i  Qu6  estudia  el  Americano  ? 
Estudia  espanol  y  frances. 
Alejandro,  ^  estudias  frances  y  aleman  ? 

No,  senor,  estudio  espanol  e  ingles. 
Manuel  no  estudia  sino  frances. 
I  Qu6  hablan  ellos  sino  espanol  ? 
I  Habla  bien  ingles  el  Espanol  ? 
No,  senor,  el  habla  el  ingles  mal,  pero 
habla  bien  el  espanol. 


Do  you  study  Spanish  ? 

No,  sir,  the  Frenchman  studies  Spanish ; 

but  I  study  English. 
What  does  the  American  study  ? 
He  studies  Spanish  and  French. 
Alexander,  do  you  study  French  and 

German  ? 
No,  sir,  I  study  Spanish  and  English. 
Emanuel  studies  but  (only)  French. 
What  do  they  speak  but  Spanish  ? 
Does  the  Spaniard  speak  English  well  ? 
No,  sir,  he  speaks  English  badly,  but 

speaks  Spanish  well. 


EXPLANATION. 

8.  Y. — The  conjunction  y  is  changed  into  ^  when  the  fol- 
lowing word  begins  with  i  or  A^;  as,  espanol  'e  ingles^  Spanish 
and  English  ;  algodon  'e  hilo^  cotton  and  thread. 

9.  Que,  interrogative  pronoun,  is  written  with  an  accent, 
to  distinguish  it  from  que,  relative  pronoun,  or  conjunction. 

10.  Sino. — When  we  translate  hut  into  Spanish,  we  must 
first  ascertain  its  meaning;  because  this  conjunction  is  used  in 
English  to  express  many  very  different  things.  In  Spanish  it 
is  translated  sino,  when  it  is  used  in  antithesis,  that  is,  when  it 
means  except;  and  also  after  an  interrogation,  or  a  negation. 
The  verb  is  not  repeated  with  this  conjunction ;  as,  £l  no  habla 
sino  ingles.  He  speaks  but  (only)  English.  ^  Que  habla  sino 
espanol  ?     What  (else)  does  he  speak  but  Spanish  ? 

11.  Pero  is  used  when  it  is  not  preceded  by  a  negative, 
and  the  verb  is  repeated ;  as,  hahlo  espanol,  pero  no  hablo 
frances.     I  speak  Spanish,  but  do  not  speak  French. 

N.  B. — We  will  see  hereafter  that  but,  according  to  its  dif- 
ferent meanings  in  English,  must  bo  translated  by  different 
words  in  Spanish. 

12.  We  have  again  introduced  the  words  espanol,  ingVes, 
frances,  and  aleman  into  this  lesson,  because,  while  they  were 
given  before  as  substantives,  they  are  now  employed  as  adjec- 
tives. The  pupil  will  observe  that,  in  Spanish,  as  in  English, 
some  words  are,  at  different  times,  different  parts  of  speech ;  as, 


8  LESSON     III. 

El  Espanol  habla  Men  frances.  The  Spaniard  speaks  French 
well.  Here  the  word  Espanol  is  used  as  an  adjective, 
meaning  Spaniard-^  and  the  word  frances  as  a  substantive, 
meaning  the  French  language  \  hien  is  employed  as  an  ad- 
verb, meaning  well,  and  it  will  appear  hereafter  as  a  substan- 
tive, meaning  good.  Consequently,  the  learner,  before  trans' 
lating  a  word,  must  first  ascertain  the  part  of  speech  to  whict 
it  belongs. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  J  Habla  espafiol  Margarita?  Margarita  no  habla  espailol,  pero 
habla  ingles. 

2.  I  Habla  V.  espailol  ?     No,  seflor,  hablo  frances  y  aleman. 

3.  Alejandro,  i  hablas  ingles  ?     Si,  sefior,  hablo  ingles. 

4.  I  Hablan  Vds.  espailol  ?     Ilablamos  espailol  6  ingles. 
.  5.  I  Qu6  hablan  ellos  ?     Hablan  aleman. 

6.  Oaballero,  i  estudia  V.  espafiol  ?  Si,  sefior,  estudio  espafiol  6  in- 
gles. 

7.  I  Qu6  estudia  el  Aleman  ?    Estudia  espafiol. 

8.  jEstudian  Vds.  espafiol?    Estudiamos  frances  y  aleman. 

9.  I  Habla  bien  Luisa  el  ingl6s  ?     Habla  bien  espafiol  6  ingles. 

10.  ^ Habla  bien  Manuel  el  aleman?    No,  sefior,  habla  mal  el  aleman, 
pero  habla  bien  el  frances. 

11.  ^  Habla  bien  ingles  el  Americano?     Habla  bien  ingles,  pero  habla 
mal  el  espafiol. 

12.  Sefiora,  j estudia  V.  frances?   No,  sefior,  estudio  espafiol. 

13.  ^  Que  estudia  Alejandro  ?     El  no  estudia  sino  frances. 

14.  I  Qu6  hablan  ellos  sino  espafiol  ?    EUos  hablan  frances. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Do  you  study  German?    We  study  French  and  Spanish. 

2.  Does  Alexander  speak  Spanish  ?  Alexander  does  not  speak  Span- 
ish, but  he  speaks  English. 

3.  Margaret,  do  you  speak  French  ?  No,  sir,  I  speak  German  and 
Spanish. 

4.  ^Vhat  do  they  speak  ?  They  speak  Spanish  and  German,  but  do 
not  speak  French. 

6.  Do  you  speak  Spanish?  No,  sir,  I  do  not  speak  Spanish,  but  I 
speak  English. 

6.  Does  Louisa  speak  French  well?  She  speaks  French  badly,  but 
speaks  German  well. 


LESSON"     IV 


9 


7.  "What  do  you  study?     We  study  Spanish,  and  Alexander  studies 
French. 

8.  What  does  the  German  study  ?     He  studies  Spanish. 

9.  Does  he  study  well  ?     No,  madam,  he  studies  badly. 

-   10.  Do  you  speak  Spanish,  madam?     JSTo,  sir,  I  do  not  speak  Spanish, 
but  I  speak  English  and  German. 

11.  Does  the  Frenchman  speak  English  well?    No,  madam,  he  speaks 
English  badly,  but  the  Spaniard  speaks  English  well. 

12.  What  does  the  German  study  ?    He  studies  English,  and  the  Eng- 
lishman studies  German. 

13.  What  does  Alexander  study?    He  studies  French  only. 
^  14.  What  do  they  speak  but  Spanish  ? 

What  else  do  they  speak  but  Spanish ' 


y 


]r  They  speak 


French. 


LESSON    IV. 

Cora'pT-2X 

To  buy. 

Compr-o. 

I  buy. 

Oompr-as. 

Thou  buyest. 

Compr-a. 

He  buys. 

Compr-amos. 

We  bay. 

Compr-ais. 

You  buy. 

Compr-an. 

They  buy. 

Busc-an 

To  look  Tor,  to  seek. 

A. 

To. 

De. 

Of,  or  from. 

Al. 

To  the. 

Del. 

Of  the,  or  jfrom  the. 

Tin  irriasc,  sing.). 

A,  or  an. 

Libro. 

Book. 

Cuaderno. 

Copy-book. 

Papel.; 

Paper. 

Madera.            Wood. 

CabaJIo. 

Horse. 

Tintero. 

Inkstand. 

COMPO 

SITION. 

i  Qud  compra  Y.  ? 

What  do  you  buy  ? 

Compro  un  libro. 

I  buy  a  book. 

10  LESSON     IV 


I  Compran  Vds.  papel  ? 

^No,   senor,   no   compramos   papel, 

compramos  un  cuademo. 
Busco  al  Americano. 
^1  busca  el  libro. 
El  caballo  del  Frances. 
El  tintero  de  madera. 


Do  you  buy  paper  ? 

No,  sir,  we  do  not  buy  paper,  we  buy 

a  copy-book. 
I  look  for  the  American. 
He  looks  for  the  book. 
The  Frenchman's  horse. 
The  wooden  inkstand. 


EXPLANATION. 

13.  A. — The  preposition  d,  to.  Active  verbs  govern  their 
objectives  with  the  aid  of  the  preposition  d,  if  that  objective  be 
a  person  ;  as,  JBusco  al  Americano^  I  look  for  the  American ; 
Busco  el  papel,  I  look  for  the  paper. 

14.  De. — The  preposition  de,  of,  ov  from,  is  used  to  ex- 
press possession,  being  always  placed  before  the  possessor;  as, 
^l  caballo  del  Frances:  The  Frenchman's  horse.  It  is  also 
used  to  denote  the  material  of  which  any  thing  consists,  or  is 
made ;  as,  El  tintero  de  madera,  The  wooden  inkstand. 

15.  El. — The  article  el,  the,  is  used  to  determine  a  noun 
masculine  singular ;  as,  el  libro,  the  book. 

N",  B. — When  the  article  el  comes  after  the  preposition  d 
(to),  or  de  (of,  or  from),  the  e  is  suppressed,  and  the  two  words 
compounded  into  one ;  thus,  al,  del,  instead  of  d  el,  de  eL 

16.  Un. — Th«  indefinite  pronoun  un  is  used  before  mascu- 
line nouns ;  as,  un  ingles,  an  Englishman ;  un  caballo,  a  horse. 

N.  B. —  Uho  is  only  used  as  a  numeral  adjective. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  jQu6  compra  el  Frances?    Compra  el  caballo  del  Ingl6a 

2.  I  Qu6  comprais  vosotras  ?     Compramos  un  cuademo. 

3.  I  Qu6  compra  Y.  ?     Compro  un  libro. 

4.  I  Compran  Yds.  un  cuademo  ?  No,  sefior,  compramos  un  tintero 
de  madera. 

6.  I  Qu6  buscas  tti  ?    Busco  un  libro  espaflol. 

6.  I  Qu6  buscais  vosotros  ?    Nosotros  buscamos  un  tintero. 

7.  ^Qu6  buscan  ellas?    Buscan  el  papel. 

8.  Alejandro,  j buscas  el  papel?    No,  sefior,  busco  el  cuademo. 

9.  ^Estudia  Margarita  ingl6s?     No,  sefior,  estudia  francos. 


LESSON     IV.  11 

10.  I  Qu6  estudia  cl  Americano  ?    Estudia  espatiol. 

11.  gEstudian  Vds.  frances?     No,  sefior,  estudiamos  ingl^a. 

12.  ^Qu6  estudia  ella?    Estudia  aleman. 

13.  ^Que  compra  V.  ?     Corapro  el  caballo  del  Espafiol. 

14.  gQu6  compran  ellos?     Compran  un  tintero  de  madera. 

15.  ^Buscais  vosotros  al  Aleman?    No,  seiior,  buscamos  al  Frances. 

16.  ^Ilablais  vosotros  aleman?     Si,  senor,  hablamos  aleman. 
IT.  ^Hablan  ellas  espafiol?     No,  senor,  hablan  frances. 

18.  ^Que  estudia  V.  ?     Estudio  ingles  y  espafiol. 

19.  ^Compra  ella  un  libro?     Si,  sefior,  compra  un  libro. 

20.  gBusca  61  al  Frances?    No,  sefior,  busca  al  Aleman. 

21.  ^  Que  habla  el  Americano  ?     Habla  espafiol. 

22.  Manuel  i  qu6  estudias  tti  ?    Estudio  aleman. 

23.  I  Que  compran  ellos  ?     Compran  un  caballo. 

24.  I  Que  buscan  Vds.  ?    Buscamos  el  libro  espafiol. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  "What  do  they  look  for?    They  look  for  an  inkstand. 

2.  What  does  she  look  for  ?     She  looks  for  a  book. 

3.  Do  you  look  for  a  copy-book?     Yes,  sir,  we  (fern.)  look  for  a 
copy-book. 

4.  Do  they  (Jem.)  buy  a  wooden  inkstand?     Yes,  sir,  they  buy  a 
wooden  inkstand. 

5.  What  do  you  buy  ?    We  buy  the  Frenchman's  horse. 

6.  Do  you  buy  paper?     No,  sir,  I  buy  a  book. 

v.  Do  you  buy  a  copy-book  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  buy  a  copy-book. 
-   8.  What  does  the  Frenchman  study?    He  studies  German, 
9.  Do  you  study  Spanish  ?    No,  sir,  I  study  French. 

10.  What  does  she  study  ?     She  studies  English. 

11.  What  do  they  (fern.)  study?    They  study  Spanish. 

12.  Do  you  speak  French  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  speak  French. 

13.  Does  she  speak  English  ?    No,  sir,  she  speaks  German. 

14.  Do  you  speak  German  ?    No,  sir,  we  (fern.)  speak  English. 

15.  Do  you  look  for  the  Frenchman?    Yes,  sir,  I  look  for  the  French- 
man. 

16.  Do  you  look  for  paper?    No,  sir,  I  look  for  a  copy-book. 

17.  What  do  they  look  for?     They  look  for  a  book. 

18.  Do  you  look  for  the  German?    Yes,  sir,  we  (fern.)  look  for  the 
German. 

19.  Do  you  speak  French?    Yes,  sir,  I  speak  French. 

20.  What  does  Margaret  speak  ?     She  speaks  English. 


12 


LESSON     V. 


21.  What  do  they  buy?    They  buy  a  wooden  inkstand. 

22.  What  dost  thou  look  for?    I  look  for  a  horse. 

23.  What  do  you  study  ?     We  {fern.)  study  Spanish, 

24.  What  do  you  speak  ?    I  speak  English. 


LESSON    V. 


Necesitar,     ,      ^ 
Necesit-o.  -t/uu/-"^-^^ 
Necesit-as. 
Necesit-a. 


-M- 


To  need,  or  to  be  in  want  o£ 
I  need. 

Thou  needest. 
He  needs. 


Necesit-amos. 

Necesit-ais. 

Necesit-an. 

Mi. 

Su. 

Su  {n)  de  Y.,  or 

El  {n)  de  V. 


We  need. 
You  need. 
They  need. 


My. 

His,  her,  its,  their. 

Your. 


GENDER. 


El  papa. 

El  abogado. 

El  comerciante. 

El  lacre. 

El  polio. 

El  algodon. 
..^Eljabon. 
,n^    El  patiuelo. 
-  (/t«    El  zapatero. 


The  papa. 
The  lawyer. 
The  merchant. 
The  sealing-wax. 
The  chicken. 
The  cotton. 
The  soap. 
The  handkerchief. 
The  shoemaker. 


La  mamd. 
La  pluma. 
La  tinta. 
La  gramatica. 
La  gallina. 
La  seda. 
La  lavandera. 
La  camisa. 


COMPOSITION. 


The  mamma. 
The  pen. 
The  ink. 

The  grammar^  , 

The  hen.  Q^  ~y^  '^i^ 
The  sUk.  ^         ^ 
The  washerwoman.     . 
The  shirt,  fi^  -o^.f^ux. 


I  Necesita  el  abogado  la  pluma  ? 

Sf,  senor,  necesita  la  pluma  y  el  tintero. 

i  Qu6  necesita  comprar  la  lavandera  ? 

Necesita  comprar  jabon. 

i Necesita  cl  comerciante  mi  algodon? 


Does  the  lawyer  want  the  pen  ? 

Yes,  sir,  he  wants  the  pen  and  the  ink- 
stand. 

What  does  the  washerwoman  want  to 
buy? 

She  wants  to  buy  soap. 

Does  the  merchant  want  my  cotton  ? 


LESSON     V 


13 


Necesita  comprar  el  algodon  de  V.  y 

la  seda  del  Frances. 
6  Necesita  V.  su  pafiuelo  de  algodon  ? 
No,  senora,  necesito  su  pafiuelo  de  seda 

deV. 
i  Que  necesitan  Yds.  ? 
Necesitamos  un  polio  y  una  gallina. 


He  wants  to  buy  your  cotton,  and  the 
Frenchman's  silk. 

Do  you  want  your  cotton  handkerchief? 

No,  madam,  I  want  your  silk  handker- 
chief. 

What  do  you  want  ? 

We  want  a  chicken  and  a  hen. 


EXPLANATION. 

1 7.  Gender. — In  Spanish  all  nouns  are  either  masculine  or 
feminine ;  the  neuter  gender  is  only  applied  to  those  things  so 
indefinitely  used  that  their  gender  cannot  be  discovered. 

The  gender  of  nouns  may  be  ascertained  either  by  their 
signification  or  their  termination. 

Nouns  which  signify  males,  or  which  denote  dignities  or 
professions,  &c.,  applicable  to  men,  are  masculine;  and  those 
which  signify  females,  or  professions,  &c,,  applicable  to  women, 
are  feminine,  without  regard  to  their  terminations:  so  that, 
hombre,  man ;  caballero,  gentleman ;  polio,  chicken ;  zapatero, 
shoemaker;  ahogado,  lawyer,  are  masculine;  and  mitjer,  wo- 
man ;  senora,  lady ;  gallina,  hen ;  lavandera,  washerwoman, 
are  feminine. 

Nounds  ending  in  a,  d,  or  ion,  are  generally  feminine,  and 
those  ending  in  other  letters  are  masculine ;  as. 


't 


Papel. 
Tintero. 
:^^'Billete. 


Paper. 

Inkstand. 

Billet. 


Leccion. 

Lesson. 

Pluma. 

Pen. 

Ciudad. 

City. 

N".  B, —  Una  {indefinite  article)  is  used  before  feminine  nouns. 

To  facilitate  the  pupils  in  the  distinction  of  gender,  the  left- 
hand  side,  in  the  vocabulary,  is  reserved  for  masculine,  the 
right  for  feminine  nouns, 

18.  When  your  is  preceded  by  you,  it  is  sometimes  trans- 
lated by  Su ;  otherwise,  it  is  generally  rendered  by  el de  V., 

or  su de  V.':  as. 


V.  necesita  su  carta. 

/  Que  necesita  el  papd  de  V.  ? 

Necesita  su  libro  de  V. 


You  need  your  letter. 

What  does  your  father  need  ? 

He  needs  your  book. 


14  LESSONV. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  jNecesita  V.  mi  gramutica?    No,  sefior,  no  necesito  sa  gram^tica 
deV. 

2.  I  Necesita  ella  el  pafiuclo  de  seda?  Si,  sefior,  ella  necesita  el  pafiuelo 
de  seda. 

3.  I  Necesita  Y.  comprar  un  libro  ?    Necesito  comprar  un  cuaderno. 

4.  ^  Necesitan  ellas  el  lacre  ?     No,  sefior,  necesitan  el  pafiuelo  de  al- 
godon. 

6.  I  Que  necesita  comprar  el  abogado  ?    Necesita  comprar  una  pluma. 

6.  ^Qu6  necesita  comprar  la  lavandera?    Necesita  comprar  jabon. 

7.  I  Busca  V.  su  pafiuelo  ?     Si,  sefior,  busco  mi  pafiuelo. 

8.  I  Busca  V.  el  cuaderno  de  Manuel  ?    No,  sefior,  busco  el  cuaderno 
deV. 

9.  I  Habla  V.  bien  el  aleraan  ?    No,  sefiorita,  hablo  mal  el  aleman. 

10.  ^Estudian  Vds.  frances?     No,  sefior,  estudiamos  espafiol. 

11.  ^Compra  V.  un  caballo  ingles?     Si,   sefior,  compro  un  caballo 
ingl6s. 

12.  ^  Qu6  compran  ellos  ?     Compran  una  pluma  j  tinta, 

13.  ^Qu6  comprais  vosotras?    Nosotras  compraraos  un  pafiuelo.de 
beda. 

14.  ^Qu6  compra  la  lavandera?     Compra  jabon. 

15.  I  Busca  V.  k  mi  abogado  ?     Si,  sefior,  busco  al  abogado  de  V. 

16.  ^  Compra  la  lavandera  un  polio  ?     Compra  una  gallina. 

17.  i  Compra  jabon  el  comerciante?    No,  sefior,  el  comerciante  com- 
pra algodon. 

18.  I  Buscan  ellas  el  pafiuelo  de  V.  ?    Buscan  el  pafiuelo  de  V. 

19.  ^ Necesita  V.  hablar  al  abogado?    Si,  sefiora,  necesito  hablar  al 
abogado. 

20.  I  Necesita  V.  comprar  un  libro  ?    No,  sefior,  necesito  comprar  una 
pluma  y  papel. 

21.  J  Necesita  V.  estudiar  ingles?    Si,  sefior,  necesito  estndiar  ingles. 

22.  I  Qu6  necesitais  vosotras  ?    Necesitamos  comprar  lacre. 

23.  ^Necesita  V.  hablar  al  Frances?    No,  sefior,  necesito  hablar  al 
Aleman. 

24.  I  Qu6  necesita  Y.  ?    Necesito  un  pafiuelo  de  algodon. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  What  do  you  need  ?    I  need  a  book  and  paper. 

2.  Wbat  does  she  need  ?    She  needs  your  handkerchief. 

3.  Do  you  need  a  horse  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  need  an  English  horse. 

4.  What  do  you  need  ?    I  need  soap. 


LESSON     VI. 


15 


5.  Does  the  American  need  the  Spanish  book  ?     Yes,  sir,  he  needs  the 
Spanish  book. 

6.  Do  thej  need  a  lawyer  ?    Yes,  sir,  they  need  a  lawyer. 

7.  Do  you  buy  a  silk  handkerchief?     No,  sir,  we  {fem.)  buy  a  cot- 
ton handkerchief. 

8.  Do  you  look  for  the  Frenchman's  horse  ?    Ko,  sir,  I  look  for  the 
Enghshman's  horse. 

9.  Dost  thou  study  German  ?     No,  sir,  I  study  English. 

10.  "What  does  the  merchant  buy  ?     He  buys  cotton. 

11.  What  does  the  washerwoman  buy  ?    She  buys  a  hen  and  a  chickei? 
13.  Does  the  lawyer  buy  a  book  ?    No,  sir,  he  buys  paper. 

13.  Do  they  {fem,)  speak  well?    No,  sir,  they  speak  badly. 

14.  Do  you  speak  French,  sir  ?    No,  sir,  I  speak  English. 

15.  Do  yoH  study  much  {muclio)  ?     No,  sir,  we  study  very  Uttle  {poco). 

16.  Do  you  study  fast  {aprisa)  ?     No,  sir,  I  study  slowly  (despacio). 

17.  Do  you  buy  cotton  from  the  merchant?    No,  sir,  I  buy  silk  from 
your  brother  (hermano). 

18.  What  does  your  papa  need  ?      He  needs  the  lawyer's  book. 

19.  What  are  they  looking  tor  ?    They  are  looking  for  paper. 

20.  Do  you  need  a  copy-book?    No,  sir,  I  need  a  book. 

21.  Do  you  study  Spanish  ?     Yes,  madam,  I  study  Spanish. 

22.  Do  you  need  paper  and  pen  ?     Yes,  sir,  I  need  paper  and  pen. 

23.  What  do  they  need  ?     They  need  a  silk  handkerchief, 

24.  What  do  you  need  ?    I  need  an  Enghsh  horse. 


A" 


LESSON    VI. 


Aprend-er, 
Aprend-o. 
Aprend-es. 
Aprend-e. 

Aprend-emos. 

Aprend-eis. 

Aprend-en. 


To  leam. 
I  learn. 
Thou  leamest. 
He  learns. 

We  learn. 
You  leam. 
They  leam. 


Tender. 


To  sell. 


16 


r^ 


/,  i^^vO/C 


LESSON     VI. 
/   — 

Muy.   'yvx.ro  -J^                               Very. 

Mucho.                                               Much,  a  great  deal. 

Poco.         /)     ,      /  ^^                     Little. 

Aprisa.  C^-^       j^  f                      Quickly. 

Despacio.  cLoa^  ^jdi^ilz-  o  ■              Slowly. 

Estudioso.                       n 
Holgazan.  -Hjl  -p^  dA^^^^^ 

Studious. 
Idle. 

Hombre. 
Mucliacho. 
Padre.         t/ 
Hijo.-^-^^ 
Hermano. 


Man. 
Boy. 
Father. 
Son. 
Brother,     n  ^ 


Mujer.  '^^^^  -  '^^^^^^oraan. 
Muchacha.  Girl. 

Madre.  Mother. 

Hija.  Daughter. 

Hermana.  Sister. 


COMPOSITION. 


^  Aprende  muy  aprisa  el  muchacho  ? 

El  muchacho  estudioso  aprende  muy 
aprisa;  pero  el  muchacho  holgazan 
aprende  muy  despacio. 

^Aprenden  ingl6s  su  padre  y  su  her- 
mano de  V.  ? 

Sf,  senor,  y  mi  madre  y  mi  hermana 
aprenden  frances. 

i  Aprende  mucho  la  muchacha  ? 

No,  senor,  aprende  poco. 

^Aprenden  aprisa  su  hijo  y  su  hija 
deV.? 

No,  senor,  aprenden  despacio. 


Does  the  boy  learn  very  fast  ? 
The  studious  boy  learns  very  fast ; 
the  idle  one  learns  very  slowly. 


but 


Do  your  father  and  brother  learn  Eng- 
lish? 

Yes,  sir,  and  my  mother  and  sister 
learn  French. 

Does  the  girl  learn  much  ? 

No,  sir,  she  learns  little. 

Do  your  son  and  daughter  learn  fast  ? 

No,  sir,  they  learn  slowly. 


EXPLANATION. 

19.  The  teemination  of  \h^  first  person  in  the  present  in- 
dicative is  always  o  in  all  the  verbs  of  the  Spanish  language, 
to  whatever  conjugation  they  may  belong,  except  six  irregular 
verbs,  as  we  shall  see  in  future ;  so  that  the  only  difference  be- 
tween the  termination  of  the  second  and  first  conjugations  is 
the  changing  the  a  into  e  in  the  second  and  third  persons 
singular,  and  in  all  the  plural. 

20.  Muy  is  generally  translated  by  very  or  very  much ;  as 
mxcy  Men,  very  well ;  muy  bueno,  very  good,  &c. ;  but  it  can 


LESSON     VI.  17 

never  qualify  a  verb  nor  stand  alone  in  discourse ;  as,  Does 
he  speak  very  well  ?  Yes,  very.  ^  Habla  el  7nuy  bien  f  jSi, 
mucho. 

21.  Many  masculine  nouns  ending  in  o,  change  this  letter 
into  a  for  the  feminine ;  as, 


Hermano. 

Brother, 

Hennana. 

Sister. 

/     Hijo. 

Son. 

Hija. 

Daughter. 

Muchacho. 

Boy. 

Muchacha. 

Girl. 

CONYERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  ^Aprende  Y.  hien  elfrances?     No,  sefior,  aprendo  muy  mal  el 
frances. 

2.  I  Aprenden  ellas  aprisa  ?     No,  seilor,  aprenden  despacio. 

3.  I  Aprende  mucho  el  muchacho  holgazan  ?    No,  seiior,  aprende  muy 
poco. 

4.  I  Aprendeis  vosotros  aprisa  ?     Si,  seiior,  aprisa  y  bien. 

5.  g  Que  vende  el  hermano  de  su  padre  de  Y.  ?    Yende  algodon. 

6.  g  Yenden  eilas  papel  ?    No,  sefior,  venden  plumas  y  lacre. 

7.  I  Qu^  vende  Margarita  ?    Yende  una  gallina. 

8.  I  Yende  lacre  el  comerciante  ?    No,  sefior,  vende  papel. 

9.  I  Necesita  Y.  el  pafiuelo  de  su  hermana  ?    No,  sefior,  necesito  el 
pafiuelo  de  su  hija  de  Y. 

10.  ^Busca  su  mama  de  Y.  el  pafiuelo  de  seda?     No,  sefior,  husca  el 
pafiuelo  de  algodon. 

11.  ^Qu6  necesita  su  hija  de  Y.  ?  Necesita  hablar  al  hermano  de  Y. 

12.  ^  Necesita  la  muchacha  comprar  papel  ?    No,  sefiora,  necesita  com- 
prar  un  cuaderno. 

13.  g Habla  Y.  del  Frances?    No,  sefiorita,  hablo  del  Aleman. 

14.  I  Que  compra  su  padre  de  Y.  ?     Compra  el  caballo  del  hijo  del 
abogado. 

15.  I  Qu6  busca  Y.  ?    Busco  un  libro  y  una  pluma. 

16.  I Qu6  busca  la  muchacha?    Busca  el  jabon  de  la  hermana  de  Y. 

17.  g  Aprende  mucho  el  muchacho  estudioso?      Si,  sefior,   aprende 
mucho. 

18.  I  Aprende  Y.  su  leccion  de  frances  ?    No,  sefior,  aprendo  mi  lec- 
cion  de  aleman. 

19.  ^  Habla  bien  Don  Manuel  el  espafiol?    Si,  sefior,  habla  muy  bien 
el  espafiol. 

20.  ^Estudia  Y.  gramatica  inglesa?      No,   sefior,  estudio  gramatica 
francesa. 

21.  I  Compra  Y.  un  tiutero  y  papel  ?    No  compro  sino  un  tintero. 


18  LESSON     VI. 

22.  I  Busca  V.  d  mi  padre  ?    Si,  sefiorita,  busco  i  su  padre  de  V. 

23.  I  Necesita  "V .  coraprar  un  tiutero  ?    No,  sefiora,  necesito  hablar  i 
mi  hermana. 

24.  ^Necesitamos  nosotras  aprcnder  espafiol?    Si,  sefior,  necesitamos 
mucho  aprender  espafiol. 

EXERCLSK 

1.  Does  your  sister  learn  English  ?    Yes,  sir,  she  learns  English, 

2.  What  does  your  brother  learn  ?    My  brother  learns  Spanish. 

3.  Do  you  learn  quickly  ?     No,  sir,  we  learn  very  slowly. 

4.  Does  the  studious  boy  learn  well  ?    Yes,  sir,  he  learns  very  welL 

5.  What  does  your  brother  sell  ?     He  sells  cotton  and  silk. 

6.  Do  you  sell  paper  ?    No,  sir,  I  sell  sealing  wax  and  ink. 

7.  Do  they  (fern.)  need  a  French  book  ?    No,  sir,  they  need  a  copy- 
book, a  pen,  and  ink. 

8.  Do  you  need  the  English  grammar  ?    No,  sir,  I  need  the  Spanish 
grammar. 

9.  Do  you  want  to  speak  to  my  father  ?     Yes,  sir,  I  iTant  to  speak  to 
your  father. 

10.  Do  you  want  to  speak  to  my  sister's  son  ?    No,  sir,  I  want  to 
speak  to  the  Frenchman. 

11.  Does  he  want  to  buy  a  horse  ?    Yes,  sir,  he  wants  to  buy  a  horse. 

12.  Do  you  need  my  book?    No,  madam,  I  need  youi*  wooden  ink- 
stand. 

13.  Do  you  look  for  the  merchant?    No,  sir,  I  look  for  your  father. 

14.  Do  they  look  for  papa?    No,  sir,  they  look  for  the  lawyer. 

15.  Do  you  buy  a  book  ?    No,  sir,  we  buy  a  copy-book  and  paper. 

1 6.  Do  they  study  English  ?    Yes,  sir,  they  study  English. 

17.  Do  you  study  German,  sir?     No,  I  study  Spanish,  madam. 

18.  Do  you  speak  English  well  ?    No,  sir,  I  speak  English  badly. 

19.  Does  your  sister  speak  French  very  well?    No,  sir,  she  speaks 
very  little  French.  .  :>  ^i   ;  /-  < 

20.  What  does  your  father  speak  ?    'He  speaks  but  (only)  English. 

21.  Does  he  not  speak  German  ?    No,  sir,  he  does  not  speak  German. 

22.  Does  your  daughter  speak  to  your  sister  ?    Yes,  sir,  she  speaks  to 
my  sister. 

23.  Do  you  learn  very  quickly  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  learn  very  quickly. 

24.  Do  you  sell  your  book  ?    No,  sir,  I  sell  my  paper. 


LESSON     VII 


19 


LESSON 

Le-Q>v.  Ji^uu^e*^^^^^^ 
Le-o. 
Le-es. 
Le-e. 

Le-emos. 

Le-eis. 

Le-en. 

Comer.  .  JrU ■- ^^^-^yux^LA^' 
Beber.  4-CiA^~  'v-ccU^iJ 


MASCULINE  ADJECTIVES. 

Good,  ^^-uatx-^^-^-vu^ 
Handsome.   ^ 
Ugly.     -^c^yL-^O 
Little  or  small. 

Grande  {rn.  &/.)•     Large. 

Espafiol.       Spanish,  also  Spaniard. 

Americano.  American. 


Bueno. 
Hermoso. 
Feo. 
Pequeno. 


Pan. 
^  ^fudv-^  Pescado. 
^c>u>     Queso. 
■tJ-y^"^    Vino. 


r 


,'fc>^  Billete. 


Bread. 

Fisb. 

Cbeese. 

Wine. 

Billet  or  note. 


VII. 

To  read. 
I  read. 

Thou  readest. 
He  reads. 

We  read. 
You  read. 
Tbey  read. 

To  eat,  to  dine. 
To  drink. 

FEMININE   ADJECTIVES. 

Bucna.  Good.  ^  ^ 

Hermosa.  Handsome.  (^^--^^^^^-^Ji-w 

Fea.  Ugly. 

Pequciia.  Little  or  small.  ,       ^4 

Espafiola.        Spanish,  cu^i/i  -.a,**-*^ 
Americana.     American. 

Carne.  Meat.    ,    x/     p         ' 

Lecbe.  Milk.  ^^^-  (^4^c^^<y 

Agua.  Water.  coLi- ^aa^^^^ 

Cerveza.  Beer.  ti^a^A^  -X^  ^^ 

Carta.  Letter. 


COMPOSITION. 


\ 


I  Lee  V.  un  billete  ? 

No,  senor,  leo  una  carta. 

^  Que  come  el  Espafiol  ? 

Come  buen  pescado,  pero  come  njajla 

came. 
I  Beben  Vds.  vino  bueno  ? 
Bebemos  buen  vino  y  buena  cerveza. 
4  Que  compra  el  Americano  ? 
Compra  un  caballo  pequeno. 
I  Habla  V.  al  gran  hombre  ? 
No,  sefior,  hablo  al  hombre  grande. 
4  Que  vende  la  Francesa  ? 
Vende  hermosa  seda. 


Do  you  read  a  note  ? 
No,  sir,  I  read  a  letter. 
What  does  the  Spaniard  eat  ? 
He  eats  good  fish,  but  bad  meat. 

Do  you  drink  good  wine  ? 

We  drink  good  wine  and  good  beer. 

What  does  the  American  buy  ? 

He  buys  a  small  horse. 

Do  you  speak  to  the  great  man  ? 

No,  sir,  I  speak  to  the  large  man. 

What  does  the  French  woman  sell  ? 

She  sells  handsome  silk. 


20  LESSONVII, 


EXPLANATION. 


22.  Adjectives  terminating  in  o,  an,  or  on,  form  their 
feminine  termination  in  a.  Those  terminating  otherwise  are 
common  to  both  genders ;  as, 


El  muchacho  holgazan. 
La  muchacha  holgazana. 
El  hombre  comilon. 
La  mujer  comilona. 
El  hombre  feliz. 
La  mujer  feliz. 
La  gallina  buena. 


The  idle  boy. 

The  idle  girl. 

The  gluttonous  man. 

The  gluttonous  woman. 

The  happy  man. 

The  happy  woman. 

The  good  hen. 


Adjectives  signifying  nationality,  and  ending  in   a  conso- 
nant, take  an  a  to  form  their  feminine  terminations ;  as, 

Spaniard. 
Spanish. 
English  book. 


Espanol. 
Espanola. 
Libro  ingles. 
Gramatica  inglesa. 


English  grammar. 

Those  ending  in  o  change  this  letter  into  a ;  as, 

Americano.  I  American. 

Americana.  |  American. 

Adjectives  are  generally  placed  after  their  nouns ;  but  in 
poetry,  or  in  an  elevated  style,  and  even  in  conversation,  we 
place  many  before  the  noun.  Reading  and  practice  will  form 
the  ear  of  the  scholar  so  as  to  use  them  properly. 

Adjectives  used  metaphorically,  or  in  a  signification  differ- 
ent from  their  proper  one,  are  always  placed  before  ;  as, 

Un  gran  caballo.  |  A  great  horse. 

Some  adjectives  lose  their  last  letter,  or  syllable^  when  pre- 
fixed to  the  singular  masculine  noun ;  as. 


Mai  muchacho. 
Buen  libro. 
Gran  caballo. 


Bad  boy. 
Good  book. 
Great  horse,  &;c. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 


1.  ^Lee  Y.  nn  buen  libro?     Si,  scflor,  leo  un  libro  bueno. 

2.  ^Leemos  nosotros  bien  el  ingl6s  ?    No,  seflor,  leemos  mal  el  ingl^Si 
pero  leemos  bien  el  espaflol. 

3.  I  Bebe  V.  vino  ?    No,  scflor,  yo  btbo  agaa. 


LESSON^VII.  21 

4.  I  Qu6  beben  ellos  ?    Beben  cerveza. 

5.  I  Comeis  vosotros  queso  j  pan  ?    No,  sefior,  comemos  pescado. 

6.  I  Qu6  comen  los  Ingleses  ?    Los  Icgleses  coraen  buena  carne. 

7.  I  Que  bebe  el  Espafiol  ?    Bebe  buen  vino  y  cerveza  mala. 

8.  I  Qu6  lee  la  Americana  ?    Lee  mi  libro  de  mi  hermana. 

9.  I  Que  estudia  el  hijo  pequefio  de  V.  ?    Estudia  gramatica. 

10.  g  Qu6  necesita  la  muchacha  bermosa  ?   Necesita  un  pequeilo  pafluelo 
le  seda. 

11.  g  Necesita  Y.  un  caballo  grande?    No,  sefior,  yo  no  necesito  un 
caballo  grande,  sino  un  gran  caballo. 

12.  I  Qu6  estudia  la  Espafiola  ?    Estudia  ingMs. 

13.  I  Estudia  V.  la  gramatica  francesa?    No,  sefior,  estudio  la  gramd- 
tica  inglesa. 

14.  I  Come  pan  la  Inglesa  ?    Si,  sefior,  come  pan  y  carne. 

15.  I  Qu6  beben  Vds.  ?    Bebemos  leche. 

16.  I  Lee  V.  un  libro  ingles  ?    No,  sefior,  leo  un  libro  frances. 

17.  I  Qu6  lee  la  Americana  ?    Lee  su  leccion. 

18.  ^  Qu6  vende  la  Inglesa  ?    Yende  un  pafiuelo. 

19.  gCompra  Y.  algodon  al  comerciante  americano?    Si,  sefior,  corn- 
pro  algodon  al  comerciante  americano. 

20.  I  Necesita  la  Francesa  un  pafiuelo  grande  ?    No,  sefior,  necesita  un 
pafiuelo  hermoso. 

21.  I  Que  busca  el  muchacbo  ?     Busca  a  su  hermana. 

22.  I  Qu6  compra  Y.  ?     Oompro  un  pafiuelo  feo,  pero  bueno. 

23.  I  Necesita  Y.  seda  ?    No,  sefior,  necesito  algodon. 

24.  I  Qu6  lee  Y.  ?    Leo  el  libro  de  mi  padre. 

25.  I  Que  comeis  vosotros  ?     Comemos  pan  y  pescado. 

26.  ^  Qu6  bebe  el  Aleman  ?    Bebe  vino  y  cerveza. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  What  do  you  read  ?    I  read  a  great  book. 

2.  Do  you  read  English  well  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  read  English  very  well. 

3.  Does  the  German  drink  wine?    No,  sir,  he  drinks  beer. 

4.  What  do  they  (fern.)  drink  ?    They  drink  water. 

5.  Do  you  eat  meat  ?     No,  sir,  I  eat  fish. 

6.  What  does  the  Englishman  eat  ?     He  eats  bread  and  meat. 

7.  What  does  your  daughter  buy?    She  buys  a  silk  handkerchief 
from  the  American  woman. 

8.  Does  the  studious  boy  buy  a  book  ?     Yes,  sir,  he  buys  a  French 
grammar. 

9.  Does  the  handsome  American  woman  buy  a  large  book  ?    No,  sir, 
Bhe  buys  a  littie  book. 


22 


LESSON     VIII 


10.  Does  your  mamma  want  a  large  handkercWef  ?    No,  sir,  slie  wants 
a  handsome  handkerchief. 

11.  Do  you  need  your  book  ?     No,  sir,  I  do  not  need  my  book. 

12.  Do  they  need  a  Spanish  grammar  ?     Yes,  sir,  they  need  a  Spanish 
grammar. 

13.  Does  the  woman  sell  bread  ?    Yes,  sir,  she  sells  bread  and  fish. 

14.  What  do  you  read  ?     I  read  my  letter. 

15.  What  docs  your  brother  read  ?     He  reads  a  note. 

16.  Does  the  girl  sell  soap  ?     No,  sir,  she  sells  milk. 

17.  Does  the  lazy  boy  learn  well?    No,  sir,  he  learns  badly. 

18.  Do  you  learn  much  ?    No,  sir,  I  learn  little. 

19.  Do  you  read  Ihe  book  ?    No,  sir,  I  read  the  letter. 

20.  Do  you  buy  cheese  ?     Yes,  sir,  I  buy  cheese. 

21.  Do  they  buy  bread  ?     No,  sir,  they  buy  meat  and  beer. 

22.  Do  you  need  a  handkerchief?    No,  sir,  I  need  soap. 

23.  Do  you  read  your  father's  letter?    No,  sir,  I  read  my  brother's  letter. 

24.  Does  your  father  buy  an  English  grammar?     No,  sir,  he  buys  a 
French  book. 

25.  Does  your  brother  read  my  note  ?  No,  sir,  he  reads  my  sister's  letter. 


LESSON    VIII, 


TniHD   COls 

'JUGATION. 

Escrib-iY.      . 

To  write. 

Escrib-o. 

I  write. 

Escrib-es. 

Thou  writest. 

Escrib-e. 

He  writes. 

Escrib-imos. 

We  write. 

Escrib-is. 

You  write. 

Escrib-en. 

Recibir.  ^caa.  -  tu£ --^iU^x^ 

They  write. 
To  receive. 

En. 

In,  into,  or  at. 

Ni. 

No,  neither,  nor. 

El  {masc,  smg.). 
La  {fern.  sing.). 
Lo  {neuter). 
Los  {masc.  plural). 
Las  {/em.  plural). 

The. 

LESSON     VIII. 


23 


ADJECTIVES. 


Mucho. 
Muchos. 


Periodicos. 

Ejercicio. 
^-'A^'O  Ejercicios. 
^''.      ,/Zapatero. 
'17^  ,  y  Sombrerero. 


9   . 


Much. 
Many. 


Poco. 
Pocos. 


Little. 
Few. 


SUBSTANTIVES. 


Newspaper. 

Newspapers. 

Exercise. 

Exercises. 

Shoemaker. 

Hatter. 


Leccion. 

Lecciones. 

Ley. 

Leyes. 

Plata. 

Semana. 

Semanas. 


/^^^-^^ 


Lesson. 

Lessons 

Law. 

Laws. 

Silver. 

Week./^^^^-  "^ 

Weeks. 


COMPOSITION. 


i  Escribe  Y.  las  lecciones  6  los  ejerci- 

cios  ? 
No  escribo  ni  las  lecciones  ni  los  ejerci- 

cios. 
^  Escriben  las  senoritas  muchos  billetes  ? 
Ellas  escriben  muchos. 
I  Recibe  el  comerciante  plata  u  oro  ? 

JEl  recibe  oro  y  plata. 

I  Escribe  V.  la  carta  en  ingles  ? 

SI,  senor,  escribo  la  carta  en  ingles. 


Do  you  write  tlie  lessens  or  the  exer- 
cises ? 

I  write  neither  the  lessons  nor  the  ex- 
ercises. 

Do  the  young  ladies  write  many  notes  ? 

They  write  many. 

Does  the  merchant  receive  silver  or 
gold? 

He  receives  gold  and  silver. 

Do  you  write  the  letter  in  English  ? 

Yes,  sir,  I  write  the  letter  in  English. 


EXPLANATION. 

23.  The  endings  of  the  third  conjugation  and  those  of  the 
second  are  the  same,  except  in  the  first  and  second  persons  of 
the  plural ;  in  which  the  e  of  the  second  conjugation  is  changed 
into  i  in  the  third,  as  the  learner  must  have  observed. 

24.  The  conjunction  6  is  changed  into  '(l  when  the  fol- 
lowing word  begins  with  6  or  ho  ;  as, 

Plata  u  oro.  |  Silver  or  gold. 

25.  Ni. — Neither  and  nor  are  rendered  by  ^^^  ;  as, 

iSl  no  necesita  ni  la  came  ni  el  pescado.  j  He  wants  neither  the  meat  nor  the  fish. 

26.  The  plural  of  nouns  is  formed  by  adding  an  s  to 
those  terminating  in  a  vowel  not  accented  ;  as, 

Ejercicio.  Exercise.  |  Ejercicios.  Exercises.  - 


r 


24 


LESSON     VIII 


And  adding  es — 

1st.  To  those  ending:  in  an  accented  vowel;  as, 


o 
Gilliflower. 


Gilliflowers. 


Lessons. 


Laws. 


Aleli.  Gilliflower.  |  Alelies. 

2d.  To  those  ending  in  a  consonant ;  as, 

Leccion.  Lesson.  |  Lecciones. 

3d.  To  those  ending  in  y  ;  as, 

Ley.  Law.  |  Leyes. 

27.  An  adjective  agrees  with  its  noun  in  gender,  number 
and  case,  and  forms  the  jilural  according  to  the  rules  laid  down 
for  nouns ;  as, 

Buen  hombre. 
Buenos  hombres. 
Buena  mujer. 
Buenas  mujeres. 

28.  The  article  rrvust  agree  also  with  the  noun  to  which  it 
refers,  in  number,  gender  and  case ;  as, 


Good  man. 
Good  men. 
Good  woman. 
Good  women. 


El  libro. 
Los  libros. 
La  pluma. 
Las  plumas. 
Lo  bueno. 


The  book. 
The  books. 
The  pen. 
The  pens. 
What  is  good. 


Feminine  nouns  beginning  with  d  accented,  take  the  mascu- 
line article  el  in  the  singular  number,  instead  of  the  feminine 
la,  in  order  to  avoid  the  disagreeable  meeting  of  two  a's ;  as, 


El  alma. 
El  agua. 
El  alba. 
El  hambre. 


The  soul. 
The  water. 
The  dawn  of  day. 
The  hunger,  &c. 


29.  The  neuter  article  lo  has  no  plural  number,  and  is 
placed  only  before  adjectives  used  as  substantives,  in  an  abso^ 
lute  indeterminate  case  ;  as. 


Lo  bueno. 
Lo  malo. 


What  is  good. 
What  is  bad. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  ^ Escribe  Y.  4  sn  padre?    No,  sefior,  escribo  d  mi  hermano. 

2.  I  Qu6  escribe  V.  ?    Escribo  una  carta  4  la  muchacha. 


LESSON     VIII.  25 

8.  ^Escribe  V.  muchos  billetes?    No,  sefior,  escribo  muj  pocos. 

4.  ^Escriben  ellos  bien  los  ejercicios?    Si,  seiior,  cUos  escriben  bien 
los  ejercicios. 

5.  I  Recibe  V.  libros  ingleses  ?    No,  sefior,  recibo  libros  franceses. 

6.  I  Que  reciben  ellos  ?     Reciben  plata  j  oro. 

7.  e  Reciben  raucho  oro  ?     No,  sefior,  reciben  muy  poco. 

8.  I  Lee  V.  sus  cartas  6  sus  billetes  ?    No  leo  ni  mis  cartas,  ni  mis 
billetes ;  leo  mis  ejercicios. 

9.  I  Necesita  Y.  muchos  pafluelos  ?     No,  sefior,  necesito  muy  pocos. 

10.  ^Estudia  V.  muchas  lecciones?     No,  sefior,  estudio  pocas. 

11.  I  Busca  V.  una  pluma?     No,  sefior,  busco  una  gramatica. 

12.  I  Qu6  busca  su  hermana  de  V.  ?    Busca  los  ejercicios  en  ingles. 

13.  ^Estudia  Y.  frances  6  aleman?    No  estudio  ni  frances,  ni  aleman ; 
estudio  espafiol. 

14.  2  Necesita  Y.  mi  ejercicio?    Si,  sefior,  necesito  sn  ejercicio  ingles. 

15.  ^Escribe  Y.  al  comerciante  6  al  abogado?    No  escribo  al  comer- 
ciante,  ni  al  abogado ;  escribo  d  su  padre  de  Y. 

16.  g Escriben  ellas  los  ejercicios  de  ingles?    No,  sefior,  escriben  los 
ejercicios  de  espafiol. 

17.  J  Recibe  Y.  muchas  cartas  de  su  padre?    No,  sefior,  recibo  mur 
pocas. 

18.  ^  Recibo  el  comerciants  mucho  algodon  ?    SI,  sefior,  recibe  mucho. 

19.  ^  Compra  Y.  muchos  pafiuelos?     Si,  sefior,  compro  muchos. 

20.  I  Compra  su  padre  de  Y.  muchos  caballos  ?     No, 
pocos. 

21.  I  Compra  Y.  la  gramatica  del  muchacho  ?     No, 
cuaderno  de  la  muchacha. 

22.  ^  Habla  mucho  el  Frances  ?    No,  sefior,  habla  poco. 

23.  I  Escribe  Y.  bien  el  ingles  ?    No,  sefior,  escribo  mal  el  ingles,  pero 
«scribo  bien  el  espafiol. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Does  your  brother  write  English  well?     Yes,  sir,  he  writes  Eng- 
lish well. 

2.  Do  you  write  to  my  brother  ?    No,  sir,  I  write  to  my  father. 

3.  Do  you  write  in  English  or  in  Spanish  ?     I  write  in  English, 

4.  Do  they  (/em.)  write  the  lessons  or  the  exercises  ?     They  write 
neither  the  lessons  nor  the  exercises ;  they  write  letters. 

5.  Do  you  receive  many  notes  ?    No,  sir,  I  receive  but  few. 

6.  Do  they  receive  gold  ?    No,  sir,  they  receive  silver. 

7.  Do  you  receive  many  letters  from  your  father  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  receive 
many. 

2 


26 


LESSON     IX. 


8.  Do  yon  eat  fish  ?    No,  sir,  I  cat  bread  and  cheese. 

9.  Do  the  Genuans  drink  water?     No,  sir,  they  drink  hcer. 

10.  Do  you  read  your  brother's  letter?     Xo,  sir,  I  read  my  sister's 
letter. 

11.  Does  the  merchant  sell  French  paper?     No,  sir,  he  sells  English 
paper. 

12.  Does  your  brother  learn  German  and  Englisli?    No,  sir,  he  learns 
neither  German  nor  English  ;  he  learns  Spanish. 

13.  Do  you  need  silver  or  gold  ?     I  need  neither  gold  nor  silver. 

14.  Do  you  look  for  my  father  ?     No,  madam,  I  look  for  the  lawyer. 

15.  Do  you  buy  a  grammar  from  the  merchant?     Yes,  sir,  I  buy  a 
grammar  from  theNnerchant. 

16.  Do  they  study  their  lessons  well?    Yes,  sir,  they  study  their  les- 
sons well. 

17.  Do  you  speak  much  to  your  sister?     Yes,  madam,  I  speak  much 
to  my  sister. 

18.  Do  you  speak  Spanish  or  English  ?    I  speak  English. 

19.  Do  you  receive  French  books?     No,  sir,  I  receive  English  books. 

20.  Does  the  merchant  receive  silver  or  gold  ?     lie  receives  gold  and 
silver. 

21.  Do  you  write  your  exercises?     No,  sir,  I  write  my  letters. 

22.  Do  you  write  a  letter  to  your  father?    No,  sir,  I  write  to  my 
sister. 


LESSON 

IX. 

u^dc^v   To  live. 

Viv-o. 

I  live. 

Viv-es. 

Thou  livest. 

Viv-e. 

He  lives. 

Viv-imos. 

"We  live. 

Yiv-is. 

You  live. 

Viv-en. 

They  live. 

Pwesidir.  hyO^  -aI^-oJ^ 

1 

To  reside. 

Mis  {plural). 

Sus  {plural). 

Cuando. 

Dondo  {without  motion). 

Adondo  {with  motion). 


My. 

Your. 

When. 

Where. 


Campo,  pais.        Country 


LESSON     IX. 


'jojccL. 


Dia. 
Dias. 
Lapiz. 
Lapiccs. 

AleKes. 
.^  Cortaplumas. 
C^3k^  Hotel,  fonda. 


Day. 

Days. 

Pencil. 

Pencils. 

Gilliflower. 

GHliflowers. 

Penknife. 

Hotel. 


Dim  de  la  semana.^ 
Liines. 
Martes. 
Miercoles. 
Jueves. 
Vierncs. 
Sabado. 
Sabados. 
Domingo. 
Domingos. 


Flor. 

Florcs. 

Casa. 

Nneva  York. 

Francia. 

Espafla. 

Inglaterra. 

Alemania. 

Tienda. 

Ciudad. 


27 

Flower. 

Flowers. 

House,  or  home. 

New  York, 

France.  ^Ca^o^^- 

Spain.    ^ 

England,  lu^y 

Germany.  ^      , 

Store.  "U-^:*^^^  -^/^^ . 

City. 


'^"tik^ 


cO 


ia^'A 


Days  of  the  week. 
Monday. 

Tuesday.  '  f    (I       f   ^ 

Wednesday. O-viX  '^^  "f^  "'^^ 
Thursday. ^ctA^-^s^^t^-'-'^^"'''^'-'''^ ' 
Friday.  ,^  _  aJ(A^'  ,--)^xA^a.A^ 
Saturday. 
Saturdays. 
Sunday. 
Sundays. 


COMPOSITION. 


4  Vive  Y.  en  el  campo  6  en  la  ciudad  ? 

Vivo  en  la  ciudad. 

I  En  donde  residen  sus  papas  de  V,  ? 

Pap4  reside  en  Francia,  y  mama  en 
Nueva  York. 

I  Cuando  come  V.  en  casa  de  sus  her- 
manos  de  V.  ? 

Los  domingos,  martes  y  jueves  como  en 
casa  de  mis  hermanos. 

^  Y  en  donde  come  V.  los  lunes,  mier- 
coles, vi  ernes  y  subados  ? 

Como  en  casa. 


Do  you  live  in  the  country  or  in  the  city  ? 
I  live  in  the  city. 
Where  do  your  parents  reside  ? 
Father  resides  in  France,  and  mother  in 

New  York. 
When  do  you  dine  at  your  brothers'  ? 

On  Sundays,  Tuesdays  and  Thursdays 

I  dine  at  my  brothers'. 
And  where  do  you  dine  on  Mondays, 

Wednesdays,  Fridays  and  Saturdays  ? 
I  dine  at  home. 


EXPLANATION. 

30.  Popc^jpapa;  mama,  Tnamma;  pi^,  foot;  are  exceptions 
to  the  general  rule,  and  form  the  plural  by  the  addition  of  s ; 
as,  papas,  papas ;  mamds,  mammas ;  pi^s,  feet. 

*  All  of  tlie  mascullQC  gendct. 


28  LESSON     IX. 

31.  Kouns  which  are  not  monosyllables,  and  end  in  5,  the 
last  syllable  not  being  accented,  do  not  change  their  termina- 
tion in  the  plural  number ;  as,  Liines,  Monday  or  Mondays ; 
Mdrtes,  Tuesday  or  Tuesdays,  etc.  Words  ending  in  z  take  C5, 
and  change  the  z  into  c  in  the  plural ;  as,  Idpiz,  Idpices,  pencil, 
pencils  ;  juez^jueces,  judge,  judges. 

32.  Words  which  are  compounds  of  two  nouns  differ  so  va- 
riously that  it  is  not  possible  to  give  rules  for  the  formation  of 
their  plurals ;  but  compounds  of  a  verb  and  a  noun  in  the  singu- 
lar number  form  the  plural  in  the  same  manner  as  simple  nouns ; 
and  compound  words  of  a  verb  and  a  noun  in  the  plural  will  be 
used  the  same  in  both  numbers ;  as,  cortaplumas,  penknife,  or 
penknives. 

33.  The  days  of  the  week  always  take  the  article  when  they 
are  employed  to  mark,  or  express  time  ;  as, 

Estudio  espanol  el  lunes  y  el  viernes.      |  I  study  Spanish  on  Monday  and  Friday. 

34.  Donde,  where  (without  motion) ;  adonde,  where  (with 
motion) ;  cuando,  when.  These  adverbs  are  placed  always  be- 
fore the  verb;  as, 

i,  Donde  reside  V.  ?  I  Where  do  you  reside  ? 

I  Cuando  escribe  V.  ?  |  When  do  you  write  ? 

35.  Donde,  adonde,  and  cwanJo,  when  used  interrogatively 
require  an  accent;  X\\\x%  ^ Donde  vivef  Where  does  he  live? 
^  Cudndo  lee  V,  f    W^hen  do  you  read  ? 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  J  En  donde  vive  V.  ?    Vivo  en  Nucva  York. 

2.  I  Donde  viven  sus  padres  de  V.  ?  Mi  padre  vive  en  la  ciudad  y  mi 
madre  en  el  campo. 

8.  I  Donde  viven  sus  hcrmanos  ?    Viven  en  Francia. 

4.  ^  Donde  come  V.  los  sabados  y  los  domingos?  Como  en  el  hotel 
de  los  Franceses. 

5.  ^y  donde  come  V.  los  Idncs  y  los  martes?  Como  en  cl  hotel 
Americano. 

6.  I  D6nde  reside  V.  ?    Resido  en  el  campo. 

7.  i  Y  d6nde  reside  su  mamd  de  V.  ?    Reside  en  los  Estados  Unidos. 

8.  I  Cuando  ostudia  V.  sus  lecciones  de  frances  ?  Los  mi^rcoles  y  loe 
Ju6vea. 


LESSON     IX.  29 

9.  ^  T  qu6  estudia  V.  los  vierncs  ?    Los  viernes  estudio  una  Icccion 
dc  frances. 

10.  ^Cuando  lee  V.  los  periodicos?     Yo  Ico  los  periodicos  los  do- 
mingos. 

11.  ^  Compran  alelies  sus  herraanas?    Si,  seilor,  ellas  compran  alelles. 

12.  ^Estudia  V.  las  leyes  de  Inglaterra?    No,  scuor,  estudio  las  de 
los  Estados  Unidos  (  United  States). 

13.  ^Aprende  bien  la  mucliacha  el  ingles?     Si,  seilor,  aprende  Men 
el  ingles. 

14.  ^Qu6  bebcn  los  Espafloles  y  los  Alcmanes?    Los  Espafioles  bcben 
buen  vino,  y  los  Alemanes  buena  cerveza. 

15.  I  Donde  compra  el  comerciante  el  algodon?    Oompra  el  algodon  on 
los  Estados  Unidos. 

16.  ^  Y  donde  vende  el  oro  y  la  plata  ?    En  Inglaterra. 

17.  ^Cuando  necesita  su  hermano  de  V.  la  gramatica?    Mi  Lermano 
necesita  su  gramatica  el  1  tines. 

18.  ^En  qu6  hotel  come  V.?     Como  en  cl  hotel  de  Inglaterra. 

19.  ^Qu6  compra  cl  comerciante,  plata  u  oro?      El  comerciante  no 
compra  ni  oro  ni  plata,  compra  seda. 

20.  I  Que  estudia  V.  ?    Estudio  los  dias  de  la  scmana  en  ingles. 

21.  ^Escribe  V.  a  Francia?    No,  senor,  escribo  a  Inglaterra. 

22.  ^Qu6  escribe  Y.?    Escribo  los  ejercicios  de  la  semana  en  ingl6s. 

23.  I  Donde  reside  su  hermana  do  V.  ?    Reside  en  el  campo. 

24.  I  En  qu6  pais  vive  su  papa  ?     Vive  en  Alemania. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Do  you  live  in  the  country  ?    No,  sir,  I  live  in  town. 

2.  "Where  does  your  sister  live?     She  lives  in  New  York. 

3.  Where  do  your  parents  {padres)  live?.  They  live  in  France. 

4.  Where  does  your  brother  reside  ?    He  resides  in  England. 

5.  Do  you  not  reside  in  the  United  States  ?    No,  sir,  in  Spain. 

6.  In  which  country  does  your  mother  live  ?    She  lives  iji  the  United 
States. 

Y.  Do  you  write  to  your  father  in  Spanish  or  in  English  ?    I  write 
in  English. 

8.  Where  does  the  merchant  buy  the  cotton  ?    He  buys  the  cotton  in 
England. 

9.  Which  do  you  sell,  silver  or  gold?     I  sell  gold. 

10.  Where  do  you  dine  on  Sundays  and  Mondays?     I  dine  in  the 
French  hotel. 

11.  And  where  on  Wednesdays,  Fridays  and  Saturdays?      In  the 
German  hotel. 


so 


LESSON     X 


12.  When  do  thej  study  their  lesson  ?    On  (los)  Tuesdays. 

13.  Does  the  lawyer  study  the  laws  of  England?     No,  sir,  he  studies 
the  laws  of  the  United  States.  Jicu,- ^I^-^cCcl 

14.  Whera  docs  your  mother  reside  ?     She  resides  in  Germany. 

15.  When  do  you  need  your  grammar  ?     On  Friday. 

16.  When  do  your  sons  study  the  French  lessons?     They  study  the 
French  lessons  on  Mondays  and  Saturdays. 

17.  Where  does  the  merchant  buy  the  good  penknives?     In  England. 

18.  What  day  do  you  {/em.)  receive  the  newspapers?    We  receive  the 
newspapers  on  Sundays. 

19.  Does  your  sister  buy  gilliflowers?    Yes,  sir,  she  buys  gilliflowers. 

20.  Where  do  you  buy  your  pencils  ?    In  the  French  store. 

21.  What  do  you  study  ?     I  study  the  days  of  the  week  in  Spanish. 

22.  Where  do  your  parents  reside  ?    My  mother  resides  in  Spain,  and 
my  father  in  Germany. 

23.  Where  does  your  sister  reside  ?    She  resides  in  the  country. 

24.  Do  you  need  my  books  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  need  your  books. 


LESSON    X. 


Tener. 

Ten  go. 
Tienes. 
Tiene. 

Tenemos. 

Tcneis. 

Tienen. 


To  have. 

I  have. 
Thou  hast 
He  has. 

We  have. 
You  have. 
They  have. 


Le,  los  (masc.  pi.). 
La,  las  (fcm.  pi.). 
Lo  {neuter). 


OBJECTIVE   CASE. 

It,  him,  them. 
It,  her,  them. 
It,  (sometimes)  so. 


h. 


ns'TERROGATITE   PRONOUNS. 


l  Qui^n,  qui6nes  (pi.)  ? 

^Cual,  cuales  (pl.)'i 

iQu6? 

Do  qui6n,  de  quienes  (pi.)  ? 

Con. 


Who? 

Which  one,  which  ones? 

What,  or  which? 

Whose  ? 

With. 


LESSON     X, 

Zapato.  ShociUL-  f^o^-^ 

Chaleco.  Vest.  ei^~,&t4    ' 

Baston.  Cane. 

Sombrero.  Hat. 


81 


Botas. 

Boots. 

Casaca. 

Coat. 

Corbata. 

Cravat. 

Medias. 

Stockings.  (yncu^"d&' 

COMPOSITION, 


i  Qxiidn  t'lenc  mi  baston  ? 

Yo  lo  tcngo. 

i  Que  corbata  tiene  V.  ? 

Tengo  la  bonita. 

^  Tienen  dlos  mi  chaleco  ? 

No,  senor,  tienen  la  corbata  de  Y. 

I  De  quien  liabla  V.  ? 

Ilablo  de  los  Franceses. 

I  Teneis  vosotros  casacas  ? 

Si,  seiior,  las  tenemos. 

^  Quien  tiene  sombreros  ? 

Los  tiane  el  coraerciante. 

I  Nocesita  V.  ami  padre  ? 

Si,  SGUor,  le  necesito, 

I  Tiene  V.  mi  casaca  ? 

Si,  seuor,  la  tengo. 

I  Que  bolas  tiene  V.  ? 

6  Que  tiene  V.  ? 


Who  has  my  cane  ? 

I  have  it 

"Which  cravat  have  you  ? 

I  have  the  pretty  one. 

Have  they  my  waistcoat  ? 

No,  sir,  they  have  your  cravat. 

Of  whom  do  you  speak  ? 

I  speak  of  the  Frenchmen. 

Have  you  coats  ? 

Yes,  sir,  we  have  (them). 

Who  has  hats  ? 

The  merchaut  has  (them). 

Do  you  neoa  my  father  ? 

Yes,  sir,  I  ueed  him. 

Have  you  my  coat  ? 

Ye3,  sir,  I  have  it 

Which  boots  have  vou? 


What  is  the  matter  with  you  ? 
EXPLANATION. 

36.  Irregular  verbs  are  those  which  do  not  retain  in- 
tact the  radical  letters  and  the  terminations  designated  for 
each  tense  and  person. 

The  verb  tener^  to  have,  is  the  first  of  the  irregular  verba 
here  introduced ;  and,  like  all  the  auxiliary  verbs,  is  not  in- 
cluded in  the  seven  groups  in  which  the  irregular  Spanish 
verbs  are  classified,  on  account  of  their  multifarious  irregulari- 
ties. The  auxiliaries  require,  therefore,  to  be  learned  separate- 
ly, or  each  one  by  itself. 

A  complete  list  of  the  irregular  conjugations  will  be  found 
at  the  end  of  the  book. 

When  the  objective  case  of  the  third  person  is  the  object 
of  the  English  verb,  it  is  translated  by  Ze,  los^  for  the  masculine; 
la^  las^  for  the  feminine ;  and  lo  for  the  neuter ;  as, 

El  le  busca.  I  He  looks  for  him. 

Ella  los  compra.  She  buys  them. 

Ellos  lo  necesitan.  J  They  want  tt 


32  LESSONX. 

37.  Lo  and  Le. — It  must  be  obsen-cd,  however,  with  regard 
to  the  objective  forma  le  and  lo,  that  their  use  is  very  doubtful 
in  Spanisli,  since  many  correct  writers  employ  the  neuter  lo, 
instead  of  the  masculine  le.  Consequently,  while  custom  or 
general  use  does  not  give  the  preference  to  either,  the  learner 
may  use  them  according  to  his  own  discretion  or  taste,  in  the 
accusative  case,  masculine  gender;  as, 

jllanuel  tiene  un  buen  iibro  y  lo  (le)  I  Emanuel  has  a  good  book  and  sells  iL 
venJe.  j 

Xo  is  sometimes  employed  to  avoid  the  repetition  of  a 
whole  or  part  of  a  sentence,  and  then  it  is  equivalent  to  so,  or 
it.  Of  this,  however,  more  will  be  said  when  treating  of  the 
regimen  of  verbs. 

38.  The  intekkogative  pronouns  quien,  cudl,  que,  de 
quien,  who,  which,  what,  and  whose,  do  not  require  the  arti- 
cle ;  as, 


i  Quien  habla  ? 

(,  Cual  tengo  yo  ? 

l  Que  escribe  V.  ? 

l  De  quien  son  los  caballos  ? 


Who  speaks  ? 
"Which  one  have  I  ? 
What  do  you  write  ? 
Whose  are  the  horses  ? 


39.  When,  in  a  question,  the  interrogative  pronoun  is 
governed  by  a  preposition,  that  preposition  must  also  be  re- 
peated in  the  answer ;  as. 


g  Con  quien  vive  V.  ? 
Con  mi  amigo. 
/  De  quien  es  el  caballo  ? 
De  mi  amigo. 


With  whom  do  you  live  ? 
With  my  friend. 
Whose  is  the  horse  ? 
My  friend's. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  I  Qu6  tiene  V.  ?    Tengo  un  hcrmoso  baston. 

2.  I  Tienes  tu  un  buen  sombrero  ?     Si,  seflor,  lo  (le)  tengo. 

3.  iQu6  pafiuelo  tiene  ella?     Tiene  el  de  seda. 

4.  I  Cual  tiene  V.  ?     Tengo  mi  pafiuelo. 

5.  ^Teneis  vosotros  buenos  chalecos?    Si,  sefior,  los  tenemos. 
C.  I  De  quien  hablan  ellos  ?     Ilablan  de  las  Americanas. 

7.  ^  Tiene  V.  las  corbatas?     Si,  sefior,  Ins  tengo. 

8.  ^Tienen  ellos  los  hermosos  pafiuelos  <le  seda?    Si,  sefior,  los  ticnea 

9.  I  Qui6n  tiene  las  medias  ?    Yo  las  tengo. 

10.  I  Tieno  V.  mi  cbaleco  ?       Si,  sefior,  lo  (le)  tengo. 


LESSON     X.  33 

11.  ^  Quien  tiene  mi  baston  ?     Su  hermano  lo  (le)  tiene. 

12.  ^  Ilabla  V.  a  su  liermana  ?     Si,  sefior. 

13.  gBusca  V.  a  su  liermana?     Si,  sefiorita,  la  busco. 

14.  ^Estudia  V.  su  leccion  ?     Si,  scilor,  la  estudio. 

15.  ^Nccesita  V.  a  su  papa?    Si,  sefior,  Ic  (lo)  necesito. 
IG.  I  Que  sombrero  tiene  V.  ?     Tengo  el  de  V. 

17.  ^Qu6  botas  busca  V.?    Busco  las  buenas. 

18.  2  Con  quien  aprcnde  Y.  cl  ingles  ?     Con  un  Americano. 

19.  g  A  quien  busca  V.  ?     Busco  al  abogado. 

20.  I  Que  compra  V.  ?     Compro  lapices  ingleses. 

21.  ^  Tiene  V.  una  buena  gramatica?    Si,  sefior,  tengo  una  muy  buena. 

22.  I  Tiene  Y.  muchos  libros  ?     No,  sefior,  tengo  pocos. 

23.  ^TiencR  ellas  mucha  seda?    No,  sefior,  tienen  rauypoca. 
24.^  Donde  reside  Y.  ?    Eesido  en  el  campo. 

25.  ^  Donde  vive  su  abogado  de  Y.  ?    Yive  en  la  ciudad. 

26.  I  Yivc  en  Francia  su  hermano  de  Y.  ?     No,  sefior,  vivo  en  Espafia. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Who  has  the  stockings?    I  have  them. 

2.  What  has  he  ?    He  has  my  grammar. 

3.  Have  they  my  vest?    Yes,  sir,  they  have  it. 

4.  Which  books  have  they  (/em.)  ?     They  have  yours. 

5.  Of  whom  do  you  speak  ?    I  speak  of  the  Erenchmaa. 

6.  Who  has  my  coat  ?    They  have  it. 

7.  Have  you  my  cravat  ?    No,  sir,  I  have  it  not. 

8.  Have  we  very  good  coats  ?    Yes,  sir,  we  have. 

9.  Who  has  the  handsome  stockings  ?     They  (fern.)  have  them. 

10.  Do  you  speak  to  the  Frenchman?    Yes,  sir,  I  speak  to  the  French- 
man. 

11.  Do  you  need  my  hat?    No,  sir,  I  have  my  hat. 

12.  Whom  do  you  look  for  ?     I  look  for  your  father. 

13.  What  do  you  buy  ?     I  buy  English  books. 

14.  Which  shoes  do  you  buy  ?    I  buy  the  handsome  shoes. 

15.  Which  hats  have  you  ?    I  have  the  merchant's  hats. 

16.  With  whom  do  you  learn  jjJiglish?    I  learn  with  an  American. 

17.  Have  you  good  coats?    Yjni^sk*,  I  have  good  coats. 

18.  Have  they  many  grammars?    Nq^  sir,  they  have  very  few. 

19.  Where  do  you  live  ?    I  live  in  the  country. 

20.  Does  your  father  reside  in  France  ?    No,  sir,  he  resides  in  England. 

21.  Does  your  mother  live  in  Germany?    No,  sir,  she  lives  in  the 
Enited  States. 

2* 


S4 


LESSON     XI 


22.  Do  you  buy  many  books  ?    No,  sir,  I  buy  very  few. 

23.  Who  has  my  handsome  boots?     I  have  them. 

24.  TVliich  liat  have  you?    I  liave  yours. 

25.  What  have  you  ?    I  have  my  stockings. 

2d  Of  whom  do  you  speak  ?    I  speak  of  your  fatlier. 


LESSON    XI. 

Ser. 

To  be. 

Soy. 

I  am. 

Eras. 

Thou  art. 

Es. 

He  is. 

Sera  09. 

We  arc. 

Sois. 

You  are. 

Son. 

They  are. 

'-isk'i 


INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS, 

Alguien.    oM - a.~<^^i^^ 
Algimo.  OU^''<i^<r6--^iA^^ 


'^hOA^^-oLou    Nada 


Ninguno.  /^U!,5^tc-^^»^-^ 
Algo,  alguna  cosa.  Jut  ^z^nji 


nmguna  cosa. 


Todo. 
Todos. 


Librcro. 
Panadero. 
Carnicero. 
Sastre. 


Bookseller. 
Baker 
Butcher. 
^  Tailor. 


Some  one,  somebody,  anybody; 

any  one. 
Some,  somebody,  anybody. 
No  one,  nobody. 
None,  no  one,  nobody. 
Something,  anything. 
Nothing,  not  anything. 
All,  everything. 
Every  one,  everybody. 


Libreria. 
Panaderia. 
Carniceria. 
Sastreria. 


Bookstore. 
Bakery. 
Butcher's  shop. 
Tailor's  shop. 


COMPOSITION. 


I  Son  Vds.  carnlccros  ? 

No,  scfior,  somos  panaderos. 

I  Es  V.  carnicero  ? 

No,  senor,  yo  soy  sastre. 

i  Tiene  V.  algun  pan  ? 


Are  you  butchers  ? 
No,  sir,  we  are  baker*u 
Are  you  a  butcher  ? 
No,  sir,  I  am  a  tailor. 
Have  you  some  bread  f 


LESSON     XI. 


35 


No,  sefior,  no  tengo  ninguno. 

i  Tiencn  Vds.  algo  ? 

No,  sefior,  no  tenemos  nada. 

^QuiOn  lijne  el  sombrero? 

El  Americano  lo  ticnc. 

^Dondc  compra  V.  pan?  . 

En  la  panaderia. 

^  Donde  compra  V.  sus  libros  ? 

En  la  libreria. 

I  Eres  tii  rany  estudioso  ? 

No,  sefior,  no  lo  soy. 

^Tienen  todos  Vds.  buenas  grama- 

licas. 
Si,  sefior. 

I  Qui^n  tiene  papel  ? 
Nadie  lo  (le)  liene. 


No,  sir,  I  have  none. 

Have  you  anything  ? 

No,  sir,  we  have  nothing. 

Who  has  the  hat  ? 

The  American  has  it. 

Where  do  you  buy  bread  ? 

In  the  bakery. 

Where  do  you  buy  your  books  ? 

In  the  bookstore. 

Art  thou  very  studious  ? 

No,  sir,  I  am  not  (so). 

Have  you  all  good  grammars  ? 

Yes,  sir. 

Who  has  paper  ? 

Nobody  has  (it). 


EXPLANATION. 

40.  Alguien,  alguno. — Alguien  refers  only  to  persons^ 
and  always  in  the  singular  number ;  as, 

Vivo  con  Mguien.  I  I  live  with  some  one. 

Escribo  k  alguien.  |  I  write  to  somebody. 

When  some  one,  any  one  is  followed  by  the  preposition  q/J 
we  must  use  alguno  in  Spanish,  and  not  dlgulen ;  as,  alguno  de 
ellos  escribe  en  el  periodico,  some  one  of  them  writes  in  the 
newspaper. 

Any  one,  or  anybody,  not  used  interrogatively,  is  trans- 
lated by  cualquiera,  as  will  be  seen  when  we  introduce  the  in- 
definite pronoun. 

Alguien  is  used  only  in  the  affirmative.  Alguno  may,  on 
the  contrary,  be  employed  either  in  affirmative  or  negative 
sentences ;  in  the  affirmative  it  always  precedes  the  noun  to 
which  it  refers,  and  in  the  negative  it  invariably  comes  after 
it ;  as. 

No  estudian  leccion  alguna.  I  They  study  no  lesson  (or  do  not  study 

j      any  lesson). 

41.  Nadte,  ninguno. — Ninguno  relates  to  persons  and 
things,  and  is  used  in  the  negative  in  the  same  manner  as  al- 
guno in  the  affirmative ;   nadie  relates  to  persons  only,  and  is 


06  LESSONXI. 

used  in  the  negative  in  the  same  way  as  the  pronoun  dlguien 
in  the  affirmative.  In  a  word,  nadle  and  ninguno  are  merely 
the  negative  forms  of  dlguien  and  alguno. 

42.  Alguno  and  ninguno  lose  the  o  when  they  come  im- 
mediately before  the  noun. 

43.  Algo,  and  alguna  cosa,  are  used  in  the  affirmative;  as, 
Como  algo,  or  algmia  cosa.  I  I  cat  something. 

i  RecibeV.  algo,  or  alguna  cosa  ?      J  Do  you  receive  anything  ? 

Anything,  when  not  used  interrogatively,  is  translated 
cualquiera  cosci^  as  will  bo  seen  in  its  proper  place. 

44.  Nada,  ninguna  cosa  are  used  in  the  negative  form. 

45.  Nada,  nunguno,  nadie,  the  adverb  no,  as  well  as  any 
other  words  expressing  negation,  are  placed  before  the  verb ; 
but  when  no  precedes  the  verb,  another  negative  may  be  placed 
after  it,  and  the  two  negatives  serve  to  strengthen  each  ether, 
contrary  to  the  practice  of  the  English  language ;  as, 


No  estudio  nada. 
No  habl  J  k  nadic. 
No  rccibo  ninguno 


I  study  nothing. 

I  speak  to  nobody,  or  no  one. 

I  receive  none. 


But  in  omitting  the  negative  no,  the  words  which  express 
the  negation  must  be  placed  before  the  verb ;  as, 


Nada  estudio. 
A  nadie  hablo. 
Niajruno  recibo. 


I  study  nothing. 
I  speak  to  nobody. 
I  receive  none. 


The  two  negatives  are  always  preferable. 

46.  The  indefinite  article  a  or  an,  is  not  translated  into 
Spanish  wlien  accompanied  by  a  noun  which  expresses  nation 
ality,  profession,  &c. ;  as, 

I  Es  V.  Ingl6s  ?  I  Are  you  an  Englishman  ? 

No,  senor,  soy  Espauol.  |  No,  sir,  I  am  a  Spaniard. 

I  Es  61  sastrc  ?  Is  he  a  tnilor  ? 

No,  senor,  es  zapatero.  |  No,  sir,  he  is  a  shoemaker. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  lEi  V»  Frances?    No,  seflor,  soy  Americano. 

2.  iSon  Vols.  Alemanes?     No,  senor,  soinos  Ingleses. 
8.  I  Ere?  tu  buen  muchacho  ?    Si  seflor,  lo  soy. 

4.  iSois  vosotros  sastres?    Nt>,  seflor,  somos  panaderoe. 


LESSON     XI.  37 

6.  ^Es  bueno  el  libro  de  sii  hermano  de  V.  ?     Si,  seflor,  lo  es. 

6.  ^Son  buenos  sus  zapatos  de  V.  ?    No,  seflor,  son  muy  raalos. 

7.  ^Tiene  alguno  mi  sombrero?    Si,  sefior,  alguien  lo  (le)  tiene. 

8.  I  Tiene  alguien  papel  ?     No,  seflor,  ningnno  tiene  papel. 

9.  g  Tiene  V.  alguna  cosa?    No,  sefior,  no  tcngo  nada. 

10.  ^No  tiene  V.  cosa  alguna?     Si,  sefior,  tengo  alguna  cosa. 

11.  ^Compran  pan  todos  Yds.  ?     Si,  sefior,  todos  compramos  pan. 

12.  ^D6nde  compran  Yds.  todo  su  pan?    Lo  (le)  compramos  en  la 
panaderia. 

13.  gSon  Yds.  panaderos?     No,  sefior,  nosotros  somos  zapateros. 

14.  ^  Tiene  alguien  mi  sombrero  bueno?     Si,  sefior,  alguien  le  (lo) 
tiene. 

15.  ^No  compra  Y.  algo?     Si,  sefior,  compro  alguna  cosa. 

16.  ^Escribe  Y.  algo?     No,  sefior,  no  Cscribo  nada. 

17.  t  Necesita  Y.  todo  el  papel  ?     Si,  sefior,  lo  (le)  neccsito  todo. 

18.  ^Necesita  Y.  todas  las  plumas?    Si,  sefior,  las  necesito  todas. 

19.  gEs  Y.  sastre?     Si,  sefior,  yo  soy  sastre. 

20.  ^Dondc  tiene  Y.  su  sastreria?    La  tengo  en  Nueva  York. 

21.  gEs  su  padre  de  Y.  librero?    Si,  sefior,  lo  es. 

22.  ^  Yende  muclios  libros?     Si,  sefior,  vende  muchos. 

23.  I  Donde  tiene  61  su  libreria  ?    La  tiene  en  Francia. 

24.  ^ Tiene  Y.  una  panaderia?    No,  sefior,  tengo  una  carniceria. 

25.  I  Habla  Y.  a  alguien  ?    No,  sefior,  no  hablo  a  nadie. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Are  you  an  Englishman?    No,  sir,  I  am  an  American. 

2.  Are  you  good  boys  ?     Yes,  sir,  we  are  very  good  boys. 

3.  Is  Louisa  a  good  girl  ?    Yes,  sir,  she  is  a  very  good  girl. 

4.  Art  thou  a  Frenchman  ?     No,  sir,  I  am  a  German. 

5.  Is  yours  a  good  book  ?     Yes,  sir,  mine  is  a  very  good  one. 

6.  Are  they  (/em.)  studious  ?     Yes,  sir,  they  are  very  studious. 

7.  Have  you  anything  ?     No,  sir,  I  have  nothing. 

8.  Have  you  nothing  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  have  something. 

9.  Has  anybody  a  good  grammar  ?    Yes,  sir,  the  Frenchman  has  one. 

10.  Who  speaks  French  ?    The  American  speaks  French.  j 

11.  Do  you  write  an  exercise?    Yes,  sir,  I  write  an  exercise.  M 

12.  Where  do  you  buy  all  your  books  ?    I  buy  them  in  the  bookstore. 

13.  Are  you  a  bookseller?    No,  sir,  I  am  a  baker. 

14.  Where  have  you  your  bakery  ?    I  have  it  in  New  York. 

15.  Where  do  you  buy  your  coats  ?     In  the  tailor's  shop. 

16.  Have  you  all  of  your  books  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  have  all. 


38 


LE660X     XII. 


17.  Do  yon  all  reside  in  the  United  States  ?    Yes,  sir,  we  reside  in  the 
United  States. 

18.  Have  you  any  bread  ?     No,  sir,  I  have  none. 

19.  Do  you  speak  to  anybody  ?     Yes,  sir,  I  speak  to  the  Americans. 

20.  Do  you  buy  anything  ?     No,  sir,  I  buy  nothing. 

21.  Are  you  a  baker?     No,  sir,  T  am  a  tailor. 

22.  Are  they  French  ?     No,  sir,  they  are  English. 

23.  Art  thou  a  Spaniard  ?    No,  sir,  I  am  an  American, 

24.  Who  is  studious  ?    Emanuel  is  very  studious. 


LESSON    XII 


Jlaber. 


To  have. 


He.     t^^ 
Has.   A><W 
Ha.     oJL' 

I  hav6. 
Thou  hast. 
He  has. 

Hemos.  "i^^jL^*-^ 

We  have. 

Habeis.   cvirc^J-JLLJ 
Han.          oXi^     ^ 

You  have. 
They  have. 

PAST  PARTICIPLES.- 

-First  Conjugation. 

Habl-ado. 

Spoke. 

Estudi-ado. 

Studied. 

Compr-ado. 
Busc-ado. 

Bought, 

Looked  for,  sought. 

Necesit-ado. 

Second  ai 

Needed. 
id  Third. 

Aprend-ido. 
Vend-ido. 

Learned. 
Sold. 

Le-ido. 

Read. 

Beb-ido. 

Drunk. 

Com-ido. 

Eaten,  dined. 

Becib-ido. 

Received. 

Vivido. 

Lived. 

Kesid-ido. 

Resided. 

Escrito   (irregular 

in 

this 

Written. 

participle  only). 

L£S$ON     XI 

Hoy. 
Paris. 

1 

Paris. 

Londres. 

London. 

Madrid. 

Madrid. 

^xC^*L'<fO 

Pano. 

Cloth. 

c 

COMPOSITION. 

89 


To-day. 


Ilabana. 

Ilavana. 

Viena. 

Vienn:i. 

Filadelfia. 

Philadelphia. 

Esquela. 

Note. 

i  Cudndo  ha  escrito  Y.  4  su  padre  ? 

He  escrito  hoy  a  mi  padre. 

^  Ha  recibido  V.  sus  cartas  ? 

Si,  sefior,  las  he  recibido. 

I  Ha  vivido  V.  en  Pan's  ? 

Si,  seiior,  he  vivido  una  semana. 

6  Ha  residido  V.  en  Londres  ? 

Si,  serior,  he  residido  algunos  dias. 

l  Han  comido  ellos  ? 

Si,  senor,  han  comido. 

6  Hemos  leido  bien  nosotros  ? 

Si,  seiior,  Yds.  han  leido  muy  bien. 

^Ilabeis  vendido  vosotros  muchos  pa- 

fiuelos  ? 
Hemos  vendido  muy  pocos. 
6  Cuando  habeis  aprendido  vuestra  lec- 

cion? 
La  hemos  aprendido  hoy. 
I  Habeis  comprado  pan  ? 
Si,  seiior,  lo  hemos  comprado. 
^  Ha  estudiado  V.  aleman  ? 
No,  seiior,  no  lo  he  estudiado. 
I  Ha  liablado  V.  con  el  Frances  ? 
Si,  senor,  he  hablado  con  61. 


When  have  you  written  to  your  father  ? 

I  have  written  to  my  father  to-day. 

Have  you  received  your  letters  ? 

Yes,  sir,  I  have  received  them. 

Have  you  lived  in  Paris  ? 

Yes,  sir,  I  have  lived  a  week. 

Have  you  resided  in  London  ? 

Yes,  sir,  I  resided  some  days. 

Have  they  eaten  (or  dined)  ? 

Yes,  sir,  they  have  eaten. 

Have  we  read  well  ? 

Yes,  sir,  you  have  read  very  well. 

Have  you  sold  many  handkerchiefs  ? 

We  have  sold  very  few. 

When  have  you  learned  your  lesson  ? 

We  have  learned  it  to-day. 

Have  you  bought  bread  ? 

Yes,  sir,  we  have  bought  it. 

Have  you  studied  German  ? 

No,  sir,  I  have  not  studied  it. 

Have  you  spoken  with  the  Frenchman  ? 

Yes,  sir,  I  have  spoken  with  him. 


EXPLANATION. 


47.  Tenek  and  IIaber.     To  have,  used  as  an  active  verb, 
is  translated  by  tener^  as  an  auxiliary,  by  haher ;  as, 


Tener  caballos, 
Tengo  oro. 
Habcr  hablado. 
Hemos  hablado. 


To  have  horses. 
I  have  gold. 
To  have  spoken. 
We  have  spoken. 


When  the  auxiliaries  to  have  and  to  be,  followed  by  an  infi- 


40  LESSONXII. 

nitive,  denote  Bome  future  action,  to  Jmve  is  rendered  by  tener 
que,  and  to  he  bj  haher  de  ;  as, 

Tcnemos  que  escribir.  I  "We  have  to  write. 

Homos  de  recibir  dincro.  |  We  are  to  receive  money. 

48.  Pketerit  Indefinite. — This  tense  not  only  refers  to 
what  is  past,  but  also  conveys  an  allusion  to  the  present  time ;  as, 

Alejandro  ha  estudiado  el  cspauol.      |      Alexander  has  studied  Spanish. 

It  must  also  be  used  when  we  speak  indefinitely  of  any 
thing  past,  as  happening  or  not  happening  in  the  day,  year, 
or  age,  in  which  we  mention  it ;  as, 

He  escrito  hoy  muchas  cartas.         |      I  have  written  many  letters  to-day. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  ^Ila  escrito  V.  sus  cartas?  No,  seflor,  ho  cscrito  los  ejercicios  de 
la  leccion. 

2.  I  Ila  recibido  V.  sii  dinero  ?     Si,  seflor,  lo  ho  recibido. 

8.  I  Ha  escrito  V.  d  su  hermana?  Si,  sefior,  he  escrito  hoy  d  mi  her- 
mana. 

4.  I  Cuando  ha  recibido  V.  los  peri6dicos  de  Paris  ?  Los  he  recibido 
hoy. 

5.  ^Ha  leido  V.  mi  libro?     Si,  seflor,  lo  he  Icido. 

6.  I  Han  vivido  Vds.  en  L6ndres  ?    Si,  seflor,  liemos  vivido  una  semana. 

7.  I  Ila  coraido  V.  ?     Si,  seflor,  he  comido. 

8.  I  Ha  leido  V.  la  carta  de  mi  hermano  ?    Si,  seflora,  la  he  leido. 

9.  I  Ila  vendido  V.  su  baston  ?    Si,  seflor,  lo  he  vendido  hoy. 

10.  ^Ha  necesitado  V.  el  libro  de  mi  hermana?    No,  seflor,  no  lo  he 
necesitado. 

11.  ^Ila  buscado  V.  bicn  el  pafluelo?     Si,  seflora,  lo  he  buscado  bien. 

12.  ^Ha  comprado  V.  pan  ?    No,  seflor,  he  comprado  vino. 

13.  ^Ila  aprendido  V.  su  leccion  do  espaflol?    La  he  estudiado,  pero 
he  aprendido  muy  poco. 

14.  ^Ha  hablado  V.  con  mi  padre?    Si,  seflor,  he  hablado  con  61. 

,   15.  ^Ha  estudiado  V.  el  aleman?    Si,  seflor,  lo  he  estudiado  con  un 
Frances. 

16.  J  Ha  vivido  V.  en  la  Habana?    No,  seflor,  he  vivido  en  Filadclfia. 

17.  J  Ha  vendido  V.  muchos  Idpioes?    No,  seflor,  ho  vendido  muy 
pocos. 

18.  ^Ha  recibido  V.  sus  cartas?    No,  seflor,  he  recibido  los  peri6dico9 
del  ju6ves. 


LESSON     XII.  41 

19.  J  Ha  leido  Y.  mi  esquela?    No,  seflor,  no  la  he  leido. 

20.  ^  Ha  buscado  V.  bien  mi  baston  ?    Si,  senor,  lo  ho  buscado  bien. 

21.  ^Ha  comprado  V.  uii  sombrero?     Si,  seiior. 

22.  I  Han  liablado  ellos  a  su  padre  ?     No,  seflor. 

23.  I  Ha  aprendido  V.  el  ingles  ?     No,  seflor,  lo  be  cstudiado  un  poco ; 
pero  no  lo  he  aprendido. 

24.  I  Ha  leido  Y.  el  periodico  de  hoy  ?     Si,  senor,  lo  he  leido. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Have  you  received  your  letters?    Yes,  sir,  I  have  received  them 
to-day. 

2.  Have  you  read  the  newspapers?    Yes,  sir,  I  have  read  them. 

3.  Have  you  written  to  my  sister  ?     No,  sir,  1  have  not  written  to 
her  (le). 

4.  Have  you  received  your  letters  from  Yienna?    I  have  received 
them. 

5.  Have  you  read  the  English  newspapers?    Yes,  sir,  I  have  (read 
them). 

G.  Have  you  dined  with  your  sister?    I  have  dined  with  her. 

7.  Have  you  bought  your  hat  ?     I  have  bought  it  to-day. 

8.  Have  you  looked  for  my  father  in  Paris  ?     Yes.  sir,  I  have  looked 
for  him. 

9.  Have  you  spoken  with  him  ?    Yes,  sir,  1  have  spoken  with  him. 

10.  "Wliere  have  you  spoken  with  him  ?     I  have  spoken  with  him  at 
his  house. 

11.  Have  you  studied  your  Spanish  lesson?     Yes,  sir,  I  have  studied  it. 

12.  Have  you  learned  it  well?     No,  sir,  I  have  learned  it  httle. 

13.  Have  the  bakers  sold  much  bread?     No,  sir,  they  have  sold  very 
little. 

14.  Has  the  tailor  bought  much  cloth  ?    Yes,  sir,  he  has  (bought). 

15.  Have  they  (fern.)  dined  with  your  sister?    Yes,  sir,  they  have 
dined  with  my  sister. 

16.  Have  they  dined  with  your  brother?    Yes  sir. 

17.  "What  have  they  eaten?     They  have  eaten  bread  and  meat. 

18.  What  have  they  drunk?    They  have  drunk  Avater,  wine  and  ale. 

'    19.  Have  you  spoken  with  the  Spaniard?    Yes,  sir,  I  have  spoken 
with  him. 

20.  Have  you  spoken  with  him  in  Spanish  or  English  ?    I  have  spoken 
with  him  in  English. 

21.  Have  you  received  your  letters  from  Pliiladelphia?    Yes,  sir,  I 
have  received  them. 

22.  Have  you  received  them  all  ?    I  have  received  them  all. 


42 


LESSON     XIII 


2.^.  Have  you  lived  in  London  ?    No,  sir,  I  have  lived  in  Vienna. 

24.  Have  you  lived  with  your  father  ?    No,  sir,  I  have  lived  with  my 

brother. 


LESSON  XIII. 


Querer. 

Querido. 
Quiero.  -^'i'Ou^^  .yx.^t^<'^ 
Qui  ores. 
Qiiiere. 


To  wish,  to  be  willing,  to  love. 

AVished,  loved,  dear. 
I  wish,  or  am  willing. 
Thou  wishest. 
He  wishes. 


Queremos. 
Quereis. 
Quieren. 
Desear. 


Mio. 
Tuyo. 

Suyo. 

Nuestro. 

Vuestro. 


We  wish. 
You  wish. 
They  wish. 
To  desire. 

POSSESSIVE   PKONOrXS. 

My,  or  mine. 
Thy,  or  thine. 
His,  hers  or  its. 
Our,  or  oui*s. 
Your,  cr  yours. 


Amigo. 
Primo. 
Dinero. 


Friend. 
Cousin. 
Money. 


Util.      cr-O-XjU^^ 

Useful. 

Caro. 

Dear. 

Barato. 

Cheap. 

Vigo.     A  ^ 
J6ven.'*C^-  ^^<^^      ^ 

Old. 
Young. 

Rico. 

Eich. 

Pobre. 

Poor. 

Amiga. 
Prima. 
Moneda. 


Friend. 
Cousin. 
Coin. 


COMPOSITION. 


\  Quiero  V.  un  sombrero  ? 
No,  scfior,  quiero  un  baston. 
I  Quiere  V.  mucho  d  su  primo  ? 
SI,  Bcfior,  le  quiero  mucho. 


Do  you  wish  a  hat  ? 

No,  sir,  I  wish  a  cane. 

Do  you  love  your  cousin  much  ? 

Yes,  sir,  I  love  him  much. 


LESSON     XIII 


43 


I  Quicre  Y.  escribir  ? 

No,  seiior,  quiero  leer. 

I  Quiere  V.  hablar  con  mi  hermana  ? 

Si,  senor,  quiero  hablar  con  ella. 

I  Qaicre  V.  comprar  el  caballo  de  nues- 
tro  araigo  ? 

Si,  sciior,  quiero  comprar  el  caballo  del 
amigo  de  V. 

I  Quieres  escribir  a  mi  herraano  ? 

Si,  soiior,  quiero  escribirle. 

I  Tiene  V.  mi  baston  ? 

No,  seiior,  tengo  el  mio. 

(,  Tiene  1  ellas  nuestros  libros  ? 

Si,  seiior,  tienen  los  de  Vds. 

6  Es  viyo  su  padre  de  V.  ? 

Si,  seiior,  es  un  poco  viejo. 

6  Es  joven  su  hermana  de  V.  ? 

Si,  senor,  es  muy  joven. 

I  Es  pobre  el  comerciante  ? 

No,  seiior,  es  muy  rico. 

6  Ha  escrito  V.  a  su  amigo  ? 

Si,  senor,  he  escrito  hoy  a  mi  amigo. 

I  Ha  hablado  V.  con  su  prima  ? 
No,  seiior,  he  hablado  con  mi  amigo. 
I  Donde  vive  su  primo  de  V.  ? 
Vive  en  Filadelfia. 


Do  you  wish  to  write  ? 

No,  sir,  I  wish  to  read. 

Do  you  wish  to  speak  to  my  sister  ? 

Yes,  sir,  I  wish  to  speak  to  her. 

Do  you  wish  to  buy  our  friend's  horse  ? 

Yes,  sir,  I  wish  to  buy  your  friend's 

horse. 
Do  you  wish  to  write  to  my  brother  ? 
Yes,  sir,  I  wish  to  write  to  him. 
Have  you  my  cane  ? 
No,  sir,  I  have  mine. 
Have  they  our  books  ? 
Yes,  sir,  they  have  yours. 
Is  your  father  old  ? 
Yes,  sir,  he  is  rather  old. 
Is  your  sister  young  ? 
Yes,  sir,  she  is  very  young. 
Is  the  merchant  poor  ? 
No,  sir,  ho  is  very  rich. 
Did  yoa  write  to  your  friend  ? 
Yes,  sir,  I  have  written  to  my  friend 

to-day. 
Have  you  spoken  with  your  cousin  ? 
No,  sir,  I  have  spoken  with  my  friend. 
Where  does  your  cousin  live  ? 
He  lives  in  Philadelphia. 


EXPLANATION. 

49.  Mio,  tuyo,  suto,  nuestro,  vuestko,  change  the  final 
o  into  a,  to  form  the  feminine  termination. 

50.  In  Spanish,  the  possessive  pronouns  always  agree  witJi 
the  name  of  the  thing  possessed,  in  gender,  number,  and  case ;  as, 

Nuestra  gramatica.  I  Our  grammar. 

Nuestros  Ubros.  j  Our  books. 

61.  When  used  as  pronominal  adjectives,  they  precede  the 
noun  with  which  they  agree ;  and  it  is  to  be  observed  that,  in 
this  case,  mio,  tuyo  and  suyo  drop  their  final  syllable ;  as, 


Nuestros  caballo3. 
Mi  pluma. 
Tu  papel. 
Su  cuadema 


Our  horses. 
My  pen. 
Thy  paper. 
His  copy-book. 


44  LESSON   XIII. 


Mis  plumas. 
Tus  papcles. 
Sus  cuadernoa. 


My  pens. 
Thy  papers. 
His  copy-books. 


52.  Mio,  when  used  in  the  vocative  case — that  is,  in  ad- 
dressing persons — is  placed  after  the  noun  governing  it ;  as, 

Escribe,  hijo  mio.  |  Write,  my  son. 

53.  When  posscssives  are  used  as  pronouns,  they  agree  in 
gender,  number  and  case  with  the  noun  which  they  represent, 
and  are  preceded  by  the  definite  article ;  as. 


Tu  gramdtica  y  la  mia. 
Do  mis  muchachos  y  los  tuyos. 
Su  hermano  y  el  nucstro. 
Sus  zapatos  y  los  nmstros. 
Tus  caballos  y  los  suyos. 


Thy  grammar  and  mine. 
Of  my  boys  and  thine. 
His  brother  and  ours. 
His  shoes  and  ours. 
Thy  horses  and  theirs^  &c. 


54.  PossEssivES  are  preceded  by  the  neuter  article,  when 
they  are  indefinitely  used ;  as, 

Lo  mio,  lo  tuyo,  lo  suyo.  (  What  is  mine,  what  is  thine,  what  is  his. 

55.  "When  the  possessive  pronoun  is  connected  with  the 
noun  by  the  verb  to  be,  the  article  is  omitted ;  as, 


Este  billetc  es  mio. 

Esa  carta  es  tuya. 

El  caballo  es  suyo. 

Muchachos,  ^  es  este  vuestro  libro  ? 

Nines,  6  es  este  el  vuestro  ? 


Tins  note  is  mine. 
That  letter  is  thine. 
The  horse  is  his. 
Boys,  is  this  your  book  ? 
Children,  is  this  yours  i 


56.  VuESTEO,  vuESTRA,  is  chiefly  used  in  addressing  per- 
sons in  very  high  positions ;  as, 

Scuor,  vucstra  patria  lo  cxijc.  |  Sir,  your  country  demands  it. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  jQuiero  V.  vino?    No,  scfior,  quicro  agua. 

2.  ^Quieren  Vds.  mis  libros?    No,  seflor,  queremos  los  nuestros. 

3.  ^Tienen  ellos  nucstros  peri6dicos?     No,  seflor,  ellos  tienen  los 
euyos. 

4.  ^Ticnc  V.  nucstro  libro  ?     No,  seflor,  yo  tengo  cl  mio. 

D.  ^Teneis  vuestros  cjercioios?    Si,  seflor,  tenemos  los  nuestros. 

C.  ^Es  vieja  su  amiga  do  V.  ?     No,  seflor,  cs  joven. 

7.  ^Es  rico  el  comerciante?    Si,  seflor,  cs  muy  rioo. 

8.  I  Vendo  barato  ?    No,  seflor,  compra  barato ;  pero  vende  cara 


LESSON     XIII.  45 

9.  I  Es  util  la  gramatica  ?    Si,  seflor,  es  mny  titil. 

10.  ^Quiere  V.  rnuclio  d  su  hermana?     Si,  senor,  la  qiiiero  mucho. 

11.  ^Quiere  V.  beber  vino?    No,  sefior,  quiero  beberagua. 

12.  I  Quiere  V.  comprar  un  pafmelo  de  algodon  ?    No,  sefior,  quiero 
comprar  uno  de  seda. 

13.  I  Quiero  V.  vivir  en  nuestra  casa?  No,  sefior,  quiero  vivir  en  la  mia. 

14.  I  Qiiiere  V.  estudiar  espafiol  ?     Si,  sefior,  quiero  estudiarlo. 

15.  ^  Que  quieren  ellos  ?     Quieren  hablar  con  V. 

16.  I  Quiere  V.  ir  {to  go)  u  mi  casa  el  martes?   No,  sefior,  quiero  ir  hoy. 

17.  gNeceslta  V.  un  libro?     Si,  sefior,  necesito  el  mio. 

18.  I  Necesita  V.  hablar  con  el  abogado  ?    No,  sefior,  necesito  hablar 
con  el  comerciante. 

19.  ^Necesita  su  prima   un  Idpiz?      No,  sefior,  ella  no  lo  necesita. 

20.  2 Ha  querido  V.  mucho  a  su  padre?     Si,  seflor,  le  ho  querido 
mucho. 

21.  2  Ha  necesitado  Y.  dinero?    No,  sefior,  he  necesitado  amigos. 

22.  ^Ha  escrito  V.  sus  cartas?     Si,  sefior,  las  he  escrito. 

23.  I  Ha  leido  V.  los  periodicos  ?    Si,  sefior,  los  he  leido  hoy. 

24.  I  Quiere  V.  aprender  espafiol  ?    Si,  sefior,  quiero  aprcnderlo. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Do  you  wish  to  eat  anything?    No,  sir,  I  wish  to  drink. 

2.  What  do  you  wish  to  drink  ?    I  wish  to  drink  water. 

3.  Do  you  wish  to  speak  to  your  brother  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  wish  to  speak 
to  him  ije). 

4.  Do  you  wish  to  learn  Spanish  ?     No,  sir,  I  wish  to  learn  French. 

5.  Do  they  wish  to  live  in  New  York  ?    No,  sir,  they  wish  to  live  in 
Philadelphia. 

6.  Have  you  read  your  note  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  have  read  it. 
'^Y.  Do  you  want  some  wine  ?    No,  sir,  I  want  some  water. 

8.  Do  they  want  my  book  ?     Yes,  sir,  they  want  your  book. 

9.  Does  your  brother  want  to  speak  to  my  father?      No,  sir,  ho 
wants  to  speak  to  the  lawyer. 

10.  Did  you  want  my  father's  letter?    No,  sir,  we  did  not  want  your 
father's  letter. 

11.  Did  you  want  any  money?     Yes,  sir,  I  wanted  some. 

12.  Do  you  wish  to  live  in  Franco?    No,  sir,  I  wish  to  live  in  the 
United  States. 

13.  Do  you  wish  to  speak  French  ?    No,  sir,  I  wish  to  speak  Spanish. 

14.  Do  they  wish  to  buy  a  grammar  ?    No,  sir,  they  wish  to  buy  news- 
papers. 


46 


LESSON     XIV. 


15.  Wliat  do  you  wish  to  buy  ?    I  wish  to  bny  a  handkerchief. 

16.  What  do  you  wish  to  read?    I  wish  to  read  the  English  news- 
papers. 

17.  What  do  you  wish  to  drink?    I  wish  to  drink  some  wine  and 
water. 

18.  What  do  they  want  to  sell?    They  want  to  sell  their  horses. 

19.  When  did  you  receive  your  letters  from  England?    We  have  re- 
ceived them  to-day. 

20.  When  did  you  dine  with  your  friends?    I  have  dined  with  them 
to-day. 

21.  Have  you  a  useful  book?    Yes,  sir,  I  have  a  Spanish  grammar. 

22.  Does  the  merchant  sell  his  hats  dear  ?    No,  sir,  he  sells  them  very 
cheap. 

23.  Is  your  friend  young?    N"o,  sir,  he  is  old. 

24.  Arc  you  ricli  ?    No,  sir,  I  am  poor. 

25.  Do  you  wish  to  have  money  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  wish  to  have  it 

26.  Do  your  friend  and  cousin  live  m  New  York?    No,  sir,  they  live 
in  Philadelphia. 


LESSONT    XIV. 

".A^ct.C  Llevar, 

llevado,  tTaery^^' 

^"^^       To  bring,  brought,  to  take 

V  t' '  /..-tv'-;/  f  JEInviar,  enviado. 

To  send,  sent. 

JCf.  „  v » ,  -1  ,^ '  Tomar^ 

tornado. 

To  take,  taken. 

Pagar^  pagado. 

To  pay,  paid. 

Caanto. 

IIow  much. 

Cuantos. 

How  many. 

Bastante. 

Enough. 

Peso. 

Dollar. 

Silla.               Chair. 

Centavo. 

Cent. 

Mesa.              Table. 

Caf6. 

Coffee. 

Cama.            Bed. 

Chocolate 

Chocolate. 

NTJMEBAL  ADJECTIVE9- 

—CARDINAL  NUMBEBfl, 

Uno,  una. 

One.    ^^  C- 

Dos. 

Two.     O^-^'l-Zc 

Tres. 

Three.  '      ^^^-<-^^ 

Caatro. 

Four.                 '  ■ 

Cinco. 

Five. 

LESSON     XIV. 


47 


Seis.       A^Ci^u-^Ji^^  ^ 
Siete.     /^-^o  ^T/x-t^' 
Ocho.    6^-e^uo 
Nueve.  '^V'^'  -  ^ - 
Diez.    .^k  -  ir.'i<  IrS 
Once.  ^/^"'U^.'cx^  ^ 
Doce.  .  ^-^  ^-  "XM^o^-^. 
Trece.  .(yt^o^iy^^  z£iX>^'^ 
Catorce.  JfeaA.-"t<»-t-''— tA^o 
Quince.    ■i'^JU2^\A,^'W^p*^ 
Diez  y  seis. 
Diez  y  siete. 
Diez  y  ocho. 
Diez  y  nueve.  .  ^ 
Veinte.    '^-^'-  --^^^ 


"ttX-i 


Veinte  y  imo,  etc 

Treinta.  /(/t/<x<y'jLt44^'  t^ot 

Cuarenta.      .  /^        / 

Cincnenta.t^A/.^'t/t  — -y^t^T^W 

Sesenta. 

Setenta. 

Ochenta. 

Noventa. 

Ciento. 

Doscientos. 

Trescientos. 

Cuatrocientos. 

Quinientos. 

Seiscicntos. 

Setecicntos. 

Ochocientos. 

Novecicntos. 

Mil. 

Dos  rail. 

Mil  ciento. 

Cieri  mil. 

Un  millon.  -    /.-' 


M. 


Six. 

Seven. 

Eight. 

Nine. 

Ten. 

Eleven. 

Twelve. 

Thirteen. 

Fourteen. 

Fifteen. 

Sixteen. 

Seventeen. 

Eighteen. 

Kineteen. 

Twenty. 

Twenty-one,  &o. 

Thu-ty. 

Forty. 

Fifty. 

Sixty. 

Seventy. 

Eighty. 

Ninety. 

A  or  one  hundred. 

Two  hundred. 

Three  hundred. 

Four  hundred. 

Five  hundred. 

Six  hundred. 

Seven  hundred. 

Eight  hundred. 

Nine  hundred. 

A  or  one  thousand. 

Two  thousand. 

Eleven  hundred. 

A  or  one  hundred  thousand. 

A  or  one  miUion. 


iHan  llevado  mi  sombrero  al  sombre- 

rero? 
SI,  senor,  lo  han  Uevada 


COMPOSITION. 

Have  they  taken  my  hat  to  the  hatter? 


Yes,  sir,  they  have  taken  it. 


43 


LESSON     XIV, 


I  Ha  cnviado  V,  la  carta  h  8u  primo  ? 

La  he  enviado. 

i  Ha  tornado  V.  cafe  ? 

No,  senor,  he  tornado  chocolate. 

I  Cuanto  dincro  tiene  V.  ? 

Tengo  bastante. 

I  Cuunto  tiene  V.  ? 

Tengo  diez  pesos. 

i  Ha  comido  V.  con  su  hermano  hoy  ? 

No,  sefior,  no  he  comido  con  61. 

i  Cu4nto  ha  pagado  V.  al  sombrerero  ? 

Ocho  pesos  y  seis  centavos. 

5  Cudutas  sillas  ha  comprado  V.  ? 

He  comprado  seis. 


Have  you  sent  the  letter  to  year  cousin  f 
I  liave  sent  it. 
Have  you  taken  coffee  ? 
No,  sir,  I  have  taken  chocolate. 
How  much  money  have  you  ? 
I  have  enough. 
How  much  have  you  ? 
I  have  ten  dollars. 

Have  you  dined  with  your  brother  to- 
day? 
No,  sir,  I  have  not  dined  with  him. 
How  much  have  you  paid  to  the  hatter  ? 
Eight  (lo'lars  and  six  cents. 
How  many  chairs  have  you  bought  ? 
I  have  bought  six. 


EXPLANATION. 

NTHklERAL  ADJECTIVES. 

57.  In  tlie  formation  of  compound  numbers,  the  same  order 
is  observed  in  Spanish  as  in  English,  except  as  to  the  place  of 
the  conjunction;  as, 

Mil  ochocientos  sesenta  y  seis.         |  1866. 

58.  All  these  numbers,  except  uno^  one,  and  the  compounds 
of  cientOf  one  hundred,  are  indeclinable. 

69,  Uno  agrees  in  gender  with  the  noun  to  which  it  refers, 
but  drops  the  o  when  it  comes  immediately  before  a  masculine 
noun;  as, 

Uno  de  los  hombres.  One  of  the  men. 

Una  mujer.  A  woman. 

Un  hombre.  A  man. 

Un  gran  caballo.  A  great  horse. 

60.  CiENTO  drops  the  last  syllable  when  it  comes  immedi- 
ately before  a  noun.  Its  compounds  agree  in  number  and 
gender  with  the  nouns  to  which  they  refer  ;  as, 


Cien  hombres  y  den  miyeres. 

(Hento  veinte  y  tres  caballos. 
Dosdentos  Hbros. 
Trascioiicu  ciyaa. 


One  hundred  men  and  one  hundred 

women. 
One  hundred  and  twenty-three  horses. 
Two  hundred  books. 
Three  hundred  boxes. 


LESSONXIV.  49 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  ^Ha  escrito  Y.  sus  cartas?    Sv^seflor,  las  he  escrito. 

2.  I  Las  ha  cnviado  V.  al  correo*T  Si,  seflor,  las  he  enviado  hoy. 
8.  I  Ha  tornado  V.  caf6  6  chocolate  ?    He  tornado  caf4. 

4.  I  Tiene  V.  bastante  dinero  ?    Si,  sefior,  tengo  bastante. 

5.  I  Cuanto  tiene  V.  ?    Tengo  veinte  pesos  y  treinta  centavos. 

6.  I  Cuanto  ha  pagado  V.  d  su  sastre  ?    He  pagado  a  mi  sastre  veinte 
y  cinco  pesos  y  cuarenta  centavos. 

7.  I  Cudndo  ha  comido  V.  con  su  amigo  ?    He  comido  con  ^1  hoy. 

8.  I  Cudntos  caballos  ha  comprado  V.  ?    He  coraprado  ocho. 

9.  I  Ha  comprado  V.  sillas  ?    Si,  sefior,  he  comprado  doce. 

10.  ^  Tiene  V.  mucho  dinero  ?    Tengo  cien  pesos  y  cincuenta  centavos. 

11.  2  Cuanto  tiene  su  hermano  ?     Tiene  quinientos  (500)  pesos. 

12.  I  D6nde  vive  Y.  ?    Yivo  en  Nueva  York. 

13.  ^Qu6  niimero  {number)  tiene  la  casa  de  Y.?    Tiene  el  ntimero 
tiescientos  treinta  y  ocho  (338). 

14.  I  Ha  recibido  Y.  sus  periodicos  de  Paris  ?    Si,  sefior,  los  he  recibido. 

15.  I  Que  ntimeros  ha  recibido  Y.  ?    He  recibido  el  once,  doce,  trece, 
catorce,  y  diez  y  ocho. 

16.  ^Los  ha  leido  Y.?    No,  sefior,  no  los  he  leido. 

17.  ^Cudntos  afios  (year)  ha  vivido  Y.  en  Paris?    He  vivido  cinco. 

18.  ^  Cuantas  lecciones  ha  aprendido  Y.  ?    He  aprendido  trece. 

19.  ^  Cudntas  gramaticas  tiene  Y.  ?    No  tengo  sin o  una. 

20.  I  Qui6n  ha  recibido  hoy  peri6dicos  ?    Nadie  los  ha  recibido  hoy. 

21.  ^Es  rico  el  amigo  de  Y.  ?    Si,  sefior,  tiene  quinientos  mil  (500,000) 
pesos. 

22.  ^Ha  Uevado  Y.  mis  cartas  al  correo?    No  he  Uevado  sino  dos. 

23.  ^Ha  enviado  Y.  mis  zapatos  al  zapatero  ?    Si,  sefior,  los  he  envia- 
do hoy. 

24.  J  Ha  tornado  Y.  muchas  lecciones  de  espafiol?    He  tomado  doce. 

25.  I  Cudnt^  ha  pagado  Y.  a  su  amigo  ?    Tres  mil  ochocientos  cuarenta 
y  cuatro  pesos  (3,844). 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Do  you  wish  to  send  anything  to  your  cousin?    Yes,  sir,  I  wish  to 
send  money  to  my  cousin. 

2.  How  much  money  do  you  wish  to  send  ?    I  wish  to  send  $317. 

3.  "Who  has  taken  the  money  to  the  tailor?    My  cousin  {Jem.)  has 
taken  \\. 

4.  Where  have  you  sent  the  horses  ?    I  have  sent  them  to  Paris. 

5.  How  many  have  you  sent  ?    I  have  sent  two  very  good  ones. 

♦  Correo,  post-oflace. 


60 


LESSON     XV 


C.  My  son,  have  yon  taken  the  $31.50  to  the  baker?    Yes,  sir,  I  have 
(taken  them). 

7.  Has  your  brother  sent  some  chairs  to  your  house  ?    No,  sir,  but  he 
has  sent  some  to  his. 

8.  How  many  has  he  sent  ?    He  has  sent  ten  chairs  and  three  tables. 

9.  Has  the  woman  bought  no  chairs?    Yes,  sir,  she  has  bought 
tventy-six. 

10.  IIo^  many  letters  have  they  written  this  {eata)  week  ?   They  have 
written  three  Imndred  and  ten  letters  and  one  thousand  and  one  notes. 

11.  Which  newspapers  have  you  sent  to  your  father  ?    I  have  sent  him 
numbers  three,  fifteen  and  eighteen. 

12.  Has  he  read  them  all  ?    He  has  read  only  number  fifteen. 

13.  Has  the  butcher  much  money  ?    He  has  $1,000. 

14.  How  much  have  you  sent  to  your  fiiend  (/em.)?    I  have  sent 
$111.17. 

15.  Whom  do  you  wish  to  pay  ?    I  wish  to  pay  my  tailor. 

16.  Where  does  your  tailor  reside?    He  resides  in  Vienna. 

17.  When  have  you  written  to  Alexander?    I  have  written  to  Alex- 
ander to-day. 

18.  Have  you  received  a  letter  from  him  to-day  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  have  re- 
ceived six. 

19.  What  day  do  you  receive  letters  from  France  ?    I  receive  them  on 
Tuesdays  and  Saturdays. 

20.  How  many  has  your  cousin  written  to  you  ?    None. 


LESSOIN"    XY 


Pronunciar,  pronunciado. 
Tocar^  tocado. 

Cantar,  cantado. 
Beinar,  reinado. 

Qomo, 


To  pronounce,  puononnced. 
To  touch,   touched;   to  play, 

played. 
To  sing,  sung. 
To  reign,  reigned. 

How,  like,  as. 


ORDINAL   NUMBERS. 


Primero  (primer  he/ore  a  noun), 

Begundo. 

Tercero  (or  tercer  he/are  a  noun). 


First 

Second. 

Third. 


LESSON     XV. 

Cuarto. 

Fourth. 

Quinto. 

Fifth. 

Sexto. 

Sixth. 

Septimo. 

Seventh. 

Octavo. 

Eighth. 

Noveno,  or  nono. 

Ninth. 

D^cimo. 

Tenth. 

Piano. 

Piano. 

Cancion. 

Song. 

Violin. 

Violin. 

Palabra. 

Word. 

Mtisico. 

Musician. 

Guitarra. 

Guitar. 

Pianista. 

Pianist. 

Historia. 

History. 

Cantor. 

Singer. 

Arpa. 

Harp. 

Tomo  or  voliimen. 

Volume. 

Obra. 

Work. 

Carlos. 

Charles. 

Musica. 

Music. 

Luis. 

Louis. 

Cantora,  cantatriz 

.  Singer. 

Enrique. 

Henry. 

Calle. 

Street. 

Key. 

King. 

Avenida. 

Avenue 

Trabajo. 

Work,  labor. 
COMPO 

3ITI0N. 

51 


I  Corao  pronuncia  Manuel  el  espanol  ? 

Lo  pronuncia  bien. 

i  Toca  V.  la  guitarra  ? 

No,  senor,  toco  el  violin  y  el  piano. 

I  Canta  V.  cancion  es  espanolas  ? 

No,  seaor,  canto  canciones  inglesas. 

4,  Quien  reina  en  Rusia  ? 

Alejandro  Segundo. 

f.  En  que  calle  vive  V.  ? 

Vivo  en  la  calle  Once. 

6  Y  v.,  donde  vive  ? 

Yo  vivo  en  la  calle  Yeinte  y  tres. 

6  Que  toca  el  musico  ? 

Toca  el  arpa,  el  violin  y  el  piano. 

l  Tiene  Y.  el  primer  tomo  de  mi  libro  ? 

^o,  senor,  tengo  el  segundo. 

'l  Ha  leido  Y.  el  tomo  tercero  ? 

No,  senor,  he  leido  el  cuarto, 

I  Cuantos  anos  tiene  Y.  ? 


How  does  Emanuel  pronounce  Spanish  ? 

He  pronounces  it  well. 

Do  you  play  the  guitar  ? 

No,  sir,  I  play  the  violin  and  the  piano. 

Do  you  sing  Spanish  songs  ? 

No,  sir,  I  sing  English  songs. 

Who  reigns  in  Russia  ? 

Alexander  the  Second. 

In  which  street  do  you  live  ? 

I  live  in  Eleventh  street. 

And  where  do  you  live  ? 

I  live  in  Twenty-third  street. 

What  does  the  musician  play  ? 

He  plays  the  harp,  violin  and  piano. 

Have  you  the  first  volume  of  my  book  ? 

No,  sir,  I  have  the  second. 

Have  you  read  the  third  volume  ? 

No,  sir,  I  have  read  the  fourth. 

How  old  are  you  ? 


EXPLANATION. 
61.  The  ordinals  always  agree  in  gender  and  number  witL 


52  LESSONXV. 

the  noun,  expressed  or  understood,  to  which  they  refer,  and  may 
be  placed  eitlier  before  or  after  that  noun  ;  as, 


El  primer  tomo  (or  el  tomo  primero). 

El  primer  buen  libro. 

Los  primeros  cnadernos. 

Las  primcras  Iccciones. 

El  segundo  tomo. 

Las  sescundas  intencioncs. 


The  first  volume. 
The  first  good  boolc 
The  first  copy-booka. 
The  first  lessons. 
The  second  volume. 
The  second  intentions. 


It  has  been  seen,  in  the  list  of  ordinal  numbers  at  the  open- 
ing of  the  present  lesson,  i\\^t  2:>rimero  and  tercero  lose  the  tinal 
letter  when  they  immediately  precede  their  noun,  or  arc  separ- 
ated from  it  only  by  an  adjective.  We  may  observe  here,  that 
tercero  is  by  some  written  entire;  the  contracted  form,  how- 
ever, is  much  to  be  preferred ;  as, 

El  tcrccr  tomo.  |      The  third  volume. 

62.  The  ordinals  are  not  so  frequently  used  in  Spanish  as 
in  English ;  and,  except  primero^  first,  their  place  is  generally 
supplied  by  the  cardinal  numbers ;  as,  for  instance,  in  speaking 
of  the  days  of  the  month,  which  are  expressed  by  cl  dos,  tres, 
ciiatro^  etc.^  the  second,  third,  fourth,  &c.  The  following  are 
the  principal  cases  in  whir*.h  the  ordinals  are  employed:  1st 
with  the  names  of  sovereigns,  popes,  &c. ;  2d,  in  the  enum 
eration  of  books,  chapters,  lessons,  &c.,  and  a  few  others 
but,  even  in  tliese  cases,  after  decimo,  tenth,  they  are,  by  rea- 
son of  their  great  length,  generally  replaced  by  the  numerals 
as. 


Carlos  Quinto. 
Pio  Nono. 
Capftulo  d6cimo. 
Calle  Veinte  y  trcs. 
Luis  Catorce. 


Charles  the  Fifth. 
Pius  the  Ninth. 
Chapter  tenth. 
Twenty-third  street. 
Louis  the  Fourteenth. 


N.  B. — The  definite  article  is  not  required  in  the  above  ex- 
amples. 

COXTERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  ^Pronuncia  V.  bien  el  ingl6s?    No,  sefior,  lo  pronuncio  maL 

2.  I  Es  V.  cantor  ?    No,  sefior,  pero  toco. 
8.  {Qu6  toca  v.?    Toco  el  violin. 


LESSOKXV.  63 

4.  gCanta  bien  su  hermana  de  Y.  ?    No,  seCor,  ella  canta  mal;  pero 
toca  bien  el  piano. 

5.  I  Que  lecoion  estudia  V.  ?     Estudio  la  cuarta. 

6.  ^En  qu6  calle  vive  su  padre  de  V.  ?     Vive  en  la  calle  Catorce. 

7.  I  Que  tomos  ha  leido  V.  ?    He  leido  el  primero,  segundo,  tercero  y 
cuarto. 

8.  I  Cuantos  toraos  tiene  la  obra?    Tiene  seis. 

9.  I  Que  libro  lee  V.  ?  •   Leo  la  historia  de  Carlos  Quinto. 

10.  I  Ha  leido  Y.  la  historia  de  Enrique  Octavo  de  Inglaterra  ?    Si, 
sefior,  la  he  leido. 

11.  ^  Que  tomo  Ice  su  hermana  de  Y.  ?    Leo  el  noveno. 

12.  I  Cuanto  dinero  ha  recibido  Y.  hoy  ?    He  recibido  cincuenta  y  un 
pesos. 

13.  ^Cuantos  hermanos  tiene  Y.?    Tengo  cinco. 

14.  ^Cuantos  afios  tiene  su  hermana  de  Y.?     Tiene  quince. 

15.  I  Cuanto  ticmpo  ha  vivido  Y.  en  Pai'is  ?    He  vivido  seis  afios. 

16.  ^Que  niimero  tiene  su  casa?    El  doscientos  seis  (206). 

17.  gQue  dia  de  la  semana  es  hoy?    Hoy  cs  miercoles. 

18.  ^  Que  hora  tiene  Y.  ?     Las  diez. 

19.  ^  Cuantos  dias  tiene  una  scmana?    Tiene  siete. 

20.  Ocho  y  docc  i  cuantos  son  ?     Son  veinte. 

21.  I  Cuantos  afios  tiene  su  papa  de  Y.  ?     Tiene  sesenta. 

22.  I  Cuantos  dias  tiene  el  afio  ?    Tiene  trescientos  sesenta  y  cinco  (365). 

23.  I  Como  ha  leido  Y.  ?    He  leido  despacio. 

24.  I  Ha  llevado  Y.  mi  piano  al  pianista  ?     Si,  sefior,  lo  he  Uevado. 

25.  I  Ha  cantado  Y.  muclio  hoy  ?    Hoy  ho  cantado  poco. 

26.  ^  Cuando  ha  vcndido  Y.  su  caballo  ?    Lo  he  vendido  hoy. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  "What  book  have  you?    A  music-book. 

2.  How  many  volumes  has  it?     Three. 

3.  Which  volume  have  you  read  ?     The  first. 

4.  Has  your  father  not  read  the  second  volume  ?    No,  sir ;  but  my 
cousin  has  read  it. 

5.  What  arc  you  reading,  miss?    I  am  reading  the  History  of  Charles 
the  Fifth. 

6.  Who  has  sold  your  sister's  History  of  England?     She  has  sold  it. 

7.  Who  has  bought  the  violin?     The  pianist. 

8.  Where  does  he  live  ?     In  Seventeenth  street. 

9.  In  what  street  does  the  butcher  live  ?     In  Sixth  avenue. 

10.  Have  you  bought  good  meat  in  the  butcher's  shop  ?     The  most 
(which)  I  have  bought  is  very  bad. 


54 


LESSON     ZVI. 


11.  What  things  have  you  sent  to  the  tailor?    I  have  sent  stockings, 
vests,  and  pocket-handkercliiefs. 

12.  What  day  of  the  week  is  to-day?    Monday. 

13.  Is  Monday  the  first  day  of  the  week?    No,  sir,  it  Ls  the  second; 
Sunday  is  the  first. 

14.  How  much  money  does  tlic  merchant  require  ?    He  requires  $  1,500. 

15.  How  much  money  do  you  wish  to  send  to  your  friend?    I  wiih  to, 
send  my  friend  $50. 

16.  Does  he  need  much  money?    Yes,  madam,  he  is  very  poor. 

17.  How  many  letters  have  your  brothers  written  to  Emanuel?    Very 
fewj^ 

-"TS.  How  do  your  sisters  pronounce  Spanish  ?    They  pronounce  it  well 
when  tliey  read,  but  not  when  they  speak. 

19.  When  do  they  write  their  exercises?    When  they  have  studied 
their  lessons. 

20.  And  you,  when  do  you  write  yours?    When  my  brothers  write 
theirs. 

21.  How  do  the  poor  buy?     The  poor  buy  dear,  and  the  rich  buy 
cheap. 

^,^^22.  Has  your  father  sold  his  old  horse?    He  has  sold  it. 

23.  Have  you  read  the  History  of  Louis  X  VI.  ?    I  have  read  volumes 
first,  second,  and  third. 


LESSON    XVI. 


Fiit&T  CONJUGATION — Preterit  Definite. 


EalU, 
Habl-aste. 
Habl-6. 

I  spoke. 
Thou  spokest. 
He  spoke. 

Habl-dmos. 
Habl-asteis. 
Habl-aron. 

We  spoke. 
You  spoke. 
They  spoke. 

SECOND    CO 

NVUOATION. 

Aprend-i, 
Aprend-iste. 
Aprend-io. 

I  learned. 
Thou  learn edst 
He  learned. 

Aprend-imos. 
Aprend-isteis. 
Aprend-ieron. 

We  learned. 
You  learned. 
They  learned. 

LESSON"     XVI. 


55 


Escrib-i. 

Escrib-iste. 

Escrib-io. 

Escrib-imos. 
Escrib-isteis. 
Escrib-ieron. 

Pasar. 


Aycr.     Anocbe. 

Antes  de  ayer,  or  anteayer. 

El  alio  pasado. 

El  mes  pasado. 

La  semana  pasada. 

Ante  {prep.). 

Ante  todas  cosas. 

Ante  todo. 

Antes  («^.).      /    ^    n  '    4^ 

Delantc  (a^^.).**^^^'^         • 
Despues  (ac?.)»  C^^c\.<^  -^Uvu.'t/^ 

Mas  {ad^.  ^  ^ 

Menos  (ac?.)./>v*^^' 

Que  {conj.). 


THIRD  CONJUGATION. 

I  wrote. 
Thou  wrote. 
He  wrote. 


TVe  wrote. 
You  wrote. 
They  wrote. 

To  pass,  to  spend  {in  relation 
to  time). 

Yesterday.    Last  night. 

The  day  before  yesterday. 

Last  year. 

Last  month. 

Last  week. 

Eefore,  in  the  presence  of. 

Before  all  things. 

Above  all. 

Before  {refers  to  time). 

Before  {refers  to  place). 

Afterwards,  after. 

More. 

Less,  fewer. 

That,  than. 


COMPOSITION. 


I  Hablo  V.  con  mi  padre  ? 

Si,  boaor,  hable  con  el  ^ntes  dc  ayer. 

^  Han  aprendido  Yds.  su  leccion  ? 
Si,  seiioi-,  la  hemos  aprendido  hoy. 
<:  Cuando  ..^cribio  V.  a  su  hermana  ? 
Escribi  la  semana  pasada  a  mi  hermana. 
I  Ha  recibido  V.  sus    periodicos  del 

mes  pasado  ? 
Sf,  scnor,  los  he  recibido  hoy. 
6  Cuando  vendio  V.  su  caballo  ? 
Lo  vendi  el  ano  pasado. 
^  Estudia  Y.  antes  0  despues  de  comer  ? 

Estudio  &ntes  de  comer. 

i  Habl6  V.  mucho  ante  el  juez  ? 


Did  you  speak  with  my  father  ? 

Yes,  sir,  I  spoke  with  him  the  day  be- 
fore yesterday. 

Have  you  learned  your  lesson  ? 

Yes,  sir,  we  have  learned  it  to-day. 

When  did  you  write  to  your  sister  ? 

I  wrote  to  my  sister  last  week. 

Have  you  received  your  newspapers  of 
last  month  (last  month's  newspapers)?, 

Yes,  sir,  I  have  received  them  to-day. 

When  did  you  sell  your  horse  ? 

I  sold  it  last  year. 

Do  you  study  before  or  after  dining  (or 
dinner)  ? 

I  study  before  dining. 

Did  you  speak  much  before  the  judge  f 


66 


LESSON     XVI. 


No,  senor,  habl6  muy  poco. 

I  Que  libro  tiene  V.  delantc  ? 

Tcngo  la  gramatica  espanola. 

j  Escribio  V.  sus  cartas  ? 

Si,  sefior,  las  escribi  el  domingo  pasa- 

do. 
I  Come  V.  m6no8  que  yo  ? 
Ko,  senor,  como  mas  que  V. 
I  Ha  visto  V.  a  su  amigo  ? 
Si,  senor,  lo  vi  ayer. 
gDonde  lo  vio  V.? 
Lo  vi  delante  dc  la  iglesia. 

i  Hablo  V.  con  6\  ? 

Si,  senor ;  pero  muy  poco. 

I  Ha  comido  V.  ? 

Si,  sciiora,  he  comido  pan  y  lie  bebido 

vino. 
i  Ha  Icido  V.  y  estudiado  sus  ejercicios  ? 

Si,  seiior,  los  he  leido  y  estudiado. 

I  Ha  escrito  V.  h  su  padre  ? 

Si,  sefior,  escribi  ayer. 

i  Cuando  ha  recibido  V.  las  cartas  de 

el? 
Las  he  recibido  hoy. 
I  Ha  enviado  V.  mis  cartas  despues  de 

las  suyas  ? 
Las  he  enviado  Antes. 
i  Hablo  V.  ante  el  rey  ? 
No,  seiior,  hable  ante  el  juez. 
i  CuAnto  tiempo  ? 


No,  sir,  I  spoke  very  little. 
What  book  have  you  before  you  ? 
I  have  the  Spanish  grammar. 
Did  you  write  your  letters  ? 
Yes,  sir,  I  wrote  them  last  Sunday. 

Do  you  eat  less  than  I  ? 

No,  sir,  I  eat  more  than  you. 

Have  you  seen  your  friend  ? 

Yes,  sir,  I  saw  him  yesterday. 

Where  did  you  see  him  ? 

I  saw  him  before  (in  front  of)  the 
church. 

Did  you  speak  with  him  ? 

Yes,  sir ;  but  very  little. 

Have  you  dined  ? 

Yes,  sir,  I  have  eaten  bread  and  drunk 
wine. 

Have  you  read  and  studied  your  exer- 
cises ? 

Yes,  sir,  I  have  read  and  studied  them. 

Have  you  written  to  your  father  ? 

Yes,  sir,  I  wrote  yesterday. 

When  have  you  received  the  letters 
from  him  ? 

I  have  received  them  to-day. 

Have  you  sent  my  letters  after  yours  ? 

I  (have)  sent  them  before. 
Bid  you  speak  before  the  king  ? 
No,  sir,  I  spoke  before  the  judge. 
How  Ions  ? 


EXPLANATION. 


63.  The  Preterite  Definite  refers  to  a  time  past,  and 
generally  specitied  in  the  sentence,  and  denotes  the  thing  or 
Action  past  in  such  a  manner  that  nothing  remains  of  that 
time  in  which  it  was  done;  as. 


Escribi  &  mi  padre  en  el  afio  1804. 
Aprendi  el  francos  el  afio  pasado. 


I  wrote  to  my  father  in  the  year  1864. 
I  learned  French  last  year. 


In  colloquial  language,  the  preterite  indefinite  (which  has 
been  treated  of  in  Lesson  xii.),  is  sometimes,  though  incorrect' 


LESSON     XVI.  57 

ly,  substituted  for  the  preterite  definite.     The  following  example 
will  show  the  impropriety  of  such  a  substitution : 
He  eserito  k  mi  padre  ayer.  |  I  have  written  to  my  father  yesterday. 

Nothing  remains  of  yesterday ;  it  is  time  past,  and  has  no 
connection  with  the  present ;  and,  as  it  has  been  already  seen 
that  the  preterite  indefinite  conveys  an  allusion  to  the  pi'esent 
time,  the  incorrectness  of  tbe  foregoing  example  is  at  once 
apparent. 

We  may,  however,  say  with  propriety  : 

Escribi  la  carta  a  las  tres,  a  las  cua-  I  I  wrote  the  letter  at  three  o'clock,  at 
tro,  etc.  I      four  o'clock,  &c. 

for  the  time  specified  is  completely  past. 

64.  Ante. — This  preposition  means  be/ore,  or  in  the  pres- 
ence of',  as, 

Hablo  ante  el  juez.  j  He  spoke  before  the  judge. 

And  it  sometimes  denotes  priority,  antecedence,  &c. ;  as, 
Ante  todas  cosas.  |  Before  all  things. 

65.  Mas,  fnoi*e ;  Meitos,  less,  fewer. — These  two  adverbs  are 
used  to  form  the  comparative  degree  of  several  adjectives, 
which  last  they  always  precede  in  the  sentence  ;  as, 

El  vino  es  mas  caro  que  la  cerveza.      I  Wine  is  dearer  than  beer. 
Yo  soy  mas  rico  que  V.  |  I  am  richer  than  you. 

When  used  to  express  some  quality  or  circumstance  re- 
specting verbs,  their  usual  place  in  the  sentence  is  immediate- 
ly after  these  last ;  as, 

Yo  escribo  mas.  I  I  write  more. 

Tu  hablas  menos.  \  Thou  speakest  less. 

It  is  needless  to  observe  here,  that  mas  and  menos  are  then> 
selves  the  comparatives  of  mucho  and  poco,  respectively. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  I  Cndndo  habl6  V.  con  el  abogado  ?    Habl6  con  61  anteayer. 

2.  jHa  hablado  V.  con  mi  hermana?  No,  senor,  hable  ayer  con  su 
atnigo  de  V. 

3.  ^Ha  hablado  V.  con  cl  pianisfca  ?    Si,  senor,  le  habl6  ayer. 


68  LESSON     XVI. 

4.  J  Ha  aprendido  V.  su  leccion?    No,  scflor;  pero  he  escrito  el 
ejcrcicio. 

5.  I  llan  aprendido  ellos  sus  lecciones  de  frances  ?    Si,  seflor,  ban 
aprendido  las  de  frances  y  de  espanol. 

,  G.  I  Cuando  aprendi6  su  herinana  d  tocar  el  piano  ?    Aprendi6  el  afio 
pasado. 

7.  I  Ha  leido  Y.  la  historia  de  los  Estados  Unidos  ?    He  leido  el  tomo 
priniero  y  el  segundo. 

8.  ^Ha  leido  V.  la  carta  de  su  hermana  y  la  de  su  amiga?    He  leido 
la  de  mi  hennana;  pero  no  la  de  mi  amiga. 

9.  I  Qu6  ha  leido  V.  hoy  ?    He  leido  los  ejercicios  de  la  semana  pasada. 

10.  i  Cuando  compr6  V.  su  caballo  ?    Lo  corapr6  el  mes  pasado. 

11.  jDonde  haldo  V.  con  mi  padre?    Delante  de  su  casa  de  V. 

12.  iLcy6  V.  la  carta  de  su  padre  antes  que  la  de  su  hermano?    No, 
sellor,  la  lei  despucs. 

13.  ^Cuando  rcsidio  V.  en  Paris?    Residi  fintes  que  V. 

14.  I  Cudntos  afios  tiene  su  hermana  ?    Tiene  veinte. 

15.  jCuantos  pesos  pago  V.  el  mes  pasado  al  comerciante?    Quinien- 
tos. 

16.  I  Ha  llevado  V.  mis  zapatos  al  zapatero?    Si,  sefior,  los  llcv6  ayer. 

17.  ^Cudndo  ha  recibido  V.  su  dinero?    Lo  recibi  anteayer. 

18.  I  Ha  escrito  V.  despues  quo  escribi6  mi  padre?    No,  sefior,  cscribi 
dntes. 

19.  ^Escribi6  V.  su  carta  despues  que  recibio  la  de  su  hermano?    SI, 
sefior,  la  cscribi  mucho  despues. 

20.  ilia  hablado  V.  con  la  madre  dntes  que  con  la  hija?    No,  sclior, 
habl6  dntcs  con  la  hija  que  con  la  madre. 

21.  ^Estudio  V.  su  leccion  de  ayer?     No,  sefior,  estudi^  la  de  dntes  de 
ayer ;  pero  no  he  estudiado  la  de  ayer  ni  la  de  hoy. 

22.  I  ITabl6  V.  ante  el  jucz  ?    Si,  sefior,  habl6  ante  cl  juez  y  ante  cl  rey. 

23.  I  Habla  V.  mas  que  yo  ?    No,  sefior,  hablo  m6nos ;  pero  cscribo 
mas. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Did  you  speak  more  yesterday  than  to-day?    I  spoke  less;  but  I 
read  more. 

2.  IIow  many  newspapers  did  your  father  read  yesterday  ?  Very  few. 
8.  How  old  is  your  sister  ?     She  is  nineteen. 

4.  Who  took  the  vest  to  the  tailor  last  year?    The  baker  took  it. 

6.  How  mucb  did  the  tailor  pay  to  the  baker  afterwards?    $59.10. 
6.  Did  he  receive  the  vest  after  or  before  the  coat  ?    Ho  received  ii 

after. 


LESSON     XVII. 


59 


7.  Did  yonr  sisters  sing  yesterday  ?    Yes,  sir,  they  sang  and  played. 

8.  What  did  they  sing  ?    They  sang  S[)anish  songs  and  played  on  tho 
piano. 

9.  Have  you  (j^lural)  played  to-day  ?    No,  madara,  we  have  not 
played ;  but  we  have  written  our  French  exercises. 

10.  How  many  words  have  your  brotlicrs  written  in  Spanish  to-day? 
Fewer  than  last  Thursday. 

11.  Do  they  speak  more  English  than  Spanish?    Ko,  madam,  they 
speak  more  Spanish. 

12.  What  have  the  singers  received  from  Paris  ?    They  have  received 
some  good  songs  and  French  music. 

13.  Have  the  singers  (fern,)  enough  Spanish  music?    Yes,  sir,  they 
have  received  some  to-day. 

14.  Did  they  sing  well  last  month?    Not  very  well. 

15.  Who  sang  in  your  house  the  day  before  yesterday  ?    Nobody  sang. 

16.  How  long  did  you  reside  in  Vienna?    Five  years,  six  months,  and 
thirteen  dnys. 

17.  How  many  churches  has  Paris?    Paris  has  many  churches. 

18.  How  did  your  cousins  pronounce  their  Spanish  yesterday?    Very 
well. 

19.  Are  you  a  musician?    Yes,  madam. 

20.  Is  your  sister  a  pianist  or  a  singerj  or  does  she  play  on  tlK3  guitar? 
She  sings  and  plays  on  the  piano. 

21.  When  did  you  speak  before  the  judge?    Tho  day  before  yesterday 
and  last  week. 

22.  Do  you  sing  much  with  the  musicians?    I  sing  a  little;  but  be- 
fore all  things  I  study  my  Spanish  lessons. 


r 


.     LESSON    XVII 

Trabajar,  viyCLXy-^^&e^Ui^'  ^(.^^ 
Mandar ' 


Quien,  quicnes, 

A  quien,  a  quicnes. 

iQu6? 

Cual,  cuales. 

Cuyo  {maac.  sing.\  cuya  {/em.' 

sing.). 
Cuyos    {masc.  plural)^   cuyas 

(fern,  plural). 
Varios.     Algunas  veces. 


To  work. 

To  command,  to  send. 


Who. 

Whom,  to  whom. 

What  (inter.),  who,  that,  or  which.' 

Which  one,  which  ones. 


Whose,  which,  or  of  whom. 
Several.    Sometimes. 


,  f,    Ketrato. 

Criado. 

Concicrto. 

Teatro. 

Mcrcado. 

Parque. 
f  ^^jJuan. 
f.i^'Trabajador. 
/y  jc     Ultimo  (a). 


LESSON     XVII 


Portrait. 

Pantaloons. 

Servant. 

Concert. 

Theatre. 

Market. 

Park. 

John. 

Workman. 

Last. 


Criada.         ^  ^     Servant 
Iglesia.€--^^-    Church. 
Calle.A^^J^i;  Street. 
V\txzai.U^^^^^^  Square,  market,      y 
Company.  ^V**<4.y^ 


Compania.  ^  

Juana. '^^'^t-^i^^t^t/  Jane 


CL^ 


COMPOSITION. 


i  Es  viejo  el  caballero  d  guien  V.  hablo 

en  el  concierto  ? 
No,  senor,  pero  lo  es  la  senora  que  ha 

hablado  con  V.  en  el  teatro. 
I A  qui  en  busca  V.  ? 
Busco  a  la  scnorita  d  quien  V.  busca. 

i  Qui6n  es  el  joven  que  ha  hablado  con 

v.? 

Es  un  criado  del  hotel. 

El  rauchacho  que  lee,  y  alcual  V.  man- 
do  trabajar,  es  mi  hermano. 

La  gramatica  qite  el  tiene,  y  en  la  cual 
estudia,  es  mia. 

El  caballero  cuija  casa  Y.  compro  es 
amigo  mio.  -VXS^'n^L^ 

El  comerciante  cxiyo  vino  V.  compro, 
vende  muy  barato. 

El  libro  en  que  Iccmos. 

La  senora  d  quien  habl6  cs  mi  madrc. 

^Manda  V.  bus  niuos  al  Parque  Cen- 
tral ? 

i  A  qui6n  manda  V.  tralwyar  ? 

A  mis  criados. 

I  Juan  I 

I  Sciior !  ^  qu6  manda  V.  ? 

Quiero  la  comida. 

iEn  donde  trabajan  hoy  los  trabaja. 
dores  ? 

Trabjyan  en  la  calle. 


Is  the  gentleman  to  whom  you  spoke 

at  the  concert  old  ? 
No,  sir ;  but  the  lady  who  spoke  to  you 

at  the  theatre  is  (so). 
For  whom  do  you  look  ? 
I  am  looking  for  the  young  lady  that 

you  look  for. 
Who  is  the  young  man  that  has  spoken 

with  you  ? 
He  is  a  servant  in  the  hotel. 
The  boy  that   reads,  and  whom  you 

commanded  to  work  is  my  brother., 
The   grammar  which    he   has,  and   in 

which  he  studies,  is  mine. 
The  gentleman  whose  house  you  bought 

is  my  friend. 
The  merchant  whose  wine  you  bought 

sells  very  cheap. 
The  book  in  which  we  read  (or  which 

we  read  in). 
The  lady  I  spoke  to  Is  my  mother. 
Do  you  send  your  children  to  the  Cen- 
tral Park  ? 
Whom  do  you  command  to  work  ? 
My  servants. 
John  ! 

Sir !  what  do  you  wish  ? 
I  wish  my  dinner. 
Where  do  the  workmen  work  t'Vday? 

They  work  in  the  street 


LESSON    XVII.  61 

EXPLANATION. 

66.  QtiiEN. — The  relative  pronoun  quien  refers  to  persons 
only,  and  is  always  preceded  by  the  preposition  d,  when  gov- 
erned by  a  verb  ;  as, 

El  hombre  d  quien  V.  quiere.  I  The  man  whom  you  love. 

67.  Who,  coining  immediately  after  its  antecedent,  is 
translated  by  que ;  when  it  stands  alone,  or  is  governed  by  a 
preposition,  it  is  rendered  by  quien ;  as, 

El  muchacho  que  estudia.  I  The  boy  who  studies. 

La  muchacha  con  quien  hablas.  |  The  girl  with  whom  you  speak. 

68.  CuAL  and  que  relate  to  persons  and  things ;  as, 

The  boy  that  reads,  and  whom  you 
commanded  to  work,  is  my  brother. 

The  grammar  which  he  has,  and  in 
which  he  studies,  is  mine. 


El  muchacho  qite  lee,  y  al  cual  V. 

mando  trabajar,  es  mi  hermano. 
La  gramatica  que  el  tiene,  y  en  la 

cual  estudia,  es  mia. 

69.  CuYO  also  refers  to  persons  and  things,  but  agrees  with 
the  word  by  which  it  is  immediately  followed ;  as, 


El  caballero  cuya  casa  V.  compro  es 

amigo  mio. 
El  comerciante  cuyo  vino  Y.  compro 

vende  muy  barato. 


The  gentleman  whose  house  you  bought 

is  my  friend. 
The  merchant  whose  wine  you  bought 

sells  very  cheap. 


This  pronoun  partakes  of  the  nature,  both  of  the  relatives 
and  the  possessives. 

70.  In  English  the  preposition  does  not  always  precede  the 
relative  pronoun ;  but  in  Spanish  it  is  indispensable  to  place 
the  preposition  before  the  relative ;  as. 

El  lit^ro  en  que  leemos.  I  The  book  which  we  read  in  (or,  in 

I      which  we  read). 

71.  The  relative  pronoun  can  never  be  suppressed  in  Span- 
ish ;  so  that  we  cannot  say,  as  in  English,  the  lady  I  spoke  to, 
but,  in  full ;  as. 

La    senora    d  quien  hable,  es    mi  I  The  lady  to  whom   I   spoke    is    my 
madre.  |      mother. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  £  A  qui^n  mand6  V.  ayer  al  mercado  ?    Maiid6  d  mi  criado  Juan. 

2.  ^Cuul  do  sus  criados  trabaja  mas?    Juan  trabaja  mas  que  todos. 

■    3.  I  Qui6n  cs  el  hombre  d  qui^n  V.  busca?    El  hombre  4  quien  busco 
es  trab^ador. 


62  LESSON     XVII. 

4.  I  Quien  es  el  caballero  con  quien  liablo  V.  ayer  en  el  concicrtot 
Es  ua  Cibcipulo  mio. 

6.  ^  A  quien  quiere  V.  hablar  ?  Quiero  hablar  a  la  seflorita  que  toca 
cl  piano. 

6.  I  Como  pasaron  Vds.  el  tiempo  en  el  carapo  ?  Lo  pasamos  muy 
bien  en  compaflia  de  nuestros  amigos. 

7.  ^Es  frances  el  comerciante  a  quien  compro  V.  el  caballo  ?  Si, 
sefior,  es  el  Frances  cuja  casa  compr6  V. 

8.  ^Manda  (en via)  V.  sus  niflos  al  Parqno  Central?  Si,  sefior,  Ids 
mando  al  Parque  Central. 

9.  I  Con  quien  los  en  via  V.  ?     Con  sus  primos. 

10.  ^Que  libro  quiere  V.  leer?     Quiero  leer  el  de  Manuel. 

11.  ^No  quiere  V.  leer  el  que  yo  tengo?     No,  sefior,  quisro  leer  el  de 
Alejandro. 

12.  ^  A  quien  manda  V.  trabajar  ?    A  mis  criados. 

13.  J  Juan!     ;  Sefior!     ^  Que  manda  V.  ?     Quiero  la  comida. 

14.  ^Canta  Y.  bien?    No,  sefior;  pero  la  sefiorita  que  reside  en  sa 
casa  de  V.  canta  muy  bien. 

15.  ^Estudia  V.  mucho?     No,  sefior,  pero  trabajo  mucbo. 

16.  ilia  estudiado  V.  hoy  su  leccion?    No,  sefior,  la  estudie  ayer;  hoy 
ho  escrito  los  cjercicios. 

IT.  ^Como  pronuncia  su  maestro  de  V.  el  espafiol?    Lo  pronuncia 
bien  ;  pero  pronuncia  muy  mal  el  ingles. 

18.  ^  Toco  y.  ayer  el  piano  en  casa  de  sus  amigos  ?    Si,  sefior,  tocamos 
y  can  tamos. 

19.  ^Qu6  cantaron  Vds.?      Cantamos  canciones  espafiolas  y  la  can- 
cion  americana  llamada,  "  The  Star  Spangled  Banner." 

20.  jCaballeros!  ^Quieren  Vds.  tomar  chocolate  6  caf6?     Queremos 
beber  vino. 

21.  I  Cuantos  dias  pas6  V.  en  el  campo  ?    Pas6  toda  una  semana. 

22.  jPorqu6  no  pasa  V.  un  mes  en  el  campo  con  nosotros?    Porquo 
necesito  residir  en  la  ciudad. 

23.  I  Cual  de  sus  amigos  habla  bien  espafiol  ?    El  que  estudia  mucho 
habla  bien. 

24.  I  Cual  do  sus  hermanos  estudia  mas  ?    El  mas  pequefio. 

25.  I  De  quien  recibe  V.  cartas  ?     De  mi  padre  y  mis  hermanos. 

26.  I  Es  de  V.  el  libro  en  el  cual  estudia  su  hermano  ?     No,  sefior,  es 
suyo. 

27.  iTrabaj6  V.  mucho  ayer?    No,  sefior;  pero  he  trabtyado  mucho 
hoy. 

28.  I  Cuando  estudia  V.  sus  lecciones  ?    Las  estudio  los  nii6rcoles  j  los 
sdbados. 


LESSON     XVII.  63 


EXERCISE. 


1.  "Whose  is  the  portrait  (which)  you  sent  me  yesterday  ?    It  is  the 
portrait  of  my  brother  who  lives  in  Germany. 

2.  Which  portrait  have  you  sent  to  Charles?    I  have  sent  no  portrait 
to  Charles;  but  I  have  sent  mine  to  the  musician. 

8.  With  whom  did  you  spend  last  week  ?    I  spent  last  week  with  my 
cousin  John. 

4.  In  which  city  of  France  does  the  pianist's  brother  live  ?    He  lives 
in  the  city  in  which  your  sister  Jane  resides. 

5.  To  whom  did  you  send  the  first  volume  of  your  work  ?    I  sent  it 
to  Louis. 

6.  Whom  do  you  order  to  work  ?    My  servant  John. 

7.  Who  is  the  lady  you  are  looking  for  ?     She  is  the  mother  of  the 
singer  (fern.)  whose  piano  Charles  bought  last  year. 

8.  W^ith  whom  did  you  send  your  children  to  the  concert  last  night? 
I  sent  them  with  a  servant. 

9.  With  which  servant  did  you  send  them  ?     With  one  of  mine  (my 
own). 

10.  In  which  church  does  Miss  Garcia  sing  ?  She  sings  in  Twenty- 
eighth  street  church. 

11.  How  did  you  {plural)  pass  the  time  in  Philadelphia?    Yery  well. 

12.  Did  you  study  many  lessons  ?  We  studied  very  little,  and  neither 
read  nor  wrote  our  exercises. 

13.  How  much  did  you  write  the  day  before  yesterday?  I  studied  a 
good  deal,  but  wrote  little. 

14.  Which  volumes  of  Robertson's  History  has  your  son  ?  He  has  re- 
ceived the  first,  second,  third  and  fourth. 

15.  Did  you  buy  any  books  at  the  bookstore  in  Walker  street?  Yes, 
madam,  I  bought  the  History  of  Charles  V.  and  some  music  books. 

16.  Whom  have  yon  paid  with  the  money  I  sent  you?  I  have  paid 
the  man  who  worked  in  my  house  yesterday. 

17.  Does  your  servant  work  much  ?    No,  sir ;  but  she  reads  a  great  deal. 

18.  From  whom  do  you  receive  letters  every  day  ?  I  receive  letters 
from  Henry  on  Mondays,  Wednesdays  and  Fridays,  and  from  my  father 
on  Tuesdays. 

19.  Who  has  the  boots  that  I  bought  in  Fourth  avenue?  John  has 
taken  them  to  his  cousin  who  lives  in  Philadelphia. 

20.  Has  your  servant  bought  any  good  meat  in  the  market  ?  Ho  has 
not  bought  any  to-day. 

21.  How  many  songs  have  you  received  from  Spain  ?  I  have  received 
several  from  Spain  and  two  from  England. 


64 


LESSON     XVIII. 


22.  Have  yon  sung  any  of  them  ?    None  ;  but  my  sister  sang  one  or 
two  last  night  at  the  concert. 

23.  Are  they  very  good  ?     One  of  them  is  very  good,  and  my  cousin 
{fern.)  sings  it  very  well. 

24:.  How  many  pencils  does  the  hatter  wish  ?    He  wants  twelve  pen- 
cils and  three  penknives. 

25.  Does  Louisa  play  much  on  the  piano?    No,  sir,  she  is  very  lazy, 
and  will  neither  play  nor  study. 

26.  The  tailor  has  a  handsome  vest,  very  cheap ;  will  you  buy  it  ?    I 
do  not  wish  to  buy  a^vest ;  but  I  want  pantaloons. 

27.  Has  he  any  pantaloons  ?    He  has  none,  he  sold  them  all  last  week. 


LESSOR  XYIII, 


Ir, 


Togo. 


PEESENT. 


Voy. 

I  go  (or,  am  gomg). 

Vas. 

Thou  goest. 

Va. 

He,  or  she,  goes. 

Vamos. 

We  go. 

Vais. 

You  go. 

Van. 

They  go. 

PEETEBIT 

DEFINITE. 

Fui. 

I  went. 

Fuisto. 

Thou  wentcst 

Fu6. 

He,  or  she,  went. 

Fuimos. 

We  Went. 

Fuisteis. 

You  went. 

Fueron. 

They  went 

PEES 

ENT. 

Yenir, 

To  come. 

Vengo. 

I  come  (or,  am  coming). 

Vienes. 

Thou  com  est. 

Vicne. 

He,  or  slie,  comes. 

Vcniraos. 

Wo  come. 

Venis. 

You  come. 

Vienen. 

They  come. 

LESSON     XVIII. 


65 


PEliTEJilT 

DEFINITE. 

Vine. 

I  came. 

Viniste. 

Thou  earnest. 

Vino 

He,  or  she,  came. 

Vinimos. 

"We  came. 

Yinisteis. 

You  came. 

Vinieron. 

Thc7  came. 

DEMONSTEATIVE   PEONOUNS. 

Singular. 

Masculine. 

Feminine. 

Neuter. 

Este. 

Esta. 

Esto. 

This. 

Ese. 

Esa. 

Eso. 

That. 

Aquel. 

Aquella. 

Aquell 

d. 

That  (yonder). 

Plural. 

Estos. 

Estas. 

No  neuter. 

These. 

Esos. 

Esas. 

(( 

Those. 

Aqucllos. 

Aquellas. 

a 

Those  (yonder). 

EUo. 

1              It. 

Aqui,  aca. 

Here. 

Ahi. 

iCUlll 

Alii,  alld,  i 

There. 

Porqud. 

Why. 

Porque. 

Because. 

L4J0S. 

Far. 

Cerca. 

ITcar. 

Otro.    Ambos. 

Another.     Both. 

Ni  uno  ni 

otro  (ind.  pro.). 

Neither. 

Profesor. 

Professor. 

Juana.            Jane. 

Discipulo. 

Pupi 

I. 

Discipula.       Pupil. 

Lado. 

Side. 

Zapateria.       Shoemaker's  shop. 

Jardin. 

Garden. 

Manteca.        Butter. 

COMPO 

SITION. 

<t  De  quien  es  este  libro  que  tengo  aqui? 
Ese  que  tiene  V.  ahi,  y  esle  que  yo  ten- 
go  aqui,  son  del  profesor. 

iQui6n  63  aquel  caballero  que  reside 

alii  del  otro  lado  de  la  calle  ? 
Aquel  cabellero  es  mi  discipulo. 


Whose  book  is  this  which  I  have  here  ? 

That  one  which  you  have  there,  and  this 
one  which  I  have  here,  are  the  pro- 
fessor's. 

Who  is  that  gentleman  who  resides 
there  on  the  other  side  of  the  street  ? 

That  gentleman  is  my  pupiL 


66 


LESSON     XVIII, 


I  Adonde  va  V.  ? 

Voy  alia,  al  otro  lado  del  parque. 

^  No  quiere  V.  venir  aca  de  este  lado  ? 

No,  senor,  voy  alia  del  otro  lado. 

i  Quiere  V.  comprar  aquel  libro  ? 

No,  seiior,  quiero  comprar  esc  otro. 

I  Quiere  V.  venir  al  teatro  con  nosotros  ? 

Fso  quioro. 

6  Llevo  V.  aqudlo  a  la  sastrcria  ? 

Lo  llevo. 

I  Manda  V.  algo  mas  ? 

No,  eao  cs  todo. 

i  Envio  V.  el  chaleco  L  la  sastreria,  y 

las  botas  a  la  zapateria  ? 
Envie  lo  uno  y  lo  otro  {or  ambos). 
I  Fueron  k  su  casa  de  V.   el  mddico 

francca  y  el  profesor  aleman  ? 
Vino  aqud^  pero  no  vino  este. 

f,  Hablo  V.  de  aqudlo  k  mi  madre  ? 

No,  seiior,  pero  liable  de  ello  a  su  pa- 
dre de  V. 

En  mi  casa  y  en  la  de  su  hermano  de  V. 

El  jardin  de  esta  casa  y  el  de  la  que  V. 
compro. 

Este  caballo  y  d  de  mi  amigo. 


Where  do  you  go  ? 

I  go  there  to  the  other  side  of  the  park. 

Will  you  not  come  here  to  this  side  ? 

No,  sir,  I  go  there  to  the  other  side. 

Do  you  w  idh  to  buy  that  book  ? 

No,  sir,  I  wish  to  buy  that  other  one. 

Will  you  come  to  the  theatre  with  us  ? 

That  (is  what)  I  wish. 

Bid  you  take  that  (thing)  to  the  tailor's  ? 

I  did  (or  I  took  il). 

Do  you  command  anything  more  (or 
have  you  any  more  commands)  ? 

No,  that  is  all. 

Did  you  send  the  vest  to  the  tailor's, 
and  the  boots  to  the  shoemaker's  ? 

I  sent  both. 

Did  the  French  physician  and  the  Ger- 
man professor  go  to  your  house  ? 

The  former  came,  but  the  latter  did  not 
come. 

Did  you  speak  of  that  to  my  mother  "f 

No,  sir,  but  I  spoke  of  it  to  your  father. 

In  my  house  and  ia  your  brother's. 
The  garden  of  this  house  and  that  of 

the  one  you  bought. 
This  horse  and  my  friend's  (that  of  my 
friend). 


EXPLANATION. 

72.  The  demonstrative  pronouns  este^  this,  e^e,  aquel^  that, 
are  thus  declined : 

Este,  ese,  aquel  {masc.  sing.). 
Esta,  esa,  aquella  {fern.  sing.). 
Estos,  esos,  aquelloa  {masc.  plural). 
Estas,  esas,  aquellas  {fern,  plural). 
Esto,  eso,  a^uello  {neuter). 

73.  Este  is  used  to  point  out  what  is  near  to  us,  and  cor- 
responds to  the  meaning  of  the  adverb  Aere;  ese  points  out 
that  which  is  at  some  distance,  and  corresponds  to  the  adverb 


LESSON     XVIII.  67 

there ;  and  aquel  denotes  remoteness,  and  corresponds  to  the  ad- 
verb yonder  \  as, 

Esle  libro  que  tengo  a^"^- 


E^iC  que  tiene  V.  ahi. 
Aquel  que  llevo  V.  alld. 


This  book  which  I  have  here. 
Thai  one  which  you  have  there. 
That  one  which  you  took  there. 


74.  When  the  pronouns  este^  ese  precede  the  adjective  otrOy 
another,  they  may  sometimes  be  written  together,  so  as  to  form 
but  one  word  with  it,  in  the  following  manner : 


Estotro.  ' 

Estotros.  • 

Estotra. 

This  other. 

Estotras. 

These  others. 

Esotro. 

That  other. 

Esotros. 

Those  others. 

Esotra.    , 

Esotras. 

These  forms,  however,  are  now  rarely  used. 

75.  The  demonstrative  pronouns,  in  their  quality  of  adjec- 
tives, are  used  also  as  neuter.  Eso,  that,  is  the  most  used  of 
the  three,  and  almost  as  much  as  the  personal  pronoun  lo^  and 
in  the  same  manner;  as, 

Eso  se  hara.  I  That  will  be  done. 

jEso  es  !  I  That  is  it ! 

76.  The  former  and  tJie  latter  is  translated  in  Spanish  by 
aquel  and  este ;  thus. 


La  aplicacion  y  la  pereza  hacen  al 
horabre  muy  diferente  ;  aquella  le 
eleva  y  esta  le  rebaja. 


Industry  and  slothfulness  have  a  very 
different  effect  upon  man ;  the  former 
elevates  him,  the  latter  lowers  him. 


77.  When  in  English  the  demonstrative  pronoun  that  is 
followed  by  the  preposition  of,  or  either  of  the  relatives  who, 
which^  expressed  or  understood,  referring  to  a  noun  already 
mentioned,  the  definite  article,  in  the  corresponding  number 
and  gender,  is  employed  in  Spanish  ;  as, 


En  mi  casa  y  en  la  de  su  hermano  de 

V. 
El  jardin  de  esta  casa  y  el  de  la  que 

V.  oompro. 
Este  caballo  y  el  do  mi  amigo. 


In  my  house  and  in  your  brother's. 


The  garden  of  this  house  and  that  of 

the  one  (which)  you  bought. 
This  horse  and  my  friend's  (t.  c,  thaf 
of  my  friend). 

78.  English  personal  pronouns,  followed  by  a  relative  not 
agreeing  in  case,  are  generally  rendered  in  Spanish  by  the  de- 
monstrative ;  as, 

Quiero  comprar  a  ag-Mc^foa  que  renden  I  I  want  to  buy  from  them  who    sell 
barato.  |      cheap. 


68  LESSON     XVIII. 

79.  Aqui,  aliJ,  aca,  alla. — Although  the  adverbs  aqui, 
here,  alll,  yonder,  are  employed  as  synonyms  of  oca,  here,  and 
alldj  yonder,  respectively,  we  must  observe  that  aqitl  and  allt 
refer  to  a  place  more  circumscribed  or  determinate  than  oca, 
alia ;  for  the  same  reason  we  can  say,  mas  acd,  mas  alia, 
nearer,  farther ;  and  we  cannot  say,  ma3  aqu'i^  more  here,  m,as 
alll,  more  there. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  ^Yiene  Y.  del  campo?    No,  seflor,  voj  alia. 

2.  I  De  dondc  viene  su  amigo  de  V.  ?    Yiene  de  Espafla. 

3.  ^  Adonde  va  Y.  este  afio  ?     Este  aflo  quiero  ir  a  Paris. 

4.  I  De  quien  es  ese  retrato  que  ticne  Y.  ahi  ?  Este  que  tengo  aqui 
es  el  de  mi  padre,  y  aqucl  que  tienc  su  araigo  de  Y.  alii,  es  dc  mi  madre. 

5.  jEs  discipulo  do  Y.  el  caballero  que  reside  en  aquella  hermosa 
casa  ?  No,  seflor ;  pero  su  prima,  quo  reside  de  este  otro  lado  de  la  calle, 
es  mi  discipula. 

C.  I  Ya.  Y.  a  su  casa  todos  los  dias  ?  No,  seflor,  voy  alU  los  lunes, 
mi^rcoles  y  viernes. 

7.  I  Cudntas  lecciones  toma  el  caballero  que  vino  ayer  a  su  casa  de  Y.  ? 
Toma  dos  d  la  semana. 

8.  ^ Quien  trabaja  mas,  el  profesor  6  cl  discipulo?  El  uno  y  el  otro 
trabajan  mucho. 

9.  I  Es  este  nifio  su  liijo  de  Y.  ?     Si,  sefior,  cs  mi  liijo  Manuel. 

10.  j Manuel!  jquieres  venir  aqui  d  mi  lado?    No,  seflor,  no  quiero  ir. 

11.  ^Porqu6?     Porque  quiero  ir  con  mi  padre. 

12.  I  Cudntos  nifios  tiene  Y.  ?    Tengo  cinco,  tres  nifias  y  dos  nifios. 

13.  jQuicre  Y.  venir  con  nosotros  al  Parque  Central?    No,  seflor,  por- 
que tengo  quo  ir  con  mis  niflos  al  campo. 

14.  I  Ila  de  ir  Y.  (tiene  Y.  que  ir)  hoy  ?    Si,  seflor,  tengo  quo  ir  hoy. 

15.  ^No  quiere  Y.  venir  acd  dc  este  lado?'   No,  sefior,  voy  alld  del 
otro  lado. 

10.  ^Llev6  Y.  aqnello  d  la  sastreria?     Si,  seflor,  lo  llev6. 

17.  jManda  Y.  algo  mas?    No,  eso  cstodo. 
'    18.  ^Ilablo  Y.  do  aqucUo  d  mi  amigo?    No,  seflor;  pero  habl6  de  cllo 
&  su  hcrmano. 

19.  J  En  donde  trab£y6  Y.  ayer  ?    Trabf^j6  en  la  casa  do  Y.  y  en  la  do 
su  hermnno. 

20.  I  Trab£y6  Y.  en  mi  jardin  6  en  cl  de  mi  amigo  ?    Trabiy6  en  el  uno 
y  en  el  otro. 


LESSON     XVIII.  eO 

21.  I  Ad6nde  va  Y.  d  trabajar  hoy  ?     Yoj  a  trabajar  en  cl  jardin  de 
esta  casa  y  en  el  do  la  que  V.  compr6  el  ailo  pasado. 

22.  I  Llevo  V.  mis  botas  a  la  zapateria,  y  compi*6  V.  el  pan  que  necesita- 
raos  ?    Lleve  las  botas  ;  pero  no  be  comprado  cl  pan. 

23.  ^Que  llevas  ahi,  Alejandro?    Llevo  mis  libros. 

24.  gQa6  quiere  tu  hermano?    Quiere  pan  y  manteca. 

25.  I  Pago  V.  al  sastre  ?    Si,  seilor,  ayer  pague  al  sastre,  y  hoy  he  pa- 
gado  al  zapatero. 

26.  ^  De  quien  son  csos  caballos?    Estc  es  el  de  mi  padre,  y  aquel  es  el 
de  mi  hermano. 

27.  I  Cual  es  el  de  Y.  ?    Yo  no  tengo  ninguno. 
23.  I  Quiere  Y.  tencr  uno  ?     Quiero  tener  muchos. 

20.  ^Escribio  Y.  la  carta  y  la  leccion?    Escribi  aquella,  pero  no  ho 
escrito  esta. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Do  you  go  to  church  every  day  ?    I  only  (solo)  go  on  Sundays. 

2.  Where  is  your  servant  Jane  going?     She  is  going  to  the  bakery  to 
buy  bread. 

nJ  3.  Do  your  music  teacher  (maestro)  and  your  Spanish  professor  come 
to  your  house  every  day  ?  Tlie  former  comes  every  day,  but  the  latter 
only  comes  on  Tuesdays  and  Saturdays. 

4.  "Which  of  the  two  works  the  more  ?    Both  have  to  work  much. 

5.  Which  of  tlje  two  horses  is  the  older,  this  one  here  or  that  one 
there  ?    This  one  here  is  the  younger. 

6.  Have  you  that  letter  which  you  received  last  Monday  ?    I  have  not 
that  one;  but  I  have  here  the  one*  I  received  the  day  before  yesterday. 

Y.  Who  has  written  these  two  histories,  that  of  France  and  that  of 
America  ?    Eollin  has  written  the  former,  and  Robertson  the  latter. 

8.  Does  the  piano  teacher  live  far  from  here  ?     The  piano  teacher 
does  not  live  far  from  here  ;  but  the  French  professor  lives  very  far. 

9.  Is  that  all  (lo  que)  your  brother  has  studied?     Yes,  sir,  that  is  all. 

10.  Which  lesson  have  you  studied?     I  have  studied  the  one  (la  que) 
we  read  the  other  day. 

11.  Which  did  we  read,  the  fifteenth  or  the  sixteenth?   We  read  both. 

12.  Which  one  do  you  wish  to  read  first  ?  I  require  to  read  the  former., 

13.  W^hy  do  you  require  to  read  the  former?    Because  I  have  not 
studied  it  well. 

14.  Which  exercise  have  you  there  ?     I  have  mine  and  my  brother's. 

15.  Is  your  brother  not  coming  to  take  his  lesson  to- day?    No,  sir,  he 
has  to  take  his  music  lesson  to-day. 

16.  John  I     Sirl 

•  La  qn«. 


70 


LESSON     XIX. 


17.  Have  you  taken  my  coat  to  the  tailor's?  Yes,  sir,  I  took  it  last 
night. 

18.  Have  you  paid  that  man  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  have  paid  him  to-<lay. 

19.  How  much  have  you  paid  him  ?  I  have  paid  him  three  dollars  and 
seventy-five  cents. 

20.  Why  did  you  pay  him  three  dollars  and  seventy-five  cents  ?  Be- 
cause he  worked  one  day  in  this  garden,  and  two  in  that  of  the  Twenty- 
third  street  house. 

21.  How  many  pupils  have  you?  I  have  thirty:  seventeen  learn 
Spanish  and  the  thirteen  others  French. 

22.  Do  they  study  well?  Some  of  them  study  very  well;  but  none 
write  their  exercises  well. 

23.  When  do  you  sing  and  play  on  the  piano  ?  I  study  my  lessons 
before  singing  and  playing. 

24.  Who  is  that  gentleman  that  came  from  Vienna  last  month  ?  Tliat 
gentleman  is  the  one  to  whom  I  spoke  last  week  at  the  concert. 


LESSON    XIX. 

Bacer. 
Haciendo. 
Hecho. 

To  do,  or  to  make. 
Doing,  making. 
Done,  made. 

PEESENT. 

Hago. 
Haces. 
Hace. 

I  do,  or  make. 

Thou  doest,  or  makest. 

He  does,  or  makes. 

Hacemos. 

Haceis. 

Ilacen. 

We  do,  or  make. 
You  do,  or  make. 
They  do,  or  make. 

PEETEBIT  DEFINITE. 

Hicc. 

Hiciste. 

Hizo. 

I  did,  or  made. 

Thou  didst,  or  madest 

He  did,  or  made. 

Hicimos. 
Hicisteis, 
Hicieron. 

We  did,  or  made. 
You  did,  or  made. 
They  did,  or  made. 

Partir. 

Marchar. 

Cambiar. 

To  set  out,  to  depart,  to  divide^ 
To  go,  set  out,  set  ofi",  to  march. 
Change. 

LESSON     XIX, 


71 


PEEPOSinONS. 


Para. 

For,  or  in 

order  to. 

Asi. 

So,  thus. 

Por. 

By,  for,  through. 

Entro. 

Between, 

among. 

Hasta. 

Until,  even. 

Hacia. 

Towards. 

Sin. 

Easta  donde. 

Without. 

How  far. 

Pedro. 

Peter. 

Helena. 

Helen. 

Escritor. 

Writer. 

Escritora 

Writer  {female). 

Escriban( 

).     Notary. 

Tienda. 

Store,  shop. 

Estado. 

State. 

Provincia. 

Province. 

Medico. 

J  Physician. 
1  Doctor. 

Manera. 
Escritura. 

Manner. 
Writing,  convey- 

Cuarto. 

Room. 

ance. 

Aragon. 

Aragon. 

Comida. 

Dinner. 

Tio. 

Uncle. 

COMPO 

i 
SiTlON. 

y  i  Qu6  hizo  V.  ayer  en  su  cuarto  ? 

Estudie  mi  leccion. 

i  Que  ha  hecho  Y.  hoy  ? 

He  escrito  los  ejercicios. 

i  Que  hace  el  zapatero  en  la  zapateria  ? 

Hace  zapatos  y  betas  para  Y. 

^Tiene  Y.   papel  para    escribir    una 

carta  ? 
Si,  scfiora,  lo  tcngo. 
I  Quiere  Y.  escribir  uia  carta  por  mi 

herraano  ? 
•  I  Para  qui^n  es  la  carta  ? 
"Es  para  Manuel. 
Yo  parte  para  Madrid. 
/  Para  donde  parte  Y.  ? 
Parto  para  los  Estados  Unidos. 
6  Hablo  Y.  a  su  padre  por  rai  hermano  ? 

HabU  jDor  61  h  mi  padre  y  6  roi  tio. 


What  did  you  do  yesterday  in  your 

room  ? 
I  studied  my  lesson. 
What  have  you  done  to-day  ? 
I  have  written  my  exercises. 
What  does  the  shoemaker   do  in  the 

shoe-shop  ? 
He  makes  shoes  and  boots  for  you. 
Have  you  paper  to  write  a  letter  ? 

Yes,  madam,  I  have. 

Will  you  write  a  letter  for  my  brother  ? 

For  whom  is  the  letter  ? 

It  is  for  Emanuel. 

I  set  out  for  Madrid. 

For  where  do  you  set  out  ? 

I  set  out  for  the  United  States. 

Did  you  speak  to  your  father  for  my 

brother  ? 
I  spoke  for  hiaa  to  my  father  and  to  my 

undo. 


72 


LESSON     XIX 


f,  Ilabla  y.  bien  cl  franccs  ? 

Lo  hablo  muy  bien,  y  liasta  paso  por 

frances. 
^  For  cuanto  vendio  V.  el  caballo  ? 
Lo  vcndi  por  doscientos  cincuenta 


I  Necesita  V.  cnviar  j9or  algo  ? 

Necesito  enviar  por  el  medico. 

/  Por  qu6  envia  V.  ? 

Envio  por  vino. 

6  Vive  V.  para  comer  ? 

No,  sen  jr,  como  pai'a  vivir. 

^  Marcho    ayer  mucho    el  regimiento 

Soptimo. 
Marcho  hasta  el  Parque  Central 


Do  you  speak  French  well  ? 

I  speak  it  very  well,  and  I  even  pass 
for  a  Frenchman. 

For  how  much  did  you  sell  the  horse  ? 

I  sold  it  for  two  hundred  and  fifty  dol- 
lars. 

Do  you  want  to  send  for  anything  ? 

I  want  to  send  for  the  physician. 

What  do  you  send  for  ? 

I  send  for  wine. 

Do  you  live  to  eat  ? 

No,  sir,  I  eat  to  Uve. 

Did  the  Seventh  regiment  march  much 
(far)  yesterday  ? 

They  marched  to  the  Central  Park. 


EXPLANATION. 

80.  Paea  and  Por. — As  both  these  prepositions  very  fre- 
quently answer  to  the  English  /or,  they  are  apt  to  be  con- 
founded by  foreigners.  Such  confusion  may,  however,  be 
avoided  by  bearing  in  mind  the  following  rules  : 

Para  expresses  aim,  object,  destination. 

Por  conveys  the  idea  of  want  or  requirement,  substitution, 
favor,  duration  of  time,  direction,  &c.     Examples  : 

-WITH   PAEA. 


Papel  joara  escribir. 
Paper  for  writing. 
Este  libro  63  para  V. 
This  book  is  for  you. 
Parto  para  Nueva  York. 
I  start  for  New  York. 
Comer  para  vivir. 
To  eat  to  live. 

Trabajo  para  ganar  la  vida. 

I  work  in  order  to  earn  a  living. 

Para  cl  domingo. 

For  Sunday. 

Estc  caballo  cs  para  su  padre  do  V. 

This  horse  is  for  your  father. 

Lo  bare  para  tu  hermano. 

I  shall  do  it  for  thy  brother. 


"WITH  pon. 
Escribe  por  mi  hermano. 
I  write  for  my  brother. 
Cambio  mi  sombrero  por  el  suya 
I  changed  my  hat  for  his. 
Pasa  por  docto. 

lie  passes  for  a  man  of  learning. 
Vender^  la  casa  por  diez  mil  pesos. 
He  will  sell  the  house  for  ten  thousand 

dollars. 
Trabajo  jRor  gnnar  la  vida, 
I  work  to  (endeavor  to)  cam  my  living; 
nabl6  por  tu  amigo. 
I  spoke  for  (in  favor  of)  thy  friend. 
Envio  por  pan. 
I  send  for  bread. 
Lo  har6  por  tu  hermano. 
I  will  do  it  for  thy  brother  (for  thy 

brother's  sake). 


LBSSOiq^xix.  73 

81.  Entee. — ^The  general  meaning  of  this  preposition  is 
between  and  amongst ;  as, 

Entre  los  dos.  Between  the  two. 

Entre  Y.  y  yo.  Between  you  and  me. 

Entre  todos.  Amongst  all. 

82.  Hasta  signifies  till^  until,  even^  to,  as  many  as,  as  far 
asx  as. 


Hasta  el  domingo. 
Pasaron  hasta  mil. 
Yoy  hasta  el  Parque  Central. 
Estudio    el    espanol    hasta    que  lo 
aprendio. 


Till  (or  until)  Sunday. 

As  many  as  a  thousand  passed. 

I  go  as  far  as  the  Central  Park. 

He  studied  Spanish  till  he  learned  it. 


CONYERSATION  AND  YERSION. 

1.  |Escribi6  Y.  la  carta  para  su  padre,  y  los  ejercicios  de  la  leccion  de 
espafiol  ?    Hice  aquello ;  pero  no  he  hecho  esto. 

2.  ^Tiene  Y.  papel  para  escribir  una  carta?     Si,  seiior;  pero  tengo 
que  escribir  dntes  mis  ejercicios. 

3.  ^Hizo  el  sastre  mi  casaca?    La  hizo. 

4.  I  Que  ha  hecho  el  zapatero  ?    Ha  hecho  unas  botas  para  Y.  y  unos 
zapatos  para  Manuel. 

5.  I  Para  donde  parte  Y.  ?    Parto  para  los  Estados  Unidos. 

6.  I  Quiere  Y.  escribir  una  carta  por  mi  hermano  ?     Si,  sefior,  i  para 
qui^n  es  la  carta?    Es  para  Dn.  Manuel. 

7.  I  Hablo  Y.  6,  su  padre  por  mi  hermano  ?    Habl6  por  61  a  mi  padre 
y  d  mi  amigo. 

8.  ^Habla  Y.  Men  el  frances?    Lo  hablo  muy  bien,  y  hasta  paso  por 
frances,. 

9.  I  Por  cuanto  vendio  Y.  la  casa  ?    La  vendi  por  ocho  mU  pesos, 

10.  I  Por  que  envia  Y.  ?    Envio  por  mis  libros. 

11.  ^  Yive  Y.  para  comer  ?     No,  sefior,  como  para  vivir. 

12.  ^March6  Y.  ayer  con  el  regimiento  Septimo?    March^  hasta  el 
Parque  Central. 

13.  ^Es  Dn.  Pedro  escritor?    Ko,  sefior,  J)n.  Pedro  es  escribano. 

14.  I  De  que  manera  hace  Y.  eso  ?    Lo  hago  asi. 

15.  iQn^  hizo  Y.  ayer?    Estudi6  la  leccion  de  espafiol,  y  hoy  he 
escrito  los  ejercicios. 

16.  ^Tiene  Y.  que  trabajar  mas  que  yo  ?    Tengo  que  escribir  mas  que 
Y. ;  pero  no  tengo  que  trabajar  mucho. 

17.  ^Hacia  donde  van  Yds.  ?    Yamos  hacia  la  iglesia. 

18.  ^  En  d6nde  vive  Y.  ?    Yivo  en  la  Cuarta  avenida  mimero,  trescien- 
tos  treinta  y  ocho,  entre  las  calles  Yeinte  y  cinco  y  Yeinte  y  seis. 

4 


14  LESSON     XIX. 

19.  ^Para  qu6  quiere  V.  mi  libro  ?    Para  leerlo. 
\20.  I  Qui6n  pag6  la  comida  ?     La  pagumos  entre  todos. 

21.  I  Marchan  bieii  estos  hombres?     Marchan  muy  bien. 

22.  I  Por  d6nde  pasaron  Vds.  cuando  fueron  d  la  iglesia  ?    Pasamos 
por  la  calle  Veinte  y  tres. 

23.  I  Es  esa  sefiora  escritora  ?     Si,  seJior,  y  escribe  muy  bien. 

24.  I  De  qu6  pais  es  V.  ?     Soy  de  Espafia. 

25.  I  De  qu6  provincia  ?    De  Aragon. 

26.  I  Pronuncian  bien  el  espafiol  en  Aragon  ?    Lo  pronuncian  mny  bien. 

27.  ^  Hablan  bien  el  ingl6s  en  los  Estados  Unidos  ?    Lo  hablan  bien. 

28.  g  Quiere  V.  venir  d  mi  casa  para  comer  con  nosotroa  ?    No,  seflor, 
porque  tengo  que  ir  a  comer  a  casa  de  mi  amigo. 

EXERCISE. 
1.  How  far  did  the  Seventh  regiment  march  yesterday  ?    They  ^t) 
marched  to  the  Central  Park, 
s/      2.  Did  your  sister  set  out  yesterday  for  Philadelphia?    No,  madam, 

she  did  not  set  out  yesterday, 
^i      3.  When  does  she  start  ?     She  starts  to-day. 

4.  What  does  your  servant  look  for  ?    He  looks  for  my  cousin's  (fern.) 
letter. 

5.  What  do  you  do  to  learn  Spanish  ?    I  study  the  lessons  of  my 
Spanish  grammar  and  read  good  writers. 

6.  To  whom  did  you  speak  last  night  at  the  concert  ?     I  spoke  to  the 
physician  for  Peter. 

7.  Who  is  that  man  who  came  to  your  house  last  night  ?    He  is  my 
brother's  servant. 

8.  Do  you  speak  Spanish  well  ?     No,  sir ;  but  I  speak  Italian  very 
well,  and  I  even  pass  for  an  Italian  {italiano). 

9.  How  did  your  uncle  spend  the  day  yesterday  ?    Studying  his  les- 
sons and  writing  to  Madrid. 

10.  Will  your  uncle  write  a  letter  for  (in  favor  of)  Charles?    He  will 
write  it. 

11.  Do  the  young  ladies  want  to  send  for  anything?    They  want  to 
bend  for  the  physician. 

12.  For  what  do  they  send  for  the  physician?    To  speak  for  their 
servant  {fern.). 

13.  Wljere  does  ho  live  ?     In  Fifth   avenue,  between  Twenty-fourth 
and  Twentyrfifth  streets. 

14.  Wliere  do  you  send?    I  send  to  the  shoemaker's. 

15.  Wliat  do  you  send  there  for?    For  some  boots  and  shoes  for 
Manuel. 


LESSON     XX. 


75 


16.  How  do  you  write  your  exercises  without  ink?    I  write  them  with 
a  pencil. 
^      17.  How  did  Louis  write  his  exercise  the  other  day  ?    He  and  his  sis- 
ter wrote  it  between  them.    8^  ^  fRAj^y\Ji'\       -^  ■  ■ ''-    y      Ji'  r<- 

18.  Have  you  sold  your  old  hat  ?    I  changed  it  for  Peter's  new  one. 

19.  Will  you  pass  me  that  paper  to  write  a  letter  for  my  brother? 
This  paper  is  not  for  letters. 

20.  What  is  it  for  ?    It  is  for  my  exercises. 

21.  Whose  letter  is  that  ?     This  letter  is  for  your  mother. 

22.  Where  did  the  singer  go  last  year?    He  went  to  Aragon,  a  proT- 
ince  in  Spain. 

23.  What  have  you  sent  for  ?    I  have  sent  for  nothing. 

24.  Will  you  go  for  wine?    I  do  not  want  wine,  but  bread  and  meat. 

25.  Do  you  live  to  eat  ?    No,  sir,  I  eat  to  live. 

26.  Have  you  read  the  newspapers  to-day?     No,  sir;    but  I  have 
marched  with  my  regiment. 

27.  Has  the  tailor  made  my  vest  ?    Yes,  sir,  he  made  it  last  week. 

28.  Will  you  go  to  the  pianist's  for  my  piano  ?    No ;  I  have  to  study 
my  lessons. 

29.  Do  you  write  before  studying?    No;  I  study  first  and  write  after- 
wards. 


LESSON    XX. 


Salir, 

To  go  out,  to  les 

Saliendo. 

Going  out. 

Sahdo. 

Gone  out. 

PEESENT. 

Salgo. 

I  go  out. 

Sales. 

Thou  goest  out. 

Sale. 

He  goes  out. 

Salimos. 

We  go  out. 

Salis. 

You  go  out. 

Salen. 

They  go  out. 

PEETEEIT   DEFINITE. 

Sail. 

I  went  out. 

Saliste. 

Thou  wentest  out. 

Sali6. 

He  went  out. 

76 


LEQSON     XX. 


Salimos. 
Salisteis- 
Salieron. 


M<yico. 


Mexico. 


"We  went  out. 
You  went  out 
They  went  out. 


Tanto. 

So,  so  much,  as  muclu 

Cuanto. 

IIow  much. 

Como. 

As,  how. 

Presto. 

Soon,  speedily. 

pronto. 

Promptly,  quickly. 

Teraprano, 

Early. 

Tarde. 

Late. 

Mejor. 

Better. 

Peor. 

Worse. 

Mayor. 

Greater,  larger,  older. 

Menor. 

Smaller,  younger. 

Mejor. 

Better. 

Peor. 

Worse. 

Prudente. 

Prudent. 

Imprudeute. 

Imprudent. 

Pronto. 

Prompt,  quick,  ready. 

Presto. 

Ready,  prepared. 

Callado. 

Silent,  taciturn. 

Hablador. 

Talkative. 

Lirapio. 

Cleanly,  clean. 

Vivo. 

Lively,  alive. 

Situado. 

Situated. 

Oanaado. 

Tiresome,  tired. 

Fecha. 


Date. 


COMPOSITION. 


iEs  Alejandro  Lju  prudente  como  su 
hermano  ? 

No,  sefior,  Alejandro  es  muy  irapru- 
dentc.  Es  tan  imprudcntc  como  ha- 
blador. 

iSon  los  comerciantea  mas  ricos  que 
lo3  medicos  ? 

Algunos  son  mcu  ricos;  pero  otros  lo 
son  menos  que  los  medicos. 

l  Es  Nueva  York  mayor  que  Madrid  ? 

Madrid  es  menor  que  Nueva  York. 


Is  Alexander  as  prudent  as  his  brother? 

No,  sir,  Alexander  is  very  imprudent. 
He  is  as  imprudent  as  talkative. 

Are  merchants  richer  than  physicians  ? 

Some  are  richer;  but  others  arc  leflS 

rich  than  physicians. 
Is  New  York  larger  than  Madrid  ? 
Madrid  is  smaller  than  New  York. 


LESSON     XX. 


77 


iQue  caballo  es  mejor,  el  de  Y.  6  el 

mio? 
El  de  Y.  es  mayor ;  pero  es  peor  que  el 

mio. 
^  Tiene  Y.  mas  de  cincuenta  pesos  ? 
No  tengo  mas  qite  veinte  y  tres. 
El  tiene  tanto  dinero  como  Y. 
Yo  estudio   tanto   como  Y. ;  pero  no 

aprendo  tanto. 
til  habla  espanol  tan  bien  como  Y. ; 

pero  no  lo  escribe  tan  bien. 
1^1  tiene  tanto  cuardo  quiere. 
Tengo  tanioi  libros  y  tanto  papel  como 

el. 
Yo  escribo  mas  que  Y. ;   pero  Y.  lee 

maw  que  yo. 
fil  habla  menos  que  Y. 


Which  horse  is  the  better,  yours  or 

mine? 
Yours  is  larger;  but  it  is  worse  than 

mine. 
Have  you  more  than  fifty  dollars  ? 
I  have  not  more  than  twenty-threa 
He  has  as  much  money  as  you. 
I  study  as  much  as  you ;  but  I  do  not 

learn  so  much. 
He  speaks  Spanish  as  well  as  you ;  but 

he  does  not  write  it  as  well. 
He  has  as  much  as  he  wishes. 
I  have  as  many  books  and  as  much 

paper  as  he. 
I  write  more  than  you ;  but  you  read 

more  than  I. 
He  speaks  less  than  you. 


EXPLANATION. 

DEGEEE3   OF   COMPARISON. 

83.  The  adverbs  tanto  and  cuanto  lose  the  last  syllable,  tOy 
before  an  adjective  or  another  adverb. 

84.  The  comparative  of  equality  is  formed  by  placing  the 
adverb  tan^  so  or  as,  before,  and  como^  as,  after  the  adjec- 
tive; as, 

Alejandro  es  tan  prudente  como  su  I  Alexander  is  as  prudent  as  his  sister, 
hermana.  | 

85.  CuAN  may  be  employed,  if  the  comparative  is  followed 
by  an  adjective  instead  of  a  noun ;  as, 

Es  tan  hablador  cuan  imprudente.       |  He  is  as  talkative  as  imprudent. 
But  Gomo  is  more  frequently  used. 

86.  The  comparative  of  superiority  is  formed  by  placing 
the  word  mas^  more,  before  the  adjective,  and  que^  than,  after 
it;  as, 

lEl  es  mas  rico  que  Y.  |  He  is  richer  than  you. 

87.  The  comparative  of  inferiority  is  formed  by  placing 
the  word  menos ^  less,  before,  and  que  after ;  as. 

El  es  menos  rico  qv>e  Y.  |  He  is  less  rich  than  you. 

88.  Mayoe,  greater  or  larger;  menok,  smaller;  mejob,  bet- 


18  LESSON     XX, 


ter,  and  peob,  worse,  are  already  in  the  comparative  degree, 
and  do  not  require  mas  or  menos  before  them ;  as, 

Esta  casa  es  mayor  6  menor  que  esa.  I  This  house  is  larger  or  tmaUcr  than 

ll      that  one. 
Este  caballo  es  mejor  6  peor  que  el  |Thi8  horse  is  better  or  wone  than  mine, 
mio.  n 

89.  Than^  after  comparatives  coming  before  numeral  ad- 
jectives, is  also  generally  tran^ted  by  de  in  the  affirmative, 
and  que  in  the  negative ;  as, 

Tengo  mas  de  cincuenta  libros.  I  I  have  more  than  fifty  books. 

No  tengo  mas  que  veinte  pesos.  |  I  have  not  more  than  twenty  dollars. 

90,  Comparison  may  also  take  place  with  relation  to  nouns, 
verbs,  and  adverbs ;  but  its  form  is  so  similar  to  that  laid  down 
for  the  adjectives  that  the  learner  will  not  require  any  other 
explanation  than  the  examples  given  in  the  Composition. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  J  Sale  V.  tanto  como  su  hermano?  No,  sefior,  mi  hermano  sale 
mas  que  yo. 

2.  I  Cudndo  salimos  nosotros  ?     Nosotros,  salimos  mny  pronto. 

8.  I  Salio  su  hermano  temprano  de  casa  ?    No,  sefior,  salio  tarde. 

4.  jSalieron  Vds.  pronto  del  teatro?     Si,  sefior,  salimos  muy  pronto. 

6.  I  Sale  V.  presto  d  la  calle  ?    Si,  sefior,  salgo  muy  presto. 

6.  jSalieron  Vds.  temprano  de  la  iglesia?    Salimos  tarde. 

7.  ^Cudl  de  estas  dos  gramaticases  mejor?  La  que  V.  tiene  delante 
es  mejor  que  la  otra. 

8.  jEs  malo  este  caballo?    Es  peor  que  el  de  V. 

9.  I  Es  buena  la  pluma  do  su  hermano  de  V.  ?  Es  mejor  que  la  mia  y 
peor  que  la  de  V. 

10.  I  Cudnto  dinero  tiene  V.  ?     Tengo  cuarenta  pesos. 

11.  J  Cuantos  libros  tiene  su  hermana?     Tiene  tantos  como  su  prima.   . 

12.  gCuiinto  tiempo  vivi6  V.  en  Paris?    Vivi  cuatro  alios. 

13.  J  Es  su  hermano  mayor  6  menor  que  V.  ?    Es  mayor. 

14.  jQui6n  de  su  familia  de  V.  habla  mejor  el  ingl6s?    Mi  hermano 
racnor  lo  habla  mejor  que  todos. 

15.  jD6nde  lo  aprendi6?    En  L6ndres. 

16.  J  Cudnto  tiempo  vivi6  alld?    Seis  afios. 

17.  j  Cudndo  vino  de  alld?    Vino  el  afio  pasado. 

18.  ^Cudl  do  Vds.  dos  estudia  mas?    £1  estudia  m6nos  que  yo;  pero 
aprendo  mas. 


LESSOK     XX.  79 

19.  ^  Cual  de  sus  liermanos  de  V.  es^as  prudente?    El  mayor  es  muy 
callado  j  prudente;  pero  el  menor  es'vivo  6  imprudente. 

20.  I  Salieron  Vds.  del  concierto  antes  que  nosotros  ?    No,  sefior,  sali- 
mos  despues. 

21.  I  Cuando  salio  su  amigo  de  Yds.  de  Nueva  York  ?    Sali6  el  mes 
pasado  para  Paris. 

22.  ^  Cuando  sale  V.  para  Filadelfia  ?     No  salgo  hasta  la  semana  qua 
viene. 

23.  gllacia  d6nde  vive  su  amigo  de  Y.  ?    Yive  hacia  la  plaza. 

24.  I  Por  donde  vino  Y.  de  Paris  ?     Yine  por  Inglaterra. 

25.  ^En  d6nde  vive  Y.  ?     En  la  Quinta  avenida  entre  las  calles  Treinta 
J  Treinta  y  una. 

26.  2Qu6  caballo  es  mejor,  el  de  Y.  6  el  mio?    El  de  Y.  es  mayor; 
pero  no  tan  bueno  como  el  mio. 

27.  ^  Tiene  Y.  mas  de  cien  pesos  ?    Tengo  mas  de  ciento. 

28.  ^  No  tiene  Y.  mas  que  tres  pesos  ?     No,  sefior,  no  tengo  mas  que 
dos. 

29.  ^Habla  Y.  espafiol  mejor  que  Luisa?    No,  sefior,  lo  hablo  peor; 
pero  lo  escribo  mejor  que  ella. 

30.  I  Sali6  Y.  ayer  temprano  ?    Sali  temprano ;    pero  hoy  he  salido 
muy  tarde. 

EXERCISK 

1.  Have  you  written  your  letter?     Yes,  sir,  I  have  written  it, 

2.  What  is  the  date  of  it  (what  date  has  it)?    The  first  of  this  month. 

3.  Do  you  (plural)  go  out  much  ?     We  go  out  this  year  as  much  as 
last  year. 

\        4.  Which  is  the  better  grammar,  mine  or  yours?     Yours  is  better 
than  mine,  but  not  so  large. 

5.  Wliich  of  the  two  goes  out  earlier,  you  or  your  cousin  ?    I  go  out 
earlier  than  he. 

6.  Are  merchants  as  rich  as  singers  ?    Some  singers  are  richer  than 
merchants. 

7.  Is  this  horse  not  as  lively  as  that  one?     That  one  is  a  little  more 
lively  than  this  one. 

8.  Is  Mexico  as  large  as  the  United  States  ?    No,  miss,  the  latter  ar« 
much  larger  than  the  former. 

9.  When  do  the  musicians  leave  for  Havana?     They  leave  next  week 
(the  week  that  is  coming). 

10.  When  did  you  take  your  music  lesson?    I  took  it  the  day  before 
yesterday,  early. 


80  LESSON  XX. 

11.  Did  your  brothers  take  theirs  as  early  as  you  ?  Ko,  sir,  they  took 
theirs  very  late. 

12.  Which  of  you  two  speaks  Italian  better?  lie  speaks  it  better 
than  I ;  but  I  write  it  better  than  he. 

13.  Do  you  sing  much  every  day  ?  I  do  not  sing  as  much  as  last 
month. 

14.  Does  the  notary  write  as  well  as  the  physician?  The  former 
writes  better  than  the  latter. 

16.  Is  that  man  not  very  tiresome  ?  He  is  very  talkative  and  very 
tiresome. 

16.  Is  Lewis  as  prudent  as  his  uncle?  He  is  more  prudent  than  he; 
but  not  so  taciturn. 

17.  Are  you  less  taU  {alto)  than  Louisa?     No,  she  is  less  tall  than  J. 

18.  Is  your  uncle,  the  merchant,  as  rich  as  your  father?  No,  sir,  my 
father  is  richer  than  he. 

)jftA.A    19.  When  do  your  cousins  leave  for  Paris?    They  leave  very  soon. 
I   ^       20.  Is  your  servant  as  cleanly  as  ours  ?     Ours  is  more  cleanly  than 
yours,  but  not  so  talkative. 

21.  Have  you  any  paper  for  writing?  I  have  as  much  paper  and  as 
much  ink  as  I  wish  for. 

22.  Is  Henry  very  prudent  ?    He  is  as  imprudent  as  talkative. 

23.  Who  goes  to  the  bakery  quicker  than  John?  Nobody  goes  as 
quick  as  he. 

24.  Have  the  merchants  sent  as  much  silver  to  France  as  to  Spain? 
They  have  sent  more  to  France. 

25.  Did  the  shoemaker  make  the  shoes  as  quickly  as  the  tailor  made 
the  coat  ?  The  former  made  the  shoes  quicker,  because  he  worked  more 
than  the  latter. 

26.  Which  works  the  later,  the  tailor  or  the  baker  ?  The  latter  does 
not  work  so  late  as  the  former. 

27.  Are  your  father's  books  larger  than  ours?  Yours  are  smaller  than 
his. 

28.  Are  those  horses  bad?     They  are  worse  than  the  others. 

29.  Will  you  go  with  your  friend  (fern.)  to  the  concert  ?     I  will  not  go. 

30.  Why  will  you  not  go  ?  Because  it  is  very  late,  and  I  have  to  play 
on  the  piano. 

31.  Where  did  your  mother  learn  Spanish  ?    She  learned  it  here. 

32.  And  does  she  speak  it  well  ?  She  does  not  speak  it  as  well  as  she 
writes  it.  . 

83.  How  much  money  have  you  ?    I  have  not  more  than  seven  dollars. 

84.  Has  your  friend  as  much  as  you  ?  He  has  more  than  I ;  he  has 
received  more  than  two  hundred  dollars  from  Spain. 


LESSON     XXI. 


81 


LESSON    XXI 


Saber. 

To  know. 

Sabiendo. 

Knowing. 

Sabido. 

Known. 

S^. 

I  know. 

Sabes. 

Thou  knowest. 

Sabe. 

He  knows. 

Saberaos. 

We  know. 

Sabeis. 

You  know. 

Saben. 

They  know. 

Supe. 

I  knew. 

Supiste. 

Thou  knewest. 

Supo. 

He  knew. 

Supimos. 

We  knew. 

Supisteis. 

You  knew. 

Supieron. 

Tliey  knew. 

Amar. 

To  love. 

Viaja/r. 

To  travel. 

Trinidad  (fern).                          \ 

Trinity. 

Sabio,  sapientisimo. 

Wise,  learned ;  very,  most  or  ex- 

tremely wise. 

Habil,  liabilisirao. 

Clever,    skilful ;    very  clever. 

Dificil,  dificilisimo. 

Difficult,  very  or  most  difficult. 

Facil,  facilisimo. 

Fa  sy ;  very  or  most  easy. 

Corto,  cortisimo. 

Short;  very  or  most  short. 

Alegre,  alegrisimo. 

Cheerful ;  very  or  most  cheerful 

Triste,  tristisimo. 

Sad ;  very  or  most  sad. 

Feliz,  felicisirao. 

Happy ;  very  or  most  happy. 

Largo,  larguisimo. 

Long ;  very  or  most  long. 

Fuerte,  fortisimo. 

Strong ;  very  or  most  strong. 

Nuevo,  novisimo. 

New ;  very  or  most  new. 

Fiel,  fidelisimo. 

Faithful ;  very  or  most  faithful. 

Alto,  altisimo. 

Tall ;  very  or  most  tall. 

4* 

82 


LESSON     XXI. 


IRREGULAR  COMPARATIVES  AND  SUPERLATIVES. 


Baeno,  mejor,  6ptimo. 
Malo,  peor,  p6siiiio. 
Grande,  major,  maximo. 
Pequeflo,  menor,  minirao. 
Alto,  superior,  supremo. 

Bajo,  inferior,  infimo, 


Good,  better,  best. 
Bad,  worse,  worst. 
Great,  greater,  greatest. 
Small,  smaller,  smallest, 
nigh     i  Jiigher,  highest. 
'     (  superior,  supreme. 

^'"''     {Inferior,  Jlo'^^'t- 


Gombinada. 


Combined. 


COMPOSITION. 


Es  el  mas  sabio  de  mis  discipulos. 

fista  senorita  es  la  mas  amable. 

La  mayor  parte  del  regimiento. 

La  mai/or  parte,  6  los  mas,  de  los  solda- 

dos. 
La  major  casa  de  la  calle. 
Manuel,  ^  cuales  son  los  profesores  que 

saben  mas  en  tu  escuela  ? 
61  profesor  de  aritmdtica  sabe  mucho, 

el   de  francos,   sabe  mas ;   pero  el 

profesor  de  historia  es  el  que  mas 

sabe. 
f,  Es  bueno  este  caballo  ? 
Este  caballo  es  rauy  bueno ;  pero  el  de 

V.  es  mejor,  y  el  mio  es  el  mejor  de 

los  tres. 
i  Es  esta  leccion  mwy  facil  ? 
Es  facilisima. 

i  Es  su  casa  de  V.  tan  alia  come  la  mia  ? 
La  mia  es  mas  alta  que  la  de  V.,  y  la 

de  su  hermano  de  V.  es  la  mas  alta. 
Ese  Frances  es  muy  cahallero. 
i  Es  alegre  6  triste  su  amigo  de  V.  ? 
Us  alegrisimo ;  pero  es  muy  niiio. 

^Es  muy  j6ven? 
No,  scuor,  es  viejo. 


He  is  the  wisest  of  my  pupils. 
This  young  lady  is  the  most  amiable. 
The  greater  parfr  of  the  re^ment. 
The  greater  part,  or  the  most,  of  the 

soldiers. 
The  best  house  in  the  street. 
Emanuel,  which  are  the  professors  in 

your  school  who  know  the  most  ? 
The  professor  of  arithmetic  is  learned, 

the  French  professor  is  more  learned ; 

but  the  professor  of  history  is  the 

most  learned. 
Is  this  horse  good  ? 
This  horse  is  very  good ;  but  yours  is 

better,  and  mine  is  the  best  of  the 

three. 
Is  this  lesson  very  easy  ? 
It  is  most,  or  very  easy. 
Is  your  house  as  high  as  mine  ? 
Mine  is  higher  than  yours,  and  your 

brother's  is  the  highest 
That  Frenchman  is  very  gentlemanly. 
Is  your  friend  cheerful  or  sad  ? 
He  is  most  cheerful;  but  he  is  very 

childish. 
Is  lie  very  young  ?  * 

No,  sir,  he  is  old. 


EXPLANATION 
91.  English  superluiivcs  ending  in  est,  or  formed  by  most^ 


LESSON     XXI.  83 

are  rendered  by  placing  the  definite  article  before  the  Spanish 
comparative;  as, 

El  mas  sabio.  [      The  wisest. 

La  mas  amable.  |      The  most  amiable. 

92.  3Iost^  or  most  of,  when  followed  by  a  noun  (singular), 
is  translated  by  la  mayor  parte  ;  as. 

La  mayor  parte  del  regimiento.  |      Most  of  the  regiment. 

But  if  the  noun  is  in  the  plural,  most  may  also  be  translated  by 
m,as,  with  the  corresponding  article ;  as, 

La  mayor  parte,  6  los  mas,  de  los  I      Most  of  the  soldiers, 
soldados.  | 

93.  The  preposition  in,  after  the  English  superlative,  is 
translated  by  de  in  Spanish  ;  as. 

La  mejor  casa  de  la  calle.  |      The  best  house  in  the  street. 

94.  Those  superlatives  which  in  English  are  formed  with 
the  aid  of  very,  most,  &c.,  may  in  Spanish  be  formed  either 
with  the  help  of  muy  before  the  adjective,  or  by  adding  to  the 
latter  the  termination  tsimo ;  as, 

Muy  hdbil,  or  habilistmo.  I      Very  clever. 

Muy  facil,  or  fa.cilisimo,  J      Very,  or  most  easy. 

The  termination  isimo  is,  however,  more  expressive  of  the 
positive  superlative  degree  than  is  the  adverb  muy. 

95.  Observe  that  adjectives  ending  in  a  vowel  drop  that 
vowel  on  taking  the  termination  isimo ;  as, 

Corto,  coTtisimo.  Sliort,  very  short. 

Alegre,  alegrisimo.  Cheerful,  most  cheerful. 

Triste,  trist^stmo.  Sad,  very  sad. 

96.  There  are  other  superlatives  ending  in  ^rrimo\  as, 

Celebre,  celebmtmo.  I      Celebrated,  most  celebrated. 

Salubre,  saluberWmo.  |      Salubrious,  very  salubrious. 

But  these  forms  are  not  the  most  used. 

97.  Adjectives  ending  in  the  following  letters  change  them 
before  admitting  the  termination  isinio : 

Co  becomes  qu ;  as,  rico,  rig'wlsimo. 
Go       "        gu ;  as,  largo,  laiywisimo. 
JUe      "         hil\  as,  amable,  ama6v7isimo. 
Z         "  c;  as,  feliz,  felicisirao. 


84  LESSONXXI. 

98.  Superlatives  in  isimo  irregularly  formed : 

BuenOy  good,  makes  bonisimo,  very  good. 
Fuertey  strong,  makes  fortisimOy  very  strong. 
NuevOy  new,  makes  noviisimOy  very  new. 
BahiOy  wise,  makes  sapieniisimOy  very  wise. 
JSacrOy  sacred,  makes  sacratisimOy  very  sacred. 
Mely  faithful,  makes  JidelUsimo,  very  faithful. 

99.  Irregular  comparatives  and  superlatives: 
Bueno,  mejor,  6ptimo. 
Malo,  peor,  p^simo. 
Grande,  mayor,  maximo. 
Pequeno,  menor,  minimo. 
Alto,  superior,  supremo. 
B<ajo,  inferior,  fnfimo. 
Mucho,  mas,  lo  maa. 
Poco,  menos,  lo  menos. 

All  these  adjectives  form  also  a  superlative  in  isimo,  accord- 
ing to  the  rules  already  given ;  as,  mcdUimo^  poquUimo,  mu- 
chisimo. 

They  admit  also  a  comparative  formed  with  mas  or  menos ; 
and  a  superlative  with  muy ;  as, 


Menos  malo. 
Los  mas  grandes. 
Muy  pequeiios. 


Less  bad. 
The  greatest. 
Very  smalL 


100.  Substantives  used  adjectively  admit  the  degrees  of 
comparison;  as, 


Es  mas  caballero  que  tli. 
Es  muy  hombre. 

Este  hombre  es  muy  nino. 


He  is  more  gentlemanly  than  thou. 
He  is  very  much  of  a  man,  or  very 

manly. 
This  man  is  very  childish. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

v/l.  gSnpo  V.  su  leccion  dntes  de  ayer?    La  snpo  muy  Men,  y  la  96 
todos  lOB  dias. 

2.  I  Ama  V.  A  su  hermano  ?    Le  nmo. 

3.  I  Le  ama  a  V.  su  hermano  ?     No  lo  s6. 

4.  A  qui6n  ama  V.  ?    Amo  d  mis  papas. 

6.  g Ila  viajado  V.  mucho?    Ho  viujado  mucho  en  Europa;  pero  he 
viiyado  muy  poco  en  America. 


LESSON     XXI.  85 

6.  ^  Sabe  Y.  el  espafiol  ?    Muy  poco,  sefiorita ;  pero  lo  aprendo. 

7.  Y  y .,  sefiorita,  i  lo  sabe  Y.  ?    No,  sefior,  no  lo  s6,  ni  lo  aprendo. 

8.  I  Porqu6  no  estudia  Y.  el  espafiol  ?    Porque  aprendo  la  musica,  y 
no  tengo  tiempo  para  estudiarlo. 

9.  ^Es  muy  hdbil  su  profesor  de  musica  de  Y.  ?    Es  habilisimo. 

10.  ^Sabe  Y.  cantar?    No,  sefiora,  pero  se  tocar  nn  poco  el  piano. 

11.  1^0  sabe  Y.  tocar  la  guitai*ra?    No,  sefiora,  toco  el  violin. 

12.  gAprende  bien  ese  caballero  el  espafiol?  Estudia  mucbo  j  lo 
I5)rende  muy  bien. 

13.  ^  Qui^n  aprende  mas  pronto  el  espafiol,  las  sefioras  6  los  caballeros? 
La3  sefioras  aprenden  mucbo  mas  pronto. 

14.  I  Qui6n  es  el  mas  sabio  de  sus  discipulos  de  Y.  ?  La  sefiorita  N.,  es 
la  mas  sabia  de  todos  mis  discipulos. 

15.  I  Cudl  de  estos  nifios  es  el  mejor  ?  El  que  ama  a  sus  padres,  y  es- 
tudia mas  sus  lecciones,  es  el  mejor. 

16.  gMarcb6  todo  el  regimiento  7°.  por  Broadway  hasta  el  Parque 
Central  ?    No,  sefior,  pero  la  mayor  parte  de  61. 

17.  ^Fueronal  campo  los  soldados?  Los  mas  de  los  soldados  fueron 
alia. 

18.  ^Es  esta  la  mejor  casa  de  la  calle?  No,  sefior,  esta  casa  es  muy 
buena ;  pero  la  de  Astor  es  mejor  y  la  de  Stewart  es  la  mejor  de  la 
ciudad. 

19.  ^Sabe  Y.  qui^n  paso  por  aqui  anocbe?  No,  sefior,  pero  se  quien 
paso  por  la  5»  avenida. 

20.  },  Es  bueno  este  caballo  ?  Este  caballo  es  muy  bueno ;  pero  el  de 
Y.  es  mejor,  y  el  mio  es  el  mejor  de  los  tres. 

21.  ^Es  caballero  ese  Frances?    Si,  sefior,  es  muy  caballero. 

.  22.  gEs  ese  hombre  alegre  6  triste?    Es  muy  alegre;   pero  es  muy 
nifio. 

23.  ^Fu6  Y.  al  concierto  la  semana  pasada?    Fui  antes  de  ayer. 

24.  I  Quiere  Y.  tocar  el  piano  ?     Quiero,  pero  no  s6. 

25.  I  Ha  venido  su  amigo  de  Y.  ?    Ha  venido. 

26.  I  Cuando  vino  ?    Yino  antes  de  ayer. 

27.  ^  Cuando  sale  Y.  ?    Quiero  salir  la  semana  que  viene. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Do  you  know  French  ?    No,  sir,  but  my  brother  knows  it. 

2.  Is  that  physician  clever  ?    He  is  most  clever. 

3.  Which  is  the  most  skilful  physician  ?     Ours  is  the  most  skilful  io 
the  city. 

4.  Is  Miss  Louisa  very  amiable  ?    Yes,  she  is  very  amiable. 


86  LESSONXXI. 

5.  Alexander,  wliich  is  the  moat  learned  teacher  in  your  school  | 
The  English  teacher  is  learned,  the  teacher  of  arithmetic  is  more  learned ; 
but  the  Italian  teacher  is  the  most  /earned  of  all. 

6.  Is  your  school-mistress  cheerful,  Louisa  ?  Yes,  mamma,  she  is  most 
cheerful  and  very  happy. 

7.  Did  you  knowr  your  lessons  well  yesterday?  Yes,  I  knew  them 
very  well,  better  than  to-day's,  for  I  have  not  had  time  to  study  them. 

8.  Does  your  brother  know  his  every  day  ?  I  do  not  know ;  but  he 
works  very  little. 

9.  Is  he  taciturn  ?    No,  sir,  he  is  very  talkative. 

10.  Which  is  the  largest  church  in  New  York?  Trinity  Church  is  tha 
largest  and  the  handsomest  in  the  city. 

11.  Whose  is  that  handsome  house  there  ?    It  is  my  uncle's. 

12.  Is  it  not  the  finest  in  the  street  ?  No ;  Mr.  Emanuel's  is  the  finest 
in  the  city. 

13.  Did  the  12th  Kegiment  go  out  to  march  yesterday?  Not  all,  but 
the  greater  part  went  out. 

14.  Did  not  all  the  soldiers  march  through  Fourteenth  street  last 
Thursday  ?  The  most  of  them  marched  through  Fourteenth  street,  but 
not  all. 

15.  Is  your  Spanish  lesson  for  to-day  difficult  ?  Yes,  it  is  the  most 
difficult  (that)  I  have  had  this  month. 

16.  Is  your  French  lesson  very  difficult,  Charles  ?  No,  sir ;  my  French 
lesson  for  to-day  is  the  easiest  one  in  the  grammar. 

17.  Which  is  the  best  Spanish  grammar?  The  Combined  Spanish 
Grammar  is  the  best  and  the  easiest. 

18.  Is  not  your  table  very  low  for  writing?  Yes,  it  is  very  low;  I 
write  better  on  a  higher  one. 

19.  Will  you  take  this  small  pen  to  write  your  exercise?  No;  I  do 
not  write  well  with  my  own,  which  is  very  small,  but  larger  than 
yours. 

20.  Have  you  travelled  much  in  Europe  ?  I  have  travelled  very  much 
in  America,  but  very  little  in  Europe. 

21.  Which  is  the  longest  street  in  New  York  ?  Broadway  is  the 
longest  in  the  United  States. 

22.  Do  you  love  your  parents  ?    Yes,  I  love  them  very  much. 

23.  Why  does  Margaret  not  love  her  cousin?  She  does  not  love  him 
because  he  is  very  taciturn. 

24.  Wliich  of  your  pupils  is  the  wisest  ?  Henry  and  Louisa  are  the 
wisest  of  all  my  pupils. 

25.  Who  reads  the  most  newspapers  in  your  house  ?  I  do  not  know ; 
but  papa  roads  a  great  many. 


LESSON      XXII, 


87 


26.  To  whom  have  you  paid  the  most  money  to-day  ?    I  have  paid 
most  to  the  tailor,  because  he  has  worked  most  for  me. 

27.  Does  not  your  washerwoman  work  very  much  ?    Yes,  she  works 
very  much,  but  earns  {ganar)  very  little  money,, 

28.  Whose  horse  is  the  most  lively,  yours,  Charles',  or  mine  ?    Charles' 
is  hvely,  mine  is  more  lively,  but  yours  is  the  liveliest  of  the  three. 

29.  In  what  street  do  you  live?    I  hve  in  Twenty -third  street. 

30.  Is  that  a  fine  street?    Yes,  it  is  one  of  the  finest  streets  up-town 
of  the  upper  part  {parte  alto)  of  the  city). 


LESSON 

XXII. 

Ustar 

To  be  (in  a  certain  place, 

state  or  condition). 

Estoy. 

I  am. 

Estas. 

Thou  art. 

Esta. 

He  is. 

Estamos. 

We  are. 

Estais. 

You  are. 

Estan. 

They  are. 

Prestar.                                       1 

To  lend. 

GEEU 

NDS. 

Hablando. 

Speaking. 

Estudiando. 

Studying. 

Comprando. 

Buying. 

Buscando. 

Looking  for. 

Necesitando. 

Needing,  wanting,  requking. 

Aprendiendo. 

Learning. 

Vendiendo. 

Selling. 

Leyendo. 

Eeading. 

Bebiendo. 

Drinkmg. 

Comiendo. 

Eating,  dining. 

Escribiendo. 

Writing. 

Recibiendo. 

Receiving. 

Yiviendo. 

Living. 

Kesidiendo. 

Residing. 

Teniendo. 

Having,  holding. 

Siendo. 

Being. 

Queriendo. 

Wishing,  desiring,  loving. 

88 


LESSON     XXII. 


Llevando. 

Enviando. 

Tomando. 

Pagando. 

Pronunciando. 

Cantando. 

Tocando. 

Ilaciendo. 

Pasando. 

Trabajando. 

Mandando. 

Yendo. 

Viniendo. 

Estando. 

Norte,  sur,  este,  oeste. 


Carrying,  taking. 
Sending. 
Taking. 
Paying. 
Pronouncing. 
Singing,  chanting. 
Touching,  playing. 
Doing,  making. 


"Working. 

Sending,  commanding. 

Going, 

Coming. 

Being  (in  a  certain  state,  &c.). 

North,  south,  east,  west 


COMPOSITION. 


/  Es  su  casa  de  V.  grande  ? 
JEs  grande ;  pero  estd  en  mal  estado. 
i  En  que  calle  estd  la  casa  de  su  henna- 
no  de  V.  ? 
Estd  en  la  Cuarta  avenida. 
^  Es  Luisa  bonita  ? 
Es  muy  bonita. 
/  Estd  ella  contenta  ? 
No  estd  contenta,  porque  estd  enferma. 

i  Es  enfermiza  ? 

Lo  es  mucho. 

l  De  qui6n  es  csta  casa  ? 

Es  de  mi  hermano. 

Estd  muy  bien  situada. 

Esta  carta  es  para  Margarita. 

Nucva  York  estd  entre  el  rio  del  Norte 

y  el  del  Este. 
El  senor  Walker  6S  pintor. 
La  mesa  es  de  madera. 
Estuve  en  casa  hasta  que  V.  Ileg6. 
Mi  amigo  estd  para  partir. 
Estoy  sin  comer. 
I  Qu6  estd  V.  haciendo  ? 
Estoy  escribiendo. 


Is  your  house  large  ? 

It  is  large  ;  but  it  is  in  a  bad  state. 

In  what  street  is  your  brother's  house  ? 

It  is  in  (the)  Fourth  Avenue. 

Is  Louisa  pretty  ? 

She  is  very  pretty. 

Is  she  contented  ? 

She  is  not  contented,  because  she  is 

sick. 
Is  she  sickly  ? 
She  is  very  much  so. 
Whose  house  is  this  ? 
It  is  my  brother's. 
It  is  very  well  situated. 
This  letter  is  for  Margaret. 
New  York  is  between  the  North  and 

East  rivers. 
Mr.  Walker  is  a  painter 
The  table  is  of  wood. 
I  was  at  home  until  you  arrived. 
My  friend  is  about  to  set  out 
I  have  not  dined  (I  am  without  eating). 
What  are  you  doing  ? 
I  am  writing. 


LESSON^     XXII 


89 


I  De  quien  e$  V.  amado  ? 

Soy  amado  de  mis  ninos. 

Manuel  es  bueno. 

Manuel  esid  malo. 

g  Estd  Pedro  cansado  ? 

Estd  cansado  y  es  cansado. 

^Porque  estd  tan  callado  Alejandro  ? 

Forque  es  callado. 


By  whom  are  you  loved  ? 
I  am  loved  by  my  children. 
Emanuel  is  good. 
Emanuel  is  ill. 
Is  Peter  tired  ? 

He  is  tired,  and  he  is  tiresome. 
Why  is  Alexander  so  silent  ? 
Because  he  is  taciturn. 


EXPLANATION. 

101.  See  and  Estae. — ^These  two  verbs  have  in  English  but 
one  equivalent — to  be  ;  but  their  respective  significations  and 
uses  are  so  materially  different  as  to  constitute  one  of  the  chief 
difficulties  of  the  Spanish  language.  By  careful  observation, 
however,  of  the  following  simple  rule,  the  learner  will,  we  are 
assured,  be  enabled  to  overcome  that  difficulty,  and  know  ex- 
actly when  to  use  the  one  and  when  the  other  of  these  two 
verbs. 

102.  Whenever  we  wish  to  express  what  persons  or  things 
«re,  and  their  mode  of  being,  in  an  absolute  manner,  ser  is  the 
verb  to  be  employed ;  but  if  we  desire  to  express  the  state  or 
condition  of  persons  or  things,  and  the  mode  of  that  state  or 
condition  in  a  relative  manner,  then  estae  must  be  used. 

The  following  examples  will  serve  to  render  the  application 
of  this  rule  more  clear  : 


1st.  Esta  casa  es  grande. 

2d.    Esta  casa  estd  limpia. 

3d.    Esta  casa  estd  en  Broadway. 

4th.  Luisa  es  bonita. 

5th.  Luisa  es  feliz. 

6th.  Luisa  estd  contenta. 

'7th.  Luisa  estd  enferma. 

8th.  Luisa  es  enfermiza. 


This  house  is  large. 
This  house  is  clean. 
This  house  is  in  Broadway. 
Louisa  is  pretty. 
Louisa  is  happy. 
Louisa  is  content. 
Louisa  is  sick. 
Louisa  is  sickly. 


In  the  first  example  we  use  see  to  express  what  kind  of  a 
house  the  one  referred  to  is — i.  e.  large ;  in  the  second,  estae, 
inasmuch  as  we  desire  to  express  how^  or  in  what  state  the 
house  ^s,  i.  e.  in  a  clean  state  y  estae  is  also  employed  in  the 
third,  sixth  and  seventh  examples,  the  object  being  to  make 
known  respectively  where  the  house  is,  and  in  what  state  or 


90 


LESSON      XXII. 


condition  Louisa  is  or  finds  herself ;  while  in  the  fourth,  fifth 
and  eighth  see  again  comes  into  play,  seeing  we  wish  to  desig- 
nate Louisa's  mode  of  being  in  an  absolute  manner. 

From  the  above  general  rule  may  be  deduced  the  following 
observations : 

1st.  That  SEE  must  be  used  whenever  we  wish  to  express 
possession,  use,  purpose  or  destination ;  to  point  out  the  nation- 
ality, profession  or  calling  of  persons ;  the  place  of  production 
of  things  or  the  materials  of  which  they  are  composed ;  the 
simple  fact  of  existence,  the  occurrence  of  events  ;  and,  finally, 
as  an  auxiliary  in  forming  the  passive  voice  of  verbs. 

2d.  That  estae  is  to  be  employed  in  speaking  of  situation 
or  position,  place,  state  or  condition,  in  making  the  progressive 
form  in  ndo  (corresponding  to  the  English  ing)  of  other  verbs ; 
and,  lastly,  to  govern  verbs  in  the  infinitive  mood  with  the  aid 
of  a  preposition,  or  past  participles  without  such  aid. 

N.  B. — The  verb  estae  can  never  be  used  with  the  present 
participles  of  ir  and  venir. 

Examples  of  the  uses  of  see  and  estae  : 


SEB. 
La  casaca  ««  de  mi  hermano. 
The  coat  is  my  brother's. 
La  carta  es  para  Margarita. 
The  letter  is  for  Margaret. 
El  senor  Walker  es  pintor. 
Mr.  Walker  is  a  painter. 
Este  vino  es  de  Espana. 
This  wine  is  from  Spain. 
La  mesa  es  de  madera. 
The  table  is  of  wood. 
Has  sido  prudente  en  hacerlo  asi. 
Thou  hast  been  prudent  in  so  doing. 
Hoy  es  la  celebracion. 
The  celebracion  is  to-day. 
Son  las  diez. 
It  is  ten  o'clock. 

Fue  el  caso  como  yo  escribf  k  V. 
The  case  was  as  I  wrote  to  you. 
Soy  amado. 
I  am  loved. 


ESTAR. 

Esta  casa  estd  bion  situada. 
This  house  is  well  situated. 
Nueva  York  estd  entre  el   no  del 

Norte  y  el  del  Este. 
New  York  is  between  the  North  and 

East  rivers. 
Esiuve  en  casa  hasta  que  lleg6. 
I  was  at  home  xmtil  he  arrived. 
El  estd  escribiendo. 
He  is  writing. 
Mi  amigo  estd  para  partir. 
My  friend  is  about  to  set  out. 
Estoy  por  no  hacerlo. 
I  am  inclined  not  to  do  it. 
JSstamos  sin  comer. 
We  have  not  dined  (or  eaten). 
Esta  carta  estd  fecbada  en  Madrid. 
This  letter  i3  dated  from  Madrid. 


LESSON     XXII 


91 


N.  B. — As  it  frequently  occurs  that,  in  perfect  accordance 
with  the  rules  of  grammar,  the  same  sentence  may  be  construed 
with  either  ser  or  estae,  though  conveying  entirely  different 
ideas,  it  is  essential  to  inquire  thoroughly  into  the  respective 
value  of  these  two  verbs,  in  order  to  avoid  the  confusion  which 
must  necessarily  arise  from  their  misapplication.  The  impor- 
tant nature  of  this  remark  may  be  seen  from  the  following 
examples : 


WITH   SER. 

Manuel  es  bueno. 
Emanuel  is  good. 
Juan  es  malo. 
John  is  bad  (or  wicked), 
Pedro  es  cansado. 
Peter  is  tiresome. 
Juana  es  viva, 
Jane  is  lively. 
Alejandro  es  callado. 
Alexander  is  taciturn. 
Este  nino  es  limpio. 
This  child  is  cleanly. 
Esta  naranja  es  agria. 
This  is  a  sour  orange  {i.  e.  of  the  sour 
species). 


WITH  ESTAE. 

Manuel  estd  bueno. 

Emanuel  is  well. 

Juan  estd  malo. 

John  is  sick. 

Pedro  estd  cansado. 

Peter  is  tired. 

Juana  estd  viva. 

Jane  is  alive. 

Alejandro  estd  callado. 

Alexander  is  silent. 

Este  nino  estd  limpio. 

This  child  is  clean. 

Esta  naranja  estd  agria. 

This  orange  is  sour  {i.  e.  unripe). 


What  is  said  in  the  course  of  the  present  lesson  relative 
to  ser  and  estae,  being  all  that  is  requisite  to  enable  the 
student  to  determine  which  of  the  two  is  to  be  used  in  any 
ordinary  case,  bis  attention  shall  not  again  be  called  to  them 
until  we  come  to  treat  of  their  idiomatic  uses. 


CONYERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  jQud  esta  haciendo  el  muchacho  ?    Esta  estudiando  su  leccion. 

2.  I  Ha  estudiado  V.  la  suya  ?    La  estudie  ayer. 

3.  gDe  quien  es  V.  amado  ?     Soy  amado  de  mis  nifios. 

4.  ^Esta  V.  escribiendo  sus  ejercicios?    No,  seilor,  estoy  escribiendo 
una  carta. 

5.  I  Esta  Margarita  cansada  ?    Margarita  no  esta  cansada ;   pero  es 
cansada. 

6.  I  Porque  esta  Pedro  tan  callado  ?    Porque  es  callado. 

7.  I  Para  quien  es  esta  carta  ?    Es  para  V. 


92  LESSON      XXII. 

8.  I  En  dondo  esta  situada  Nueva  York  ?    Esta  situada  entre  el  no  del 
Norte  J  el  del  Este. 

9.  ^Es  V.  Espafiol?    No,  seflor,  soy  Americano. 

10.  gEs  ese  caballero  abogado?    No,  seflor,  es  medico. 

11.  ^06mo  esta  Alejandro?    Esta  bueno. 

12.  ^Es  Alejandro  buen  muchacho?    Es  bueno. 

13.  ^Estuvo  V.  ayer  en  mi  casa?    Estuve  alii  hasta  que  su  padre  de 
V.  vino. 

14.  I  De  qu6  es  este  tintero  ?    Es  de  madera. 

16.  I  Es  grande  su  jardin  de  V.  ?    Es  grandisimo ;   pero  esta  en  mal 
estado. 

16.  ^En  qu6  calle  estd  su  casa  de  Y.  ?    Esta  en  la  Cuarta  avenida. 

17.  I  Es  herraosa  la  casa  de  su  amigo  de  V.  ?    Es  hermosisima. 

18.  ^Es  Luisa  feliz?    Luisa  es  muy  feliz;  pero  no  esta  contenta,  por- 
que  no  vino  V.  k  verla  (to  see  her). 

19.  ^Es  y.  enfermizo?    No,  seflor;  pero  estoy  enfermo. 

20.  ^De  quien  es  aquella  casa   tan  alta?       Es  de  un  amigo  mio;  pero 
quiere  venderla  porque  esta  mal  situada  en  esta  calle  tan  fea. 

21.  ^  Cuando  parte  V.  ?    No  s6,  quiero  partir  hoy,  porque  tengo  mucho 
que  hacer. 

22.  I  Parti6  su  amigo  de  V.  ayer  ?    No,  seflor,  ha  partido  hoy. 

23.  ^  ru6  V.  a  la  iglesia  el  domingo  pasado  ?    Si,  seflor,  voy  a  la  iglesia 
todos  los  domingos,  cuando  no  estoy  enfermo. 

24.  ^Yive  su  amigo  do  V.  en  el  campo?    No,  seflor,  reside  en  la 
ciudad. 

25.  I  Que  hace  en  la  ciudad  ?    Trabaja  de  abogado. 

26.  I  Qu6  hace  V.  ?     Yo  vendo  y  compro :  soy  comerciante. 

27.  J  Pas6  V.  por  Paris,  cuando  fu6  d  Madrid  ?    Si,  seflor,  y  por  otra? 
muchas  ciudades  de  Francia  y  Espafia. 

28.  I  Viaja  V.  mucho  ?    He  viajado  mucho ;  pero  no  viry o  mas. 

29.  I  Viaj6  V.  en(  Si,  seflor,  estuve  alU  el  afio  pasado. 

30.  I  Es  bonito  pais  ?    El  pais  es  hermosisimo. 

EXCERCISE. 

1.  Where  is  your  house  situated?    In  Eleventh  street 

2.  Is  it  very  large  ?     No^  sir,  it  is  not  as  large  as  my  uncle's. 

8.  Which  of  the  three  languages*  English,  French  or  Spanish,  is  th« 
richest  ?     The  Spanish  is  much  richer  than  the  other  two. 

4.  Do  you  speak  Spanish  ?     No,  madam ;  but  I  am  learning  it. 

6.  Do  you  and  your  sister  take  a  lesson  to-day  ?    No,  our  teacher  is 
not  coming  (docs  not  come)  to-day,  ho  is  sick. 

*  Longuaa. 


LESSON     XXII.  93 

6.  What  lesson  are  jou  at  (in).     We  are  at  the  twenty-second,  one 
of  the  most  difficult  in  the  grammar. 

7.  Is  Louis  very  taciturn  ?  he  speaks  very  little.    No,  sir,  he  is  not 
taciturn ;  but  he  is  silent  to-day,  because  he  is  unwell. 

8.  Why  is  Henry  so  cheerful  to-day  ?    He  is  cheerful  because  he  has 
received  letters  from  his  father  and  mother. 

9.  Is  he  a  good  boy  ?    He  is  a  very  good  boy ;   he  is  studying  hial 
Italian  lesson. 

10.  How  is  your  friend  to-day  ?    He  is  much  better  than  yesterday. 

11.  Where  is  that  wine  from  that  Charles  is  drinking  ?    It  is  from  Spain. 

12.  Has  your  father  been  prudent  in  selling  his  horse  ?  He  has  been 
most  imprudent  in  selling  it. 

13.  Whom  do  you  love  ?  I  love  my  father  and  mother,  and  I  am  loved 
by  them. 

14.  Where  is  that  letter  from?    It  is  (cowes)  from  Paris. 

15.  Have  you  {plural)  dined  to-day?  No,  sir,  we  have  not  dined; 
our  servant  is  very  ill. 

16.  What  do  you  do  every  day  to  pass  the  time  ?  Sometimes  I  sing 
and  play  on  the  piano,  and  at  others  I  read  the  newspapers  and  go  out 
to  walk  {pasear). 

17.  What  does  Mr.  Emanuel  do  ?    He  is  a  merchant. 

18.  For  whom  is  that  letter  that  Louisa  is  writing?  It  is  for  her 
cousin  {fern.). 

19.  Is  Alexander  a  tiresome  boy  ?  No,  madam,  but  he  went  to  walk 
very  early,  and  he  is  tired. 

20.  Was  Louis  at  your  house  yesterday  ?  Yes,  sir,  he  was  there  until 
my  uncle  came. 

21.  How  is  your  uncle  to-day?  He  is  very  weU;  he  is  about  to  set 
out  for  Paris. 

22.  Is  Henry  tired  ?    No  ;  but  he  is  very  tiresome. 

23.  Whose  book  is  that  ?  It  is  my  friend's ;  but  he  wants  to  sell  it, 
because  it  is  very  badly  written. 

24.  How  much  does  he  want  for  it  ?    He  wants  five  dollars  and  a  half.*^ 

25.  Is  it  in  French  ?     No,  sir,  it  is  in  Spanish. 

26.  When  do  you  {plural)  leave  for  Europe  ?    We  leave  very  soon. 

27.  Have  you  a  garden  at  your  house  ?  Yes,  sir,  I  have  a  very  fine 
garden. 

28.  Is  it  very  large  ?    It  is  very  large. 

29.  What  is  your  friend  doing  in  Paris  ?  He  is  studying  law  (for  a 
lawyer). 

30.  And  you,  what  do  you  do  in  Philadelphia?    I  work  as  a  notary. 

31.  Whom  is  this  letter  from?    It  is  from  the  pianist,  and  for  you. 

*  Medio. 


94 


LESSON     XXIII. 


LESSON    XXIII 


PXJTUEE 

SIMPLE. 

First  Conjugation. 

Habl-ar^. 

I  shall  speak. 

Habl-arAs. 

Thou  wilt  speak. 

Habl-ard. 

He  will  speak. 

Habl-ar6mos. 

We  shall  speak. 

Habl-ar^is. 

You  will  speak. 

Habl-aran. 

They  will  speak. 

Second  Co 

njugation. 

Aprend-er6. 

I  shall  learn. 

Aprend-eras. 

Thou  wilt  learn. 

Apr  end-era. 

lie  will  learn. 

Aprend-er^mos. 

We  shall  learn. 

Aprend-er6is. 

You  will  learn. 

Aprend-erdn. 

They  will  learn. 

Third  Co 

njugation. 

Escrib-ir6. 

I  shall  write. 

Escrib-iras. 

Thou  wilt  write. 

Escrib-ird. 

He  will  write. 

Escrib-ir6mos. 

We  shall  write. 

Escrib-ir6i8. 

You  will  write. 

Ecrib-irdn. 

They  will  write. 

Desear. 

To  desire. 

Practicar. 

To  practise. 

Bailar. 

To  dance. 

Principiar. 

To  commence,  to  begin. 

Acabar. 

To  finish. 

Medio. 

~~    Half. 

Pr6ximo. 

Next. 

Ent6ncea. 

Then. 

Anoche. 

Last  night. 

Antes  de  anoche. 

Tlie  night  before  last. 

Manana. 

To-morrow. 

LESSON     XXIII. 


95 


Pasado  mailana. 

The  day  after  to-morrow. 

La  mafiana. 

The  morning. 

Si. 

If. 

Gusto. 

Taste,  pleasure. 

Noche. 

Night. 

Deseo. 

Desire,  mind. 

Gracias. 

(to  give)  Thanks. 

Negocios. 

Business,  occupa- 

Familia. 

Family. 

tion. 

Practica. 

Practice. 

Oficio. 

Office. 

Teoria. 

Theory. 

Minuto. 

Afinute. 

Hora. 

Hour. 

Segundo. 

Second. 

Polca. 

Polka. 

Yals. 

Waltz. 

Lengua. 

Tongue,  language. 

Idioma. 

Language. 

COMPOSITION. 

I  Estudiara  V.  mafiana  su  leccion  de  es- 

panol  ? 
Si,  senor,  la  estudiar^  mafiana  por  la 

mafiana. 
I A  que  hora  principiara  V.  ? 
Principiare  a  las  tres  de  la  mafiana. 

Sefiorita,  ^  qui6re  V.  bailar  un  vals  ? 
Gracias,  caballero,  no  se  bailar  vals. 

6  Bailara  Y.  una  polca  ? 

Si,  sefior,  con  mucho  gusto. 

Hablo  mal  el  espafiol,  porque  no  lo 

practice. 
V.  necesita  practicar  mucho  para  apren- 

der  una  lengua. 
Practicare  en  Espafia,  porque  ir6  alii 

muy  pronto. 
jjQue  dias  toma  Y.  sus  lecciones  de 
'    piano  ? 
Las  tomo  los  lunes  y  los  viemes,  a  las 

once  de  la  mafiana. 
iA  qu6  hora  tomara  Y.  las  lecciones 

de  Frances. 
Las  tomar^  a  las  diea. 
i  Que  hora  es  ? 
£s  la  una. 


Will  you  study  your  Spanish  lesson  to- 
morrow ? 
Yes,  sir,  I  will    study  it    to-morrow 

morning. 
At  what  hour  will  you  commence  ? 
I  shall  commence  at  three  o'clock  in 

the  morning. 
WiU  you  (dance  a)  waltz,  Miss  ? 
Thank  you,  sir,  I  do  not  know  how  to 

waltz. 
Will  you  dance  a  polka  ? 
Yes,  sir,  with  great  pleasure. 
I  speak  Spanish  badly,  because  I  do 

not  practise  it. 
You  require  to  practise  a  great  deal  in 

order  to  learn  a  language. 
I  will  practise  in  Spain,  because  I  shall 

go  there  very  soon. 
On  what  days  do  you  take  your  piano 

lessons  ? 
I  take  them  on  Mondays  and  Fridays, 

at  11  o'clock  in  the  morning. 
At  what  hour  will  you  take  your  French 

lessons  ? 
I  shall  take  them  at  10  (o'clock). 
What  o'clock  is  it  ? 
It  is  one  (o'clock). 


96 


LESSON     XXIII. 


Son  las  once  y  cuarto. 

Son  las  tres  m6no8  diez  minutos. 

Mafiana  ir6  al  campo,  y  pasado  maria- 

na  tendre  el  gusto  de  pasar  el  dia 

con  V. 
Gracias ;  entonces  ser6  muy  feliz. 
i  Bailar6mos  en  su  casa  de  V.  ? 
Sf,  senor,  bailaremos,  cantar^mos,  toca- 

r^mos  y  practicar^mos    el   espanol 

toda  la  noche. 
Muy  bien,  muy  bien ;  ert6nees  ser^mos 

mas  que  felices,  seremos  felicisimos. 

I  En  donde  pas6  V.  ayer  la  noche  ? 

La  pas  6  con  mis  amigos  los  senores 

Martinez  y  su  familia. 
i  Cu4nto  tiempo  estuvo  V.  en  su  casa  ? 
Fui  k  las  siete  de  la  noche  y  sail  a  los 

once  y  media. 


It  is  a  quarter-past  eleven. 

It  is  ten  minutes  to  three. 

I  shall  go  to  the  country  to-morrow, 
and  shall  have  the  pleasure  of  spend- 
ing the  day  after  to-morrow  with  you. 

Thank  you ;  then  I  shall  be  very  happy. 

Shall  we  dance  at  your  house  ? 

Yes,  sir,  we  shall  dance,  smg,  play  and 
practise  Spanish  all  the  evening  (the 
whole  night). 

Very  well,  very  well ;  then  we  shall  be 
more  than  happy ;  we  shall  be  most 
happy. 

Where  did  you  spend  the  evening 
yesterday  ? 

I  spent  it  with  my  friends,  Mr.  and  Mrs. 
Martinez  and  (their)  family. 

How  long  were  you  at  their  bouse  ? 

I  went  at  seven  in  the  evening  and  left 
(went  out)  at  half  past  eleven  o'clock. 


EXPLANATION. 

103.  Future  simple. — ^This  tense  affirms  what  is  yet  to  be 
or  to  take  place  at  a  future  time  (mentioned  or  not) ;  as, 

Sere  comerciante.  I      I  shall  be  a  merchant. 

Juan  estudiard  mafiana.  |      John  will  study  to-morrow. 

This  tense  is  also  used  as  imperative,  as  will  be  seen  when 
that  mood  is  introduced. 

104.  The  DEFINITE  ARTICLE  is  to  be  used  before  numerals 
indicating  the  hour  of  the  day,  and  the  word  o'clock  is  never 
translated  into  Spanish  ;  as, 

A  las  tres  de  la  tarde.  |    At  three  o'clock  in  (of)  the  afternoon. 

105.  NociiE  (evening  or  night),  commences  at  sundown; 
so  that  evening  and  night  both  are  translated  into  Spanish  by 
nocJie. 

106.  The  conjunction  si,  when  conditional,  does  not  gov- 
ern the  subjunctive  in  Spanish  as  it  does  in  English,  unless  the 
latter  be  followed  by  should,  as  will  be  seen  in  the  proper 
place  ;  in  all  other  cases,  si  is  followed  by  the  present  of  the 
indicative ;  as. 

Si  V.  tiene  papel,  ^  escribir&  ?  |      If  you  have  paper,  will  you  write  ? 


LESSON     XXIII.  97 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  gCuanJo    principiara  Y.  a  escribir  sus  ejercicios?     Principiar6 
mailana. 

2.  ^  A.  qu6  hora  acabara  Y.  ?    Acabar6  a  las  diez  j  media. 

3.  Alejandro,  ^que  quieres  ser,  abogado  6  escritor?    No  sere  ni  abo- 
gado  ni  escritor,  sere  cotoerciante. 

4.  Senorita,  ^quiere  Y.  bailar  una  polca?     Gracias,  caballero,  no 
bailare,  porque  estoy  muy  cansada. 

5.  I  Bailara  Y.  la  proxima  ?    Si,  sefior,  con  mucho  gusto. 

6.  I  Practicard  Y.  el  piano  hoy  ?     No,  sefior,  hoy  no  tengo  tiempo ; 
pero  practicare  mafiana  por  la  mafiana. 

7.  ^Que  hara  Y.  mafiaDa?     Mafiana  por  la  mafiana  escribir^  mis 
ejercicios  y  practicare  el  espafiol  con  mi  hermano. 

8.  I  Qu6  dias  toma  Y.  leccion  de  piano  ?    Los  liines  y  viemes. 

9.  I A  que  hora  tomara  Y.  su  leccion  mafiana  ?    A  las  once  y  cuarto. 

10.  ^  Yendrd  Y.  4  mi  casa  en  el  campo  ?     Ir6  pasado  mafiana  y  tendr6 
el  gusto  de  pasar  el  dia  con  Y. 

11.  ^Bailar^mos  en  su  casa  de  Y.  ?    Si,  sefior,  bailar^mos,  cantar^mos 
y  practicar6mos  el  espafiol  toda  la  noche. 

12.  ^En  d6nde  pasara  Y.  mafiana  la  noche  ?    La  pasar6  con  mis  ami- 
gos  los  sefiores  Martinez  y  su  familia. 

13.  I A  qu6  hora  iran  Yds.  alii  ?    Ir6mos  4  las  siete  de  la  noche. 

14.  I  Hasta  qu6  hora  estaran  Yds  ?    Hasta  la  una  y  media. 

15.  jEstara  Y.  mafiana  por  la  mafiana  en  su  cuarto  ?    Estar6  hasta  las 
nueve  y  diez  minutos. 

16.  gEs  triste  su  hermano  de  Y.  ?     No,  sefiora,  no  es  triste ;  pero  esta 
triste. 

17.  ^Es  Y.  feliz  ?     Soy  felicisimo ;  pero  no  estoy  contento  esta  tarde. 

18.  ^Es  Y.  mayor  que  su  hermano  ?    No,  sefiora,  soy  el  menor  de  toda 
.a  familia. 

19.  jQui^n  es  el  mayor?    Juan  es  el  mayor. 

20.  I  Sale  Y.  de  casa  temprano  ?    Salgo  tempranisimo. 

21.  I A  qu6  hora?     Salgo  a  las  ocho  y  media. 

22.  I  Salio  Y.  ayer  tan  temprano  ?    No,  sefior,  ayer  sail  mas  tarde ; 
pero  hoy  he  salido  temprano. 

23.  I A  que  hora  saldra  Y.  mafiana  ?    Mafiana  saldr^  a  la  una  de  la  tarde. 

24.  I  Para  quien  escribe  Y.  una  carta  ?    Escribo  al  abogado,  por  el 
pobre  Juan,  que  lo  necesita  para  un  negocio. 

25.  I  Partira  Y.  mafiana  para  la  Habana  ?     No,  sefior,  no  partir4  hasta 
la  semana  proxima. 

V  26.  ^Es  este  caballo  muyfuerte?    Es  fortisimo ;   pero  ese  que  estd 
ahi  es  mas  fuerte  y  el  que  esta  alii  al  otro  lado  es  el  mas  fuerte. 
5 


98  LESSON     XXIII. 


EXERCISE. 


1.  When  shall  you  commence  to  study  music  ?    I  desire  to  commence 
next  month. 

2.  Do  you  know  how  *  to  dance?     I  do  not  dance  very  well ;  but  I 
am  going  to  take  lessons  soon. 

3.  Do  you  study  in  the  morning  or  in  the  evening?    I  study  in  the 
morning. 

4.  At  what  o'clock  do  you  take  your  lessons  ?    At  a  quarter  to  three 
in  the  afternoon  (tarde). 

5.  Does  your  teacher  come  so  late  ?    Yes,  he  has  a  great  many  pupils 
this  year. 

6.  Will  you  dance  a  waltz,  Miss  ?    Thank  you,  sir,  I  danced  so  much 
the  night  before  last  that  I  am  tired. 

7.  Then  it  will  be  better  to  talk.    I  shall  talk  with  much  pleasure. 

8.  When  shall  your  cousin  write  his  exercise  ?    He  shall  write  it  to- 
morrow morning. 

9.  At  what  time  do  you  receive  your  newspapers  ?    I  receive  them 
every  day  at  eight  o'clock  in  the  morning. 

10.  Mr.  Louis,  will  you  come  and  dine  at  my  house?    I  shall  be  very 
happy  to  go  with  you. 

11.  How  did  you  spend  the  evening  at  your  friend's?    Very  well;  his 
wife  (lady)  is  most  amiable. 

12.  Has  she  not  travelled  in  Europe?    No,  sir;   but  they  spoke  last 
night  of  travelling  very  soon. 

13.  Is  their  family  large  ?    No,  they  have  no  children. 

14.  Does  not  your  friend  speak  Spanish  very  well  ?    Yes,  sir,  he  some- 
times even  passes  for  a  Spaniard. 

15.  Did  you  practise  much  with  him  ?    No ;  his  cousin  speaks  French 
very  well,  and  so  we  spoke  that  language  all  the  evening. 

16.  Where  shall  you  spend  this  evening?    I  do  not  know;    but  the 
day  after  to-morrow  we  shall  go  to  your  house. 

17.  Thank  you!    then  I  shall  be  more  than  happy;   I  shall  be  most 
happy. 

18.  How  many  seconds  make  a  minute?     Sixty. 

19.  How  many  minutes  make  an  hour?    Sixty  minutes. 

20.  And  bpw  many  hours  has  a  day  ?    A  day  has  twenty-four  hours, 
A  week  seven  days,  a  month  four  weeks,  and  a  year  twelve  months. 

21.  Peter,  what  o'clock  is  it  ?    It  is  half-past  two. 

22.  Then  I  am  going  to  take  my  lesson :  will  you  come  ?    No,  thank 
you ;  I  wish  to  read  this  morning's  paper. 

23.  Until  what  o'clock  shall  you  be  ?    I  shall  finish  at  one, 

*  l/ow  is  not  translated  when  It  does  not  refer  to  the  manner  of  doing  anytlilng. 


LESSON     XXIV. 


99 


24.  Peter!     Sir? 

25.  Has  the  tailor  finished  my  vest?    Yes,  sir,  here  he  is  with  the 
vest  and  the  coat. 

26.  When  will  the  shoemaker  make  my  boots  ?    He  will  make  them 
for  next  Tuesday. 

27.  Have  you  any  business  in  Philadelphia  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  am  writing 
the  history  of  Louis  XVI.,  for  a  gentleman  of  that  city. 

28.  Mr.  Henry,  are  you  happy?     Yes,  sir,  thank  you,  I  am  very 
liappy ;  but  I  am  not  very  contented  this  evening. 

29.  Why  are  you  not  contented?    Because  my  father  has  not  written 
to  me  this  week. 


LESSON    XXIV. 


COMPOUND  FUTUEE. 

Habr6  escrito. 

I  shall  have 

) 

Habras  escrito. 

Thou  wilt  have 

>  written. 

Habra  escrito. 

He  will  have 

i 

Habr6mos  escrito. 

We  shall  have 

) 

Habreis  escrito. 

You  will  have 

y  written. 

Habran  escrito. 

They  will  have 

) 

Coser. 

To  sew. 

Lavar. 

To  wash. 

Barrer. 

To  sweep. 

Pasear. 

To  walk  (take  a  walk). 

Dedal. 

Thimble. 

Aguja. 

Needle. 

Hilo. 

Thread. 

Primavera. 

Spring. 

Verano. 

Summer. 

Accion. 

Action. 

Invierno. 

Winter. 

Nacion. 

Nation. 

Otofio. 

Autumn  (Fall). 

Afectacion. 

Affectation. 

Enero. 

January. 

Navegacion. 

Navigation. 

Febrero. 

February. 

A^tacion. 

Agitation. 

Marzo. 

March. 

Aprobacion. 

Approbation. 

Abril. 

April. 

Aceptacion. 

Acceptation. 

Mayo. 

May. 

Atraccion. 

Attraction. 

Junio. 

June. 

Oonversacion. 

Conversation. 

Julio. 

July. 

Direccion. 

Direction. 

Agosto. 

August. 

Circunspeccion. 

Circumspection, 

100 


LESSON     XXIV, 


Setiembre. 
Octubre. 
Noviembre. 
Diciembre. 


September, 
October. 
November. 
December* 


Clasificacion. 

Coleccion. 

Combinacion. 

Comparacion. 

Composicion. 

Reputacion. 


Classification. 

Collection. 

Combination. 

Comparison. 

Composition. 

Reputation. 


COMPOSITION. 


Habr6  escrito  mi  leccion  4ntes  de  ir  a 

casa  del  profesor. 
Habr^  acabado  a  las  diez. 
El  abogado  acaba  de  hablar. 
Yo  acabo  de  estudiar  mi  leccion. 
La  lavandera  habra  acabado  de  lavar 

k  las  cuatro. 
i  A  cu&ntos  estamos  ? 
Estamos  &  seis. 
^  Que  dia  del  mcs  es  hoy  ? 
Es  el  primero. 

6  Qu6  fecha  tiene  esa  carta  ? 
El  primero  de  Enero  de  mil  ochocientos 

sesenta  y  seis. 
4  En  que  ano  fu6  V.  a  Mejico  ? 
Fui  en  Setiembre  de  mil  ochocientos 

cincuenta  y  dos. 
^  Ir&  V.  este  verano  k  Europa  ? 
No,  seSor,  ir6  en  el  inviemo. 
I  Pasear4  V.  mucho  esta  primavera  ? 
No,  sefior,  trabajar^  mucho. 


1  shall  have  written  my  lesson  before 

going  to  the  professor's. 
I  shall  have  finished  at  ten  o'clock. 
The  lawyer  has  just  spoken. 
I  have  just  studied  my  lesson. 
The  washerwoman  will  have  finished 

washing  at  four  o'clock. 
What  day  of  the  month  is  it  ? 
It  is  the  sixth. 

What  day  of  the  month  is  to-day  ? 
It  is  the  first. 

What  is  the  date  of  that  letter  ? 
January  1st,  1866. 

In  what  year  did  you  go  to  Mexico  ? 
I  went  in  September,  1852. 

Will  you  go  to  Europe  this  summer  ? 
No,  sir,  I  shall  go  in  the  winter. 
Will  you  walk  much  this  spring  ? 
No,  sir,  I  shall  work  a  great  deal 


EXPLANATION. 

107.  The  COMPOUND  future  affirms  something  future  that 
will  have  taken  place  before  or  at  the  time  of  some  other  future 
action  or  event  expressed  in  the  sentence ;  and  is  composed  of 
the  simple  future  of  the  verb  haber,  to  have,  and  the  past  parti- 
ciple of  another  verb  ;  as, 


Habr6  escrito  mi  ejercicio  Antes  de 

ir  &  casa  del  profesor. 
IIabr6  acabado  k  las  diez. 


I  will  have  written  my  exercise  before 

going  to  the  professor's. 
I  will  have  finished  at  ten  o'clock. 


108.  AcABAB  DB  is  employed  before  an  infinitive  in  the 


LESSON     XXIV.  101 

sense  of  to  have  just,  and  the  infinitive  is  translated  in  English 
as  a  past  participle  ;  as, 

Acaba  de  hablar.  I  He  has  just  spoken. 

Acaho  de  estudiar.  |  1  have  just  studied. 

N .  B. — In  order  to  facilitate  the  acquisition  of  words,  we 
shall  give  now  and  then  a  few  rules,  with  the  help  of  which  the 
learner  will  be  enabled  to  convert  several  thousand  English 
words  into  Spanish.  And,  although  we  have  proposed  not  to 
introduce  many  new  words  or  elements  at  one  time,  these 
observations  will  enable  the  pupil  to  learn  a  greater  number  of 
words  with  little  or  no  difficulty  at  all,  from  the  striking  re- 
semblance that  those  words  bear  to  the  English  ones. 

109.  The  greater  part  of  English  nouns  ending  in  tion  are 
rendered  into  Spanish  by  changing  the  letter  t  into  c ;  as,  appro- 
bation, aprohacion.  It  is  to  be  observed  that  the  only  conso- 
nants that  can  be  doubled  in  Spanish  are  c,  n  and  r.  All  nouns 
of  the  above  termination  are  feminine. 

HO.  The  days  of  the  month  are  all  counted  in  Spanish  by 
the  cardinal  numbers,  preceded  by  the  article,  except  the  first 
day;  and  there  are  several  forms  of  asking  the  day  of  the 
month :  e.  a.^ 


J 

^  Que  dia  del  mes  tenemos  ? 
4  Que  dia  es  hoy  ? 
^  A  cuantos  estamos  del  mes  ? 


What  day  of  the  month  is  it  ? 


There  is  no  preference  between  these ;  but  the  answer  must 
be  made  in  the  same  form  as  the  question  ;  as. 


^  Que  dia  tenemos  ? 
Tenemos  el  seis. 
^  A  cuantos  estamos  ? 
Estamos  a  dos. 
^  Que  dia  es  hoy  ? 
Es  el  primero. 


What  day  of  the  month  is  it  ? 

It  is  the  sixth. 

What  day  of  the  month  is  it  ? 

It  is  the  second. 

What  day  of  the  month  is  to-day  ? 

It  is  the  first. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

V    1.  g  Ilabra  Y.  acabado  de  escribir  su  leccion  a  las  diez  y  media  ?    No, 
8^;  pero  la  habr6  acabado  antes  de  ir  a  casa  del  profesor. 

2.  I  Ha  hablado  aquel  abogado  ?    No,  sefior,  acaba  de  hablar  este. 

3.  ^Ha  hablado  bien?    Muy  bien,  pero  con  afectacion. 


102  LESSON     XXIV. 

4.  I  Hard  V.  una  buena  composicion  para  la  leccion  pr6xima  ?     SI, 
Befior,  si  tengo  tiempo,  la  har6. 

5.  ^Lava  bien  su  lavandera  de  V.  ?    Lava  muy  bien. 

6.  ^  A  d6nde  envia  V.  sus  nifios  ?    Los  envio  i  pasear  con  la  criada. 

7.  I A  donde  ?    A  la  plaza  de  Madison. 

8.  I  Estd  cerca  de  su  casa  de  V.  ?    Esta.  muy  cerca. 

9.  ^Barri6  el  criado  ayer  mi  cuarto?    No,  sefior,  no  lo  barri6  ayer< 
pero  lo  ha  barrido  hoy. 

10.  ^Lo  barrera  maflana  ?    Lo  habrd  barrido  dntes  de  las  nueve. 

11.  Muchacho,  gcsta  el  sastre  en  la  sastreria?    No,  sefior,  acaba  do 
salir. 

12.  ^  A  qu6  hora  principiaron  Yds.  a  bailar?    Principiamos  i  las  diez 
de  la  noche. 

IB.  I  Desea  Y.  practicar  el  ingles  ?    Si,  sefior,  si  tengo  tiempo  princi- 
piar6  pasado  mafiana. 

14.  ^  Donde  esta  su  amigo  ?    Estd  viajando  por  Francia. 

15.  ^  Ama  su  hermana  de  Y.  mucho  d  sus  hijos?    Si,  sefior,  los  ama 
uiuchisimo. 

16.  jSaldrd  Y.  muy  pronto  para  Europa?    Quiero  salir  mafiana. 

17.  jSabe  Y.  bailar  el  vals?    No,  sefior,  pero  s6  bailar  el  rigodon  y 
la  polka. 

18.  ^De  donde  vienen  Yds.?    Yenimos  de  Francia,  y  vamos  para 
Filadelfia. 

19.  ^  Quiere  Y.  salir  d  pasear  ?    Muy  bien,  ir6mos  al  Parque  Central. 

20.  I  Qui6n  lavo  estos  pafiuelos  ?    Estan  muy  mal  lavados.     Su  lavan- 
dera  de  Y.  los  lav6. 

21.  ^D6nde  paso  Y.  el  verano?    Lo  pas6  en  el  campo.    ^Yelinviemo? 
En  la  ciudad. 

22.  I  Cudles  son  los  meses  mas  alegres  del  afio?    Los  de  la  primavera, 

23.  I  Sabe  Y.  la  direccion  de  la  casa  de  su  hermano  de  Y.  ?    Si,  sefior, 
ealle  Catorce,  ntiraero  ciento  veinte  y  cinco. 

24.  I A  qu6  hora  comen  Yds.  ?    Coraemos  d  las  tres  de  la  tarde. 

25.  I  Qu6  hora  tiene  Y.  ?    Tengo  las  dos  y  veinte. 

26.  j  A  qu6  hora  salieron  sus  hcrmanas  para  el  parque  ?    Salieron  a  las 
seis  y  media  de  la  mafiana. 

27.  J  Y  d  qu6  hora  volvieron  ?    A  las  once  m6nos  cuarto. 

28.  i  Buenos  dias! — Buenos  dias. — ^Esta  Y.  bueno  ?    Muy  bueno,  grtk 
das.    i  Y  su  familia  de  Y.  ?    Muy  buena,  gracias. 

29.  I  Baila  Y.  la  polca  ?    No,  sefior,  estoy  principiando  d  aprenderla. 


LESSON     XXIV,  103 


EXERCISE. 


1.  When  shall  your  uncle  have  finished  his  letter  ?    He  shall  have  it 
finished  at  eight  o'clock. 

2.  When  shall  you  have  your  letter  written  ?    I  shall  have  it  written 
before  going  to  the  professor's. 

3.  When  shall  the  notary  make  the  conveyance  (writing)  ?  He  has  jusi 
taade  it. 

4.  Shall  your  servant  have  swept  my  room  before  the  lesson  hour  to- 
morrow ?    Yes,  sir,  she  shall  have  it  swept  at  six  o'clock. 

5.  What  day  of  the  month  is  it?    It  is  the  thirteenth. 

6.  Does  your  washerwoman  come  to  wash  in  your  house  ?      She  does 
not,  but  she  washes  very  well. 

7.  How  many  lessons  do  those  gentlemen  take  every  month  ?    They 
take  four  every  week ;  that  makes  sixteen  every  month. 

8.  Which  are  the  best  months  for  walking?    The  three  months  of 
spring,  and  the  three  of  autumn  (or  fall). 

9.  Where  are  you  coming  (do  you  come)  irom  ?    I  am  coming  from 
walking. 

10.  Will  you  give*  me  a  needle  and  thread  and  a  thimble  to  sew? 
Here  is  the  needle ;  I  am  going  to  look  for  the  thread  and  thimble. 

11.  In  what  year  did  your  sister  Margaret  go  to  England?    She  went 
in  June,  1865. 

12.  What  is  the  date  of  that  letter?    Madrid,  Tth  July,  1866. 

13.  Shall  you  go  to  Europe  this  summer  ?    Ko,  madam,  I  shall  not  go 
befone  next  spring. 

14.  Is  December  a  good  month  for  travelling?    No,  it  is  one  of  the 
worst  in  tlie  year. 

15.  How  did  you  {plural)  spend  the  day  yesterday?    We  walked  in 
t\iQ  Central  Park. 

16.  Did  you  walk  the  whole  day  ?    No,  we  walked  until  twelve  o'clock, 
and  then  we  read  and  played  on  the  piano. 

17.  Did  you  not  pass  the  evening  at  Mr.  Martinez's?    No,  we  did  not 
go  out  all  (in  all)  the  evening,  Margaret  was  a  little  sick. 

18.  Do  you  know  which  are  the  longest  months  ?    Yes ;  they  are  Jan- 
uary, March,  May,  July,  August,  October  and  December. 

19.  And  which  are  the  shortest?    April,  June,  September  and  No- 
vember. 

20.  But  what  do  you  do  with  February  ?    February  is  the  shortest  of 
all ;  it  has  but  twenty-eight  days. 

21.  Shall  you  walk  much  this  spring?    No,  miss,  I  shall  work  a  great 
deal. 

*  Dar. 


104 


LESSON     XXV, 


v^ 


22.  When  shall  the  tailor  sew  my  vest  ?  He  shall  sew  it  to-morrow 
evening. 

23.  Has  the  lawyer  not  spoken  ?    He  has  just  spoken. 

24.  Until  what  hour  did  he  speak  ?     Until  half-past  one. 

25.  Did  he  speak  in  Spanish  ?  No,  he  spoke  in  French  to-day ;  but 
to-morrow  he  shall  speak  in  Spanish. 

26.  Do  you  not  wish  to  practise  Italian  ?  Yes,  sir,  and  I  shall  prac- 
tise the  day  after  to-morrow,  if  I  have  time. 

27.  If  your  teacher  comes  to-day,  will  you  take  a  lesson  ?  I  shall 
take  it  if  he  comes. 

28.  Does  he  pronounce  weU?  He  pronounces  very  well,  but  with 
some  aifectation. 

29.  How  many  Spanish  words  do  you  know  that  end  in  cion  ?  I  know 
very  many. 

30.  Which  are  they  ?  Conversation,  approbation,  agitation,  complica- 
tion, classification,  intention,  desertion,  circumspection,  nation,  naviga- 
tion, and  very  many  others. 


LESSON    XXY 


Conocer. 


I      To  know,  to  be  acquainted  with. 


PRESENT  INDICATIVE. 

Conozco. 

I  know. 

Conoces. 

Thou  knowest. 

Conoce. 

He  knows. 

Conocemos. 

We  know. 

Coneceis. 

You  know. 

Conocen. 

They  know. 

PRETERIT 

DEFmriE. 

Conoci. 

I  knew. 

Conociste. 

Thou  knewest. 

Conoci6. 

He  knew. 

Conocimos. 

We  knew. 

Conocisteis. 

You  knew. 

Conocieron. 

Tliey  knew. 

LESSON     XXV. 


105 


FUTUEE 

SIMPLE. 

Conocer^. 

I  shall  know. 

Conoceras. 

Thou  wilt  know. 

Conocera. 

He  will  know. 

Conocer6mos. 

We  shall  know. 

Conocer^is. 

You  will  know. 

Conoceran. 

They  will  know. 

PEETEBIT 

CNDEFINITE. 

He  conociilo. 

1      I  have  known. 

COMPOUND   FUTUEE. 

Habre  conocido. 

1      I  shall  have  known. 

Gozar. 

To  enjoy. 

Prometer. 

To  promise. 

Una  vez. 

Once. 

Dos  veces,  &c. 

Twice. 

Alto. 

High,  loud. 

Bajo. 

Low. 

Siempre. 

Always. 

Nunca. 

Never. 

Jamas. 

Never. 

Ya. 

Already,  yet  {interrogativelyy 

Ya  {with  a  negative). 

No  longer. 

Aun. 

StiU,  yet,  even. 

Todavia. 

Still,  yet,  even. 

A  menudo. 

Often. 

Demasiado. 

Too,  too  much. 

Bastante. 

Enough,  pretty. 

Frio.         Cold  (the). 

Verguenza.      Shame. 

Calor.       Heat. 

Eazon.             Reason. 

Miedo.      Fear. 

Sed.                  Thirst. 

Sueflo.      Sleep. 

Ldstima.           Pity. 

Harabre.  Hunger. 

Salud.               Health. 

Valor.       Courage,  worth,  value. 
Maestro.  Master,  teacher. 

Moda.               Fashion. 

Maestra.           Mistress  (school) 

V  I  Conoce  V.  k  ese  hombre  ? 

Ko  lo  conozco ;   pero  se  quien  le  co- 


noce. 


COMPOSITION. 

Do  you  know  that  man  ? 
I  do  not  know  him ;  but  I  know  who 
knows  him. 


:% 


106 


LESSON     XXV, 


V  i  Porqu6  no  aprende  V.  bus  lecciones  ? 

Conozco  que  he  hccho  mal  en  no 
aprenderlas ;  pero  prometo  saber- 
las  para  maiiana. 

^  Sabe  V.  francos  ? 

No,  senor,  pero  voy  &  aprenderlo; 
i  conoce  V.  un  buen  maestro  ? 

i  Estudia  Y.  aun  (todavia)  el  espanol  ? 

Ya  no  lo  estudio. 

6  Sabe  V.  hablarlo  ya  ? 

No,  todavia. 
V   6  Ha  principiado  ya  su  hermano  de  V. 

8U3  lecciones  ? 
^  Ta  ha  principiado  ;  pero  no  las  apren- 
dera  jara4s  (nunca),  porque  no  estu- 
dia bastante. 

j  Cuantas  veces  ha  estado  V.  este  mes 
en  el  teatro  ? 

He  estado  una  vez ;  pero  el  mes  pasa- 
do  estuve  tres  veces. 

I  Tiene  V.  miedo  de  su  maestro  ? 

No  tengo  miedo  de  61 ;  pero  tengo  ver- 
giienza  de  61. 

^  De  qui6n  tiene  V.  14stima  ? 

Tengo  14stima  de  ese  pobre  hombre. 

i  Tiene  V.  calor  6  frio  ? 

No  tengo  ni  calor  ni  frio  ;  tengo  ham- 
bre  y  sed. 

I  Tiene  razon  el  abogado  ? 

El  abogado  no  tiene  razon. 

i  Tiene  61  razon  alguna  vez  ? 

Tiene  razon  algunas  veces,   pero  no 

siempre. 
*i  Hard  V.  eso  otra  vez  ? 

No  lo  har6  jam&s  (nunca). 

i  Amar&  V.  &  su  amigo  ? 

Le  amar6  por  siempre  jam&s. 

i  Ha  leido  V.  jara.48  ese  libro  ? 
^  Nunca  jam&s  lo  har6. 

i  Tiene  su  madre  de  V.  buena  salud  ? 

Si,  senor,  goza  de  muy  buena  salud. 
i  Tiene  V.  hambre  6  sed  ? 
No    tengo  ni    hambre    ni   sod,  tengo 
sueno. 


Why  do  you  not  learn  your  lessons  ? 
I  know  that  I  have  done  wrong  in  not 

learning  them  ;    but  I  promise  to 

know  them  for  to-morrow. 
Do  you  know  French  ? 
No,  sir,  but  I  am  going  to  learn  it ;  do 

you  know  a  good  teacher  ? 
Do  you  still  study  Spanish  ? 
I  study  it  no  longer. 
Do  you  know  how  to  speak  it  already  ? 
Not  yet. 

Has  your  brother  commenced  hia  les- 
sons yet  ? 
He  has  (already)  commenced ;  but  he 

will  never  learn  them,  for  he  does 

not  study  enough. 
How  many  times  have  you  been  in  the 

theatre  this  month  ? 
I  have  been  once ;  but  last  month  I 

was  there  three  times. 
Are  you  afraid  of  your  master? 
I  am  not  afraid   of  him ;    but  I  am 

ashamed  before  him. 
On  whom  do  you  take  pity  ? 
I  take  pity  on  that  poor  man. 
Are  you  warm  or  cold  ? 
I  am  neither  warm  nor  cold ;  I  am 

hungry  and  thirsty. 
Is  the  lawyer  right  ? 
The  lawyer  is  not  right 
Is  he  right  sometimes  ? 
He  is  right  sometimes,  but  not  alwaya 

Will  you  do  that  again  (another  time)  t 

I  will  never  do  it. 

Will  you  love  your  friend  ? 

I  shall  love  him  always  (for  ever). 

Have  you  ever  read  that  book  ? 

I  shall  never  do  it. 

Is  your  mother  in  good  health  (hat 

your  mother  good  health)? 
Yes,  sir,  she  enjoys  very  good  health. 
Are  you  hungry  or  thirsty  ? 
I  am  neither  hungry  nor  thirsty,  I  am 

sleepy. 


LESSON     XXV.  107 

EXPLANATION. 

111.  Saeer,  to  know,  and  conocee,  to  be  acquainted  with. 
'—It  must  be  observed,  in  order  not  to  confound  these  two 
verbs,  that  saber  is  employed  to  signify  the  act  of  knowing, 
being  informed  of,  having  learned,  or  having  a  knowledge  of 
something ;  whereas  conocer  is  used  to  express  the  fact  of 
being  acquainted  with,  perceiving,  or  being  able  to  distinguish 
persons  or  things  ;  as, 

I  Sabe  V.  quien  conoce  a  este  hombre  ?  |  Do  you  know  who  knows  that  man  ? 

112.  AuN,  YA,  ToDAViA. — The  adverb  aun  indicates  that 
the  subject  of  the  sentence  continues  in  the  same  state  as  be- 
fore; quite  the  reverse  with  the  adverb  pa,  which  always 
signifies  discontinuance  of  a  former  state  (expressed  or  under- 
stood) ;  e.  g., 

I  Escribe  Y.  aun  ?  I  Do  you  write  yet  ? 

No  escribo  ya.  |  I  do  not  write  any  longer, 

Todavia,  yet,  still,  is  synonimous  with  aun  ;  as, 

Est4  trabajando  todavia  (or  aun).        |  He  is  still  working. 

Once,  twice,  &c.,  are  rendered  in  Spanish  by  una  vez,  dos 
veces,  &G. 

Miedo,  valor,  vergilenza,  Idstima,  tiempo,  take  the  preposi- 
tion de  after  them  ;  as, 

Tengo  miedo  de  salir.  I  I  am  afraid  to  go  out. 

Tengo  verguenea  de  ese  hombre.  |  I  am  ashamed  of  that  man. 

113.  When  in  English  the  verb  to  he  precedes  the  adjec- 
tives hungry,  thirsty,  afraid,  ashamed,  right,  wrong,  warm,  cold^ 
sleepy,  it  is  changed  into  the  Spanish  verb  tener,  and  the  adjec- 
tive into  a  corresponding  substantive  ;  as, 

^  Tiene  Y.  miedo  ?  Are  you  afraid  ? 

6  Tiene  Y.  sed  ?  Are  you  thirsty  ? 

^  Tiene  Y.  calor.  Are  you  warm  ? 

^  Tiene  Y.  frio  ?  Are  you  cold  ? 

114.  Jamas  and  nunca  may  be  used  indiscriminately,  or 
one  for  the  other  ;  as, 

Jamds  (or  nunca)  le  he  conocido.        (  I  have  never  been  acquainted  with  him. 


108  LBSSON     XXV. 

Sometimes  they  are  used  together,  to  give  more  energy  to 
the  expression ;  as, 
Nunca  jamas  lo  har6.  j  Never,  no  never,  shall  I  do  so. 

But  Jamds  has  the  peculiarity  of  being  used  after  the  words 
por  siempre  and  para  siempre,  for  ever ;  where,  instead  of  being 
^  negative,  it  affirms,  meaning  eternally  ;  as, 
Le  amar6  por  siempre  jamds.  |  I  will  love  him  forever. 

Sometimes  it  is  used  alone  interrogatively,  meaning  ever ;  as, 
I  Ha  leido  V.  jamds  ese  libro  ?  |  Have  you  ever  read  that  book  ? 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  ^D6nde  conoci6  Y.  a  su  araigo?    Le  conoci  en  Paris  el  inviemo 
pasado. 

2.  I  Sabe  V.  qm6n  conoce  a  ese  horabre  ?    Mi  padre  le  conoce  muj 
bien. 

3.  I  Cudndo  conocer6  a  su  hermano  de  V.  ?    En  el  otofio  le  conocera  V. 

4.  I  Ha  conocido  V.  en  L6ndres  a  ese  caballero  ?     Si,  seftor,  le  conoci 
alii  el  ano  pasado. 

5.  I  C6mo  esta  su  hijo  de  Y.  ?    Mai ;  no  goza  de  buena  salud. 

6.  I  Bail6  Y.  mucho  en  el  baile  de  anoche  ?     Si,  sefior,  muchisimo. 

7.  I  Quien  es  ese  caballero  ?    Es  un  escritor  de  gran  reputacion. 

8.  I  Tienen  mucha  aceptacion  sus  obras  ?    Tieneu  muchisima. 

9.  I  Sabe  Y.  lo  que  ban  prometido  sus  amigas  de  Y.  ?    No  lo  s4. — ^Han 
prometido  estudiar  sus  lecciones. 

10.  i  Yendra  Y.  maflana  4  comer  con  nosotros?    No,  sefior,  he  prome- 
tido comer  con  mis  amigos  los  Alemanes. 

11.  ^  Ilabla  ya  espaflol  su  primo  de  Y.  ?    No  lo  habla  aun,  y  no  lo 
hablarti  jamas  (nunca),  porque  no  estudia  bastante. 

>|l2.  ^Barrio  Y.  mi  cuarto?    No,  sefior,  pero  prometo  barrerlo  mafiana 
temprano. 

13.  J  Cuantas  veces  prometi6  Y.  buscar  mi  sombrero  ?    Jamas  lo  pro- 
meti. 

14.  I  No  desea  Y.  ya  ir  d  su  pais?    Lo  deseo  muchisimo. 

15.  I  Sale  Y.  ya  d  pasear  todos  losdias  ?     No  salgo  sino  algunas  veces. 

16.  I  L]ev6  Y.  ya  mi  carta  al  correo  ?    Todavia  no  la  he  Uevado. 

17.  I  No  ha  estado  Y.  jamds  en  Paris  ?    No,  sefior,  jamds  he  estado. 

18.  J  No  ha  Icido  Y.  jamds  la  historia  de  los  Estados  Unidos?    Si,  la 
he  leido  una  vez. 

19.  i  Ilabla  bien  el  abogado?    Habla.  hien,  pero  mny  b^o. 

20.  I  Comprende  Y.  ya  el  espafiol  ?  Si  hablan  alto,  y  despacio,  si,  sefior 


LESSON    XXV.  109 

21.  gTiene  V.  bastante  que  hacer  ?    Tengo  demasiado. 

22.  I  Cuantos  anos  tiene  Y.  ?    Tengo  veinte  j  uno. 

23.  I  Cuando  vi6  Y.  por  ^tima  vez  a  su  familia  ?  El  dia  seis  de  Se- 
tiembre  del  afio  de  mil  ochocientos  cincuenta  y  cinco. 

24.  I  Cuando  conoci6  Y.  al  pianista  ?    Le  conoci  ayer  por  primera  vez. 

25.  ^  Han  salido  sus  heraianas  para  el  campo  ?  Todavia  no,  pero  sal- 
dran  muy  pronto. 

26.  I  Que  hace  su  padre  de  Yds.  ?  Esta  gozando  del  buen  tiempo  en 
el  campo. 

27.«  g  Qu6  tiene  su  nii5o  de  Y.  ?    Tiene  frio  j  sueQo. 

28.  I  Tienen  ellos  hambre  ?    No,  sefior,  tienen  sed. 

29.  2  Tiene  Y.  valor  para  hacerlo  ?    Si,  sefior,  pero  tengo  verguenza. 

30.  I'^o  tiene  Y.  lastima  de  esa  mujer?  Si,  sefior,  tengo  lastima  de 
ella,  porque  no  tiene  buena  salud. 

31.  g  Tiene  suefio  su  madre  de  Y.  ?    No,  sefior,  pero  esta  muy  cansada. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Do  you  know  that  man?    Yes,  sir,  that  gentleman  is  my  uncle. 

2.  Are  you  still  writmg  ?    No,  I  am  no  longer  writing. 

3.  Has  Charles  come  from  the  country  yet  ?    No,  he  has  not  come  yet. 

4.  Have  you  (plural)  ever  read  the  History  of  Civilization  by  Guizot? 
No,  but  we  shall  read  it  next  spring. 

5.  Are  you  not  ashamed  of  not  having  read  the  History  of  the 
United  States  ?  I  am  not  ashamed,  because  I  am  too  young  to  read  his- 
tory. 

6.  When  shall  you  commence  to  read  it?  I  shall  commence  next 
year. 

7.  Yery  well ;  it  is  a  useful  study  (estudio), 

8.  Does  your  aunt  enjoy  good  health  ?  Yes,  sir,  thank  you,  she  en- 
joys very  good  health. 

9.  Are  you  cold,  madam  ?  No,  thank  you,  I  wish  to  go  out  a  minute, 
because  I  am  very  warm  in  this  room. 

10.  Is  it  ten  o'clock  yet  ?    No,  it  is  but  a  quarter  past  eight. 

11.  Who  is  that  gentleman  to  whom  your  cousin  spoke  last  night  at 
Tthe  concert  ?     I  do  not  know  him. 

12.  And  that  gentleman  who  came  this  morning  to  your  house,  who 
is  he  ?    He  is-  a  Spanish  writer  who  enjoys  a  high  (great)  reputation. 

13.  Has  he  written  many  works?  He  has  already  written  many 
books,  and  he  is  going  to  write  a  history  of  Spain. 

14.  Do  you  know  Sir  Walter  Scott's  works  ?     Yes,  I  have  read  them  all. 

15.  Are  they  not  much  esteemed  in  Europe  (have  they  not  much  esti' 
mation)  ?    Yes,  very  much. 


110  LESSON     XXV. 

16.  When  did  your  brother  become  acquainted  with  his  {el)  Spanish 
friend?       Last  year,  in  London. 

17.  Are  you  sleepy,  young  ladies?  Yes,  we  are  very  tired,  thirsty 
and  sleepy  {tener  sed  y  sueno), 

18.  Will  you  take  a  little  wine  ?    No,  thank  you,  we  never  take  wine. 

19.  Does  your  mother  know  Emanuel's  address  (direction)  ?  Yes,  here 
it  is  in  this  letter. 

20.  Will  you  read  it  ?  With  much  pleasure.  Emanuel  Martmez,  Esq. 
(don),  113  Broadway.     A  thousand  thanks. 

21.  Did  your  cousin's  {fern.)  friends  commence  their  lessons  the 
other  day  ?  Yes,  they  commenced,  and  are  much  pleased  (content)  with 
them. 

22.  Why  does  the  lawyer  speak  so  low  ?    I  do  not  know. 

23.  Does  he  not  speak  as  low  as  his  brother  loud  ?  He  speaks  low 
from  (by)  affectation. 

24.- Which  of  your  servants  {fern.)  sews  the  best?  None  of  them 
sews. 

25.  How  many  conjugations  has  the  Spanish  language  ?  Three  regu- 
lar {regular)  coiyugations,  and  several  irregular  {irregular)  ones. 

26.  Have  you  ever  been  in  Philadelphia  ?  I  have  never  been  there 
yet ;  but  I  shall  go  next  year. 

27.  Did  your  father  write  the  letter  for  Peter  yesterday  ?  No,  but  he 
promised  to  write  it  the  day  after  to-morrow. 

28.  Has  your  shoemaker  enough  to  do  ?  Yes,  sir,  he  has  too  much 
to  do. 

29.  Will  you  always  love  your  brothers  and  sisters?  Yes,  I  shall 
love  them  forever. 

30.  Do  you  not  pity  that  man  ?  I  do  pity  him,  for  he  has  nothing  to 
do. 

81.  Have  you  money  enough  to  buy  a  house?  Yes,  sir,  I  have 
enough. 


LESSON    XXVI. 
La/r.  I         To  give. 

PRESENT  rNDIOATTVE. 

Doy,  das,  da.  1 1  give,  tliou  givest,  he  gives. 

Damos,  dais,  dan.  I  We  give,  you  give,  they  give. 


LESSON     XXVI. 


Ill 


PEETEEIT  DEFINITE, 

Bi,  diste,  di6.  I  I  gave,  tliou  gavest,  he  gave. 

Dimos,  disteis,  dieron.  I  We  gave,  you  gave,  they  gave. 


Dar6,  daras,  dara. 
Dar^mos,  dar6is,  daran. 


FUTUEE   SIMPLE. 

I  shall  give,  thou  wilt  give,  he  will 

give. 
We  shall  give,  you  shall  give,  they 

shall  give. 


PEETEEIT   mDEFINIE. 

He  dado,  has  dado,  etc.  |  I  have  given,  thou  hast  given,  &c 


COMPOUND   FUTIJEE. 

Habr6  dado, 

etc. 

I  shall  have  given,  &o. 

Ganar 

To  gain,  earn,  win. 

Sing.  Nbm. 

Yo. 

L 

l8t  Obj, 
2d  Obj, 

Me. 
Ami. 

\ 

Me,  or  to  me. 

Plur.  Kom. 

Nosotros. 

We. 

l8t  Obj. 
2d  Obj. 

Nos. 

A  nosotros. 

f 

Us,  or  to  us. 

Sing,  Nom, 

Tii. 

Thou. 

\8t  Obj. 
2d  Obj, 

T6. 
Ati. 

Thee,  or  to  thee. 

Plur,  Horn, 

Yosotros. 

Ye,  you. 

\8t  Obj, 
2d  Obj, 

Os. 

A  vosotros. 

Ye,  you,  or  to  you. 

Sing.  Nom. 

£1. 

He. 

\8t  Obj. 
2d  Obj. 

Le. 

A  a. 

Him,  or  to  him. 

J*lur.  Nom. 

Ellos. 

They. 

l8t  Obj. 
2d  Obj. 

Los,  les. 
A  ellos. 

Them,  to  them. 

Sing.  Nom, 

Ella. 

She. 

l8t  Obj. 
2d  Obj. 

La,le. 
A  ella. 

Her,  to  her 

112 


LESSON     XXVI 


Plur,  Nom.      Ellas. 
\st  01)j.         Las,  les. 
2d  Ohj.         A  ellas. 

Sing,  arid  Plur. 
Ut  Ohj.         Se. 
.  2d  Obj.         A  si. 

Neuter  Form, 
Nbm.  Ello. 

1st  Ohj.  Lo. 

2d  Ohj.         A  ello. 


They. 

Them,  to  them. 

f  Himself,  herself^  itself,  them- 
<  selves;  or  to  himself,  to  her 
[     self,  to  itself,  to  themselves. 

It. 
It. 

To  it. 


COMPOSITION. 


i  Conoce  V.  aquellas  senoras  ?    Deseo 

conocerlas. 
Conociendolas  las  amar4  V. 
i  Me  promete  V.  llevanne  k  su  casa  ? 

Doy  4  V.  mi  palabra. 

},  Qu^  le  di6  k  V.  mi  prime  ? 

Quiso  darme  unas  flores ;    pero  yo  no 

quise  recibirlas. 
^  Quieres  venir  comnigo  al  teatro  ? 
No  ir4  contigo,  porque  mi  padre  quiere 

llevarme  consigo. 
i  Son  estas  flores  para  ti  ? 
No  son  para  mi ;  son  para  Y. 
Yo  te  necesito. 
Ella  nos  hablo  en  el  teatro. 
t\  me  amara  eon  el  tiempo. 
Nosotros  le  hablamos  en  el  concierto. 
Yo  le  escribi  una  carta. 
Ella  lea  did  un  libro. 


Do  you  know  those  ladies  ?    I  desire  to 

know  them. 
On  knowing  them  you  will  love  them. 
Do  you  promise  me  to  take  me  to  their 

house? 
I  will  give  you  my  word. 
What  did  my  cousin  give  you  ? 
He  wanted  to  give  me  some  flowers ;  but 

I  would  not  receive  them. 
Wilt  thou  come  with  me  to  the  theatre  ? 
I  will  not  go  with  thee,  because  my 

father  wants  to  take  me  with  him. 
Are  these  flowers  for  thee  ? 
They  are  not  for  me,  they  are  for  you. 
I  want  thee. 

She  spoke  to  us  in  the  theatre. 
He  will  love  me  in  time. 
We  spoke  to  him  at  the  concert 
I  wrote  him  a  letter. 
She  gave  them  a  book. 


EXPLANATION. 
115.  Subject  or  Nominative. — To  what  has  already  been 
said,  in  Lesson  X.,  relative  to  pronouns  as  subjects  or  nominative 
'cases  to  verbs,  we  shall  here  simply  add,  that  they  may  at  all 
times  precede  their  verbs,  unless  the  latter  be  in  the  imperative 
mood,  or  be  used  interrogatively  ;  examples : 


Yo  estudio. 
Til  escribes. 
Vengan  ellos. 
i  Lee  ella  i 


I  study. 
Thou  writest. 
Let  them  come. 
Does  she  read. 


LESSON     XXVI.  113 

116.  Personal  Peonouns. — ^In  Spanish  there  is  a  pecu- 
liarity to  be  observed  amongst  the  personal  pronouns  :  that  is, 
that  they  have  two  objective  cases ;  one  of  which  can  never 
be  used  with  prepositions,  and  the  other  never  without  one. 

117.  The  Objective  Case,  when  not  preceded  by  aprepo- 
Bition,  is  affixed  to  infinitives,  imperatives  and  gerunds ;  as, 

Amar/a. 

Amemos/e. 

AmandoZos. 


Habiendo/a  amado. 
C6mpra?e.s  algo. 
Habiendo/os  hallado. 


To  love  her. 
Let  us  love  him. 
Loving  them. 
Having  loved  her. 
Buy  them  something. 
Having  found  them. 


118.  In  some  tenses  the  verb  drops  the  final  letter  in  the 
first  and  second  persons  plural,  when  they  are  followed  by  nos 
or  08 ;  as, 

Amdmonos  instead  of  amdmosnos,    I  "We  loved  each  other. 

Amaxfs  instead  of  amados.  \  Love  each  other. 

In  the  first  case,  the  reason  of  this  is  perhaps  to  soften  the 
pronunciation  of  the  first  word ;  and  in  the  second  the  d  is 
dropped,  in  order  that  the  imperative  be  not  confounded  with 
the  past  participle.  Nevertheless,  we  say  idos^  go,  and  not 
108  ;  but  this  is  the  only  exception  to  the  rule. 

119.  The  objective  case  may  sometimes  elegantly  follow 
the  verb,  but  rarely  when  the  sentence  does  not  begm  by  the 
vei'b ;  as, 

Llevome  al  teatro.  |  He  took  me  to  the  theatre. 

120.  When  one  verb  governs  another  in  the  infinitive 
mood,  the  objective  case  referring  to  the  second  verb  may  be 
placed  either  before  the  govermng  verb,  or  after  the  governed 
.one;  as, 

Quiero  llevarle,  or  le  quiero  Uevar.      |  I  wish  to  take  him. 

121.  Prepositions,  when  expressed,  always  govern  the 
second  objective  case  ;  as, 


Para  mi. 

Sin  ti. 
Hacla  ellos. 


For  me. 
Without  thee. 
Towards  them. 


114  LESSON     XXVI. 

122.  Mf,  Tf,  sf,  when  preceded  by  con,  take  go  after  them, 
and  are  joined  to  the  preposition  ;  as, 


Conmigo. 

Contigo. 

Con«igo. 


With  me. 

With  thee. 

With  him,  her,  them,  it. 


123.  Entee  is  used  with  the  nominative  case  of  the  first 
person  singular,  in  this  expression, 

-EWrc  tu  y  yo.  |  Between  thee  and  me ; 

but  in  every  other  instance  it  governs  the  second  objective 
case;  as, 

U7itre  si.  j  Between  themselves. 

£!nire  nosotros.  j  Between  us. 

124.  The  second  objective  case  is  always  used  after  com- 
paratives ;  as, 

Te  quiero  mas  que  d  H.  |  I  love  thee  better  than  bun. 

125.  When  in  English  the  objective  case  of  the  first  or 
second  person  is  the  object  of  the  verb,  or  of  the  preposition 
to,  expressed  or  understood,  we  use  the  first  case ;  as, 


Yo  te  necesito. 
Ella  nos  hablo. 
El  me  amara. 


I  want  thee. 
She  spoke  to  us. 
He  will  love  me. 


126.  In  Lesson  X.  we  explained  the  objective  case  of  the 
third  person  when  it  is  the  object  of  the  English  verb ;  but 
if  the  third  person  in  English  be  governed  by  the  preposition 
to,  expressed  or  understood,  we  render  it  by  le,  les,  for  both 
genders ;  as. 


Nosotros  le  habl&mos. 
Yo  le  escribi. 
Ella  les  did. 


We  spoke  to  him. 
I  wrote  to  her. 
She  gave  them. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  { Qu6  me  dard  V.  ?    Le  dar6  dV.  las  gracias. 

2.  I  Qu6  les  di6  V.  k  sus  nifios  ?    Les  di  veinte  centavos. 

8.  J  Me  dards  algo  por  mi  trabfyo?    Algo  te  dar6  si  \o  haces  bien  ^ 
8in6,  nada. 


LESSON     XXVI.  115 

4.  I  Qu6  OS  dieron  en  casa  de  tu  primo  ?    Nos  dieron  chocolate. 
6.  I  Que  le  has  prometido  a  tu  prima  ?     Bailar  hoy  con  ella. 

6.  g  C6mo  ser6mos  mas  felices  ?    Amandonos  los  unos  a  los  otros. 

7.  I  Cuando  vendra  el  con  nosotros  ?     Yendra  mafiana  temprano. 

8.  ^Oaando  saldra  V.  conmigo  a  paseo?     Tendre  ese  gusto  pasado 
mafiana. 

9.  I  Qui^n  ira  conmigo  al  teatro  esta  noche  ?    Yo  ir6  contigo. 

10.  ^Donde  habiaste  a  mis  amigos  ?     Les  habl6  en  el  Parque  Central. 

11.  2 Les  Iey6  V.  mi  carta?    No,  les  lei  la  de  su  hermana  de  Y. 

12.  ^Me  envio  Y.  los  libros?    No,  sefior,  los  envi^  a  su  hermano 
deY. 

13.  ^06mo  supo  Y.  de  sus  amigos?     Escribi^ndoles. 

14.  1 06mo  conoci6  Y.  a  su  amiga  ?     Bailando  con  ella  en  casa  de  su 
hermano. 

15.  I  Que  le  prometi6  Y.  a  su    prima  ?      Le  prometi  Uevarla  a  la 
opera. 

16.  I'Nos  hablaron  ellos  alguna  vez?    Nos  hablaron  una  6  dos  veces 
en  el  paseo. 

17.  ^Porque  no  les  habl6  Y.  ?    Porque  no  los  conozco  bien. 

18.  ^Que  le  han  escrito  a  Y.  sus  amigos?    Que  vendran  a  hablarnos. 

19.  ^Quieres  salir  conmigo  a  paseo  ?     Si,  saldr6  contigo. 

20.  g Cuando  iremos  a  casa  de  tus  amigos?     Ir^mos  hoy,  porque  ellos 
tendran  mucho  gusto  en  conocerte. 

21.  ^Quiere  Y.  pasarme  el  pan  ?     Con  mucho  gusto. — Gracias. 

22.  I  Qu6  le  prometiste  d  tu  prima  ?    Le  prometi  ir  a  su  casa  mafiana 
y  llevarle  un  pafiuelo  de  seda. 

23.  I  Cuando  le  habl6  Y.  ?    Le  habl6  anoche  en  casa  de  su  madre. 

24.  ^Quiere  Y.  venir  a  pasear?    Mejor  sera  estarnos  aquL 

25.  I A  qu6  vienen  Yds.  ?     Yenimos  a  hablarle  d  Y. 

26.  g  Cuando  iremos  al  campo  con  nuestros  amigos  ?    Iremos  mafiana. 

27.  ^Como  les  gan6  a  Yds.  la  lavandera  tanto  dinero?    Lavandonos 
los  vestidos  y  trabajando  mucho. 

28.  I  Cuantas  veces  d  la  semana  habla  Y.  con  sus  amigos  ?    Nos  ha- 
blamos  todos  los  dias. 

29.  ^  Yendra  hoy  su  primo  de  Y.  a  comer  con  nosotras  ?    Si,  porque 
quiere  conocerlas  d  Yds. 

\^    30.  I  Le  di6  Y.  los  buenos  dias  a  su  prima?    Le  di  los  buenos  dias  ayei* 
en  la  plaza  y  le  habl6  de  Y. 

31.  Le  doy  d  Y.  las  gracias.     g  Tien  3  buena  salud  ahora?     Si,  sefiora, 
estd  muy  buena. 

32.  ^Le  di6  d  Y.  los  peri6dicos?    No,  sefiora,  pero  prometi6  mandar- 
los  mafiana. 


116  LESSON    XXVI. 

EXERCISR 

1.  What  was*  that  you  gave  to  your  friend  last  night  at  the  theatre? 
I  gave  him  the  second  volume  of  Mr.  Romanos'  new  work. 

2.  Why  do  you  not  give  him  the  first  volume  ?  I  have  already  given 
it  to  my  cousin.  • 

3.  Did  you  not  promise  last  week  to  give  me  those  two  volumes  ? 
Yes ;  and  you  shall  have  them  the  day  after  to-morrow. 

4.  Will  you  come  with  me  to  the  country  in  the  summer?  I  will  go 
if  you  set  out  on  the  first  of  July. 

5.  Will  you  and  your  uncle  come  with  us  to  walk  this  afternoon  ? 
This  evening  we  have  to  go  to  the  concert. 

6.  When  will  you  go  out  with  us?  I  do  not  know ;  but  I  think  (that) 
to-morrow  {creo  que  maflana). 

7.  Have  you  heard  (sabido)  from  your  father  this  week  ?  No ;  but 
we  heard  from  our  brother  John  last  week. 

8.  How  often  has  he  written  to  you  from  Boston?  We  have  received 
seven  or  eight  letters  from  him. 

9.  How  much  did  that  singer  make  (gain)  in  New  York  ?  Which 
one?  I  do  not  know  any  singers. 

10.  Do  you  not  know  the  singer  who  spent  last  week  at  your  uncle's 
ii  the  country?  Yes;  but  it  was  in  Philadelphia  that  he  sang,  not  in 
New  York. 

11.  Are  you  cold?    No,  sir;  but  I  am  hungry  and  thirsty. 

12.  When  will  you  take  Emanuel  to  see  your  children  ?  I  shall  take  him 
to-morrow. — ^They  will  have  much  pleasure  in  making  his  acquaintance. 

13.  How  many  languages  does  that  gentleman  speak?  He  only  speaks 
his  own ;  but  his  cousin  speaks  five. 

14.  Which  are  they'  Ho  speaks  French,  German,  Spanish,  English, 
and  Italian. 

15.  How  did  he  learn  so  many  languages?  By  studying  the  grammar 
of  each  one  of  them  (cada  una  de  ellas),  reading  the  works  of  the  best 
writers,  and  practising  with  the  natives  {natural). 

16.  Does  he  write  all  those  languages  as  well  as  he  speaks  them  ?  He 
writes  them  better  than  he  speaks  them. 

17.  Did  I  not  see  you  {plural)  speaking  to  the  notary  yesterday  in  the 
park  ?     No,  it  was  the  day  before  yesterday. 

18.  What  has  he  done  in  that  affair  {negocio)  of  your  brother's?  He 
has  done  nothing  yet;  and  as  he  has  to  leave  town  {la  ciudad)  this  after- 
noon,  he  will  do  nothing  all  this  week. 

19.  Who  is  the  young  lady  who  danced  so  well  last  night  at  youi 
house?     Do  you  not  know  her?  she  is  my  cousin. 

*  See  the  conjugation  of  the  verb  Seb,  at  the  end  of  the  book. 


LESSON     XXVII.  117 

20.  When  did  you  see  our  friend  Mr.  Perez  ?  I  saw  him  the  other  day 
in  Twenty-sixth  street,  and  we  talked  for  more  than  two  hours  about 
{de)  theatres  and  concerts. 

21.  I  saw  him  the  night  before  last;  but  we  did  not  talk  about  thea- 
tres and  concerts.   In  whose  house  did  you  see  him  ?   At  Mr.  de  la  Rosa's. 

22.  At  what  o'clock  did  you  go  there?  I  went  at  a  quarter  to  eight, 
and  left  at  half-past  ten. 

23.  Did  you  see  many  Mexicans  there?  I  only  saw  one:  that  Mexi- 
can lawyer  who  has  just  written  a  history  of  bis  country. 

24.  Does  he  leave  soon  for  Europe  ?    He  wishes  to  set  out  next  week. 

25.  Did  John  write  to  his  father  the  day  before  yesterday  ?  Yes,  and 
he  has  heard  {saber)  since  that  he  set  out  last  week  for  France. 

26.  Has  your  sister  read  the  books  yet  which  she  received  from  Louisa 
last  week  ?    Yes ;  and  she  wishes  to  read  them  again  (ptra  vez). 

27.  I  shall  see  her  this  evening;  and  if  you  wish  (it)  I  shall  take  them 
to  her  {se  los). 

28.  Thank  you.  Have  you  much  to  do  now  ?  No,  I  never  have  much 
to  do  in  summer. 

29.  Is  Peter  tired  ?    No ;  but  he  is  the  most  tiresome  boy  I  know. 


LESSON    XXVII. 

Decir.  j  To  say,  to  tell. 

PEESENT  OF  INDICATIVE. 

Digo,  dices,  dice,  decimos,  de-  I         I  say,  or  tell,  &c. 


PEETERIT   DEFINITE. 

Dije,  dijiste,  dijo,  dijimos,  di-  I         I  said,  or  told,  &c. 
jisteis,  dijeron.  I 

FUTUEE   SIMPLE. 

Dir6,  dirds,  dird,  dir^mos,  di-  I         I  shall  or  wiU  say,  or  tell,  &c. 
r^is,  diran.  I 

PEETEEIT  INDEFINITE. 

He  dicho,  has  dicho,  etc.  |  I  have  said,  or  told,  &c. 

COMPOTTND  FUTUEE. 

Habr6  dicho,  etc.  |         I  shall  or  will  have  said,  or 

told,  &c. 


118                                            LESSON 

XXVII. 

Excusar. 

To  excuse. 

Perdonar. 

To  pardon. 

Creer. 

To  believe,  to  think. 

Ofender. 

To  offend. 

Llamar. 

To  call,  to  knock. 

Ensefiar. 

To  teach,  to  show. 

Ahora. 

Now. 

Mismo  {adverb). 

Just,  very. 

Mismo. 

Same,  self. 

Necesario. 

Necessary. 

Precise. 

Precise,  needful. 

Kegular. 

Kegular,  middling. 

Parte.        Despatch, 

Parte.           Part. 

Estudio.     Study. 

Falta.            Fault,  mistake. 

Humor.      Humor,  disposition. 

Esperanzft.    Hope. 

Sugeto.       A  person,  subject,  topic. 

Puerta.          Door. 

Asunto.      Subject,  business,  matter. 

Noticia.        News. 

Eamillete.  Bouquet. 

COMPO 

3ITI0N. 

Le  compro  un  ramillete,  y  se  lo  mando. 

He  bought  her  a  bouquet,  and  sent  It  to 

her. 

Les  escribir^  tres  cartas,  y  se  las  man- 

I shall  write  them  three  letters,  and 

date. 

send  them  to  them. 

Ella  se  lo  ha  prometido. 

She  has  promised  it  to  her. 

I  Qu6  esta  V.  hacienJo  con  ese  libro  ? 

What  are  you  doing  with  that  book  f 

Estoy  enseniindose^o  t  Manuel. 

I  am  showing  it  to  Emanuel 

i  Le  leiste  la  carta  ? 

Did  you  read  the  letter  to  him  ? 

Ya  se  la  lei. 

I  did.    (I  read  it  to  him  aheody.) 

Ella  me  lo  dijo. 

She  told  it  to  me. 

Yo  se  lo  di. 

I  gave  it  to  him. 

Mi  madre  me  ama  d  mi. 

My  mother  loves  me. 

Tu  amigo  tc  busca  d  ti. 

Thy  friend  looks  for  thee. 

Yo  hs  d(  las  noticias  d  ellos. 

I  told  them  the  news. 

Yo  se  las  dar^  d  V.  f 

I  will  tell  them  to  you. 

A  lite  arao,  or  te  amo  &  tl. 

I  love  thee. 

i  Qu6  le  ha  dioho  d  V.  su  hermano  ? 

What  has  your  brother  told  youf 

No  me  ha  dicho  nada. 

He  has  told  me  nothing. 

/Xedyeyo  eso  d  VJ 

Did  I  tell  you  that  ? 

Y,  no  me  lo  dijo. 

You  did  not  tell  it  to  me. 

LESSON     XXVII. 


119 


/  Se  lo  ha  dicho  el  a  V,? 

Me  Zo  ha  dicho. 

^  Quiere  V.  decir  eso  a  sus  amigos  ? 

Quiero  decirscZo  d  ellos. 

g  Qui  en  llama  4  la  puerta  ? 

Soy  yo  mismo. 

I  Tiene  buen  humor  su  amigo  de  V.  .^ 

J^i,  seiior,  tiene  buen  humor  cuando  le 

/    van  bien  los  negocios. 

I  Gana  ese  sugeto  mucho  en  ese  asunto  ? 

El  no  gana  para  si  mismo ;  pero  gana 

para  otros. 
Tengo  esperanza  de  que  me  perdonar4. 


Has  he  told  it  to  you  ? 

He  has  told  it  to  me. 

Will  you  tell  your  friends  that  ? 

I  will  tell  it  to  them. 

"Who  knocks  at  the  door  ? 

It  is  I  (myself). 

Has  your  friend  a  good  disposition  ? 

Yes,  sir,  he  is  good  humored  when  busi- 
ness goes  well  with  him. 

Does  that  man  make  (or  earn)  much  in 
that  business  ? 

He  does  not  make  for  himself ;  but  he 
makes  for  others. 

I  have  hopes  he  will  pardon  me. 


EXPLANATION. 

127.  Objective  pronouns,  continued. — The  third  person 
being  governed  by  to  in  English,  either  expressed  or  under- 
stood, is  in  Spanish  rendered  by  se,  if  the  object  of  the    verb 
be  a  pronoun  in  the  third  person ;  as, 
Le  compro  un  raraillete,  y  se  lomando. 


Les  escribire  tres  cartas,  y  se  las 

mandare. 
Mi  criado  se  lo  dara. 


He  bought  her  a  bouquet,  and  sent  it  to 

her. 
I   shall  write  thera  three  letters,  and 

send  them  to  them. 
My  servant  will  give  it  to  him. 


This  is  done  for  the  sake  of  euphony,  changing  the  first  of 
the  two  pronouns,  whatever  its  full  form  may  be  {le,  la  or  les), 
into  se.  This  rule  applies  to  all  pronouns,  after  as  well  as  be- 
fore the  verb ;  as, 

Ella  se  lo  ha  prometido  (instead  of 

eUa  le  lo). 
Prometiendosel^  (instead   of  prome- 
iiindolelo). 


She  has  promised  it  to  her. 
Promising  it  to  him. 


Did  you  read  the  letter  to  him  ? 
I  read  it  to  him  (already). 


(,  Le  leiste  la  carta  ? 

Ya  se  la  lei,  instead  of  ya  le  la  lei. 

128.  When  two  first  objective  cases  occur  in  the  sentence, 
one  of  which  is  the  object  of  the  verb,  and  the  other  is  gov- 
erned, in  English,  by  the  preposition  to,  either  expressed  or 
anderstood,  the  object  of  the  verb  is  to  be  placed  last ;  as, 

Ella  me  lo  dijo.  I  She  told  it  to  me. 

Yo  se  lo  6i.  I  I  gave  it  to  him. 


120  LESSON     XXVII. 

129.  But  if  the  object  of  the  verb  be  the  reflective  pro- 
noun, it  must  be  placed  first ;  as, 

Luego  se  me  excuso.  j  He  excused  himself  immediately  to  me. 

130.  Both  the  objective  cases  belonging  to  the  same  per- 
son are  sometimes  used  together  in  Spanish,  in  order  to  give 
more  energy  to  the  expression,  and  then  the  second  must  al- 
ways be  preceded  by  <^ ;  as, 


Mi  madre  me  ama  d  mi. 
Tu  amigo  ie  busca  d  ti. 
El  se  lo  dijo  d  ellas. 
Yo  les  di  las  noticias  d  ellos. 
Yo  se  las  dar^  d  Vd,.  ? 


My  mother  loves  me. 
Thy  friend  seeks  thee. 
He  told  it  to  them. 
I  told  them  the  news. 
I  will  tell  them  to  you. 


131.  The  second  objective  case  of  any  of  the  persons 
should  never  be  used  in  the  sentence,  preceded  by  d,  as  the 
object  of  the  verb,  without  being  accompanied  by  the  first 
(except  after  comparatives)  ;  therefore,  such  expressions  as 
these:  d  el  quiero,  d  ti  amo^  are  incorrect,  and  should  be  thus: 
d  el  le  quiero^  d  ti  te  amo.  The  place  of  the  second  objective 
case  in  sentences  of  this  kind  is  restricted  to  the  following  rules : 

1st.  If  the  first  objective  case  precede  the  verb,  the  second 
may  be  placed  either  before  the  first,  or  after  the  verb  ;  as, 

A  ti  te  amo,  or  te  amo  d  ti.  |  I  love  thee. 

2d.  If  the  first  objective  case  follows  the  verb,  the  second 
must  be  placed  after  the  first ;  as, 

Am&ndoZc  d  el.  j  Loving  him. 

132.  It  may  appear  that  the  personal  pronouns  ^,  la,  lo, 
los  and  las  might  be  confounded  with  the  articles  el,  la,  lo,  los, 
las,  having  the  same  form ;  but  they  are  easily  distinguished, 
since  the  articles  must  always  be  occompanied  by  and  precede 
nouns  ;  as,  el  tiempo,  la  salud,  los  soldados,  las  obras,  lo  hucno ; 
while,  on  the  other  hand,  the  personal  pronouns  are  Only  em- 
ployed with  verbs,  and  placed  before  or  after  them ;  as, 

La  llcvaroHj  or  Uevdronla.  I  They  carried  it. 

Lo  bicscaroH,  or  buscdronlo.  \   They  looked  for  it 

133.  Whenever  emphasis  is  required  to  be  laid  on  any 


LESSON     XXVII.  121 

noun  or  pronoun,  the  adjective  mismo  is  used  in  Spanish  for 
that  purpose ;  as, 


El  no  ama  4  nadie  mas  que  k  si 

mismo. 
Este  mismo  hombre  lo  har4, 
Yo  mismo  lo  har6. 


He  loves  no  one  but  himself. 

This  very  man  will  do  it 
I  will  do  it  myself. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  ^Le  dijo  V.  eso  al  ingles  ?     Se  lo  dije. 

2.  ^Se  lo  dijo  V.  en  ingles  6  en  espafiol?    Se  lo  dije  en  ingl6s. 
8.  I  Le  comprendio  a  V.  ?     Si,  senor,  muy  bien. 

4.  g  Y  qu6  le  ensefi6  a  V.  ?    Me  ensefio  el  retrato  de  su  hermana. 

5.  iJjO  tiene  Y.  ?     No ;  se  lo  envi6  ya. 

6.  I  Me  lo  ensenard  V.  ?     Se  lo  ensefiare  a  Y.  la  semana  pr6xima. 

7.  i  Ha  Uamado  Y.  a  la  criada  ?    La  he  llamado  y  no  ha  venido. 

8.  ^  No  le  perdonara  Y.  esa  falta  ?    No  qniero  perdonarsela. 

9.  ^  A  qui^n  llama  mi  padre  ?     Te  llama  a  tt 

10.  I  Quieres  ensefiarme  tu  vestido  nuevo  ?    Te  lo  ensefiar6  con  mucho 
gusto. 

11.  ^  Yendran  tiis  amigos  a  darnos  los  buenos  dias  ?     Creo  que  vendran 
k  darnoslos. 

12.  I  Nos  han  enviado  los  peri6dicos  ?     Os  los  enviardn  mafiapa. 

13.  ^Cuanto  le  gan6  Y.  a  ese  sugeto?     Le  gan6  dos  mil  trcscientos 
cincuenta  y  ouatro  pesos. 

14.  I  Qu6  les  dieron  &  sus  amigas  de  Y.  ?    Prometi^ronles  Uevarlas  4 
paseo ;  pero  no  les  dieron  nada. 

15.  I  Qui6n  dijo  eso  ?    Yo  mismo  lo  dije. 

16.  ^Para  quien  son  estos  libros  ?    Para  ti  mismo. 

17.  ^Han  mandado  mis  cartas  al  correo?     Si,  senor,  yo  mismo  las  he 
mandado. 

18.  gQui^n  me  ha  enviado  este  ramillete?     Su  amiga  misma  se  lo  ha 
enviado. 

19.  ^  Le  leiste  a  tu  padre  las  noticias  de  Francia  ?  El  mismo  las  ha  leido. 

20.  I  Quieres  ensefiarme  tu  reloj  ?     Quiero  enseflartelo. 

21.  g  Quien  llam6  a  la  puerta  ?    Yo  mismo  WamL 

22.  ^  Tiene  Y.  esperanza  de  vcr  su  pais  ?     Si,  sefior,  tengo  esperanza  de 
verlo  muy  pronto. 

23.  I  Cantaron  bien  anoche  en  el  concierto  ?     Cantaron  bien  la  primera 
parte ;  pero  la  segunda  muy  mal. 

24.  I  C6mo  esta  su  tio  de  Y.  ?    Esta  bueno ;  pero  de  muy  mal  humor. 

25.  I  Es  hombre  de  mal  humor  ?    No,  sefior,  es  hombre  muy  amable ; 
pero  hoy  esta  de  mal  humor  por  asuntos  de  familia. 

6 


122  LESSON     XXVII. 

26.  I  Creen  ellos  ganar  dinero  4  ese  hombre  ?    Creen  gandrselo. 

27.  ^Necesita  V.  enviar  este  periodico  a  su  hennano?    Necesito  eiy 
viarsclo. 

28.  ^Cudndo  quiere  Y.  mandar  su  piano  al  pianista?     Se  lo  quiero 
mandar  ahora. 

29.  iCudndo  necesita  Y.  hablar  al  abogado?    Necesito  hablarle  abora 
JDttismo. 

30.  ^Es  esta  la  carta  que  Y.  recibi6  ayer  ?    Es  la  misma. 

81.  ^  A  qui^u  ama  el  Mejicano  ?     No  ama  d  nadie  mas  que  d  d  mismo. 

32.  I  Para  qui6ii  trabaja  esa  mujer  ?     Trabaja  para  si  misma. 

83.  I  Qu6  le  ha  dicbo  Y.  boy  a  su  padre  ?    Lo  mismo  que  le  dije  ayer, 

EXERCISK 

1.  Good  morning,  sir;  how  are  you?    Yery  well,  thank  yotu 

2.  How  is  your  family  ?    Yery  well,  thank  you. 

8.  When  did  you  hear  from  your  cousin  Jane  ?  I  received  a  letter 
from  her  yesterday.  But  will  you  excuse  mo  an  instant?  some  one  is 
knocking  at  the  door. 

4.  Have  you  sent  your  sister  the  bouquet  I  bought  for  her  the  other 
day  ?    Not  yet ;  but  I  shall  send  it  to  her  to-morrow  morning. 

5.  "Will  you  write  to  her  at  the  same  time  and  (to)  tell  her  what 
Charles  said  ?  I  am  going  to  write  to  her  just  now,  and  I  shall  tell  it 
to  her, 

6.  Do  you  think  my  father  will  pardon  us  ?  I  do  (I  think  so),  because 
Emanuel  showed  me  a  letter  he  received  from  him,  in  which  he  says  he 
will  pardon  both  jof  us. 

7.  And  what  does  9enry  think  of  the  matter?  He  thinks  the 
same. 

8.  Have  the  pupils  shown  itheir  new  books  to  their  teacher  yet? 
Yes,  they  showed  them  to  him  yesterday. 

v..  9.  Does  he  think  they  are  good  ?    He  says  they  are  very  good. 

10.  What  else  (more)  did  he  say?    He  said  that  if  they  study  them 
with  attention  they  will  very  soon  speak  Spanish. 

11.  Is  that  all  *  he  said  ?     That  is  all. 

12.  Who  is  knocking  at  the  door  ?  is  it  you,  Peter  ?    Tes,  it  is  L 

13.  Why  did  you  not  come  earUer?    I  was  (have  been)  reading  tho 
news  from  Italy. 

14.  What  is  the  news  (what  news  have  we)?    The  papers  say  that  the 
Italians  have  gained  another  victory  (victoria). 

15.  What  did  that  man  promise  you  last  night  ?    He  promised  to  bring 
me  some  volumes  of  the  History  of  the  United  States. 

•  Lo  que. 


LESSON     XXVII.  123 

16.  Has  he  brought  (traido)  them  to  you  yet?    Not  yet. 

17.  When  do  you  think  he  will  bring*  them?  He  lias  to  come  to  our 
house  this  evening,  and  I  think  he  will  bring  them  with  him. 

18.  What  do  you  wish  toe  see?  I  wish  to  see  your  new  dress,  if  you 
will  have  the  goodness  (bondad)  to  show  it  to  me. 

19.  Will  you  tell  the  Englishman  what  I  have  told  you?  I  shall  not 
tell  it  to  the  Englishman ;  but  I  shall  tell  it  to  the  Frenchman  this  very 
day. 

,   20.  Will  he  believe  it  ?    Yes,  he  will  (believe  it) ;  he  believes  every- 
ithing  I  tell  him. 

21.  Have  they  taken  my  letters  to  the  post-office  ?  I  took  them  my 
self,  sir. 

22.  Who  is  my  father  calling?  He  is  calling  you  to  send  you  to  the 
bookstore  for  a  book. 

23.  Do  you  know  why  Louis  does  not  send  us  the  papers  any  more 
(ya)  ?  He  promised  to  send  them ;  but  you  know  that  no  steamer  (va' 
por)  has  arrived  t  this  week  yet. 

24.  When  does  the  merchant  want  to  see  the  notary  ?  He  wants  to 
see  him  just  now. 

25.  There  he  is  talking  to  a  gentleman ;  will  you  go  and  (to)  tell  him 
that  my  father  wishes  to  speak  to  him  a  moment  (momento)  ? 

26.  Good  morning,  sir;  father  wishes  to  tell  you  something;  will  you 
come  now?    Yes,  I  shall  go  just  now. 

27.  How  is  your  son,  Mr.  Alexander  ?  He  is  much  better,  thank  you ; 
but  he  would  not  come  out  this  morning,  because  he  has  to  study  his 
lesson. 

28.  What  language  is  he  learning  ?  He  is  not  learning  any  now ;  he 
commenced  to  learn  Spanish  in  the  winter. 

29.  What  is  he  studying,  then  ?  He  takes  lessons  in  (of)  writing,  his* 
tory  and  music. 

30.  What  part  of  the  grammar  are  yon  in  now,  Peter  ?  I  have  just 
got  to  (arrived  at)  J  the  twenty-seventh  lesson. 

31.  Do  you  require  to  send  this  paper  to  your  brother?  I  require  to 
send  it  to  him  this  very  day. 

•  Traerfi.  t  Llegar.  t  Acabo  de. 


124 


LESSON      XXVIII. 


LESSON    XXVIII. 


IMPERFECT  AND  PLUPERFECT  TENSES. 


Habl-aba,  habl-abas,  habl-aba. 
Habl-abamos,  babl-abais,  habl-aban. 


IMPEEFECT, 

First  Conjugation. 

I  spoke,  was  speaking,  or  used  to 

speak,  &c.,  &c. 
We  spoke,  &c. 


Second  Conjugation. 


Aprend-ia,  aprend-ias,  aprend-ia. 
Aprend-iamos,  aprend-iais,  aprend- 
ian. 


I  learned,  was  learning,  or  used  to 
learn,  &c.,  &c. 


Third  Conjugation. 
Escrib-ia,  escrib-ias,  escrib-ia.  i  I  wrote,  was  writing,  or  used  to 

Escrib-iamos,  escrib-i^,  escrib-ian.  |      write,  &c.,  &c. 


PLUPEEFECT. 


Habia 

hablado. 

I  had              ^ 

spoken. 

Habiais 

aprendido. 

Thou  hadst      ■ 

learned. 

Habia 

escrito. 

He  had 

written. 

Habiamos       "] 

hablado. 

We  had 

spoken. 

Habiais           |- 

aprendido. 

You  had 

learned. 

Habian           J 

escrito. 

They  had 

written. 

Acabar. 

To  finish. 

Entrar. 
Deber. 

To  enter,  come  in,  go  in. 
To  owe. 

Deber. 
Diidar. 

Should,  ought,  must,  to  be  to,  to  be 

one's  duty  to. 
To  doubt. 

Temer. 

Abrir,  abierto  (irregular  in  this 
past  participle  only). 

To  fear,  be  afraid  of. 
To  open,  opened. 

Ambos. 

1 

"i^th. 

Cuidado. 

Care. 

Oabeza. 

Head. 

Deber. 

Duty. 

Mano. 

Hand. 

Pr6jiino. 

Neighbor. 

Ropa. 

Clothes. 

LESSON 

XXVIII. 

Vecino.                 Neighbor. 

Yentana. 

Wmdow. 

'fieloj.                    Clock,  watch. 

Visita. 

Visit. 

Cuenta. 

Bill,  accoimt. 

Marido,  esposo.    Husband. 

Esposa. 

■Wife. 

COMPOSITION. 

125 


Yo  escribia  cuando  Y.  vino. 

El  estudiaba  sus  lecciones  todos  los 

dias. 
Margarita  bailaba  mucho  cuando  era 

joven. 
Yo  acababa  de  salir  cuando  Y.  entro. 
^  Abria  V.  la  puerta  6  la  ventana  en  el 

invierno  ? 
En  el  invierno  no  abria  ni  la  una  ni  la 

otra ;  pero  en  el  verano  abria  ambas. 
^Habia  V.  eserito  los  ejercicios  antes 

de  dar  su  leccion  ? 
No  los  habia  eserito  ;  pero  habia  estu- 

diado  la  leccion, 
Tebe  Y.  tener  cuidado  no  solo  de  estu- 

diar  la  leccion,  sino  de  escribir  los 

ejercicios,  porque  si  no  V.  no  apren- 

dera  nada. 
I  En  donde  esta  su  vecino  de  V.  ? 
Acaba  de  entrar. 
i  Qu6  hora  tiene  su  reloj  de  Y.  ? 

Son  las  doce  y  cuarto. 

I  Tenia  su  vecino  de  V.  cuidado  de  su 
ropa? 

Debia  hacerlo,  pero  no  lo  hacia. 

Debemos  amar  al  projimo  tanto  como 
a  nosotros  mismos ;  pero  mi  vecino 
no  me  ama  k  mi  ni  yo  le  amo  a  41. 

No  dudo  lo  que  Y.  dice. 


I  was  writing  when  you  came. 

He  used  to  study  his  lessons  every  day. 

Margaret  used  to  dance  much  when  she 
was  young. 

I  had  just  gone  out  when  you  came  in. 

Used  you  to  open  the  door  or  the  win- 
dow in  winter  ? 

In  winter  I  used  to  open  neither ;  but 
in  summer  I  used  to  open  both. 

Had  you  written  your  exercises  before 
taking  your  lesson  ? 

I  had  not  written  them;  but  I  had 
studied  my  lesson. 

You  must  take  care,  not  only  to  study 
your  lesson,  but  (also)  to  write  your 
exercises ;  for  if  not,  you  will  learn 
nothing. 

Where  is  your  neighbor  ? 

He  has  just  come  in  (entered). 

What  o'clock  is  it  by  your  watch 
(what  hour  has  your  watch)  ? 

It  is  a  quarter  past  twelve. 

Used  your  neighbor  to  take  care  of  his 
clothes  ? 

He  should  have  done  so,  but  did  not. 

We  should  love  our  neighbor  as  our- 
selves ;  but  my  neighbor  does  not 
love  me,  nor  do  I  love  him. 

I  do  not  doubt  what  you  say. 


EXPLANATION. 

134,  The  imperfect  is  used  to  express  what  is  past,  and, 
at  the  same  time  present,  with  regard  to  something  else  which 
is  past ;  that  is,  it  is  a  past  tense  which  was  still  present  at  the 
time  spoken  of.  It  may  always  be  employed  in  Spanish  when 
in  English  the  word  was  can  be  used  with  the  present  parti* 


126  LESSON     XXVIII. 

ciple,  or  icsed  to  with  the  infinitive,  or  when  we  ppeak  of  ha- 
bitual actions ;  as, 

Yo  escribia  cuando  V.  vino.  I  was  writing  when  you  came. 

El  estudiaba  sua  lecciones  todoa  los     He  used  to  study  his  lessons  every 
dias.  day. 

135.  The  PLUPERFECT  is  used  to  express  what  is  past,  and 
took  place  before  some  other  past  action  or  event,  expressed  or 
understood ;  as, 

To  habia  leido  ya  los  periodicos  cuando  I  I  had  already  read  the  newspapers  when 
V.  me  los  dio.  |      you  gave  them  to  me. 

136.*  AcABAB  DE. — ^The  English  expressions,  to  have  Just, 
and  to  he  just,  before  a  past  participle,  are  translated  into 
Spanish  by  acabar  de,  preceding  an  infinitiA'^e ;  as, 
Acaho  de  entrar.  I  I  have  just  come  in. 

El  acaba  de  abrir  la  ventana.  |  He  has  just  opened  the  window. 

CONYERSATION  A^TD  VERSION. 

1.  gHa  hablado  Y.  con  la  senorita?  No,  ella  acababa  de  salir  cuando 
vo  toqu6  4  la  puerta. 

2.  jDudaba  Y.  entrar?    Si.  porque  temia  ofender  d  Y. 

3.  No  seilor;  ^qu6  hora  es?      Mi  reloj  tiene  las  once  y  cuarto. 

4.  g  Y  qu6  hora  tiene  Y.  ?    Yo  ten  go  las  once  y  media. 

5.  ^Sabe  Y.  qii6  hora  es  en  el  reloj  de  la  iglesia?  Cuando  yo  pasaba 
estaban  dando  las  once. 

6.  ^Ent6nces  ahora  deberau  ser  no  mas  que  las  once  y  vcinte  6  veinte 
y  cinco  minutos  ?     Creo  que  serdu  un  poco  m6no8. 

1.  I  Ha  hablado  Y.  con  mi  vecino  ?  He  ido  d  hacerle  una  visita,  pero 
habia  salido. 

8.  ^No  habl6  Y.  con  la  sefiora?  Si,  estaba  en  la  ventana  cuando  yo 
pas6. 

9.  I  Tiene  una  mano  muy  hermosa  ?  SI,  pero  los  ojos  son  mas  her- 
niosos. 

10.  iQu6  tenia  cu  la  cabeza?    Dos  flores. 

11.  iQui6n  llama  d  la  puerta?    La  lavandera,  que  viene  d  buscar  la 
ropa. 

12.  I  Cudnto  le  dcbo  d  Y.  ?    Me  debe  Y.  veinte  y  cinco  centavos  de  la 
ropa  de  la  semana  pasada. 

18.  J  No  se  los  ha  pagado.4  V.  mi  Tiaridof    No,  sellora,  no  tenia  di- 
nero. 
14.  iDuda  Y.  lo  que  le  digo?    No,  sefiora,  lo  creo. 


LESSOK    XXVIII.  127 

15.  ^Esta  Men  lavada  la  ropa?    Muy  bien ;  yo  misraa  la  lav6. 

16.  ^Hizo  V.  la  visita  a  su  vecino  ?    Fui  a  su  casa;  pero  habia  salido. 

17.  ^Ya  V.  muchas  veces  al  teatro?    Cuando  vivia  en  Paris  iba  a 
jnenudo ;  pero  aqui  voy  muy  pocas  veces. 

18.  I  Como  debemos  amar  al  pr6jimo  ?    Tanto  como  d  nosotros  mismos. 

19.  gQuien  es  el  projimo  ?     Todos  los  bombres  son  nuestros  pr6jimos. 

20.  I  Esta  mala  su  hermana  de  Y.  ?    Si,  sefiora,  y  de  cuidado  (seriously)* 

21.  ^Ouantas  visitas  le  ba  becbo  el  medico?    Muchisimas. 

22.  I  Deb  en  Yds.  tener  muclio  cuidado  de  ella  ?     Si,  sefiora,  ya  lo  te- 
nemos. 

23.  I  Cuantas  visitas  le  debo  yo  a  Y.  ?     Con  esta  son  tres. 

24.  I  No  vendra  Y.  a  comer  mafiana  con  nosotras  ?    Mafiana  ir6  al 
campo  con  mis  vecinos. 

25.  ^  Habia  Y.  recibido  la  carta  del  Frances  cuando  recibi6  la  mia  ? 
La  recibi  despues. 

26.  I  Porqu6  trabaja  Y.  tanto  ?    Porque  es  mi  deber. 

27.  I  Yendran  Y.  y  su  bermana  4  pasar  una  semana  con  nosotros  ? 
Si,  sefiora,  la  semana  proxima  vendr^mos  ambos. 

28.  I  Quien  abri6  mi  ventana,  Juan  ?    Sefior,  yo  mismo  la  abrL 

29.  I  Hablo  Y.  con  el  sastre  ?     Fui  alia,  pero  habia  salido. 

30.  I  Cuando  vino  Y.  ?    Abora  mismo  acabo  de  entrar. 

31.  gD6nde  esta  mi  padre  ?     Acaba  de  salir  d  la  calle. 

32.  I  Sabes  a  d6nde  fu6  ?    Fu6  a  coraprar  ropa. 

38.  ^Habrd  ido  a  la  Cuarta  avenida?      No,  sefior,  creo  que  fu6  d 
Broadway. 

34.  I  Que  bora  es?    El  reloj  de  su  cuarto  de  Y.  acaba  de  dar  las  doce. 


EXERCISE. 

1.  What  were  you  doing  when  Alexander  went  into  your  room?  I 
was  talking  to  my  father. 

2.  I  thought  you  were  writing  your  exercises.  No,  I  had  written 
them  already.  ^ 

3.  Does  the  servant  take  care  to  sweep  your  room  every  day  ?  Yes, 
he  knows  very  well  it  is  his  duty. 

4.  Why  did  you  not  come  before  ?  you  were  to  come  at  nine  o'clock. 
I  know  I  have  done  wrong  in  not  coming  earlier;^ but  I  have  been 
writing  all  the  morning. 

5.  Does  your  sister  Margaret  dance  now  as  much  as  she  used? 
When  (she  was)  in  the  city  she  used  to  dance  very  much,  but  now  she 
has  no  time. 

6.  When  you  lived  in  the  country  did  you  open  both  the  doors  and 
the  windows  ?    J  opened  neither. 


128  LESSON     XXVIII. 

V.  Had  you  finished  your  work  before  going  to  the  concert?    I  had 
(finished  it). 

8.  Do  you  doubt  what  I  tell  you  ?     No,  sir,  I  never  doubted  anything 
you  told  me. 

9.  Is  your  neighbor  afraid  to  open  his  windows  in  winter  ?    He  ia 
not  afraid  to  open  them. 

10.  Who  was  it  that  went  out  last  night  after  ten  o'clock  ?  Ko  one 
went  out ;  my  brother  came  in  at  that  hour. 

11.  Did  Alexander  go  out  when  your  cousin  came  in  ?  He  had  already 
gone  out  when  my  cousin  came  in. 

12.  Where  is  he  now  ?    He  has  just  gone  out  to  walk. 

13.  Will  he  be  very  long  (much  time)  ?  He  will  not  be  long ;  he  is  to 
take  his  Spanish  lesson  this  evening. 

14.  Did  you  pay  (make)  a  visit  to  my  neighbor  last  week  ?  I  went  to 
his  house,  but  he  was  not  at  home. 

15.  When  did  you  see  the  pianist?  He  came  to  see  me  the  other  day, 
but  I  had  gone  out. 

16.  Do  you  think  we  shall  have  studied  our  lessons  before  going  to  thw 
teacher's  ?     I  think  we  shall. 

17.  What  o'clock  is  it  by  (in)  your  watch?  It  is  seventeen  minutes 
past  three  by  mine ;  what  time  have  you  ? 

18.  It  must  be  (deben  ser)  half-past  three;  has  the  mosio  teacher 
come  ?    Not  yet. 

19.  Will  you  have  the  kindness  to  go  to  his  house  and  Cell  him  I  shall 
not  take  my  lesson  this  afternoon  ?     With  much  pleasure. 

20.  So  soon  1  Well,  did  you  see  the  teacher  ?  No,  madam,  he  had 
just  gone  out. 

21.  How  much  do  you  owe  the  tailor  now  ?  I  owb  him  very  little ; 
you  know  I  sent  him  some  money  last  month. 

22.  I  know  (it) ;  but  did  he  not  send  (pasar)  in  anothor  bill  on  Mon- 
day ?    If  ho  has  sent  in  another  I  have  not  seen  (visto)  it. 

23.  I  thought  you  were  in  the  country,  Mr.  Emanuel  i  I  was  there 
last  week. 

24.  Why  did  you  not  come  yesterday  ?  I  saw  you  were  writing  and 
I  feared  to  offend  you. 

25.  But  you  know  it  was  your  duty  to  come  in  ;  you  knew  I  wanted 
you.  Well,  if  you  pardon  me  this  time  (vez),  I  shall  couie  in  again  (another 
time). 

26.  How  often  do  you  go  to  the  theatre?  Not  very  often  now;  1 
used  to  go  every  night  in  the  week. 

27.  How  are  we  to  love  our  neighbor?    As  ourselves. 

28.  Who  is  our  neighbor  ?    All  mankind  (men)  are  our  neighbors. 


LESSOliT     XXIX, 


129 


29.  How  many  visits  has  the  physician  made  to  your  uncle  ?  He  be- 
gan his  visits  on  the  30th  of  December,  and  visited  him  twice  a  week 
until  April  4th. 

80.  How  many  visits  do  I  owe  you  for  now?  You  owed  me  for 
twelve,  but  you  paid  me  for  nine,  and  so  you  only  owe  for  three  now. 

31.  Whose  letter  did  you  receive  first,  mine  or  Jane's  ?  When  yours 
came  to  hand  (my  hands),  I  had  already  received  Jane's. 

32.  Will  you  take  your  lesson  to-day?  I  am  to  go  to  the  Central  Park 
this  afternoon  with  my  mother,  and  so  I  shall  not  take  my  lesson  until 
to-morrow. 


lesso:n^  XXIX. 


PEETEETT  ANTEEIOE. 


Hube 

Hubiste 

Hubo 

Hubimos 
Hubisteis 
Hubieron 

Ver. 

Mirar. 

Esperar. 


1  hablado. 
I  aprendido. 
J  escrito. 

1  hablado. 
I  aprendido. 
J  escrito. 


Asi  que. 

Ap6nas. 

No  bien. 

Tampoco  (conj.). 

Tambien  (adverli). 

Tambien  (conj.). 

Ademas. 

Primeramente,  or  en  primer  lu- 

gar. 
Segundamente,    or    en    segundo 

lugar. 
Frecuente. 
Frecuentemente. 
C6modo. 
Comodamente. 
6* 


I  had 

Thou  hadst 
He  had 

We  had 
You  had 
They  had 


"1  spoken. 
y  learned. 
J  written. 

}  spoken, 
learned, 
written. 


To  see.   (See  the  end  of  the  hook) 

To  look. 

To  hope,  to  wait  for. 


As  soon  as. 
Scarcely. 
No  sooner. 
Neither,  not  either. 
Also,  hkewise. 
As  well,  moreover. 
Moreover,  besides. 
Firstly. 

Secondly,  &c. 

Frequent. 
Frequently. 

Convenient,  comfortable. 
Conveniently,  comfortably. 


130 


LESSON     XXIX. 


Incomodo. 

Inconvenient,  uncomfortable. 

Inc6modamente. 

Inconveniently,  uncomfortabiy. 

Probable. 

Probable,  likely. 

Probablemente. 

Probably,  likely. 

Perfecto. 

Perfect. 

Perfectamente. 

Perfectly. 

Correcto, 

Correct. 

Correctamente. 

Correctly. 

Ojo.                   Eye. 

1 

Vista. 

Sight,  view. 

Correo.             Post, 

post-office, 

Comodidad. 

Convenience, 

courier. 

comfort. 

Lugar.               Place. 

COMPO 

MiUa. 
SITION. 

MUe. 

Cuando  le  hube  conocido  le  ain6. 
Ap^nas  hubo  salido  61  cuando  yo  entr^. 

No  bien  le  hube  visto  cuando  le  conocf. 

Asi  que  hube  escrito  la  carta  la  llev6 
al  correo. 

Cuando  le  conoci  le  am6. 

^•Iba  V.  frecuentemente  al  teatro  el  afio 
pasado  ? 

Iba  frecuentisimamente,  or  muy  frecuen- 
temente. 

El  vive  en  esa  casa  comodamente,  or* 
con  comodidad. 

El  escribe  correcta  y  perfectamente ; 
pero  V.  escribe  mas  facilmente. 


When  I  had  known  him  I  loved  him. 
Scarcely    had    he    gone    out   when  1 

came  in. 
No  sooner  had  I  seen  him  than  I  knew 

him. 
As  soon  as  I  had  written  the  letter  I 

took  it  to  the  post-office. 
When  I  knew  him  I  loved  him. 
Did  you  go  often  to  the  theatre  last 

year  ? 
I  went  very  often. 

He  lives  comfortably,  or  with  comfort, 

in  that  house. 
He  writes  correctly  and  perfectly ;  but 

you  write  more  easily. 


EXPLANATION. 
137,  The  PRETERIT  ANTERIOR  Is  used  to  cxpress  a  past 
action  or  event  that  took  place  immediately  before  another 
action  or  event  also  past.  It  is  never  used  except  after  some 
of  the  adverbs  of  time ;  cuando^  when ;  asi  qtie,  as  soon  as  ;  no 
bie7i,  no  sooner ;  ap^nas,  scarcely ;  luego  que,  immediately  after ; 
despues  que,  soon  after ;  as, 


Cuando  le  hube  conocido. 

Ap6nas  hubo  salido  cuando  yo  vine. 

No  bien  le  hube  visto  cuando  le  conoci. 


When  I  had  made  his  acquaintance. 
Scarcely  had  he  gone  out  when  I  came. 
No  sooner  had  I  seen  him  tlian  I  knew 
him. 


LESSON     XXIX.  131 

This  tense  is  very  little  used,  not  only  for  the  reason  already 
mentioned,  of  its  being  preceded  by  an  adverb  of  time,  but  also 
because  its  place  may  be  elegantly  supplied  by  the  pbeteeit 
DEFINITE ;  as. 


Cuando  le  conoci. 

Apenas  salio  cuando  yo  vine. 

No  bien  le  vi  cuando  le  conoci. 


When  I  had  knovra  him. 
Scarcely  had  he  gone  out  when  I  came. 
No  sooner  had  I  seen  him  than  I  knew 
him. 


138.  The  adverbs  of  manner  and  quality,  in  Spanish  as 
well  as  in  English,  are  generally  derived  from  adjectives. 

139.  To  form  an  adverb  from  an  adjective,  it  is  sufficient 
to  add  mente  to  the  adjective,  if  the  latter  has  the  same  ter- 
mination in  both  genders ;  as, 

Frecuente,  frecuentewen^^. 
Gramatical,  gramaticalmcn/e. 

If  the  adjective  has  a  different  termination  for  each  gender, 
then  mente  is  added  to  the  feminine ;  as, 

Inc6moda,  incomodamewjfe. 
Perfecta,  perfectamewfe. 

When  two  or  more  of  these  adverbs  follow  each  other,  only 
the  last  one  takes  mente,  the  others  taking  the  feminine  termi- 
nation a ;   as, 

Ciceron  hablo  sabia  y  elocuentemen^.    j  Cicero  spoke  learnedly  and  eloquently. 

140.  These  adverbs  terminating  in  mente,  being  derived 
from  adjectives,  admit  like  these  the  degrees  of  comparison ;  as, 

Facilmente. 

Mas  facilmente. 

Menos  facilmente. 

Tan  facilmente. 

Muy  facilmente,  or  facilisimamente. 


Easily. 

More  easily. 

Less  easily. 

As,  or  so  easily. 

Yery  easily,  or  most  easily. 


141.  Those  adverbs  may,  without  any  change  in  the 
sense,  be  substituted  by  a  substantive  governed  by  the  prepo- 
sition con ;  as, 

til  vive  comodamente,  or  con  comodi-  |  He  lives  comfortably, 
dad. 


132  LEB80N     XXIX. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 


1.  ^Ye  V.  aquella  flor  tan  hermosa?    Miro,  poro  no  la  veo. 

2.  I  Ye  V.  qu6  hora  es  en  el  reloj  de  la  iglesia  ?    No,  pero  mirar6  en 
mi  reloj. 

3.  I  Ha  visto  V.  d  su  herraano  ?     Si,  seflor,  le  vi  ap^nas  hubo  salido 
del  teatro. 

4.  ^Le  conoci6  a  V.  mi  vecino?    No  bien  le  Lube  hablado,  me  co- 
nooi6. 

'      5.  ^Han  venido  mis  amigos?     Yinieron  asi  que  hubo  V.  salido. 

6.  ^Le  dieron  4  Y.  mis  libros?     Me  los  dieron,  no  bien  les  hube 
hablado  de  ello. 

7.  ^  Y  se  marcharon  muy  pronto  ?    Se  marcharon  asi  que  hubieron 
escrito  sus  cartas. 

8.  I  Qu6  hizo  Y.  despues  ?    Primoramente  (or  primero)  fui  al  correo 
y  despues  al  mercado. 

9.  ^Qu6  quiere  Y.  hacer?     Primeraraente  escribir  los  ejercicios  y 
despues  estudiar  la  leccion. 

10.  ^Porqu6  nolo  hizo  Y.  dntes?    En  primer  lugar  porque  no  tenia 
humor  j  en  segundo  porque  ap^nas  tuve  tiempo. 

11.  ^Habla  Y.  frances  frecuentemente  ?    Si,  sefior,  lo  hablo  con  fre- 
cuencia. 

12.  ^Lo  escribe  Y.  correctamente  ?     Cuando  lo  estudiaba  lo  escribia 
con  mas  correccion  que  ahora. 

13.  ^  Aprende  Y.  ingl6s  6  espaflol  ?    Aprendo  dmbos. 

14.  ^  Y  su  hermano  de  Y.  ?     Mi  hermano  los  aprende  tambien. 

15.  I  Los  hablan  Yds.  con  perfeccion  ?     Si,  seflor,  el  ingles  lo  hablamos 
perfectamente ;  pero  el  espafiol  ni  yo,  ni  el  tampoco. 

16.  ^Ha  enviado  Y.  su  carta  al  correo?     No,  sefior,  la  enviar6  ma- 
Ilana. 

17.  J  La  ha  escrito  Y.  ?     Tampoco  la  he  escrito,  porque  quiero  hacerlo 
con  comodidad. 

18.  ^Ha  aprendido  Y.  la  leccion  de  hoy?    He  aprendido  la  de  hoy  y 
la  de  mafiana  tambien. 

19.  jOudndo  piensa  Y.  sahr  para  Paris?     Probablemente  saldr^  la 
semana  pr6xima. 

20.  ^No  Yive  Y.  c6modamente  aqui  ?     Si,  sefior,  pero  vivo  mah  c6mo- 
do  en  Francia. 

21.  jYivia  Y.  c6modamente  cuando  estaba  en  L6ndres?    No,  sefior, 
vivia  inc6modamente  porque  no  hablaba  ingles. 

22.  jTiene  Y.  otro  libro  ademds  do  cse?    Si,  sefior,  tengo  otros  dos 
28.  iEst4  Y.  male  de  la  vista?    Si,  sefior,  tengo  malo  un  ojo. 


LESSON     XXIX.  133 

24.  I  Porque  no  ba  venido  aun  su  primo  de  V.  ?    Porque  quiere  venir 
con  comodidad. 

25.  ^Tiene  Y.  buena  vista?  Si,  seilor,  pero  abora  tengo  los  ojos 
maJos. 

26.  ^  Cuando  estudia  Y.  sus  lecciones  ?  Las  estudio  de  dia  porque  el 
estudio  de  nocbe  es  malo  para  la  vista. 

27.  I  Donde  estan  sus  bermanos  de  Y.  ?  Salieron  a  paseo  no  bien  bu- 
bieron  escrito  sus  ejercicios. 

28.  I  Ouando  escribieron  las  cartas  ?  Asi  que  bubieron  aprendido  sus 
7ecciones. 

29.  I  Llev6  Y.  mis  cartas  al  correo  ?    Si,  sefior,  asi  que  Y.  bubo  salido. 

30.  I  Ya  Y.  con  frecuencia  al  correo  ?  Si,  seflor,  voy  frecuentemente : 
voy  todos  los  dias. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Did  you  go  to  tbe  lawyer's  as  I  told  you  ?  I  went  as  soon  as 
you  told  me. 

2.  Was  be  at  home  ?  did  you  see  bim  ?  He  was  not  in  when  I  went ; 
but  I  waited  until  he  came. 

8.  Bid  you  show  bim  tbe  letter  ?  I  opened  it  and  showed  it  to  bim ; 
but  be  would  *  not  read  it. 

4.  What  did  your  children  do  after  taking  their  lesson  ?  They  had 
scarcely  finished  their  lesson  when  they  went  to  bed. 

5.  Did  you  look  at  the  horses  your  brother  bought  on  Monday.  I  did 
(look  at  them),  and  I  think  they  are  very  fine. 

6.  Have  you  ever  taken  your  family  to  Italy  ?  Yes,  several  times ; 
last  year  we  travelled  in  Italy. 

7.  Did  you  spend  some  time  in  the  principal  cities  ?  Yes ;  but  prin- 
cipally in  Kome  (Soma),  Florence  (Florencia)  and  Milan  (Milan). 

8.  Where  were  you  on  tbe  15th  of  December,  1865  ?  On  the  15th 
we  were  in  Florence  in  the  morning,  and  in  Kome  at  night. 

9.  Did  you  all  enjoy  good  health  in  Europe  ?  Yes,  all,  except  (menos) 
Alexander,  who  had  a  sore  (malo)  eye  the  greater  part  of  thQ  time. 

10.  Did  you  go  often  to  the  theatre?  We  generally  went  every 
evening. 

'  11.  Had  you  any  difficulty  (dificultad)  in  understanding  f  tbe  lan- 
guage? None;  you  know  Emanuel  speaks  Itahan  very  correctly:  he 
bad  learned  it  before  setting  out  for  Europe. 

12.  Did  you  see  many  Americans  when  you  were  travelling?  Yery 
many;  some  of  them  we  knew  very  well,  and  others  were  friends  of 
ours. 

♦  Quiso.  t  Comprender. 


134  LESSON     XXIX. 

13.  Where  is  the  letter  you  were  writing  this  morning?  Ab  soon  as  1 
had  finished  it  John  took  it  to  the  post-oflace. 

14.  Do  you  ever  write  to  your  uncle  ?  Very  little  since  we  left  New 
York ;  but  there  I  used  to  write  to  him  very  frequently. 

15.  Which  of  you  three  writes  French  the  most  correctly*?  I  know  it 
is  not  I ;  and  as  to  {en  cuanto  d)  Peter  and  Louis,  I  think  Peter  writes 
best,  but  Louis  writes  with  more  ease  (more  easily). 

16.  Do  you  see  that  beautiful  flower?  I  am  looking;  but  I  do  not 
see  it. 

17.  Will  you  tell  me  what  o'clock  it  is  by  the  church  clock?  I  am 
looking  at  the  church ;  but  I  see  no  clock. 

18.  Have  you  not  good  sight  ?  Yes,  very  good ;  but  I  have  a  very 
sore  eye. 

19.  Did  my  cousins  not  come  ?    They  came  as  soon  as  you  went  out. 

20.  Did  you  show  them  my  portrait  ?  I  did ;  but  they  scarcely  had 
time  to  look  at  it. 

21.  Did  they  say  where  they  were  going?  They  said  they  were  going 
to  the  country. 

22.  How  long  are  they  to  be  there  ?    They  did  not  tell  me  that 

23.  Ai'e  they  not  coming  for  me  to-morrow  ?  Yes,  sir,  they  are  com- 
ing for  you  to  go  and  pay  a  visit  to  Mrs.  Pefiaverde. 

24.  Have  you  ever  seen  a  more  comfortable  little  room  than  this  one  ? 
Besides  being  comfortable  it  is  very  handsome. 

25.  Why  do  you  not  speak  Spanish  with  Mr.  Eiberas  ?  In  the  first 
place,  because  I  do  not  speak  it  well  enough ;  and  in  the  second,  because 
he  speaks  English  very  correctly. 

26.  I  thought  you  were  studying  Spanish  ?  I  am  studying  it ;  but 
studying  and  speaking  are  two  distinct  {distinto)  things. 

27.  Did  you  tell  the  music  teacher  that  Louisa  wishes  to  take  lessons? 
Not  yet ;  but  I  shall  see  him  to-morrow  and  tell  him  so. 

28.  Why  did  you  not  take  your  lesson  yesterday  ?    I  was  sick. 

29.  Have  you  studied  yesterday's  lesson,  and  to-day's  ?  I  have  studied 
both. 

80.  Will  you  come  to-morrow  at  the  same  hour  ?    Probably  I  shall. 

♦M^Jor. 


LESSON     XXX. 


136 


LESSOK    XXX. 


IMPEESONAL  VEEBS. 


Llover. 

To  rain. 

Lloviendo. 

Eainiag. 

Llovido. 

Eained. 

Indicative. 

Present. 

Llneve. 

It  rains. 

Imperfect. 

Llovia. 

It  was  raining. 

Preterit  definite. 

Llovi6. 

It  rained. 

Future  simple. 

Lloverd. 

It  wUl  rain. 

Compoun 

d  Tenses. 

Preterit  definite. 

Ha  llovido. 

It  has  rained. 

Pluperfect. 

Habia  llovido. 

It  had  rained. 

Anterior. 

Hubo  llovido. 

It  had  rained. 

Future  compound 

.   Habrd  llovido. 

It  will  have  rained. 

Amanecer. 

To  grow  light. 

Anochecer. 

To  grow  dark. 

Diluviar. 

To  rain  like  a  deluge,  to  rain  h 
torrents. 

Granizar. 

To  hail. 

Helar. 

To  freeze. 

Lloviznar. 

To  drizzle. 

Nevar. 

To  snow. 

Kelampaguear. 

To  lighten. 

Tronar. 

To  thunder. 

PEESONAL  V3EBS  U6 

JED  IMPEESONALLT. 

Bastar. 

To  be  sufficient. 

Haber. 

(Signifying)  there  to  be. 

Hacer. 

(Signifying)  to  be. 

Ser. 

To  be. 

Convenir. 

To  suit,  to  be  proper. 

Pareoer. 

To  seem,  to  appear. 

Brasil. 

Brazil. 

Habana.            Havana. 

Menester. 

Necessity. 

Nieve.               Snow. 

Hielo. 

Ice. 

Lluvia.              Rain. 

J6 

LESSON      XXX. 

Helado. 

Ice  cream. 

Tarde. 

Afternoon 

Trueno. 

Thunder. 

La  mafiana. 

Morning. 

Medio  dia. 

Noon. 

Media  noche. 

Midnight. 

Viento. 

Wind. 

Especie. 

Kind. 

COMPOSITION. 

^Es    necesario  estudiar    mucho   para 

aprender  el  espanol  ? 
Es  menester  estudiar  mucho,  pero  no 

tanto  como  para  aprender  el  inglds. 
En  Nueva  York  Uueve  y  llovizna  mucho, 

pero  no  dlluvia  como  en  la  Habana. 

En  Madrid  amanece  muy  temprano  y 

anochece  muy  tarde  en  el  verano. 
En  la  Habana  amanece  y  anochece  siem- 

pre  a  la  misma  hora,  en  todos  los 

dias  del  ano. 
En  el  Brasil  no  nieva ;  pero  truena  y 

relampaguea    mucho    siempre    que 

llueve. 
En  la  Habana  no  hay  hielo,  porque  no 

hace  bastante  frio  para  helar ;  y  por 

eso  lo  Uevan  de  Nueva  York. 

En  Nueva  York  ha  helado  y  nevado 
mucho  este  ano ;  pero  en  el  pasado 
nevo  y  helo  muy  poco. 

I  Hace  mucho  calor  en  este  pais  ? 

En  los  meses  de  Noviembre,  Diciembre 
y  Enero  hace  mucho  frio ;  pero  en 
Junio,  Julio  y  Agosto  hace  mucho 
calor. 

i  Qu6  tiempo  hace  ? 

Parece  que  va  &  Hover,  porque  hay 
mucho  viento  y  hace  calor. 

Cuatro  anos  ha,  or  hay  cuatro  afios,  que 
no  veo  &  mi  padre. 

Pero  V.  tiene  esperanza  de  verle  pron- 
to, porque  llegar&  hoy  h,  Nueva  York 
en  el  vapor  "Etna"  que  viene  de 
Europa. 

En  verano  voy  d  pascar  todos  los  dias 
al  amancccr. 


Is  it  necessary  to  study  much  to  learo 

Spanish  ? 
It  is  necessary  to  study  a  great  deal, 

but  not  80  much  as  to  learn  English. 
In  New  York  it  rains  and  drizzles  a 

great  deal,  but  it  does  not  rain  in 

torrents  as  in  Havana. 
In  Madrid  day  breaks  very  early  and 

night  falls  very  late  in  summer. 
In  Havana  day  breaks  and  night  falls 

at  the  same  hours  every  day  in  the 

year. 
In  Brazil  it  does  not  snow ;  but  it  thun- 
ders and  lightens  much  whenever  it 

rains. 
In  Havana  there  is  no  ice,  because  it  is 

not  cold  enough  to  freeze;   and  for 

that  reason  they  take  it  from  New 

York. 
In  New  York  it  has  frozen  and  snowed 

much  this  year;   but  last  year  it 

snowed  and  froze  very  little. 
Is  it  very  warm  in  this  country  ? 
In  the  months  of  November,  December 

and  January  it  is  very  cold ;   but  in 

June,  July  and  August  it  is  very 

warm. 
What  kind  of  weather  is  it  ? 
It  appears  it  is  going  to  rain,  because 

it  is  very  windy  and  hot. 
I  have  not  seen  my  father  for  foul 

years. 
But  you  (have)  hope  to  see  him  soon  | 

for  he  will  arrive  to-day  in  New  York 

by  the    steamer  "Etna"  (that  is) 

coming  from  Europe. 
In  summer  I  go  to  walk  every  morning 

at  daybreak. 


LESSON^     XXX. 


137 


lY&Y.  k  la  cama  temprano ? 
No,  senor,  tarde ;  k  la  media  noche. 
I  Come  V.  al  medio  dia  ? 
No,  senor,  como  al  anochecer. 
^  Va  V.  a  la  Habana  ? 
No,  senor,  voy  a  Francia. 
La  Francia  es  mas  alegre  que  la  Ingla- 
/   terra. 

El  muchacho  estudia  mucho. 
El  estudio  de  la  gramatica  es  necesario. 
El  hombre  necesita  trabajar. 
La  conversacion  es  muy  util  para  apren- 
der  una  lengua. 


Do  you  go  to  bed  early  ? 

No,  sir,  late ;  at  midnight. 

Do  you  dine  at  noon  ? 

No,  sir,  I  dine  at  nightfall. 

Are  you  going  to  Havana  ? 

No,  sir,  I  am  going  to  France. 

France  is  more  pleasant  than  England, 

The  boy  studies  much. 
The  study  of  grammar  is  necessary. 
Man  requires  to  work. 
Conversation  is  very  useful  for  learning 
a  language. 


EXPLANATION. 

142.  Impeesonal  veebs  are  those  which  are  used  only  in 
the  infinitive  mood  and  in  the  third  person  singular  of  all  the 
tenses,  and  have  no  definite  subject ;  as, 

Llueve.  It  rains. 

Tronard.  It  will  thunder. 

Nevaba.  It  was  snowing. 

143.  The  verbs  amanecer  and  anochecer  are  sometimes 
used  in  the  three  persons,  both  numbers ;  but  then  they  are 
not  impersonal,  but  neuter ;  as, 

Yo  amaneci  en  Nueva  York,  y  ano-  |      I  was  in  New  York  at  daybreak,  and 
chec^  en  Filadelfia.  |  in  Philadelphia  at  nightfall. 

144.  Habeb  and  hacee  are  often  used  impersonally,  and 
are  in  such  cases  to  be  rendered  into  English  by  the  corre- 
sponding tenses  of  the  verb  to  be. 

The  verb  haber,  when  conjugated  impersonally,  has  the 
peculiarity  of  taking  a  y  in  the  third  person  of  the  present  iiv 
dicative;  as. 


Hay  mucha  fruta. 
Habra  muchos  hombres. 
Hizo  frio. 
Hace  muchos  anos.     . 


There  is  much  fruit. 
There  will  be  many  men. 
It  was  cold. 
Many  years  ago. 


N.  B. — Sd  is  sometimes  elegantly  used  for  7iai/  ;  as, 
Doce  anos  ha,  or  hay  doce  anos.         I      Twelve  years  ago ; 


138 


LESSON     XXX 


but  it  is  to  be  observed  that  hd  always  follows  the  time,  while 
hay  precedes  it. 

There  are  many  other  verbs  which,  although  not  impersonal, 
are  sometimes  used  as  such ;  as, 

Es  muy  tarde.  It  is  very  late. 

Es  precise.  It  is  necessary. 

Es  menester.  There  is  necessity. 

Parece.  It  seems,  it  appears. 

Conviene.  It  suits,  it  is  proper. 

Basta.  It  is  sufficient,  it  will  do. 

145.  As  it  may  have  been  observed,  the  pronoun  ii^  which 
accompanies  impersonal  verbs  in  English,  is  not  translated  into 
Spanish. 

Nouns  taken  in  a  definite  sense  require  the  article ;  as, 

El  muchacho  estudia.  I      The  boy  studies. 

El  estudio  de  la  gramatica  es  util.       J      The  study  of  grammar  is  useful. 

Nouns  used  in  their  most  general  sense  are  preceded  by  the 
article ;  as, 

El  hombre  necesita  trabajar.  Man  requires  to  work. 

La  conversacion  es  muy  util  para        Conversation  is  very  useful  for  learn- 
aprender  una  lengua.  ing  a  language. 

146.  Names  of  nations,  countries,  provinces,  mountains, 
rivers  and  seasons,  generally  take  the  article ;  as, 

La  Espana.  Spain. 

La  Inglaterra.  England. 

El  inviemo.  Winter. 

147.  Nations,  countries  and  provinces,  when  preceded  by 
a  preposition,  do  not  take  the  article  unless  they  are  personi- 
fied; as, 

Las  provincias  de  Espafia.  j      The  provinces  of  Spain. 

El  valor  de  la  Espana.  |      The  courage  of  Spain. 

Nevertheless,  the  article  is  employed  under  all  circumstances 
with  the  names  of  some  places ;  as. 


El  Brasil. 
La  Habana. 
El  Ferrol. 
La  China. 
El  Japon. 
El  Perii. 


Brazil. 

Havana, 

FerroU 

China. 

Japan. 

Peru. 


LESSON     XXX.  139 


CONYERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  iQn^  tiempo  hace?    Ahora  hace  calor;  antes  hacia  frio. 

2.  I  Llovera  maiiana  ?     Creo  que  nevara. 

3.  g  Llueve  mucho  en  Nueva  York  ?    Llueve  j  llovizna  bastante ;  pero 
raramente  diluvia. 

4.  I  Hace  mucho  frio  en  la  Habana  en  el  mes  de  Enero  ?    Hace  algu-; 
no,  pero  nunca  nieva  ni  Mela. 

5.  I  Relampaguea  ?    Relampaguea  j  llovizna. 

6.  gPorqu6  escribe  Y.  tantos  ejercicios?    Porque  para  aprender  una 
lengua  no  basta  hablarla,  esnecesario  tambien  saber  escribirla. 

7.  I  Nieva  mucho  en  el  Brasil  ?    En  el  Brasil  no  nieva,  mas  que  en  las 
montanas,  donde  hay  nieve  todo  el  afio. 

8.  ^Quiere  V.  tomar  un  helado?    No,  sefior,  los  helados  no  soq 
buenos  en  este  tiempo. 

9.  I  Cuanto  tiempo  hace  que  no  ve  V.  d  su  familia  ?    El  dos  de  Setiem- 
bre  proximo  hard  once  alios. 

10.  2  Porqu6  no  vino  Y.  anoche  ?    Porque  llovia  y  hacia  mucho  viento. 

11.  ^Tiene  Y.  miedo  de  los  truenos?     Cuando  relampaguea  mucho,  si 
sefior. 

12.  jPorqu6  no  fue  Y.  anoche  al  concierto?    Porque  lloviznaba  y 
estaba  nevando. 

13.  ^Aqu6horas  come  Y.  ?    Al  amanecer  tomo  chocolate;   al  medio 
dia  como,  y  al  anochecer  tomo  el  t6. 

14.  I  Se  levanta  Y.  al  amanecer  todos  los  dias  ?    Cuando  es  menester, 
si  sefior. 

15.  I A  que  hora  salio  Y.  del  teatro  el  sdbado?    A  media  noche. 

16.  ^Cuando  saheron  sus  hermanas  para  el  campo?    Ayer  al  medio 
dia. 

17.  ^  Cuando  volveran  ?    Pasado  mafiana  por  la  noche. 

18.  ^A  que  hora  amanece  en  el  verano?    En  verano  amanece  a  las 
cinco  y  anochece  a  las  siete  y  media. 

19.  ^  Porqu6  se  maroha  Y.  tan  pronto  ?    Porque  es  menester. 

20.  I  Es  menester  salir  al  amanecer  ?     No,  basta  salir  al  medio  dia. 

21.  ^Hay  muchos  Alcmanes  en  Nueva  York?    Si,  sefior,  hay  muchi-/ 
simos. 

22.  I  Cuahtos  dias  hace  que  no  le  ve  Y.  ?    No  hace  mas  que  uno. 

23.  ^Hay  algun  Frances  en  sucasade  Y.?    Hay  cuatro  Franceses  y  una 
Francesa. 

24.  I  Cuando  vinieron  Yds.  ?    Ayer  al  medio  dia. 

25.  I  Cree  Y.  qu6  llovera  hoy  ?    Parece  que  si,  porque  hace  mucho 
viento  y  mucho  calor. 


140  LESSON     XXX. 

26.  ^Llovi6  mucho  aqni  el  afiopasado?    Aqui  llovi6  mucho,  pero  en 
la  Habana  llovi6  mas. 

27.  ^Nieva  raucho  en  este  pais?    En  el  invierno  nieva  mncho. 

28.  ^Se  hiela  el  agua?    Muchas  veces. 

29.  I  Habra  mncho  hielo  el  afio  pr6ximo  ?    En  el  invierno  babrd  mn- 
cho hielo. 

80.  I  Hace  mncho  frio  ?    Si,  sefior,  y  al  amanecer  llovia  y  granizaba. 

81.  I  Porqu6  hace  tanto  frio  hoy  ?    Porque  nev6  ayer, 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Is  it  raining  ?    I  do  not  know. 

2.  You  do  not  know  ?  How,  are  you  still  in  bed  ? — Yes,  and  I  shall 
be  until  7  o'clock. 

8.  At  what  o'clock  did  you  go  to  bed?    At  midnight. 

4.  What  is  it  necessary  to  do  in  order  to  learn  Spanish  ?  It  is  neces- 
sary to  study  a  good  grammar,  talk  a  great  deal  with  Spaniards,  and  read 
the  works  of  good  authors. 

5.  What  were  you  doiog  in  the  garden  this  morning  at  daybreak  ? 
I  was  walking. 

6.  Have  you  read  the  Spanish  newspaper  yet  that  I  lent*  yon?  Yes, 
sir,  here  it  is.    Thank  you. 

7.  What  language  do  they  speak  in  Brazil  ?    Portuguese  (portugues). 

8.  Do  yon  see  that  lightning  f  ?  Yes,  it  is  lightening  and  thundering 
very  much. 

9.  Is  it  proper  to  have  the  windows  open  when  it  thunders?  No,  it 
is  better  to  have  them  shut  (cerradas). 

10.  I  think  (it  appears  to  me)  it  will  soon  rain.  Yes,  I  think  so  too ; 
it  is  already  drizzling. 

11.  John !  Sir.  Is  there  any  water  in  my  room  ? — No,  sir,  but  if  you 
wish,  I  shall  take  some  there  now. 

12.  In  what  months  of  the  year  does  it  freeze  most  in  New  York  ? 
During  (durante)  the  months  of  January  and  February. 

13.  I  believe  there  is  a  great  deal  of  ice  used  (se  usa)  in  New  York 
during  the  summer.    A  great  deal,  and  it  is  very  cheap. 

14.  It  appears  that  there  will  be  little  ice  next  summer.  Very  little, 
the  winter  has  not  been  cold  enough  to  have  much. 

15.  What  watch  is  that  you  have  there  ?    It  is  the  one  I  always  hiid. 

16.  I  thought  you  had  given  your  watch  to  Charles,  and  bought  your 
(the)  neighbor's  ?    No,  Charles  has  a  very  pretty  little  watch. 

17.  What  o'clock  is  it  by  your  watch  ?  It  is  just  four  o'clock  {son  la$ 
ciiatro  en  punto). 

*  Prostar.  t  Relimpaga 


LESSON     XXXI.  141 

18.  Who  knocked  at  the  door  just  now?    It  was  Mrs.  Martinez ;  it  is 
thundering,  and  you  know  she  is  afraid  of  the  lightning. 

19.  Why  did  she  not  come  in  ?    She  did  not  like  to  (would  not)  disturb 
you  {molestarla  a  V.)  madam. 

20.  Do  you  know  whether  Alexander  has  sent   the  papers  to  his 
brother  yet?    lt\i\nk\iQh2iS>  {me  parece  que  si). 

21.  Did  you  take  him  the  two  volumes  I  showed  him  yesterday  ?    I 
took  them  to  him  this  morning. 

22.  Was  he  in  the  house  when  you  went  ?    No,  madam,  he  had  just 
gone  out. 

23.  Will  you  open  that  window,  if  yon  please  ?    With  pleasure. 

24.  And  this  one  also  ?     No,  thank  you ;  it  is  better  to  have  that  one 
shut. 

25.  What  kind  of  weather  is  it  to-day  ?    Very  bad ;  it  has  been  raining 
and  hailing  ever  since  {desde)  daybreak. 

26.  Madam,  here  are  two  beautiful  bouquets  that  Mrs.  Garcia  has  sent 
you  from  her  garden.     She  is  very  kind  (buena). 

27.  Who  brought  them  ?    Her  servant  {fern.). 

28.  When  did  she  bring  them?    You  had  no  sooner  gone  out  than 
she  came. 

29.  How  windy  it  was  last  night!    Yes,  and  it  rained  in  torrents  the 
whole  night,  from  nightfall  until  daybreak  this  morning. 

30.  What  news  is  there  from  Europe  ?    I  do  not  know ;  I  have  not 
yet  seen  the  newspapers. 


LESSON    XXXI. 

Gustar.  |         To  like,  to  please. 


(A  mi)  me  gusta  or  gustan. 

(A  ti)  te  gusta  " 

(A  61)  le  gusta  " 

(A  nosotros)  nos  gusta,  or  gustan. 

(A  vosotros)  OS  gusta,  " 

(A  ellos)  les  gusta.  " 


I  like  it  or  them. 
Thou  likest  it  or  them. 
He  likes  it  " 

We  like  it  " 

You  like  it  " 

They  like  it  " 


IMPEKFECT. 

(A  mi)  me  gustaba  or  gustaban.    I      I  liked  it  or  them. 
(A  ti)  te  gustaba,  etc.  I      Thou  likedst  it,  &c. 


142 


LESSON     XXXI. 


Gustar  de. 


Gusto  de. 
Gustas  de. 
Gusta  de. 

Gustamos  de. 
Gustais  de. 
Gustan  de. 


Gustaba  de. 
Gustabas  de,  etc. 


I         To  be  fond  of. 

PRESENT. 

I  am  fond  of. 
Thou  art  fond  o£ 
He  is  fond  of. 

"We  are  fond  of. 
You  are  fond  of. 
They  are  fond  ot 

IMPERFECT. 

I  was  or  used  to  be  fond  ofl 
Thou  wast  or  used  to  be  fond 
of,  &c. 


Gustar. 

To  taste. 

Placer. 

To  please. 

Pesar  (impersonal). 

To  regret 

Pesar  (in  all  its  persons). 

To  weigh. 

Faltar  or  hacer  falta. 

To  want. 

Faltar. 

To  fail,  to  be  wanting  or  missing. 

Acorn  odar. 

To  suit,  to  accommodate. 

Convenir. 

To  suit,  to  be  convenient. 

Importar. 

To  be  important. 

Cerca. 

Near. 

L6J0S. 

Far. 

Dentro. 

Within. 

Fuera. 

Without. 

Bello. 

Beautifiil,  fine. 

Posible. 

Possible. 

Imposiblo. 

Impossible. 

Poeta. 

Pintor. 

Escultor. 

Placer. 

Dios. 

Pesar. 

Melon. 

Melocoton. 

Arte. 


Poet. 

Painter. 

Sculptor. 

Pleasure. 

God. 

Regret,  sorrow. 

Melon. 

Peach. 

Ai-t,  skill. 


Poesla. 

Pintura. 

Escultura. 

Prosa. 

Fruta. 

Manzana. 

Naranja. 

Artes  (plu.), 

Arroba. 


Poetry,  poem. 

Painting. 

Sculpture. 

Prose. 

Fruit. 

Apple. 

Orange. 

Arts. 

Arroba. 


LESSON     XXXI, 


143 


COMPOSITION. 


g  Le  gusta  a  Y.  la  fruta  ? 

Si,  senor,  me  gustan  las  naranjas  y  los 

melones. 
A  ml  me  gustan  los  melocotones  y  las 

manzanas. 
|Cual  de  las  bellas  artes  le  gusta  a  Y. 

mas? 
Me  gustan  todas,  la  musica,  la  poesia, 
'    la  pintura  y  la  escultura. 
I  Ya  Y.  4  la  opera  muy  k  menudo  ? 
Yoy  dos  6  tres  veces  por  semana. 
Me  parece  que  Uovera  pronto,  y  me 

gusta  porque  tengo  un  gran  placer  en 

ver  Hover. 

j  Es  posible !  A  mf  no  me  gusta  ver 
llover;  pero  me  gusta  muchisimo 
ver  nevar. 

(4  Le  acomoda  a  Y.  ese  caballo  ? 

No  me  conviene,  porque  es  muy  viejo 
asi  que  no  lo  comprare. 

I  Yive  Y.  cerca  6  16jos  de  aqul  ? 
Yivo  muy  cerca. 

I  Yive  Y.  dentro  6  fuera  de  la  ciudad  ? 
Ahora  en  la  ciudad ;  pero  en  el  verano 

vivo  en  el  campo. 
i  Qu6  le  falta  k  Y.  para  ser  feliz  ? 

No  me  falta  nada,  gracias  k  Dios. 
Deseo  conocer  al  pintor  cuya  pintura 

tiene  Y.  en  su  cuarto. 
I  Le  pesa  k  Y.  de  no  haber  estado  en  el 

concierto  ? 
Me  pesa  mucho  de  no  haber  estado, 

porque  no  tuve  el  placer  de  ver  k  su 

amigo  de  Y. 
A  ml  me  pesa  de  ello  tambien. 


Do  you  like  fruit  ? 

Yes,  sir,  I  like  oranges  and  melons. 

I  like  peaches  and  apples. 

Which  of  the  fine  arts  do  you  like 
best? 

I  Uke  them  all,  music,  poetry,  painting 
and  sculpture. 

Do  you  go  to  the  opera  very  often  ? 

I  go  two  or  three  times  a  week. 

It  appears  to  me  that  it  will  soon  rain, 
and  I  am  glad  of  it  (I  like  it),  because 
I  find  (have  a)  great  pleasure  in  see- 
ing it  rain. 

Is  it  possible  !  I  do  not  Uke  to  see  it 
rain ;  but  I  like  to  see  it  snow. 

Does  that  horse  suit  you  ? 

It  does  not  suit  (or  answer)  me,  because 

it  is  very  old,  so  that  I  shall  not 

buy  it. 
Do  you  live  near  here,  or  far  away  ? 
I  Uve  very  near. 
Do  you  live  in  or  out  of  town  ? 
In  town  now,  but  in  the  country  in 

summer. 
What  do  you  want  (is  wanting  to  you) 

to  be  happy  ? 
I  want  nothing,  thank  God. 
I  desire  (or  wish)  to  know  the  painter 

whose  painting  you  have  in  your  room. 
Do  you  regret  not  having  been  at  the 

concert  ? 
I  deeply  (very  much)  regret  not  having 

been  there,  for  I  had  not  the  pleasun* 

of  seeing  your  friend. 
I  regret  it  too  (also). 


EXPLANATION. 

148.  GusTAR,  derived  from  the  noun  gusto,  pleasure,  and 
signifying  literally  to  give  pleasure  to,  is  the  verb  by  which  we 


144  LESSON     XXXI. 

translate  to  li7ce;  but  in  passing  from  English  to  Spanish,  the 
nominative  case  or  subject  becomes  the  objective,  and  the 
latter  is  preceded  by  the  preposition  d ;  as, 

6  Le  gusta  a  V.  la  poesia  ?  I      Do  you  like  poetry  ? 

Me  gusta  {or  k  mi  me  gusta)  mucho.  |      I  like  it  very  much. 

149.  GxjSTAB,  followed  by  the  preposition  de,  means  to  he 
fond  q/*,  and  sentences  in  which  it  is  used  are  constructed  as 
in  English ;  as, 

Yo  gusto  de  la  musica.  I      I  am  fond  of  music. 

El  gusta  de  la  poesia.  |      He  is  fond  of  poetry. 

150.  GusTAE,  used  as  an  active  verb,  means  to  taste^  and 
governs  the  objective,  without  the  aid  of  any  preposition  what- 
ever; as, 

^  Gusta  Y.  la  sopa  ?  I      Do  you  taste  the  soup  ? 

No,  senor,  gusto  la  carne.  |      No,  sir,  I  taste  the  meat 

151.  The  verbs joesar,  to  regret;  f altar,  in  the  sense  of  to 
want,  or  hacerfalta,  to  have  need  of;  a^omodar,  to  suit ;  con- 
venir,  to  suit ;  importar,  to  be  important ;  placer,  to  please, 
and  some  others,  require  the  same  idiomatic  construction  of  the 
sentence  as  that  explained  in  the  case  of  gustar  /  as. 


Nos  falta  {or  nos  hace  falta)  dinero. 
A  Y.  le  importa  ese  negocio. 
Mucho  me  place. 


We  want  {or  are  in  want  of)  money. 
That  business  is  important  to  you. 
It  pleases  me  much. 


This  last  verb  is  defective,  and  is  very  little  used,  except  in 
the  present  and  imperfect  of  the  subjunctive  mood,  as  will  be 
seen  in  the  proper  place. 

152.  The  verb  pesar,  when  meaning  to  regret,  generally 
takes  the  preposition  de  after  it ;  as. 
Me  pesa  de  ello.  |      I  am  sorry  for  it. 

CONYERSATION  AND  YERSION. 

1.  jLe  gusta  4  V.  la  6pera?  Cuando  era  j6vcn  me  gustaba  mas  que 
ahora. 

2.  I  Vendrd  V.  mafiana  d  comer  con  nosotros  ?     Si,  sellor,  no  faltar6. 

3.  I  Necesita  Y.  hoy  su  reloj  ?  Iloy  no  me  hace  falta,  manana  me 
convendrd  tenerlo. 

4.  jQuiere  Y.  saber  lo  que  he  hecho  hoy?    No  me  importa  saberlo. 


LESSON     XXXI.  145 

5.  I  Compra  Y.  el  caballo  del  ingles  ?    No,  sefior,  no  me  conviene : 
es  muj  caro. 

6.  Dicen  que  es  muy  bueno.     No  importa. 

7.  I  Porque  vive  V.  tan  l^jos  de  la  ciudad  ?     Porque  no  me  gustan 
veoinos. 

8.  Antes  vivia  Y.  comodamente  cerca  de  la  poblacion.     Si;   pero 
ahora  no  me  gusta. 

9.  I  Cuantas  arrobas  pesa  Y.  ?    Peso  ocho  arrobas  y  cinco  libras. 

10.  j  Ha  visto  Y.  a  su  prima?    No,  sefior,  j  me  pesa  mucho  de  ello. 

11.  ^Cuanto  pesa  su  nifio  de  Y.?      No  s6,  porque  no  lo  hemos  pesado 
aun. 

12.  ^Quiere  Y.  ir  d  paseo  con  D.  Carlos,  nuestro  vecino?    No  quiero 
ii'  con  61  porque  habla  mucho,  7  no  me  gustan  los  habladores. 

13.  No  obstante,  el  afio  pasado  estaba  Y.  en  buena  amistad  con  6l. 
Si ;  pero  abora  me  pesa  j  me  pesara  siempre. 

14.  ^Nunca  seran  Yds.  amigos  otra  \ez'(    Jamas :  es  imposible, 

15.  ^Porque?    No  puedo  decirselo  a  Y. 

16.  ^Eso  no  le  gustara  a  61  ?    Nada  me  importa. 

17.  jEstan  Yds.  comiendo  pan?    No,  sefior,  estamos  comiendo  fruta, 

18.  ^  Gusta  Y.  ?*  Si,  com  ere  una  manzana. 

19.  ^No  le  gustan  4  Y.  los  melones?      Si,  sefior;  pero  me  gustan  mas 
los  melocotones  y  las  naranjas. 

20.  I  Quien  es  aquella  sefiorita  tan  bella  que  paseaba  ayer  con  Y.  en 
el  parque  ?    Es  una  amiga  mia. 

21.  I  Qu6  son  los  bombres  que  vinieron  antes  de  ayer  con  Y.  ?  El  uno  es 
poeta,  el  otro  pintor  y  escultor  el  otro. 

22.  ^Oual  de  las  bellas  artes  le  gusta  a  Y.  mas?    Todas  me  gustan; 
pero  la  poesia  mas  que  las  otras. 

23.  I  Le  gusta  4  Y.  leer  una   bella  poesia  ?      Si,  sefior,  me  gusta 
mucho. 

24.  ^.Hace  mucho  frio  hoy?    Fuera  hace  bastante;    pero  dentro  de 
casa  hace  muy  poco. 

25.  I  Porque  no  fLi6  Y.  al  baile  anoche  ?     Porque  no  me  gustan  Iob 
bailea. 

20.  ^Es  posible  que  siendo  tan  j5ven  no  le  gustan  a  Y.?    A  mi  me 
importa  estudiar ;  no  bailar. 

27.  I  Porqu6  no  quiere  Y.  bailar  ?    Porque  estoy  cansado. . 

28.  I  Qu6  es  lo  que  le  hace  falta  a  Y.  para  ser  feliz  ?    Nada  me  hace 
falta  por  ahora,  gracias  a  Dios. 

29.  I  Qu6  le  falta  4  Y.  ?    Me  falta  el  sombrero. 

80.  Aqui  estl     ^Se  marcha  Y.?— Si,  sefior,  si  Y.  no  manda  otra 

^^^^'  +00  you  wish? 

1 


146  LESSON     XXX  I. 


EXERCISE. 


1.  Are  your  brothers  and  sisters  fond  of  study  ?    They  are  not  so 
fond  of  it  as  some  children  I  have  known. 

2.  Do  they  ever  read  poetry  ?     Sometimes,  hut  not  very  often. 

3.  Do  you  linderstand  Spanish  poetry  ?    Not  yet ;  but  I  understand 
prose  perfectly  well. 

4.  Do  you  ever  eat  fruit  ?    Yes,  I  am  very  fond  of  apples,  oranges, 
peaches  and  melons. 

6.  Is  that  gentleman  a  sculptor  ?    No,  madam,  he  is  a  painter,  and 
enjoys  a  high  reputation. 

6.  Do  you  know  that  it  is  raining  ?    Raining !  no,  I  did  not  (know  it). 

7.  Do  you  think  it  is  going  to  thunder  ?     I  think  it  is  (I  think  so). 

8.  Then  it  is  imposible  to  go  out  ?    By  no  means  {de  ningun  modo) ; 
we  are  not  afraid  of  hghtning. 

9.  Does  it  always  lighten  when  it  rains  ?     Not  always. 

10.  Good  morning,  Mr.  Retortillo,  how  do  you  do  ?    Very  well,  thank 
you ;  and  how  are  you  (and  you)  ? 

11.  What  do  you  wish  ?    I  have  come  to  see  if  this  letter  is  correctly 
written.    It  is  perfectly  correct. 

12.  Who  wrote  that  letter  ?    A  friend  of  mine,  who  writes  Spanish 
very  well. 

13.  Why  do  you  not  learn  Spanish  yourself?    I  have  no  time,  and  I 
regret  it  very  much. 

14.  What  profession  (profesion)  do  you  like  best?    Of  all  professions  I 
like  that  of  a  physician  best. 

15.  When  did  you  see  Miss  Mel6ndez  ?    I  had  the  pleasure  of  seeing 
her  the  other  day. 

16.  How  do  you  like  (que  tat)  your  new  piano?    Very  much. 

17.  Who  is  your  music  teacher?     I  have  none  just  now;   but  I  used 
to  have  a  German  teacher. 

18.  How  much  do  you  weigh?     I  weigh  a  hundred  and  sixty-five 
pounds  {lihras). 

19.  Does  Charles  weigh  as  much  as  Alexander?    No,  sir,  Alexander 
weighs  twenty  pounds  more. 

20.  Is  Mr.  Martinez  at  home?    No,  sir,  he  is  out. 

21.  When  will  he  be  in?    I  do  not  know;  he  did  not  say  (it)  when  he 
was  going  out  (al  salir). 

22.  Does  your  uncle  live  in  or  out  of  town  ?    In  summer  he  lives  out 
of  town. 

23.  When  he  is  in  town  where  does  he  live  ?    lu  Twenty-second  street, 
pear  Fifth  Aycpue, 


LESSON     XXXII, 


147 


24.  How  did  you  spend  your  time  when  you  were  in  the  country  ?  I 
walked  morning  and  evening,  and  during  the  day  I  read  the  beautiful 
poems  of  Zorrilla  and  Espronceda. 

26.  Have  you  ever  read  any  of  Martinez  de  la  Eosa's  poems  ?  Yes, 
but  I  do  not  like  them  so  well  as  those  of  MeMndez. 

26.  Which  is  the  greatest  Spanish  painter?  Spain  has  had  a  great 
number  of  excellent  painters,  but  the  most  celebrated  of  aU  are  Murillo 
and  Velazquez. 

2T.  Are  your  cousins  pleased  with  their  new  house  ?  I  believe  so ; 
but  they  say  they  liked  the  old  one  better. 

28.  Where  did  they  live  before  taking  the  house  in  which  they  reside 
now  ?    In  Fourteenth  street,  near  Seventh  avenue. 

29.  Are  they  not  comfortable  in  the  new  one  ?  It  is  not  for  that ; 
but  they  are  very  fond  of  flowers,  and  they  have  no  garden  now. 

30.  Will  you  come  out  and  take  a  walk  with  me  ?  Yes,  if  Emanuel 
comes  with  us ;  if  not,  I  shall  go  and  practise  on  the  piano. 


LESSON    XXXII. 


Poder.      {See  this  verb  at  the 

end  of  the  booh) 
Esperar. 
Castigar. 
Engaflar. 
Quemar. 
Tratar. 
Tratar  de. 
Tratar  en. 

Seguir.     (See  this  verb  at  the 
end  of  the  booJc.) 


To  be  able ;  may,  &c. 

To  expect,  to  wait  for,  to  hope. 

To  punish. 

To  deceive,  to  cheat. 

To  burn. 

To  treat ;  to  have  intercourse  with. 

To  endeavor,  to  try,  to  treat  of. 

To  deal  in. 

To  follow. 


ADVEEBS  AND  ADVERBIAL  PHEASES. 


Casi. 

I  Cudnto  tiempo  ? 

Cuanto  dntes. 

De  Moda. 

Debalde.  ) 

Gratis.       ) 

De  cuando  eu  cuando. 


Almost,  nearly. 

How  long? 

As  soon  as  possible. 

Fashionable. 

Gratis ;  for  nothing. 

From  time  to  time ;  now  and  then. 


148 


LESSON     XXXII. 


De  improviso. 

De  veras. 
Verdaderarnente. 
En  lo  sucesivo. 
Hasta  no  mas. 
Poco  a  poco. 
Por  supuesto. 
Tal  vez.  ) 


Acaso. 

Picaro. 
Bribon. 
Ejemplo. 


Eogue  (roguish). 

Rascal. 

Example ;  instance. 


Suddenly,      unexpectedly,     un- 
awares. 

Indeed,  truly. 

In  future. 

To  the  utmost,  to  the  extreme. 
Little  by  little,  by  degrees,  gently.. 
Of  course. 

Perhaps. 

Coqueta.         Coquette. 
Sociedad.        Society. 
Politica.  Politics. 


COMPOSITIOX. 


y  Mi  hermano  cs  castigado  algunaa  veces 
por  no  saber  sus  lecciones. 

Y  su  amigo  de  V.  Alejandro,  ^  lo  es  al- 
guna  vez  ? 

Lo  es  de  cuando  en  cuando ;  pero  mi 
hermana  no  ha  sido  castigada  jam&s, 
porque  sabe  siempre  sus  lecciones. 
"  ^  Ha  sido  V.  enganado  alguna  vez  ? 

Hasta  no  mas,  porque  hay  muchos  pi- 
caros  en  la  sociedad. 

Esta  casa  est4  bien  situada. 

La  carta  estaba  mal  escrita. 

Manuel  es  amado  de  {or  por)  Margarita. 

El  libro  ha  sido  escrito  por  un  Frances. 

Se  quemd  {or  fu6  quemada)  la  casa. 

Esta  casa  so  hizo  en  seis 


i  En  cuanto  tiempo  so  liizo  la  do  V.  ? 

En  cosa  de  tres  meses. 

I  Cu&nto  tiempo  neceeita  V.  para  escri- 

bir  esa  carta  ? 
Esta  casi  acabada ;  estoy  con  Y.  en  un 
minuto. 
"^     Poco  k  poco ;  va  V.  muy  aprisa. 
'J    Tal  vez ;  pero  tengo  prisa  y  quiero  aca- 
bar  pronto. 


My  brother  is  sometimes  punished  for 

not  knowing  bis  lessons. 
And  your  friend  Alexander,  is  he  ever 

punished  (ever  so)  ? 
He  is,  now  and  then  ;  but  my  sister  has 

never  been  pimished,  because  she 

always  knows  her  lessons. 
Have  you  ever  been  deceived  ? 
To  the  utmost,  for  there  are  a  great 

many  rogues  in  society. 
This  house  is  well  situated. 
The  letter  was  badly  written. 
Emanuel  is  loved  by  Margaret. 
The  book  was  written  by  a  Frenchman. 
The  house  was  burnt 
This  house  was  built  (made)  in  six 

months. 
How  long  was  yours  in  building  (mak- 
ing) ? 
About  three  months. 
How  long  shall  you  be  in  writing  that 

letter  ? 
It  is  almost  finished ;  I  shall  be  (am) 

with  you  in  a  moment  (minute). 
Gently  :  you  go  very  quick. 
Perhaps  so ;  but  I  am  in  hast«,  and  1 

want  to  get  done  (finish)  soon. 


LESSON     XXXII. 


149 


I  De  veras  ? 

Por  supuesto :  tengo  que  ir  al  correo. 

»  Dios  esta  en  todas  partes,  lo  sabe  y  lo 
puede  todo,  y  nos  perdonara  si  trata- 
mos  de  hacer  nuestro  deber. 


\/  6  Es  su  reloj  de  V.  de  moda  ? 
V  Si,  senor ;  pero  no  me  gusta,  porque  es 
muy  pequeno. 


Indeed  ? 

Of  course :  I  have  to  go  to  the  post- 
office. 

God  is  everywhere;  He  knows  all 
things,  and  nothing  is  impossible 
for  Him  (can  do  all);  and  He  will 
pardon  us,  if  we  endeavor  to  do  our 
duty. 

Is  your  watch  fashionable  ? 

Yes,  sir ;  but  I  do  not  like  it,  because 
it  is  too  small. 


EXPLANATION. 

153.  Passive  Voice. — This  voice  is  formed  by  the  different 
tenses  of  the  auxiliary  ser  added  to  the  past  participle  of  the 
verb,  care  being  taken  that  the  participle  agree  with  the  sub- 
ject, in  gender  and  number,  like  an  adjective ;  as, 


Soy  amado. 
Hemos  sido  amados. 
Habeis  sido  amados. 
Seras  amada. 


I  am  loved. 
We  have  been  loved. 
You  have  been  loved. 
Thou  wilt  be  loved. 


(or).  The  passive  voice  is,  however,  formed  in  Spanish,  by 
estar,  instead  of  ser,  when  the  past  participle  is  used  adjective- 
ly,  that  is  to  say,  when  the  state  or  condition  of  the  subject  is 
described  without  any  reference  to  an  action  ;  as, 

Esta  casa  esid  bien  siiuada.  j      This  house  is  well  located. 

La  carta  esiaha  mal  escrita.  |      The  letter  was  badly  written. 

154.  The  passive  verb  formed  by  ser  is  used  in  Spanish  in 
the  present  and  imperfect  of  the  indicative  mood,  only  when  it 
is  designed  to  express  a  mental  act ;  as, 

Manuel  es  amado  de  Margarita.  |      Emanuel  is  loved  by  Margaret. 

When  a  mental  act  is  not  expressed,  the  passive  verb  being 
in  the  present  or  imperfect  of  the  indicative  mood,  estar  is  the 
auxiliary  to  be  used,  and  not  ser ;  as, 
El  libro  ha  sido  escrito  por  un  Fran- 
ces, or  el  libro  estd  escrito  por  un 
Frances  (instead  of  es  escrito). 

155.  When  the  action  of  the  verb  refers  to  the  mind,  the 


The  book  was  written  by  a  French- 
man. 


150  LESSON     XXXII. 

preposition  de  orpor  may  be  used  after  the  passive  verb,  before 
the  agent,  and  por  only,  when  otherwise ;  as, 

Manuel  es  amado  de  (or  por)  Marga-  I      Emanuel  is  loved  by  Margaret 
rita.  I 

156.  The  passive  voice  in  English  is  very  frequently 
turned  into  Spanish  by  putting  the  verb  which  is  in  the  parti- 
ciple past  in  English,  in  the  same  person  and  number  as  the 
auxiliary  to  be  in  the  English  sentence,  and  placing  the  pronoun 
se  before  it. 

157.  The  latter  form  is  preferred  when  the  object,  or  re- 
ceiver, of  the  action  is  an  inanimate  thing,  or  when  the  sub- 
ject, or  agent,  remains  undetermined  ;  as, 

The  house  was  burnt. 
This  house  was  built  (made)  in  six 
months. 


Se  quem6  la  casa. 

Esta  casa  se  hizo  en  seis  meses. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  ^N"©  puede  Y.  esperar?    Esperar6  un  poco. 

2.  I  No  me  engafiara  V.  ?  Por  supnesto  que  no ;  yo  no  soy  ningun 
picaro. 

3.  Buenos  dias.  i  De  qu6  estan  Vds.  tratando  ? — Estabamos  hablando 
de  modas. 

4.  I  Puede  Y.  decirme  si  mi  sombrero  es  de  moda  ?  No  es  de  la  tilti- 
ma  (moda). 

6.  i,  Cuanto  tiempo  hace  que  pas6  esta  moda  ?  Habrd  ya  un  mes,  poco 
mas  6  m6no3. 

6.  I  Quiere  Y.  quemar  las  cartas  de  esa  sefiorital  Si,  sefior,  porqtfe 
es  una  coqueta. 

7.  jDe  veras?  Yo  creia  que  era  una  seflorita  de  mucha  circuns- 
peccion.  Hace  aJgun  tiempo  lo  era ;  pero  poco  4  poco  ha  ido  siguiendo 
el  ejemplo  do  otras. 

8.  I  Tal  vez  el  aer  coqueta  es  de  moda  en  la  sociedad  del  dia  ?  Asi  lo 
creo. 

9.  Y.  dobe  excusar  d  las  niflas ;  ellas  son  inocentes  y  no  creen  hacer 
mal  en  eso. 

10.  jHa  sido  Y.  engaflado  alguna  vez?    Hasta  no  mas;  porque  hay 
muchos  picaros. 

11.  ^Ilan  sido  castigados  sus  niflos  de  Y.?    Si,  sefior,  ban  sido  casti- 
gados  por  no  saber  sus  lecciones. 


LESSON     XXXII.  151 

12.  ^Y  aquel  criado  tan  bueno  que  V.  tenia?  Es  un  bribon;  no  lo 
quiero  ni  de  balde. 

13.  gDe  veras?  V.  lo  trataba  muj  Men.  Acaso  por  lo  mismo  que 
yo  lo  trataba  bieD,  me  ha  tratado  61  tan  mal. 

14.  I  Le  gusta  a  V.  la  sociedad  ?     Si,  seiior,  de  cuando  en  cuando. 

15.  g  Porqu6  no  vive  V.,  entonces,  en  la  ciudad?    Porque  se  me  querad 

la  casa. 

16.  ^Ouanto  tiempo  hace?     Casi  un  mes. 

17.  Y  ahora,  i  no  va  V.  nunca  alia  ?    Yoy  de  cuando  en  cuando. 

18.  Eso  es  verdaderamente  un  gran  mal ;  pero  en  lo  sucesivo  tendra 
V.  mas  cuidado. — Por  supuesto  que  si. 

19.  gNo  pudo  V.  saber  quien  le  quem6  la  casa?  No;  pero  creo  que 
fue  un  bribon,  que  me  queria  mal. 

20.  I  Quiere  Y.  acabar  ya?     Si,  cuanto  antes ;  no  puedo  esperar  mas. 

21.  I  Qu(§  piensa  Y.  liacer  ahora  ?  Trato  de  castigar  al  que  me  quem6  la 
casa. 

22.  ^Y  despues?     Despues  ver6  si  puedo  hacer  otra. 

23.  ^  Y  no  tiene  Y.  ahora  ninguna  alia  ?  Tengo  una  hecha  de  impro- 
viso. 

24.  Poco  a  poco  ira  Y.  haciendo  otra.      Asi  lo  espero. 

25.  ^Por  supuesto  que  su  sefiora  vivira  en  la  ciudad?  Si;  pero  va 
alia  de  cuando  en  cuando ;  el  otro  dia  llego  de  improviso,  cuando  menos 
la  esperaba. 

26.  I  No  puede  Y.  volver  mafiana  por  aqui  ?  Mafiana  tal  vez  no,  pero 
pasado  si. 

27.  Entonces  lo  espero  a  Y.  sin  falta.     Puede  Y.  esperarme ;  no  faltar6. 

28.  ^Ira  Y.  hoy  a  la  comedia  6  4  la  6pera?  Tal  vez  ire  d  la  6pera, 
porque  es  mas  de  moda. 

29.  I  ISTunca  va  Y.  4  la  comedia  ?    Si ;  voy  de  cuando  en  cuando. 

80.  I  Sabe  Y.  que  se  ha  quemado  la  Academia  (academy)  de  Mdsica  ? 
Si ;  anoche  lo  lei  en  los  periddicos. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Papa,  may  I  go  out  ?     Yes,  you  may  go  out  for  half  an  hour. 

2.  How  long  is  it  since  your  house  was  burnt  ?     Only  three  weeks. 

3.  Why  does  that  woman  punish  her  children  so  much?     She  al- 
ways punishes  them  when  they  do  wrong  (pbrar  mal). 

4.  Does  she  reward  {recompensar)  them  when  they  do  right  ?    I  be- 
lieve she  does. 

5.  Why  do  you  burn  all  that  young  lady's  letters  ?    Because  she  is 
only  a  coquette. 


152  LESSON   xxxn. 

6.  I  tliink  you  are  not  rigLt ;  I  have  known  her  a  long  time,  and  I 
believe  she  is  very  circumspect  {circumspecta). 

7.  Why  do  your  family  alwaysT  live  in  the  country  ?    Because  we  do 
not  like  society. 

^      8.  And  is  it  not  possible  to  live  in  town  without  going  into  society? 
It  is  impossible. 

9.  We  always  live  in  town,  and  yet  {nn  erribargo)  we  never  go  into 
society. 

10.  Peter,  can  you  write  that  letter  for  me  now  ?    I  can. 

11.  When  do  you  want  it?    As  soon  as  possible.  v 

12.  Have  you  ever  been  deceived  by  that  man?  Yes,  very  often  ;  he 
is  a  rascal. 

13.  How  long  have  you  known  him  ?    Kot  long ;  but  each  time  I  have 
V  had  business  with  him,  he  has  deceived  me. 

14.  Indeed!     What  business  is  he  in ?     I  cannot  tell  you. 

15.  Do  you  often  go  to  the  theatre  ?  Never  to  the  theatre ;  I  go  to 
the  opera  now  and  then. 

16.  Can  you  tell  me  whether  my  hat  is  fashionable?  Yes,  it  is  in  the 
latest  fashion. 

17.  Is  Peter's  the  fashion  too?  No,  those  hats  went  out  of  fashion 
last  year. 

18.  Where  is  your  old  servant  ?    He  lives  with  us  no  longer. 

19.  Did  you  give  Charles  the  fruit  you  were  to  buy  for  him  ?  No,  he 
came  for  it  tlie  other  day,  but  I  had  not  had  time  to  buy  it. 

20.  Why  did  you  come  so  late  to-day  to  your  lesson  ?  My  exercise 
was  very  difficult,  and  I  could  not  finish  it  in  time. 

21.  Well,  I  hope  you  will  come  in  time  in  future  ?  Yes,  in  future  I 
shall  come  at  four  o'clock  precisely. 

22.  I  hope  you  will  not  deceive  me  ?  Of  course  I  shall  not ;  I  never 
deceive  anybody. 

23.  Will  that  yoang  gentleman  *  be  at  the  concert  with  you  to-morrow 
night?    Perhaps  he  will  come  with  us. 

24.  Does  he  not  go  every  night  ?    Indeed  I  do  not  know. 

25.  How  long  is  it  since  you  began  to  take  lessons?  About  {cerca  de) 
four  months. 

26.  And  do  your  brother  and  sister  take  their  lessons  at  the  same  hour 
as  you  ?  No,  my  brother  takes  his  at  ten  o'clock,  and  ray  sister  at 
twelve. 

27.  Where  did  you  become  acquainted  with  the  gentleman  who  danced 
last  with  your  cousin  {fern.)  yesterday  evening  ?  I  made  his  acquaint- 
ance in  Madrid  the  year  before  last  (hace  dos  aflos). 

28.  Has  this  young  man  deceived  you  as  often  as  his  father?     He  has; 

♦  Caballerito. 


LESSON     XXXIII. 


153 


you  know  cMldren  almost  always  follow  the  example  of  their  parents 
{padres). 

29.  Do  you  think  Charles  is  loved  by  Louisa?    I  think  she  loves  him 
as  much  as  it  is  possible  to  love. 

30.  "What  did  you  tell  the  tailor  ?    I  told  him  you  wanted  your  coat 
and  vest  for  tlie  day  after  to-morrow. 


LESSON  XXXIII 


Lavars^. 
Haber«(3  lavado. 
Haber«6  de  lavar. 


Lavandos<?. 
Habiendo«e  lavado. 
Habiendo«6  de  lavar. 


REFLECTIYE  YERBS. 

ESrmiTIVB  MOOD. 

To  wash  one's  self. 
To  have  washed  one's  self. 
To  have  to  wash  one's  self. 

GERUND. 

"Washing  one's  self. 
Having  washed  one's  self. 
Having  to  wash  one's  sel£ 


INDICATIVE   PEESENT. 


(Yo)  me  lavo. 
(Til)  te  lavas. 
(El)  se  lava. 
(ISTosotros)  nos  lavamos. 
(Vosotros)  OS  lavais. 
(Ellos)  se  lavan. 


I  wash  myself. 
Thou  washest  thyselfl 
He  washes  himself. 
We  wash  ourselves. 
You  wash  yourselves. 
They  wash  themselves. 


{Tlie  other  simple  tenses  are  conjugated  in  Mice  manner.) 


PEETEEIT   INDEFINITE. 


(Yo)  me  he  lavado. 
(Til)  te  has  lavado. 
(£l)  se  ha  lavado. 
(Nosotros)  nos  hemes  lavado. 
(Vosotros)  OS  habeis  lavado. 
(Ellos)  se  han  lavado. 
{The  other  compound  tenses 

Cortar. 

Cortarsd. 

Afeitar. 


I  have  washed  myself. 
Thou  hast  washed  thyself. 
He  has  washed  himself. 
We  have  washed  ourselves. 
You  have  washed  yourselves. 
They  have  washed  themselves. 
are  conjugated  in  lihe  manner.) 

To  cut. 

To  cut  one's  self;  to  be  ashamed. 

To  shave. 


154 


LESSON     XXXIII, 


Afeitawe. 

Levantar. 

Levantar*^. 

Cansar. 

Cansar«e. 

Descansar. 

Contentar. 

Coiitentar»& 

Burlar. 

BuTlarse. 

Preguntar. 

Responder. 

Engafiar«e. 

Temer.     Reir. 


Barbero. 

Cansancio. 

Descanso. 

Contento. 

Respondon. 

Cuchillo. 


Barber. 

"Weariness,  fatigue. 
Rest. 

Contentment. 
Ever  ready  to  reply. 
Knife. 


To  shave  one's  self. 

To  raise,  to  lift. 

To  get  up,  to  rise. 

To  weary,  to  fatigue,  to  tire. 

To  tire  one's  sel^  to  get  tired. 

To  rest. 

To  content,  to  please. 

To  content  one's  selfl 

To  mock,  to  jest. 

To  jest,  to  make  jest  of,  to  laugh  at 

To  question,  to  ask,  to  enquire. 

To  answer. 

To  deceive  one's  sel£ 

To  fear.    To  laugh. 


Arriba. 

Up. 

Abajo. 

Down. 

Detras. 

Behind. 

Encima. 

Upon,  above. 

Debajo. 

Under. 

Luego. 

Presently. 

Qu6  tal  ? 

How ;  how  do  yon  do  ? 

Descansadamente. 

Easily. 

De  burlas. 

In  jest. 

Descansado. 

Rested. 

Contento. 

Content. 

Pelo^cabello.  Hair. 


Pregunta. 

Respuesta. 

Burla. 

Declinacion. 

Derivacion. 

Disposicion. 

Una. 


Question,  query. 

Answer. 

Jest. 

Declination. 

Derivation. 

Disposition. 

Nail  (finger). 


COMPOSITION. 


i  A  qu6  hora  se  levant6  V.  ayer  ? 

Me  levant6  temprano;  me  levanto  al 

umanecer  todos  los  dias. 
I  Qu6  hizo  V.  ent6nce8  ? 
Mc  afeit^  y  sail 


At  what  o'clock  did  you  get  up  yester- 
day? 

I  rose  early ;  I  rise  at  daybreak  every 
morning. 

What  did  you  do  next  (then)  ? 

I  shaved  myself  and  went  out 


LESSON    xxxm 


155 


I  Se  lava  V.  dntes  de  afeitarse  ? 

Me  afeito  4ntes  de  lavarme. 

iSon  faciles  de  aprender  las  palabras 

declinacion,  derivacion,  y  disposicion  ? 
Son  facilisimas,  porque  casi  todas  las  pa- 
labras que  acaban  en  cio7i  son  lo 

mismo  en  ingles,  cambiando  la  c  en  i. 
Tengo  un  barbero  que  afeita  muy  bien^ 

pero  es  carisimo  ;  ^  que  tal  afeita  el 

deV.? 
El  mio  no  afeita  muy  bien;   pero  es 

baratisimo,    porque    me    afeito    yo 

mismo. 
Ahora  me  afeita  el  barbero,  porque  me 

he  cortado  la  mano  y  no  puedo  afei- 

tarme  yo  mismo. 
I  Porque  se  burla  Y.  de  su  amigo  ? 
Me  burlo  de  61  porque  se  levanta  muy 

tarde. 
^6  Se  ha  cansado  V.  de  estudiar  ? 
No,  senor,  porque  cuando  me  canso  de 

estudiar,  descanso  escribiendo. 
I  Ama  Y.  4  su  hermano  ? 
Nos  amamos  el  uno  al  otro. 
^  Le  gusta  a  Y.  mas  preguntar  que  res- 
ponder  ? 
No,  senor,  yo  no  soy  pregunton,  y  me 

gusta  hacer  ambas  cosas. 
Yo  no  trabajo  mucho,  lo  hago  descan- 

sadamente. 
^  Se  engana  Y.  k  si  mismo  alguna  vez  ? 
Y.  habla  de  burlas  ;  ^  puede  uno  enga- 

narse  4  si  mismo  jam4s  ? 
Por  supuesto  que  si. 
6  Esta  su  amigo  de  Y.  abajo  6  arriba  ? 
i  Esta  mi  libro  debajo  6  encima  de  la 

mesa? 
i  Quo  tal  le  gusta  4  Y.  Nueva  York  ? 


Do  you  wash  yourself  before  shaving 

(yourself)  ? 
I  shave  before  washing  myself. 
Are  the  words  declination,  derivation 

and  disposition  easy  to  learn  ? 
They  are  very  easy,  because  all  words 

ending  in  don  are  the  same  in  Eng- 
lish, changing  the  c  into  t 
I  have  a  barber  that  shaves  very  well, 

but  he  is  exceedingly  high  (dear) ; 

how  does  your's  shave  ? 
Mine  does  not  shave  very  well ;  but  he 

is  very  cheap,  for  I  shave  myself. 

The  barber  shaves  me  at  present  (now), 

because  I  (have)  cut  my  hand,  and  I 

cannot  shave  myself. 
Why  do  you  make  fun  of  your  friend  ? 
I  make  fun  of  him  because  he  gets  up 

very  late. 
Have  you  got  tired  of  studying  ? 
No,  sir;  because  when  I  get  tired  at 

study,  I  rest  myself  writing. 
Do  you  love  your  brother  ? 
We  love  each  other. 
Do  you  like  better  to  ask  questions 

than  to  answer  ? 
No,  sir,  I  am  not  inquisitive ;  I  like  to 

do  both. 
I  do  not  work  much ;  I  do  it  at  my  ease. 

Do  you  ever  deceive  yourself? 
You  speak  in  jest ;  can  one  ever  de- 
ceive one's  self? 
Certainly  (so). 

Is  your  friend  up-stairs  or  down-stairs  ? 
Is  my  book  upon  or  under  the  table  ? 

How  do  vou  like  New  York  ? 


EXPLANATION. 

158.  Reflective  Verbs. — Almost  all  active  verbs 
become  reflective  in  Spanish,  and  be  used  as  pronominal. 


may 
The 


156  LESSON     XXXIII. 

pronoun  object  must  be  of  the  same  person  as  that  of  the  sub- 
ject, and  each  person  is  conjugated  with  a  double  personal 
pronoun.  However,  the  pronoun  subject  is  almost  always  un- 
derstood in  Spanish,  while  in  English  it  is  expressed ;  as, 

Infinitive.     Amar««.  I  To  love  one's  self. 

Part.  Pres.  Ainando«e.  |  Loving  one's  self. 


INDICATIVE  PRESENT. 


Me  amo. 
Te  amas. 
Se  ama. 
Nos  amamos. 
Os  amais. 
Se  aman. 


I  love  myself 
Thou  lovest  thyself. 
He  loves  himself. 
We  love  ourselves. 
You  love  yourselves. 
They  love  themselves. 

And  in  the  same  manner  in  all  the  other  tenses. 

159.  When  an  agent  performs  an  action  upon  a  part  of 
himself,  the  verb  is  made  reflective ;  and  the  possessive  pro- 
nouns, my,  his,  etc.,  are  translated  into  Spanish  by  the  article 
el,  la,  los,  las ;  as. 

Me  corto  el  cabello.  I  I  cut  my  hair. 

Se  corta  las  ufias.  |  He  cuts  his  nails. 

160.  When  the  verb  denotes  a  reciprocity  of  action  be- 
tween two  or  more  individuals,  it  is  formed,  in  Spanish,  in  the 
same  manner  as  the  plural  of  reflective  verbs ;  as, 


Nos  amamos. 
Os  enganasteis. 
Se  temerdn. 


We  love  one  another. 
You  deceived  each  other. 
They  will  fear  each  other. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  jSe  ha  afeitado  V.  ?    Ni  me  he  lavado  ni  afoitado. 

2.  I  Oudntas  veces  lava  la  criada  &  los  nines  ?  Los  lava  per  la  mafiana, 
al  medio  dia  y  4  la  noche. 

8.  I  Cudndo  les  corta  las  uflas  ?  Se  las  corta  los  miercoles  y  los  sdbados. 

4.  I  Se  lavantan  temprano  ?  A  las  seis  en  verano,  y  4  las  siete  en  ia- 
vierno. 

6.  ^Porqud  no  se  levant6  V.  hoy  mas  temprano  ?  Porqne  el  criado 
no  me  despert6. 

6.  I'No  despierta  Y.  temprano?     Cuando  cstoy  cansado,  no. 

7.  jEstaba  V.  muy  cansado  ayer?    Si,  scflor,  el  paseo  me  can86  macho. 


LESSON     XXXIII.  157 

8.  Ent6iice3,  ^  querra  V.  descansar  hoy  todo  el  dia  ?    Ifo,  he  descan- 
sado  ya  bastante  durante  la  noche. 

9.  I  Con  cuanto  dinero  se  contenta  Y.  ?    Yo  me  contento  con  poco. 

10.  gSe  contentara  V.  con  diez  pesos  ?     Se  burla  V.  de  mi. 

11.  No,  yo  solaraente  pregunto. — V.  me  pregunta  y  yo  respondo  que  no. 

12.  ^  Habla  V.  de  burlas  6  de  veras  ?    Hablo  de  veras ;  yo  no  me  con- 
tento con  menos  de  cien  pesos. 

13.  gSe  burla  V.  de  mi?    No,  sefior,  yo  nunca  hablo  de  burlas;  y  V. 
tendra  que  contentarse  con  lo  que  se  le  ha  dado  ya. 

14.  Y.  es  quien  se  engafia. — El  engaflado  sera  Y.,  yo  no. 

15.  g  Para  que  llama  Y.  al  barbero  ?    Para  afeitarrae. 

16.  I  Porqu6  no  se  afeita  Y.  mismo  ?   Porque  tengo  miedo  de  cortarme. 

17.  I  Donde  esta  el  cuchillo  ?    Esta  sobre  la  mesa. 

18.  I  Ad6nde  va  Y.  ?    Yoy  a  cortarme  el  pelo. 

19.  ^  Donde  vive  su  barbero  ?    Yive  detras  de  la  iglesia. 

20.  I  Pregunt6  Y.  al  criado  por  mis  botas  ?     Si,  sefior,  me  dijo  que  es- 
taban  bajo  de  la  cama. 

21.  ^Sale  Y.  ahora  a  paseo?    No,  sefior,  saldre  despues. 

22.  I  Qu6  tal  esta  su  amigo  de  Y.  ?    Ahora  estd  mas  contento. 

28.  gQu6  tal  es  el  criado  que  tiene  Y.  ahora?    Es  muy  respondon. 

24.  gD6nde  esta  su  padre  de  Y.,  arriba  6  abajo  ?    Antes  estaba  abajo, 
ahora  me  parece  que  esta  arriba. 

25.  I  Que  tal  ha  pasado  Y.  la  noche  ?    Muy  descansadamente  ;  he  dor- 
mido  muy  bien. 

26.  I  C6mo  estan  escritos  los  ejercicios  de  su  gramatica  de  Y.  ?    Estan 
por  preguntas  y  respuestas. 

27.  I  Hizo  Y.  la  pregunta  que  le  dije ?    Si;  pero  no  me  dieron  respuesta. 

28.  ^De  qu6  trata  la  leccion  de  hoy?    De  la  declinacion  y  derivacion 
de  los  nombres,  y  de  la  disposicion  de  las  palabras  en  la  composicion. 

29.  I  Qu6  esta  Y.  leyendo  ?     Las  disposiciones  del  rey  Carlos  III. 

30.  I  Aprende  bien  el  espafiol  su  amigo  de  Y.  ?    No,  sefior,  tiene  muy 
poca  disposicion  para  las  lenguas. 

31.  I  Qu6  hizo  Y.  ayer  despues  que  se  levant6  ?    Me  lav6  y  me  afeita. 

32.  I  Se  cans6  Y.  mucho  ayer  ?    Si,  sefior,  me  cans6  mucho  el  paseo  al 
parque. 

^    33.  I  Necesita  Y.  descanso  ?    Descanso  bastante  de  noche. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Where  do  yon  sleep  ?    In  the  small  room  on  the  third  floor  (piso), 

2.  At  what  o'clock  do  you  get  up  every  morning  ?    I  generally  rise 
at  six  o'clock. 


168  LESSON     XXXIII. 

8.  At  what  Lour  do  jour  children  rise  in  summer  ?    They  rise  at  day- 
break. 

4.  At  what  time  do  they  go  to  bed?    At  nightfall. 

5.  Where  do  you  wash  yourself?    I  wash  myself  in  my  own  room. 

6.  Do  you  wash  yourself  in  hot  (caliente)  or  cold  water  ?    I  wash 
myself  always  with  cold  water. 

7.  Why  do  you  not  wash  sometimes  with  warm  water  ?     Because 
cold  water  is  much  better  for  the  skin  (cutis). 

8.  Where  do  you  go  to  get  shaved  ?    I  go  to  the  barber's. 

9.  Where    does  your  barber  live  ?     In  Broadway,   near  Broome 
street. 

10.  Are  you  tired  ?    No,  sir,  I  never  tire  myself  writing. 

11.  Are  you  speaking  in  earnest  or  in  jest?  In  earnest;  I  am  not  in 
a  humor  to  jest. 

12.  It  seemed  to  me  you  were  in  a  humor  to  jest  a  while  ago  ?  Not 
at  all ;  on  the  contrary,*  it  was  my  brother  that  was  making  fun  of  me 
because  I  had  cut  my  hand. 

13.  Well,  no  matter  ;  I  know  you  are  fond  of  jesting  and  laughing  at 
everybody.    Yon  deceive  yourself,  my  dear  sir  {aeflor  mio). 

14.  Charles,  can  you  go  to  the  tailor's  to  tell  him  I  wish  to  see  him  ? 
It  is  impossible  for  me  to  go  out  now,  I  am  expecting  Mr.  Valero. 

15.  No  matter,  I  shall  send  John.  John  cannot  go  either;  he  has  to 
be  here  at  the  same  time  as  I. 

16.  Will  you  go  to  the  post-ofl5ce  and  ask  if  there  are  any  letters  for 
me  ?  I  asked  this  morning  when  I  took  father's  letters,  and  they  told 
me  there  were  none. 

17.  Did  you  see  the  newspaper  I  was  reading  when  your  cousin  came 
in  ?    There  it  is  on  the  table,  behind  the  dictionary. 

18.  Why  did  you  get  your  hair  cut  (hacerse  cortar)^  Because  it  was 
too  long  (largo). 

19.  Indeed!  I  thought  you  liked  long  hair?  On  ladies,  yes;  but  it 
is  not  very  suitable  for  a  man. 

20.  Where  is  Peter  ?    I  think  he  is  up-stairs. 

21.  Will  you  do  me  the  pleasure  to  call  him  ?     Ceri&mlj  (ciertamente). 

22.  Was  the  musician  contented  with  what  you  gave  him  ?  He  did 
not  appear  to  be  contented. 

28.  How  do  you  like  the  vest  that  my  tailor  made  for  you  ?  Pretty 
(bastante)  well ;  but  I  like  the  work  of  my  own  tailor  better. 

24.  How  is  your  uncle  to-day  ?  The  physician  came  to  see  him  this 
afternoon,  and  he  said  he  was  much  better. 

25.  What  are  those  gentlemen  doing  over  there  ?    Do  you  not  see  thai 

they  arc  resting? 

♦  Dc  nlngun  modo,  al  contrarlo. 


LESSON     XXXIV, 


159 


26.  How  do  you  know  they  are  tired  ?  They  have  been  walking  all 
the  morning. 

2T.  Then  they  are  very  right  {hacer  muy  Men)  to  rest.  Of  course ; 
rest  is  sweet  {grato)  when  one  is  tired  {se  eatd  cansado). 


LESSOK    XXXIV 


IKREGULAR  VERBS. 


Acertar. 

1         To  guess,  to  make  out,  to  hit 

1             the  mark. 

3 

QfDiOATi  VE. — Presen  t. 

Acierto. 

I  guess. 

Aciertaa. 

Thou  guessest. 

Acierta, 

He  guesses. 

Acertamos. 

"We  guess. 

Acertais. 

You  guess. 

Aciertan. 

They  guess. 

IMPEEATIVE. 

Acierta  td. 

Guess  thou. 

Acierte  61. 

Let  him  guess. 

Acertemos  nosotros. 

Let  us  guess, 

Acertad  vosotros. 

Guess. 

Acierten  ellos. 

Let  them  guess. 

euBJUNonvE. — Present. 

Acierte. 

I  may  or  can  guess. 

Aciertes. 

Thou  may  est  or  canst  guess. 

Acierte. 

He  may  or  can  guess. 

Acertemos. 

"We  may  or  can  guess. 

Acerteis. 

You  may  or  can  guess. 

Acierten. 

They  may  or  can  guess. 

Yerls 

conjugated  Wke  aceetae. 

Calentar. 

To  warm,  to  heat. 

Cerrar. 

To  shut,  to  close. 

Confesar. 

To  confess. 

Despertar. 

To  awake,  to  wake. 

Gobernar.     Acercar. 

To  govern.     To  approach. 

160 


LESSON     XXXIV. 


Merendar. 

Negar. 

Pensar. 

Quebrar. 

Sentarse. 


To  lunch. 

To  deny. 

To  think,  to  intend. 

To  break. 

To  sit  down. 


Verbs  that  are  regular,  althougTi  small  changes  are  made  to  preserve  the 
pronunciation  of  the  infinitive. 

To  vanquish,  to  overcome. 


Veneer. 

Eesarcir. 

Pagar. 

Delinquir. 

Escoger. 

Poseer. 

Proveer. 

Hulr. 

Argiiir. 


Fuego. 
Jardinero. 
Motivo. 
Sofl 


Fire. 

Gardener. 
Motive. 
Sofa. 


To  indemnify. 

To  pay. 

To  commit  a  fault,  to  transgress. 

To  choose. 

To  possess. 

To  provide. 

To  flee,  to  fly. 

To  argue. 


A  ver. 

Let  us  see. 

Quiza. 

Perhaps. 

Delincuente. 

Delinquent,  ofi*ender,   transgres- 

sor. 

Inocente. 

Innocent. 

Franco. 

Frank,  open. 

Cualquiera. 

Any,  any  one,  some  one,  what- 

ever, whatsoever. 

Cualquiera  parte. 

Any  place. 

Consecuencia. 

Prudencia. 

Verduras. 

Deuda. 


Consequence, 
conclusion. 
Prudence. 
Vegetables. 
Debt. 


COMPOSITION. 


iLe  gusta  k  V.  calentarse  al  fiiego? 
Si,  Befior,  me  gusta  calentarme  al  fuego 

en  el  invierno  cuando  hace  mucho 

frio. 
I  Qu6  calienta  el  criado  ? 
Est&  calentando  el  caf6. 
i  A  qu6  bora  desperto  V.  ayer  ? 


Do  you  like  to  warm  yourself  at  the  fire  ? 

Yes,  sir,  I  like  to  warm  myself  at  tbe 

fire  in  winter  when  it  is  very  cold. 

What  is  the  servant  warming  ? 

He  is  warming  the  coffee. 

At  what  hour  did  you  awake  yesterday. 


LESSON     XXXIV 


161 


V  I A  ver  si  acierta  V.  ? 
y^  No  86,  quiza  desperto  V.  4  las  cinco. 

Despierto  todas  las  maiianas  a  las  cua- 

tro  y  media. 
^  Cierra  V.  la  puerta  6  la  abre  ? 
He  cerrado  la  puerta  y  abierto  la  ven- 

tana. 
N    6  Es  delincuente  aquel  hombre  ? 
Lo  creo,  porque  huye. 
Niego  la  conseeuencia ;  V.  no  arguye 

bien,  el  puede  ser  inocente  y  huir 

por  prudencia. 

i  Se  proveyo  V.  de  flores  ? 
-Me  prove!  de  fruta  y  mi  hermana  de 

verduras. 
6  Pago  V.  por  ellas  al  jardinero  ? 
-Yo  le  pague  la  fruta  y  mi  hermana  le 

pago  las  verduras. 
I  Piensa  V.  ir  a  Europa  Qste  verano  ? 

/^Deseo  irme  a  alguna  parte,  porque  con- 

fieso  que  tengomucho  miedo  del  colera. 

v<Haymuchos  que  niegan  tener  miedo; 

pero  yo  tengo  el  valor  de  confesarlo 

francamente. 

^  A  que  hora  se  desayuna  V.  ? 

Me  desayuno  a  las  ocho,  meriendo  &  las 

dos  y  como  k  las  seis. 
I  Me  promete  Y.  venir  a  comer  conmi- 
go  hoy  ? 
\  Entre  comer  6  merendar  con  V.  escojo 
el  merendar,  porque  V.  come  dema- 
siado  temprano. 

♦  "Worda  printed  in  italics  do  not 


Let  us  see  if  you  can*  guess  ? 

I  do  not  know ;  perhaps  you  awoke  at 

five  o'clock. 
I   awake  every  morning  at    half-past 

four. 
Are  you  shutting  the  door  or  opening  it  ? 
I  have  shut  the  door  and  opened  the 

window. 
Is  that  man  a  transgressor  ? 
I  think  so,  for  he  flees. 
I  deny  the  conclusion  ;   you  do  not 

argue  correctly  (well)  ;    he  may  be 

innocent  and  flee  (or  fly)  from  pru- 
dence. 
Did  you  provide  yourself  with  flowei-s  ? 
I  provided  myself  with  fruit,  and  my 

sister  with  vegetables. 
Did  you  pay  the  gardener  for  them  ? 
I  paid  him  for  the  fruit,  and  my  sister 

paid  him  for  the  vegetables. 
Do  you  intend  to  go  to  Europe  this 

summer  ? 
I  wish  to  go  somewhere,  for  I  confess 

I  am  very  much  afraid  of  the  cholera. 
There  are  many  who  deny  being  afraid ; 

but  I  have  the  courage  to  confess  it 

freely. 
At  what  hour  do  you  breakfast  ? 
I  breakfast  at  eight,  lunch  at  two,  and 

dine  at  six. 
Will  you  (do  you)  promise  to  come  and 

dine  with  me  to-day  ? 
Between  limching  and  dining  with  you, 

I  choose  lunching,  for  you  dine  too 

early, 
require  to  be  translated  into  Spanish. 


EXPLANATION. 

161.  IRKE^iULAR  Verbs. — All  verbs  that  are  not  conju- 
gated throughout  according  to  the  model  verbs  already  given 
(hablar,  aprender,  escribir),  are  called  irregular. 

162.  It  is,  however,  to  be  observed,  that  although  some 
verbs  undergo  slight  changes  in  their  radical  letters,  they  are 


162  LESSON     XXXIV. 

not  to  be  considered  as  irregular  on  that  account,  inasmuch  as 
those  mutations  take  place  in  order  to  preserve  throughout  the 
whole  conjugation  the  pronunciation  of  the  root  as  sounded  in 
the  infinitive.  This  observation  should  be  carefully  borne  in 
mind,  so  as  not  to  take  for  irregular  verbs  those  which  are 
really  not  so. 

Many  verbs  ending  in  car,  cer,  ciV,  gar,  for  instance,  undergo 
respectively  such  mutations  as  above  alluded  to :  those  in  car 
*^hange  the  c  into  qu  before  e  ;  as, 

Tocar.  I      To  touch. 

To^e  (instead  of  toce).  |      I  touched  ; 

in  those  in  cer  and  c^>,  the  c  is  changed  into  z  before  a  and  o; 

as. 


Veneer. 

Venzo  (instead  of  venco). 

Resarcir. 

Resarzo  (instead  of  resarco). 


To  vanquish. 
I  vanquish. 
To  indemnify. 
I  indemnify ; 


and  lastly,  those  in  gar  take  a  u  after  the  g  and  before  e ;  as, 
Pagar.  |      To  pay. 

Pagw6  (instead  of  pag6).  |      I  paid. 

For  the  same  reason  delinquir  changes  qu  into  c,  before  a 
and  o ;  as,  ddinco,  delinca,  ddincarnos ;  and  escogery  to  choose, 
changes  the  g  into  J  before  a  and  o ;  as,  escojo,  escoja, 

163.  The  verbs  which  terminate  in  eer,  as  creer,  to  believe ; 
leer,  to  read ;  pafeer,  to  possess ;  proveer,  to  provide,  in  those 
terminations  which  contain  an  i,  change  it  into  y  whenever  it 
is  to  be  joined  with  another  vowel ;  as,  crei,  creyd ;  le%  leyeron ; 
posei,  poseyere ;  provei,  proveyeremos,  &c. 

164.  The  same  change  is  made  in  the  verbs  ending  in  uir, 
when  the  w  and  the  i  make  a  part  of  two  diflferent  syllables. 
Thus  huir,  to  fly,  makes,  in  the  third  person  of  the  preterit  defi- 
nite, huyd  ;  argUir,  to  argue,  makes  arguyd,  <fec. 

165.  The  irregular  verbs,  about  ^ue  hundred  and  fifty  in 
number,  may  be  divided  into  seven  classes,  presenting  each  a 
certain  regularity  in  their  irregularity ;  that  is  to  say,  whose 
irregularities  occur  in  the  same  persons  and  tenses,  so  that 
when  the  pupil  has  learned  seven  verbs,  or  one  of  each  of  those 


LESSON     XXXIV.  163 

groups,  he  will  be  able  to  conjugate  almost  all  the  Spanish 
irregular  verbs,  save  a  few  that  confine  their  irregularities  to 
themselves  and  their  compounds,  and  of  which  the  majority 
have  been  already  introduced  in  previous  lessons,  such  as  haber, 
tener,  &c. ;  but  the  learner  can  find  them  all  conjugated  at  the 
end  of  the  book. 

Acertar  may  serve  as  a  model  for  the  conjugation  of  the 
first  of  these  seven  classes  of  irregular  verbs,  just  as  hahlar  does 
for  the  first  conjugation  of  the  regular  verbs.  The  irregularity 
of  acertar^  and  of  all  those  conjugated  like  it,  consists  in  taking 
an  i  before  the  last  e  of  the  root,  in  the  first,  second  and  third 
persons  singular,  and  the  ^^^>c?  person  plural  of  the  present  of  the 
indicative  mood,  in  the  present  of  the  subjunctive,  and  in  the 
imperative.  (See  list  of  the  irregular  verbs  at  the  end  of  the 
book.)  In  all  the  other  tenses  and  moods  those  verbs  are  regu- 
lar, and  the  learner  can  easily  form  them  according  to  their 
respective  conjugations. 

166.  Pagar  may  take  for  its  direct  object  either  the  value 
paid  or  the  thing  paid  for,  while  the  person  paid  is  the  indi- 
rect object.     JPor  may  be  used  before  the  thing  paid  for ;  as, 


Pago  los  caballos,  or  pago  por  los 

caballos. 
Pago  mil  pesos  por  los  caballos. 

Pago  al  comerciante  mil  pesos  jwr 
los  caballos. 


I  pay  for  the  horses. 

I  pay  a  thousand  dollars  for  the 
horses. 

I  pay  the  merchant  a  thousand  dol- 
lars for  the  horses. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  I  Accrtara  Y.  la  casa  de  su  prima  ?    Si,  sefior,  yo  la  acertar6. 

2.  I  Podra  Y.  acertar  qui^n  estuvo  aqui  ayer  ?    No  acierto. 

3.  I  No  entiende  su  hermano  de  Y.  lo  que  le  digo  ?    Si,  sefior ;  pero 
DO  acierta  d  responder. 

4.  I  Se  calienta  Y.  al  faego  ?     Si,  sefior,  porque  hace  mucho  frio. 

5.  ^Porqu6  no  cierra  Y.  entonces  la  pue5*ta?     Confieso  que  no  habia 
pensado  en  ello. 

6.  ^  A  que  hora  despert6  Y.  esta  niafiana?    Despert6  A  las  diez. 

7.  J  El  que  gobierna  una  casa  y  una  familia,  no  debe  levantarse  tem- 
prano?     No  lo  niego. 

8.  ^Pietisa  Y.  merendar  hoy?    Si,  sefior,  nosotros  merendamos  todos 
los  dias. 


164  LESSON      XXXIV. 

9.  ^Porqud  no  se  sienta  V.  en  aquella  silla,  que  es  mejor?    Porquo 
tengo  miedo  de  romperla. 

10.  I  Le  pag6  V.  d  su  criado  ?  Si,  sefior,  le  pagu6  ayer  y  hoy  se  ha  huido. 

11.  jNo  le  perdonara  V.  ?    No,  sefior,  porque  quien  delinquid  una  vez 
delinquira  dos. 

12.  ^Y  no  se  resarci6  de  su  trabjyo?    Si,  sefior,  dntes  sq  provey6  do 
ropa  en  mi  casa. 

13.  ^  Qu6  lenguas  posee  61  ?    El  ingles,  el  frances  y  el  italiauo. 

14.  I  Qui^n  posee  ahora  la  casa  de  campo  de  Y.  ?  El  americano  la  posee. 

15.  ^Se  la  ha  pagado  a  V.  ?    No,  sefior,  no  me  pag6  nada. 

16.  ^Compro  V.  flores  al  jardinero?    Le  compr6  verdnras  y  mi  her- 
mana  le  compr6  flores. 

lY.  ^Le  pagaron  Vds.  al  jardinero  por  ellas?    Yo  le  pagu6  las  verdn- 
ras y  mi  hermana  pag6  por  las  flores. 

18.  ^  A  quidn  le  gustan  mas  las  flores,  4  V.  6  d  su  hermana?     Creo  que 
4  ella  le  gustan  mas  las  flores;  pero  d  mi  me  gusta  mas  la  fruta. 

19.  ^  Qu6  fruta  le  gusta  a  V.  mas  ?    Me  gustan  las  naraiyas  y  las  man- 
zanas. 

20.  ^Paga  V.  siempre  sus  deudas?    Las  page  cuando  tengo  dinero. 

21.  ^Piensa  V.  ir  al  campo  este  verano  ?    Deseo  ir  &  cualquiera  parte, 
porque  confieso  que  tengo  mucho  miedo  del  colera. 

22.  ^  No  tiene  V.  vergiienza  de  confesarlo  ?    Hay  muchos  que  niegan 
tener  miedo ;  pero  yo  tengo  el  valor  de  confesarlo  francamente. 

23.  ^A  qu6  hora  despert6  V.  ayer?     Ayer,  creo  que  despert^  a  laa 
cinco.     Despierto  todos  los  dias  d  las  cuatro  y  media. 

24.  ^  Y  a  qu6  hora  se  desayuna  V.  ?    Me  desayuno  a  las  siete,  meriendo 
d  las  dos  y  como  d  las  seis. 

25.  I  Me  promete  V.  venir  hoy  d  comer  conmigo  ?    No  puedo  prome- 
t6rselo,  porque  no  sd  si  tendrd  tiempo. 

EXCERCISE. 

1.  How  cold  it  is  this  morning!     Yes,  it  is  very  cold. 

2.  Will  you  not  come  and  warm  yourself  at  the  fire  ?    No,  thank 
you ;  I  do  not  like  to  warm  myself  at  the  fire. 

3.  In  that  case  it  is  better  to  shut  the  doors  and  the  windows. 
Perhaps  it  is* 

4.  Do  you  intend  remaining  (estarse)  here  during  the  winter?    If  my 
uncle  remains,  I  will  too. 

5.  Will  you  not  choose  other  rooms  if  you  remain  ?    Yes,  I  intend 
to  do  so. 

*     English  words  prlDtod  in  italica  do  not  reqaire  to  be  translated  Into  Spanish. 


LESSON     XXXIV.  165 

6.  Good  evening,  Charles ;  will  yon  not  sit  down  for  a  few  minutes  ? 
With  pleasure. 

7.  Did  you  find  out  (make  out)  the  musician's  house  yesterday  ?     I 
made  out  the  house  without  much  difficulty,  but  I  did  not  see  him. 

8.  How  was  that  ?    He  must  have  been  out,  for  I  knocked  at  his 
door. 

9.  At  what  hour  do  you  dine?    I  generally  dine  at  six  o'clock. 

10.  Then  you  lunch  at  noon  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  generally  lunch  about  tliat 
hour. 

11.  Do  you  eat  fcuit  every  day  at  dinner?    Not  every  day. 

12.  Did  your  brother  pay  for  the  fruit  he  bought  last  week  ?    No ;  but 
he  has  to  go  out  to-morrow,  and  perhaps  he  will  go  and  pay  for  it. 

13.  Let  us  go  and  take  a  walk.     Where  do  you  wish  to  go  ? 

14.  We  can  go  to  the  Central  Park.     Yery  well,  let  us  go  there ;  I 
think  it  is  the  finest  promenade  in  the  city. 

15.  At  what  time  do  they  open  the  park  in  the  morning?     I  beHeve 
it  is  open  in  summer  at  five  o'clock: 

16.  And  at  what  time  is  it  shut?    At  eleven  o'clock,  I  believe,  or  per- 
haps a  little  later. 

17.  In  that  case  it  will  be  better  not  to  go  there  until  to-morrow ;   it 
is  now  rather  too  late  {algo  tarde). 

18.  How  too  late?    It  is  only  half-past  seven,  so  that  we  have  three 
hours  and  a  half  for  walking. 

19.  Where  are  they  taking  that  man  to  ?      They  are  taking  him  to 
prison  {la  cdrceV). 

20.  What  are  they  taking  him  to  prison  for  ?    He  must  be  guilty  of 
^ome  misdemeanor  (delinquir), 

21.  Has  the  servant  taken  the  letter  to  the  pianist  yet  ?    He  took  it  to 
him  yesterday  afternoon. 

22.  Have  you  seen  the  news  this  morning  ?     No ;  what  news  is  there  ? 

23.  There  was  a  great  fire  last  night  in  Fourth  street,  and  twelve 
houses  were  burned. 

24.  Where  is  Alexander  ?     He  is  up  stairs. 

25.  Have  any  of  you  seen  my  Spanish  dictionary?    Yes,  I  had  it  this 
morning  in  my  room. 

26.  What  were  you  doing  with  it?    I  was  looking  for  a  new  word 
which  I  met  with  *  while  reading  the  history  you  lent  me. 

27.  How  did  you  manage  (aeertar)  to  wake  so  early  this  morning  ? 
My  brother  awoke  me  singing  in  my  room,  at  five  o'clock. 

28.  At  what  time  do  you  generally  wake  ?     If  no  one  comes  to  inter- 
rupt {interrumpir)  my  sleep,  I  never  wake  before  nine. 

*  English  words  in  UaUca  do  not  require  to  be  translated. 


166 


LESSON     XXXV. 


29.  Is  it  not  better  for  the  health  to  rise  early  ?  Certainly;  but  then 
it  is  necessary  to  go  to  bed  early  also. 

30.  "Why  do  you  not  go  to  bed  early  ?  I  am  fond  of  reading  and  study, 
and  so  I  rarely  go  to  bed  before  two  o'clock  in  the  morning  {de  la  mO' 
drugada). 


Acostar. 


LESSON    XXXV. 

IRREGULAR  Y^BB^— Continued, 

I  To  put  in  bed. 


INDICATIVE. 

Acuesto,  acuestas,  acuesta. 
Acostaraos,  acostais,  acuestan. 


■Present. 

1  put  in  bed,  &c. 
We  put  in  bed,  &o 


IMPEEATIVE. 

Acuesta  tti,  acueste  ^1,  acoste-  Put  in  bed,  &c. 

mos  nosotros,  acostad  voso- 
tros,  acxiesten  eUos. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. — Present. 

Acueste^  acuestes^  acueste^  acos-  l  I  may,  or  can,  put  in  bed,  &o» 

temos,  acosteis,  acuesten. 


VERBS   CONJUGATED  LIKE   ACOSTAR. 


Acostarse. 

Aprobar. 

Almorzar. 

Contar. 

Oonsolar. 

Encontrar. 

Mostrar. 

Probar. 

Recordar. 

Reprobar. 

Rogar. 

Sonar. 

Delicioso. 
Espacioso. 
Industrioso. 
Religioso. 


To  go  to  bed,  to  lie  down. 

To  approve. 

To  breakfast. 

To  count ;  to  relate,  or  tell. 

To  console. 

To  meet 

To  show. 

To  prove ;  to  try ;  to  taste. 

To  remind ;  to  remember. 

To  reprove. 

To  entreat 

To  dream. 

Delicious. 
Spacious. 
Industrious. 
Religious. 


LESSOiq- 

XXXV.                                   16? 

Aristocratico. 

Aristocratic. 

Clasico. 

Classic. 

Fanatico. 

Fanatic. 

Monarquico. 

Monarchical. 

Tiranico. 

Tyrannical. 

Tragico. 

Tragic. 

Portico. 

Poetical. 

Analitico. 

Analytical. 

Satii-ico. 

Satirical. 

rilos6fico. 

Philosophical. 

C6mico. 

Comic,  comical. 

Econdmico. 

Economical. 

Lac6iiico. 

Laconic. 

Metodico. 

Methodical. 

Cr6iiico. 

Chronic. 

Yaso.          Tumbler, 

glass. 

Taza.                  Cup. 

Sermon.      Sermon. 

Moral.                Moral. 

Mundo.       World. 

Republica.          Republic. 

Capital  0.     Chapter. 

Independencia.  Independence. 

Perro.         Dog. 

COMPOS 

Religion.            Religion. 
ITION. 

Manuel,  acuestate  temprano  y  levantate 

temprano  tambien. 
Alejandro,  cuentame  lo  que  te  dijo  Luisa. 
>/Ayudate  y  Dies  te  ayudar^. 
Ama  4  tu  projimo  como  a  ti  mismo. 

V  S6  religiose,  pero  no  seas  fanatico. 

V  S6  industrioso  y  economico  y  no  seras 

pobre. 
Sentemonos,  que  estoy  cansado. 
Amaos  como  hermanos  y  no  hableis 

mal  uno  del  otro. 
Entre  Y.,  Dn.  Pedro,  y  tome  V.  asiento, 

or  si6ntese  Y. 
No  puedo,  estoy  de  prisa. 
Juan,  cierra  la  puerta,  pero  no  cierres 

la  ventana. 
Caballeros,  entren  Yds.,  y  les  mostrar^ 

mis  libros. 
Alejandro,  confiesa  tu  falta  y  te  la  per- 

cionar^. 


Emanuel,  go  to  bed  early  and  rise  early 

too. 
Alexander,  tell  me  what  Louisa  told  thee. 
Help  thyself,  and  God  will  help  thee. 
Love  thy  neighbor  as  thyself. 
Be  religious,  but  not  a  fanatic. 
Be  industrious  and  economical  and  thou 

shalt  not  be  poor. 
Let  us  sit  down,  for  I  am  tired. 
Love  each  other  as  brothers,  and  speak 

no  evil  one  of  another. 
Come  in,  Mr.  Peter,  take  a  seat,  or  be 


I  cannot,  I  am  in  a  hurry. 

John,  shut  the  door,  but  do  not  shut 

the  window. 
Come  in,  gentlemen,  and  I  shall  show 

you  my  books. 
Alexander,  confess   your  fault,  and  I 

will  pardon  you. 


168  LESSON     XXXV 


\ 


No  los  ofendamos. 

Amigos,  cantemos  y  bailemos  y  seamos 

felices. 
No  tomaras  en  vano  el  Nombre  del  Se- 

nor  tu  Dios 


Let  us  not  offend  them. 

My  friends,  let  us  sing,  dance  and  be 

merry. 
Thou  shalt  not  take  the  Name  of  the 

Lord  thy  God  in  vain. 


EXPLANATION. 

167.  The  verb  acostar  changes  the  radical  o  into  ue  in  the 
same  tenses  and  persons  as  those  in  which  the  verb  acertar  is 
irregular;  ^.  €.,  in  the  present  indicative,  the  imperative  and  the 
present  subjunctive.  {See  this  verb  and  those  conjugated  like 
it  at  the  end  of  the  hooJc). 

168.  The  imperative  mood  is  not  used  in  the  first  person 

singular  ;  nor  is  it  used  in  Spanish  for  forbidding  ;  that  is,  it  is 

not  employed  in  the  negative  form;  but  the  persons  of  the 

present  subjunctive  are  used  when  a  negative  command  or  a 

prohibition  is  expressed ;  as, 

No  lo  hagas.  )  I  ^  , 

,-r    ,    ,       .    >•  Do  not  do  so. 

No  lo  hagais.  J  | 

169.  As  has  already  been  said,  the  s  of  the  first  person 
plural,  and  the  d  of  the  second,  are  suppressed  before  nos  and 
OS;  as, 

Am^monos.  I  Let  us  love  each  other. 

Amao«.  I  Love  one  another. 

170.  When  the  imperative  is  negative  in  English,  as  the 
subjunctive  is  employed  in  Spanish,  the  objective  pronouns  are 
placed  before  it ;  as, 

No  lo  digas.  I  Do  not  tell  it. 

No  los  ofendamos.  |  Let  us  not  offend  them. 

171.  The  future  of  the  indicative  is  often  used  for  the  im 
perative;  as, 

No  tomaras  en  vano  el  Nombre  I  Thou  shalt  not  take  the  Name  of 

del  Sefior  tu  Dios.  |  the  Lord  thy  God  in  vain. 

172.  Many  adjectives  ending  in  o^is  are  rendered  into 
Spanish  by  changing  tliis  termination  into  oso ;  as, 

Delicioso.  I  Delicious. 

Espacioso.  |         Spacious,  &;c. 


LESsoir    XXXV.  169 

173.  Many  nouns  and  adjectives  ending  in  English  in  ic 
or  ical  have  in  Spanish  the  termination  ico ;  as, 

Fsjiktico,  j  Fanatic,  fanatical 

Foetico.  J  Poetic,  poetical 


CONYERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  Luisa,  estudia  bien  tu  leccion  de  espafiol  y  escribe  los  ejercicios. 

2.  I  Que  me  dara  V.,  papa,  si  la  estudio  bien.  y  no  hago  faltas  en  los 
ejercicios?     Te  Uevare  conmigo   al  Parque  Central 

3.  Papa,  I  no  llevara  Y,  a  Alejandro  y  a  Manuel  con  nosotros  ?  Si 
son  buenos  muchachos  y  estudiosos  los  Uevare  tambien. 

4.  Alejandro,  ven  aca  y  cuentame  que  hiciste  ayer  en  el  campo. — Con 
mucho  gusto.  Por  la  mafiana  me  levants  temprano,  me  lave  y  almorc6  y 
despues  me  fui  a  pasear.     Volvi  muy  cansado  y  me  acost6  k  las  nueve. 

5.  I  Juan !  i  Seiior  ?  Mafiana  me  despertaras  a  las  cinco,  me  limpia- 
rds  las  botas  y  me  traeras  el  caballo  temprano,  porque  quiero  ir  a  ^ar  un 
paseo  y  toraar  un  vaso  de  leche  en  el  hotel  del  Parque  Central, 

6.  Araigo  mio,  no  seas  fanatico,  pero  s^  religioso.  No  seas  satirico 
ni  hablador,  pero  s§  prudente,  econ6mico  6  industrioso  y  seras  feliz. 

7.  Por  Dios,  Don  Pedro,  no  hable  V.  mas,  le  prometod  V,  estudiar  y 
ser  buen  muchacho. 

8.  No  seas  respondon,  haz  tu  deber,  ayiidate  y  Dios  te  ayudani 

9.  Don  Pedro,  a  mi  no  me  gustan  los  sermo.nes  largos,  si^ntese  V.  y 
hablemos  de  otra  cosa. 

10.  Mire  V.,  Dn.  .Juan,  d  aquella  sefiorita  que  est^  en  la  ventana  del 
vecino ;  jla  conoce  V.  ?     Si,  sefior,  la  conoci  en  Filadelfia. 

11.  jQu6  tal  le  gusta  d  V.?  MucMsimQ;  es  una  sefiorita  perfecta,  y 
habla  el  espafiol  tan  bien  como  el  ingles. 

12.  g  Quiere  V.  llevarme  d  su  casa?  Tengo  deseo  de  conocerla. — Con 
mucho  gusto,  pero  antes  neoesito  su  aprobacion. 

13.  gLe  araan  a  V.  muoho  sus  nifios?  Me  aman  y  yo  los  amo;  y  toda 
la  familia  nos  amamos  los  unos  d  los  otros,  asi  es  que  somos  felicisimos. 

14.  ^  Se  aman  Yds.  los  unos  a  los  otros  tanto  como  se  aman  Yds.  mis- 
mos  ?     Oreo  que  si. 

15.  Hable  Y.  alto  y  despacio  si  Y.  gusta  y  ent6nces  entendere  todo  lo 
que  Y.  dice. — Asi  lo  har6 ;  pero  Y.  no  pensara  en  otra  cosa  que  en  lo 
que  yo  digo,  porque  si  no,  no  hablar6  mas, 

16.  ^Le  conviene  a  Y.  comprar  aquella  casa?  No  me  conviene,  por- 
que es  muy  cara  y  estd  muy  16jos  de  la  ciudad. 

17.  ^Qu6  le  parece  a  Y.  del  tiempo?    Hoy  es  el  cuatro  de  Julio  do 

8 


170  LESSON     XXXV. 

1866,  y  por  snpnesto  hace  calor;  pero  hace  nrny  bnen  tiempo  para  la 
celebracioii  de  la  independencia  de  esta  gran  Reptiblica. 

18.  i  Cuantos  alios  hace  hoy  que  los  Estados  Unidos  celebran  sa  inde- 
pendencia ?    Noventa  y  un  afios. 

19.  I  Parece  imposible !  En  m^nos  de  cien  anos  ha  llegado  esta  nacion 
6  ser  una  de  las  potencias  (powers)  mas  grandes  del  mundo. 

20.  Eso  debia  ser  asi,  y  no  dude  V.  que  llegara  un  dia  en  que  la  liber- 
tad  y  la  religion  reinaran  en  el  mundo  haciendo  felices  &  todas  las  na- 
ciones  como  d  otras  tantas  familias  que  tienen  un  mismo  padre. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Did  you  get  up  late  to-day  ?  No ;  I  got  up  at  daybreak  to  go  and 
walk  in  the  country. 

2.  Where  did  you  walk?  I  went  first  to  the  Central  Park,  and  then 
to  Ilarlcm. 

3.  What  is  the  first  thing  we  read  in  Telemachus  ?  We  read  that 
Calypso  could  not  console  herself  for  the  departure  (partida)  of 
Ulysses. 

4.  Where  have  you  been  all  this  time,  sir  ?  it  is  more  than  a  week 
since  you  last  came  to  see  us ;  that  is  not  right  {estar  lien).  I  confess  I 
am  rather  negligent  (negUgente)  sometimes. 

5.  You  have  doubtless  already  gone  to  see  your  old  friend?  Yes, 
and  he  wanted  to  make  me  spend  a  month  with  him  at  his  country  house. 

6.  What  part  of  the  country  does  he  live  in  ?  On  Long  Island,  about 
ten  miles  from  the  city. 

7.  Was  he  not  glad  to  see  you  ?  We  looked  at  each  other  for  about 
ten  minutes  without  being  able  to  say  a  word ;  at  last  {en  fin)  he  broke 
the  silence  {rompio  el  8ilencio\  and  said  to  me :  "  What  1  is  it  you,  my 
dear  friend?    After  seven  years'  absence  (ausencia)  I     How  glad  I  am  I 

8.  Did  he  know  you  as  soon  as  he  saw  you  ?  Yes,  and  I  knew  him, 
though  I  met  him  at  some  distance  from  his  father's  house. 

Q.  Doubtless  he  asked  you  about  your  travels  (voyages)  ?  Of  course. 
"  Where  have  you  been  ?  "  said  he.  "  What  have  you  done  ?  what  have 
you  seen?  are  you  rich?  arc  you  happy?  Tell  me  all  you  have  done 
eince  you  went  away  (me);  all  your  adventures.  I  wish  it;  I  desire  it; 
T  beg  of  you ;  it  will  give  (you  will  do)  me  the  greatest  pleasure.'* 

10.  All  that  proves  his  joy  at  seeing  you.  yes,  I  know  that;  but  how 
many  questions  I 

11.  Did  he  want  an  answer  to  each  one  of  them?  Of  course;  and  I 
answered  them  as  well  as  I  could. 

12.  What  did  you  tell  him?    I  told  him  that  after  having  left  France, 


LESSON     XXXVI.  171 

I  went  to  Spain,  and  from  there  into  Portugal  {Portugal)^  and  tliat  after 
a  few  months  passed  in  Lisbon  {Lishoa)  I  went  on  to  Italy,  where  I  re- 
mained four  years. 

13.  What  are  the  hours  for  breakfast  and  dinner  amongst  the  Italians? 
The  Italians,  like  the  French,  usually  (generally)  breakfast  at  eleven 
o'clock,  and  dine  from  five  to  seven  in  the  evening. 

14.  And  do  they  never  eat  anything  before  the  breakfast  hour  ?  Al- 
most everybody  takes  a  cup  of  coffee  or  chocolate  in  the  morning  soon 
after  rising. 

'  15.  What  kind  of  governments  are  there  in  Europe?  In  Europe  we 
find  almost  every  form  {forma)  of  government,  repubhcan  and  monar- 
chical. 

16.  What  is  that  book  you  have  in  your  hand?  An  analytical  treatise 
{tratado)  of  Spanish  poetry  that  I  was  going  to  show  to  your  cousin. 

17.  Have  you  seen  Boileau's  satirical  poems?  My  uncle  has  promised 
to  bring  me  that  work  from  Paris. 

18.  Are  you  fond  of  reading?  Yes,  I  take  (find)  great  pleasure  in 
reading  books  of  all  kinds,  classical,  poetical,  religious,  analytical,  satiri- 
cal, philosophical,  <Skc. 

19.  Do  you  remember  the  peaches  our  friend  sent  us  from  the  country 
last  year?     Of  course  I  remember  them,  and  that  they  were  delicious. 

20.  Charles,  go  and  take  your  breakfast ;  I  want  to  take  you  to  see 
the  fine  horse  your  uncle  has  bought  for  Alexander. 

21.  Will  you  not  buy  one  for  me,  too,  papa?  If  you  are  a  good  boy 
I  probably  will. 

22.  Do  you  ever  dream?  Very  often;  last  night  I  dreamed  I  was 
travelling. 

V/  23.  Indeed!     Where  were  you  going  to?    I  do  not  remember  now. 

24.  What  was  your  father  saying  to  Peter  when  I  came  in?  He  was 
reproving  hira  for  not  having  written  his  exercise  yesterday. 

25.  Can  you  tell  me  what  day  this  is?  To-day  is  Wednesday,  July 
4th,  of  the  year  1866,  and  the  ninety-first  of  the  Independence  of  the 
United  States. 


LESSON    XXXVI. 


Respetar. 

Parar. 

Mover. 


To  respect. 
To  stop. 
To  move. 


172 


LESSON     XXXVI 


INDICATIVE — Present. 


Muevo,  mueves,  mueve^  move- 
mos,  moveis,  mueven. 


I  move,  &c. 


IMPERATIVE. 


Mueve  td,  mueva  61,  movamos 
nosotros,  moved  vosotros, 
muevan  ellos. 


Move,  &a 


SUBJUNCTIVE— Present. 

Mueva^  muevas,  mueva,  mova-  j         I  may  or  can  move,  &c. 
mos,  movais,  muevan.  \ 

Verba  conjugated  liJce  moves. 


Llover. 

To  rain. 

Morder. 

To  bite. 

Doler. 

To  grieve,  to  ] 

)dn,  to  ache. 

Yolver. 

To  turn,  to  return. 

Antes  que 

Before. 

Aunque. 

Although. 

Como. 

Since,  provided. 

Para  que. 
A  fin  de. 

undo. 

In  order  that. 

in  order  to. 

Todo  el  m 

Everybody. 

Principaln 

lente. 
Antagonist. 

Principally,  chiefly. 

Antagonista. 

Atrocidad. 

Atrocity. 

Artista. 

Artist. 

Capacidad. 

Capacity. 

Materialista. 

Materialist. 

Claridad. 

Clearness, 

Naturalista. 

Naturalist. 

light. 

Organista. 

Organist. 

Crueldad. 

Cruelty. 

Violinista. 

Violinist. 

Dificultad. 

Difficulty. 

Purista. 

Purist. 

Eternidad. 

Eternity. 

Escritorio. 

Office. 

Facilidad. 

Facility. 

Clima. 

Climate. 

Noticias. 

News. 

Dolor. 

Grief,  pain. 

ache. 
COMPO 

Guerra. 
3ITI0N. 

War. 

Sc  dice  que  Maximiliono  ha  partido  de  |  It  is  said  that  Maximilian  has  left  Mex- 
M^jico.  I      ico. 


LESSON     XXXVI. 


173 


J  Se  cree  eso  ? 

Aqui  lo  cree  todo  el  mundo ;  pero  en 

Francia  no  se  cree. 
I  Cree  Y.  que  se  podra  pagar  pronto  la 

deuda  de  los  Estados  Unidos  ? 
No  se  hara  muy  pronto ;  pero  se  hara. 

Aqui  se  habla  espanol. 

Aqui  se  vende  buen  vino. 

Se  perdona  algunas  veces  a  los  delin- 

cuentes,  pero  no  siempre. 
El  hombre  se  engana  a  si  mismo. 
6  Envio  V.  el  violin  al  violinista  ? 

Se  le  envi6. 

I  Tocan  bien  el  piano  en  Espana  ? 

En  Espana  se  toca  bien  la  guitarra. 
-^!^e  habla  bien  el  espanol  en  la  Ameri- 
ca del  Sur  ? 
Lo  hablan  y  pronuncian  bien. 
6  Le  duele  a  V.  la  cabeza  ? 
Si,  senor,  mucho. 
^  Como  se  llama  Y.  ? 
Me  llamo  Juan. 

6  Como  se  llama  eso  en  espanol  ? 
i  Como  se  dice  eso  en  espaiiol  ? 

Lo  mismo  que  en  ingles. 


Do  they  believe  that  ? 

Here  everybody  believes  it ;    but  in 

France  it  is  not  believed. 
\'^s  it  thought  that  the  United  States 

debt  can  soon  be  paid  ? 
It  will  not  be  accomplished  (done)  very 

soon  ;  but  it  will  be  done. 
Spanish  is  spoken  here. 
Good  wine  is  sold  here, 
^transgressors  are  pardoned  sometimes, 

but  not  always. 
Men  deceive  themselves. 
Did  you  send  the  violin  to  the  violin- 
ist? 
I  sent  it  to  him,  or  did  send  it  to  him. 
Do   they  play  well   on   the  piano   in 

Spain  ? 
They  play  the  guitar  well  in  Spain. 
Is  Spanish  well  spoken  (or,  do  they  speak 

good  Spanish)  in  South  America  ? 
They  speak  it  and  pronounce  it  well 
Does  your  head  ache  ? 
Yes,  sir,  very  much. 
What  is  your  name  ? 
My  name  is  John. 
What  is  that  called  in  Spanish  ? 
How  do  you  (or,  do  they)  say  that  In 

Spanish  ? 
The  same  as  in  English. 


EXPLANATION. 

174.  Mover,  to  move,  changes  the  radical  o  into  ue,  in  the 
same  tenses  and  persons  as  the  verb  acostar;  i.  e.,  in  the 
first,  second  and  third  persons  singular,  and  the  third  plural 
of  the  present  indicative,  and  present  subjunctive,  and  in  the 
imperative.  (See  this  verb,  and  those  conjugated  like  it,  at  the 
end  of  the  hook), 

175.  Se  is  the  indefinite  personal  pronoun  of  the  Spanish, 
referring  to  a  personal  agency  in  such  a  manner  as  to  leave  un- 
determined both  the  sex  and  the  number  of  the  persons  repre- 
sented. It  corresponds,  in  this  respect,  with  the  English  we, 
they,  people  or  one ;  in  fact,  with  all  expressions  which  mention 


174  LESSON     XXXVI. 

persons  thus  vaguely  and  indefinitely.     It  is  used  with  the 
third  person    singular  of  the  verb ;  as, 

It  is  said,  or  they  say. 

It  is  believed,  or  tliey  believe. 

They  (people)  will  not  do  it,  or  it 

will  not  be  done. 
Good  wine  is  sold  here. 
Spanish  is  spoken  here. 


/Se  dice. 
Se  cree. 
No  S€  hard. 

Aqui  se  vende  vino  bueno. 
Aqui  se  habla  espanol. 


176.  The  pronoun  se  has  now  been  seen  used  in  the  four  func- 
tions in  which  it  can  be  found ;  it  may  be  well  to  mention  them 
all  again,  in  order  that  these  different  offices  of  the  pronoun  se 
may  be  well  distinguished,  and  to  avoid  all  confusion.  They 
are  the  following : 

1st.  As  an  indefinite  subject,  as  has  been  seen  in  the  pres- 
ent lesson ;  as, 

Se  dice.  |    They  say. 

2d.  To  form  the  passive  voice  of  verbs  (see  Lesson 
XXXII.) ;  as, 

Se  perdona  algunas  veces  k  los  delin-  I      Transgressors    are    sometimes    par- 
cuentes.  |  doned. 

3d.  As  a  reflective  pronoun ;  as, 

Manuel  se  engafia.  1      Emanuel  deceives  himselfl 

4th,  and  lastly,  the  objective  pronoun  se,  for  the  sake  of 
euphony,  takes  the  place  of  the  objectives  le,  la,  lOy  les  (see 
Lesson  XXVIL) ;  as, 

Se  lo  pagard  k  V.  mafiana.  |      I  will  pay  it  to  you  to-morrow. 

177.  Many  nouns  ending  in  English  in  ty,  are  rendered  in 
Spanish  by  changing  these  letters  into  dad\  as, 

Activic?ao?.  I      Activi/|y. 

Capacidad  |      Capaei/y. 

N".  B. — All  nouns  of  this  termination  are  feminine.  Many 
nouns  ending  in  English  in  ist,  are  rendered  into  Spanish  by 
adding  to  these  letters  an  a ;  as, 

Artista.  I      Artist. 

Organista.  |      Organist,  &c. 


LESSOIT     XXXVI.  175 

178.  DoLER. — This  verb  is  used  in  the  same  manner  as  the 
verb  gustar^  to  like  (see  Lesson  XXXI.) ;  as, 
^  Le  duele  a  V.  la  cabeza  ?  |      Does  your  head  ache  ? 

The  same  may  be  expressed  in  the  following  manner : 
I  Tiene  V.  dolor  de  cabeza  ?  |      Have  you  a  headache  ? 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  gSe  vende  bucn  vino  en  Nueva  York?  Se  vende  bueno  y  malo; 
pero  muy  care. 

2.  I  Que  noticias  hay  ?  Se  dice  que  la  Alemania  y  la  Italia  estan  en 
guerra. 

3.  I  Se  cree  eso  ?  No  solamcnte  se  cree,  sine  que  se  sabe  que  la  guer- 
ra ha  principiado  ya. 

4.  I  Se  habla  espaftol  en  Nueva  York  ?  En  Nueva  York  se  hablan 
todas  las  lenguas,  pero  prineipalinente  el  ingles,  el  aleman,  el  frances  y 
el  espaiiol. 

6.  ^Se  aman  los  Franceses  y  los  Ingleses?  Creo  que  no  se  aman 
como  hermanos;  pero  se  respetan. 

6.  I A  quien  se  ama  liias  en  este  pais,  a  los  Franceses  6  a  los  Ingleses  ? 
Es  cosa  que  no  sabre  decir. 

7.  I  En  los  Estados  Unidos  se  respetan  las  iglesias  de  todas  las  religio- 
nes?  Si,  sefior,  porque  hay  libertad  de  religion;  es  una  cosa  muy  bue- 
na  para  el  pais,  y  yo  la  deseo  para  todas  las  naciones  del  mundo. 

8.  Hablemos  de  otra  cosa,  porque  todos  no  son  tan  liberales  como  V. ; 
y  no  se  hara  V.  amigos  si  habla  tan  francamente. 

9.  Convengo  con  V.  en  eso,  aderaas  no  se  debe  decir  todo  lo  que  se 
piensa;  pero  para  aprender  una  lengua  se  debe  practicar  mucho  y  se 
debe  hablar  de  todo  un  poco. 

10.  V.  tiene  razon  en  eso,  y  una  conversacion  en  que  no  se  habla,  sino 
de  "  si  hace  calor  6  frio,  si  ha  estado  V.  en  el  teatro,  en  el  concierto,  6  en 
la  iglesia,  y  de  si  tiene  V.  el  sombrero  y  el  fusil,  y  el  vino,  y  el  dinero  do 
V.  6  del  vecino  "  es  muy  cansada. 

11.  For  supuesto;  pero  V.  debe  saber  que  lo  que  se  llama  en  ingles 
small  talk*  es  muy  de  moda. — Lo  se,  es  muy  de  moda,  y  hasta  necesario 
algunas  veces. 

12.  ^Le  dijo  Y.  eso  a  su  amigo?  No  se  lo  dije,  porque  mi  hermana  se 
lo  habia  dicho  ya. 

13.  I  Porque  no  me  lo  dijo  V.  a  mi  ?  Porque  mi  hermano  me  ha  dicho 
que  se  lo  dira  a  V.  maiiana. 

14.  ^Toca  Dn.  Pedro  bien  el  piano?  No,  seGor,  pero  se  engaGa  a  si 
mismo  y  cree  tocarlo  muy  bien. 

*  C/iarla. 


176  LESSON     XXXVI. 

15.  V6ngase  V.  esta  tarde  por  aqni,  6  ir^mos  d  dar  an  paseo. — Bien, 
si  V.  me  espera  hasta  las  seis,  veiidr6,  pero  no  dntes,  porque  no  puedo 
salir  del  escritorio  hasta  esa  hora. 

16.  ^Qu6  tal  tiempo  ha  hecho  hoy  en  la  ciodad  ?  Hoy  ha  hecho  buen 
tiempo  y  ayer  hizo  buen  tiempo  tarabien  ;  pero  mafiana  hara  mal 
tiempo. 

17.  ^Oomo  sabe  V.  que  hara  mal  tiempo  mafiana?  Porque  en  Nueva 
York  no  hace  nunca  buen  tiempo  por  tres  dias. 

18.  ^V.  cree  que  no  hace  buen  tiempo  mas  que  (sino)  en  la  Habana? 
Perdone  V.  no  me  gusta  el  clima  de  la  Habana  ni  el  de  Nueva  York. 

19.  Ent6nces,  ^qu6  clima  le  gusta  4  V.?  El  de  Espafia,  porque  alii 
tenemos  verdaderamente  las  cuatro  estaciones. 

20.  I  Qu6  quiere  Y.  decir  ?  Quiero  decir  que  en  Espafia  hace  calor  en 
verano  aunque  no  muchisirao ;  en  inviemo  hace  frio,  pero  no  nos  hela- 
mos ;  en  otofio  hace  un  excelente  tiempo  de  otofio,  y  en  la  primavera 
tenemos  primavera. 

21.  ^Bien,  y  no  es  lo  mi^no  en  Nueva  York?  Esciiserae  V. ;  en 
Nueva  York  no  he  conocido  la  primavera ;  hay  muy  pocos  dias  de  otofio, 
an  inviemo  larguisimo  y  un  verano  calurosisimo. 

22.  i  Y  en  la  Habana  ?  Eu  la  Habana  hay  todo  el  afio  el  verano  de 
Nueva  York. 

23.  I  Yo  pensaba  que  d  Y.  no  le  gustaba  hablar  del  tiempo  ?  Y.  no 
n>e  ha  entendido ;  creo  que  debe  hablarse  de  todo,  pero  no  siempre  del 
tiempo. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Why  do  you  not  come  quicker  when  I  call  you?  I  cannot  come 
any  quicker,  my  head  aches. 

2.  Where  do  you  think  Spanish  is  spoken  best?  In  Madrid,  and  in 
all  parts  of  Old  and  New  Castile  {Costilla). 

3.  And  is  it  not  well  spoken  in  South  America?  There  is  some 
difference  in  the  pronunciation;  but,  in  general,  persons  of  education 
speak  correctly,  whether  they  bet  South  Americans  or  Spaniards. 

4.  William,  will  you  be  good  enough  to  take  this  letter  to  the  post- 
office  when  you  are  going  to  take  'your  lesson?  I  shall  take  it  in  the 
afternoon,  I  have  not  time  now. 

5.  Are  there  many  organists  in  the  United  States?'  Yes;  and  in  New 
York,  principally,  there  are  a  great  many  excellent  organists  and  pianists. 

6.  Do  you  like  that  man's  manner  of  speaking?  No,  I  do  not;  ho  is 
too  much  of  a*  purist. 

7.  Is  your  brother  studying  natural  history?     I  cannot  tell  you 

*  Euglibh  words  io  italics  not  to  be  traaslaled  into  SpauLsb.  t  Ya  scan. 


LESSON     XXXVI.  177 

■whether  (si)  he  is  studying  it  or  not;  but  I  know  he  has  just  bought  the 
complete  works  of  Buffon. 

8.  Who  is  Buffon  ?    A  celebrated  French  naturalist. 

9.  What  did  that  man  do  that  was  taken  to  prison  this  morning? 
They  say  he  was  arrested  (arrestar)  for  cruelty  to  animals. 

10.  Will  he  be  punished  for  it?  Of  course;  transgressors  of  that 
kind  are  rarely  let  off  unpunished  (pardoned). 

11.  What  is  the  matter  with  Alexander  ?    A  dog  bit  him  in  the  hand. 

12.  Come  here,  Alexander;  show  me  your  hand.  Is  this  the  one? 
No,  it  is  the  other. 

13.  Does  it  pain  you  much  ?  It  was  very  sore  (pained)  when  I  got 
bitten,  but  now  it  is  less  painful. 

14.  I  have  always  told  you  how  necessary  it  is  to  take  care  with  dogs. 
I  know  that ;  and  I  shaU  do  so  in  future. 

15.  Does  your  new  watch  go  well  ?  Not  very  well ;  it  stops  (itself) 
three  or  four  times  a  day. 

16.  Is  your  son  getting  on  well  in  his  studies?  Pretty  well;  he  has  a 
great  deal  of  capacity,  and  is  fond  of  study. 

17.  Look  here,  Charles.     What  do  you  wish? 

18.  Count  from  one  to  a  thousand  in  Spanish.  Oh!  I  can  do  that 
with  the  greatest  ease. 

19.  Well,  let  us  see  ?  One,  two,  three,  four,  five,  six,  seven,  eight, 
nine,  ten,  eleven,  twelve,  thirteen,  fourteen,  fifteen,  sixteen,  seventeen, 
eighteen,  nineteen,  twenty,  twenty-one,  thirty,  forty,  fifty,  sixty,  seventy, 
eighty,  ninety,  a  hundred,  a  hundred  and  one,  two  hundred,  three  hun- 
dred, four  hundred,  five  hundred,  six  hundred,  seven  hundred,  eight 
hundred,  nine  hundred,  a  thousand. 

20.  How  do  they  write  that  last  word  in  Spanish  ?    I  do  not  remember. 

21.  What  is  that?  you  do  not  remember  1  Did  you  not  learn  in  the 
lesson  on  pronunciation,  at  the  beginning  of  the  grammar,  that  in  Spanish 
every  word  is  written  just  as  it  is  pronounced?  Oh,  yes,  now  I  remember. 

22.  Tell  me,  if  you  please,  Mr.  R.,  is  French  as  easy  to  pronounce  as 
Spanish  ?    They  say  it  is  much  more  difficult,  on  the  contrary. 

23.  But  it  is  not  impossible  to  learn  French  pronunciation  ?  I  did  not 
say  that ;  I  only  said  that  they  say  it  is  more  difficult  than  Spanish  pro- 
nunciation. 

24.  How  do  I  pronounce?  Very  well ;  but,  when  reading  or  speaking, 
take  a  little  more  care  with  the  z. 

25.  Please  to  pronounce  the  name  of  that  letter  again  (to  return  to 
pronounce)?    With  the  greatest  pleasure ;  it  is  called  z. 

26.  What  other  letter  (letra)  is  pronounced  like  (the)  z  f  C^  when  it 
comes  (finds  itself)  before  an  e  or  an  i. 


178 


LESSON     XXXVII. 


LESSON    XXXVII. 


Subir. 
Atender. 


To  go,  or  come  np,  to  ascend. 
To  attend. 


INDICATIVE — Presen  t. 
Atiendo,  atiendeSy  atiendey  aten-  I      I  attend,  &c. 
demos,  atendeis,  atienden,  I 


IMPERATIVE. 


Atiende  td,  atienda  el,  atenda- 
mos  nosotros,  atended  voso- 
tros,  atiendan  ellos. 


Attend,  &c 


SUBJUNCTIVE — Present. 
Atienda,  atiendas,  atienda,  aten-  I      I  may,  or  can,  attend,  &c. 
damos,  atendais,  atiendan.  I 

Verbs  conjugated  like  atendeb. 


A  scender. 

Descender. 

Defender. 

Entender. 

Encender. 

Perder. 

Alegrarse. 

Charlar. 

Hallar. 

Llegar. 

Enviar. 

Preparar. 

Con  tal  que. 

Puesto  que. 

Dado  caso  que. 
Hasta. 

Aun  cuando. 
Por  tanto. 
Por  cuanto. 
A  m6nos  do. 
A  m6nos  qu 


To  ascend,  to  mount. 
To  descend. 
To  defend. 
To  understand. 
To  light,  to  kindle. 
To  lose. 


;.( 


To  be  glad,  to  rejoice. 
To  prattle,  to  chat. 
To  find. 
To  arrive. 
To  send. 
To  prepare. 

CONJUNCTIONS. 

On    condition    that ;     provided 

(that). 
Since,   inasmuch  as ;   supposing 

that. 
In  case. 
Until,  till. 
Even,  although. 
Therefore. 
Seeing  that,  for. 

Unless. 


LESSON 

XXXVII. 

Tambien. 

Also,  too. 

Ademas. 

Moreover,  besides. 

Ya. 

Whether,  either. 

Tampoco. 

Neither. 

Ojala. 

Steamer. 

Would  to  God,  God  grant. 

Vapor. 

Altura.               Height. 

Globo. 

Balloon. 

Friolera.             Trifle. 

Eesfriado. 

Cold. 

Estada,  perma-  Stay,    perma- 
nencia.               nence. 

COMPOSITION. 

179 


Deseo  que  este  estudiando  su  leccion. 

Oreo  que  la  estd  estudiando, 
^  Piensa  Y.  que  tiene  razon  ? 
No  pienso  que  la  tenga. 
%/No  lo  creere  aunque  me  lo  digan  mil. 

Lo  creo  aunque  el  lo  nicga. 
Dudo  que  venga  hoy. 
^  Dudo  que  faaya  venido. 
Dado  caso  que  V.  no  me  encuentre  en 

casa,  esp6reme  Y.  hasta  que  venga. 
Asi  lo  hare  con  tal  que  V.  me  prometa 

volver  pronto. 

\/  Volvere  tan  pronto  como  pueda. 
Temo  que  no  haya  recibido  mi  carta. 
i  Ojala  no  la  reciba  r  pero  yo  temo  que 
la  recibira. 
^A  menos  que  Y.  venga  primero  k  ver- 
me,  yo  no  ire  a  verlo  k  V. 
Puesto  que  61  haya  venido,  ^  le  hablara 

v.? 

Aunque  haya  venido  no  le  hablare  an- 
tes que  el  me  hable. 


^, 


I  wish  that  he  may  be  studying  his 

lesson. 
I  think  he  is  studying  it. 
Do  you  think  he  is  right  ? 
I  do  not  think  he  is. 
I  will  not  believe  it  though  a  thousand 

tell  it  to  me. 
I  believe  it,  although  he  denies  it. 
I  doubt  whether  he  will  come  to-day. 
I  doubt  his  having  come. 
In  case  you  should  not  find  me  at  home, 

wait  for  me  till  I  come. 
I  will  do  so,  on  condition   that  you 

promise  me  to  come  back  soon  (or 

quickly). 
I  shall  return  as  soon  as  I  can. 
I  fear  he  has  not  received  my  letter. 
God  grant  that  he  may  not  receive  it ! 

but  I  fear  he  will  (receive  it). 
Unless  you  come  first  to  see  me,  I  will 

not  go  to  see  you. 
Supposing  that  he  has  come,  will  you 

speak  to  him  ? 
Although  he  may  have  come  I  will  not 

speak  to  him  before  he  speaks  to  me. 


EXPLANATION. 
179,  Atendee,  to  attend,  and  all  the  verbs  conjugated  like 


it,  take  an 


before  the  last  e  of  the  radical  letters,  in  the  same 
tenses  and  persons  as  the  verb  acertar^  and  the  same  tense  in 
which  acostar  and  mover  change  the  o  into  ue ;  i.  e.,  in  the  first, 


180  LESSON     XXXVII. 

second  and  third  persons  singular,  and  third  plural  of  the 
present  indicative,  the  present  subjunctive,  and  the  imperative. 
{See,  at  page  394,  this  verb  and  those  conjugated  like  it.) 

180.  Subjunctive  Mood. — Unlike  the  indicative,  this  mood 
cannot  of  itself  express  an  action  or  mode  of  being  in  such  a 
manner  as  to  form  complete  sense ;  but  its  signification  is  de- 
termined by  another  verb,  to  which  it  is  subordinate,  as  its 
name  indicates,*  and  by  which  it  is  goveraed,  usually  with  the 
help  of  a  conjunction,  such  as  que,  aunque,  or  a  conjunctive  ex- 
pression, such  as  d  Jin  de  que,  con  tal  que,  &c. 

As  none  of  the  moods  of  the  English  verb  correspond  ex- 
actly to  the  Spanish  subjunctive;  and  as  the  tenses  of  the 
latter  are  often  employed  to  express,  in  the  Castilian  language, 
ideas  which,  in  English,  are  conveyed  by  those  of  the  indica- 
tive or  the  potential,  and,  not  unfrequently,  by  the  infinitive, 
learners  experience  much  difficulty  in  determining  when  the 
subjunctive  is  to  be  used.  Were  we  to  give  all  the  rules  neces- 
sary for  the  correct  application  of  this  mood,  a  whole  volume 
might  be  filled  ;  we  shall,  however,  give  here  those  most  likely 
to  guide  the  student  in  all  ordinary  cases. 

181.  The  subordinate  verb  is  put  in  the  subjunctive  when 
the  leading  verb  means  admiration,  wish,  will,  desire,  consent, 
prohibition,  hinderance,  necessity,  command,  doubt,  regret,  joy, 
"Mefulness,  contentment,  hope,  fear,  surprise,  ignorance,  prefer- 
ence, negation,  permission,  sorrow,  &c. 

The  subjunctive  mood  is  here  required  because  we  are  not 
positive  that  what  we  wish,  command,  &c.,  will  be  accom- 
plished ;  but  the  same  verb  which  governs  the  subordinate  one 
in  any  of  the  tenses  of  the  subjunctive,  when  the  accomplish- 
ment of  the  action  is  doubtful,  governs  it  in  any  of  those  of 
the  indicative  when  the  action  is  regarded  as  certain  to  take 
place ;  as, 
D6selo  V.  &  lo8  que )         ,  ^  , 

hat/an  vemuo.        )  -^ 

Ddselo  V.  h  los  ciiatro  )  _, 

X  .,  y  Certain. 

que  nan  venido.        ) 

In  the  first  example,  the  verb  is  put  in  the  subjunctive,  be- 

•  Suhjunctlvc,  sometliJng  joined,  in  a  subordinate  manner,  to  what  has  already  been  said 


Give  it  to  those  who  (may)  have 

come. 
Give  it  to  the  four  who  have  (or  arc) 

come. 


LESSON     XXXVII.  181 

cause  the  speaker  is  not  positive  how  many  have  come,  or 
whether  any  have  as  yet  come.  In  the  second,  the  indicative 
is  employed,  because  the  speaker  is  certain  of  the  arrival  of  the 
persons  alluded  to,  and  also  of  their  number. 

182.  There  are  in  Spanish  certain  conjunctions  which  re- 
quire the  subjunctive  mood  after  them,  on  account  of  the  in- 
detinite  and  uncertain  meaning  which  they  commonly  have. 
Some  of  them,  however,  it  will  be  seen,  occasionally  occur  with 
a  positive  signification,  and  may,  in  that  case,  be  used  with  the 
indicative  after  them ;  as, 

No  lo  creere  aunque  me  )  I  will  not  believe  it  though  a  thou- 

\OorUingent,  sand  tell  it  to  me. 

I  believe  it,  although  he  denies  it  (to 
me). 

183.  Finally,  there  are  other  parts  of  speech,  and  even 
whole  phrases,  which,  on  account  of  their  indeterminate  and 
doubtful,  or  contingent,  meaning,  requii-e  the  subjunctive  after 
them. 

184.  The  present  tense  of  the  subjunctive  marks  a 
contingent  action  as  going  on  at  the  present  moment,  or  to  take 
place  at  some  future  time ;  as, 

Dudo  que  venga.  J      I  doubt  whether  he  will  come. 

N.  B. — Another  use  of  this  tense  has  been  already  noticed 
when  treating  of  the  imperative.     (See  Lesson  XXXY.) 

185.  The  perfect  tense  expresses  a  doubtful  or  contin- 
gent action  or  event,  as  having  been  completed  some  time  past, 
or  that  will  have  taken  place  before  the  completion  of  another 
future  action  or  event ;  as. 


lo  digan  mil. 

Lo  creo  aunque  61  me ) 

^^  ^:^„^  c  Certain, 

lo  mega.  J 


Dudo  que  haya  venido. 
Yo  le  dare  su  libro  cuando  61  me 
haya  dado  el  mio. 


I  doubt  whether  he  has  come. 
I  shall  give  him  his  book  when  h« 
will  have  given  me  mine. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  ^Espera  V.  que  Uegue  hoy  el  vapor  de  Europa?  Creo  que  ha  lle- 
gado  esta  mafiana. 

2.  Yo  dudo  que  haya  llegado  todavia.  i  Quiere  Y.  enviar  su  criado 
i  preguntar  si  ha  llegado  el  vapor  ?  Con  mucho  gusto,  porque  yo  tam- 
bien  deseo  tener  noticias  do  Europa. 

3.  I  Creo  V.  que  Uegara  un  dia  en  que  podamos  ir  a  Europa  en  globos 


182  LESSON     XXXVII. 

aereostaticos  ?  Mucho  mo  alegrare  que  Ueguo  ese  dia,  pero  creo  que  no 
lo  ver6mos  nosotros,  porque  es  muy  dificil,  y  quiza  iuiposible,  el  liallar  la 
direccion  de  los  globos. 

4.  I  Suben  muy  alto  los  globos  ?  No  creo  que  suban  d  mas  de  dos  6 
tres  mil  pi6s,  pero  si  se  quiere  pueden  subir  hasta  la  altura  de  quince  6 
diez  y  seis  mil  pi6s. 

5.  Dado  caso  que  llegue  hoy  el  vapor;  ^espera  Y.  a  su  amigo?  Por 
supuesto  que  si,  puesto  que  me  escribe  que  llegara  en  este  niismo  vapor. 

6.  Ojala  llegue,  pero  temo  mucho  que  haya  tornado  otro  vapor  y  que 
no  llegue  hasta  la  semana  pr6xima. 

7.  ^Duda  V.  que  haya  estudiado  su  leccion  ?  Dudo  que  la  haya  estu- 
diado,  porque  es  muy  holgazan. 

8.  A  m6nos  que  V.  estudie  bien  las  lecciones  y  haga  con  mucho  cui- 
dado  los  ejercicios  de  la  gramdtica,  no  aprendera  Y.  el  espafiol. 

9.  Si,  pero  yo  creia  que  se  podia  aprender  una  lengua  con  la  practica 
solamente. — Asi  es ;  pero  ent6nces  se  necesita  practicar  todos  los  dias 
con  quien  la  hable  muy  bien. 

10.  ^En  cuiinto  tiempo  picnsa  Y.  que  hablar6  yo  el  espafiol?  Y.  lo 
hablara  cuando  sepa  bien  todas  las  lecciones  de  la  gramatica,  y  haya 
practicado  y  escrito  los  ejercicios. 

11.  Y  despues  que  haya  aprendido  toda  la  gramdtica,  practicado,  y 
escrito  los  ejercicios,  ^hablar6  perfectamente  el  espafiol?  No,  scfior; 
pero  hablard  Y.  bastante  correctamente  para  llevar  una  conversacion,  es- 
cribir  una  correspondencia,  y  poder  hacer  negocios  en  esta  lengua. 

12.  Yo  pensaba  que  el  espafiol  era  una  lengua  muy  facil. — Yerdadera- 
mente  lo  es  para  aprender  lo  que  acabo  de  decirlo  d  Y. ;  pero  para  ha- 
blarlo  perfectamente  como  Y.  quiere,  todas  las  lenguas  son  dificilcs. 

13.  Y  si  Y.  no  lo  cree,  hdgame  el  favor  de  decirrae  si  habla  Y.  su  pro- 
pia  lengua  y  la  escribe  perfectamente.— Yo  conlieso  que  todavia  tengo 
algo  que  aprender  en  el  ingl6s. 

14.  Cr6ame  Y.,  amigo  raio,  el  estudio  de  una  lengua  no  es  una  friolera. 
— Creo  que  tiene  Y.  mucha  razon ;  pero  hay  muchos  quo  quieren  aprenderlo 
todo  y  muy  pocos  que  quieran  estudiar. 

15.  ^Mo  promote  Y.  venir  d  verme  cuando  venga  d  la  ciudad?  Aun- 
que  venga  d  la  ciudad  no  podr6  venir  d  vcr  d  Y.  d  ra6nos  que  acabe  tem- 
prano  mis  negocios. 

16.  ^Sabo  Y.  hacer  frases  {sentences)  en  espafiol  con  todos  los  tiempos 
del  modo  indicativo?  Si,  sefior,  y  tambien  con  el  imperativo,  el  presente 
y  el  perfecto  do  subjuntivo. 

17.  Muy  bien,  ent<5noos  hdgame  Y.  ocho  frases  con  los  echo  tiempos 
de  indicativo,  una  con  el  imperativo  y  dos  con  el  presente  y  perfecto  de 
subjuntivo  do  cunlquiera  verbo. 


LESSON     XXXVII.  183 

18.  I  Esta  y.  malo  ?  i  Ha  estado  Y.  hoy  en  el  escritorio  ?  i  Estaba  V. 
en  su  casa  cuando  su  amigo  fue  a  verle  ?  g  Habia  V.  estado  en  el  teatro 
^tes  de  Ir  al  baile  ?  i  Estuvo  V.  ayer  en  la  ciudad  ?  i  Qu6  bizo  V.  asi 
que  bubo  estado  algun  tiempo  en  el  botel  ?  i  Estara  V.  en  casa  mafiana 
todo  el  dia  ?  g  Habra  escrito  Y.  su  ejercicio  antes  de  las  cuatro  ?  Estu- 
dia  tus  leociones  y  escribe  los  ejercicios.  IsTo  pierdas  el  tiempo.  ^Duda 
Y.  que  yo  sepa  mi  leccion  ?     i  Duda  Y.  que  yo  la  baya  estudiado  ? 

EXERCISE.  /v^ 

1.  John,  there  is  some  one  at  the  door;  go  and  see  who  it  is.   Yes,  sir. 

2.  Is  Mr.  Eetortillo  in  ?  Yes,  sir ;  who  shall  I  say  wishes  to  see  him? 
Tell  him  that  Mr.  Perez  wishes  to  speak  to  him  a  moment. 

3.  Mr.  Perez  wishes  to  see  you  a  moment,  sir.    Let  (que)  him  come  up. 

4.  Oh!  I  am  so  glad  to  see  you!  How  are  you?  how  have  you 
been  ?  wljen  did  you  return  ? — I  arrived  by  the  steamer  Na'poleon  III.^ 
on  Wednesday  last. 

5.  Did  you  receive  all  the  letters  I  wrote  you  during  {durante)  my 
absence?     I  received  one  in  March,  dated  from  Eome. 

6.  How  did  you  spend  the  time  ?  did  you  pass  through  Spain,  as  you 
had  intended  ?  No ;  while  I  was  still  in  Paris,  and  preparing  to  set  out 
for  Madrid,  I  learned  that  my  brother  was  very  ill  in  Florence. 

7.  Indeed!  I  am  very  sorry  to  hear  that.  What  was  the  matter 
with  him  Cwhat  had  he)  ?  A  heavy  (strong)  cold,  that  he  had  caught  on 
his  way  from  Turin  to  Florence. 

8.  He  had  not,  I  believe,  enjoyed  very  good  health  for  a  long  time  be- 
fore leaving  home  ?  No,  he  has  always  been  sickly ;  but  principally  for 
about  a  year  before  his  voyage  to  Europe,  he  had  colds  almost  every 
month,  and  I  may  say  that  he  was  never  without  headaches,  day  or 
night. 

9.  Had  he  an  Italian  physician  to  attend  him  ?  No,  Dr.  Perez,  his 
family  physician,  who  was  travelling  through  Italy  that  same  winter,  just 
arrived  at  Florence  the  same  day  as  my  brother,  and,  hearing  of  his  ill- 
ness, went  at  once  {inmediatamente)  to  see  him. 

10.  How  long  was  he  ill  ?     Nearly  three  weeks. 

11.  How  ?  Are  you  going  away  so  soon  ?  Sit  down  and  let  us  chat 
for  half  an  hour  about  your  family.  Thank  you ;  I  cannot  stay  any 
longer  now,  but  I  shall  have  the  pleasure  of  seeing  you  again  to-morrow. 

12.  Where  are  your  brothers  ?  They  are  gone  to  see  the  balloon  that 
is  to  go  up  this  afternoon. 

13.  Indeed  ?  I  thought  the  balloon  was  not  to  go  up  until  Saturday. 
It  was  not  to  have  gone  up  before  Saturday;  but,  on  account  of  the  fine 
weather,  it  is  to  go  up  this  afternoon. 


184  LESSON     XXXVIII. 

14.  Will  many  persons  go  up  in  it  ?  Very  few,  I  think ;  people  in 
general  do  not  like  to  go  to  such  a  height. 

15.  Do  you  understand  all  that  is  said  in  Spanish  ?  I  understand  more 
and  more  every  day ;  but  there  are  still  many  words  and  constructions 
that  I  do  not  know. 

16.  How  long  do  you  think  it  will  be  before  I  can  understand  all,  and 
speak  like  a  native  ?  That  is  a  hard  question  to  answer ;  provided  you 
study  with  attention,  read  a  great  deal,  and  practice  with  Spaniards,  you 
will  soon  understand  and  speak  with  ease ;  but  it  is  difficult  for  a  foreigner 
to  speak  any  language  exactly  like  a  native. 

17.  But  do  you  believe  it  to  be  impossible  ?  No,  I  do  not  say  it  is  im-. 
possible,  but  it  is  very  difficult ;  and,  besides,  I  do  not  think  it  is  neces^ 
sary.  All  that  is  required  (wanted)  is  correctness,  and  to  be  able  to  con- 
verse with  ease. 

18.  Has  John's  servant  lighted  the  fire  ?  Not  yet ;  John  does  not  wish 
it  to  be  lighted  until  he  returns. 

19.  Well,  Charles,  have  you  found  out*  the  meaning  of  the  word  you 
Asked  me  for  yesterday  ?  No,  sir ;  I  have  searched  for  it  in  all  the  dic- 
tionaries, and  it  is  not  to  be  found  in  any  of  them. 

20.  Why  do  you  not  ask  your  teacher  ?  he  can  tell  you  at  once.  Yes, 
I  know  that  very  well ;  but  I  do  not  hke  to  ask  him  so  many  questions : 
every  day  he  comes  I  have  a  new  one  to  ask  him. 

21.  Do  not  stop  at  trifles  of  that  kind ;  your  teacher  is  very  glad  to  be 
able  to  answer  all  questions,  knowing  that  by  that  means  (medio)  you 
will  learn  better  and  more  quickly. 

22.  I  am  very  glad  to  see  you  defend  him,  for  Alexander  said  he  was 
not  fond  of  answering  questions,  and  did  not  like  inquisitive  persons. — • 
Neither  he  does ;  but  an  inquisitive  person  is  one  thing,  and  a  person 
who  asks  questions  in  order  to  gam.  knowledge  is  another. 


LESSON    XXXVIII. 

Sentir.    (Look  for  the  conjugation  I      To  feel,  to  be  sorry  for* 
of  this  verb  at  p.  896).  I 


Arrepentirse. 

Oonsentir, 

Preferir. 


Verba  conjugated  lile  sextir. 

To  repent. 
To  consent. 
To  prefer. 
*  English  words  itcUiclsed  not  to  be  translated. 


LESSON 

SXXVIII. 

185 

A^segurar. 

To  secure,  to 

insure,  to  assure. 

Animar. 

To  animate, 
duce. 

to  encourage,  to  in- 

Desanimar. 

To  dishearten,  to  discourage. 

Ayudar. 

To  aid,  to  help. 

Enfermar, 

To  fall  (or 
sick. 

get)  sick,  to  make 

Exigir. 

To  exact,  to  ] 

require. 

Quedar. 

To  remain. 

Perfeccioiiar. 

To  perfect,  to  finish. 

Usar. 

To  use,  to  wear. 

Generalmentd, 

Generally. 

De  memoria. 

By  heart. 

Ambos. 

Both. 

De  continuo. 

Continually. 

Perezoso. 

Lazy. 

Examen. 

Examination. 

Helena. 

Ellen. 

Oficio. 

Trade,  office. 

Persona. 

Person. 

Alberto. 

Albert. 

Lectura. 

Reading,  lecture. 

Norte. 

North. 

Profesion. 

Profession. 

Sur,  or  sud. 

South. 

Escuela. 

School. 

Este,  oriente. 

East. 

Muerte. 

Death. 

Oeste,         \ 
Occidente.  ) 

West. 

Vida. 

Life. 

Promesa. 

Promise. 

List  of  tTie  present  participles  or  verl 

}al  nouns  and  adjectives  formed  from 

the  verls  alrea 

dy  introduced. 

Viviente. 

Living  being. 

Paseante. 

"Walker,     passer- 

Estiidiante. 

Student. 

by,  promeuader. 

Escribiente. 

A  lawyer's  clerk. 

Creyente. 

Believer. 

a  writer  in  a 

Conveniente. 

Convenient,  suita 

commercial 

ble. 

house. 

Importante. 

Important. 

Eesident. 

Tratante. 

Dealer. 

Tocante  (en  6r- 

Concerning. 

Cortante. 

Sharp,  edged. 

dena). 

Gobernante. 

Governing. 

Eeinante. 

Reigning. 

Contante. 

Ready. 

Saliente. 

Salient. 

Dohente. 

Sad,  afflicted, 

Amante. 

Lover. 

moumfuL 

Practicante. 

Practitioner. 

Principiante. 

Beginner. 

186 


LESSON     XXXVIII. 


COMPOSITION. 


Tocante  &  lo  que  Y.  me  dijo  el  otro  dia, 
deseo  que  no  se  hable  mas  de  ello. 

Entraron  cantando. 

Le  eneontraron  leycndb. 

f,  Qu6  est4  V.  haciendo  ? 

Estoy  leyendo. 

Vengo  de  comer. 

Trabaja  sin  descansar. 

El   trabajar  es    bueno    para    mucha^ 

cosas. 
V  El  descansar   despues   de  trabajar  es 

necesario. 
La  vimos  bailar. 

Emanuel  es  un  estudiante  industrioso. 
I  Es  V.  residente  de  los  Estados  Unidos  ? 
El  es  buen  crejente.  . 


Concerning  what  you  told  me  the  other 
day,  I  wish  no  more  to  be  said 
about  it 

They  came  in  singing. 

They  foimd  him  reading. 

What  are  you  doing  ? 

I  am  reading. 

I  am  coming  from  dinner. 

He  labors  without  resting. 

Work  is  good  for  many  things. 

Rest  after  labor  is  necessary. 

We  saw  her  dancing. 
Emanuel  is  an  industrious  student 
Are  you  a  resident  of  the  United  States  ? 
He  is  a  good  believer. 


EXPLANATION. 

186.  Present  Participles. — Many  Spanish  verbs  have, 
besides  the  past  or  passive  participle,  another  called  the  present 
or  active  participle.  Those  formed  from  verbs  of  the  first  con- 
jugation end  in  ante;  as,  amante,  loving,  lover;  and  those 
formed  from  the  second  and  third  end  in  ie/ite  or  ente ;  as,  asis- 
tente,  assistant,  obediente,  obedient. 

Participles  of  this  kind  cannot  be  formed  from  all  verbs, 
and  indeed  those  already  in  existence  can  only  be  regarded  as 
mere  verbal  nouns  or  adjectives,  inasmuch  as,  with  the  excep- 
tion of  a  very  limited  number  to  be  found  in  use,  such  as  to- 
cante, they  do  not  follow  the  regimen  of  the  verbs  from  which 
they  are  derived. 

187.  Gerunds. — Instead  of  the  present  participle,  ao  a  i>aiu 
of  the  verb,  the  gerund  is  now  employed,  and  it  corresponds, 
therefore,  exactly  to  the  English  progressive  form  in  ing;  as, 

Entraron  cantando.  I      They  came  in  singing. 

Le  eneontraron  leyendo.  |      They  found  him  reading. 


188.  The  verb  estar,  as  has  already  been  mentioned,  can 


LESSON     XXXVIII.  187 

be  used  with  the  gerund  in  Spanish,  as  in  English  the  verb  to 
be,  with  the  present  participle ;  as, 

Yo  estoy  leyendo.  I      I  am  reading. 

EUos  estan  escribiendo.  \      They  are  writing. 

189.  The  iNTiNiTiVE  is  used  in  Spanish  when  in  English 
the  present  participle,  preceded  by  a  preposition,  is  used ;  as^ 

Se  fue  sin  verle.  I      He  went  away  without  seeing  him. 

Trabaja  sin  descansar.  \      He  labors  without  resting. 

190.  The  INFINITIVE  is  also  used  as  a  verbal  noun  or  pres- 
ent participle,  in  which  case  it  takes  the  masculine  definite 
article  before  it ;  as, 

Work  is  good  for  the  health. 
Rest  is  necessary  after  much  work. 


El  trdbajar  es  bueno  para  la  salud. 
El  descansar  despues    de    trabajar 
mucho  es  necesario. 


191.  The  INFINITIVE  is  often  rendered  in  English  by  the 
present  participle,  when  in  Spanish  it  is  governed  by  another 
^     verb;  as. 

La  vimos  hailar.  \      We  saw  her  dancing. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  ^Le  gusta  a  Y.  mas  leer  que  escribir?  Me  gustan  dmbas  cosas, 
pero  creo  que  leyendo  se  aprende  mas  que  escribiendo. 

2.  I  Es  estudioso  ese  muchacho  ?  No,  sefior,  pero  hoy  estudia  mucho 
porque  mafiana  tienen  examenes  en  su  escuela. 

3.  I  Piensa  V.  que  sea  conveniente  ese  negocio  ?  Yo  pienso  que  lo  es, 
pero  quizd  no  lo  sea. 

4.  I  Que  esta  V.  haciendo  ?    Estoy  ostudiando  mi  leccion  de  espaflol. 
6.  I  Sinti6  Helena  mucho  la  muerte  de  su  amiga  ?    La  sintio  tanto  que 

enferm6. 

6.  I  Como  se  siente  ahora?  Esta  un  poco  mejor. — Me  alegro  que  est6 
mejor,  porque  es  muy  buena  muchacha. 

7.  I  Puede  Y.  prestarme  trescientos  pesos  ?  Puedo  prestarselos  d  Y., 
pero  no  me  gusta  el  prestar  dinero  (to  lend). 

8.  I  Como  se  aprende  a  hablar  el  espanol  ?  Hablando  se  aprende  a 
hablar ;  del  misrao  modo  que  bailando  se  aprende  a  bailar  j  haciendo 
zapatos  se  aprende  a  zapatero. 

9.  I  Se  arrepinti6  aquel  hombre  de  su  mala  accion  ?  No  lo  creo  por- 
que es  un  picaro  que  vive  de  engafiar. 

10.  iQue  profesion  li  oficio  tieue?    No  tiene  ni  oficio,  ni  profesion 
ninguna,  es  un  paseante. 


188  LESSON     XXXVIII. 

11.  jDe  donde  viene  V.  ?     Vengo  de  corner. 

12.  ^De  d6iide  viene  el  viento  ?  Viene  del  Sar,  pero  esta  malian^ 
venia  del  Este. 

13.  ^Llueve  en  Nueva  York  cuando  estd  el  viento  al  Este  ?  No,  sefior, 
generalmente  llueve  cuando  el  viento  esta  al  Oeste. 

14.  Alberto,  animate,  se  estudioso  y  aprende  de  memoria  la  leccion 
para  maflana.    Papd,  hace  mucho  calor  y  estoy  cansado. 

15.  Bien,  no  te  desanimes,  descansa  un  poco  y  vuelve  a  trabajar  des- 
pues. — y.  quiere  que  yo  est6  trabajando  continuamente. 

16.  No,  querido,  no  quiero  que  trabajes  demasiado ;  pero  acu^rdate  que 
en  este  mundo  no  se  logra  nada  sin  trab^ar. — Bien,  papa,  yo  86  que  V. 
tiene  siempre  razon,  descansar6  un  poco  ahora  y  despues  acabar6  de  esta- 
diar  mi  leccion. 

17.  ^  Se  qued6  mucho  tiempo  su  amigo  de  V.  en  el  concierto  ?  Ambos 
nos  quedamos  haata  que  se  acab6. 

18.  jTuvieron  Vds.  ayer  examenes  en  la  escuela?  Ayer  tuvimos  ex^ 
men  de  gramatica,  antes  de  ayer  de  liistoria,  hoy  de  espafiol  y  mafiana 
lo  tendr6mos  de  aritm6tica. 

19.  Manuel,  levantate  y  vete  d  la  escuela.  ^No  sabes  qu6  hora  es? 
No,  seller,  yo  pensaba  que  era  temprano. 

20.  I  C6mo,  temprano  ?  Ya  son  las  siete  y  media  y  todavia  tienes  que 
lavarte  y  almorzar ;  i  vamos,  vamos,  perezoso,  arriba ! — Alia  voy  papd^ 
alia  voy ;  y  exctiseme  V.,  no  sabia  que  era  tan  tarde. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Have  you  heard  any  more  concerning  the  matter  we  were  speak- 
ing of  the  other  day?  Nothing  further;  but  I  expect  by  to-morrow  to 
be  able  to  tell  you  something  more. 

2.  When  does  your  friend  intend  setting  out*  on  his  travel  to  the 
South  ?  Probably  by  the  latter  end  (uUimos)  ot  November,  or  beginning 
of  December. 

3.  Is  he  to  be  long  absent  ?  He  knows  nothing  as  yet  of  how  long 
he  may  be  absent  (ausente). 

4.  Concerning  books  to  bo  read  in  order  to  perfect  one's  self  in  a 
language,  what  kind  do  you  think  the  best  ?  There  is  little  dilTerence 
between  books  to  be  used  for  that  purpose  (proposito). 

5.  Are  there  not  some  better  than  all  the  others?  Not  that  I  know 
of:  each  student  will  prefer  those  that  treat  of  the  subject  he  is 
fondest  of. 

6.  But  beginners  cannot  do  so,  for  there  are  many  books  too  difScuU 
for  them;  is  it  not  so?  Certainly;  I  thought  it  needless  to  say  that 
beginners  must  search  for  books  easy  to  bo  read. 

•  Emprender, 


LESSON    XXXVIII.  189 

7.  It  seems  to  me  that  newspaper  reading  is  very  useful ;  what  do 
you  think  ?  Yes,  and  especially  for  those  who  take  pleasure  in  studying 
the  politics  of  the  day. 

8.  Do  you.  think  I  shall  be  able  to  understand  Cervantes'  great  work 
after  I  have  gone  through  {recorrer)  the  whole  of  the  grammar  ?  No 
sir,  you  will  not ;  you  will  have  to  read  and  study  a  great  deal  before 
you  will  be  able  to  understand  thoroughly  the  writings  of  any  of  the; 
Spanish  classic  authors. 

9.  Who  is  that  young  man  we  met  when  walking,  and  to  whom  you 
spoke  ?    He  is  a  lawyer's  clerk. 

10.  Does  he  make  much  money  at  that  occupation?  I  cannot  tell  you; 
but  he  is  undoubtedly  a  man  of  talent  {talento). 

11.  Are  the  children  gone  to  school  yet,  Louisa?  All  but  Henry, 
who  wishes  not  to  go  to-day,  if  you  will  consent  to  it. 

12.  I  am  afraid  he  is  a  very  lazy  boy ;  he  is  continually  asking  not  to 
be  sent  to  school. 

13.  How  can  he  expect  to  learn  if  he  neither  goes  to  school  nor  studies 
at  home  ?  He  wants  to  study  at  home ;  he  says  that  if  you  consent  to 
his  staying  at  home,  he  will  study  anything  you  please. 

14.  WeU,  I  shall  give  him  something  to  learn  by  heart,  and  we  shall 
see  what  he  does. — Very  well ;  but  do  not  give  him  too  much  to  do  at 
the  beginning,  for  he  is  easily  disheartened. 

15.  I  never  require  of  any  one  more  than  he  is  able  to  do. — That  is 
perfectly  right. 

16.  Tell  Charles  and  Albert  that  I  want  to  see  them,  and  that  I  have 
two  books  for  them. — I  need  not  go  to  tell  them ;  here  they  are  coming. 

17.  Come  here,  boys. — Well,  papa,  what  do  you  want  us  for  ? 

18.  To  give  you  these  two  books:  one  for  each.— How  beautiful! 
— Yes,  that  is  true;  but  they  are  something  more  than  beautiful:  they 
are  good. 

19.  What  do  they  treat  of?  This  one  treats  of  man  in  hfe  and  of  all 
living  beings ;  and  that  one  of  man's  state  after  death. 

20.  Now,  I  wish  you  to  read  a  chapter  each  one  in  his  book  every 
day,  after  your  lessons  ;  and  then  you  may  go  out  and  walk  for  an  hour. 
— Thank  you,  sir ;  and  we  can  assure  you  that  we  shall  do  so  with  tha 
greatest  pleasure. 

21.  Tell  me,  Albert,  where  did  you  buy  that  hat  ?  That  is  one  of  those 
hats  that  were  worn  three  summers  ago.  I  know  that  very  well,  for  I 
bought  it  at  the  time  they  were  being  worn,  and  I  have  worn  it  ever 
since. 

22.  This  author  seems  to  have  travelled  a  great  deal ;  have  you  read 
any  of  his  travels?    Yes,  and  I  like  them  exceedingly  (micchisimo). 


190 


LESSON     XXXIX, 


23.  I  am  going  to  read  them,  too,  as  soon  as  I  have  time.  In  what 
countries  did  he  travel  principally  ?  lie  has  been  in  nearly  every  coun- 
try in  the  world,  East,  West,  North  and  South. 

24.  What  is  the  trade  or  profession  of  that  person,  just  gone  out  ?  He 
is  a  physician ;  he  has  been  in  this  city  for  noto  nearly  five  years.  He  is 
an  excellent  practitioner. 


LESSON  XXXIX. 


Pedir.    (Looh  for  the  conjugation  I  To  petition,  to  ask  for. 
of  this  verb  at  p.  Z9Q.)  I 

VerJ}8  conjugated  like  pedib. 


Competir. 

To  contend,  to  compete. 

Elejir. 

To  elect,  to  choose. 

Medir. 

To  measure. 

Renir. 

To  quarrel,  to  scold. 

Seguir. 

To  foUow. 

Rendir. 

To  render ;  to  exhaust,  to  do  out. 

to  wear  out. 

Repetir. 

To  repeat. 

Servir. 

To  serve. 

Tefiir. 

To  dye. 

Vestir. 

To  dress. 

Divertirse. 

To  amuse  one's  self. 

Casarse. 

To  marry ;  to  get  (or  be)  married. 

Besar. 

To  kiss. 

Enamorarse. 

To  fall  in  love. 

Celebrar. 

To  celebrate,  to  praise,  to  be  glad. 

Cenar. 

To  sup. 

Presentar. 

To  present,  to  introduce  one  per- 

son to    the    acquaintance   of 

another. 

Reconocer. 

To  recognize,  to  examine  closely. 

Estimar. 

To  estimate,  to  value,  to  esteem. 

Agradecer, 

To  thank,  to  be  thankful,  to  be 

obliged. 

En  hora  buena. 

It  is  well  well  and  good. 

Asi  asi. 

So  so. 

LESSON 

XXXIX. 

191 

Tal  cual. 

Middling,  so  so. 

Hasta  la  vista. 

Till  I  see  you  again. 

Hasta  luego. 

Good-bye  for  a  while. 

Sin  novedad. 

Well,  in  a  good  state  of  health. 

Medianamente 

Middling. 

I  Ah!  {int.) 

Ah! 

\0h\  {int.) 

Oh! 

-  Respetable. 

Respectable. 

Delicado. 

Delicate,  weak. 

Infiuito. 

Infinite. 

Junto. 

Near,  close  to, 

together. 

Discreto.     Encantador. 

Discreet.     Charming. 

Favor. 

Favor. 

Tertuha. 

Party,  soiree. 

Beso. 

Kiss. 

Novedad. 

Novelty. 

Servidor. 

Servant. 

Celebracion. 

Celebration. 

Pi6. 

Foot. 

Servidora. 

Servant. 

Honor. 

Honor. 

Ocasion. 

Occasion. 

Vestido. 

Dress. 

Coraplacencia. 

Complaisance. 

Esposo. 

Husband. 

Bondad. 

Goodness,    kind- 

Asiento. 

Seat. 

ness. 

Capitulo. 

Chapter. 

Esposa. 

Wife. 

Sobrino. 

Nephew. 

Orden. 

Order,  command. 

Memorias. 

Regards. 

Enhorabuena. 

Congratulation. 

COMPO 

SITION. 

I  Qu6  le  pide  k  V.  ese  hombre  ? 

No  me  pide  nada;  me  pregunta  que 

hora  es. 
Beso  a  V.  la  mano,  caballer©. 


Beso  k  Y.  la  suya. 

6  Como  esta  su  familia  de  V.  ? 

Todos  estan  bien,  gracias ;  ^  y  la  de  V.  ? 

Asi  asi;  los  nines  estan  muy  buenos, 

pero  mi  esposa  no  se  siente  bien. 
A  los  pi6s  de  V.,  senora. 

Beso  k  Y.  la  mano,  caballero. 
A  la  orden  de  V.,  Don  Pedro. 


What  is  that  man  asking  for  ? 

He  is  asking  me  for  nothing ;  he  is  ask- 
ing me  what  o'clock  it  is. 

{A  Spanish  expression  of  courtesy,  used 
at  meeting  or  parting.  No  equivalent 
in  English.) 

{Reply  to  tlie  above.) 

How  is  your  family  ? 

All  are  well,  thank  you  ;  and  yours  ? 

So  so ;  the  children  are  very  well,  but 
my  wife  does  not  feel  well. 

{Spanish  expression  of  courtesy,  tised  to 
ladies.     No  English  equivalent.) 

{77ie  lady\  reply  to  the  above.) 

At  your  service,  Mr.  Pet«r. 


192 


LESSON   XXXIX, 


Vaya  V.  con  Dios,  Don  Juan. 

Buenos  dias,  Doua  Luisa,  ^  como  lo  pasa 

V.  hoy  ? 
Bien,  para  servir  &  V. ;  ij  Y.^ 
Sin  novedad  a  la  disposicion  de  V. 
Sen  or  D.  M.,  tengo  el  honor  de  pre- 

sentarle  al  Sr.  D.  P. 
Caballero,  celebro  la  ocasion  de  conocer 

&  V. 
Tenga  V.  la  bondad  de  darme  el  cu- 

chillo. 
Con  mucho  gusto. 
Mil  gracias. 
Hagame  V.  el  favor  de  decirme,  como 

se  llama  esto  en  espanol. 
Sirvase  V.  tomar  asiento. 
Lo  siento  mucho,  pero  no  puedo,  tengo 

que  marcharme. 
Tenga  V.  la  complacencia  de  ponerme 

&  los  pi6s  de  su  esposa  de  V. 


God  be  with  you,  Mr.  John. 

Good  morning,  Miss  Louisa,  how  do 

you  do  to-day? 
Well,  thank  you  ;  and  you  ? 
I  am  very  well  too,  thank  you. 
Mr.  M.,  I  have  the  honor  to  introduce 

(or  present)  you  to  Mr.  P. 
I  am  happy  to  make  your  acquaintance, 

sir. 
Have  the  goodness  to  give  me  the  knife. 

"With  much  pleasure. 

Thank  you. 

Be  kind  enough  to  tell  me  what  you  call 
this  in  Spanish. 

Please  to  take  a  seat. 

I  am  very  sorry,  but  I  cannot,  I  must 
be  off. 

Eave  the  goodness  to  present  my  re- 
gards to  your  lady  (or  wife). 


EXPLANATION. 

192.  Pedir. — A  paradigm  will  be  found  at  the  end  of  the 

grammar,  showing  the  tenses  and  persons  in  which  this  verb 

and  all  those  conjugated  like  it  change  the  e  of  their  root  into  i. 

193.  The  usual  foems  of  salutations,  among  gentlemen 

in  greeting  each  other,  are  the  following : 

Beso  k  V.  la  mano.  I  kiss  your  hand. 

Servidor  de  V.,  caballero.  Your  servant,  sir. 

A  la  6rden  de  V.  Your  most  obedient. 

Vaya  V.  con  Dios.  Adieu,  or  God  be  with  you. 

Tenga  V.  muy  buenos  dias.  Good  day  to  yoiL 

This  last  expression  is  used  from  the  earliest  part  of  the 
morning  till  two  or  three  hours  after  meridian  ;  from  which 
time  till  dark  is  used, 

Buenas  tardes.  |      Good  afternoon ; 

and  from  dark  until  the  following  morning,  both  on  meeting 
and  taking  leave, 
Buenas  noches.  |      Good  night. 

All  these  expressions  arc  always  used  in  Spanish  in  the 
plural  number. 


LESSON     XXXIX. 


193 


In  saluting  a  lady,  the  first  expression  most  frequently  made 
use  of  is : 

A  los  pies  de  V.,  senora.  |      MaJam,  at  your  feet. 

The  lady's  reply  is  : 
Beso  a  V.  la  mano,  caballero.  j      I  kias  your  hand,  sir. 

To  inquire  after  another's  health  : 
C6mo  lo  pasa  Y.  ?  or  como  est4  V,  ?  j      How  do  you  do  ? 

To  answer : 
Medianamente  bien. 
Perfectamente  bien. 
Para  servir  4  V. 


Muy  bien,  gracias. 

Asl  asf,  or  tal  cual ;  y  V.,  ^  como  lo 


Middling  well. 

Perfectly  well. 

At  your  service. 

Very  well,  thank  you. 

So  so ;  and  how  do  you  do  ? 


Sin  novedad, 

A  la  disposicion  de  V, 

For  introducing  one  person  to 

Senor  Don  M.,  tengo  el  honor  de  pre-  J 
gentarle  al  Senor  Don  P.  | 

And  the  reply  is : 

Caballero,  celebro  la  ocasion  de  cono- 

cer  a  V.,  or 
Reconozcame  V.   por    un    servidor 

suyo. 

For  asking  or  requesting : 

Tenga  Y.  la  bondad  de  darme. 
Hagame  Y.  el  favor  de  decirme. 
Sirvase  Y.,  or  tenga  Y,  la  coinpla- 
cencia  de. 

And  for  returning  thanks  : 
Mil  gracias,  or 
Muchisimas  gracias. 
Se  lo  agradezco  a  Y.  infinito. 


Always  well. 
At  your  service. 

another : 

Mr.  M.,  I  have  the  honor  of  intro- 
ducing Mr.  P.  to  you. 


Sir,  I  am  happy  to  make  your  ac- 
quaintance. 
I  am  entirely  at  your  service. 


Have  the  goodness  to  ^ve  me. 
Do  me  the  favor  to  tell  me. 
Have  the  kindness  to. 


A  thousand  thanks. 

Many  thanks. 

I  am  very  much  obliged  to  you. 


CONYERSATION  AND  YERSION. 

1.  Senor  D.  Juan,  i  qu6  le  pide  d  Y.  mi  muchacho  ?    No  me  pide 
nada ;  me  pregunta  qu6  hora  es. 

2.  Yo  creia  que  le  pedia  k  Y.  dinero,  porque  ^1  estd  siempre  pidiendo 

9 


194  LESSON     XXXIX. 

centavos  d  todo  el  mundo, — Vaya!  no  le  rifia  V. ;  d  todos  los  nifios  les 
gusta  que  les  den  centavos. — Verdad  es,  pero  d  mi  no  me  gusta  que  los 
mios  los  pidan. 

3.  Digame  V.,  D.  Pedro,  i  quien  es  aquella  sefiorita  que  estd  sentada 
en  el  sofa  junto  d  su  esposa  de  V.  ?  Esa  es  una  sefiorita  muy  araable, 
hija  del  Sefior  D.  Luis  Martinez,  familia  muj  respetable  d  quien  conoci 
hace  muchos  afios. 

4.  I  Quiere  V.  hacerme  el  favor  de  presentarme  d  ella  ?  Con  mucho 
gusto;  pero  le  advierto  que  no  se  enamore  de  la  Sefiorita  Martinez,  por- 
que  esta  para  casarse. 

5.  Pierda  V.  cuidado ;  yo  solo  deseo  conocerla  para  gozar  de  sa  dis- 
creta  conversacion. — En  hora  buena  venga  V.  y  lo  presentar6. 

6.  Sefiorita  Martinez,  tengo  el  honor  de  presentar  d  V.  el  Sefior  Don 
Juan  McLeren. — Caballero,  celebro  la  ocasion  de  conocer  d  V. — Sefiorita, 
recon6zcame  V.  por  su  servidor. 

7.  i  All  I  aqui  viene  Don  Alberto  y  su  esposa. — Slrvanse  Vds.  pasar 
adelante. 

8.  J  Oh !  Sefior  Don  Pedro,  me  alegro  mucho  de  encontrar  d  V.  poi 
aca.    Mil  gracias,  sefiora,  soy  muy  feliz  en  volver  d  ver  d  Vds. 

9.  A  los  pi6s  de  Y.,  Sefiorita  Martinez. — Beso  d  V.  la  mano,  caballero. 

10.  Dofla  Margarita,  ^  c6mo  estd  su  familia  de  V.  ?  Todos  estan  bien, 
gracias,  ^  y  la  de  V.  ?  Asi  asi ;  los  nifios  estan  muy  buenos,  pero  mi  esposa 
estd  delicada. 

11.  Sirvase  Y.  tomar  asiento,  D.  Alberto. — Lo  siento  mucho,  pero  d<? 
puedo ;  he  prometido  d  mi  madre  volver  pronto  para  cenar  con  ella. 

12.  Sefioras,  d  los  pi6s  de  Yds.    Beso  d  Yds.  la  mano  caballeros. 

13.  A  la  6rden  de  Y.,  D.  Pedro.    Yaya  Y.  con  Dios,  D.  Juan. 

14.  Tenga  Y.  muy  buenas  noches.  Dona  Luisa,  ^c6rao  lo  pasa  Y.  hoy  ? 
Bien,  para  servir  d  Y.,  J  y  Y.  ?    Sin  novedad,  d  la  disposicion  de  Y. 

15.  Buenas  noches,  D.  Pedro;  hasta  mafiana.  Hasta  mafiana,  p6n- 
game  Y.  d  los  pi6s  de  su  sefiora. 

16.  D6  Y.  memorias  de  mi  parte  d  toda  la  familia. — ^De  su  parte  de  Y. 
lo  estiraardn  mucho. 

17.  Adios,  Manuel,  ^d  d6nde  vas  tan  de  prisa?  Yoy  d  acompafiar  d 
mi  herraana  aJ  teatro,  y  desde  alll  ir6mo9  d  la  tertulia  del,  Sefior  MarracL 

18.  Celcbrar6  que  te  divlertae  mucho.  Yo  tambien  pienso  ir  d  la  ter- 
tulia del  Sefior  Marraci ;  con  que,  asi  no  t«  digo  adios,  ya  nos  ver^mos.^ 
Hasta  la  vista.— Hasta  luego. 

EXERCISE. 
1.  Good  morning,  Charles  I     Are  you  never  going  to  get  np  ?— Why, 
how  late  is  it? 


LESSOlf     XXXIX.  195 

2.  It  is  near  nine  o'clock ;  but  it  is  nothing  new  to  see  you  in  bed  at 
that  hour.  Ah !  you  are  always  making  fun  of  me  for  lying  so  long  in 
the  morning,  and  I  think  I  rise  very  early. 

3.  Up,  then,  and  dress  yourself  as  quickly  as  possible,  I  want  you  to 
come  and  breakfast  with  me. 

4.  Indeed !  What  good  things  are  you  going  to  give  me  ?  You  win 
have  a  first-rate  breakfast,  with  excellent  wine,  followed  by  dehcious 
chocolate. 

5.  Tell  me,  my  dear  fellow :  I  can  never  remember  the  name  of  that 
young  lady  that  I  met  at  your  sister's  party ;  what  is  her  name  ?  Oh, 
no  matter  ;  my  sister  has  invited  *  her  to  dine  this  evening,  and  if  you 
wait  for  dinner  with  us  I  will  introduce  you  to  her. 

6.  Papa,  here  is  my  friend  Mr.  N.,  whom  I  have  the  pleasure  to  pre- 
sent to  you.     I  am  very  happy  to  know  you,  sir. 

7.  Be  kind  enough  to  take  a  seat,  and  excuse  me  an  instant ;  I  shall  be 
back  immediately.     Certainly,  sir. 

8.  How  are  your  old  friends  the  Eetortillos  ?  They  are  very  well, 
thank  you ;  they  are  to  be  here  this  evening,  so  you  can  have  a  chat 
with  them. 

9.  Why  did  you  not  introduce  me  long  ago  to  your  father  ?  I  am 
very  sorry  for  not  having  done  so,  and  my  father  has  often  scolded  me 
for  my  neglect  {negligencid). 

10.  Do  you  expect  your  uncle  to-day  ?  I  do  not ;  but  if  he  comes, 
well  and  good,  we  shall  be  glad  to  see  him. 

11.  Will  you  be  good  enough  to  give  me  that  newspaper  that  is  on  the 
chair  next  the  window  ?    With  the  greatest  pleasure. 

12.  What  news  is  there  this  morning?  I  see  that  a  new  president 
(presidente)  has  been  elected  in  one  of  the  provinces  of  South  America. 

13.  Tliey  might  have  chosen  another  occasion  for  electing  him,  I  think. 
Ah,  of  course ;  they  are  at  war  with  Spain. 

14.  How  much  do  they  ask  for  the  house  that  is  for  sale  in  Fifteenth 
street  ?  Father  was  saying  yesterday  that  they  are  asking  a  very  high 
piice. 

15.  What  do  you  understand  by  a  high  price  ?  More  than  the  house 
is  worth  (valer). 

16.  You  seem  very  much  dissatisfied  at  the  price;  have  you  any  in- 
tention of  buying  the  house  ?    Yes,  unless  it  has  already  been  sold. 

17.  What  news  have  you  from  Boston?  is  Miss  Guevara  married  yet? 
I  have  not  heard  from  the  family  for  a  month  ;  but  I  suppose  she  must 
be  married  by  this  time ;  she  was  to  be  married  in  July. 

18.  Will  you  come  and  take  a  walk  before  dinner  ?  Ah,  you  must  ex- 
cuse me ;  believe  me,  I  am  worn  out  with  fatigue. 

*  Tnmtar. 


196 


LESSON    XL, 


19.  What  is  that  you  said,  Emanuel?    I  have  told  you  once,  and  I 
shall  not  repeat  it. 

20.  Do  you  know  that  young  lady  who  is  sitting  on  the  sofa  beside 
your  niece  ?    Yes ;  I  will  introduce  you  to  her,  if  you  wish. 

21.  When  will  you  introduce  me  ?    Just  now,  on  condition  that  you 
will  not  fall  in  love  with  her. 

22.  Well,  will  you  promise  ?    I  will ;   you  know  I  am  going  to  get 
married,  and  I  only  wish  to  enjoy  her  charming  *  conversation. 

23.  Miss  Yeleta,  allow  me  to  have  the  honor  of  introducing  to  you 
Mr.  Romelio.     How  do  you  do,  sir  ?    I  am  very  happy  to  know  you,  miss. 

24.  Well,  John,  what  do  you  think  of  her?     That  she  is  charming; 
and  I  am  exceedingly  obliged  to  you  for  introducing  me. 

25.  Oh,  Louisa!    come  and  look  at  this  beautiful  dress. — Oh,  how 
beautiful!     How  much  did  it  cost?— Only  a  trifle  of  $120. 

26.  How  much  did  you  pay  for  that  last  coat  of  yours,  Alexander? 
—Only  eighty  dollars. — Not  very  much  at  all  {no  86  me  hace  caro). 


LESSON    XL. 


Conducir.     {See  conjugation  of  this  |  To  conduct,  to  lead,  to  drive, 
'Deri  in  at  p.  898.) 


Producir. 
Traducu-. 
Introducir. 

Verla  conj 

COL 

ugate 

1  nice  OONDUCIB. 

To  produce. 
To  translate. 
To  introduce. 

Obrar. 
Envidiar. 
Olvidar. 
Existir. 

To  act. 
To  envy. 
To  forget. 
To  exist. 

Segun  {prep). 
Siquiera  {oonj.] 
Colectivo. 
Particular. 

LEOXn 

According  to. 
At  least,  even. 
Collective. 
Private,  particular. 

'E  NOUNS. 

Ej^rcito. 

Gentlo. 

RebaQo. 

Army. 
Crowd 
Flock, 

herd. 

* 

Encnr 

Tropa.                  Troop. 
Gente.                  People. 
Multitud.              Multitude 
taclora. 

LESSON     XL. 

Par. 

Pair,  couple. 

Docena. 

Dozen. 

Centenares. 

Himdreds. 

Centena. 

A  hundred. 

Mi  11  ares. 

Thousands. 

Mitad. 

Half. 

El  tercio. 

The  third. 

La  tercera. 

The  third. 

EI  cuarto. 

The  fourth. 

La  cuarta  parte. 

The  fourth,  & 

El  dozavo. 

The  twelfth. 

iinfinidad. 

An  infinity. 

El  floble. 

The  doable. 

Higo. 

Fig. 

Conciencia. 

Conscience. 

Caracter. 

Character. 

Circunstancia. 

Circumstance. 

Habitante. 

Inhabitant. 

IJva. 

Grape. 

Gobierno. 

Government. 

Especie. 

Species,  kind. 

Eecurso. 

Recourse,  resour- 

Naranja. 

Orange. 

ses. 

Castafia. 

Chestnut. 

MoDte. 

Mountain. 

Nuez. 

Nut. 

Bosque, 

Wood  (forest). 

Cuestion. 

Question. 

Rio. 

River. 

Produccion. 

Production. 

Lago. 

Lake. 

Libertad. 

Liberty. 

Nombre. 

iiToun,  name. 

Causa. 

Cause. 

Carnero  merino. 

Meiino  sheep. 

Irlanda. 

Ireland. 

Rincon,  esquina 

Corner. 

COMPOS 

Naturaleza. 
5ITI0N. 

Nature. 

197 


Obro  Begun  su  conciencia. 
Habla  segun  las  circunstancias. 
Lo  cuento  segun  me  lo  han  contado. 
Entro  {or  entraron)  ea  la  ciudad  una 

tropa  de  soldados. 
En  el  ejercito  de  los  Estados  Unidos 

habla  soldados  de  todas  las  naciones_ 
El  tercio  {or  la  tercera  parte)  de  esos 

hombres  no  saben  escribir. 
El  gentio  era  tan  grande  que  no  pudi- 

mos  pasar. 
tin  par  de  caballos  americanos  vale  por 

dos  pares  de  caballos  mejicanos. 


He  acted  according  to  his  conscience. 
He  speaks  according  to  circumstances. 
I  tell  it  as  it  was  told  to  me. 
A  troop  of  soldiers  came  into  the  city. 

In  the  United  States  army  there  were 

soldiers  of  all  nations. 
The  third  of  those  men  do  not  know 

how  to  write. 
The  crowd  was  so  great  that  we  could 

not  pass. 
A  pair  of  American  horses  are  worth 

two  pairs  of  Mexican  horses. 


EXPLANATION. 

194.  CoNDuciR,  to  conduct,  and  the  verbs  conjugated  like 
it,  take  a  z  before  the  radical  c  in  the  terminations  beginning 
with  o  or  a.     They  also  take  the  terminations  Je,^Vs^e,  Jo,  Jemos, 


198  LESSON      XL. 

jisieis^  Jeron,  &c.,  as  may  be  seen  in  the  conjugation  oi  condu' 
cir,  at  the  end  of  the  grammar. 

195.  Segun. — We  class  this  word  among  the  prepositions, 
in  conformity  to  the  general  practice  among  Spanish  gram- 
marians, and  because  it  sometimes  has  the  character  of  such  ;  as, 

Obro  segun  su  conciencia.  I  He  acted  according  to  his  conscience. 

Habla  seffun  las  circunstancias.  )  He  speaks  according  to  circumstances. 

Nevertheless,  in  other  cases  it  is  employed  as  an  adverb ;  as, 
Lo  cuento  aeffun  mc  lo  han  contado.    |  I  tell  it  as  it  was  told  to  me. 

196.  Collective  nouns,  in  the  singular,  generally  agree  with 
verbs  in  the  singular  number ;  but  when  the  collective  noun 
is  taken  in  its  most  extended  sense,  custom  allows  the  verb  to 
be  in  the  plural,  for  in  such  case  the  numbers  concurring  to 
form  the  whole,  rather  than  the  whole  itself,  are  considered ;  as, 

Entr6  {or  entraron)  en  la  ciudad  una  I  A  troop  of  soldiers  came  into  the  city. 
tropa  de  soldados.  j 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  ^Produce  Espafia  buena  fruta?  Espafia  produce  excelente  fruta 
de  todas  espccies. 

2.  ^Cuul  es  la  raejor  fruta  de  Espafia?  No  sabr6  dccir  d  V.,  porque 
toda  es  buena  y  hay  centenares  de  especies,  por  ejemplo :  las  uvas  son  de 
las  mejores  del  mundo ;  los  melocotones  y  los  melones  son  tambien  muy 
buenos,  sin  contar  con  las  naranjas,  los  higos,  las  castafias,  las  nueces  y 
otra  infinidad  de  frutas. 

3.  ^Es  Espafia  un  pais  care  6  barato?  Es  demasiado  barato.  Con 
un  peso  se  puede  vivir  mcjor  en  Espafia  que  en  Nueva  York  con  cuatro. 

4.  I  Bien,  ent6nces  porqu6  se  vino  Y.  d  vivir  en  los  Estados  Unidos  ? 
Esa  es  ya  otra  cuestion.  Espafia  no  tiene  que  envidiar  d  ningun  pais  del 
raundo  en  cuanto  d  su  clima  ni  d  sus  producciones,  ni  mdnos  en  cuanto  al 
caracter  de  sus  habitantes ;  pero  bajo  su  gobierno  no  se  goza  de  la  misma 
libertad  que  se  goza  bajo  el  de  la  Kepublica  do  los  Estados  Unidos. 

6.  jEs  esta  la  causa  por  la  cual  V.  se  vino  d  residir  en  esto  pais? 
Hay  rauchas  otras.  Por  ejemplo,  es  verdad  que  en  Espafia  no  se  conocen 
las  hambres  que  hay  en  Irlanda,  Alemania  y  otros  paises,  y  que,  como 
he  dicho,  se  vive  mejor  alii  con  un  peso  que  aqui  con  cuatro ;  i)cro  tam- 
bien  es  verdad,  que  en  cualquiera  profesion  ii  oficio  es  mas  facil  ganur 
cuatro  pesos  en  los  Estados  Unidos,  que  uno  en  Espafia. 

6.  ^Por  tanto  V.  crco  quo  los  recursos  do  los  Estados  Unidos  son 


LESSON     XL.  199 

mas  grandes  que  los  de  otros  paises  ?  Por  supuesto  qne  si.  Aqui  la 
nacion  es  grande ;  la  libertad  es  grande ;  los  montes,  los  rios,  los  lagos, 
los  bosques  son  grandes ;  la  naturaleza  es  grande ;  todo  es  grande ;  Nue- 
va  York  es  grande  y  los  liombres  mismos  son  tambien  grandes ;  pero  no 
mas  grandes  que  los  Espanoles. 

7.  Hablando  de  e«to,  V.  se  olvida  que  en  este  ejercicio  tiene  Y.  que 
practicar  con  los  nombrcs  colectivos. — V,  tiene  razon,  se  me  habian  olvi- 
dado  los  norabres  colectivos  hablando  de  las  dos  naciones  que  mas  amo 
en  el  mundo. 

8.  En  cuanto  4  los  nombres  colectivos,  su  practica  es  muy  facil  j  todo 
se  reduce  a  decir :  que  en  Nueva  York  hay  multitud  de  gentes  de  dife- 
rentes  naciones,  millares  de  mujeres  y  cosas  buenas  y  centenares  de 
hombres  y  cosas  malas. 

9.  I  Pero  y  qu6  dice  Y.  con  respecto  i  los  rebafios,  ejercitos,  etc.  ? 
Que  en  Espafia  hay  rebafios  de  carneros  merinos  que,  asi  como  sii  ej6r- 
cito,  no  tienen  superiores  en  el  mundo. 

10.  ^  Segun  eso  Y.  cree  que  todo  lo  mejor  existe  en  Espafia  ?  Todo 
no,  puesto  que  mis  nifios  son  Americanos. 

11.  Yamos,  Y.  se  burla. — No,  sefior,  yo  hablo  de  veras  para  practicar 
el  espafiol. 

12.  Y.  habla  segun  las  circunstancias. — No,  sefior,  yo  hablo  segun  mi 
conciencia. 

13.  Acu6rdese  Y.  que  segun  Y.  obre  con  los  demas  asi  obraran  ellos 
con  Y. — Muy  bien  y  asi  como  yo  hable  de  ellos,  asi  hablardn  eUos  de  mi ; 
pero  yo  no  debo  hablar  de  ellos  mejor  que  de  mi  mismo. 

14.  I  Quiere  Y.  pagarme  la  mitad,  el  tercio  6  el  cuarto  de  lo  que  Y. 
me  debe  ?    Ni  lo  uno  ni  lo  otro,  porque  no  tengo  dinero  ahora. 

15.  Deme  Y.  a  lo  m^nos  un  par  de  pesos. — Mafiana  le  dare  4  Y.  una 
docena  de  pesos,  pero  hoy  ni  tan  siquiera  un  centavo. 

16.  A  Dios,  Carlos,  me  canso  de  charlar  y  me  yoy  4  acostar.  Buenas 
noches,  Luis,  no  olvide  Y.  de  pagar  sus  deudas. 

EXCERCISE. 

1.  What  is  the  name  given  to  a  large  number  of  sheep  together? 
It  is  called  a  flock. 

2.  What  were  you  doing  so  long  in  the  street  ?  I  went  to  see  tha 
reason  of  the  great  crowd  at  the  corner  of  the  next  street. 

3.  Well,  what  was  it  ?  I  could  not  see  any  thing ;  but  it  seems  there 
was  a  fire  in  some  of  the  streets  near  here. 

4.  You  seem  to  be  very  much  of  a  Spaniard ;  why  did  you  ever  come 
to  the  United  States?  I  will  not  deny  that  I  like  the  government;  yet 
that  is  not  the  only  reason  I  had  for  coming  here. 


200  LESSON     XL. 

5.  Can  yon  tell  me  some  of  the  others?  Undoubtedly;  although 
living  is  higlier  here  than  there,  business  of  all  kinds  is  better,  and  it  is 
easier  to  make  money  here,  not  only  than  in  Spain,  but  than  any  other 
country  in  Europe. 

6.  I  am  very  glad  you  think  so ;  how  long  have  you  been  here  ?  It 
will  be  four  years  next  September. 

7.  Will  you  be  good  enough  to  tell  me  something  of  your  country  ? 
That  will  give  me  much  pleasure. 

8.  You  talk  so  much  about  Europe  in  general,  and  about  Spain  in 
particular,  that  I  cannot  help  {no  puedo  menos  de)  thinking  you  intend  to 
go  there.  You  are  very  right ;  it  is  very  possible  that  my  brother  and 
I  shall  take  a  trip  (viaje)  to  Spain  next  fall. 

9.  Well,  in  order  to  be  able  to  enjoy  yourselves  as  much  as  possible, 
it  will  be  necessary  for  you  to  know  how  to  speak  the  language  perfectly 
before  starting.     That  we  intend  to  do. 

10.  Do  you  think  all  the  soldiers  in  the  army  are  Americans  ?  Ko, 
nor  even  the  half,  and  perhaps  not  even  the  third. 

11.  How  many  inhabitants  are  there  in  this  city?  I  am  not  able  to 
tell  you  exactly ;  but  there  cannot  be  much  less  than  a  million. 

12.  Which  city  in  the  world  has  the  most  inhabitants  ?  London ;  it 
has  about  three  millions  of  inhabitants. 

13.  Ah !  you  are  jesting ;  or  else  you  are  an  Englishman.  I  am  not 
jesting,  neither  am  I  an  Englishman,  but  a  Frenchman  ;  after  London 
comes  Paris. 

14.  Who  is  that  book  by  ?  This  is  the  celebrated  Don  Quixote  (QuU 
jote\  by  Cervantes. 

15.  In  how  many  pai-ts  is  it  ?  Two,  the  first  containing  {contener) 
some  fifty-two  chapters,  and  the  second  about  eighty-four. 

16.  What  etfect  {efecto)  does  the  reading  of  Don  Quixote  produce  upon 
you  ?  It  makes  me  admire,  and  even  leads  me  to  envy  the  genius  (genio) 
of  its  author. 

17.  Ah  1  I  see ;  you  say  that  to  please  me,  because  you  know  that  I 
too  admire  the  grand  work  of  Cervantes.  Pardon  me,  sir ;  I  never  speak 
according  to  circumstances,  but  always  according  to  my  conscience. 

18.  But,  have  you  forgotten  your  promise  already?  What  promise  is 
that  ?  I  do  not  remember  any. 

19.  No  matter;  I  see  you  have  completely  forgotten  it.  lam  very 
Borry. 

20.  What  are  the  best  fruits  that  Spain  produces?  Spain  produces 
so  many  kinds  of  fruit,  and  so  delicious,  that  it  is  almost  impossible  for 
me  to  tell  tbeui  all :  You  have  excellent  grapes,  melons,  peaches,  apples, 
oranges,  and  an  infinity  of  others. 


LESSON     XLI. 


201 


21.  Have  the  soldiers  that  came  into  the  city  last  night  gone  away 
yet  ?    They  marched  this  morning  at  daybreak. 

22.  How  was  our  old  friend  Harnero  when  you  last  heard  from  him  ? 
He  was  in  Boston,  entirely  without  means,  having  been  deceived  by  a 
bad  man  who  took  the  whole  of  his  money  from  him,  and  from  whom 
he  was  unable  to  recover  (recobrar)  even  the  fourth  part. 


LESSOIS^    XLI. 


Soler. 

Bendecir. 

Oaer. 

Dormir. 

Morir. 

Errar. 

Jugar. 

Oir. 

Oler. 

Contradecir. 

Poner. 

Podrir. 

Reir. 

Yaler. 

Yacer. 


To  be  accustomed  to,  to  do,  or 

be,  usually. 
To  bless. 

To  fall,  to  see  (understand). 
To  sleep. 
To  die. 
To  err. 
To  play. 
To  hear. 
To  smell. 
To  contradict. 
To  put. 
To  rot. 
To  laugh. 
To  be  worth. 
To  lie. 


{Sec  the  conjugation  of  these  verbs  at  the  end  of  the  book.) 


Reposar. 
Premiar. 
Examinar. 

Desde. 
Contra. 
Sobre. 
Tras. 

Pues. 

Helo  aqui. 
Desde  ahora. 

9* 


To  rest,  to  repose. 
To  reward. 
To  examine. 

Since,  from. 
Against,  towards. 
Above,  over,  about. 
After,  behind,  besides. 


I  Well,  then ;  therefore,  &c. 

Here  he  (or  it)  is. 
Henceforward,  from  now,  just 
now. 


202 


LESSON     XLI. 


Desde 

aqui. 

From  here. 

En  efecto. 

Indeed,  in  effect,  in  fact,  really. 

Eterno. 

Eternal 

Afortonado. 

Fortunate. 

Convicto. 

Convicted. 

Desgraciado. 

Uufortunate. 

Infortunio. 

Misfortune. 

Carlota. 

Charlotte. 

Reo. 

Criminal. 

Creacion. 

Creation. 

Grito. 

Cry,  scream. 

Caridad. 

Charity. 

Coche. 

Carriage. 

Prenda. 

Pledge,     quality. 

Vicio. 

Vice. 

accomplishm^^nt. 

Fraile. 

Fraj,  friar. 

Virtud. 

Virtue. 

Diego. 

James. 

Tristeza. 

Grief,  sorrow. 

Verbo. 

Verb. 

Experiencia. 

Experience. 

Principio. 

Beginning,  prin- 
ciple. 

Pagina. 

Page. 

COMPOJ 

BITION. 

i  Suele  V.  levantarse  temprano  ? 

Suelo  levantarme  tarde. 

i  Solia  Y.  ir  a  pasear  k  caballo  el  ano 

pasado  ? 
No,  senor,  solia  pasear  en  coche. 
Plegue  a  Dios  que  tengamos  pronto  lo 

que  deseamos. 
Desde  ahora  prometo  servirle  &  Y.  en  lo 

que  pueda. 
El  hombre  ha  obrado  mal  para  con  Dios 

y  consigo  mismo  desde  la  creacion  del 

mundo. 
Desde  Nueva  York  k  Filadelfia  hay 

ochenta  y  ocho  millas. 
Yo  juego  contra  ti. 
Esta  casa  est^  contra  el  Este. 
La  ciudad  e8t&  sobre  un  monte. 
La  caridad  es  sobre  todas  las  virtudes. 
Yoy  tras  tl 
Sufre  la  pena  pues  lo  quieres. 

Tras  la  primavera  vicne  el  vcrano. 
Tras  sei"  culpado,  ^1  cs  el  que  levanta  el 

grito. 
Leer^  este  libro  pues  Y.  mc  dice  que  es 

bueno. 


Do  you  usually  rise  early  ? 

I  usually  rise  late. 

Used  you  to  ride  on  horseback  last 

year? 
No,  sir,  I  used  to  ride  in  a  carriage. 
God  grant  we  may  soon  have  what  we 

desire. 
From  this  moment  I  promise  to  servo 

you  as  far  as  I  can. 
Man  has  acted  wrong  before  God  and 

to  hunself  since  the  creation  of  the 

world. 
It  is  eighty-eight  miles  from  New  York 

to  Philadelphia. 
I  play  against  you  (thee). 
This  house  faces  the  East. 
The  city  is  built  upon  a  mountain  (or  hill). 
Charity  is  before  all  virtues. 
I  go  after  you  (thee). 
Suffer   the  consequences  (pain),  since 

such  is  your  (thy)  will 
After  spring  comes  summer. 
Notwithstanding  he  is  guilty,  it  is  he 

that  raises  the  cry. 
I  will  read  this  book  since  you  tell  me 

it  is  good. 


LESSON     XLI. 


203 


EXPLANATION. 

197.  Defective  verbs  are  those  which  are  not  employed  in 
all  their  tenses  and  persons.  JPodrir,  to  rot,  placer^  to  please, 
and  yacer^  to  lie,  belong  to  this  class,  and  are  found  used  in  the 
following  tenses  and  persons  : 


Imper .  2d  person  plural. 
Suhjunc.  imp.  Sdj)€rson  sing. 
Injinit.     Present. 
Farticip. 


PODRIR. 

Podrid. 
Podriria. 
Podrir. 
Podrido. 


PLACER. 


Indicat.   Pres.  Zd  person  sing.  Place. 


Imperfect. 
Perfect  ind. 
Subjunc.  Present. 

Imperfect. 
Future  imp. 


Placia. 

Plugo. 

Plegue. 
J  Pluguiera.  j 
I  Pluguiese.  j 

Pluffuiere. 


Rot. 

He  would  rot. 

To  rot. 

Rotten. 

It  pleases. 
It  did  please. 
It  pleased. 
It  may  please. 

It  might  please. 
It  may  please. 


These  persons  of  the  subjunctive  mood  in  this  verb  are  only- 
used  in  the  following  expressions  :  plegue^  or  pluguiera.,  or  plu- 
guiese d  Dios^  would  to  God ;  and  si  me  pluguiere^  if  it  should 
please  me. 

198.  Yacer. — No  part  of  this  verb  is  used  except  the 
third  persons  of  the  present  indicative,  yace  and  yacen,  chiefly 
at  the  beginning  of  epitaphs. 

199.  Soler  is  used  only  in  the  present  and  imperfect  of 
the  indicative  mood.  This  verb  has  the  peculiarity  of  never 
being  employed  except  as  a  determining  verb,  governing  the 
detennined  verb  without  the  aid  of  any  preposition,  and  al- 
ways in  the  present  infinitive  ;  as, 

Suelo  pascar  temprano.  |      I  usually  go  early  to  walk. 

200.  Desde,  from,  points  out  the  beginning  of  time  or 
place ;  as, 

Desde  la  creacion  del  mundo.  I      From  the  creation  of  the  world. 

Besd^  Nueva  York  a  Filadelfia.  |      From  New  York  to  Philadelphia. 

For  this  reason  it  forms  a  part  of  several  adverbial  expres- 
sions which  signify  time  or  place ;  as, 

Desde  ahora,  |      From  this  time. 

Dd^de  aquf.  j      From  hence. 


204  LESSON     XLI. 

201.  CoNTEA  is  used  in  all  cases  as  the  English  against, 

202.  SoBRE,  upon,  above,  &c.,  serves  to  denote  the  superi. 
ority  of  things  with  respect  to  others,  either  by  their  material 
situation  or  by  their  excellence  or  power ;  as, 

La  ciudad  esta  sobre  un  monte.  I      The  city  is  on  a  mountain. 

La  caridad  es  sobre  todas  las  virtudes.  |      Charity  is  above  all  virtues. 

It  has  also  the  signification  of  ademds,  moreover,  or  ademds 

<?e,  besides ;  as, 

JSobre  ser  reo  convicto  quiere  que  le  I      Besides  being  a  convicted  criminal, 
premien.  |  he  wishes  to  be  rewarded. 

It  also  signifies  time ;  as, 
Eablar  sobre  mesa.  )      To  talk  during  dinner. 

Security;  as, 
Prestar  sobre  prendas.  |      To  lend  upon  pledge. 

203.  Teas,  behind,  after,  &c.,  signifies  the  order  in  which 
some  things  follow  others  ;  as, 

Yoy  iras  tf.  I      I  follow  you. 

Tras  la  primavera  viene  el  verano.      |      After  spring  comes  smnmer. 

It  also  signifies  besides ;  as, 
Tras  ser  culpado,  61  es  el  que  levan-  I      Besides  being  guilty,  he  remonstrates, 
ta  el  grito.  | 

204.  The  conjunction  pues,  since,  is  used  to  account  for  a 
proposition  brought  forward ;  as, 

Leer6  este  libro  ptics  V.  me  dice  que  I      I  will  read  this  book  since  you  tell 
es  bueno.  |  me  it  is  good. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  I  Sobro  qu6  quiere  Y.  que  hablemos  hoy  ?  No  s6 ;  de  cualquiera 
cosa,  con  tal  quo  practiqueraos  con  los  verbos  defectivos  y  las  prcposi- 
cioncs  contra,  desde,  sobre  y  tras. 

2.  Que  me  place ;  pero  digamo  Y.,  i  cree  V.  que  tenemos  mucho  que 
practicar  con  el  verbo  yacer  f  No,  seflor,  puesto  que  es  hu  verbo  que 
solo  sirve  para  ponerse  en  los  epitafios. 

3.  Pues  si  Y.  gusta  le  liar6mos  un  epitafio  y  pasar^mos  A  practicar 
con  otro  verbo  que  no  sea  tan  triste. — Soy  do  su  opinion  de  V.,  porque 
no  mo  gustan  las  cosas  tristcs. 


LESSON     XLI.  205 

4.  Helo  aqui : 

"  Aqui  yace  el  verbo  yacer, 
Otra  cosa  no  sabiendo  hacer." 

6.  Ese  epitafio  me  liace  recordar  a  mi  otro,  oigalo  V. : 

"Aqui  Fray  Diego  reposa, 
Y  jamas  hizo  otra  cosa.", 

6.  Hombre,  tenga  Y.  caridad  de  mi  y  no  me  haga  Y.  reir  hablando  de 
epitafios,  que  es  cosa  mas  bien  para  hacer  llorar  que  para  hacer  reir. 
^Suele  Y.  tener  siempre  tan  buen  humor?  No  sierapre;  pero  no  se  gana 
nada  con  estar  triste. 

7.  En  efecto,  mas  vale  estar  alegre  que  triste,  pero  no  siempre  se 
puede  estar  alegre,  i  y  ent6nces  que  bace  Y.  ?  Entonces  mando  a  pasear 
al  mal  bumor. 

8.  Eso  es  mas  facil  de  decir  que  de  bacer ;  i  quiere  Y.  decirme  como 
lo  hace  Y.  ?  Convengo  con  Y. ;  pero  cuando  el  hombre  quiere  verda- 
deramente  una  cosa  la  logra  casi  siempre. 

9.  Plegue  a  Dios  que  yo  logre  estar  siempre  contento  puesto  que  estar 
contento  es  ser  feliz.  g  Que  es  lo  que  Y.  hace  para  estar  siempre  con- 
tento ?  Yo  no  le  be  dicho  a  Y.  que  estoy  siempre  contento,  pero  pro- 
cure estarlo  y  asi  logro  no  estar  triste. 

10.  I  C6mo  lo  hace  Y.  ?  Obro  segun  las  circunstancias.  Examino  la 
causa  de  mi  tristeza  6  mal  humor;  si  es  mi  falta  me  consuelo  porque  creo 
que  Dios  me  castiga  para  que  yo  me  corrija,  y  me  haga  mejor  con  la  ex- 
periencia. 

11.  Bien,  i  y  cuando  Y.  es  inocente  y  le  sucede  un  infortunio?  Ent6n- 
ces  me  consuelo  tambien,  porque  creo  que  todo  lo  que  Dios  nos  envia  es 
para  nuestro  bien. 

12.  Ent6nces  es  Y.  filosofo.     No,  seiior,  mejor  que  eso;  soy  religioso. 

13.  I  Tiene  Y.  miedo  de  la  muerte  ?  No,  sefior,  porque  s6  que  todos 
hemos  de  morir,  y  que  tras  la  muerte  viene  la  vida  eterna. 

14.  I  Cuantos  ninos  tiene  Y.  ?     Cinco ;  dos  niflos  y  tres  nifias. 

15.  I  Como  se  llaman  ?  El  mayor  de  los  nifios  se  Uama  Alejandro  y  e* 
menor  Manuel. 

16.  ^  Y  las  niilas  ?     Las  ninas  son  Luisa,  Carlota  y  Margarita. 

17.  ^  Cuanto  tiempo  hace  que  no  ha  estado  Y.  en  Espaila  ?  Hace  veinte 
afios  que  sali  de  Espafia, 

18.  ^  Y  no  ha  vuelto  Y.  ?    No,  sefiora,  y  creo  que  nunca  volvere. 

19.  jPorqu6?  No  porque  no  lo  haya  deseado,  sino  porque  las  circun- 
stancias no  me  lo  han  permitido. 

20.  Porqu6  habla  Y.  tanto  de  si  misrao  en  sus  conversaciones,  gno 
piensa  Y.  que  eso  puede  cansar  a  sus  oyentes  ?  Asi  es  la  verdad,  sefiora ; 
pero  para  mi  es  la  materia  de  conversacion  mas  interesante  que  puedo 
encjutrar. 


206  LESSON     XL  I, 


EXERCISE. 


1.  James,  do  you  know  where  Charlotte  has  gone  to?  I  saw  her 
going  out,  but  I  do  not  know  where  she  has  gone. 

2.  Can  you  not  help  your  brother  in  his  misfortune  ?  you  know  he  re- 
lies (contar)  upon  your  aid.  I  shall  do  all  in  my  power  to  serve  him ; 
but  you  know  that  is  not  much. 

3.  Margaret,  go  and  call  Charles ;  tell  him  he  has  played  enough,  and 
that  I  want  him  to  attend  to  his  music  lessons.  "Why,  he  has  been  at  his 
lessons  for  the  last  half  hour ! 

4.  Ah  !  that  is  another  thing.     Where  is  he  then  ?     Here  he  is,  here. 

5.  Well,  Charles,  how  are  you  getting  on  with  your  music  ?  Very 
well,  papa ;  but  I  think  Jane  will  have  to  help  me  with  my  Spanish  ex- 
ercise. 

6.  My  dear  boy,  always  do  your  own  exercises,  then  you  will  be  sure 
they  are  well  done.  Oh,  yes,  I  know ;  as  they  say :  "  Help  yourself  and 
Heaven  will  help  you." 

7.  How  beautiful  that  lady  is  1  Yes ;  but,  my  dear  sir,  her  accom- 
plishments are  much  superior  to  her  beauty. 

8.  I  do  not  doubt  it  at  all ;  but  how  do  you  know  that  ?  have  you 
known  her  long?  Long  enough  to  find  out  her  good  qualities,  which,  in 
my  opinion,  are  of  more  value  than  all  the  beauty  in  the  world. 

9.  Have  you  found  time  yet  to  examine  the  books  I  put  on  your  table 
the  other  day?  I  have,  and  the  examination  caused  (produced)  me  a 
great  deal  of  sadness. 

10.  How  so?  From  the  commencement,  page  after  page,  I  found  that 
the  author  has  not  the  least  experience  of  the  world ;  and,  besides,  he 
contradicts  toward  the  end  what  he  has  given  as  a  general  rule  at  the 
beginning  of  his  work. 

11.  I  am  very  much  grieved  (sorry)  that  such  is  your  opinion.  So  am 
I ;  but  you  know  it  is  better  (worth  more)  to  tell  the  truth,  even  though 
it  should  offend  the  author  himself. 

12.  Can  you  read  that  epitaph?  I  believe  it  is  in  English.  Yes;  it 
says :  "  Here  lies  Pedro  Gutierrez." 

13.  Is  that  all  it  says  ?  No,  there  is  a  great  deal  more ;  but  I  cannot 
read  it. 

14.  Ah,  indeed !  I  see ;  you  do  not  read  English  as  well  as  you  thought 
I  do  not ;  and  I  promise  you  that  from  this  moment  I  will  study  it  at* 
tentively  until  I  know  it  thoroughly. 

15.  What  is  that  you  are  smelling?  The  book  that  Charles  has  jus( 
bought. 

16.  What  smell  has  it?    It  smells  like  new  paper. 


LESSON^     XLII, 


207 


17.  "What  was  that  man  rewarded  for  ?  For  having  returned  (devolver) 
five  hundred  dollars,  which  he  found  in  the  park,  to  the  person  that  had 
lost  them. 

18.  I  am  very  glad  that  he  has  been  rewarded ;  but  vii'tue  is  always 
rewarded,  sooner  or  later  (tarde  que  temprano). 


LESSON    XLII. 


Adquirir. 

Asir. 

Caber. 

Cocer. 

Erguir. 

Satisfacer. 

Traer. 


To  acquire. 

To  seize. 

To  contain,  to  hold. 

To  cook. 

To  erect. 

To  satisfy. 

To  bring,  to  carry. 


{See  conjugation  of  these  verbs  at  the  aid.  of  the  book.) 


Conseguir. 

Callar. 

Keprender. 


jOdspita!  {int.). 
jVaya!  {int.). 


To  succeed,  to  get. 

To  be  silent,  to  hold  one's  tongue. 

To  reprehend,  to  chide. 


Divisarr 

To  perceive,  to  descry,  to  espy. 

Fumar. 

To  smoke. 

Establecer. 

To  establish. 

Saber  {imp.  verb). 

{In  the  signification  of)  to  taste, 

or  to  savor. 

Sorprender. 

To  surprise. 

Entrambos. 

Both. 

Solo. 

Alone. 

Ir  a  caballo. 

To  ride  on  horseback. 

Ir  en  coche. 

To  ride  in  a  carriage. 

De  todos  modos. 

At  all  events,  by  all  means. 

De  ningun  modo. 

By  no  means,  not  at  all. 

Manos  a  la  obra. 

To  work  I 

For  mi  parte. 

For  my  part. 

Asi  sea. 

So  be  it,  let  it  be  so. 

"Wonderful !  too  bad ! 

Come,  now !  indeed !  go  away  1 


208 


LESSON     XLII 


CONJUNCTIONS. 


They  are  classified  as  follows  : 

Copulative. 


Que. 
Tarabien. 


O,  ti,ya. 

Sea  que. 
Tarapoco. 


That. 
Also. 


Or,  either, 
whether. 
Whether. 
Neither. 


Ademas. 
Y  orL 

Ni. 


Disjunctive, 

Por  cuanto. 
Para  que. 

Afinde. 


Moreover. 
And. 
Neither,  nor. 


Whereas. 

So  that,  in  ordur 

that. 
In  order  that. 


Adversati'ce, 
Mas,  pero.  But. 

Aun  cuando.         Even. 
Aunque.  Although, 

though. 

Caudal. 
Porque,  que.         Because. 
^Porqu6?  Why? 

Pues,  pues  que.     Since. 
Por.  For. 

Por  tanto.  Therefore. 


Conditional, 
Si.  If. 

Sino.  But. 

Con  tal  que.         Provided. 
Am6nosde.   )     ^^^^^ 
A  m6nos  que.  S 

Continuative, 
Pues,  puesto  que.  Since,    inasmuch 
as. 

Comparative. 
Como,  asi  como.  As. 
Asi.  So. 


Antes  de. 

Before. 

L4J03  de. 

Far  from. 

En  lugar  de. 

Instead  of,  in  place  ofl 

Por  falta  de. 

For  want  of. 

De  miedo  de,     ) 
Por  temor  de.    ) 

For  fear  of. 

Como  qniera  que. 

However. 

Fuera  de  que. 

Besides. 

Al  instante  que,  or 

lucgo  que,  or 

As  soon  as. 

tan  pronto  como. 

De  manera  quo. 

So  that. 

Desde  que. 

Since. 

A-cuerdo. 


Advice,  or  opin- 
ion. 


Marca. 
Fortuna. 


Brand,  mark. 
Fortune. 


LESSOK     XLII 


209 


Dafio. 

Harm,  damage. 

Partida. 

Party,  game,  de- 

Ajedrez. 

Chess. 

parture. 

Cigari'O. 

Cigar. 

Opinion. 

Opinion. 

Cigarrillo. 

Cigarette. 

Pipa. 

Tobacco-pipe, 

Tabaco. 

Tobacco. 

pipe. 

Jaque. 

Check. 

Compania. 

Company. 

Caso. 

Case. 

COMPOSITION. 

Conjunctions  governing  the  subjunctive. 


Dado  que  me  escriba  no  le  respondere. 

Con  tal  que  el  trabaje. 

A  menos  que  me  pague. 

Sea  que  se  vaya  6  que  se  quede. 

Calle  Y.  no  sea  que  nos  oiga. 


Granted  that  he  should  write  me,  I  will 

not  answer  hira. 
Provided  he  works. 
Unless  he  pays  me. 
Whether  he  sets  out  or  remains. 
Be  silent  lest  he  should  hear  us. 


Conjunctions  governing  the  indicative. 


Al  instante  que  recibi  la  carta  le  res- 
pond!. 

De  fiuerte  que  {or  de  modo  que)  no 
pudo  conseguirlo. 

De  manera  que  no  esta  nada  satisfecho. 

I  Qu6  ha  hecho  V.  desde  que  le  he  vis- 
to  a  V.  ? 

Llegue  tan  pronto  como  pude. 

Mientras  que  V.  juega  el  estudia  su  lec- 
eion. 

Yo  reprendo  a  V.  sus  faltas  porque  le 
quiero. 


As  soon  as  I  received  the  letter  I  an- 
swered him. 
So  that  he  could  not  bring  it  about. 

So  that  he  is  not  pleased  at  all. 

What  have  you  been  doing  since  I  saw 

you? 
I  got  here  (or  there)  as  soon  as  I  could. 
While  you  play,  he  studies  his  lesson. 

I  reprove  you  for  your  faults  because  I 
love  you. 


Conjunctions  governing  the  infinitive. 


Yo  trabajo  a  fin  de  ganar  dinero. 
No  le  visitare  antes  de  conocerle. 

Lejos  de  amarle  le  aborrece. 


I  work  in  order  to  earn  money. 
I  shall  not  visit  him  before  makin;^ 

acquaintance. 
Far  from  loving  him,  he  abhors  himu 


his 


EXPLANATION. 


205,  Conjunctions. — The  learner  is  already  acquainted 
with  the  greater  part  of  the  conjunctions ;  but  in  this  lesson 
they  are  again  given,  so  that  he  may  see  how  they  are  classified. 
Besides  the  conjunctions  introduced  in  this  lesson,  there  may 


210  LESSON     XLII. 

be  formed  a  variety  of  expressions  which  answer  the  same  end 
as  conjunctions  ;  as. 

Como  quiera  que,  I      However ; 

Fuera  de  que,  |      Besides ; 

and  a  large  number  of  others. 

206.  It  would  require  too  much  space  to  specify  all  the 
conjunctions  that  govern  verbs  in  a  given  mood  ;  more  is  to  be 
learned  from  the  teacher,  and  by  constant  practice  in  reading 
and  conversation,  than  from  all  the  rules  that  could  be  given. 

207.  The  subjunctive  should  be  used  after  the  following 
conjunctive  expressions  :  Dado  que^  granted  that ;  con  tal  que^ 
provided  that ;  d  meaos  que,  unless ;  no  sea  que,  lest,  for  fear ; 
dntes  que,  sin  que,  sea  que,  &c. ;  as, 


Granted  that  he  should  write  to  me, 

I  shall  not  answer  him. 
Provided  that  he  works. 
Unless  he  pays  me. 


Dado  gtie  me  escriba  no  le  respon- 

der6. 
Con  ted  que  61  trabaje. 
A  menos  que  me  pague. 

208.  Other  expressions  having  de,  instead  of  que,  require 
the  verb  in  the  infinitive  mood ;  such  as,  djin  de,  in  order  to ; 
d  menos  de,  unless,  &c. 

209.  Finally,  other  compound  conjunctions  govern  the 
indicative ;   as,  al  instante  que,  as  soon  as ;   de  manera  que^  so 


that,  &c. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 


1.  Buenos  dias,  Don  Carlos. — T6ngalos  Y.  muy  felices,  Don  Enriqne; 
ol  instante  que  lo  divis6  desdo  la  ventana  lo  reconoci. 

2.  gC6ino  estd  toda  la  familia?     Todos  buenos;  acaban  de  salir. 

3.  I  De  manera  que  estd  V.  solo  ?  Si,  seflor,  en  lugar  de  salir  quiae 
qucdarme  d  espcrar  d  V.  pues  sabia  que  babia  V.  de  venir. 

4.  I  Qui6n  se  lo  dijo  d  V.  ?  A  que  no  acierta  V. — Verdaderamente 
no  s6  qui6n  puede  hab6rselo  dicho  d  V. 

6.  Fu6  Helena,  su  liija  de  Y.,  que  acaba  do  salir  d  pasear  con  mi  csposa 
y  Margarita,  mi  hija. 

6.  Y  nosotros,  jqu6  har^mos?     Lo  quo  Y.  guste. 

7.  Mi  opinion  es  que  juguomos  una  partida  de  jyedroz,  que  fumeraoa 
an  cigarro,  bebamos  un  vaso  de  vino  de  Carifiena,  y  vayamos  despues  d 
Borprendcr  d  las  sefloras  al  parque.  ^Estd  Y.  de  acuordo?  Perfcctlsi- 
mamente. 


LESSON     X  HI.  211 

8.  Pues  bien,  manos  a  la  obra ;  e  juega  V.  mucho  ?  Medianamente ; 
pero  como  no  lo  practico  temo  que  me  gane  V. 

9.  iQu6  hombre!  si  hace  lo  menos  dos  afios  que  no  be  jugado,  fuera 
de  que  jamas  he  sido  muy  fuerte. 

10.  I  Cuales  quiere  V.,  las  negras  6  las  blancas  ?  Cualesquiera,  de  todos 
modos  he  de  perder. 

11.  Jaque  a  la  reina  Don  Enrique. — Pues  creo  que  esta  perdida. — Si, 
sefior,  no  puede  huir — vaya  pues  le  doy  a  Y.  la  partida,  puesto  que  sin 
reina  es  casi  imposible  ganar. 

12.  ^Quiere  V.  que  en  lugar  de  jugar  mas  vayamos  a  ver  las  sefioras? 
Si,  senor,  luego  que  bebamos  del  vino  de  Carinena. 

13.  ;  Hombre,  si,  lo  habia  olvidado!  aqui  esta,  y  aqui  tiene  Y.  tambien 
pipas,  cigaiTos  de  la  Habana,  cigarrillos  de  la  marca  de  la  Honradez  y 
tabaco  de  Yirginia  para  la  pipa;  ^que  prefiere  Y.  ?  Yo  prefiero  los 
cigarrillos. 

14.  A  su  salud  de  Y.,  Don  Carlos. — A  la  de  Y.,  Don  Enrique. — jCas- 
plta!  jqu6  bien  sabe  el  de  Carifienal 

15.  ^Le  gusta  aY.?  iQue  si  me  gusta!  desde  que  vivo  en  Nueva 
York  no  he  probado  vino  mejor. 

16.  Puesto  que  le  gusta  gporqu^  no  repite  Y.  ?  Por  temor  de  que  me 
haga  dafio,  no  suelo  beber  mucho,  y  temo  que  me  ponga  un  poco  alegre. 

17.  Aqui  tiene  Y.  fuego;  gque  tal  le  gustan  a  Y.  esos  cigarrillos? 
Excelentes. 

18.  Seflor;  ^Qu6  quieres  Juan?    Los  caballos  estan  listos. 

19.  I  Qu6 !  ^  Yamos  a  caballo  ?    Si,  senor,  las  senoras  han  ido  en  coche. 

20.  I  Qu6  camino  tomaremos  ?  Ir^mos  por  la  Quinta  avenida,  que  es 
la  calle  mas  hermosa  de  Nueva  York. 

21.  Tenemos  buen  tiempo,  D.  Enrique. — Hermosisimo,  y  con  esto,  buena 
salud,  amigos  fieles,  una  larga  familia  y  una  buena  fortuna,  i  qu6  mas 
podemos  desear  ? 

22.  Tiene  Y.  razon,  Don  Carlos,  por  mi  parte  soy  feliz  y  solo  deseo  que 
Dios  me  de  una  larga  vida  para  ver  4  todos  mis  hijos  bien  establecidos. — 
Asi  sea,  Don  Enrique,  lo  deseo  para  entrambos. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Does  your  brother  never  go  out  on  horseback?  Sometimes;  but 
not  very  often. 

2.  What  can  be  the  reason  of  that  ?  I  thought  he  was  very  fond  of 
horses  and  riding  on  horseback.  So  he  is ;  but  he  does  not  often  take 
exercise  of  that  kind  for  fear  of  falling. 

3.  How  does  he  go  to  the  Central  Park,  in  that  case  ?  Why,  in  a 
carriage  of  course. 


212 


LESSON     XLIII. 


4.  Go  away  !  What  carriage  does  he  go  in  ?  In  his  cousin's,  of  course, 
for  want  of  one  of  his  own. 

5.  Who  will  give  rae  a  cigarette?  No  one  here;  there  is  nobody 
here  that  smokes  any  thing  but  cigars  or  pipes. 

6.  Too  bad !  May  I  ask  why  none  of  you  use  the  cigarette  ?  Cer- 
tainly; and  we  shall  tell  you  with  the  greatest  pleasure:  atone  time 
we  all  smoked  what  you  call  "cigarette,"  but  wliat  we  call  a  "poor 
man's  cigar,"  until  one  day  Henry  came  (you  know  Henry  is  something 
of  a  doctor),  and,  with  his  head  erect,  said  with  a  voice  of  thunder : 
"  What's  this  ?  smoking  cigarettes  ? " 

7.  Well !  what  more  did  he  say  ?  "  Don't  you  know  that  what  you 
are  smoking  there  is  nothing  more  than  paper  ?    You  will  all  be  sick ! " 

8.  What  did  you  do  then  ?  We  were  at  first  surprised ;  but  very 
soon  we  promised  never  to  smoke  such  a  thing  again,  for  it  was  good  for 
nothing,  and  only  tasted  of  paper. 

9.  Be  that  as  you  please ;  for  my  part  I  shall  always  prefer  the  ciga- 
rette to  the  cigar  {tabaco).  Perhaps  you  are  right ;  each  one  has  his 
taste,  and  so  we  shall  say  no  more  about  it. 

10.  What  news  do  you  bring  from  Boston?  Some  good,  and  some 
bad  :  my  cousin  has  been  very  fortunate  in  that  affair  I  spoke  of  to  you; 
but  he  met  last  week  with  an  unfortunate  accident. 

11.  Ah!  how  was  that?  He  was  out  riding  in  company  with  some 
friends,  and  in  returning  home  he  fell  off  his  horse. 

12.  I  am  very  sorry  indeed ;  and  I  hope  he  may  soon  be  able  to  attend 
to  his  business. 

13.  What  do  you  think  of  playing  a  game  of  chess  ?  I  am  ready  to 
play  one,  if  you  wish ;  but  you  will  not  find  my  game  very  good. 

14.  Why  do  you  not  practise  more  than  you  do  ?  I  have  practised 
very  much,  with  a  desire  to  become  perfect  in  the  game,  but  have  act 
been  able  to  succeed. 


LESSON    XLIII 


Advertir. 

Conjugar. 
Desconfiar. 
Cometer. 
Distinguir. 


To  take  notice,   to  observe,   to 

warn. 
To  conjugate. 
To  distrust,  to  mistrust. 
To  commit. 
To  distinguish. 


LESSON 

XLIIT.                                           213 

Formal'. 

To  form,  to  shape. 

Devolver. 

To  return,  to  give  back.      [mind. 

Descuidar. 

To  neglect,  to  be  at  ease  in  one's 

Pertenecer. 

To  belong. 

Molestar. 

To  molest,  to  trouble. 

Eesultar. 

To  result,  to  turn  out. 

{The  learner  ought  by  this  time  to  know  almost  all  the  conjugations,  both  of 
the  regular  and  the  irregular  verbs  ;  should  he  at  any  time  be  at  a  loss  for  some 
part  of  a  verb,  he  may  refer  to  tlie  conjugations  at  the  end  of  the  grammar.) 


Cada. 


I      Every,  each. 


Sin  duda. 

Certainly,  without  doub 

J  Adelante  I 

Go  on !  go  ahead !  come 

En  adelante. 

Henceforth. 

Compuesto. 

Compound. 

Irregular. 

Irregular. 

Oompleto. 

Complete. 

Varios. 

Various,  divers,  several. 

Simple. 

Simple. 

Seguro. 

Secure,  sure. 

Obvio. 

Obvious. 

Lo  demas. 

The  rest. 

■■) 


Conocimiento. 

Jos6. 

Articulo. 

Pronombre. 

Participio. 

Gerundio. 

Adverbio. 

Presente. 

Imperfecto. 

Perfecto. 

Futuro. 

Pluscuamperfecto. 

Infinitivo. 

Indicative. 

Imperative. 

Subjuntivo. 


Bill  of  lading. 

Knowledge. 

Joseph. 

Article,  section. 

Pronoun. 

Participle. 

Gerund. 

Adverb. 

Present. 

Imperfect. 

Perfect. 

Future. 

Pluperfect. 

Infinitive. 

Indicative. 

Imperative. 

Subjunctive. 


Condicion. 

Navidad,  or ) 

Natividad.    ) 

Relacion. 

Duda. 

Yentaja. 

Frase. 

Prontitud. 

Sentencia. 

Conjugacion. 

Verdad. 

Imprudencia. 

Preposicion. 

Conjuncion. 

Interjeccion. 

Paz. 

Molestia. 


Condition. 
Nativity,     Christ- 
mas. 
Relation. 
Doubt. 
Advantage. 
Phrase. 
Promptitude. 
Sentence. 
Conjugation. 
Truth. 
Imprudence. 
Preposition. 
Conjunction. 
Interjection. 
Peace. 
Trouble. 


214 


LESSON     XLIII. 


COMPOSITION. 


Descuide  V. 


^  Cuantos  tiempos  tiene  el  modo  indica- 
tive? 

Ocho :  cuatro  simples  y  cuatro  com- 
puestos. 

Bueno  fuera  {or  seria)  no  descuidarse. 

Conviniera  {or  couvendria)  que  se  hicie- 

sc  la  paz. 
Aunque  dijeras  {or  dijeses)  la  verdad, 

no  te  creeria. 
i  Ojala  cesara  {<yr  cesase)  la  guerra !  asi 

seriamos  mas  felices. 
Pens6  que  estudiarag. 
No  crei  que  estudiase  V. 

Juzgu6  que  estudiaria  V. 
Dije  que  leyeraa. 

Dijo  que  leerias. 

Dijimos  que  leyese. 

Deseaba  que  ganaras  {or  ganascs). 

Quiso  que  te  casaras  {or  casases). 

No  86  si  iria  6  no. 

Si  tuvicra  {or  si  tuviese)  buenoa  libros 

leeria. 
Seria  imprudencia  ir  con  este  tiempo. 
No  quiso  ir. 

Debemos  perdonar  k  nuestros  enemigos. 
V  puede  hablar,  pero  yo  no  lo  puedo. 
I  Si  hubicra  {or  hubieso)  V.  recibido  los 

libros  me  \oi  habria  V.  prestado? 

Si  los  hubiera  {or  hubiose)  recibido  se 
los  habria  prestado ;  pero  no  los  he 
recibido  aun. 

En  lugar  de  veu;  a  vcrme  me  escribio. 

t\  no  jugar&  por  temor  de  perder  su 

dinero. 
I  Quiera  Dios  que  se  oorrija  ! 


Make  yourself  easy  (or  be  at  ease  in 

your  mind). 
How  many  tenses  has  the  indicative 

mood  ? 
Eight :  four  simple  and  four  compound. 

It  would  be  well  not  to  be  off  one's 

guard. 
It  would  be  well  if  peace  were  made. 

Though  thou  wert  to  tell  the  truth,  he 
would  not  believe  thee. 

Would  to  God  the  war  would  come  to 
an  end  !  we  should  then  be  happier. 

I  thought  thou  wouldst  study. 

I  did  not  think  you  would  study  (or 
were  studying). 

I  judged  you  would  study. 

I  said  thou  wert  to  read  (or  woiddst 
read). 

He  said  thou  wouldst  read. 

We  said  he  was  to  read. 

He  wished  thee  to  win. 

He  wished  thee  to  get  married. 

I  do  not  know  whether  he  would  go  or 
not 

Had  I  (or  if  I  had)  good  books  I  would 
read. 

It  were  imprudent  to  go  m  this  weather. 

He  would  not  go. 

We  should  forgive  our  enemies. 

You  can  speak,  but  I  cannot. 

Had  you  received  (or  if  you  had  re- 
ceived) the  books  would  you  have 
lent  them  to  me  ? 

If  I  had  received  them  I  woiild  have 
lent  them  to  you ;  but  I  have  not  re- 
ceived them  yet. 

Instead  of  coming  to  see  me,  he  wrote 
to  me. 

He  will  not  play,  for  fear  of  losing  his 
money. 

God  grant  that  he  may  change  I 


LESSON     XLIII, 


215 


I  Asi  sea !     Lo  dcseo  para  entrambos. 
Bebo  a  la  salud  de  V.,  Don  Enrique. 
A  la  de  V.,  Don  Carlos. 
Senores,  manos  a  la  obra,  no  sea  que 

no  podamos  acabar  a  tiempo. 
De  todos  modos  creo  que  no  lo  conse- 
<    guiremos. 


So  be  it !     That  is  my  desire  for  both. 
I  drink  to  your  health,  Mr.  Henry. 
Your  health,  Mr.  Charles. 
To  work,  gentlemen,  for  fear  we  should 

not  be  able  to  finish  in  time. 
At  all  events,  I  do  not  think  we  shall 

succeed. 


EXPLANATION. 

210.  Imperfect  ais^d  Pluperfect  of  the  Subjunctive. — 
Although  it  has  been  deemed  expedient,  in  the  example  of  the 
conjugation  of  verbs  in  the  subjunctive  mood,  to  give  but  one 
English  equivalent  for  each  of  the  three  terminations  ria,  ra, 
86,  it  is  not  to  be  inferred  therefrom  that  they  may  be  used  in- 
discriminately. Indeed,  the  correct  application  of  each  of 
these  terminations  presents  as  much  difficulty  to  the  student  of 
Spanish  as  does  that  of  the  English  signs  might,  could,  should, 
would  to  the  foreigner  learning  English.  The  following  rules 
will,  however,  serve  as  a  guide  in  all  ordinary  cases,  and  enable 
the  pupil  to  surmount  not  a  few  of  the  most  serious  obstacles 
to  the  right  use  of  the  terminations  in  question. 

1st.  When  the  sentence  begins  without  a  conditional  con- 
junction, the  verb  may  take  either  the  first  or  the  second  ter- 
mination (ria  or  ra)  ;  as, 


Bueno  sena  {or  fuera)  no  descuidarse. 


It  would  be  well  not  to  be  off  one's 

guard. 
It  would  be  well  if  peace  were  made. 


Convendn'a  (or  conviniera)  que  se  hi 

ciese  la  paz. 

2d.  In  sentences  beginning  with  si,  sino,  aunque.  Men  que, 
dado  que,  &c.,  or  with  an  interjection  expressive  of  desire, 
either  the  second  or  third  termination  may  be  employed  {ra  or 
se)  ;  and  were  it  necessary  to  repeat  the  same  tense  in  the 
eecond  clause  of  the  sentence  (in  order  to  show  what  would 
take  place  as  the  result  of  the  condition  expressed  in  the  first 
clause),  the  first  termination  {ria)  may  then  be  used  ;  as, 
Aunque  dijeras  {or  dijeses)  la  verdad,  I      Though  thou  toldest  (or  wert  to  tell) 

no  te  creena.  j  the  truth,  he  would  not  believe  thee. 

3d.  When  the  imperfect  of  the  subjunctive  is  preceded  by 
(\  verb  in  the  preterit  definite  of  the  indicative,  signifying  pen' 


I  did  not  think  you  were  studying,  or 

I  did  not  think  you  would  study, 
I  judged  you  would  study. 

I  said  you  would  read. 
He  said  you  were  to  read. 
We  said  he  was  to  read. 


216  LESSON     XLIII. 

sar,  to  think,  decir,  to  say,  or  such  like,  any  of  the  terminations 
may  be  used ;  but  it  must  be  observed  that  the  idea  conveyed 
will  be  different,  according  to  the  termination  employed  ;  as, 
Pens6  que  estudiara  V.,  or  que  estu-         I  thought  you  would  study. 

diarea  Y. 
No  crei  que  estudiase  Y.{or  estudiara) 

V. 
Juzgu6  que  estudiar/a  {or  estudiara) 

V. 
Dije  que  leyera  {or  leerra)  V. 
Dijo  que  leyese  {or  leyera)  V. 
Dijimos  que  ley ero  {or  leyese). 

4th.  But  if  this  tense  be  preceded  or  governed  by  a  verb  in 
any  of  the  past  tenses  of  the  indicative,  signifying  desear,  to 
desire,  querer^  to  wish,  or  by  any  verb  of  such  nature,  then  the 
second  termination  {ra)  or  the  third  (se)  must  be  used,  and 
never  the  first  {rid) ;  as, 

Deseaba  que  ganara  {or  ganase)  V.      I      He  was  desirous  that  you  might  win. 

Quiso  que  V.  se  easara  {or  casa««).      |      He  wished  you  to  get  married, 

A  glance  at  the  foregoing  rules  and  examples  will  suffice  in 
order  to  observe  that  the  first  and  second  terminations  {ria  and 
rd)  may  be  used  one  for  the  other,  without  any  change  in  the 
sense  of  the  phrase ;  that  the  second  may  also  be  used  for  the 
third  (that  is  to  say,  ra  for  se),  but  that  the  first  and  third  are 
of  an  entirely  dififerent  meaning,  and,  in  consequence,  can  never 
be  substituted  one  for  the  other.  Another  peculiarity  of  the 
first  {rid)  is,  that  it  can  never  be  preceded  by  a  conditional  con- 
junction, while  the  second  and  third  may. 

6th.  When,  in  translating  into  Spanish,  whether  is  to  be 
translated  by  si,  would  or  should  must  be  rendered  by  the  ter- 
mination ria ;  as, 
No  b6  «i  irea.  |      I  do  not  know  whether  he  would  go. 

6th.  The  invei-ted  forms  had  Z,  had  he^  &c.,  meaning  if  I 
had,  if  he  had,  &c.,  are  always  to  be  turned  into  Spanish  by 
either  of  the  terminations  ra  or  «e,  preceded  by  the  conjunc- 
tion si ;  as. 
Si  tuviera  {or  tuvie«c)  buenos  libros,  I      Had  I  (or  if  I  had)  good  books,  I 

leeWo.  I  would  read. 


LESSON     XLIII.  217 

7th.  Were,  used  in  the  place  of  would  be,  may  be  translated 
by  either  ria  or  ra,  never  by  se ;  as, 

Seria  {or  fnera)  imprudencia  ir  con  I       It   were    imprudent    to    go   in   thia 
este  tiempo.  I  weather. 

211.  The  English  auxiliaries,  may,  might,  can,  could,  will, 
would  and  should  are  sometimes  to  be  translated  into  Spanish 
by  principal  verbs  of  the  same  meaning,  and  not  merely  ren- 
dered by  corresponding  terminations  ;  as, 

No  quiso  ir.  I      He  would  not  go. 

y.  puede  hablar,  pero  yo  no  lo  puedo.  \      You  may  (or  can)  speak,  but  I  cannot. 

In  the  first  example  we  see,  that  by  would  not  is  conveyed 
the  idea  of  the  want  of  will  or  desire  on  the  part  of  the  person 
alluded  to,  and  not  the  idea  of  that  person's  going  or  not  going, 
as  dependent  on  a  condition.  Had  the  latter  been  the  sense 
intended,  we  should  then  have  rendered  would  by  the  termi- 
nation ria  of  the  verb  ir,  to  go ;  thus, 
]E1  no  iria,  \      He  would  not  go ; 

for,  in  that  case,  the  object  would  have  been  simply  to  predict 
that  he  would  not  go,  as  dependent  on  some  such  condition  as, 
if  I  did  not  go  too,  si  yo  no  fuese  tamhien.  Hence,  the  closest 
attention  is  required,  in  order  to  find  the  real  meaning  of  the 
auxiliaries  above  mentioned,  before  attempting  to  translate  them. 

212.  The  imperfect  of  the  subjunctive  denotes  a  contingent 
action  that  took  place  some  time  ago,  or  that  is  taking  place  at 
the  present  time,  or  that  will  take  place  after  the  completion 
of  the  action  expressed  by  the  determining  verb. 

213.  The  pluperfect  represents  a  contingent  action  as  com- 
pleted before  some  period  of  time  already  past,  or  before  some 
other  action  which  is  now  also  completed,  or  which  would  be 
now  completed  had  it  taken  place. 

The  closest  attention  to  the  foregoing  remarks  is  essential, 
in  order  to  avoid  the  improper  substitution  of  the  tenses  of  the 
indicative  for  those  of  the  subjunctive,  which  all  foreigners,  and 
especially  the  English,  are  most  liable  to  commit. 


10 


218  LESSON     XLIII. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 


1.  jDuda  V.  que  so  haga  la  paz  este  verano  ?  Convendria  (or  convi- 
niera)  que  se  liiciese  la  paz ;  pero  temo  que  no  se  haga. 

2.  I  Iria  Y.  d  Europa  si  tuviera  {or  tuviese)  tiempo  ?  No  iria  aunque 
tuviera  tierapo,  si  no  tuviese  dinero. 

3.  jOjalal  tuviera  V.  (or  tuviese;  mucho  dinero,  porque  ent6nces 
me  prestaria  V.  alguno ;  ^  no  es  asi  ?  Si  tuviera  mucho  le  prestaria  a  V. 
alguno ;  pero  con  la  condicion  de  que  me  lo  devolviese  pronto. 

4.  I  Teme  V.  acaso  que  no  se  lo  devolviera  ?  Todo  pudiera  suceder, 
amigo  niio. 

5.  Si  V.  me  hubiera  (or  hubiese)  prestado  algo,  7  yo  no  se  lo  hubiese 
(or  hubiera)  devuelto,  Y.  tendria  razon  en  desconfiar. — Todo  eso  esta  muj 
bien ;  pero  si,  en  lugar  de  ser  Y.,  fuera  yo  el  que  necesitara  dinero,  y  Y. 
el  que  lo  tuviera,  i  me  lo  prestaria  ?     Por  supuesto  que  si. 

6.  Pues  con  todo  eso  yo  no  s6  si  Y.  lo  haria.— ^Porqu6  piensa  V.  tan 
mal  de  mi  ? 

7.  I  Ila  olvidado  Y.  ya  que  el  afio  pasado,  por  Navidad,  fui  d  pedirle  d 
Y.  cien  pesos  y  me  los  neg6  Y.  ?  Mal  pudiera  yo  prestarselos  4  Y. 
cuando  yo  no  los  tenia ;  pero  est6  Y.  seguro,  Don  Jos6,  que  yo  hubiera 
tenido  un  gran  placer  en  haberselos  prestado  a  Y.  si  los  hubiera  (or  hu- 
biese) tenido. 

8.  I  Si  Y.  supiera  nsar  correctamente  los  tiempos  y  modos  del  verbo, 
sabria  Y.  hablar  espaftol  ?  Si,  sefior,  con  los  conocimientos  que  ya  tengo 
de  las  demas  partes  de  la  oracion,  creo  que  liablaria  bien  el  espailol  si  su- 
piera usar  bien  los  tiempos  y  modos  del  verbo. 

9.  I  Qu6  es  lo  mas  importantc  al  aprender  una  Icngua  ?  El  conoci- 
miento  de  todo  lo  que  hace  relacion  al  verbo. 

10.  jPorqu6  crce  Y.  que  el  verbo  es  lo  mas  importantc?  Porque  sin 
los  verbos  no  se  puede  formar  una  sola  scntencia. 

11.  ^Luego,  sogun  eso,  bastard  aprender  la  conjugacion  de  los  verbos 
regulares  6  irrcgularcs  para  hablar  una  lengua?  No,  sefior,  si  uno  aabe 
conjugar  ios  verbos  como  regularmente  se  conjugan  en  las  gramaticas; 
pero  si  sabi^ndolos  conjugar  como  se  debe. 

12.  J  Pues  qu6,  hay  algun  otro  mode  de  conjugar  los  verbos?  Los 
verbos  debcn  conjugarse  forraando  senteuciaa  completas  en  todos  sus 
modos  y  tiempos. 

13.  jQu6  vonttyas  resultan  do  esto?  Las  vent^jiis  son  obvias,  pues 
formando  sentencias  completas  con  cada  tiempo  y  raodo  se  apronde  a  dis- 
tinguir  estos  tiempos  y  modos,  acabando  por  usarlos  correctamente. 

14.  ^  Y  crec  Y.  que  hablaria  bien  el  espafiol  si  pudiese  hacer  sentencias 
en  todos  los  tiempos  y  modos  del  vei'bo?    Sia  duda  alguna,  una  vez  quo 


LESS02^r     XLIII.  219 

V.  forme  estas  sentencias  con  prontitud  j  sin  cometer  faltas,  hablara  Y. 
espafiol. 

15.  Pues  manos  a  la  obra,  i  quiere  Y.  que  haga  algunas  en  el  raodo  in- 
dicativo  ?  No,  sefior,  en  las  lecciones  pasadas  ha  practicado  Y.  bastante 
con  ese  modo,  haga  Y.  algunas  ahora  con  el  modo  subjuntivo. 

16.  Presenter  ^DeseaY.  que  yo  aprenda  el  espafiol?  gEscorrecta? 
Perfectamente ;  adelante. 

17.  Perfecto  de  subjuntivo :  Temo  que  la  guerra  no  haya  acabado  en 
Europa.  i  Esta  bien  ?  Si,  sefior,  esta  muy  bien ;  pero  no  necesita  Y. 
preguntarme  a  cada  sentencia  que  haga,  si  esta  correcta,  porque  yo  ten- 
dre  buen  cuidado  de  advertirselo  a  Y.  cuando  no  sea  asi. 

18.  Pluscuamperfecto :  Si  yo  hubiera  creido  que  esto  le  molestaba  4  Y. 
no  se  lo  habria  preguntado. — Esto  no  me  molesta  de  ningun  modo  y  espero 
que  Y.  no  se  moleste  tampoco  por  lo  que  yo  acabo  de  decir. 

19.  Imperfecto:  gSeria  suficiente  hacer  una  frase  en  cada  tiempo? 
Seria  suficiente  si -cada  tiempo  se  usase  en  un  solo  caso  ;  pero  como  hay 
muchos  y  muy  varios,  convendi'ia  practicar  en  todos  tanto  como  fuese 
posible. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Before  going  out,  Henry,  I  wish  to  give  you  a  piece  of  advice. 
Well,  go  on  I 

2.  What  is  that  advice*  you  have  to  give  me?  Hold  your  tongue, 
and  hear  what  I  have  to  tell  you. 

3.  Did  you  warn  your  cousin  not  to  lend  his  carriage  to  that  young 
man  who  asked  him  for  it  ?  Yes,  but  he  said  he  would  do  so,  and  that 
he  did  not  distrust  that  young  man  at  all. 

4.  Do  you  know  how  to  conjugate  all  the  verbs  in  the  Spanish  lan- 
guage now  ?  I  am  not  sure ;  my  memory  is  not  very  good  ;  and  so  I  al- 
ways like  to  look  at  my  grammar,  for  fear  of  making  (committing)  mistakes. 

6.  Can  you  tell  me  how  many  conjugations  of  regular  verbs  there 
are  in  Spanish  ?    Yes,  sir,  there  are  three. 

6.  When  you  see  a  new  verb,  how  do  you  know  to  what  conjugation 
it  belongs  ?     By  the  termination  of  the  infinitive  mood. 

7.  Can  you  tell  me  to  what  conjugation  the  verb  comprar  belongs  ? 
Certainly  ;  it  belongs  to  the  first. 

8.  How  do  you  know  that  ?  I  see  the  characteristic  termination  of 
the  first  conjugation,  which  is  ar. 

9.  And  of  which  conjugation  is  entender  ?  The  second  ;  its  termina- 
tion being  er. 

10.  Yery  well.  Now,  if  I  say  existio,  can  you  tell  me  all  about  that 
verb  ?    Yes,  sir,  it  is  a  regular  verb,  third  person  singular,  of  the  preterit 


220 


LESSON     XLIV. 


definite  tense  of  the  indicative  mood ;  it  belongs  to  the  third  conjugation, 
its  infinitive  being  existir. 

11.  Are  there  in  Spanish  no  other  conjugations  than  those  which  you 
have  just  told  me  ?  Yes,  very  many.  Those  I  have  mentioned  {mencio- 
nar)  already  are  the  three  regular  ones. 

12.  What  do  you  understand  by  "  regular  verbs  "  ?  Regular  verbs  are 
those  which  are  conjugated  in  all  their  moods  and  tenses  exactly  like  the 
models  (modelos)  given  in  different  parts  of  the  grammar. 

13.  And  "  irregular  verbs,"  what  are  they  ?  Those  whose  conjugation 
is  different  from  the  models. 

14.  If  you  could  speak  Spanish  as  well  as  English,  do  you  think  you 
would  prefer  it  to  your  own  language  ?  I  would  like  to  be  able  to  speak 
it  as  well ;  but  there  is  no  language  in  the  world  that  I  would  prefer  to 
my  own. 

15.  If  I  were  to  lend  you  this  phrase  book  would  you  return  it  to  me 
next  week  ?  I  would  if  you  wanted  it,  and  that  I  promised  to  return  it 
to  you  at  that  time. 


LESSON    XLIV. 


Aproximar. 

Apurar. 

Aullar. 

Ladrar. 

Cuidar. 

Dejar. 

Emplear. 

Matar, 

Permitir. 

Robar. 

Imponer. 

Tantico. 

Vaya  de  cuento. 

Como    iba  diciendo   do  mi 

cuento. 
A  mi  costa. 
Ya  le  veo  4  V.  vcnir. 
Venir  4  pelo. 


To  approach,  to  draw  near. 

To  perplex,  to  press. 

To  howl. 

To  bark. 

To  take  care  of. 

To  leave,  to  let. 

To  employ. 

To  km. 

To  permit. 

To  rob,  to  steaL 

To  impose. 

Somewhat ;  a  little. 
To  begin  my  story. 
As  I  was  saying  (in  my  story). 

At  my  expense,  to  my  cost. 

I  see  what  you  are  at. 

To  suit  exactly,  to  be  apropos. 


LESSON     XLIV 


221 


De  sopeton. 
Cuanto  mas. 
J  Por  Dios ! 


Unexpectedly. 

The  more. 

For  Heaven's  sake ! 


iHe! 

Ho!  hoa!  What? 

i  Oiga  I 

Indeed  1     Just  listen ! 

Chico. 

Little,  small. 

Kevoltoso. 

Noisy. 

CalieDte. 

Hot,  warm. 

Apurado. 

Embarrassed. 

Burlon. 

Jester,  scoffer. 

Natural. 

Natural. 

Aumentativo. 

Augmentative. 

Diminutivo. 

Diminutive. 

Picaro. 

Rogue,  rascal. 

Satisfecho. 

Satisfied,  contented. 

Cuento. 

Corro. 

Cojo. 

Brazo. 

Ademan. 

Francisco,  Paco 

{dim.). 
Jose,  Pepe  (dim.). 
Caldo. 
Calducho. 
Pistoletazo. 
Poetastro. 
Lugar. 
Garrote. 
Garrotazo. 

Cafion. 

Oanonazo. 

Ladron. 


Tale,  story. 
Group  of  persons. 
Lame. 
Arm. 

Attitude. 
Francis,  Frank. 

Joseph,  Joe. 
Broth. 
Poor  broth. 
Pistol  shot. 
Poetaster. 
Place. 
Bludgeon. 
Blow  of  a  blud- 
geon. 
Cannon. 
Cannon-shot. 
Thief,  robber. 


An^cdota. 

Casuca. 

Mosca. 

Necesidad. 

Pierna. 

Boca. 

Maria,  Mariqui- 

ta  {dim.). 
Concepcion, 

Concha  {dim.) 
Pistola. 
Estratagema. 
Josefa,  P6pa 

{dim.). 
Francisca,  Paca 

{dim.). 
Costumbre. 
Clase. 


Anecdote. 
Miserable  house. 
Fly ;      tiresome 

person. 
Necessity,  need. 
Leg. 
Mouth. 
Mary. 

{N'o  Englislh  equiv- 
.     alent.) 
Pistol. 
Stratagem. 
Josephine. 

Frances,  Fanny. 

Custom. 

Class. 


COMPOSITION. 


Lo  aprendi  4  mi  costa. 

Antes  no  le  habia  comprendido 

ahora  ya  le  veo  venir. 
El  me  dio  la  noticia  de  sopeton. 


v., 


I  learned  it  to  my  cost. 

I  did  not  understand  you  before,  but 

now  I  see  what  you  are  at. 
He  gave  me  the  news  unexpectedly. 


222 


LESSON     XLIV 


j  Por  Dios  !  D.  Francisco,  no  hable  V. 

de  eso. 
I  Conoce  V.  a  aquel  hombron  ? 
Si,  senor,  es  el  marido  de  mi  vecinita 

Mariquita. 
V.  me  sorprende.     j  Es  posible  que  sea 

aquel  horabronazo  el  marido  de  esa 

mujercita ! 
i  Es  ese  hombre  cojo  ? 
Si,  senor ;  en  la  ultima  guerra  recibio 

un  pistoletazo  en  una  piema. 
f.  Ha  matado  V.  alguna  vez  a  alguno  ? 
Si,  senor,  el  ano  pasado  mate  de  un 

garrotazo  al  perro  de  mi  vecino,  por- 

que  no  me  dejaba  dormir,  aullando 

todita  la  noche. 
Ese  hombre  es  un  picaronazo,  que  no 

hace  sino  beber  y  no  atiende  4  las 

necesidades  de  su  familia. 
Este  perro  es  chiquito,  pero  yo  tengo 

uno  chiquirritito. 
Carlotita,  ve  4  cuidar  de  tu  hermanita. 

Ese  nino  es  un  picarillo. 

Esta  nina  es  una  coquetilla. 

Mi  pobrecico  hijo  esta  muy  malo. 

P6pe,  (,  has  visto  mi  caballito  ? 

Si ;  pero  yo  en  tu  lugar,  Paco,  le  llama- 
ria  caballejo,  porque  creo  que  no 
merece  el  nombre  de  caballito. 

P6pe  vino  callandito. 

Mi  amigo  esta  apuradillo. 

Esa  nina  estd  muertecita  de  frio. 

Tu  casa  esta  lejitos. 

El  no  es  poeta,  sino  poetastro. 


For  Heaven's  sake !  Mr.  Francis,  do 
not  speak  of  that. 

Do  you  know  that  big  man  ? 

Yes,  sir,  he  is  the  husband  of  my  little 
neighbor  Mary. 

You  surprise  me.  Is  it  possible  that 
that  enormous  man  is  that  little 
woman's  husband ! 

Is  that  man  lame  ? 

Yes,  sir ;  in  the  last  war  he  received  a 
pistol  shot  in  one  of  his  legs. 

Did  you  ever  kill  any  one  ? 

Yes,  sir ;  last  year  I  killed  my  neigh- 
bor's dog  with  a  bludgeon,  for  he 
would  not  let  me  sleep,  howling  the 
whole  night  over. 

That  man  is  a  great  rascal  who  does 
nothing  but  drink,  and  does  not  at- 
tend to  the  wants  of  his  family. 

This  dog  is  pretty  small,  but  I  have  a 
very  little  one. 

Charlotte,  go  and  take  care 'of  your  lit- 
tle sister. 

This  child  is  a  little  rogue. 

This  little  girl  is  a  little  coquette. 

My  poor  Uttle  son  is  very  sick. 

Joe,  have  you  seen  my  little  horse  ? 

I  did ;  but  if  I  were  you,  Frank,  I 
would  call  it  a  nag,  for  I  think  it  is 
not  worthy  the  name  of  (little)  horse. 

Joe  came  in  softly. 

My  friend  is  a  little  embarrassed. 

That  little  girl  is  almost  dead  with  cold. 

Your  house  is  pjetty  far  away. 

He  is  no  poet,  but  a  poetaster. 


EXPLANATION. 

214.  Augmentative  and  diminutive  nouns  are  those 
derivatives  which  serve  to  augment  or  diminish  the  significa- 
tion of  their  primitives ;  not  only  in  regard  to  size,  but  also  to 
esteem,  character,  dignity,  importance,  &c. 

They  are  formed  by  adding  various  terminations  to  the 
primitive  nouns,  dropping  generally  the  vowel,  if  it  end  in  one. 


LESSON-     XLIV.  223 

The  terminations  which  are  used  are  very  numerous ;  but  those 
most  frequently  adopted  are  azo,  on,  ote  for  the  augmentive 
masculine,  and  aza,  ona^  ota  for  the  augtnentive  feminine  nouns. 
These  terminations  are  equivalent  in  their  meaning  to  the  Eng- 
lish words  big^  large^  stout,  tall,  and  such  like ;  as, 

PRIMITIVES.  DERIVATIVES. 


Hombre.  A  man. 

Mujer.  A  woman. 


Hombron,    hom-  A  tall,  or  large, 

hvazoy  hombrofe.  man. 

Mujerona,     mu-  A  tall,  or  large, 

jera^a,  mujerona.  woman. 

But  the  nouns  which  have  those  terminations  are  not  al- 
ways augmentatives,  since  the  nouns  pistoletazo,  pistol  shot; 
canonazo,  cannon  shot;  garrotazo,  blow  of  a  bludgeon,  do  not 
augment  the  signification  of  their  primitives,  pistola,  canon 
and  garrote,  and  consequently  are  not  augmentatives. 

Familiar  use  has  introduced  many  other  augmentative  and 
diminutive  terminations;  as, 

Horabrona-zo.  I      A  very  large  man. 

Picarona2o.  |      A  very  great  rascal. 

The  terminations  most  used  as  diminutives  are  in,  illo,  ito, 
ico,  eteyiielo  or  ejo,  for  the  masculine ;  the  feminine  are  formed 
by  adding  a  to  the  termination  in,  and  by  changing  the  final 
vowel  of  the  others  into  a. 

Many  of  the  diminutive  terminations  may  acquire  a  still 
further  diminutive  signification,  by  adding  other  terminations 
to  them ;  thus. 


CYiico. 

Chiqu/to. 

ChiquirritzVo. 


Small. 
Very  small. 
Very,  very  small. 


The  manner  of  applying  these  terminations,  as  much  for 
their  different  meanings  as  for  their  various  orthographical  ac- 
cidents, admits  of  so  much  variety  that  practice  seems  the  only 
means  of  acquiring  the  proper  use  of  them  ;  as. 


Mi  hermamto. 
Un  hombreci'o. 
Un  viejecjVo. 
El  es  un  ^icaxillo. 
Qdixloiita. 


My  dear  little  brother. 
A  dear  little  man. 
A  dear  little  old  man. 
He  is  a  dear  little  rogue. 
Dear  little  Charlotte. 


224 


LESSON     XLIV, 


Una  pobre  v'lejecifa. 

Ella  es  una  coqueti^a. 

Mi  probrecico  hijo  {or  mi  pobre 

hijtto). 
Un  cahallejo. 
Un  pohrete. 
Un  ladronzM^^o. 
Un  reyezuelo. 


A  poor  dear  little  old  woman. 
She  is  a  dear  little  coquette. 
My  poor  little  son. 


A  miserable  little  horse,  a  nag. 
A  poor  useless  creature. 
A  petty  young  thieC 
A  petty  king. 

215.  Besides  the  terminations  mentioned,  there  are  many 
others  which  may  be  called  irregular,  inasmuch  as  they  can  be 
affixed  to  certain  nouns  only,  among  them  the  most  irregular 
are  those  of  persons ;  as, 


Francisco,  Paco,  etc. 
Concepcion,  Concha,  etc. 
Jose,  Pepe,  etc. 
Maria,  Mariquita,  etc. 


Francis,  Frank. 

(iVb  equivalent  in  English^ 

Joseph,  Joe. 

Mary. 


216.  Although  the  diminutives  proceed  in  general  from 
substantive  nouns,  as  we  see  by  the  preceding  examples,  they 
are  also  formed,  in  familiar  style,  from  adjectives,  participles, 
gerunds,  and  even  from  adverbs  ;  thus  we  not  unfrequently 
say: 


RevoltosiYZo  es  el  muchacho. 
Muerteci^o  de  frio. 
Todi/o  el  dia. 
Pan  calenti/o. 
ApuradiZ/o  estuvo. 
Vino  callandi/o. 
Lcjitos  esta  tu  casa. 


The  boy  is  rather  turbulent. 

Half  dead  with  cold. 

The  whole  day  over. 

Warm  bread  (slightly  warm). 

He  was  somewhat  embarrassed. 

He  came  softly. 

Your  house  is  pretty  far  away. 


217.  Primitive  words,  ending  of  themselves  in  any  diminu- 
tive termination  (such  as  cep^7/o,  brush  ;  aban/co,  fan  ;  espe/o, 
looking-glass,  &c.),  cannot  take  an  additional  termination  simi- 
lar to  their  own,  without  producing  a  disagreeable  sound,  which 
ought  always  to  be  avoided.  Words  ending  in  ito  or  ita  are 
excepted. 

The  same  termination  may  often  serve  to  express  affection^ 
pity,  contempt,  <fec.,  being  in  this  respect  like  the  interjec- 
tions, and  it  is  consequently  very  difficult  to  classify  them. 
Very  often  their  real  meaning  can  be  distinguished  only 
by  the  nature  of  the  conversation  and  the  intonation  of  the 


LESSON      XLIV.  225 

voice.  They  are,  nevertheless,  not  to  be  used  too  profusely, 
because  when  they  come  too  close  together  they  render  the 
discourse  monotonous,  in  consequence  of  the  similarity  existing 
between  them. 

218.  There  are  in  Spanish  other  derivatives,  formed  more 
or  less  at  fancy,  and  which  are  not  augmentatives  or  diminu- 
tives, although  they  may  appear  to  be  such;  these  might  be 
called  depreciatives  (despreciativos),  because  there  is  always  in 
them  something  of  censure,  maliciousness,  or  mockery ;  as, 


Casa,  casuca. 
Poeta,  poetastro. 
Caldo,  calducho. 


House,  miserable-looking  house. 
Poet,  poetaster. 
Broth,  poor  broth. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  I  Tiene  Y.  lastima  de  aquel  pobrete  ?  No  tengo  lastima  de  61,  por- 
que  es  un  ladronzuelo. 

2.  ^Le  ha  robado  a  Y.  algo?  No,  sefior,  61  sabe  muy  bien  que  si  se 
atreviese  a  robarme  yo  lo  mataria  de  un  pistoletazo. 

3.  Y  ^porqu6  no  de  un  garrotazo,  6  un  cafionazo  ?  ^Porqu6?  No  s6 
porqu6,  probablemente  he  empleado  la  palabra  pistoletazo  porque  tengo 
una  pistola  y  no  tengo  ni  garrote,  ni  cafion. 

4.  No,  seiior,  esa  no  es  la  razon ;  j  quiere  Y.  que  yo  se  la  diga  ?  Bien, 
veamo3. 

5.  Y.  no  tiene  valor  para  matar  una  mosca  cuanto  mas  d  un  hombre ; 
pero  Y.  queria  practicar  con  las  palabras  matar  j  pistoletazo  y  esta  es  la 
sola  razon  por  la  cual  Y.  iba  a  coraeter  un  homicidio. 

6.  Yaya,  Don  Francisco,  Y.  es  poeta,  hombre  de  ingenio  y  de  buen 
humor  y  quiere  divertirse  a  costa  mia,  i  no  es  verdad  ?  Ya  lo  veo  i  Y. 
venir,  Y.  quiere  hacerme  decir  que  no  soy  poeta  sino  poetastro  introdu- 
ciendo  esta  palabrita  mas  de  la  leccion. 

7.  Solo  le  faltaba  a  Y.  11am  arse  Quevedo  para  serle  parecido  en  todo, 
hasta  en  el  nombre. — Mil  gracias  por  el  honor  de  la  comparacion,  pero 
volviendo  a  lo  del  pistoletazo. 

8.  i  Por  Dios !  D.  Francisco,  no  sea  Y.  tan  burlon  y  dejeme  Y.  estar 
en  paz. — Lo  dejar6  a  Y.,  Don  Pepe,  si  me  permite  contarle  un  cuentecito; 
y  para  que  le  parezca  a  Y.  mas  interesante,  se  lo  contar6  a  Y.  introducien- 
do  tantos  aumentativos  y  diminutivos  como  me  sea  posible. 

9.  Con  esa  condicion  le  escucho  a  Y. — Pues  bien ;  vaya  de  cuento : 
Habla  un  hombrecillo  en  cierto  lugarcillo. — Y  observe  Y.,  D.  Pepito, 
que  para  el  cuentecito  lo  mismo  hubiera  dado  que  el  hombre  hubiera  sido 

10* 


226  LESSON     XLIV. 

hombron  y  el  lugar  lugaron. — Adelante  con  el  cuentecillo  que  me  va  gn»- 
tando  un  tantico.  Pues  es  el  caso  que  este  hombron,  hombrecito,  hom- 
brecillo,  horabrotc,  hombrecico,  bombrazo,  hombronazo,  hombracho,  6 
como  V.  quiera  llamarle.     .     .     . 

10.  Yo  no  quiero  llamarle  nada,  V.  le  ha  llamado  ya  snficiente ;  pero 
al  cuento,  al  cuento  6  se  acabara  el  ejercicio  sin  que  lleguemos  al  fin. — 
Pues  este  hombrezuelo  no  sabia  mas  que  un  cuentecillo ;  pero  lo  contaba 
d  todo  el  mundo  que  encontraba. 

11.  Pero  yo  no  comprendo  como  podia  hacer  que  sn  cuento  viniese  & 
pclo  J  Y.  sabe  que  no  se  cuenta  un  cuento  asi  de  sopeton,  como  se  dan 
los  buenos  dias. — Al  principio,  el  viejote  se  encontraba  apuradillo  para 
conseguirlo ;  pero  el  picaruelo  invent6  despues  una  estratagema  por  me- 
dio de  la  cual  hizo  que  su  anecdotilla  viniera  d  pelo  siempre. 

12.  jOiga!  ij  que  estratagema  fu6  esa?  Oigala  Y. ;  pero  ^tes  debo 
advertir  a  V.  que  en  su  anecdota  habia  algo  que  hacia  relacion  d  cafiona- 
zos  J  pistol  etazos. 

13.  I H6 !  I  Ya  vuelve  V.  i  los  pistoletazos !  Pues  bien,  como  iba  di- 
ciendo  de  mi  cuento,  se  aproximaba  el  buen  viejecito  callandito  4  cual- 
quier  corrillo  que  encontrase  y  poni^ndose  el  dedo  indice  sobre  la  boca 
en  ademan  de  imponer  silencio,  les  preguntaba.  "  i  Han  oido  Vds.  un 
caflonazo  ? "  No,  sefior,  era  naturalmente  la  respuesta ;  pues  bien,  res- 
pondia  mi  hombre  muy  satisfecho. — Ahora  que  hablamos  de  canonazos 
les  contar6  a  Vds.  una  anecdota    .     .     .     .    y  aqui  contaba  su  cuento, 

14.  Yo  no  veo  la  aplicacion  de  su  cuento  de  V.  todavia,  Sr.  D.  Fran- 
cisco.— I  C6mo  I  D.  Pepe,  ^  no  ha  oido  V.  un  pistoletazo  ? 

EXERCISE. 

1.  IIow  did  you  hke  that  story  by  Fernan  Caballero  which  I  lent 
you  ?  Very  much  indeed ;  it  gives  a  very  good  idea  of  tlie  manners, 
customs  and  language  of  the  low  classes  in  Andalusia  (Andalttcia). 

2.  What  did  that  man  want  ?  He  is  a  poor  lame  man  asking  for  a 
piece  of  bread,  or  a  few  cents  to  buy  some. 

8.  He  is  lame,  you  say ;  how  did  that  happen  to  him  ?  He  says  he 
was  at  the  war  and  received  a  pistol  shot  in  the  leg. 

4.  What  does  the  physician  give  to  your  cousin  since  he  has  been 
sick  ?  He  has  given  him  some  medicine  (medicina)^  and  says  he  must 
take  broth  three  times  a  day. 

5.  Do  you  like  broth  ?  Yes,  very  well ;  but  not  such  poor  broth  as 
they  make  for  my  cousin. 

6.  How  does  that  poor  man  make  his  living  since  he  lost  both  his 
arms?  He  can  clo  nothing  in  the  world,  and  lives  on  what  little  money 
he  gets  from  his  brother,  who  is  rather  embarrassed  himself  just  now. 


LESSON     XLV. 


227 


7.  Come  nearer  to  the  fire,  Louisa ;  it  is  a  little  cold  this  morning. 
Thank  you,  I  do  not  feel  tlie  cold  much ;  but  I  would  be  obliged  to  you 
if  you  would  call  Fanny  in  to  warm  herself;  she  is  half  dead  with  cold. 

8.  Is  Henry  going  to  be  employed  by  that  merchant  to  whom  you 
spoke  for  him  some  time  ago  ?  Yes,  I  think  it  is  probable,  and  I  shall  be 
very  glad,  for  the  poor  fellow^  is  a  little  embarrassed,  and  has  been  so 
for  a  long  time. 

9.  If  I  were  in  your  place  I  would  not  allow  that  dog  to  howl  so  the 
whole  night  over.  My  father  will  not  let  me  speak  about  it  to  our  neigh- 
bor, who  lives  in  that  miserable  old  house  next  to  ours ;  it  is  his  dog,  and 
he  ought  not  to  let  it  howl  in  such  a  manner. 

10.  Just  listen  to  him  I  as  if  I  could  not  go  and  kill  it  with  a  blud- 
geon.— KiU  it !  There  would  be  no  necessity  for  killing  it ;  just  give 
him  one  good  blow  with  the  bludgeon  you  talk  of  and  he  would  let  you 
sleep  in  future. 

11.  Have  you  ever  read  Don  Quixote?  No;  why?  If  you  take  the 
trouble  to  read  it  you  wiU  find  a  very  good  anecdote  of  a  madman  (loco) 
and  a  dog,  in  the  first  chapter  of  the  second  pai't  of  that  justly  celebra- 
ted work. 

12.  Have  you  paid  attention  to  what  is  said  in  to-day's  lesson  on  aug- 
mentatives  and  diminutives  ?  Yes,  madam  ;  and  it  seems  to  me  that  the 
proper  use  of  them  must  make  a  language  expressive  and  elegant  in  a 
high  degree  {grado). 

13.  Is  Concepcion  a  very  common  name  for  ladies  in  Spain  ?  There 
are  a  great  many  called  by  that  name  ;  the  diminutive  is  Concha. 

14.  Is  your  mother  satisfied  with  her  new  servant?     Very  much  so. 

15.  Why  did  she  let  the  other  one  go  away  ?  She  was  very  glad  to 
see  her  go  away,  because  she  used  to  steal  everything  that  came  to  her 
hand. 


16.  Is  that  coffee  warm 
minutes,  if  you  wished. 


No,  sir;   but  I  could  warm  it  in  a  few 


LESSON    XLV. 

[know 
Avisar.  To  advise,  to  notify,  to  let  one 

Admirar.  To  admire. 

Aconsejar.  To  counsel,  to  advise. 

Apremiar.  To  urge,  to  compel  one  to  do  any 

thing  by  order  of  court. 

*  Eemember  that  English  -words  italicised  are  not  to  be  translated. 


228 


LESSON     XLV. 


Afectar. 

Compadecer. 

Convertir. 

Desertar. 

Empeftar. 

Explicar. 

Fusilar. 

Guardar. 

Librar, 

Mentir. 

Mencionar. 

Permanecer. 

Eelatar. 

Santificar. 

Suceder. 

Sonar. 

Volar. 

{Ah  bah! 
iTomal 

Ancbo. 

Falso. 

Calvo. 

Faraoso. 

Notorio. 

Cr6dulo. 

Oritico. 

Formal. 

Supersticioso. 

Esc6ptico. 


To  feign,  to  affect. 

To  pity. 

To  convert. 

To  desert. 

To  pledge,  to  engage. 

To  explain. 

To  shoot. 

To  guard,  to  observe,  to  keep. 

To  free,  to  liberate,  to  deliver. 

To  lie. 

To  mention. 

To  remain. 

To  relate. 

To  sanctify. 

To  happen,  to  succeed. 

To  sound.  ♦ 

To  fly. 


Oh,  pshaw  1 
Indeed  I 

Wide,  broad. 

False. 

Bald. 

Famous. 

Notorious,  well  known. 

Credulous. 

Critical. 

Formal,  straightforward. 

Superstitious. 

Skeptic,  skeptical. 


De  todo  corazon. 

"With  all  my  heart. 

En  su  interior. 

In  his  mind. 

Ya  caigo. 

I  see  (or  understand). 

Bien  venido. 

"Welcome. 

A  cual  mas. 

"Vieing  with  each  other. 

De  buena  f6. 

In  good  faith. 

Esto  es. 

That  is. 

Ya  lo  ve  V. 

So  .you  see. 

Sol. 
Amor. 


Sun. 
Love, 


Oracion. 
Tierra. 


Prayer. 
Earth,  land. 


Cielo.  Skj,  heaven. 

"Reino.  Kingdom. 

Fin.  End,  purpose. 

Deudor.  Debtor. 

General.  General. 

Cuervo.  Eaven,  crow. 

Agiiero.  Omen. 

Interior.  Interior. 

Espiritu.  Spirit. 

Lodo.  Mud. 
El  padre  nuestro.  The  Lord's  Prayer. 

Tren.  Train. 
Parroquiano.  Parishioner,  customer 

Lector.  Reader. 


LESSON     XLV. 

Calva. 


Ana. 

Voluntad. 
Prpfecia. 
Fisonomia. 

Tentacion. 

Sinceridad. 

Injusticia. 

Ridiculez. 

Compasion. 

Materia. 

Bolsa. 
Excepcion. 
Frente. 
Formalidad. 


229 

Baldness,  the  bald 

part. 
Ann. 

Will,  choice. 
Prophecy. 
Physiognomy, 

countenance. 
Temptation. 
Sincerity. 
Injustice. 
Ridicule. 
Compassion. 
Matter. 
Faith. 
Purse. 
Exception. 
Forehead. 
Formality. 


COMPOSITION. 


Dios  te  lo  premie. 

Si  para  fines  de  ano  no  hubiere  pagado, 
Ic  apremias  {or  apremiale,  or  le  apre- 
miar4s). 

Si  viene  {or  como  venga)  sera  bien  re- 
cibido. 

Quien  tal  diga  miente. 

Si  asi  lo  haces,  Dios  te  lo  premie. 

Si  al  salir  de  tu  casa  vieres  volar  Cuer- 
vos, dejalos  volar  y  mira  tu  donde 
pones  Ids  pies. 

Todo  hombre  calvo  no  tendra  pelo ;  y 
si  tuviere  alguno  no  sera  en  la  calva. 

Le  perdonaran  todo  lo  que  hiciere. 

Le  escribire  a  V.  lo  que  me  dijere. 

Si  permaneciere  aquf  algun  tiempo  se  lo 

avisar^. 
Le  escribir6  a  V.  lo  que  diga. 


May  God  reward  you  for  it. 
If  at  the  end  of  the  year  he  has  not 
paid  you,  compel  him  to  do  scr. 

If  he  comes,  he  shall  be  well  received. 

Whoever  says  such  a  thing  lies. 

If  you  do  so,  may  God  reward  you. 

If  on  going  out  of  your  house  you  should 
see  crows  fly,  let  them  fly,  and  look 
where  you  put  your  own  feet. 

Every  bald  man  will  be  without  hair ; 
or  if  he  should  have  any,  it  will  not 
be  on  the  bald  part. 

They  will  forgive  him  every  thing  he 
may  do. 

I  will  write  to  you  what  he  may  (hap- 
pen to)  say  to  me. 

If  I  should  (or  should  I)  remain  here 
any  time,  I  will  let  you  know. 

I  will  write  to  you  what  he  may  say  to 
me. 


230 


LESSON     XLV. 


Le  perdonar^n  lo  que  haga. 

Si  hubiere  salido  cuando  V.  Uegue. 
Aunque  hubiere  llegado  kntcs  que  re- 

ciba  la  carta. 
Aunque  haya  llegado  ^ntes  que  reciba 

la  carta. 
El  general  mando  que  todos  los  que 

desertaran  fuesen  fusilados. 

El  general  mando  que  todoa  los  que 
hubieran  desertado  fuesen  fusilados. 

El  general  ha  mandado  que  todos  los 
que  desertaren  sean  fusilados. 

El  general  ha  mandado  que  todos  los 
que  hubieren  desertado  sean  fusila- 
dos. 

Quien  lo  dijere  miente. 

Si  viniere,  sera  bien  recibido. 

Si  asi  lo  hicieres. 


They  will  forgive  him  every  thing  he 

may  do. 
If  he  should  have  left  when  you  arrive. 
Although  he  may  have  arrived  before 

he  receives  the  letter. 
Although  he  may  have  arrived  before 

he  receives  the  letter. 
The  general  ordered  that  all  those  who 

might  (happen  to)  desert  should  be 

shot. 
The  general  ordered  that  all  those  who 

might  have  deserted  should  be  shot. 
The  general  has  ordered  that  all  those 

who  may  desert  {i.  e.  may  happen  to 

desert)  should  be  shot.    . 
The  general  has  ordered  that  all  those 

who  may  have  deserted  be  shot. 

Whoever  should  say  so  will  lie. 
If  he  should  come,  he  will  be  well  re- 
ceived. 
If  you  should  do  so. 


EXPLANATION. 

219.  The  future  simple  of  the  subjunctive  mood  repre- 
sents a  contingent  action  as  to  take  place  some  time  hence ;  as, 

I  will  write  to  you  what  he  may 

(happen  to)  say  to  me. 
They  will  forgive  him  everything  he 

may  do  in  future. 
If  I  should  (or  should  I)  remain  here 
any  time  I  shall  let  you  know. 


Le  escribir6  a  V.  lo  que  me  dijere. 

Le  perdonaran  todo  lo  que  hiciere. 

Si  permaneciere  aqui  algun  tiempo  se 
lo  avisar^. 


220.  The  present  of  the  subjunctive  may  be  substituted 
for  the  foregoing  tense,  except  when  the  verb  is  preceded  by 
the  conditional  si ;  as,  Ze  escribire  d  V.lo  que  diga ;  Leperdo- 
nardn  lo  que  haga. 

221.  The  future  compound,  which  is  not  so  much  used 
as  the  simple,  denotes  a  contingent  action  subordinate  to  a 
future  event ;  as, 

Si  hubiere  salido  cuando  V.  Uegue.      |      If  he  should  have  left  when  yon 

arrive. 


LESSON     XLV. 


231 


Aunque  hubiere  lie j ado   antes    que 
reclba  la  carta. 


Although  he  may  have  arrived  before 
he  receives  the  letter. 


222.  The  coaipound  peesei^t  of  the  subjunctive  may  be 
substituted  for  the  above  tense,  except  when  the  verb  is  pre- 
ceded by  the  conditional  si ;  as,  aunque  haya  llegado  dntes  que 
reciha  la  carta, 

223.  In  order  that  the  imperfect  and  phiperfect  of  the  sub- 
junctive, which  also  express  a  future  contingent  action  or 
event,  be  not  misapplied,  as  too  frequently  they  are,  and  con- 
founded with  the  future  simple  and  compound  future  of  the 
same  mood,  the  following  distinction  must  be  attentively 
observed : 

1st.  That  the  imperfect  and  pluperfect  may  be  employed 
when  the  actions  or  events  expressed  in  the  sentence  are  future 
only  in  reference  to  some  other  time  expressed,  or  merely  im- 
plied, in  the  sentence. 

2d.  That  the  future  simple  and  compound  future  must  be 
used  when  the  contingent  action  or  event  implied  in  the  sen- 
tence is  future  with  regard  to  the  action  expressed  by  the 
determining  verbs ;  as, 

The  general  ordered  that  all  those 
who  should  (might  happen  to)  de- 
sert should  be  shot. 

The  general  ordered  that  all  those 
who  had  (might  have)  deserted 
should  be  shot. 

The  general  has  ordered  that  all  those 
who  desert  {i.  e.  may  happen  to 
desert)  shall  be  shot. 

The  general  has  ordered  that  all  those 
who  have  deserted  shall  be  shot. 


El  general  mando  que  todos  los  que 
desertaran  fuesen  fusilados. 

El  general  mand6  que  todos  los  que 
hubieran  desertado  fuesen  fusilados. 

El  general  ha  mandado  que  todos  los 
que  desertaren  scan  fusilados. 

El  general  ha  mandado  que  todos  los 
que  hubiereii  desertado  sean  fusi- 
lados. 


224.  The  future  simple  and  the  compound  future  of  the 
subjunctive  also  act  as  determining  verbs ;  but  they  govern  the 
subordinate  verb  only  in  the  present  or  the  future  simple  of  the 
indicative,  and  in  the  imperative ;  as. 


Quien  lo  dijere,  mienie. 

Si  viniere  serd  bien  recibido. 


Whoever  should  say  so  will  lie. 
If  he  should  come,  he  shall  be  well 
received. 


232  LESSON     XLV 


Si  asf  lo  hicicres.  Dios  tc  lo  premie. 

Si  para  fines  de  ano  no  hubiere paga- 
do,  le  apremias,  or  apremialcy  or 
le  apremiards. 


If  you  do  80,  may  God  reward  you 

for  it. 
If  at  the  end  of  the  year  he  has  not 

paid  you,  compel  him  to  do  so. 


These  determining  sentences  of  the  future  simple  of  the 
subjunctive  may  be  turned  to  the  present  indicative  in  certain 
cases,  and  to  the  present  subjunctive  in  others  ;  as, 


Si  viene^  or  como  venga,  ser4  bien  re- 

cibido. 
Quien  tal  diga  miente. 
Si  asi  lo  hacesy  Dios  te  lo  premie,  etc. 


If  he  comes,  he  shall  be  well  re- 
ceived. 

Whoever  says  so  lies?. 

If  you  do  so,  may  God  reward  you 
for  it. 


CONYERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  Don  Jos6,  me  han  dicho  que  es  mal  aguero  al  salir  uno  de  su  casa 
ver  volar  cuervos ;  i  qu6  piensa  Y.  sobre  ello  ?  Yo  pienso  como  Don 
Francisco  de  Quevedo. 

2.  ^  Y  qu6  es  lo  que  pensaba  ese  famoso  escritor  sobre  esta  materia  ? 
Oiga  V.  lo  que  61  decia. 

3.  Si  al  salir  de  tu  casa  vieres  volar  cuervos,  ddjalos  volar,  y  mira  tti 
donde  pones  los  pi6s. 

4.  I  Ah !  I  bah  ;  Quevedo  era  un  criticon  que  no  perdonaba  nada, 
pero  alld  en  su  interior  quiz^  creia  un  poquito  como  todo  el  mundo  en 
los  agueros ;  i  no  cree  V.  asi  ?  i  Qu6  si  creia  ?  Por  supuesto  que  si.  Yea 
Y.  aqui  otro  de  los  agueros  en  que  creia. 

6.  Si  vas  a  coraprar  algo,  y  al  ir  A  pagar  no  hallares  la  bolsa  adonde 
llevabas  el  dinero,  es  aguero  malisimo,  y  no  te  sucederd  bien  la  compra. 

6.  I  Toma  I  Esa  es  una  verdad  de  PerogruUo,  y  ya  veo  que  Y.  no 
cree  en  los  agtleros  pero  al  m6nos  Y.  creerd  en  las  profecias ;  j  no  es  ver- 
dad, Don  Jos6  ?  I O I  si,  sefiora,  mucho,  sobre  todo  en  las  de  Pero- 
gruUo. 

7.  iQu6  profecias  son  esas,  que  nunca  las  he  oido?  Sefiora  no  podr6 
relatdrselas  d  Y.  todas,  pero  le  dir6  d  Y.  algunas  si  Y.  lo  desea. 

8.  Con  mucho  gusto,  hdgame  Y.  el  favor.  Pues  bien,  oiga  Y. ;  "  Si 
Uoviere  habrd  lodos."     "El  que  tuviere  tendrd." 

9.  1  Ah  1  ya  caigo ;  es  por  esto  que  se  llama  cnalquiera  verdad  que  es 
muy  notoria,  verdad  de  PerogruUo.  i  Yamos !  aqui  viene  Don  Enrique, 
puede  ser  que  61  crea  en  algo,  porque  Y.  no  cree  en  nada. 

10.  A  los  pies  de  Y.,  Dofla  Anita. — Beso  d  Y.  la  mano  Don  Enrique. 


LESSON     XLV.  233 

11.  A  las  6r(ienes  de  V.,  Don  Jose. — Bien  venido,  Don  Enrique. — Aqui 
tiene  V.  a  Dofia  Anita  empenada  en  hacerme  supersticioso. 

12.  Y  V.  es  tambien  esc^ptico,  no  cree  V.  en  snenos,  en  espiritus,  en 
fisonomias,  i  en  qne  cree  Y.,  Don  Enrique  ?  Yo,  senorita,  soy  un  hombre 
muy  credulo,  creo  en  todo,  creo  hasta  las  mujeres. 

13.  Mil  gracias,  Don  Enrique ;  yo  creia  que  la  sinceridad  estaba  siempre 
de  parte  de  la  mujer  y  no  del  hombre,  pues  son  Yds.  todos  a  cual  raaa 
falso. — Sefiorita,  6  V.  nos  hace  una  injusticia,  6  yo  soy  una  excepcion ; 
pero  volviendo  a  lo  de  las  creencias,  confieso  de  buena  fe  que  soy  un  poco 
supersticioso. — Me  alegro  mucho,  de  ese  modo  me  ayudara  Y.  a  convertir 
&  Don  Jos6  que  no  cree  en  nada. 

14.  Perdone  Y.,  sefiorita,  yo  creo  en  una  de  las  cosas  que  Y.  ha  men- 
cionado,  esto  es,  en  las  fisonomias. — ;  Bien,  bien  I  expliquenos  Y.,  entonces, 
su  significado. 

15.  El  que  tuviere  la  frente  ancha  tendra  los  ojos  debajo  de  la  frente, 
y  vivira  todos  los  dias  de  su  vida. — \  For  Dios !  Don  Jose,  hable  Y.  for- 
malmente. 

16.  Pues  bien,  con  toda  formalidad.  Todo  hombre  calvo  no  tendra 
pelo,  y  si  tuviere  alguno  no  sera  en  la  calva. 

17.  j  Ya  lo  ve,  Y. !  se  burla  de  todo,  y  no  cree  en  nada,  es  un  esceptico 
completo.  Defiendase  Y.,  amigo  Don  Jos6,  6  quiza  es  verdad  que  no 
cree  Y.  en  nada.     Ent6nces  le  compadezco  4  Y.  de  todo  corazon. 

18.  I  Hombre  I  dejeme  Y.  en  paz,  y  guarde  Y.  su  compasion  para 
todas  esas  pobres  gentes  que  creen,  6  afectan  creer,  todas  esas  ridiculeces ; 
yo  creo  lo  que  veo ;  creo  lo  que  siento,  y  creo  lo  que  mi  razon  me  acon- 
seja  creer;  por  eso  creo  en  el  sol,  en  el  amor,  en  Dios.— jYamos!  ahora 
va  d  hacernos  creer  que  es  hombre  muy  religioso. 

19.  Senor  Don  Jose,  esta  sefiorita  y  yo  tenemos  grandes  deseos  de 
aprender  el  Padre  nuestro  en  espafiol ;  i  lo  sabe  Y.  ?  No  solamente  lo  se, 
siuo  que  es  una  oracion  que  me  gusta  mucho. 

20.  ^Quiere  Y.  hacernos  el  favor  de  decimosla?  Con  mucho  gusto, 
helo  aqui. 

21.  "  Padre  nuestro,  que  estas  en  los  cielos,  santificado  sea  tu  nombre, 
^enga  a  nos  el  tu  reino.  Hagase  tu  voluntad,  asi  en  la  tierra  como  en  el 
cielo.  El  pan  nuestro  de  cada  dia  danosle  hoy.  Perdonanos  nuestras 
deudas,  como  nosotros  perdonaraos  a  nuestros  deudores.  Y  no  nos  dejes 
caer  en  tentacion.     Y  libranos  de  mal^"    Amen. 

22.  Mil  gracias,  Don  Jos6 ;  voy  a  aprenderlo  de  memoria  porque  me 
Buena  muy  bien  en  espanol. 


234  LESSON     XLV. 


EXERCISE. 


1.  At  what  o'clock  does  the  sun  rise  at  New  York  in  the  month  of 
September  ?  The  sun  rose  here  this  morning  at  twenty-seven  minutea 
past  five  o'clock. 

2.  What  did  your  teacher  say  to  you  to-day  when  your  lessons  were 
finished?  Nothing  to  me  in  particular;  he  spoke  to  all  of  us  about 
reading  good  books,  as  very  necessary  in  order  to  acquire  the  love  of 
truth  and  sincerity  in  all  our  actions. 

3.  Here  are  the  works  of  Francis  de  Quevedo ;  have  you  ever  read 
them  ?  Yes,  very  often ;  and  I  admire  very  much  his  profound  knowl- 
edge of  the  human  heart. 

4.  He  is  also  somewhat  of  a  jester;  is  he  not?  Yes,  but  for  a  very 
wise  end ;  he  shows  all  the  ridicule  of  the  belief  in  auguries,  omens — ^for 
instance,  the  flight  (puelo)  of  crows,  &c. 

5.  What  do  you  think  of  his  prophecies?  The  only  end  of  his 
prophecies  seem  to  be  to  divert  his  readers,  telling  them  that  all  bald 
persons  will  have  no  hair,  or  if  they  should  have  any,  it  will  not  be  on 
the  bald  place. 

6.  Do  you  know  what  the  general  has  ordered  ?  He  has  given  orders 
that  all  the  soldiers  that  desert  shall  be  shot. 

7.  Do  you  pity  that  poor  soldier  who  is  to  be  shot  ?  I  did  not  know 
there  was  one  to  be  shot ;  what  crime  did  he  commit  ?     He  deserted. 

8.  What  will  they  do  to  that  robber  if  they  find  him  ?    He  will  be  shot. 

9.  Do  you  not  think  he  deserves  to  be  shot?  There  can  be  no  doubt 
of  it :  he  who  kills  a  man  must  die  by  the  hand  of  man. 

10.  Are  there  still  superstitious  people  in  the  world  ?  Yes,  a  very 
great  many ;  and  I  must  say,  that,  even  amongst  the  learned,  we  find  a 
great  number  whose  education  should  lead*  us  to  have  a  higher  opinion 
of  them. 

11.  Has  that  gentleman  paid  you  yet  the  money  he  owed  you  such  a 
long  time  ?    Not  yet ;  indeed  I  begin  to  fear  he  will  never  pay  me. 

12.  If  he  should  not  pay  you  before  he  leaves  the  country,  compel  him 
to  do  so.     So  I  intend  to  do. 

13.  How  long  does  your  father  intend  to  remain  in  Germany  ?  Perhaps 
two  or  three  mouths ;  but  should  he  remain  longer,  he  will  write  for  me 
to  go  to  him.  ^ 

14.  Welcome,  Mr.  Martinez  1  how  long  have  you  been  in  town  ?  Only 
a  few  days ;  and  I  shall  return  homo  as  soon  as  I  hear  from  my  brother. 

15.  What  a  fine  forehead  that  young  lady  has !  I  Iiave  never  seen 
such  a  beautiful  countenance,  with  the  exception  of  that  of  a  lady  whom 
I  met  in  Spain  a  few  years  ago. 

♦  Debcria  hacernoa. 


LESSON     XLVI< 


235 


LESSON    XLVI. 


Adivinar. 

To  guess. 

Acordar. 

To  agree,  to  tune. 

Acordarse 

. 

To  recollect,  to  remember. 

Colocar. 

To  lay,  to  place. 

Meter. 

To  put,  to  make  (noise). 

Peinar. 

To  comb. 

Picar. 

To  prick,  to  chop,  to  hash. 

Persistir. 

To  persist. 

Eomper. 

To  break. 

Coger. 

To  take,  to  catch. 

Esconder. 

To  hide,  to  conceal. 

INTEKJI 

-CTIONS. 

lAyl 

Ay! 

jZape!                 Heaven  preserve 

jEal 

Cheer  up !  come, 

us! 

come ! 

j  Victoria !           Victory ! 

I  Eh  I 

Oh!  ah! 

iC6mo!                How! 

iHuy! 

Whew! 

I  Anda !                Go !  go  away ! 

I  Ox! 

Get  you  gone ! 

iCalle!                 Strange! 

jSus! 

Come!  come! 

j  Chito  {or  chi-     Hush ! 

I  Uf  {or  huf )  I 

Ugh! 

ton)! 

jHola! 

Halloa! 

iDiantre!             The  deuce! 

J  Tate  1 

Take  care ! 

^  .  -.   -.   .          \  Look  out ! 
iCmdado!         j  Take  care!      [us! 

iCa! 

Pshaw ! 

1  Viva ! 

Hurrah ! 

I  Dios  nos  libre !  Heaven  preserve 

jDale! 

Go! 

I  Vamos !             Come ! 

I  Qu6  horror ! 

0  horror ! 

iVuelta!             Turn  about  {or 
round)  I 

Finalmente. 

Finally. 

Llevar  a  cabo. 

To  accomplish. 

Llevarse  chasco. 

To  be  disappointed. 

Cabal. 

Just,  exact. 

Fresco. 

Cool,  fresh. 

Listo. 

Ready,  quick. 

Restante. 

Remaining,  remainder. 

Telegraficc 

Telegraphic. 

Extraordin 

ario. 

Extraordinary. 

Dichoso. 

Happy. 

236 


LESSON     XLVI, 


Aire. 

Air. 

Camisa. 

Shirt,  chemise. 

Cambio. 

Change. 

Cuenta. 

Account. 

Alfiler. 

Pin. 

Empresa. 

Enterprise. 

Atlantico. 

Atlantic. 

Cualidad. 

Quality. 

Exito. 

Issue. 

Austria. 

Austria. 

Buen  6xito. 

Success. 

Palangana. 

Wash-basin,  wash- 

Cable. 

Cable. 

bowl 

Peine. 

Comb. 

Pnisia. 

Prussia. 

Presidente. 

President. 

Procesion. 

Procession. 

Euido. 

Noise. 

Constancia. 

Constancy. 

Chasco. 

Disappointment. 

Prueba. 

Proof,  trial. 

Patio. 

Yard,  pit  (theatre). 

Tranquilidad. 

Tranquillity. 

Tratado. 

Treaty,  treatise. 

Victoria. 

Victory. 

Dolor. 

Pain,  grief. 

Gaceta. 

Gazette,    news- 

Asombro. 

Amazement 

paper. 

Maullido. 

Mewing. 

Gato. 

Cat. 

COMPOS 

[TIOX. 

I  Ah !  que  desgracia  1 

i  Ay  de  mi ! 

i  Oh !  dolor  ! 

jAh!  briboni 

J  Ah !  que  alegrla  I 

j  Oh  !  asombro  I 

i  Ay,  si  le  cojo  ! 

i  Oh  !  ya  nos  ver6mos ! 

J  Bah  !  no  babies  de  esa  manera  ! 

I  Iluy !  me  quem6  con  el  cigarrillo  I 

j  Uf !  que  calorazo ! 

1  Ea,  h  trabajar ! 

i  Tate !  tate  !  no  pase  V.  per  ahf,  que 

veo  un  hombre  escondido  ! 
vl  I  Zape !  ese  gatazo  no  me  deja  dormir 

con  sua  mauUidoa  1 
j  Toma  !  toma  !  cso  ya  lo  sabia  yo. 
J  Viva  la  libertad  ! 
i  Diantre  de  muchachos !  y  qu6  ruido 

mctcn  I 
;  Ilola !    D.   Francisco  I    dichosoa    los 

ojoa  que  lo  ven  a  V  I 


Ah !  how  unfortunate  I 

Woe  is  me ! 

Ah  !  how  sad ! 

Ha !  rascal ! 

Ah  !  what  joy  ! 

Oh !  wonder ! 

Let  me  get  hold  of  him  1 

Oh  !  I  shall  see  you  again  ! 

Phsaw  !  don't  talk  that  way ! 

Whew !  I  have  burned  myself  with  the 

cigarette ! 
Oh  !  how  warm  it  is  ! 
Come  to  work  ! 
Take  care  !  don't  go  that  way ;  I  see  a 

man  hiding ! 
Heaven  preserve  us !  that  confounded  cat 

will  not  let  me  sleep  with  its  mewing ! 
That's  all,  eh !  I  knew  that  much  myselfl 
Hurrah  for  liberty ! 
Did  you  ever  hear  such  children  ?  what 

a  noise  they  make ! 
Halloa  !   Mr.  Francis !   it  is  good  for 

sore  eyes  to  see  you  I 


LESSON     XLVI, 


237 


I  ^M^  me  sg  yo  ? 
La  cuenta  esta  cabal. 
,  /Espero  no  Uevarme  chasco,  y  que  Ue- 
vare  a  cabo  mi  empresa. 


How  can  I  tell  ? 
The  account  is  exact  (correct). 
I  hope  not  to  be  disappointed,  and  that 
I  shall  carry  out  my  undertaking. 


EXPLANATION. 

225.  Inter jECTioxs  are  words  which  serve  to  express  the 
different  emotions  and  affections  of  the  soul.  There  should  be  a 
separate  interjection  to  express  each  passion  or  emotion  ;  but  this 
not  being  the  case,  we  often  use  the  same  ones  to  express  joy, 
grief,  affright,  astonishment,  mockery,  anger,  &c.,  the  significa- 
tion of  each  interjection  changing  according  to  the  voice,  ges- 
ture and  manner  of  the  speaker. 

The  exclamations  that  are  properly  called  interjections  in 
Spanish,  inasmuch  as  they  have  no  other  use,  and  because  they 
consist  of  only  one  word,  are  the  following :  Ah,  ay,  bah,  ca, 
ehj  huy,  oh,  ox,  sus,  uf,  ea,  hola,  ojald,  tate,  zape,  and  a  few  others. 

Ah,  ay  and  6  are  used  indifferently  to  express  pain,  joy, 
mockery,  surprise,  scorn,  anger,  or  admiration  ;  as, 
/  Ah  1  que  desgracia !  Ah  !  what  misfortune  I 


/  Ay  de  ml ! 

I  Oh  I  dolor! 

/  Ah  1  bribon ! 

/  Ah  I  que  alegria  1 

/  Oh  !  asombro  ! 

/  Ah  !  que  necio  ! 

/  Ay  si  le  cojo  ! 

I  Oh  !  ya  nos  veremos !  etc.,  etc. 


Woe  is  me ! 

Ah  !  how  sad  1 

Ha !  rascal ! 

Oh!  what  joy! 

Oh!  wonder! 

Ah !  what  a  fool ! 

Let  me  get  hold  of  him ! 

Oh  !  I  shall  see  you  agam ! 


226.  /  Bah  !  expresses  displeasure,  and  sometimes  wonder 
and  admiration.  /  H'e  !  besides  being  used  to  attract  the  atten- 
tion, is  often  employed  in  the  sense  of  alas  !  /  8us  I  serves 
only  to  encourage,  j  Huy !  is  an  exclamation  expressive  of 
pain.  /  Ea  !  serves  to  encourage,  and  sometimes  to  call  the  at- 
tention. We  use  J  hola!  to  call  our  inferiors,  and  intimate 
friends,  and  to  manifest  joy  and  surprise.  /  Tate  !  expresses 
surprise,  and  serves  to  warn  any  one  of  some  danger.  /  Ojald  I 
serves  to  manifest  ardent  desire  for  something. 


238  LESSON     XLVI. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 


1.  jEa!  ea!  muchachos,  arriba!  que  ya  es  hora  de  levantarse.— 
I  Pues  qu6  hora  es,  papa  ?  Ya  son  las  seis  y  quiero  que  os  vistais,  laveis 
y  tomeis  el  cafe  prontito,  para  ir  a  tomar  el  aire  fresco  de  la  manana  en 
la  plaza  de  Madison. 

2.  i  Sus !  arriba !  y  el  que  se  me  presente  primero  listo  ird  k  comprar- 
me  el  Heraldo  y  tendra  el  centavo  del  cambio. — Helena,  ponme  agua 
para  lavarme. — No,  Helena,  no  ayudes  a  Alejandro  que  ese  ya  puede  ves- 
tirse  solo,  ayuda  d  Carlotita  y  4  Manolito. 

3.  Luisa,  dame  mis  zapatos  y  mis  medias. — Buscalos  tti  mismo,  yo  no 
voy  a  ayudarte  para  que  te  vistas  antes  que  yo. 

4.  j  Cuidado !  i  no  veis  que  vais  d  romper  esa  palangana  ?  Es  est« 
Manuel  que  todavia  no  se  ha  puesto  mas  que  una  media  y  un  zapato  y  se 
quiere  lavar  antes  que  yo,  que  me  he  puesto  ya  la  camisa,  los  zapatos  y 
el  pantalon. 

5.  J  Ay  !  ay  !— ^Qu6  es  eso,  Luisa?  Me  he  picado  con  el  alfiler  que 
estaba  poniendo  en  mi  vestido. 

6.  I  En  d6nde  esta  el  jabon  ?     Qu6  me  s6  yo. 

7.  I  Carlota,  me  quieres  dar  el  peine,  6  te  vas  d  estar  peinando  todo  el 
dia  ?     D6jame  en  paz,  ahora  acabo  de  principiar. 

8.  Mama,  mire  V.  que  Alejandro  no  me  deja  ayudar  k  vestir  d  Manuel. 
I  Mama,  en  donde  esta  mi  sombrero  ? 

9.  Papa,  ya  estoy  listo,  d6me  V.  el  dinero  para  comprar  el  Eeraldo.—^ 
No,  no,  papa ;  mire  V.  que  se  ha  puesto  el  sombrero  sin  peinarse. 

10.  i  Como !  eso  no,  Alejandro,  no  se  sale  d  la  calle  sin  peinarse.— Papd, 
ya  estoy  listo. — Y  yo. — Y  yo. 

11.  i  Chiton  I  I  Diantre  de  muchachos  y  que  ruido  meten  I  AquI  te- 
nds diez  centavos,  cuatro  para  el  Heraldo  y  de  los  seis  restantes  uno  para 
cada  uno,  cuenta  cabal,  metraeis  q\  Heraldo  y  despues  os  vais  a  la  plaza  y 
no  volvais,  d  lo  menos  en  un  par  de  horas. 

12.  Margarita,  ahora  que  tenemos  tranquilidad  traeme  lapipa,  antes  de 
ponerme  a  escribir,  fumare  un  poco  y  leer6  las  noticias  en  el  patio  al  fresco. 

13.  Hola !  gramles  noticias  I  ^  Qu6  hay  de  nuevo  ?  YX  Great  Eastern 
ha  llegado,  y  se  dice  que  el  gran  cable  telegrdfico  ha  sido  finiUmente  colo- 
cado,  uniendo  ast  la  Europa  y  la  Am6rica. 

'  14.  I  Es  posible  I  ent6nces  pronto  tendr^mos  noticias  todos  los  dias  de 
Europa. — Asi  lo  espero,  pero  no  debemos  estar  muy  seguros  de  ello,  por- 
que  ya  to  acordaras  del  chasco  que  llevdmos  afios  pasados. 

15.  J  Ah!  si,  ya  mo  acucrdo ;  en  1858,  cuaudo  se  cclebr6  el  6xito  del 
cable  telegrdfico  con  aquella  grande  procesion,  y  se  vendia  por  la  calle  la 
gaceta  extraordinaria  con  el  parte  telegrdfico  de  la  Reiua  Victoria  al 


LESSON      XLVI.  239 

presidente  de  los  Estados  Unidos. — Espero  que  no  nos  llevemos  ahora  el 
mismo  cliasco. 

16.  j  J  La  extraordinaria ! !  ; ;  La  gaceta  extraordinaria !  I  j  Eh !  mucha- 
cho,  aqui,  aqui. 

17.  I  Cuanto  vale  ?    Diez  centavos. 

18.  i Victoria!  Viva!  Viva!  ^Qu6  dice  de  nuevo?  El  cable  del 
Atlantico  ha  tenido  buen  exito,  el  primer  parte  recibido  por  el  es  el  trata- 
do  de  paz  entre  el  Austria  j  la  Prusia. 

19.  Esta  es  una  prueba  mas  de  lo  que  puede  llevar  a  cabo  el  hombre, 
si  tiene  constancia  y  persiste  en  una  empresa. — i  Cree  V.  que  yo  tambien 
tendr^  buen  exito  en  mi  empresa  ? 

20.  I  Que  empresa  es  esa  ?  ;  Oomo  !  ^no  la  adivina  V.  ?  La  empresa 
de  aprender  el  espafiol. 

21.  jAh!  N"o  dudo  que  V.  hablara  espafiol  si  persiste  y  tiene  cons- 
tancia ;  puesto  que  con  estas  cualidades  se  ha  logrado  que  hable  el  cable 
del  Atlantico. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Can  you  tell  me  what  kind  of  weather  we  will  have  to-morrow  ? 
Oh,  what  a  question  !  Do  you  suppose  that  I  can  guess  the  weather  we 
will  have  before  it  comes  ? 

2r  Did  the  pianist  say  he  would  come  to  tune  the  piano  ?    lie  said  he 
would  come  to-morrow,  but  that  he  could  not  come  to-day. 
/     3.  Have  you  seen  that  the  Atlantic  telegraph  cable  is  laid  at  last? 
Yes-^I  am  glad  to  see  that  the  undertaking  has  been  so  successful. 

>/4.  Do  you  know  who  sent  the  first  dispatch  by  the  cable  ?  I  am  not 
sure ;  but  I  remember  that  the  first,  at  the  time  of  the  former  cable,  in 
1858,  was  that  sent  by  the  President  of  the  United  States  to  the  Queen 
of  England. 

5.  What  was  the  reason  of  laying  a  second  cable  ?  Ah,  come  now ! 
do  you  not  know  that  the  first  one,  having  broken  shortly  after  it  had 
been  laid,  became  entu-ely  useless  (inutil)  ? 

6.  Have  you  seen  the  news  to-day  by  Atlantic  telegraph  ?  l^o  ;  what 
is  the  news  ?  That  a  treaty  of  peace  has  been  signed  {celebrar)  between 
Prussia  and  Austria. 

7.  Charles,  go  and  find  the  comb,  wherever  you  put  it  when  you  had 
done  with  it.  I  have  not  seen  it  since  Henry  was  using  it ;  and  even  if 
I  had,  I  would  not  tell  you  where  it  was. 

8.  Ah,  you  little  rogue !  there,  you  have  broken  the  wash-basin.  It 
is  not  ray  fault,  Henry  wanted  it  first,  and  I  had  already  commenced  to 

.   wash  myself;  but  he  persisted  and  would  take  it  from  me.* 
>/   9.  0  horror !  just  look  at  the  state  his  hair  {pelo)  is  in !     Go  this 

♦  Persistio  en  quitiirmela. 


240  LESSON      XLVI. 

instant  and  get  the  comb  and  comb  your  hair  before  you  dare  to  appear 
before  me. 

10.  Have  you  a  pin  to  give  me?  Yes,  here  is  a  paper  of  pins;  take 
all  you  want  and  give  me  back  the  rest. 

11.  Did  you  know  your  lessons  well  this  morning?  Yes,  very  well, 
and  the  proof  is  that  papa  allowed  me  to  go  to  see  the  procession. 

12.  Wliat  did  you  kill  that  poor  little  fly  for  ?  Have  I  not  told  you 
many  times  that  I  don't  wish  you  to  catch  or  kill  flies  ? 

13.  Is  that  bread  fresh  ?  Yes,  sir,  the  baker  has  just  brought  it  a  few 
minutes  ago. 

14.  We  were  to  have  gone  to  the  yard  to  play  at  twelve  o'clock.  You 
may  go  now ;  but  do  not  make  much  noise. 

15.  Where  were  you  going  when  I  met  you?  We  were  coming  home 
to  dine. 

16.  Has  the  shoemaker- sent  you  his  bill  ?    Yes,  but  it  is  not  correct. 

17.  Has  not  your  uncle  written  to  you  since  he  went  away?  He  has 
sent  several  telegraphic  dispatches  to  my  father  on  business;  but  he  has 
not  written  to  us  once  {una  sola  vez). 

18.  Is  there  not  to  be  a  new  opera  to-night  ?  No ;  but  I  understand 
there  is  to  be  a  new  play  (comedia)  at  the  theatre. 

19.  That  is  nothing  extraordinary ;  there  are  new  pieces  very  often  now. 

20.  If  Louisa  were  a  little  taller  would  she  not  be  handsomer  than 
Jane  ?     She  would  at  least  be  quite  as  handsome. 

21.  Would  you  vrish  to  have  the  window  opened  ?  I  think  it  would 
be  much  cooler  if  it  were  open. 

22.  Would  you  not  like  me  to  repeat  to  you  that  story  I  told  you  the 
other  day  ?  If  you  had  time  I  should  be  much  obliged  to  you  to  tell  it 
to  me  once  more. 

23.  Would  not  quietness  be  much  better  for  that  gentleman  than  so 
much  noise  ?     He  could  not  live  without  noise. 

24.  Might  you  not  have  broken  your  arm  or  your  leg  when  you  fell 
out  of  your  carriage  ?    Yes,  if  1  had  not  taken  care. 

25.  If  I  had  wanted  money  when  I  was  in  the  country  would  you  not 
have  brought  me  some  ?    If  I  could  have  got  (conseguir)  it  I  would. 

26.  Would  your  aunt  not  have  been  disappointed  if  she  had  not  been 
in  time  to  take  the  three  o'clock  train  ?  She  would  have  been  terribly 
disappointed,  for  she  was  going  to  spend  the  day  at  a  friend's,  about  ten 
miles  out  of  town. 


LESSON     XLVII. 


241 


LESSON    XLVII. 


Acorapafiar 

. 

To  accompany. 

Cargar. 

To  load,  to  charge. 

Ourar. 

To  cure,  to  attend  (as  a  physician). 

Dafiar. 

To  injure,  to  damage. 

Deleitar. 

To  delight. 

Incomodar. 

To  incommode. 

Incomodarse. 

To  get  out  of  temper. 

Equivocar. 

To  mistake. 

Evitar. 

To  avoid,  to  shun. 

Instruir. 

To  instruct. 

Ocupar. 

To  occupy. 

Padecer. 

To  suffer. 

Solicitar. 

To  solicit,  to  apply  for,  to  urgeu 

Dimes  j  dir6tes. 

Ifs  and  ands. 

El  no  se  qu^ 

i. 

An  inexplicable  something. 

Dolor  de  cabeza. 

Headache. 

Masculino, 

Masculine. 

Amable. 

Amiable. 

Agradable. 

Agreeable. 

Extrangero. 

Foreign,  foreigner. 

Interesante. 

Interesting. 

Moribundo. 

Dying. 

Valiente. 

Valiant,  arrant. 

Femenino. 

Feminine. 

Acento. 

Accent. 

Alma.                Soul. 

Bolsillo. 

Purse. 

Comedia.           Comedy. 

Alitor. 

Author. 

Vara.                 Rod,  yard  (weo*- 

Esfuerzo. 

Effort,  bravery. 

ure). 

Efecto. 

Effect.          [ness. 

Libra.               Pound. 

Fastidio. 

Unease,  uneasi- 

Manteca,  or      Butter. 

Ciudadano. 

Citizen. 

Mantequilla. 

Hospital. 

Hospital. 

Calidad.             Quality. 

M6todo. 

Method. 

Cantidad.          Quantity. 

Trabajo. 

Labor,  work. 

Napoles. 

Naples. 

Real. 

Real. 

Sonido. 

Sound. 

Chelin. 

Shilling. 

11 


242 


LESSON     XLVII. 


COMPOSITION. 


El  porqu6  de  todaa  las  cosas. 


Los  ayes  del  moribundo. 

Los  dimes  y  dir6tes. 

El  cuando. 

El  no  se  qu6. 

El  tener  amigos  no  dana.  V 

Hay  horabres  de  un  saber  extraordi-y 

nario. 
Un  nada  le  incomoda. 
sj  La  constancia  y  el  trabajo  son  necesa- 

rios  al  hombre  en  todas  sus  empresas. 

«4  La  America  es  mayor  que  la  Europa. 
La  Francia  es  una  nacion  muy  poblada. 
El  clima  de  Espana. 
Los  esfuerzos  de  la  EspaHa. 
Cuatro  pesos  la  vara. 
Dos  reales  la  libra. 
Treinta  centavos  la  docena. 
Dos  veces  al  dia. 
Cuatro  pesos  por  vara. 
La  f6,  la  esperanza  y  la  caridad. 
El  Senor  De  Vargas  tiene  tres  niiios. 
La  Seiiora  Martinez  es  muy  prudente. 
Ella  me  dio  la  mano. 
Puso  la  mano  en  el  bolsillo. 
Muchos  caballeros  solicitaron  mi  mano. 

El  caballero  a  quien  vio  Y.  ayer  en  mi 
casa. 


The  why  and  the  wherefore  of  all 
things. 

The  groans  of  the  dying. 

The  ifs  and  ands. 

The  time. 

I  know  not  what 

It  is  hurtful  to  no  one  to  have  friends. 

There  are  men  of  extraordinary  knowl- 
edge. 

A  mere  nothing  incommodes  him. 

Constancy  and  labor  are  necessary  tc 
mankind  in  all  their  enterprises  (or 
undertakings). 

America  is  larger  than  Europe. 

France  is  a  very  populous  nation. 

The  climate  of  Spain, 

The  bravery  of  Spain. 

Four  dollars  a  yard. 

Two  reals  a  pound. 

Thirty  cents  a  dozen. 

Twice  a  day. 

Four  dollars  a  yard. 

Faith,  hope  and  charity. 

Mr.  Vargas  has  three  children. 

Mrs.  Martinez  is  very  prudent. 

She  shook  hands  with  me. 

He  put  his  hand  in  his  pocket. 

Many  gentlemen  have  solicited  my 
hand. 

The  gentleman  whom  you  saw  yesterday 
in  my  house. 


EXPLANATION. 

227.  Use  of  the  Article. — AU  or  any  of  the  parts  of 
speech,  and  sometimes  even  whole  sentences,  may  be  used  as 
nouns,  and  as  such  admit  the  article,  as  has  just  been  observed 
in  the  Composition  of  the  present  lesson,  in  which  we  see  exam- 
ples of  verbs,  adverbs  and  interjections  preceded  by  the  article, 
and  treated  in  every  respect  as  nouns  substantive. 

228.  The  definite  aeticle  is  to  be  used  before  all  com' 


LESSON     XLVII.  243 

mon  nouns,  taken  in  a  general  sense  and  in  the  full  extent  of 
their  signification ;  as, 

La  constancia  y  el  trabajo  son  necesa-  I  Constancy  and  labor  are  necessary  to 
rios  al  hombre  en  todas  sus  empresas.  |      mankind  in  all  undertakings. 

229.  The  article  is  expressed  before  the  names  of  the  four 
parts  of  the  globe :  before  the  names  of  empires,  kingdoms, 
provinces  and  countries ;  and  before  the  four  seasons  of  the 
year;  as, 

La  America  es  mayor  que  la  Europa.  America  is  larger  than  Europe. 

La   Francia   es   una   nacion  muy  po-  France  is  a  very  populous  nation. 

blada. 

El  inviemo  en  el  Sur  es  mas  agradable  The  winter  in  the  South  is  more  agree- 

que  el  verano.  able  than  the  summer. 

But  it  is  omitted  before  the  names  of  kingdoms,  provinces, 
&c.,  when  they  are  preceded  by  a  preposition  ;  unless  they  be 
personified,  as  has  been  observed  in  Lesson  XXX. ;  as. 
El  clima  cfe  Espana.  I  The  climate  of  Spain. 

Los  esfuerzos  de  la  Espana.  \  The  bravery  of  Spain. 

Kingdoms  bearing  the  same  name  as  their  capitals  do  not 
admit  the  article  ;  as,  NdpoUs^  Naples. 

230.  Nouns  of  measure,  weight,  &c.,  when  preceded  by 
the  indefinite  article  in  English,  as  an  equivalent  to  each,  re- 
quire the  article ;  as, 

Cuatro  pesos  la  vara.  Four  dollars  a  yard. 

Dos  reales  la  libra.  Two  reals  a  pound. 

Treinta  centavos  la  docena.  Thirty  cents  a  dozen. 

Dos  veces  al  dia.  Twice  a  day. 

If  the  preposition  por  be  used,  we  omit  the  article ;  as, 
cuatro  pesos  por  vara,  &c. 

231.  The  article  is  generally  repeated  before  every  noun 
enumerated,  especially  if  they  difier  in  gender ;  as, 

La  fe,  la  esperanza  y  la  caridad.  I  Faith,  hope  and  charity. 

Los  dias  y  las  noches.  |  The  days  and  nights. 

232.  The  definite  article  is  used  before  nouns  indicating 
rank,  office,  profession  or  titles  of  persons,  when  these  are  spoken 
of,  but  not  when  spoken  to  ;  as. 


El  General  Sheridan  es  valiente. 
El  Senor  De  Vargas  tiene  tres  ninos. 
La  Senora  Martinez,  es  muy  prudente. 


General  Sheridan  is  brave. 

Mr.  De  Vargas  has  three  children. 

Mrs.  Martinez  is  very  prudent. 


244  LESSON     XLVII. 

233.  The  definite  article  is  used  instead  of  the  possessive  ad* 
jective  when  the  possessives  refer  to  parts  of  our  own  body ;  as, 

Me  he  cortado  la  mano.  I  I  have  cut  my  hand. 

Me  duele  la  cahcza.  \  My  head  aches. 

This  applies  even  to  parts  of  the  body  of  other  persons  ;  as, 

Ella  me  dio  la  mano.  She  gave  me  her  hand  (or  shook  hands 

with  me). 
Fuse  la  mano  en  el  bolsillo.  He  put  his  hand  in  his  pocket. 

But  the  pronoun  must  be  used  when  the  personal  article  would 

occasion  ambiguity ;  as, 

Muchos  caballeros  solicitaron  mi  mano.  j  Many  gentlemen  solicited  my  hand. 

234.  The  definite  article  is  also  employed,  as  in  English, 
before  nouns  taken  in  2i  particular  or  definite  sense  ;  as, 

El  caballero  k  quien  vio  Y.  ayer  en  mi  I  The  gentleman  whom  you  saw  yester- 
casa.  j      day  in  my  house. 

We  forbear  from  adding  many  more  rules  which  we  might 
give,  if  they  were  not  subject  to  numerous  exceptions,  and, 
especially,  if  we  were  not  of  opinion  that  practice  and  reading 
will  teach  better  than  any  rules  when  to  employ  and  when 
to  omit  the  article. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  I  Cuul  de  las  partes  del  mundo  es  la  mayor  ?    El  Asia  es  la  major. 

2.  jEs  Asia  nombre  masculine?    No,  seflor,  es  feraenino. 

8.  Ent6nces,  jporqu6  le  pone  V.  el  articulo  masculiuo?  Por  evitar 
el  mal  sonido  que  resultaria  de  poner  dos  des  juntas. 

4.  I  Luego,  V.  pone  siempre  el  articulo  masculino  delante  de  todo 
nombre  feraenino  que  empieza  por  a?  No,  sellor;  esto  solo  sucede  en 
singular,  y  cuando  sobre  dicha  vocal  carga  el  acento  de  la  palabra. 

5.  ^Ila  leido  V.  el  "Si  de  las  niflas"  de  Moratin?  Si,  sefior,  lo  lei 
h ace  muchos  aflos;  pero  d  ml  me  gusta  mas  la  "Comedia  nueva"del 
mismo  autor. 

6.  iQu6  tal  le  gusta  d  V.  su  nueva  vecinita?  Dicen  que  es  may 
honita. — En  efocto  lo  es ;  pero  d  mi  no  me  gusta,  porque  anda  siempre  en 
dimes  y  dir6tos,  y  un  nada  la  incomoda. 

7.  iCudles  son  las  virtudes  del  alma?  La  f6,  la  esperanza  y  la  ca- 
ridad. 

8.  jTiene  V.  alguna  cosa  interesante  que  decirme  hoy?    Mucbisimas 


LESSO]S^XLVJI.       ,  245 

interesantisimas  6  importantisimas para  practicar  y  aprender  el 

espanol. 

9.  i  Uf !  JO.  va  V.  a  principiar  con  gus  adverbios,  preposiciones  j  arti- 
culos ;  va  Y.  a  decirrae,  por  supuesto,  que  estas  partes  de  la  oracion  unas 
veces  se  ponen  antes  las  unas  que  las  otras,  j  vice  versa ;  que  las  unas 
gobiernan  a  las  otras  j  las  gobernadas  gobiernan  a  su  vez  a  otras,  que 
se  acuerden  6  no  eutre  si.  i  Cre6  Y.  que  todo  eso  sera  interesante  para 
mi  con  el  fastidio  que  tengo,  j  el  dolor  de  cabeza  que  padezco  ?  j  Calle  I 
ent6nces,  caballerito,  Y.  ha  equivocado  la  casa. 

10.  I  Qu6  quiere  Y.  decir  con  eso  de  equivocar  la  casa  ?  Quiero  decir 
que,  en  lugar  de  venir  a  la  clase,  debio  Y.  ir  hoy  al  hospital  y  de  alii  al 
teatro. 

11.  ^Para  que  ?  Para  que  le  curasen  en  una  parte  de  sus  dolores  y  en 
la  otra  del  fastidio. 

12.  Si ;  pero,  Senor  Profesor,  yo  siempre  creia  que  el  mejor  metodo  de 
ensefianza  es  aquel  que  "instruye  deleitando."  Y.  tiene  mil  razones, 
pero  ha  olvidado  una  pequena  circunstancia  que  requiere  su  metodo. 

13.  ^Y  cual  es  esa  circunstancia?  Que  no  puede  aplicarse  sino  con 
aquellos  discipulos  que  se  deleitan  aprendiendo. 

14.  Y  ahora  volviendo  al  articulo. — Seiior  Profesor,  Y.  me  escusara, 
pero  no  volvamos  al  articulo  porque  no  puedo  quedarme  mas  aqui  hoy. 

15.  ^06mo  es  eso?  el  tierapo  de  la  leccion  no  ha  acabado  todavia. — - 
Y.  tiene  razon ;  pero  hoy  es  necesario  que  me  vaya  teraprano,  porque  he 
prometido  acompanar  a  unas  sefioritas  a  la  opera. 

16.  jOh!  entonces  es  necesario  no  faltar  a  su  palabra. — Sefior  Pro- 
fesor, buenas  noches  (este  buen  sefior  me  fastidia  con  sus  explicaciones). 
— Diviertase  Y.  mucho,  Sefior  Don  Pepito  (este  amable  j6ven  aprender^ 
espafiol,  para  el  tiempo  que  yo  compre  una  casa  en  la  Quinta  Avenida, 
ensefiandolo). 

EXERCISE. 

1.  If  I  should  come  for  you  this  evening,  would  you  come  with  m© 
to  see  the  Martinez  ?  I  would,  with  great  pleasure,  if  Charlotte  would 
accompany  us. 

2.  How  does  that  lady  speak  French  ?  They  say  she  speaks  very 
correctly,  though  with  a  slightly  foreign  accent. 

3.  Might  he  not  be  cured  if  he  called  in  a  good  physician  ?  He  is  of 
opinion  that  physicians  do  more  injury  than  good  to  mankind. 

4.  Do  you  know  any  thing  of  the  author  of  that  play  ?  Yes,  I  have 
read  (or  heard)  all  his  plays ;  they  are  very  interestiug,  and  delighted 
me  exceedingly. 

6.  "What  is  death  ?    The  separation  of  soul  and  body. 


246  LESSON     XLVII. 

6.  Can  one  be  a  citizen  of  the  United  States  without  having  been 
born  (nacer)  in  the  country  ?  Yes,  after  having  resided  in  the  United 
States  a  certain  number  of  years  any  one  may  become  a  citizen. 

T.  Where  is  that  poor  man  going  ?  To  the  hospital ;  he  has  broken 
his  leg. 

8.  Pardon  me,  I  think  you  are  mistaken ;  it  is  rather  his  arm  that  Is 
broken,  for  if  his  leg  were  broken  he  could  not  walk. 

9.  Do  you  remember  the  name  of  the  principal  city  of  Naples  ?  Yea, 
the  name  of  the  principal  city  is  that  of  the  kingdom  also. 

10.  Did  you  shake  hands  with  that  young  lady  ?  Yes,  as  soon  as  she 
saw  me  she  came  towards  me  and  gave  me  her  hand. 

11.  Is  that  cloth  (jpaUo)  sold  very  high?  2^ot  very;  it  costs  only 
three  dollars  a  yard. 

12.  How  often  do  you  take  your  Spanish  lessons  ?    Twice  a  week. 

13.  Would  you  not  learn  faster  if  you  took  a  lesson  every  other  day 
{un  dia  si  y  otro  no)  ?  My  teacher  says  I  would ;  but  I  have  not  time  to 
take  lessons  so  often. 

14.  Would  you  like  summer  to  return  again  ?  No,  thank  you,  I  am 
glad  it  is  past,  for  I  assure  you  I  have  suffered  enough  with  the  heat. 

15.  How  sad  it  is  on  the  field  of  battle  {campo  de  latalla)  to  hear  the 
groans  of  the  dying  I  Yes ;  and,  notwithstanding,  men  will  persist  ia 
killing  each  other  for  a  foot*  of  ground  (terreno). 

16.  How  is  butter  sold  a  pound?  Thirty  cents  for  one  kind,  and  forty 
cents  a  pound  for  the  best. 

17.  Do  you  think  it  can  injure  any  one  to  have  friends  ?  No,  it  can 
injure  nobody  to  have  friends. 

18.  Is  not  that  person  very  amiable  and  agreeable?  Very  rarely,  for 
a  mere  nothing  incommodes  him. 

19.  Are  there  many  learned  men  in  that  country?  There  have  been 
and  there  are  at  present  men  of  extraordinary  learning. 

20.  Which  are  the  three  principal  virtues  ?    Faith,  hope  and  charity. 

21.  Is  Miss  Cabargas  married  yet?  Not  yet,  although  a  large  number 
of  gentleman  have  solicited  her  hand. 

22.  I  suppose  you  have  all  read  some  Spanish  comedies?  Several 
Spanish  and  some  French  comedies,  by  the  best  dramatists. 

23.  Which  of  all  the  French  comedies  that  you  have  read  do  you  like 
best  ?    Those  of  Moli^re. 

♦  Falmo  Giterally  a  span). 


LESSON     XLVIII. 


247 


LESSON    XLVIII, 


Afirmar. 

Afligir. 

Adraitir. 

Atreverse. 

Criticar. 

Condescender, 

Convencer. 

Declarar. 

Depender. 

Disponer. 

Diferenciar. 

Edificar. 

Entretenerse. 

Fabricar. 

Suponer. 

Nombrar. 

Influir. 

Ocultar. 

Observar. 

Obedecer. 

Proporcionar. 

Pretender. 

Publicar. 

Que)  arse. 

Kegularizar. 

Reflexionar. 

Ridiculizar. 

Reformar. 

Lo  que  s6  decir. 

Sin  que  V.  me  lo  diga, 

Volver  d  las  andadas. 

Para  mi  tengo. 

A  trueque. 
Sin  embargo. 
Odndidamente. 
De  modo. 


To  affirm. 

To  afflict. 

To  admit,  to  accept. 

To  dare. 

To  criticise. 

To  condescend,  to  consent 

To  convince. 

To  declare. 

To  depend. 

To  dispose,  to  arrange. 

To  differ. 

To  edifj,  to  build. 

To  amuse. 

To  construct,  to  make,  to  build. 

To  suppose. 

To  name,  to  appoint 

To  influence,  to  affect. 

To  conceal,  to  hide. 

To  observe. 

To  obey. 

To  proportion,  to  procure,  to 

offer,  to  afford. 
To  pretend,  to  lay  claim  to,  to 

aspire  to,  to  sue  for. 
To  publish. 

To  complain,  to  moan. 
To  regulate. 
To  reflect. 
To  ridicule. 
To  reform. 

What  I  knoTT. 

Without  you  telling  me. 

To  do  so  again,  to  return  to 

(one's)  old  habits. 
It  is  my  opinion. 

On  condition. 

Nevertheless,  notwithstanding. 

Candidly. 

In  such  a  manner,  that,  so  that 


248 


LESSON     XLVIII. 


I  Bravo! 


I         Very  good !    Bravo  1 


Bruto. 

Brutish. 

Cierto. 

Certain. 

A6reo. 

Airy,  aeriaL 

Angelical. 

Angelical. 

Meal. 

Ideal. 

Interior. 

Interior. 

Incomplete, 

Incomplete. 

Imperfecto. 

Imperfect. 

Exterior. 

Exterior. 

Extrafio. 

Strange. 

Ignal. 

Equal,  the  same. 

Human  o- 

Humane. 

Positivo. 

Positive. 

Real. 

Real,  royal. 

Arquitecto. 
Anciano. 
Oiego. 
Cal  y  canto. 
Bruto. 
Idiota. 
Espacio. 
Oomplemento. 
Goce. 
Mai. 

Material. 
Objeto. 
Palacio. 
Pujaro. 
Enfermo, 
Prisionero. 
Pensamiento. 
Castillos  en  el 
aire. 


Architect. 

Old  man. 

Blind. 

Stone. 

Brute. 

Idiot. 

Space. 

Complement. 

Enjoyment. 

Evil. 

Material. 

Object. 

Palace. 

Bird. 

Sick. 

Prisoner. 

Thought. 

Castles  in  the  air. 


Oarrera. 

Desgracia. 

Diferencia. 

Curiosidad. 

Exageracion. 

Franqueza. 

Juventud. 

Ilusion. 

Felicidad. 

Risa. 

Realidad. 

Ruindad. 

Riquezas. 


Career. 
vMisfortuue. 

Difference. 

Curiosity. 
'^Exaggeration. 
>iFrankness. 

Youth. 

Illusion. 

Happiness. 

Laugh,  laughter. 
'^Reality. 

Meanness. 

Riches. 


AfHvino  el  raotivo  por  cl  cual  nos  ha- 
bian  adulado  los  mismos  que  des- 
pues  nos  critican,  criticaban,  critica- 
ron,  ban  criticado,  criticaran. 
\/Leiamo8  una  noticia  que  acababa  {or 
acaba)  de  publicarse. 


COMPOSITION. 

I  guess  the  motive  for  which  those  samw 
persons  who  bad  flattered  us  before, 
criticise,  did  criticise,  criticised,  have 
criticised,  will  criticise  us  afterward. 

We  were  reading  some  news  just  pub. 
Ushed  (that  had  just  been  published, 
or  has  just  been  published). 


LESSON     XLYIIT. 


249 


x/Contaba  la  desgracia  que  los  afligio. 

No  sere  yo  el  primero  que  se  atreva. 
Aprended  vosotros,  los  que  os  quejais, 

quejabais,  quejasteis,  habeia  quejado, 

quejareis. 
El  quiere  jugar. 

Nosotros  queremos  estudiar.  y 

v/El  hubo  de  condescender. 
Tengo  que  eallar.  > 

EUos  deben  estar  muy  ocupados. 
Quiero  {or  pienso)  salir. 
Afirmo  {or  declare)  que  saldre. 
Digo  que  saldre. 
y/  Es  util  estudiar  las  lenguas. 
Conviene  a  los  hombres  instruirse. 

El  estudio  de  las  lenguas  es  util. 
La  instruccion  conviene  a  los  hombre^ 
Conviene  que  yo  estudie. 
I/-  Es  util  que  los  hombres  se  instruyan. 


He  was  telling  the  misfortune  that  aflOict- 
ed  them. 

^I  shall  not  be  the  first  to  dare./^ 

Know,  you  who  complain,  vvere  com- 
plaining, complained,  had  complained, 
will  complain. 
^  He  will  (is  determined  to)  play. 

We  will  study. 

He  had  to  consent. 

I  have  to  be  silent. 

They  must  be  very  busy. 

I  wish  (or  intend  to)  go  out. 

I  affirm  (or  declare)  that  I  shall  go  out. 

I  say  that  I  shall  go  out. 

It  is  useful  to  study  languages. 
At  is  man's  interest  to  acquire  knowl- 


objeto  de  las  leyes. 
Deseo  que  me  comprendas. 
No  lograras  que  le  castiguen. 


Les  mando  eallar.  ) 

vliCS  mando  que  callasen. ) 
Impedir  que  se  cometan  injusticias  es  el  L'To  prevent  the  commission  of  injustice,/^' 


The  study  of  languages  is  useful. 
Knowledge  is  useful  to  man. 
It  is  my  interest  to  study. 
It  is   useful  to   mankind   to   possess 
knowledge. 

He  ordered  them  to  be  silent. 


Se  le  ayudara  si  fuere  necesario. 

He  sentido  que  no  se  convenza  (con- 

venciera  or  convenciese). 
Habr4  Uamado  para  que  le  abran  (abrie- 

ran  or  abriesen)  la  puerta. 
Creo  que  le  convencer^  facilmente.        ^ 
Reflexionare  lo  que  he  de  hacer.  v 

Pense  que  iba  a  matarla.  V 

Pense  que  enviara  {or  enviaria)  la  carta.  \ 


such  is  the  object  of  laws.  ^ 

"^I  wish  you  to  understand  me. 
>r  You  will  not  succeed  in  having  him 

punished. 
He  shall  have  help  if  it  be  necessary. 
I  was  sorry  he  would  not  be  convinced 

(or  was  not  convinced.) 
He  knocked,  of  course,  in  order  that 

the  door  may  (or  might)  be  opened. 
I  think  I  shall  convince  him  easily. 
I  shall  reflect  on  what  I  shall  do. 
I  thought  he  was  going  to  kill  her. 
I  thought  he  would  send  the  letter. 


EXPLANATION. 

235.  Correspondence  of  the  Tenses  with  each  other. 
— When  one  verb  is  connected  with  another  by  a  relative,  there 
are  many  combinations  in  which  the  determining  and  the  de- 
ll* 


250 


LESSON     XLVIII, 


termined  verbs  may  be  found ;  both  may  be  in  the  indicative 
or  in  the  subjunctive  mood,  or  one  in  the  indicative  and  the 
other  in  the  subjunctive;  but  both  cannot  be  in  the  infinitive 
or  in  the  imperative ;  as, 

I  guess  the  motive  for  which  those  same 
persons  who  have  flattered  us  before^ 
criticise,  did  criticise,  criticised,  have 
criticised,  will  criticise  us  afterward. 

We  were  reading  some  news  that  had 
(or  has)  just  been  published. 

He  was  telling  the  misfortune  that 
afiflicted  them. 

I  shall  not  be  the  first  to  dare. 

Learn,  you  who  complain,  were  com- 
plaining, complained,had  complained, 
will  complain. 


Adivino  el  motivo  por  el  cual  nos  ha- 
bian  adulado  los  mismos  que  nos 
critican^  criticaban^  criticaron,  han 
criticado,  criticardn. 

Leiamos  una  noticia  que  acdbaha  (or 
acaha)  de  publicarse. 

Contaha  la  desgracia  que  los  afligid. 

No  sere  yo  el  primero  que  se  atreva. 
Apr  ended  vosotros  los  que  os  quejai% 

quejabais,  quejasieis^  habeis  quejado, 

quejareis. 


236.  The  determined  verb  is  put  in  the  infinitive  whenever 
tt  has  the  same  subject  as  the  determining  verb  j  as, 


!l^l  quiere  jugar, 

Nosotros  queremos  estudiar. 


He  wishes  to  play. 
We  wish  to  study. 


This  is  the  reason  why  the  auxiliaries  hdber  de,  tener  que, 
deber,  always  require  the  governed  verb  in  the  infinitive,  be- 
cause the  subject,  or  nominative,  is  the  same  for  both  verbs ;  as, 

tel  hubo  de  condescender. 

Tengo  que  callar. 

Ellos  deben  estar  muy  ocupados. 


He  had  to  consent. 
I  have  to  be  silent. 
They  must  be  very  busy. 


An  exception  to  this  rule  occurs  when  the  determining  verb 
expresses  a  firm  and  decided  affirmation ;  and  so  we  say : 
Quiero  {or  pienso)  salir.  I  I  wish  (or  intend)  to  go  out. 

Afirmo  (dcclaro)  que  saldre.  \  I  affirm  (or  declare)  that  I  shall  go  out 

"We  must  also  except  the  verb  decir,  which  cannot  govern 
another  verb  in  the  infinitive,  because  whenever  we  employ  it 
to  announce  our  own  actions  it  is  not  with  the  purpose  of  re* 
lating  them,  but  to  manifest  our  resolution  to  execute  them ;  as, 
Digo  que  saldrL  |  I  say  I  shall  go  out. 

237.  When  the  determining  verb  is  «6r,  or  any  impcrson- 


LESSON     XLVIII. 


261 


Es  titil  estudiar  las  lenguas. 
Conviene  a  los  hombres  instruirse. 


al  verb,  and  the  governed  verb  has  no  subject,  the  latter  is 
placed  in  the  infinitive ;  as, 

It  is  useful  to  study  languages. 
It  is  the  interest  of  mankind  to  acquire 
knowledge. 

And  such  is  the  natural  construction,  because  the  true  sub- 
ject of  this  proposition  is  the  very  infinitive  itself,  which  stands 
there  as  a  noun,  an  office  that  cannot  be  performed  by  the 
other  moods.     The  above  sentences  are  equivalent  to  these  : 

El  estudio  de  las  lenguas  es  util.  The  study  of  languages  is  useful. 

La  instruccion  conviene  a  los  hombres.     It  is  the  interest  of  mankind  to  acquire 

knowledge. 

238.  But  if  the  determined  verb  also  has  a  nominative,  then 
it  must  be  placed  in  the  subjunctive;  as, 


Conviene  que  yo  estudie. 

Ea  util  que  los  hombres  se  instniyan. 


It  is  my  interest  to  study. 
It  is  useful  to    mankind   to    possess 
knowledge. 

Those  verbs  that  express  command,  govern  either  of  the 
two  forms,  since  we  say  equally  well : 
Les  mando  collar.  \  I 

Les  mando  que  callasen.  \  |  ^^  «^^^^^^  *^^"^  *«  ^^  ^^^^^*- 

239.  When  the  determining  verb  is  in  the  infinitive,  in 
the  present  or  future  of  the  indicative,  or  in  the  imperative, 
connected  with  the  governed  verb  by  a  conjunction,  this  latter 
verb  is  put  in  the  subjunctive  mood,  ordinarily  in  the  present 
or  in  the  future  ;  as. 


Impedir  que  se  comeian  injusticias  es  el 

objeto  de  las  leyes. 
Deseo  que  me  coniprendas. 
No  hgrards  que  le  castigiten. 

Se  le  ayudard  si  fuere  necesario. 


To  prevent  the  commission  of  injustice, 
such  is  the  object  of  the  laws. 

I  wish  you  to  understand  me. 

You  will  not  succeed  in  having  him 
punished. 

He  will  have  help  if  it  be  necessary. 

240.  The  preterit  indefinite  and  compound  future  of  the 
indicative  govern  the  determined  verb  in  the  present  or  imper- 
fect of  the  subjunctive  ;  as. 


He  sentido  que  no  se  convenza  {conven- 

ciera  or  convenciese). 
Habr&    Ham  ado    para    que    le   abran 

{abrieran  or  abriesen)  la  puerta. 


I  was  sorry  he  should  not  be  (or  was 

not)  convinced. 
He  knocked,  of  course,  in  order  that 

the  door  may  (or  might)  be  opened. 


252  LESSON     XLVIII. 

241.  When  the  determining  verb  is  in  the  indicative,  it  gen- 
erally governs  the  determined  one  in  the  same  mood,  if  the 
nominative  is  the  same  for  both  verbs  ;  as, 
Oreo  que  le  convencere  facilmente.  I  I  think  I  shall  convince  him  easily. 

Rejlexionare  lo  que  he  de  hacer.  |  I  shall  reflect  on  what  I  have  to  do. 

But  if  each  verb  has  a  different  nominative,  the  second 
verb  may  be  placed  in  the  indicative  or  in  the  subjunctive ;  as, 


I  thought  he  was  going  to  kill  her. 
I  thought  he  would  send  me  the  letter. 


Pense  que  iba  k  matarla. 
Perwe  que  me  enviara  (or  enviaria)  la 
carta. 

Much  more  might  be  said  upon  this  subject,  did  we  not  fear 
to  exceed  the  limits  prescribed  by  the  nature  of  the  present 
work. 


CONYERSATION  AND  VEPwSION. 

1.  Dofla  Luisita,  ^Le  gusta  d  Y.  formar  castillos  en  el  aire  ?  Mncho ; 
pero  creo  que  fonno  demasiados. 

2.  Me  alegro  mucho  que,  como  d  mi,  le  guste  d  Y.  el  mundo  de  las  ilu- 
siones,  y  tambien  apruebo  su  frajiqueza  de  Y.  en  confeearlo. — Y  iporqa6 
lo  habia  de  ocultar?     ^Qu6  mal  hay  en  eso? 

3.  No  s6  si  hay  mal  6  no,  lo  que  s6  decir  es,  que  todo  el  mundo  afecta 
no  formarlos  y  con  cierta  risita  burlona  pretenden  ridiculizar  a  los  que, 
como  Y.  y  yo,  confesamos  candidamente  que  los  hacemos. 

4.  g  Y  cree  Y.,  D.  Jos6,  que  esas  gentes  vivan  sin  ilusiones  de  ninguna 
especie?  No,  senorita,  no  lo  creo.  Dios  ha  dado  d  todo  hombre,  d 
diferencia  del  bruto,  un  mundo  ideal  interior  ademds  del  mundo  positive 
exterior,  d  excepcion  de  los  idiotas. 

5.  I  Cudnto  me  alegro  de  oirlo !  ;  porque  yo  tenia  tanta  vergtlenza  de 
mis  pobres  castillos  en  el  aire  1  i  De  modo  es  que  Y.  cree  que  yo  no  soy 
sola  ?  De  ningun  raodo,  todo  el  mnndo  los  forma,  la  diferencia  solo  existe 
en  la  manera. 

6.  j  Ah !  Don  Jos6,  Y.  me  va  pareciendo  un  buen  arquitecto  de  casti- 
llos en  el  aire  y  uno  de  estos  dias  voy  d  pedirle  que  me  muestre  uno  de  los 
muchos  que  habrd  edificado.— Con  mucho  gusto,  seflorita,  d  trueque,  sin 
embargo,  de  que  Y.  me  admita  en  uno  de  sus  palacios  a6reos. 

7.  No,  eso  no,  jamds  podria  yo  poner  en  evidencia  mis  castillos ;  pero 
Y.  dice  que  la  diferencia  solo  existe  en  la  manera  de  formarlos ;  explique- 
me  Y.  esto,  quiza  asl  lograr6  reformar  los  mios,  porque  he  observado  que 
ton  incompletes ;  siempre  Ics  fulta  algo. — Pues  es  extraflo,  scftorit/i,  por« 


LESSON     XLVIII.  253 

que  yo  creia  que  solo  las  cosas  humanas  eran  imperfectas  y  sus  ilusiones 
de  V.  siendo 

8.  For  supuesto,  jangelicalesi  j  Vamos!  dejeseV.  de  cumplimientos, 
ya  sabe  V.  que  no  me  gustan,  y  respondame  V.  a  mi  pregunta  si  V. 
gusta,  porque  tengo  curiosidad  de  saber  c6mo  forman  otros  sus  castillos. 
—Obedezco,  seilorita,  y  para  principiar  debo  decir  que  yo  me  equivoqu6 
cuando  dije  que  solo  se  diferenciaban  en  la  manera,  porque  tambien  in- 
fluye  mucho  el  material. 

9.  I  Como  el  material  ?  ;  si  se  fabncan  en  el  aire  I  j  Espero  que  no  loa 
fabrique  Y.  de  cal  y  canto ! — No,  sefiorita,  no  de  cal  y  canto ;  pero  se  fa- 
brican ;  y  si  se  fabrican,  de  algo  se  fabrican. 

10.  I  Pero  de  qu6,  senor,  de  que  ?  Yo  formo  castillos,  pero  no  necesito 
nada  para  hacerlos ;  vuelo  mas  que  los  pajaros,  mando  hasta  en  las  vo- 
luntades  de  los  otros,  hago  volver  al  tiempo  en  su  carrera,  dispongo  del 
espacio,  de  la  fortuna,  y  hago  que  me  obedezca  basta  el  amor. — Eso  lo 
creo  sin  que  V.  me  lo  diga,  sefiorita. 

IJ..  I  Dale !  no  vuelva  V.  a  las  andadas,  y  cu^nteme  V.  qu6  materiales 
son  esos  de  que  V.  me  hablaba. — V.  raisma  acaba  de  nombrar  algunos. 

12.  I  Ouales  ?  j  C6mo !  i  qu6  mas  materiales  quiere  V.  para  formar  un 
Castillo  en  el  aire,  que  poder  disponer,  como  V.  dice  que  puede,  de  las 
voluntades  de  los  otros,  del  tiempo,  del  espacio,  la  fortuna  y  basta  del 
amor? 

13.  jToma!  Pero  yo  no  poseo  ninguna  de  esas  cosas  en  realidad,  y 
sin  embargo  mis  castillos  me  entretienen  y  divierten  mucho.— Perd one 
Y.,  sefiorita,  Y.  las  posee  y  con  ellas  forma  Y.  ese  bonito  mundo  interior, 
que  le  proporciona  d  Y.  los  goces  que  no  le  da  el  exterior. 

14.  Y  en  eso  tiene  Y.  razon,  que  mis  ilusiones,  6  sea  como  Y.  las  llama, 
mi  mundo  interior,  me  consuelan  much  as  veces  de  la  ruin  dad  del  mundo 
exterior. — Eso  sucede  d  todo  el  mundo,  de  ese  modo,  el  ciego  ve,  el  en- 
fermo  goza  de  salud,  el  prisionero  de  libertad,  el  pobre  de  las  riquezas  y 
el  anciano  de  la  juventud,  las  ilusiones  hacen  los  males  menores.  En  este 
mundo  ideal  es  en  donde  los  hombres  son  verdaderamente  iguales,  y  para 
mi  tengo  que  no  es  ilusorio,  sino  real,  puesto  que  de  61  depende  nuestra 
feUcidad 

15.  I'^o  crce  Y.  que  hay  alguna  exageracion  en  lo  que  Y.  dice?  Ko, 
sefiora,  pero  si,  creo,  que  debemos  tener  buen  cuidado  de  regularizar 
nuestros  pensamientos  y  de  basar  siempre  nuestros  castillos  en  el  aire  en 
la  virtud  y  la  religion. 

16.  I  Bravo !  bravo !  muy  bien,  asi  me  gustan  a  mi  los  castillos  en  el  aire. 


254  LESSON     XLVIII. 

EXERCISE. 

^1.  Who  built  the  house  you  are  hving  in  at  present?    An  excellent 
architect,  a  friend  of  my  father. 

V  2.  Are  you  certain  it  was  an  old  man  that  was  suing  for  her  hand  ? 
I  cannot  affirm  that  it  was  an  old  man. 

3.  What  a  misfortune  that  he  will  not  study  I  It  would  be  a  real 
misfortune  if  it  were  true ;  I  think  it  is  not  true. 

x^A.  Do  you  ever  build  castles  in  the  air  ?  Seldom ;  for,  in  my  opinion, 
real  castles  built  of  stone  are  to  be  preferred  to  the  atrial  ones  you  speak  of. 

5.  What  a  pretty  bird  you  have  there  1  does  it  sing  ?  It  sings  the 
whole  day  long. 

6.  Do  you  think  our  young  friend  is  really  as  happy  as  he  appears  to 
be  ?    No,  there  must  be  some  exaggeration  in  what  he  says. 

7.  In  what  respect  do  these  two  authors  differ  from  each  other  ?  Read 
the  works  of  both,  and  you  will  observe  for  yourself. 

8.  Do  th'ey  both  write  equally  well  ?  No,  one  of  them  arranges  his 
thoughts  in  a  very  strange  manner,  so  that  it  is  sometimes  impossible  to 
understand  his  meaning*  and  at  all  times  disagreeable  to  read  him. 

9.  Is  Peter  punished  now'  in  school  as  often  as  formerly  ?  As  often 
as  ever ;  but  it  is  useless  to  punish  him,  for  tliough  he  is  good  for  a  few 
days,  yet  he  always  gets  back  to  his  old  habits. 

10.  Does  that  man  always  say  what  he  thinks?  lam  surelfiannot 
say ;  but  it  seems  to  me  that  there  is  in  his  manner  of  speaking  a  some- 
thing I  cannot  explain  that  hides  his  real  thoughts. 

11.  Is  he  liked  in  general  by  those  who  know  him  ?  On  the  contrary, 
everybody  hates  him  and  ridicules  him  for  his  meanness. 

12.  Have  you  any  curiosity  to  see  the  interior  of  a  royal  palace  ?  If 
the  occasion  offered  (presented  itself),  I  would  like  to  see  it ;  otherwise  I 
am  perfectly  content  with  the  interior  of  my  own  house. 

13.  You  are  wise  for  that;  happiness  is  not  at  all  times  to  be  found  in 
palaces.    Ah  1  I  see  you  aret  something  of  a  philosopher. 

14.  How  is  this,  sir  ?  your  exercise  is  incomplete.  I  confess  that  had 
I  wished  I  might  have  finished  it ;  but  you  will  find  that,  as  far  as  it  goes, 
it  is  not  imperfect. 

15.  That  is  to  say  that  the  quality  does  not  depend  on  the  quantity. 
Precisely  so ;  you  may  complain  of  my  not  having  done  the  whole  of  the 
exercise,  but  I  do  not  think  you  can  criticise  the  part  I  have  brought  to  you. 

16.  What  sizej  is  the  book  your  friend  has  just  published  ?  The  same 
eize  as  the  one  he  published  before. 

*  Logiue  quiere  dedr.  t  Tiene  V,  X  TamaHa. 


LESSON     XLIX 


255 


LESSON    XLIX. 


Acudir. 

Agregar. 

Afiadir. 

Componer. 

Contener. 

Incluir. 

racilitar. 

Ofrecer. 


To  hasten  (to  a  place),  to  refer. 

To  add. 

To  add. 

To  compose,  to  mend,  to  fix. 

To  contain. 

To  include. 

To  facilitate. 

To  offer. 


Por  instruldo  que  sea. 

However  learned  he  m 

Anteriormente. 

Formerly,  previously. 

Comparativamente. 

Comparatively. 

Corrientemente. 

Currently,  fluently. 

riuidamente. 

Fluently. 

Suficiente. 

SuflBxjient. 

En  general. 

In  general. 

Generalmente. 

Generally. 

Considerablemente. 

Considerably. 

Particularmente. 

Particularly,  privately. 

En  cuanto  i. 

Artificial. 

Anterior. 

Aborrecible. 

Celeste,  azul  celeste. 

Celestial. 

Calico. 

Chinesco. 

Creible. 

Despreciable. 

Familiar. 

Gigantesco. 

Terrestre. 

Territorial. 

Terroso. 

Terrado,  terrero. 

Terrenal. 

Terron. 


I      As  to,  as  for. 

Artificial. 

Anterior,  previous. 

Hateful. 

Celestial,  sky-blue. 

Celestial,  heavenly. 

Celestial,  heavenly. 

Chinese. 

Credible. 

Despicable. 

Familiar. 

Gigantic. 

Terrestrial,  earthly. 

Territorial. 

Terreous,  earthy. 

Terrace. 

Terrestrial,  earthly. 

Lump  (or  clod)  of  earth. 


256 

LBSSON     XLIX. 

Ricacho. 

Very  rich. 

Picaresco. 

Roguish. 

Patronimico. 

Patronymic. 

Propio. 

Proper,  own 

Mudable. 

Changeable. 

Verbal. 

Verbal. 

Arenal. 

Sandy  (ground). 

Arboleda. 

Grove. 

Ascenso. 

Promotion. 

Ascension. 

Ascension. 

Alvarez. 

Alvarez. 

Carnuza. 

Bad  meat. 

Calvinista. 

Calvinist. 

Creencia. 

Belief,  credences 

Catolicismo. 

Catholicism. 

Ciencia. 

Science. 

Diccionario. 

Dictionary. 

Gentualla. 

Rabble. 

Escobajo. 

A  bad  broom. 

Madrastra. 

Step-mother. 

Boticario. 

Druggist,  apothe- 

Terminacion. 

Termination. 

cary. 

Dicha. 

Happiness. 

Dominguez. 

Dominguez. 

Isla. 

Island. 

Fernandez. 

Fernandez. 

Educacion. 

Education. 

Idiotismo. 

Idionu 

Escoba. 

Broom. 

Filosofastro. 

Philosophaster. 

Excusa. 

Excuse. 

Hijastro. 

Step-son. 

Explicacion. 

Explanation. 

Herman  astro. 

Step-brother. 

Espada. 

Sword. 

Hombracho. 

Corpulent. 

Exclamacion. 

Exclamation. 

Libraco. 

A  contemptible 

Firma. 

Signature. 

book. 

Gota. 

Drop. 

Pajarraco. 

An  ugly  bird. 

Figura. 

Figure,  appear- 

Latinajo. 

Dog  Latin. 

ance. 

Manzanar. 

Apple  orchard. 

Faccion. 

Feature. 

Pinar. 

Pine  grove. 

Factura. 

Invoice. 

Protestante. 

Protestant. 

Facultad. 

Faculty,  power. 

Padrastro. 

Step-father. 

Adquisicion. 

Acquirement 

Significado. 

Signification, 

Astronomia. 

Astronomy. 

meaning. 

Afluencia,  fluido2 

:.  Fluency. 

Vinacho. 

Bad  wine. 

Protestantismo. 

Protestantism. 

Ilabanero. 

Ilavanese. 

Madrilcflo. 

Madrilenian, 

Rodrfguez. 

Rodriguez. 

Sanchez. 

Sanchez,     [heart. 

Amante. 

Lover,         sweet- 

Arbol. 

Tree. 

Amador. 

Lover. 

LESSON      XLIX. 


257 


COMPOSITION. 


/l  Porqu^  lee  V.  ese  libraco  ? 


Porque  no  tengo  otro  ;  pero  V.  se  equi- 
voca,  es  uu  libro  clasico  excelente. 

^Conoce  V.  a  aquel  ricacho  ? 

Le  conozco ;  pero  no  le  trato,  porque  es^ 

iin  hombracho  que  solo  le  gusta  tra- 

tarse  con  gentualla. 

J'lan,  no  barras  con  ese  escobajo,  que 
ensucia  mas  que  limpia. 

vLa  came  buena  se  vende  h  treinta  cen- 
tavos  la  libra ;  la  carnuza  a  veinte. 
Ese   estudiante  suele    decir  latinajos, 
pero  no  sabe  Latin. 

En  la  America  del  Norte  hay  mas  pro- 
testantes  que  catolicos. 

Los  boticarios  en  los  Estados  Unidos, 
no  solo  venden  medicinas,  sino  per- 
fumeria,  cigarros  y  otras  muchas 
cosas. 

iVive  el  Senor  Fernandez  con  su  pa- 
dre? 

No,  sefior,  porque  no  quiere  vivir  con 
su  madrastra  y  hermanastros. 

I  Es  V.  madrileiio  ? 
No,  senor,  soy  Habanero. 
\<2Lquel  filosofastro  es  despreciable. 

Esa  senorita  es  muy  amable ;  pero  muy 
mudable. 


Why  do  you  read  that  contemi)tible  old 

book? 
Because  I  have  no  other ;  but  you  are 

mistaken,  it  is  an  excellent  classic 

(book). 
Do  you  know  that  rich  man  ? 
I  know  him  ;  but  I  have  no  intercourse 

with  him,  because  he  is  a  low  man, 

whose  taste  is  to  associate  only  with 

the  rabble. 
/John,  do  not  sweep  with  that  old  stump 

of  a  broom ;    it  dirties  more  than  it 

cleans. 
Good  meat  sells  at  thirty  cents  a  pound, 

poor  (bad)  meat  at  twenty. 
That  student  is  in  the  habit  of  reciting 

dog  Latin,  but  he   does  not  know 

Latin. 
There  are  more  Protestants  than  Catho- 
lics in  North  America. 
In  the  United  States  the  druggists  sell 

not  only  medicines,  but  perfumery, 

cigars,  and  many  other  things. 

Does  Mr.  Fernandez  live  with  his 
father  ? 

No,  sir ;  because  he  does  not  wish  to 
live  with  his  step-mother  and  step- 
brothers. 

Are  you  a  Madrilenian  ? 

No,  sir,  I  am  a  Havanese. 

That    philosophaster    is  a  despicable 

(man). 
^That  young  lady  is  very  amiable,  but 
very  changeable. 


EXPLANATION. 

242.  Derivative  Nouns. — These  nouns  constitute  one  of 
the  chief  sources  of  the  richness  of  the  Spanish  language  ;  we 
have  already  introduced  some  of  them  in  previous  lessops, 
when  treating  of  augmentative  and  diminutive  terminations. 


268  LESSON     XLIX. 

These  terminations  are  very  numerous,  both  for  the  sub- 
stantives and  adjectives,  and  each  one  of  them  determines  the 
general  signification  of  the  derivative  noun.  As  it  would  be 
impossible  to  give  in  this  place  a  complete  list  of  all  these 
terminations,  we  shall  endeavor  to  lay  before  the  student  such 
of  them  as  are  to  be  found  in  most  common  use. 

243.  The  terminations  aco,  acho^  alia  and  wza,  denote  in- 
feriority; as 


Libraco. 

Pajarraco. 

Vinac/io. 

GentuaZ/a. 

Carnwsa. 


A  contemptible  old  book. 

An  ugly  bird. 

Bad  wine. 

Rabble. 

Bad  meat. 


The  termination  acho  is  sometimes  augmentative ;  (is, 

Ricac^.  I  Very  rich. 

HombracAo.  |  A  big  (or  corpulent)  man. 

244.  Ajo  implies  meanness,  and  the  consequent  contempt 
inspired  by  it ;  as, 

Escobo/o.  j  An  old  stump  of  a  broom. 

Latino/o.  |  Dog  Latin. 

245.  The  terminations  a?,  ar,  ego^  ico,  il,  iscOy  in  adjectives, 
commonly  denote  the  quality  of  the  thing  ;  as, 

ArtificiaL 
Familiar. 
Gigantic 
Ros:uish. 


Artificial. 

Familiar. 

Gigantesco. 

Picaresco. 

Cliisico. 

Chinesco. 


Classic 
Chinese. 


246.  In  substantives  the  same  terminations,  aZ,  ar^  and 
also  eda  and  edo,  serve  to  form  collective  nouns ;  as, 

Arholcda.  Grove. 

Arena/.  Sandy  ground. 

Manzanar.  Apple  orchard. 

Pinar.  Pine  grove. 

247.  The  terminations  ante,  ario,  ente,  ero,  ista  and  or  are 


LESSON     XLIX.  259 

for  the  most  part  expressive  of  use,  sect,  profession,  trade,  or 
occupation;  as, 


Estndiante. 

Boticario. 

Zapatero. 

Organtsto. 

Trotestante. 

CaXvinista. 

Pintor. 


Student. 

Druggist. 

Shoemaker. 

Organist. 

Protestant 

Calvinist. 

Painter. 


248.  The  termination  astro  signifies  inferiority  in  a  super- 
lative degree ;  as,  Jilosof astro,  a  despicable  philosopher ;  poetas- 
tro,  poetaster ;  and  it  is  curious  to  observe  that  it  also  serves 
to  express  the  degrees  of  relationship  existing  between  those 
persons  who  more  generally  hate  than  love  each  other ;  as, 


Hermanos^ro. 
Hijos^ro. 
Fsidrasiro. 
Ms^drastra. 


Step-brother. 
Step-son. 
Step- father. 
Step-mother. 


249.  £le  corresponds  to  the  same  termination  in  English ; 
as, 

AborreciJ^e. 
Creible. 


'J 

Hateful. 


MudaftZe. 


Credible. 

Changeable. 

Amiable. 


250.  Ismo  corresponds  to  the  English  termination  isni;  as, 
Catolicismo.  I  Catholicism. 
Protestantismo.                             |  Protestantism. 

251.  The  names  of  nationalities  are  also  derivatives,  and 
have  their  terminations  in  ero,  es,  eno  ;  as, 

Habanero.  I  Havanese. 

Frances.  French,  Frenchman. 

Madrile;io.  I  Madrilenian. 

252.  Many  patronymic,  or  family,  names  are  also  deriva- 
tives ;  for  instance,  Alvarez,  Dorainguez,  Fernandez,  Rodriguez, 
Sanchez,  &c.,  were  the  names  that  were  given  to  the  sons  of 
the  Alvaros,  Domingos,  Fernandos,  Rodrigos,  Sanchos,  &c., 
changing  the  final  o  into  ez. 


260  LESSON     XLIX. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  ^Es  neccsario  para  hablar  una  lengua  aprender  todas  las  palabras 
que  contieue  dicha  lengua  ?  De  ningun  modo,  ademas,  70  no  creo  que 
exista  un  horabre,  por  instruido  que  sea,  que  las  sepa  todas. 

2.  ^  Cuantas  palabras  piensa  V.  que  sean  suficientes  para  poder  hablar 
el  espafiol  corrienteraente  ?  De  tres  k  cuatro  mil  palabras  primitivas  con 
sus  derivados  es  todo  lo  que  se  requierc,  para  hablar  una  lengua  fliiida- 
mente. 

3.  Si,  pero  probablemente  los  derivados  seran  en  tanto  6  mayor 
mimero  que  los  primitivos. — Asi  es,  pero  una  vez  que  se  conocen  las 
terminaciones,  es  muy  facil  el  formarlos,  aunque  nunca  se  hayan  visto  an- 
teriormente. 

4.  I  Es  posible !  ent6nces  esto  debe  facilitar  mucho  el  estudio  de  la 
lengua. — Mucbisimo,  porque,  como  ya  hemos  diebo,  sabiendo  los  primi- 
tivos no  tiene  mas  que  ailadirseles  las  terminaciones,  segun  el  significado 
que  qui  era  darseles. 

5.  ^Quiere  Y.  hacerme  el  favor  de  formar  algunos  derivados?  Si, 
seflor,  con  mucbo  gusto ;  d6me  V.  los  primitivos. 

6.  I  Cuales  son  los  derivados  de  cielo  ?     Celeste  y  celestial. 

7.  },  De  tierra  ?     Terrestre,  terreual,  y  otros. 

8.  g  Porqu6  no  me  los  da  V.  todos  ?  Porque  me  parece  mejor  que 
aprenda  V.  primeraraente  los  de  mas  uso,  pues  sobre  haber  muchos,  los 
hay  de  poco  uso  comparativamente. 

9.  Cuales  otros  se  pudieran  formar  de  cielo  y  tierra  ?  C61ico ;  terroso, 
terron,  y  otros  muchos. 

10.  gSe  pueden  formar  derivados  de  los  verbos?  Si,  sefior,  y  d  estos 
se  les  da  el  nombre  de  verbales. 

11.  ^Cuales  se  derivan  del  verbo  amar?  Amador,  amante,  amado, 
amable. 

12.  ^De  ascender?    Ascenso,  ascension. 

13.  ^Decreer?     Creyente,  creencia,  creible,  crMulo,  crMito. 

14.  I  De  estudiar  ?  Estudiante,  estudio ;  pudiendo  agregar  ademds  los 
anraentativos  y  diminutivos  que  tambien  son  derivados,  como  estudian- 
tillo,  estudianton,  etc. 

15.  I  De  qu6  se  derivan  los  norabres  de  familia  Gonzalez,  Dominguez, 
etc.?    Se  derivan  de  los  nombres  propios  Gonzalo,  Domingo,  etc. 

16.  ^Cuantas  palabras  cree  V.  que  contendni  esta  gramdtica?  Mas  de 
tres  rail  palabras  primitivas  y  un  gran  niimcro  de  derivadas. 

17.  ^En  acabando  la  gramatica  podre  traducir  y  hablar  sobre  cual- 
quiera  materia  que  se  ofrezca?  Podra  V.  liablar  de  todo  y  seguir  una 
conversacion  en  general  como  V.  ve  que  ya  lo  hacemos ;  pero  para  tra- 


LESSOR?-     XLIX.  261 

ducir  J  hablar  de  cualquiera  ciencia,  arte  li  oficio  en  particular,  tendra  V. 
que  acudir  al  dicciouario,  porque  es  imposible  introducir  en  una  gramatica 
todas  las  palabras  necesarias  para  poder  hacer  esto. 

18.  Y  en  cuanto  a  los  idiotismos  de  la  lengua,  ^se  hallaran  todos  en 
esta  gramatica?  Tampoco,  puesto  que  se  podrian  componer  tres  6  cuatro 
volumenes  como  este  j  quiza  no  incluirian  todos  los  de  la  lengua. 

19.  gComo  los  aprendere  ent6nces?  En  la  conversacion  de  personas 
instruidas  y  en  la  lectura  de  buenos  libros. 

EXERCISE. 

4l.  Did  Charles  go  to  another  regiment  at  the  time  of  his  promotion? 
Yes,  he  left  the  71st  and  went  to  the  Tth. 

2.  What  do  you  know  about  the  names  Sanchez,  Dominguez,  and  all 
those  ending  in  ez  ?  That  they  mean  son  of  Sancho,  son  of  Domingo, 
and  are  formed  from  those  names  by  adding  the  termination  you  have 
just  mentioned. 

y  8.  To  whom  does  that  magnilScent  pine  grove  belong  ?  To  the  step- 
son of  the  gentleman  who  owns  that  pretty  little  house  you  see  over 
there  in  the  distance  (d  lo  lejos). 

\^  4.  What  contemptible  old  book  is  that  you  are  reading  so  attentively  ? 
It  is  no  contemptible  old  book  at  all  {ninguno\  it  is  the  dictionary ;  I 
always  go  to  the  dictionary  for  a  word  of  which  I  do  not  know  the 
meaning. 

4  5.  Do  you  know  the  names  of  all  the  heavenly  bodies  ?  No,  nor  you 
either ;  the  science  of  astronomy  is  stiU.  imperfect,  and  there  are  besides 
many  of  the  heavenly  bodies  hidden  from  human  sight. 

6.  Is  not  that  young  gentleman  a  great  lover  of  the  sciences  ?  Yes, 
but  most  particularly  of  the  exact  sciences. 

7.  Why  do  you  sweep  with  that  old  stump  of  a  broom?  It  is  the 
best  I  have. 

4  8.  Did  you  say  he  was  a  philosopher  ?  No,  on  the  contrary,  I  said, 
he  was  but  a  miserable  philosophaster. 

9.  How  does  that  rich  fellow  amuse  himself?  Beading  history  in 
general,  and  that  of  his  own  country  in  particular. 

10.  I  observe  that  you  speak  German  very  fluently  now;  have  you 
changed  your  book?  No,  I  have  still  the  same  one,  but  I  myself  study 
more  than  I  did  formerly. 

11.  Do  you  know  whether  your  cousin  speaks  as  fluently  as  your 
sister?  Mrs.  Alvarez  says  that  in  familiar  conversation  they  speak 
equally  fluently. 

/12.  Do  you  do  any  compositions  ?  Yes,  our  father  requires  us  to  do 
two  compositions  a  week  on  the  idioms  of  the  language. 


262 


LESSON     L. 


13.  Is  it  not  a  despicable  habit  to  offer  to  do  things  we  never  intend 
to  perform  (llevar  a  cabo)  ?  1  should  say  it  is  more  than  despicable,  it  is 
even  hateful. 

>/  14.  Does  not  the  study  of  grammar  considerably  facilitate  the  acquisi- 
tion of  a  language  ?  Yes,  but  that  alone  is  not  sufficient :  something 
more  is  required. 

■   15.  Have  you  much  fruit  at  your  house  in  the  country  ?    We  have  a 
very  fine  orchard  of  apples. 
16.  What  language  was  that  your  young  friend  spoke  in  a  moment 

\ago  ?  What  he  takes  for  Latin ;  but  what  is  not  in  reality  any  thing  but 
dog  Latin. 

^17.  Would  not  that  letter  have  been  better  if  you  had  not  added  that 
last  word  ?  It  appeared  to  me  to  be  necessary  to  add  that  to  what  I  had 
ah'eady  said,  so  that  the  meaning  might  be  more  easily  understood. 


LESSON    L. 


Amenazar. 

Apoyar. 

Disgustar. 

Recurrir. 

Sacar. 

A  pesar  de. 

Y  diciendo  y  haciendo. 

J  Todo  sea  por  Dios  ! 
Tomar  las  de  villadiego. 
Sobre  todo. 
Desproporcionadisimamente. 

Adverbial. 

Antisocial. 

Antepentiltima. 

Iniitil. 

Componente. 

Izquierdo. 

Derecho. 

Pentiltima. 

Superlativo. 


To  threaten,  to  menace. 

To  lean  upon,  to  support. 

To  displease,  to  disgust,  to  grieve. 

To  recur,  to  have  recourse. 

To  take  out. 


I      In  spite  of. 


And  suituag  the  action  to  the 

word. 
I  hope  all  will  be  for  the  best  I 
To  take  to  one's  heels,  to  make  offi 
Above  all. 
Without  any  proportion. 


Adverbial. 

Antisocial. 

Antepenultimate. 

Useless. 

Component. 

Left. 

Right. 

Penultimate. 

Superlative. 


J 


LESSOK     L, 


263 


Anteojos. 

Aguardiente. 

Barbilampiiio. 

Correveidile. 

Bienhechor. 

Director. 

Dolor  de  muelas. 

Dentista. 

Disgiisto. 

Hazmereir. 

Condiscipulo. 

Pisaverde. 

Pormenor. 

Pnntapi^. 

Parasol. 

Paraguas. 

Quitasol. 

Socialism  o. 

Sacamuelas. 

Pueblo. 

Vicerector. 


Spectacles. 

Brandy. 

Beardless. 

Tell-tale. 

Benefactor. 

Director. 

Toothache. 

Dentist. 

Disgust,  grief. 

Laughing-stock. 

Schoolmate. 

Pop,  coxcomb. 

Detail. 

Kick. 

Parasol. 

Umbrella. 

Parasol. 

Socialism. 

Tooth-drawer. 

People,  town. 

Vice-rector. 


Equivocacion. 
Ganapierde. 

Barberia. 
La  derecha. 
La  izquierda. 
Sinrazon. 
Particula. 
Quijada. 
Las  damas. 


Mistake. 

A  game  in  check- 
ers. 
Barber-shop. 
The  right  hand. 
The  left  hand. 
Injustice. 
Particle. 
Jaw. 
Draughts,     check- 


COMPOSITIOIT. 


V  No  le  esta  bien  k  un  anciano  el  ser  pisa- 

verde, eso  es  propio  de  barbilampinos. 
^iQuien  ha  dado  un  puntapie  a  aquel 

muchacho  ? 
VYo  se  lo  he  dado,  porque  es  un  corre- 
veidile. 
Este  hombre  juega  muy  bien  a  las  da- 
mas, sobre  todo  a  la  ganapierde. 
,  I  Tiene  V.  un  quitasol  6  un  paraguas  ? 
vTengo  4mbos. 

V^se  joven  bebe  mucho  aguardiente  y  no 
.   hace  case  de  los  consejos  de  su  bien- 
'    heehor. 
y  Esa  es  la  razon  porque  es  el  hazmereir 
de  todo  el  mundo. 

V  i  Tiene  V.  buena  vista  ? 

V^o,  senor,  y  esta  es  la  razon  porque 
USD  anteojos. 
Mi  condiscipulo  Manuel  me  ha  ayuda- 
do  a  hacer  la  coraposicion. 


It  is  not  becoming  to  an  old  man  to  be 
a  fop ;  that  belongs  to  beardless  boys. 
Who  gave  that  boy  a  kick  ? 

I  did,  for  he  is  a  tell-tale. 

This  man  plays  very  well  at  draughts,  and 
especially  at  ganapierde  (give  away). 

Have  you  a  parasol  or  an  umbrella  ? 

I  have  both. 

That  young  man  drinks  a  great  deal  of 
brandy,  and  pays  no  heed  to  the  ad' 
vice  of  his  benefactor. 

That  is  the  reason  why  he  is  the  laugh- 
ing-stock of  every  one. 

Have  you  good  sight  ? 

No,  sir,  and  that  is  the  reason  why  I 

/   use  spectacles. 

my  school-fellow  Emanuel  has  helped 
,      me  to  do  my  composition. 


264 


LESSON     L, 


s/  Es  inutil  que  me  cuente  V.  los  parrae- 
nores. 
JSl  director  y  el  vicerector  de  la  escuela 
son  hombres  excelentes. 
^Me  disgustan  las  sinrazones. 
El  socialismo,  4  pesar  de  la  opinion  de 
los  que  lo  apoyan,  es  antisocial  6  im- 
posible. 


It  is  useless  for  you  to  tell  me  the  de- 
tails. 

The  director  and  sub-director  of  the 
school  are  excellent  men. 

Unreasonableness  disgusts  me. 

Socialism,  in  spite  of  the  opinion  of 
those  who  support  it,  is  antisocial 
and  impossible. 


EXPLANATION. 

253.  Compound  !N"ouns. — These  are  very  numerous  in  the 
Spanish  language ;  some  are  formed  of  two  nouns,  as  harhilam- 
pino^  beardless  ;  puntapU,  a  kick ;  aguardiente,  brandy ;  others 
are  formed  of  a  noun  and  a  verb,  as  quitasol,  parasol ;  saoor 
muelas,  tooth-drawer;  others  of  an  adjective  and  a  verb,  as 
pisaverde,  coxcomb ;  others  of  a  noun  and  an  adverb',  as  bien- 
hechor,  benefactor ;  others  of  a  noun  and  a  preposition,  as  an- 
teojos,  spectacles ;  others  of  two  verbs,  as  ganapierde,  a  mode 
of  playing  draughts ;  others  of  two  verbs  and  a  pronoun,  as 
hazrnereir,  laughing-stock ;  three  verbs,  a  pronoun  and  a  con- 
junction enter  into  the  formation  of  correveidile,  tale-bearer ; 
and,  finally,  others  are  composed  of  a  noun  and  some  one  of 
the  following  component  particles :  «,  ah,  abs,  ad,  ante,  anti, 
circum  or  circun,  cis,  citra,  co,  com,  con,  contra,  de,  des,  di,  dis, 
e,  em,  en,  entre,  equi,  es  or  ex,  extra,  im,  in,  infra,  inter,  intro,  o, 
oh,  per,  por,  pos,  pre,  preter,  pro,  re,  retro,  sa  or  za,  se,  semi, 
sesqui,  sin,  so,  sohre,  son,  sos,  sii,  sub,  s^per,  sus,  tra,  trans  or 
tros,  ultra,  and  vice  or  vi;  as. 


^n^isocial. 

Composicion. 

Co^idiscipulo. 

DiveQ.iOT. 

Disgusto. 

/A/iposible. 

/nutil. 

Pormenor. 

Pospuesto. 

iSiwrazon. 

T'ecfirector. 


Antisocial. 

Composition. 

School-fellow. 

Director. 

Displeasure. 

Impossible. 

Useless. 

Detail. 

Post-fixed. 

Unreasonableness. 

Sub-director. 


LESSON     L.  265 

We  call  tliem  component  particles,  because  the  majority  of 
them — although  they  are  true  Latin  and  Greek  prepositions — 
have  no  signification  in  Spanish,  except  as  prefixes,  in  which 
case  they  serve  to  augment,  diminish,  or  modify  the  significa- 
tion of  the  simple  word  in  proportion  to  the  strength  or  value 
they  have  in  the  languages  from  which  we  have  taken  them. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  Don  Jose,  i  sabe  V.  el  significado  de  las  palabras  penultima  y  ante- 
peniiltima?  Si,  seiior,  porque  correspondeu  alas  palabras  m^QnaiS) penul- 
timate y  antepenultimate. 

2.  Pues  bien,  ahora,  que  hablamos  de  "cafionazos,"  quiero  decir,  ahora 
que  hablamos  de  estas  palabras,  le  contar6  a  V.  un  cuentecito. — Muy  bien, 
a  mi  me  gustan  muclio  los  cuentos,  sobre  todo  cuando  no  son  largos  y 
vienen  a  pelo. 

3.  Pues  este  viene  a  pelo  y  no  es  largo. — ^Ent6nce3  cuenteraelo  V., 
Don  Pedro,  escucho  con  la  mayor  atencion. 

4.  Pues  vaya  de  cuento :  Un  cabaUero  tenia  un  fuerte  dolor  de  muelas, 
y  fu6  d  un  sacamuelas  para  que  le  sacase  una. 

5.  I  Hombre !  ^  y  porque  no  fue  a  casa  de  un  deutista  ?  Porque  en 
aquel  pueblecito  no  habia  dentistas  y  tuvo  que  ir  a  una  barberia,  cuyo 
barbero  unia  a  su  oficio  el  de  sacamuelas. 

6.  J  Pobre  hombre !  adelante. — Este  barbero,  6  sea  sacamuelas,  pero 
que  de  ningun  modo  era  dentista,  le  pregunto  : 

7.  "  I  Que  muela  le  duele  a  Y.  ? "  "  La  penultima  del  lado  izquierdo  de 
la  quijada  inferior." 

8.  "  Muy  bien,"  y  diciendo  y  hacieudo  le  sac6,  no  la  peniiltima,  sino  la 
ultima. 

9.  "  J  Huy !  2 que  ha  hecho  V.,  hombre?  yo  le  dije  a  Y.  que  me  sacase 
la  penultima,  y  Y.  me  ha  sacado  la  i^tima." — "  j  Calle!  pues  yo  creia  que 
pemiltiraa  y  ultima  era  todo  una  misma  cosa." 

10.  "  No,  hombre,  no ;  la  penultima  es  la  que  esta  antes  de  la  Ultima." 
— "  J  Diantre !  Mil  perdones,  y  si6ntese  Y.  que  esta  vez  no  me  equivocare." 

IL  " ;  Yamos,  y  todo  sea  por  Dios!  "     "jAy!  ay!  hombre  dado  a 
Barrabas ! " 

12.  "iToma!  ^y  ahora  porqu6  se  queja?  ^  no  vengo  de  sacarle  la  que 
estaba  antes  de  la  tiltiraa?"  "Si ;  pero  Y.  olvid6  contar  la  que  me  sac6 
anteribrmente,  de  modo  que  ahora  me  ha  sacado  la  antepenultimay — La 
ante  ....  ^que?  Pero  no  importa,  dejemos  estos  malditos  nom- 
bres,  que  han  sido  causa  de  mi  equivocacion,  y  sientese  Y.  que  yo  le  aser 
guro  a  Y.  que."  .... 
12 


266  LESSON     L. 

13.  Pero  el  parroquiano,  dandolo  d  todos  los  diablos,  tom6  las  de  villa- 
diego,  y  se  cree  que  nunca  mas  recurrio  a  un  sacamuelas  para  que  le  sa- 
case  la  peniiltima  inuela. 

14.  ^Cual  es  la  palabra  coinpuesta  mas  larga  en  espafiol?  Despro- 
porcionadisimamente. 

15.  ^De  qu6  palabras  se  compone?  De  la  particula  componente  des^ 
el  nombre  proporcion^  la  terminacion  superlativa  sima  j  la  termininacion 
adverbial  mente, 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Do  you  nse  spectacles  because  it  is  fashionable  with  some  people  to 
wear  {gastar)  them,  or  because  you  cannot  see  without  them  ?  Because 
I  cannot  see  without  thejn. 

2.  My  toothache  is  not  any  better  yet.  Then  you  had  better  go  to 
the  dentist's  and  get  him  to  extract  (sacar)  the  tooth. 

3.  Do  you  often  see  the  beardless  youth  who  came  to  walk  with  us 
without  being  asked  *  last  evening  ?  Not  often,  nor  do  I  care  to  see  him 
very  often,  he  is  too  mucti  of  a  fop  for  ray  taste. 

4.  Which  way  do  I  turn  here  to  go  to  the  new  hotel  ?  Turn  to  the 
right ;  it  is  not  more  than  two  streets  to  the  hotel. 

5.  What  did  he  do  when  you  said  that  ?  He  took  to  his  heels,  and  I 
have  neither  heard  of  nor  seen  him  since. 

6.  What  were  your  two  school-fellows  doing  at  the  door  a  few 
minutes  ago  ?  One  of  them  had  told  the  director  of  a  mistake  in  the 
other's  exercise,  and  this  one  threatened  to  punish  him  for  his  trouble 
(molestia) ;  so,  suiting  the  action  to  the  word,  he  gave  him  a  kick,  and 
called  him  a  despicable  tell-tale. 

7.  Has  your  brother  bought  the  house  yet  that  he  intended  to  buy  ? 
No ;  when  he  came  to  examine  the  details  he  found  the  price  of  th^  house 
entirely  out  of  proportion  to  the  value. 

8.  Do  you  always  take  an  umbrella  when  it  rains  ?  I  seldom  use  an 
umbrella ;  when  it  rains  I  never  go  out,  if  I  can  avoid  it. 

9.  What  a  strange  man  that  is !  Yes,  he  is  the  laughing-stock  of 
every  one  who  knows  him. 

JO,  What  kind  of  wine  do  they  give  you  in  your  hotel  ?  They  give  us 
very  poor  wine,  and  so  I  drink  very  little  of  it ;  I  prefer  water. 

11.  Do  you  often  play  at  draughts  (or  checkers)?  Very  often;  but  I 
prefer  the  losing  game. 

12.  What  is  that  man^^  business?  He  keeps  a  barber's  shop  in  Sixth 
or  Seventh  Avenue. 

13.  I  want  you  to  be  good  enough  to  translate  this  letter  for  me.    Oh  1 


LESSON     LI. 


267 


it  is  useless  to  talk  to  me  of  translating  any  thing  just  now  {'por  ahora\ 
for  I  have  a  headache. 

14.  Where  is  that  family  living  now  ?    In  a  small  town  in  the  westerq 
part  of  the  State. 


LESSON    LI. 


Atravesar. 

To  traverse,  to  croes. 

Atropellar. 

To  run  over,  to  hurry  one's  self 

too  much. 

Causar. 

To  cause. 

Correr. 

To  riin. 

Calcular. 

To  calculate. 

Dividir. 

To  divide. 

Exponer. 

To  expose. 

Extrafiar. 

To  wonder  at. 

Hospedar. 

To  lodge  and  entertain. 

Incendiar. 

To  set  fire  to. 

Llorar. 

To  cry,  to  weep. 

Manifestar. 

To  manifest,  to  show,  to  inform. 

Ordenar. 

To  order,  to  arrange. 

Oponer. 

To  oppose. 

Proponer. 

To  propose. 

Parar. 

To  stop. 

Procurar. 

To  procure,  to  try. 

Eesistir. 

To  resist. 

Hivalizar. 

To  rival. 

Simpatizar. 

To  sympathize. 

ISTi  con  mucho. 

Far  from,  far  from  it. 

A  decir  verdad. 

To  say  the  truth. 

En  lo  que  respecta. 

With  respect  to. 

En  march  a. 

Let  us  go,  let  us  start. 

A  lo  largo. 

Lengthwise. 

A  esta  parte. 

Within  the  last. 

Api^. 

On  foot. 

En  frente. 

In  front,  opposite. 

Continuamente. 

Continually. 

Perpendicularmen  te. 

Perpendicularly. 

Alrededor. 

Around. 

268 

LESSON     LI. 

Admirable. 

Admirable. 

Apto. 

Apt. 

Curioso. 

Curious. 

Desocupado. 

Disengaged,  unoccupied. 

Directo. 

Direct. 

Indirecto 

. 

Indirect. 

Figurado 

. 

Figurative. 

Inepto. 

Unsuit?able. 

Gramatical. 

Gramatical 

Oomplemento. 

Complement. 

Academia. 

Academy. 

Cosmopolita. 

Cosmopolite. 

Admiracion. 

Admiration,  won- 

Carruaje. 

Carriage. 

der. 

Delito. 

Crime./ 

Arquitectura. 

Architecture. 

Dibujo.           y^ 

Drawing. 

Construccion. 

Construction. 

Individuo. 

Individual,  mem- 

Belleza. 

Beauty. 

ber. 

Frase. 

Phrase. 

Literate. 

Man  of  letters. 

Distancia. 

Distance. 

Gozo. 

Enjoyment. 

Esquina. 

Corner,  v 

Museo. 

Museum. 

Ldgrima. 

Tear. 

Paseo. 

Promenade. 

Laboriosidad. 

Industry.  ^ 

Panto. 

Point,  place. 

Marcha. 

March. 

Edificio. 

Edifice. 

Metr6poli. 

Metropolis. 

Peligro. 

Danger. 

Madurez. 

Ripeness,  maturi- 

Omnibus. 

Omnibus. 

ty,  prudence. 

Soltero.            N/ 

Bachelor. 

Permanencia. 

Permanence,  stay. 

Publico. 

Public. 

Sorpresa. 

Surprise. 

Trascurso. 

Course  (of  time). 

Vista. 

Sight,  view. 

Rincon. 

Corner. 

Orilla. 

Bank,  border.  1/ 

Tablero  de  da- 

Checker-board. 

Batalla. 

Battle. 

mas. 

COMPOS 

Remuneracion. 
3ITI0N. 

Remuneration. 

Oriente  y  Occidente. 
Cielo  y  tierra. 
ViEl  hombre  discrete  ordena  siempre  las 
cosas  con  madurez. 
La  casa  de  Juan  se  ha  incendiado. 
^^n  individuo  inepto  para  escribir  pucde 

ser  apto  para  otraa  cosas. 
v/EI  reo,  k  quien  se  castiga,  ha  cometido 
grandes  dclitos. 


East  and  West. 

Heaven  and  earth. 

The  sensible  man  always  arranges  his 
affairs  with  prudence. 

They  have  set  fire  to  John's  house. 

An  individual  that  is  unsuited  for  wri- 
ting may  be  apt  at  other  things. 

The  culprit  that  is  being  punished  has 
committed  great  crimes. 


LESSON     LI. 


269 


Un  hombre  pobre  es  muy  diferente  de 
un  pobre  hombre. 

Hemos  dado  un  gran  paseo. 

Hemos  dado  un  paseo  grande. 

Lo  que  V.  dice  es  una  cosa  cierta. 

Yo  he  observado  cierta  cosa. 

Madrid,  a  23  de  Agosto  de  1866  {or 
Madrid,  Agosto  23  de  1866,  or  Ma- 
drid y  Agosto  23  de  1866). 

Yo  soy  quien  probare  que  tu  te  equi- 
vocas. 
/  Dios  es  admirable  en  todas  sus  obras, 
pues  todas  ellas  manifiestan  su  poder 
y  su  bondad  {or  admirable  se  muestra 
Dios  en  todas  sus  obras ;  su  poder  y 
su  bondad  manifiestan  todas  ellas). 

Solo  Dios  es  grande,  hermanos  mios. 

Adios,  Juan  ;  ^  que  tal  ? 

Hasta  manana.     Buenos  dias. 

Nueva  York,  ciudad  de  los  Estados 
TJnidos. 

Yo    mismo   le  vl  Uorar  Idgrimas   de 
gozo. 
v' Pronto  se  calmaran  las  borrascas  que 
agitan  la  nave  del  Estado. 

^  Ha  estado  V.  alguna  vez  en  el  Museo 
de  Nueva  York  ? 


A  poor  man  (a  man  in  poverty)  is  very 

different  from  a  poor  fellow. 
We  have  had  an  excellent  walk. 
We  have  taken  a  long  walk. 
What  you  say  is  certain. 
I  have  observed  a  certain  thing. 
Madrid,  August  23d,  1866. 


It  is  I  who  shall  prove  that  you  are  ^ 

mistaken. 
God  is  wonderful  in  all  His  works,  for 

they  all  set  forth  his  power  and  His 

goodness. 


^od  only  is  great,  my  brethren. 
Good  morning,  John ;  how  do  you  do  ? 
I  shall  see  you  to-morrow. 
New  York,  a  city  of  the  United  States. 

^  I  myself  saw  him  shed  tears  of  joy. 

The  tempests  by  which  the  ship  of 
State  is  tossed  shall  soon  be  calmed. 

Have  you  ever  been  in  the  New  York 
Museum  ? 


EXPLANATION. 

Notwithstanding  we  have  already  made  some  general  ob- 
servations relative  to  the  place  each  part  of  speech  occupies  in 
sentences,  we  deem  it  expedient  to  add  here  a  few  rules  which 
the  learner  will  find  of  considerable  utility  in  composition. 

254.  The  natitkal  coitstruction  demands  that  the  sub- 
stantive be  placed  before  the  adjective,  because  the  thing  is 
before  its  quality ;  that  the  governing  word  precede  the  one 
governed,  for  it  is  natural  that  the  former  should  present  itself 
to  the  mind  before  the  latter;  that  the  subject  precede  the 
verb ;  that  the  verb  precede  the  adverb  by  which  it  is  modi- 
fied ;  that  the  complement  come  after  the  verb  and  the  adverb, 
if  there  be  one ;  and  that  when  two  or  more  things  are  to  be 


270  LESSON     LI. 

expressed,  of  which  one,  from  its   nature,  comes  before  the 
other,  this  order  be  preserved  ;  as, 

Oriente  y  Occidente. 


Cielo  y  tierra. 
Norte  y  Sur. 
Este  y  Oeste. 


East  and  "West. 
Heaven  and  earth. 
North  and  South. 
East  and  West. 


255.  FiGUEATTVE  CONSTRUCTION. — The  gcnius  of  the  Span- 
ish language,  and,  above  all,  use,  allow  us  to  depart  in  some 
cases  from  the  above  rules ;  thus  avoiding  the  monotonous  uni- 
formity which  would  otherwise  take  place,  and  leaving  the 
writer  more  latitude  for  the  construction  and  arrangement  of 
his  periods.  So  long  as  sense  and  perspicuity  do  not  suffer, 
there  is  ordinarily  no  fixed  position  for  any  of  the  parts  of 
speech.     Therefore : 

1st.  Personal  pronouns  subjects  of  verbs  may,  with  a  few 
exceptions,  be  expressed  or  suppressed  at  will. 

2d.  When  the  pronoun  subject  is  expressed,  it  may  be 
placed  either  before  or  after  the  verb. 

3d.  The  same  liberty  exists  with  respect  to  the  verb,  adverb 
and  complement. 

4th.  Nevertheless,  for  the  sake  of  clearness  in  our  sentences, 
it  is  essential  that  certain  words  which  together  form  a  whole 
(such  as  adjectives  with  the  substantives  they  qualify,  or  parts  of 
sentences,  acting  the  part  of  subject  or  complement)  should  be 
arranged  in  the  same  order  as  that  in  which  the  ideas  they  ex- 
press are  naturally  presented  to  the  mind. 

6th.  There  are  also  certain  words  which,  when  placed  bc^ 
fore  certain  others,  have  a  signification  very  different  from  that 
which  they  have  when  placed  after  them. 

Of  all  the  modem  languages  the  Spanish  is  certainly  the 
most  flexible ;  indeed,  in  no  other  can  the  same  idea  be  ex- 
pressed with  the  same  words  in  so  endless  a  variety  of  con- 
structions. 

Let  the  following  sentence  serve  as  a  proof  of  the  truth  of 
this  assertion : 

Esta  sefiorita  era  hijc.  de  Don  Manuel  I      This  young  lady  was  the  daughter  of 
S4nchez.  I         Mr.  Emanuel  Sanchez. 


LESSOI?^     LI.  271 

256.  Words  which,  from  their  nature,  cannot  be  separa- 
ted :  Esta  senorita.    Ue  Don  Manual  Sanchez, 

Natural  Construction.    Esta  senorita  era  hija  de  Don  Manuel  Sanchez. 

Isi  inversion.  Era  esta  senorita  hija  de  Don  Manuel  Sanchez, 

2d           "  Era  hija  esta  senorita  de  Don  Manuel  Sanchez. 

Bd           "  Era  de  Don  Manuel  Sanchez  hija  esta  senorita. 

4:th          "  De  Don  Manuel  Sanchez  era  hija  esta  senorita. 

6th          "  Hija  era  esta  senorita  de  Don  Manuel  Sanchez. 

6tk         "  Hija  de  Don  Manuel  Sanchez  era  esta  senorita. 

^fh         "  Hija  de  Don  Manuel  Sanchez  esta  senorita  era. 

8th          "  De  Don  Manuel  Sanchez  hija  era  esta  senorita. 

257.  The  natural  construction  is,  of  course,  the  most  gram- 
matical, but  the  best  writers  generally  give  preference  to  the 
figurative,  as  being  more  easy  and  elegant,  and  as  giving  at 
the  same  time  more  freedom  to  imagination  and  genius,  and 
finally,  as  being  better  suited  to  express  the  grand  emotions  of 
the  souL 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  jOh!  amigo  mio,  Y.  por  Nueva  York!  jCuanto  lo  celebro!  Si, 
seiior,  aqui  me  tiene  V.,  Don  Fernando,  no  he  podido  resistir  la  tentacion 
de  venir  a  ver  la  America. 

2.  j  Me  alegro  infinito  !  i  Pero  porqu^  no  se  vino  Y.  a  hospedar  a  mi 
casa  ?  En  primer  lugar,  porque  llegu6  anoche  muy  tarde ;  y  en  segundo, 
porque  a  los  solteros  nos  gusta  la  libertad  y  la  vida  del  hotel. 

3.  Bien,  no  me  opongo,  a  condicion  de  que  vendra  Y.  a  pasar  con 
nosotros  algunos  dias. — Lo  har6  asi  con  mucho  gusto,  ademas,  Don 
Fernando,  que,  como  no  se  hablar  ingles  y  esta  ciudad  es  tan  grande, 
tengo  miedo  de  perderme  si  salgo  solo,  y  quisiera  que,  durante  mi  per- 
manencia  en  ella,  tuviese  Y.  la  bondad  de  ser  mi  cicerone,  de  modo  es  que 
me  propongo,  pasar  la  mayor  parte  del  tiempo  en  su  compafiia. 

4.  En  eso  me  hara  Y.  mucho  placer,  ademas  de  que  yo  gozard  tanto 
como  Y.  con  la  sorpresa  y  adrairacion  que  le  causaran  a  Y.  las  vistas  de 
esta  metr6poli.  gHa  estado  Y.  jamas  en  L6udres  6  en  Paris?  No,  se- 
fior,  jamas  he  sal; do  de  EspafSa  hasta  ahora. 

5.  I  Cuando  qiiiere  Y.  que  principiemos  nuestros  paseos  ?  Cuando  Y. 
guste ;  ahora  mismo  si  esta  Y.  desocupado,  porque,  a  decLr  verdad,  tengo 
una  gran  curiosidad. 

6.  I  Quiere  Y.  que  vayamos  a  pi6  6  en  coche  ?  A  pie,  si  Y.  gusta ; 
me  parece  que  podr^mos  ver  mas  c6modamente ;  pero  toraar^mos  un 
coche  cuando  hay  a  que  salir  de  la  ciudad. 


272  LESSON     LI. 

7.  Pues  en  marcha,  vcnga  el  brazo. — Yo  temo  que  voy  a  molestar  a  V^ 
Don  Fernando,  porque  soy  muy  curioso,  como  dicen  los  franceses,  soy  un 
Jidneur^  y  me  llaraan  la  atencion  hasta  las  cosas  mas  peqiiefias. 

8.  Entonces  siuipatizaremos,  porque  a  mi  me  gusta  observarlo  y  criti- 
oarlo  todo. — i  Qu6  calle  es  esta  en  que  estamos  ahora  ?  Esta  es  la  Cuarta 
Avenida,  y  esa  que  la  atraviesa  es  la  calle  Veinte  y  tres. 

9.  ^Como  es  eso?  Las  calles  en  Nueva  York  estan  divididas  en 
avenidas,  que  son  las  que  atraviesan  la  ciudad  a  lo  largo,  y  en  calles,  que 
la  atraviesan  de  occidente  a  oriente,  cortando  las  avenidas  en  4ngulos 
rectos  y  formando  toda  la  ciudad  como  un  tablero  de  damas,  de  modo 
que  sabiendo  el  numero  de  la  calle  6  avenida  y  el  de  la  casa  a  donde  se 
va,  puede  calcularse  facilmente  la  distancia. 

10.  Y  este  edificio  de  arquitectura  tan  curiosa  de  la  esquina,  iqu6  es? 
Esta  es  la  nucva  acaderiiia  de  dibujo,  donde  se  exponen  al  ptiblico  moy 
buenas  pinturas. 

11.  ^Hay  aqui  tan  buenas  pinturas  como  en  el  musbo  de  Madrid?  No, 
ni  con  mucho ;  este  pais  es  aun  nuevo,  y  aunque  puedan  hacerlo  en  otras 
cosas,  todavia  no  pueden  rivaJizar  en  lo  que  respecta  a  las  bellas  artes 
con  Europa. 

12.  ;  Ilombre,  qu6  herraosa  plaza !  Esta  es  la  plaza  de  Madison  y  todos 
estos  bellos  edificios  que  V.  ve  d  su  alrededor,  y  la  plaza  misma,  han  side 
hechos  de  veinte  aflos  a  esta  parte. 

13.  g  Qu6  edificio  es  aquel  de  enfrente  que  es  tan  grande  como  nn  pala- 
cio  ?  Ese  es  el  hotel  de  la  Quinta  Avenida,  y  en  efecto  V.  tiene  razon  en 
compararlo  a  un  palacio,  porque  los  hoteles  son  en  realidad  los  palacios  de 
los  Estados  Unidos,  y  se  dice  que  son  los  mejores  del  mundo. 

14.  I  Cuidado !  hombre,  por  poco  se  deja  V.  atropellar  por  el  6mnibus. 
— j  Caspita !  j  qu6  mujer  tan  hermosa ! 

15.  Si ;  pero  no  debe  V.  pararse  a  adrairar  las  bellezas,  en  medio  de 
Broadway  en  su  punto  de  reunion  con  la  Quinta  Avenida,  porque  corre  Y. 
peligro  de  ser  atropellado  por  los  carruiges  de  todas  especies  que  conti- 
nuamcnte  lo  atraviesan. 

16.  Don  Fernando,  i  son  todas  las  sefloras  en  Nueva  York  tan  hermo- 
sas  como  esa  que  acaba  de  pasar  ?  No  s6,  porque  yo  solo  mir6  d6nde 
ponia  los  pi6s,  procurando  escapar  al  mismo  tiempo  de  los  carrutyes; 
pero  si  podr6  decirle  a  Y.  que  mujercs  mas  hermosas  que  las  que  he  visto 
yo  en  Nueva  York  no  creo  que  se  encuentren  en  ninguna  parte  del 
mundo. 

17.  jOiga  Y. !  ^no  hablan  espafiol  csos  que  van  delante  de  nosotrosi 
Eso  no  debe  Y.  extrafiarlo ;  esta  es  una  ciudad  cosmopolita ;  en  ella  hay 
gentes  do  todas  las  naciones  y  Y.  oird  en  el  trascurso  de  poco  tiempo 
hablar  aleman,  espafiol,  frances  y  otras  muchas  lenguas. 


LESSON     LI.  273 


EXERCISE. 


1.  What  do  you  understand  by  the  complement  of  a  verb?  It  is  a 
phrase  or  a  part  of  a  phrase  that  serves  to  complete  the  idea  expressed 
by  the  verb. 

2.  Can  you  tell  me  what  a  cosmopolitan  jg  ?  A  cosmopolitan  is  one 
who  is  not  a  stranger  in  any  country,  a  citizen  of  the  world. 

3.  Where  does  that  gentleman  live  ?  In  Fifth  Avenue,  on  the  corner 
of  Twenty-second  Street. 

4.  How  long  has  your  uncle  been  a  member  of  the  Royal  Academy 
of  Madrid  ?  He  is  not  a  member  of  the  Royal  Academy  of  Madrid ;  but 
he  has  been  a  member  of  the  Academy  of  Sciences  for  the  last  ten  years. 

5.  Take  that  book  from  Charles  and  give  it  to  Peter.  I  will  give  him 
some  other  book,  because  if  I  took  that  one  from  Charles  he  would  cry. 

6.  Is  your  friend  a  married  man  ?     No,  sir,  he  is  a  bachelor. 

7.  Have  you  ever  seen  Da  Vinci's  celebrated  painting  of  "  The  Last 
Supper"  ?*  No;  but  I  have  seen  the  engraving  of  that  painting,  made  by 
Morghen,  and  it  is  a  truth  admitted  by  every  one,  that,  notwithstanding 
the  absence  of  coloring,  that  engraving  is  a  happy  expression  of  the 
original. 

8.  How  long  does  it  take  to  go  from  here  to  the  Central  Park  ?  But 
a  short  time ;  the  distance  is  not  very  great. 

9.  Could  you  run  there  in  as  short  a  time  as  one  could  go  in  a  car- 
riage ?  I  do  not  doubt  that  I  could,  if  I  started  from  the  same  place  and 
ut  the  same  time  as  the  carriage. 

10.  How  are  the  several  States  of  the  Union  divided  ?  Into  Northern, 
Southern,  Eastern,  and  Western. 

11.  Is  that  not  the  tallest  man  you  have  ever  seen?  Far  from  it;  I 
have  seen  several  much  taller. 

12.  Have  they  been  able  to  fill  that  oflBce  (or  position)  yet  ?  I  beheve 
not;  I  understand  that  one  of  our  friends  was  about  to  apply  for  it  {pre- 
tenderlo\  but  his  father  was  opposed  to  his  doing  so,  and  so  he  would  not 
persist. 

13.  How  far  did  you  go  before  you  found  him?  I  walked  about  half 
an  hour  by  the  river  side,  inquiring  of  every  one  I  met  whether  he  had 
seen  a  young  man  on  horseback ;  and  at  last  an  old  man  told  me  he  had 
seen  him  cross  the  river,  nearly  opposite  the  new  building  they  are  put- 
ting up  (erecting),  at  a  short  distance  from  the  entrance  to  the  public 
promenade. 

14.  Are  there  any  fine  public  walks  in  the  metropolis  ?    About  seven 

or  eight  beautiful  ones,  the  most  of  which  have  been  made  within  the 

last  five  years.  .  _ 

•'  ,  *  La  cena. 


274 


LESSON     LII. 


LESSON    LII. 


Aconsejar. 

To  counsel,  to  advise. 

Aprovechar. 

To  profit,  to  embrace  (profit  by). 

Consistir. 

To  consist. 

Oolorir. 

To  color  (paintings). 

Citar. 

To  quote,  to  cite. 

Costar. 

To  cost. 

Comimicar. 

To  communicate. 

Deraostrar. 

To  demonstrate,  to  point  out. 

Deteriorar. 

To  deteriorate. 

Expresar. 

To  express. 

Freir. 

To  fry. 

(ory 

Grabar. 

To  engrave, 

to  fix  (in  the  mem- 

Tomarse  (el  trabajo). 

To  take  the  trouble. 

Prender. 

To  take  up, 

to  arrest. 

Perfeccionar. 

To  perfect. 

Merecer. 

To  merit,  to  deserve. 

Eeunir. 

To  gather, 
unite. 

to  assemble,  to  re- 

Eemunerar. 

To  remunerate. 

Visitar. 

To  visit,  to  seai-ch. 

Por  ejemplo. 

For  instance 

Que  yo  sepa. 

For  all  I  know. 

List  of  the  Irregular  Past  Participles  of  all  the  Verhs  already  introduced. 

Abierto.                Opened. 

Frito. 

Fried. 

Bendito.                Blessed. 

Hecho. 

Done. 

Contradicho.         Contradicted. 

Impuesto. 

Imposed. 

Oonvicto.              Convicted. 

Muerto. 

Died. 

Compuesto.           Composed. 

Manifiesto. 

Manifested. 

Dicho.                   Said,  told. 

Oculto. 

Ilidden,  con- 

Devuelto.             Given  back,  re- 

cealed. 

turned. 

Opuesto. 

Opposed. 

Dispuesto.             Disposed. 

Preso. 

Taken,  arrested. 

Escrito.                 Written. 

Puesto. 

Placed,  put 

Electo.                  Elected. 

Provisto. 

Provided. 

Expreso.               Expressed. 

Roto. 

Broken. 

Expuesto.              Exposed. 

Satisfecho. 

Satisfied. 

Visto.                   Seen. 

Vuelto. 

Returned. 

LESSON     LII. 

275 

Amplio. 

Ample. 

Actual. 

Present. 

Antiguo. 

Ancient,  old. 

Contemporaneo. 

Contemporary. 

Enemistado 

. 

At  variance,  on  bad  terms. 

Dramatico. 

Dramatic. 

Moderno. 

Modern. 

Honroso. 

Honorable. 

Politico. 

Political. 

Coofnero. 

Cook. 

Amenidad. 

Agreeableness, 

Capitan. 

Captain. 

amenity. 

Acierto. 

Success. 

Biblioteca. 

Library. 

Oolorido. 

Coloring. 

Cena. 

Supper. 

Grabado. 

Engraving. 

Comedia. 

Comedy,  play. 

Fresco. 

Cool,  refreshing 

Costumbre. 

Custom,  habit. 

air. 

Erudicion. 

Erudition. 

Empleo. 

Employment. 

Fuente. 

Fountain,  source. 

Drama. 

Drama. 

Existencia. 

Existence. 

Estilo. 

Style. 

Elegancia. 

Elegance. 

J6ven. 

Youth. 

Instruccion. 

Instruction,  learn- 

Mercader. 

Dealer. 

ing. 

Paisano. 

Countryman. 

Ignorancia. 

Ignorance. 

Hecho. 

Action,  fact. 

Mencion. 

Mention. 

Siglo. 

Century. 

Literatura. 

Literature. 

Verso. 

Verse. 

Mediania. 

Moderation,  me- 

Soldado. 

Soldier. 

diocrity. 

Prosa. 

Prose. 

Novela. 

Novel. 

Pohtica. 

Politics. 

Tragedia. 

Tragedy. 

Vasija. 

Vase,  vessel. 

COMPOJ 

3ITI0N. 

\iEst4  enemistado  con  su  priino. 
Colocado  en  vasijas. 
Ha  cantado  una  cancion  espaiiola. 
Los   caballos    que  ban  comprado  los 
mercaderes  no  son  buenos. 
V  Los  caballos  que  fueron  coraprados  per 

los  mercaderes  son  buenos. 
^^Estan  {or  quodan)  demostradas  estas 
verdades. 


He  is  on  bad  terms  with  his  cousin. 

Placed  in  vases  (or  vessels). 

He  has  sung  a  Spanish  song. 

The  horses  the  dealers  have  bought  are 
not  good. 

The  horses  that  were  bought  by  the 
dealers  are  good. 

These  truths  are  (or  remain)  demon- 
strated. 


276 


LESSON     HI. 


\J  La  cocinera  habia  frito  (or  freido)  el 

pescado. 
Han  prendido  (or  preso)  al  culpable. 
No  s6  si  babran  ya  proveido  (or  pro- 

visto)  el  empleo. 

Has  roto  el  va30. 
V  ;Ha  visto  V.  un  caballo  muerto  ? 
No,  pero  he  visto  un  caballo  matado. 

i  Qui6n  ha  muerto  4  ese  caballo  ? 
Un  paisano  le  ha  muerto. 
^  El  capitan  fue  muerto  por  sus  soldados. 
El  se  ha  matado. 
El  se  ha  muerto. 
\^8e  es  un  joven  muy  leido,  muy  apro- 
vechado  y  muy  callado. 

J  Es  un  hecho  que  la  Cena  de  da  Vinci  est& 
felizmente  expresada  en  el  grabado 
de  Morghen,  no  obstante  que  le  falta 
el  colorido  de  la  pintura. 

Aunque  el  fresco  de  la  Cena,  hecho  por 
da  Vinci,  est4  mal  colorido  y  deterio- 
rado,  ha  sido  grabado  con  acierto  por 
Morghen. 


The  cook  had  fried  the  fish. 

They  have  arrested  the  ofifender. 

I  do  not  know  whether  they  have  al- 
ready provided  (a  person  to  fill)  the 
oflBce. 

You  have  broken  the  glass. 

Have  you  seen  a  dead  horse  ? 

No,  but  I  have  seen  a  h^rse  with  a  sore 
back. 

Who  killed  that  horse  ? 

A  countryman  killed  it. 

The  captain  was  killed  by  his  soldiers. 

He  killed  himself. 

He  died. 

That  young  man  is  well  read,  makes 
the  most  of  his  opportunities,  and 
talks  little. 

It  is  a  fact  that  Da  Vinci's  "  Last  Sup- 
per "  is  happily  expressed  in  Morg- 
hen's  engraving,  notwithstanding  the 
latter  lacks  the  coloring  of  the  paint- 
ing. 

Although  the  fresco  of  the  "  Last  Sup* 
per,"  made  by  Da  Vinci,  is  badly 
colored,  and  deteriorated,  it  has  been 
engraved  with  success  by  Morghen. 


EXPLANATION. 

258.  Past  Participles. — Some  past  participles  retain  tbe 
regimen  of  their  verbs ;  as, 

Enemistado  con  su  primo.  |      On  bad  terms  with  his  cousin. 

259.  The  past  participle  must  agree  in  gender  and  number 
with  the  subject  or  determining  verb,  except  when  that  de- 
termining verb  is  haber ;  in  which  case  the  past  participle  is 
indeclinable,  whatever  be  the  gender  and  number  of  the  sub- 
ject; as, 


Ha  cantado  una  cancion. 
Los  caballos  que  ban  comprado  ]os 
mercadercs. 


He  has  sung  a  song. 
Tlie  horses   that   the   dealers 
bought. 


have 


But  the  past  participle,  if  it  comes  after  the  auxiliaries  ser, 


LESSON     LII. 


277 


BStar^  quedar^  or  any  other,  except  haber^  agrees  with  the  subject 
in  gender  and  number ;  as, 


Los  caballos  que  fueron  comprados 

por  los  mcrcaderes. 
Estaii  {or  quedan)  demostrados  estas 

verdades. 


The  horses  that  were  bought  by  the 

dealers. 
These  truths  are  (or  remain)  deraon- 

strated. 


260.  Some  verbs  have  two  past  participles,  one  regular  and 
the  other  irregular.  These  are  used  very  differently,  since  the 
irregular  one,  being  a  true  noun,  is  employed  in  an  absolute 
sense  only,  and  never  signifies  motion,  whether  in  the  active 
or  in  the  passive  form.  For  this  reason  the  latter  may  be 
accompanied  by  the  verbs  ser^  estar^  quedar,  and  others,  but 
never  by  the  auxiliary  haher ;  inasmuch  as  it  would  be  im- 
proper to  say :  huho  convictOj  he  coniracto,  instead  of,  hubo 
converirndo,  he  contraido. 

261.  The  irregular  participles  frito,  fried;  preso,  taken 
prisoner;  provisto,  provided,  and  roto,  broken,  are  the  only 
ones  that  can  be  used  with  the  verb  haber,  to  form  the  com- 
pound tenses ;  as. 


La  cocinera  habia  friio  (or  freido) 

el  pescado. 
Han  prendido  (or  preso)  al  culpable. 

No  se  si  habran  ya  proveido  {or  pro- 
visto) el  empleo. 


The  cook  had  fried  the  fish. 

They  have  taken  (or  arrested)  the 

offender. 
I  do  not  know  whether  they  have 

already  provided  (a  person  to  fill) 

the  office. 
You  have  broken  the  glass. 


Has  roto  el  vaso  {sounds  better  than 
has  rompido  el  vaso). 

262.  The  verb  matar,  in  the  sense  of  to  take  away  life,  has 
the  extraordinary  irregularity  of  appropriating  for  its  past  par- 
ticiple that  of  the  verb  morir ;  the  participle  matado  being 
used  to  express  wounds  or  sores  in  animals,  resulting  from  the 
rubbing  of  the  harness,  or  from  cruel  treatment;  as, 


Un  caballo  matado. 

Un  caballo  muerto. 

Un  ptLisano  le  ha  muerto. 

El  capitan  fue  muerto  por  sus  soldados. 


A  horse  with  a  sore  back. 

A  dead  horse. 

A  countryman  killed  him. 

The  captain  was  killed  by  his  soldiers. 


But  in  speaking  of  a  person  that  has  committed  suicide,  we 
must  say : 
Se  ha  matado  (and  not  Se  \x^muerLo).  \      He  has  killed  himself. 


278  LESSON     LII. 

263.  Some  past  or  passive  participles  take  an  active  signifi- 
cation, but  only  referring  to  persons  ;  as, 

Un  joven  leido,  aprovechado,  ccUloflo.  \      A  well  read,  thrifty  and  silent  youth. 

264.  Past  participles  may  sometimes  take  the  place  of 
substantives,  and  the  difference  can  be  known  only  by  the  ante- 
cedents and  subsequents,  as  in  this  sentence  : 


Es  un  hecho  que  la  Cena  de  da  Vinci 
esta  felizmente  expresada  en  el 
grahado  de  Morghen,  no  obstante 
que  le  falta  el  cohrido  de  la  pin- 
tura. 


It  is  a  fact,  that  " The  Last  Supper" 
by  Da  Vinci  is  happily  expressed 
in  the  engraving  of  Morghen,  not- 
withstanding the  latter  lacks  the 
coloring  of  the  painting. 

Where  the  words  hecho,  grahado  and  colorido,  are  substan- 
tives. The  same  words  appear  as  participles  in  the  following 
phrases  : 


Aunque  el  fresco  de  la  Cena,  hccho 
por  da  Vinci,  esta  mal  cohrido  y 
deteriorado,  ha  sido  grahado  con 
acierto  por  Morghen. 


Although  the  fresco  of  "The  Last 
Supper,"  made  by  Da  Vinci,  is 
badly  colored  and  deteriorated,  it 
has  been  engraved  with  success  by 
Morghen. 

265.  Other  grammarians  add  one  more  tense  in  the  infini- 
tive mood ;  as, 

Haber  de  amar.  I      To  have  to  love. 

Habiendo  de  amar.  |      Having  to  love. 

But  such  a  classification  is  no  longer  essential,  nor  even  correct. 
In  early  Spanish  literature  that  form  frequently  occurs,  per- 
forming the  office  now  almost  exclusively  filled  by  the  regular 
terminations  of  the  tenses,  and  chiefly  those  of  the  future  indic- 
ative and  the  imperfect  of  the  subjunctive. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  I  Qu6  le  gusta  k  Y.  mas,  la  conversacion  6  la  lectnra  ?  Ambas  cosas 
me  gustan  mucho. 

2.  I  Qu6  g6nero  de  lectura  le  giista  u  V.  mas  ?  La  historia,  la  come- 
dia,  y  la  novela. 

3.  I  Prefiere  V.  la  prosn  al  verso  ?  No,  sefior,  la  poesia  me  gasta 
mas ;  pero  ha  do  ser  muy  buena,  porque  en  poesia  no  me  gusta  la  rae- 
diania. 

4.  Que  autvires,  cu  la  literatura  modema,  me  riConseja  V.  que  lea 


LESSON     LII.  279 

para  perfeccionarme  en  el  espafioL— En  historia  j  politica  lea  V.  a  La- 
ftiente,  j  a  Minano. 

5.  I Y  para  la  comedia  ?  A  Moratin,  Breton  de  los  Herreros  y  Don 
Ventura  De  la  Vega. 

6.  I  No  tienen  Yds.  otros  ?  Si,  sefior ;  pero  yo  le  cito  a  V.  solamente 
los  mejores  y  solamente  a  los  contemporaneos. 

7.  gY  poetas?  Zorrilla,  Espronceda,  Hai'tzenbuscli,  y  otros  mu- 
chos. 

8.  I  Tienen  Yds.  algun  buen  critico  contemporaneo  por  el  estilo  del 
antiguo  Quevedo  ?  Yo  creo  que  no  pueden  encontrarse  dos  Quevedos ; 
pero,  sin  embargo,  tenemos  criticos  de  costumbres  muy  buenos,  tales  como 
Larra  (Figaro),  Don  Ramon  de  Mesonero  Romanos,  Pelegrin,  y  otros. 

9.  I  Tienen  Yds.  buenos  autores  para  la  tragedia  y  el  drama  ?  Si, 
sefior,  muy  buenos,  por  ejemplo,  Martinez  de  la  Rosa,  Garcia  Gutierrez, 
Gil  y  Zarate,  etc.,  etc. 

10.  Yo  no  sabia  que  tuviesen  Yds.  tantos  autores  buenos  en  la  litera- 
tura  actual. — Yo  pudiera  citarle  a  Y.  otros  muchos ;  pero  si  Y.  reune 
las  obras  de  los  catorce  mencionados  lograra  Y.  tener  una  pequefiita 
libreria  de  literatura  moderna,  que  le  ensefiara  4  Y.  mas  espafiol  que 
todas  las  gramaticas  y  m6todos  que  se  ban  compuesto  para  ensefiar  esta 
lengua  hasta  el  dia,  y  que  le  remuneraran  a  Y.  ampliamente  por  el  tra- 
bajo  que  le  ha  costado  el  aprenderla,  con  el  placer  y  la  instruccion  que 
le  comunicaran. 

11.  jEs  posible !  Yo  habia  oido  decir,  y  asi  lo  habia  Uegado  a  creer 
yo  mismo,  que  Espafia  no  poseia  nada  que  mereciese  mencion  en  su  litera- 
tura moderna,  y  a  decir  verdad,  los  linicos  libros  buenos  que  creia  que 
Yds.  poseian  eran  el  Don  Quijote  de  Cervantes  y  las  obras  dramaticas  de 
Calderon  de  la  Barca. — Asi  lo  he  oido  yo  decir  tambien,  y  en  verdad 
que  es  una  cosa  que  no  puedo  coraprender,  esa  general  ignorancia  de  la 
existencia  de  una  literatura  espafiola  contemporanea,  que  ha  producido 
mas  y  mejores  obras  que  las  que  se  han  producido  en  algun os  siglos  no 
solamente  en  Espafia  sino  en  otras  naciones. 

12.  gSe  conocen  en  Espafia  nuestros  autores  ingleses  contemporaneos? 
Se  conocen  mucho  mas  de  lo  que  aqui  son  conocidos  los  espanoles ;  la 
prueba  es  que  la  mayor  parte  estan  traducidos  al  castellano,  y  Yds.  no 
tienen  ningima  traduccion,  que  yo  sepa,  de  todos  esos  autores  que  acabo 
de  citarle  a  Y. 

13.  Probablemente  consiste  en  que  los  Americanos  e  Ingleses  no  apren- 
den  mucho  el  espafiol. — Entre  los  Americanos  debo  hacer  tres  honrosas 
excepciones,  que  son :  Washington  Irving,  Prestcott,  y  Ticknor.  Estos 
distinguidos  escritores  no  solo  aprendieron  el  espafiol,  sino  que  viajaron 
en  Espafia,  visitaron  nuestras  mejores  biblioteoas  y  quiza  adquirieron  en 


280  LESSON     Lll. 

aquellas  fuentes  mucho  del  saber,  la  erudicion,  el  gusto  y  la  elegancia  en 
el  decir  que  comunican  a  sus  obras  tanto  interns  y  amenidad. 


EXERCISE. 

1.  Oiiglit  we  not  to  make  the  most  of  (profit  by)  every  occasion  that 
offers  for  acquiring  knowledge  ?  That  is  the  only  way  to  arrive  at  the 
possession  of  knowledge. 

2.  Tell  the  cook  I  do  not  wish  that  fish  to  be  fried.  It  is  too  late  to 
tell  her  so ;  she  has  already  fried  it. 

3.  Has  that  work  been  translated  into  Spanish  ?  Not  that  I  know ; 
but  it  was  translated  with  success  into  French,  by  M.  de  I'Orme,  a  few 
years  ago. 

4.  Is  not  that  gentleman  to  whom  you  introduced  me  a  short  time 
since  a  dramatist?  He  is,  and  his  plays  might  serve  as  a  model  of  ele- 
gance for  many  dramatists  of  higher  pretensions  (pretensiones)  than  he. 

5.  Have  they  found  out  yet  who  set  fire  to  your  uncle's  house  ?  Yes; 
and  the  offender  has  been  arrested  and  convicted  of  the  crime. 

6.  Would  you  be  good  enough  to  lend  me  that  novel  of  which  you 
read  a  chapter  to  me  the  day  before  yesterday  ?  I  would  with  great 
pleasure  if  it  were  mine;  but  it  belongs  to  Alexander;  and,  as  we  are  on 
bad  terms  at  present,  I  should  not  like  to  ask  him  for  any  favors. 

7.  Would  that  painting  be  deteriorated*  by  being  exposed  to  the  heat 
of  the  sun  (sol)  ?  Certainly;  and  the  heat  of  a  strong  fire  would  produce 
the  same  effect  upon  it. 

8.  Did  your  friend,  the  captain,  return  with  his  regiment  from  the 
war  ?  No ;  he  was  killed  in  the  first  battle  that  took  place  after  his 
arrival  at  the  seat  {teatro)  of  war. 

9.  I  saw  no  mention  made  of  his  death  in  the  newspapers.  No ;  I 
believe  his  name  did  not  appear  in  the  list  {liata)  of  the  killed ;  but  the 
sad  news  was  communicated  to  his  brother  by  an  officer  of  the  same 
regiment. 

10.  Do  you  like  to  walk  in  the  garden  in  the  morning  before  breakfast? 
I  generally  go  to  the  garden  every  morning  and  evening  to  read  and 
emoke  in  the  cool  air. 

11.  I  wish  you  had  bought  that  work  on  English  literature.  So  do  I; 
it  would  have  been  very  useful  to  Louisa,  who  is  so  desirous  of  becoming 
I)erfect  in  that  language. 

12.  Did  your  father  think  Peter  merited  the  remuneration  he  received? 
I  do  not  know  whether  he  did  or  not ;  but,  at  all  events,  Peter  must  hav« 
merited  some  remuneration,  or  else  ho  would  have  got  none. 

♦  Deteriorar. 


LESSON     LIII. 


281 


13.  Are  you  going  to  have  voiir  name  engraved  on  your  watch?  I 
shall  only  have  my  initials  (inicial)  engraved  on  it. 

14.  What  kind  of  literature  does  your  aunt  hke  best  ?  Ha !  you  ask 
me  more  than  I  can  tell  you ;  I  really  cannot  say  whether  she  has  any 
taste  in  the  matter ;  for  the  fact  is,  never  having  taken  her  for  a  woman 
of  much  erudition,  I  have  not  taken  the  trouble  to  ask  her. 


LESSON    LIII 


Agradar. 

To  please. 

Aguantar. 

To  bear  with,  to  put  up  with,  to 

suffer. 

Alcanzar. 

To  reach,  to  overtake,  to  catch. 

Ahmentar. 

To  feed. 

Armar. 

To  arm. 

Bajar. 

To  go  (or  come)  down. 

Corretear. 

To  run  about. 

Conceder. 

To  concede,  to  grant. 

Distar. 

To  be  distant. 

Descomponer. 

To   decompose,   to  put    out  of 

order. 

Determinar. 

To  determine,  to  induce. 

Echar. 

To  throw,  to  put  (in). 

Exceder. 

To  exceed. 

Hinchar. 

To  swell. 

Nadar. 

To  swim. 

Prohibir. 

To  prohibit. 

Quitar. 

To  take  off,  to  take  away. 

Contrario. 

Contrary. 

Descompuesto. 

Decomposed,  out  of  order. 

Dotado. 

Endowed,  gifted. 

Excelente. 

Excellent. 

Indigno. 

Unworthy. 

Improviso. 

Improvised,  unexpected. 

Terrible. 

Terrible. 

Antojo.                 Desire,  longing, 

Alabanza.             Praise. 

whim. 

Apariencia.          Appearance. 

Alcance.               Eeach. 

Estocada.              Thrust. 

282 


LESSON     LIII. 


Consejo. 

Counsel. 

Busca. 

Search. 

Discurso. 

Speech,  discourse. 

Comida. 

Dinner. 

GatiUo. 

Pincers  (dentist's). 

Custodia. 

Keeping, 

Juicio. 

Judgment,  trial. 

Edad. 

Age. 

Juramento. 

Oath,  affidavit. 

Ilermosura. 

Beauty. 

Mar. 

Sea. 

Obligacion. 

Duty. 

Navio. 

Ship. 

Vela. 

Sail,  candle. 

Piso. 

Floor,  story. 

Travesura. 

Trick,  pertness. 

Tiro. 

Shot. 

Corrida  de  toros.  Bull-fight. 

Precopto. 

Precept. 

Oposicion. 

Opposition. 

Torero. 

Bull-fighter. 

Toro. 

Bull. 

Tribunal. 

Tribunal,  court. 

COMPOS 

5ITI0xV. 

Corrcr  por  las  calles. 
Hablo  de  {or  sobre)  ese  negocio. 
^  Qu6  esta  V.  haciendo  ? 
Estaba  para  decirselo  a  V. 
No  alcanzo  a  comprenderlo. 
«/Hace  las  cosas  a  su  antojo. 
Xba  en  busca  de  un  amigo. 
Me  opuse  a  ello. 
^-A  lo  largo  del  rio. 
^Venga  V.  conmfgo. 
»^^o  s6  qu6  determinar. 
De  ningun  mode. 
Esta  comiendo. 
Entrd  por  la  ventana. 
Delante  de  mi  ventana. 
Ante  el  juez. 
Antes  de  ahora. 
v/  Tales  acciones  son  indignas  de  un 

ballero. 
•■  Pareeia  fuera  de  sf. 
/--Excede  k  toda  alabanza. 
C  Sin  duda  alguna. 
De  dia. 
Uno  &  uno. 
y    i  Per  d6nde  Ic  vino  a  V.  ? 
Luego. 
Per  mar. 
A  la  mano. 


To  run  about  the  streets. 

He  spoke  about  that  affair. 

What  are  you  about  ? 

I  was  about  to  tell  it  to  you. 

It  is  above  my  comprehension. 
/\~B.e  does  things  after  his  own  fancy. 
f     I  was  in  search  of  a  friend, 
^-*'  I  set  my  face  against  it. 

By  the  river  side. 

Come  along  with  me. 

I  am  at  a  loss  how  to  act. 

Not  at  all. 

He  is  at  dinner. 

a  He  came  in  by  the  window. 
Before  my  window. 
Before  the  judge. 
Before  now. 
Such  actions  are  beneath  a  gentleman 

He  appeared  to  be  beside  himsel£ 
/  "It  is  beyond  all  praise. 
(_, Beyond  all  doubt. 

By  day. 

One  by  one. 

How  did  you  come  by  It  f  ^^ 

By  and  by.    — — 

By  sea. 

At  hand. 


LESSON     LIII, 


283 


-Eclielo  V.  en  tierra. 
En  cuanto  a  mi. 
Digaselo  V.  de  mi  parte. 
A  eonsequencia  de  eso. 
De  acuerdo  con. 

^Tenia  esperanza  de  que  serviria. 
Bajar  al  jardin. 
Todos  nosotros. 
Le  pido  a  V. 
I  Cuanto  dista  ? 
De  improviso. 
Quitese  V.  el  sombreo. 
Se  la  llevo. 
Le  deje  ir. 
Por  ese  motivo. 
Adelante. 
Sobre  mi  palabra. 
Al  contrario. 
No  se  tratan. 

Les  impuso  esa  obligacion. 
Alimentarse  de  esperanzas. 
Venga  V.  el  doce  de  Mayo. 
Al  {or  del)  otro  lado. 
Se  acabo. 

Vuelva  V.  4  leerlo. 
De  miedo. 
Fuera  de  peligro. 
Fuera  de  casa. 
Est4  sin  dinero. 
Descompuesto. 
Perdio  el  juicio. 
Por  curiosidad. 
Estar  de  mal  humor. 
Pasare  a  su  casa  de  V. 
Pasamos  por  Francia. 
Le  atraveso  de  parte  4  parte. 
Por  el. 

Por  medio  de  el. 
De  dia  en  dia. 
Segun  las  apariencias. 
Eso  esta  aun  por  venir. 
Diez  contra  uno. 
Hasta  boy. 
El  navio  esta  a  la  velx 


Throw  it  down. 
As  for  me. 

Tell  him  that  from  me. 
In  consequence  of  that. 
In  accordance  with. 
I  was  in  hopes  that  it  would  do. 
To  go  down  to  the  garden. 
([All  of  us. 
I  beg  of  you. 
How  far  is  it  ? 
Off-hand. 

Take  off  your  hat. 
He  carried  her  off. 
I  let  him  off. 
On  that  account. 
Go  on. 
On  my  word. 
On  the  contrary. 
They  are  not  on  good  terms. 
He  imposed  that  duty  upon  them. 
To  live  on  hope. 
Come  on  the  12th  of  May. 
Over  the  way,  on  the  other  side. 
It  is  all  over. 
Read  it  over  again. 
From  fear,  for  fear. 
Out  of  danger. 
Out  of  doors. 
He  is  out  of  money. 
Out  of  order. 
She  is  out  of  her  mind. 
Out  of  curiosity. 
To  be  in  bad  humor. 
I  wiU  go  round  to  your  house. 
"We  passed  through  France. 
He  ran  him  through. 
Through  {i.  e.,  on  account  of)  him. 
Through  {i.  e.,  by  means  of)  him. 
From  day  to  day. 
By  all  appearances. 
That  is  yet  to  come. 
Ten  to  one. 
To  this  day. 
The  ship  is  under  sail. 


284 


LESSON     LIII. 


Es  men  or  de  edad. 

Bajo  de  juramento. 

Placia  all4. 

i  Estan  levantados  ? 

Al  segundo  piso. 

Que  suban  la  comida. 

Le  pusieron  en  custodia. 

Eincharse  de  soberbia. 

No  la  puedo  aguantar. 

Armese  V.  de  paciencia. 

Su  hermosura  me  sorprendio. 

No  la  conozco. 

Dotado  de  virtudes. 

Me  agrado  su  discurso. 

A  tiro  de  pistola. 

A  mi  alcance. 

No  hay  nadie  en  casa. 

Asomado  &  una  ventana. 


He  is  under  age. 
Under  oath. 
Up  that  way. 
Are  they  up  ? 
Up  two  flights  of  stairs. 
Let  them  bring  up  the  dinner. 
He  was  taken  into  custody. 
To  be  pufifed  up  with  pride, 
I  cannot  put  up  with  her. 
Arm  yourself  with  patience. 
I  was  struck  with  her  beauty. 
I  am  not  acquainted  with  her. 
Endowed  with  virtues. 
I  was  pleased  with  his  discourae. 
Within  pistol-shot. 
With  my  reach. 
There  is  nobody  within. 
I  At  a  window. 


EXPLANATION. 

266.  Idioms  are  certain  peculiar  modes  of  expression  which 
cannot  be  translated  literally  into  another  language.  We  have 
already  introduced  some  Spanish  as  well  as  English  idioms ; 
but  they  are  very  numerous  in  all  languages,  and  it  would  be 
as  unnecessary  to  give  within  the  compass  of  a  grammar  all 
those  peculiar  to  the  Spanish  language,  as  it  would  be  to  intro- 
duce all  its  words.  The  learner  will  find  them  in  the  several 
dictionaries,  and  principally  in  the  works  of  good  writers. 

However,  we  have  introduced  in  the  "Composition"  of  this 
lesson  as  many  as  the  limits  of  this  book  would  allow ;  giving 
examples  of  phrases  in  which  the  English  preposition  differs  in 
meaning  from  that  which  most  generally  constitutes  its  proper 
signification,  and  consequently  must  be  translated  by  words 
corresponding  to  those  in  whose  place  it  stands  ;  as, 

No  s6  qu6  determinar.  j      I  am  at  a  loss  how  to  act. 

De  ningun  modo.  |      Not  at  all. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  J  En  d6n(le  estd  Alejandro?    Estti  corriendo  per  las  calles. 

2.  iPorqu6  no  me  lo  dijisto  antes?    Estaba  para  docirselo  d  V. 


LESSON     LIII.  285 

3.  Yo  no  quiero  que  ande  correteando  calles. — Creo  que  iba  en  busca 
de  SQ  amigo. 

4.  Se  lo  tengo  probibido ;  pero  el  no  me  obedece,  j  hace  las  cosas  d 
su  antojo. — Yo  me  opuse  a  ello,  y  le  dije  que  V.  queria  ir  a  paseo  con 
todos  nosotros. 

5.  Don  Carlos,  si  Y.  quiere,  ire  a  buscarlo. — ^De  ningun  modo,  Y.  no 
lo  encontraria ;  lo  que  teuio  es  que  haga  alguaa  travesura  que  le  cueste 
cara. 

6.  Yo  creo  que  subiendo  a  lo  largo  del  rio  lo  encontrar6,  porque  si  no 
me  engano  le  oi  decir  que  queria  ir  a  nadar. — No  s6  qu6  determinar,  pero 
no,  mejor  sera  dejarlo,  vamonos  nosotros  a  paseo  (or  vamos). 

7.  Su  hermano  Manuel  es  muy  diferente,  excede  a  toda  alabanza  'J 
siempre  obedece  los  preceptos  de  su  papa. — Sin  duda  alguna  Manuel  es 
un  excelente  mucbacho. 

8.  jHolal  aqui  viene  Juanito.  ^YieneY.  al  campo  con  nosotros? 
Con  mucho  gusto  ;  pero  antes  tengo  que  pedir  a  Y.  un  favor. 

9.  Delo  Y.  por  concedido. — i  Palabra  de  honor  ? — Sobre  mi  palabra. 
I  Que  es  ? 

10.  Que  perdone  Y.  d  Alejandro. — j  Yaja !  sea  asi,  puesto  que  di  mi 
palabra;  ^pero  donde  esta?  Se  escondio  y  no  se  atreve  a  presentarse  de 
miedo,  pero  abora  lo  veo  asomado  a  una  ventana  en  el  segundo  piso  de 
su  casa  de  Y. 

11.  Yo  creo  que  ha  perdido  el  juicio  ese  mucbacho ;  venga  Y.  aca, 
sefior  mio,  j  cu6ntenos  que  ha  hecho  en  todo  este  tiempo  que  ha  estado 
fuera  de  casa. — Papa,  perdoneme  Y.,  que  no  lo  volver6  4  hacer  otra 
vez. 

12.  Bien,  bien,  dejeraoslo  asi  por  esta  vez. 

13.  I  Don  Jos6,  corao  esta  su  hermana  de  Y.  ?  Esta  mejor  y  esperamos 
que  ya  esta  fuera  de  peligro. 

14.  I  Mat6  el  torero  al  toro  a  la  primera  estocada  ?  Si,  sefior,  a  la 
primera  estocada  lo  atraves6  de  parte  a  parte. 

15.  gNo  se  trata  Y.  con  su  vecino?  No,  sefior,  es  un  hombre  lleno 
de  soberbia,  d  quien  no  puedo  aguantar. 

16.  ^Se  di6  el  navio  a  la  vela  para  la  Habana?  Si,  sefior,  el  navio 
esta  a  la  vela. 

17.  jPusieron  al  culpable  en  custodia?  No,  sefior,  le  dejaron  bajo 
juramento  de  que  se  presentaria  en  el  tribunal. 

18.  ^  Conoce  Y.  d  la  Sefiorita  Sanchez  ?  Hace  poco  tiempo  que  bice 
su  conocimiento,  su  hermosura  me  sorprendi6  y  es  una  sefiorita  dotada 
de  grandes  virtudes. 

19.  ^,  Yiaj6  Y.  el  verano  pasado  por  mar  6  por  tierra?  Por  supuesto 
por  mar,  puesto  que  fui  a  Europa. 


286  LESSON     LIII. 

20.  ^Pasaron  Yds.  por  Francia?    Si,  Beflor,  pasaraos  por  Francia,  y  el 
docc  de  Mayo  entramos  en  Paris. 

21.  ^Esta  V.  de  mal  humor?    Si,  senor,  malisimo,  porque  tengo  un 
terrible  dolor  de  muelas. 

22.  Le  aconsejo  d  V.  que  se  arme  de  paciencia.— Mil  gracias,  per  su 
buen  consejo,  pero  creo  que  sera  mejor  armarse  de  un  buen  gatillo. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  How  does  that  man  spend  his  time  ?  He  seems  to  do  nothing  but 
run  about  the  streets. 

2.  Is  your  uncle's  sight  not  good  ?  No,  sir ;  and  that  is  the  reason 
why  he  wears  spectacles. 

3.  Is  that  the  way  you  spell  (escribir)  that  word  ?  Oh,  no,  of  course 
not ;  I  must  take  out  one  of  the  ^'s. 

4.  Does  your  watch  keep  good  time  {amda/r  bien)l  Yes,  when  it 
goes,  which  occurs  very  rarely*;  it  gets  out  of  order  about  twice  a  month. 

5.  Did  you  see  the  Spanish  man-of-war  (ship  of  war)  that  came  into 
port  (puerto)  last  month  ?  Yes,  I  saw  it  the  day  it  set  sail  {darse  d  lu 
xiela)  to  return  to  Spain. 

6.  Did  you  go  to  see  a  bull-fight  during  your  stay  at  Madrid  ?  I  did ; 
and  although  I  do  not  like  it  myself,  yet  I  could  not  help  {no  poder  menos 
de)  admiring  the  amazing  dexterity  of  the  men  (bull-fighters)  who  dared 
to  expose  their  lives  attacking  the  furious  animal. 

7.  How  many  stories  are  there  in  the  house  you  live  in  ?  Tliree ;  I 
generally  sleep  on  the  third  floor. 

8.  Can  you  not  induce  him  to  stay  at  home  ?  No,  he  wants  to  go ; 
it  is  a  whim  of  his,  and  he  wiU  not  bear  with  any  opposition. 

9.  Were  you  in  court  at  the  time  of  the  trial  ?  No,  I  could  not  go 
down  town  that  day. 

10.  How  far  had  he  gone  before  you  overtook  him  ?    I  caught  up  with 
him  at  the  corner  of  the  street. 

11.  How  is  your  cousin  getting  on  ?    Pretty  well ;  but  his  arm  is  stiU 
swollen,  and  to  all  appearance  it  pains  him  very  much. 

12.  I  wonder  how  he  can  bear  up  under  so  much  sulSering.    Ho  lives 
in  the  hope  of  getting  better  one  day  or  other. 

13.  Did  that  man  swear  he  had  not  been  there  ?    He  made  (prestar) 
affidavit  that  ho  had  never  set  (put)  his  foot  in  the  house. 

14.  What  a  beautiful  young  lady  that  is  1    That  is  true ;  but  her  learn- 
ing by  far  exceeds  her  beauty. 

♦  Rara  tm. 


LESSON     LIV, 


287 


LESSON^    LIY 


Apegarse. 

Criar. 

Concebir. 

Continuar. 

Encerrar. 

Guardar. 

Pintar. 

Presidir. 

Ponderar. 

Combatir, 

Eedncir. 

Eodar. 

Sacudir. 

Tirar. 

Llenar. 
Entiisiastoar. 

Al  cabo. 
De  repente. 

No  obstante. 
Si  acaso. 
Si  bien. 

Atnarillo. 

Azul. 

Anaranjado. 

Atento. 

Oonfuso. 

Feroz. 

Bondadoso. 

Pavorito. 

Griego. 

Afiil. 

Ligero. 

Lleno. 

Montaraz. 

Vistoso. 

Colorado,  rojo. 


To  adhere  to,  to  be  attached. 

To  raise  (breed),  to  bring  up. 

To  conceive. 

To  continue. 

To  shut  up. 

To  guard,  to  tftke  care,  to  keep. 

To  paint. 

To  preside. 

To  make  much  of,  to  praise. 

To  combat. 

To  reduce. 

To  roll. 

To  shake,  to  shake  off. 

To  pull,  to  draw,  to  throw,  to 

throw  out  (or  away). 
TofiU. 
To  render  enthusiastic. 

After  all,  finally,  at  the  end. 
Suddenly,  on  a  sudden. 


!N"otwith  standing. 
If  at  all,  in  case. 
Although. 


Yellow. 

Blue. 

Orange. 

Attentive. 

Confused. 

Pierce. 

Kind. 

Favorite. 

Greek. 

Indigo. 

Liglit,  slight,  speedy. 

Full. 

Mountaineer,  wild. 

Conspicuous,  showy. 

Eed. 


I 


288 

LESSON     LIV. 

Romano. 

Roman. 

Particular. 

Particular,  private,  rare. 

Picante. 

Pungent. 

Temerario. 

Daring,  rash 

, 

Violado. 

Violet  (color). 

Verde. 

Green. 

Prismatico. 

Prismatic. 

Oabo. 

End. 

Algazara. 

Shouts  (of  joy). 

Oirco. 

Siege,  circus. 

Autoridad. 

Authority. 

Color. 

Color. 

Confusion. 

Confusion. 

Bullicio. 

Rumpus,  noise, 

Carcajada. 

Burst  of  laughter. 

bustle. 

Corrida. 

Fight  (bull),  race. 

Ceremonial. 

Ceremony. 

Violeta. 

\/ Violet  (flower). 

Espeotro  solar. 

Solar  spectrum. 

Diversion. 

Diversion. 

Goce.             w 

Delight,  joy. 

Clase. 

Class. 

Dicho. 

Saying. 

Infancia. 

Infancy. 

Desierto.           ^Desert. 

Idea. 

Idea. 

Interns. 

Interest. 

Fiesta. 

Feast,  festival 

Guante. 

Glove. 

Guifiada. 

Wjnk, 

Leon. 

Lion. 

Ocupacion. 

Occupation, 

Local. 

Situation. 

Corrida  de  toros.  Bull-fight. 

Entusiasrao. 

Enthusiasm. 

Pelota. 

Ball. 

Enemigo. 

Enemy. 

Plaza  de  toros. 

»/Arena. 

Lloros. 

Tears,  cry. 

Proeza. 

Prowess,  exploits. 

Paso. 

Step,  pace. 

Sonrisa. 

Smile. 

Prisma. 

Prism. 

Valentia. 

Bravery. 

Rumor. 

Rumor. 

Jaula. 

\/  Cage. 

S6r. 

Being. 

Traje. 

Dress,  costume. 

Recibimiento. 

Reception. 

Suelo, 

Ground. 

Grito. 

Shout,  cry. 

COMPO 

SITION. 

V^Los  vlmoB  cuando  entrabamos. 

We  saw  them  as  we  were  gobg  in. 

^  Si  no  hubiera  sido  por  mi,  le  habrian 

But  for  me,  they 

would  have  killed  him. 

matado. 

v^Yo  iria  si  no  creyera  que  fuese  inutil. 

I  would  go,  but  that  I  think  it  useless. 

Diga  V.  si  vendri  6  no. 

Say  whether  you 

will  come  or  not 

Que  venga  6  que 

no  vcnga. 

Whether  he  come  or  not. 

Dudo  que  lo  sepa. 

I  doubt  whether  she  knows  it 

LESSON      LIV. 


289 


t*or  atentos  y  bondadosos  que  sean  {or 
no  obstante  lo  atentos  que  son)  y  por 
bondadosos  que  sean. 
*^Es  menester  que  se  cuide  V.,  porque  si 
no  se  enfermara. 
Es  menester  que  obedezca  V.  las  orde- 
nes  ;  de  lo  contrario  sufrira  las  con- 
secueneias. 
0  yo  tengo  razon  6  el  la  tiene. 
v^'i  prometas  ni  obres  sin  pensar. 

^  No  lo  haria  si  me  importara  la  vida  (e.  <?., 
aunque,  or  por  mas  que  me  importa- 
ra la  vida). 
Valiente  si  los  hay. 

Tuvo  el  valor,  si  tal  nombre  merece  una 
aecion  temeraria  de  combatir  solo 
contra  tantos  enemigos. 
vQuiero  saber  si  emplea  bien  el  tiempo. 

6  Si  habr4  llegado  el  correo  ? 
Mira  si  viene. 
•  No  s6  si  lo  haga. 
Si  (es  que)  acabo  de  entrar. 
Si  (cuando)  el  al  cabo  ha  de  venir. 
Si  (es  que)  no  es  eso. 
Si  (ya)  lo  dije. 

Si  (porque)  no  hay  cosa  que  yo  haga. 
^  Apenas  si  se  oia  el  confuso  rumor  de 
los  pasos. 


However  attentive  they  are,  and  how- 
ever kind  thej  may  be. 

You  must  take  care  of  yourself,  for  if 
you  do  not  you  will  be  ill 

You  must  obey  the  orders  ;  for  if  you 
transgress  them,  you  will  suffer  the 
consequences. 

Either  I  am  right  or  he  is. 

Neither  promise  nor  act  without  think- 
ing. 

I  would  not  do  it,  though  my  life  were 
at  stake. 

A  valiant  man,  if  there  are  any  in  the 

world. 
He  had  the  courage,  if  the  rash  action 

of  fighting  alone  against  so  many 

enemies  is  worthy  of  such  a  name. 
I  wish  to  know  whether  he  employs  his 

time  profitably. 
If  the  mail  should  have  arrived  ? 
See  if  he  is  coming. 
I  do  not  know  whether  to  do  it  or  not 
I  have  but  just  come  in. 
For,  after  all,  he  must  come. 
But  that  is  not  it. 
But  I  said  so. 
For  I  do  nothing  at  all. 
The  confused  tramping  of  feet  could 

scarcely  be  heard. 


EXPLANATION. 

267.  There  are  several  conjunctions  in  English  that  are 
frequently  used  as  substitutes  for  other  words ;  these  conjunc- 
tions are  generally  rendered  in  Spanish  by  the  words  which 
they  stand  in  the  place  of;  as, 

Los  vlmos  cuando  entrabamos.  I      We  saw  them  as  we  were  going  in. 

Diga  V.  si  quiere  venir  6  no.  |      Say  whether  you  will  come  or  not. 

268.  The  Spanish  conjunctions  are  also  often  used  as  sub- 
stitutes for  other  words  of  very  different  meanings.  Let  si  and 
qite  serve  as  examples  : 

13 


290 


LESSON     LIV 


Si,  as  an  adverb,  is,  as  we  have  already  observ^ed,  affirmative, 
except  when  employed  ironically. 

jSi,  as  a  conjunction,  may  be  employed  in  a  variety  of  signi- 
fications.    The  following  are  some  of  its  principal  uses : 

Ist.  To  denote  the  condition  on  which  depends  the  accom- 
plishment of  an  action  ;  as, 

JSi  quicres  acompauarme,  voy  a  salir.  j      If  you  will  accompany  me,  I  am  go- 

j  ing  out. 

2d.  To  express  indispensable  conditions ;  as, 


Tendras  el  caballo  si  lo  pagas. 


You  will  have  the  horse  if  you  pay 
for  it. 


I  would  not  do  it,  even  though  my 
life  were  at  stake. 


3d.  In  the  sense  of  although,  or  even  though  ;  as, 

No  lo  haria  si  me  importara  la  vida 
(i.  e.,  aunque  or  por  mas  qti€y  me 
importara  la  vida). 

4th.  In  familiar  conversation  this  conjunction  is  often  em- 
ployed in  meanings  very  different  from  those  we  have  just  ex- 
plained. For  instance,  it  is  often  used  instead  of  es  que,  it  is 
because  ;  cuando,  when ;  porque,  because ;  and  not  unfrequent- 
ly  instead  of  ya,  already,  as  we  read  in  one  of  Moratin's  come- 
dies : 


Si  (es  que)  acabo  de  entrar. 

Si  (cuando)  ^1  al  cabo  ha  de  venir. 

Si  (es  que)  no  es  eso. 

Si  (ya)  lo  dije. 

Si  (porque)  no  hay  cosa  que  yo  haga. 


I  have  but  just  come  in. 
For,  after  all,  he  must  come. 
But  that  is  not  it. 
But  I  said  so  (or  did  say  so). 
For  I  do  nothing  at  all. 


6th.  It  is  often  used  redundantly  ;  as, 

Ap^nas  si  se  oia  el  confuso  rumor  de  I      The  confused  tramping  of  feet  could 
los  pasos.  I  scarcely  be  heard. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  I  Iria  V.  d  ver  d  su  hermano  si  tuviera  tiempo  ?    Yo  iria  si  no  cre- 
yera  que  fuese  iniitil. 

2.  Diga  V.  si  vendrd  6  no. — Amigo  mio  tcmo  salir,  porquo  haco  mal 
tiempo,  y  es  menester  que  me  cuide  porque  si  no  enferraar^. 

8.  I  Estuvo  V.  ayer  d  ver  el  recibimiento  del  Presidente  ?    No,  sefior, 
mis  oGupaciones  no  me  lo  permitieron. 


LESSON     LTV.  291 

4.  I  Cuales  son  los  colores  en  que  se  descompone  el  espectro  solar  ? 
Yiolado,  afiil,  azul,  verde,  amarillo,  anaranjado  y  rojo. 

5.  I  Be  que  color  tine  V.  sus  guantes  ?     Los  tino  de  amarillo. 

6.  I  Qu6  tal  le  gusta  a  V.  este  ejercicio  ?  No  me  gusta  de  ningun 
modo,  J  si  contintia  tan  interesante  como  hasta  aqui,  creo  que  me  hara 
dormir. 

7.  I  Que  costumbres  le  gustan  4  V.  mas,  las  de  Espafia  6  las  de  los 
Estados  Unidos?  Naturalmente,  como  espanol,  me  gustan  mas  las  de 
Espafia. 

I  8.  Pero  I  cuales  son  las  mejores  ?  No  sabr6  decirselo  d  Y.,  cada  nacion 
tiene  las  suyas  y  cada  individuo  se  apega  desde  su  infancia  a  las  de  su 
propio  pais. 

9.  I  Cual  es  la  diversion  favorita  del  pueblo  espafiol  ?  Las  corridas  de 
toros ;  esto  se  entiende  bablando  del  pueblo  en  general  j  aun  de  muchos 
caballeros  de  la  pnmera  clase  de  la  sociedad;  pero  no  de  todos,  porque 
hay  muclios,  principalmente,  sefloras,  que  jamas  ban  visto  una  corrida  de 
Toros. 

10.  Debe  ser  una  diversion  muy  cruel  y  muy  peligrosa. — No  deja  de 
ser  peligrosa,  pues  los  toros  de  Espafia  son  mas  feroces  y  ligeros  que  los 
de  ninguna  parte  del  mundo,  criados  con  este  objeto  montaraces,  de  modo 
que  cuando  de  improviso  se  encuentran  en  la  plaza  muestran  una  feroci- 
dad  y  una  valentia  en  nada  inferior  a  la  de  un  leon  de  los  desiertos  del  Afri- 
ca, que  se  encontrase  de  repente  en  estos  circos  llenos  de  s4res  humanos. 

11.  ^  Quiere  V.  hacerme  el  favor  de  relatarme  una  corrida  de  toros  ? 
Lo  haria  con  mucbo  gusto  ;  pero  s6  que  no  podria  bacerlo  como  merece 
esta  antigua  diversion,  en  algo  semejante  a  los  circos  de  los  Griegos  y 
Eomanos. 

12.  J  Yam  OS  I  prucbe  Y. — Pero  si  es  imposible,  y  aunque  llegara  a  pin- 
tarle  a  Y.  el  local,  los  vistosos  trajes,  tanto  del  pueblo  como  de  los  tore- 
ros, los  curiosos  ceremoniales  de  la  fiesta,  las  autoridades  que  la  presiden, 
las  tropas  que  la  guardan  ;  la  mtisica,  el  bullicio,  los  diclios  picantes,  las 
sonrisas,  las  gnifiadas,  los  Uoros  y  carcajadas,  todo  esto  no  serviria  de 
nada  para  hacerle  a  Y.  concebir  una  pequefia  idea  del  gozo  y  entusiasmo 
que  anima  al  pueblo  espafiol  en  una  corrida  de  toros. 

13.  jEs  posible!  jOon  que  todo  eso  bay!  pues  yo  creia  que  se  redu- 
cia  a  una  carniceria  de  vacas  y  caballos. — Pues  si  Y.  estuviera  en  Madrid 
le  sucederia  como  a  todos  los  extrangeros,  que  a  pesar  de  criticarnos  esta 
diversion,  jamas  pierden  una  corrida  de  toros. 

14.  Pero  ^en  qu6  puede  consistir  ese  goce  que  Y.  me  pondera?  j  Goce! 
hombre,  he  visto  yo  tirar  a  la  plaza  el  baston,  el  bolsillo  y  hasta  el  reloj, 
entusiasraado  de  la  proeza  de  algun  toreador.  Eso  era  lo  que  yo  le  decia 
d  Y.  que  no  era  facil  de  pintar,  porque  no  consiste  en  la  cosa  misma  por 


292  LESSON     LIV. 

mas  interns  que  tenga  sino  en  la  disposicion  particular  y  el  entusiasmo  de 
cada  uno.  Y  si  no  digame  V.  en  el  juego  del  fragata*  americano  en 
que  no  se  ve  otra  cosa  que  una  pelota  que  rueda  por  el  suelo,  6  se  eleva 

por  el  aire,  despedida  por  un  garrote j  j  jQu6  es  lo  que  mueve 

toda  aqucUa  algazara  j  ruido  y  confusion  y  gritos  de,  Hola ! ! !  Willie !  1 1 
Charley ! !  !  Here ! ! !  Here  ! ! !  Run ! ! !  James ! ! !  Hurra ! !  I  Hurra ! !  I 
15.  Ha,  ha,  ha ;  V.  me  hace  reir  con  su  corrida  de  toros.     j  Vaya!  me 
alegro,  algo  se  ha  ganado,  porque  al  principio  yo  creia  que  V.  se  iba  4 
dormir. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Had  you  not  better  leave  a  line  for  him  in  case  he  should  come? 
I  think  it  would  be  better ;  notwithstanding  that  it  seems  impossible  for 
him  to  get  here  to-night. 

2.  Do  the  boys  still  continue  to  take  lessons  ?  One  of  them  still  con- 
tinues, although  the  least  studious  of  the  three ;  the  other  two  gave  up 
all  of  a  sudden  last  month. 

3.  What  shouts  are  those  I  hear  up-stalrs  ?  Charles  has  some  friends 
with  him,  and  they  are  getting  enthusiastic  on  the  occasion  of  the  Presi- 
dent's visit  to  the  city. 

4.  Do  you  know  how  to  keep  a  secret?  I  want  to  know  that  before  I 
tell  you  this  one. — I  do. — Well,  so  do  I. 

5.  I  supposet  they  gave  the  General  a  grand  reception  when  he  re- 
turned from  the  war  ?  A  magnificent  J  one,  fit  for  a  king ;  it  was  Peter's 
xmcle  that  presided  at  it. 

6.  Can  you  tell  me  how  many  prismatic  colors  there  are,  and  their 
names  ?  I  shall  try ;  let  us  see :  Green,  blue,  violet,  red,  orange,  yellow, 
indigo. 

7.  What  is  the  best  time  for  learning  a  language  with  the  least 
trouble ?  During  infancy;  in  that  age  the  study  of  languages  is  reduced 
to  its  simplest  expression. 

8.  What  would  the  earth  be  without  the  light  and  heat  which  we  re- 
ceive from  the  sun  ?  A  perfect  desert ;  man  nor  no  living  being  could 
exist,  and  there  would  be  no  vegetation,  for  all  animated  nature  is  sus- 
tained by  the  vivifying  (vivrficador)  eflfects  of  the  sun. 

9.  What  is  the  use  of  the  prism  ?  It  possesses  the  power  of  decom- 
posing the  sunbeam  {rayo  del  sol),  thus  enabhng  (poder)  us  to  see  separate- 
ly tlie  rays  of  difi'erent  colors  which  unite  to  form  what  is  called  light. 

10.  Where  are  you  going  now  ?  it  is  not  yet  time  for  the  theatre.  Why, 
it  is  half-past  seven,  and  the  play  begins  at  eight  precisely. 

11.  If  my  friend  should  have  come  while  I  was  out?    Oh,  I  imagine 
that  if  he  had  come  he  would  have  left  some  word  (dejar  dicho)  for  you. 

*  Base  ball.  t  Snponer.  %  Magniflco. 


LESSON     LV. 


293 


12.  "What  is  tliat  confused  tramping  of  feet*  that  I  hear  in  the  street  ? 
A  crowd  of  people  running  to  see  a  fire  in  the  next  street. 

13.  Do  you  hear  how  that  lady  praisesf  the  courage  of  the  raan  who  has 
just  got  into  the  hon's  cage  {jaula)  ?  I  do,  and  I  was  just  thinking  she 
might  find  an  occupation  of  more  interest ;  besides,  I  do  not  see  any 
proof  of  courage  in  such  a  rash  action  as  to  shut  one's  self  up  with  a  fe- 
rocious animal  like  the  lion. 

14.  "What  sort  of  a  dress  did  Miss  H.  wear  at  the  ball  ?  A  blue  silk 
{seda)  dress,  with  violet  and  orange  trimmings  {guarniciones).  Can  you 
conceive  of  any  thing  more  detestable  ? 


LESSON    LY, 


Afianzar. 

To  secure,  to  fasten,  to  prop. 

Conquistar. 

To  conquer. 

Construir. 

To  construct. 

to  build. 

Fundai*. 

To  found,  to  go  upon  (a  principle). 

Medir. 

To  measure. 

Portarse. 

To  conduct  one's  self,  to  behave. 

Tirar. 

To  throw. 

Desigual. 

Unequal. 

Extremado. 

Extreme. 

Horrendo. 

Horrific. 

Distinto. 

Distinct. 

Eidiculo. 

Ridiculous. 

InmemoriaL 

Immemorial. 

Recto. 

Right,  straight. 

Auxilio. 

Help. 

Andalucia. 

Andalusia. 

Castellano. 

Castilian. 

Castilla. 

Castile. 

Arabe. 

Arab. 

Catalufia. 

Catalonia. 

Crimen. 

Crime. 

Corona. 

Crown. 

Catalan. 

Catalonian. 

Avila. 

Avila. 

Ciraiento. 

Foundation. 

Galicia. 

Galicia. 

Dialecto. 

Dialect. 

Isabel. 

Elizabeth,  Isa- 

Pulano. 

Such    a    one,    so 

bella. 

and  so. 

Imperfeccion. 

Imperfection. 

Gallego. 

Galician. 

Irregularidad. 

Irregularity. 

Modelo. 

Model. 

Guipuzcoa. 

Guipuzcoa. 

♦ 

Rumor  de  pasoa. 

+  Aolaudir. 

294 


LESSON     LV. 


Defecto. 

M6rito. 

Keino 

Terreno. 

Titulo. 

Vascuence. 

Zatano. 

Esoritorio. 


Defect. 

Merit. 

Kingdom. 

Ground. 

Title. 

Basque. 

Such  a  one. 

Office. 


Igualdad. 

Medida. 

Pesa. 

Nobleza. 

Persona. 

Moneda. 

Regularidad. 

Valencia. 

Vizcaya. 

Universidad. 


Equality. 
Measure. 
Weight  (for 
weighing). 
Nobility. 
Person. 
Coin. 

Regularity. 
Valencia. 
Biscay. 
Universitj. 


COMPOSITION. 


Tratemos  ahora  de  descansar  que  8er4 

lo  mejor. 
Si  no  hay  virtudes,  que  son  el  cimiento 

de  la  libertad,  no  so  afianzara  esta  en 

los  pueblos, 
i  Que  hermosa  que  estas ! 
Ese  si  que  es  un  modo  de  portarse  con 

honor. 
Que  Uaman. 
Que  me  deje  en  paz. 
i  Qu6  me  matan ! 
En  muchas  obras  no  se  encuentra  otro 

(or  mas)  m6rito  que  el  estilo. 
Es  que  estoy  ocupado. 
Es  que  se  encuentra  sin  ningun  auxilio. 
Con  la  p^rdida  de  su  madre  est&  todo 

el  dia  Uora  que  llora. 
I  Qu6  no  lo  hubiera  yo  sabido  ! 
i  Qu6  siempre  has  de  ser  un  holgazan  ? 
I  Qu6  hermoso  cielo  I 
i  Qu6  horrenda  noche ! 
J  Qu6  cielo  tan  hermoso  ! 
A  que  sf. 
A  que  no. 
A  que  lo  digo. 
A  que  lo  hago. 
i  Qu6  de  crfmenes  se  vieron  I 
I  Qu6  de  injusticias  no  se  cometen  t 

I  Qu6  !  i  no  yienes  ? 


Let  us  try  to  rest  now ;  that  will  be 
best. 

If  there  are  no  virtues,  which  are  the 
foundation  of  liberty,  the  latter  will 
have  no  firm  foothold  among  nations. 

How  beautiful  you  are  I 

That,  now,  is  an  honorable  mode  of 
acting. 

Some  one  is  calling  (knocking). 

Let  him  let  me  alone. 

Murder ! 

Many  works  are  void  of  all  merit  save 
the  style. 

Well,  but  I  am  busy. 

Well,  but  he  is  entirely  forsaken. 

She  does  nothing  the  whole  day  over 
but  lament  the  loss  of  her  mother. 

All !  could  I  but  have  known  it ! 

Are  you  always  to  be  a  sluggard  I 

What  a  beautiful  sky  ! 

What  a  horrific  night ! 

What  a  beautiful  sky  ! 

I  will  bet  you  it  is. 

I  will  bet  you  it  is  not 

I  will  bet  you  I  can  say  it. 

I  will  bet  you  I  can  do  it. 

IIow  much  crime  there  was  ! 

How  much  injustice  is  there  not  com- 
mitted ! 

What  I  are  you  not  coming  ? 


LESSON     LV. 


295 


J  Fulano !— ^  Qu6  ? 

Ir6  k  paseo,  que  no  estar^  siempre  me- 

tido  en  casa. 
Qu6  quiera  que  no  quiera. 
No  es  hijo  mio,  que  si  lo  fuera  .... 


Such  a  one !    What  ? 

I  shall  go  and  take  a  walk,  for  I  will 

not  be  always  stuck  in  the  house. 
Whether  he  will  or  not. 
He  is  no  son  of  mine,  for  if  he  were  .  .  , 


EXPLANATION. 

269.  Que,  as  a  conjunction,  is  employed  in  so  many  differ- 
ent ways  and  meanings,  tending  to  perplex  the  learner,  that 
we  deem  it  essential  to  mention  here  some  of  its  principal  uses  : 

It  is  employed  as  a  copulative  ;  as, 
Tratemos  ahora  de  descansar,  que  sera  I  Let  us  go  to  rest  now ;    that  will  be 
lo  mejor.  J      best- 

It  somethnes  serves  to  introduce  an  incidental  proposition 
dependent  on  the  principal  one  ;  as, 


Si  no  hay  virtudes,  que  son  el  cimiento 
de  la  libertad,  no  se  afianzara  esta 
en  los  pueblos. 


If  there  are  no  virtues,  which  are  the 
foundation  of  liberty,  the  latter  will 
have  no  firm  foothold  among  nations. 

It  is  employed  instead  of  sino,  but  after  either  of  the  ad- 
jectives otro  or  mas  ;  as. 

En  muchas  obras  no  se  encuentra  otro  I  Many  works  are  void  of  all  merit  ex- 
(pr  mas)  merito  que  el  estilo.  |      cept  the  style. 

It  is  employed  instead  of  pero,  but  in  the  phrase  es  que^ 
with  which  we  convey  the  reason  why  something  is  or  is 
not  done ;  as, 

&  que  estoy  ocupado.  I  But  I  am  busy. 

Es  que  se  encuentra  sin  ningun  auxilio.  |  But  he  is  entirely  forsaken. 

The  conjunction  que,  placed  between  two  words  of  the 
same  meaning,  besides  uniting  them  as  a  conjunction,  gives 
more  energy  to  the  expression  ;  as, 

Con  la  p6rdida  de  su  madre  esta  todo  I  She  is  the  whole  day  over  lamenting 
el  dia  llora  que  llora.  |      the  loss  of  her  mother. 

At  other  times  it  serves  to  confirm  more  and  more  the  ex- 
pression ;  as, 

/  Que  hermosa  que  estas  !  {instead  of^ 
I  Que  hermosa  estas  !) 


I  Ese  si  que  es  un  modo  de  portarse  con 
honor  !  {instead  of  \  Ese  si  es  un  mo- 
do de  portarse  con  honor !) 


How  beautiful  you  are  ! 


That,  now,  is  an  honorable  mode  of 
acting ! 


296  LESSON     LV. 


The  conjunction  que,  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence,  implies 
proposition  going  before  it ;  as, 


Que  Uaman. 

Que  me  deje  en  paz. 

/  Qioe  me  matan  ! 


Some  one  is  calling. 
Let  him  let  me  alone. 
Murder  ! 


In  all  these  examples  a  proposition  is  understood  before  the 
que ;  as,  mirad,  in  the  first ;  deseo  or  quiero,  in  the  second ;  and 
reparad  or  sahed,  in  the  third. 

When  the  sentence  is  interrogative  or  exclamatory,  que 
denotes  desire  and  expostulation  ;  as, 

/  Que  no  lo  hubiera  yo  sabido  !  I  Ah !  could  I  but  have  known  it ! 

/  Que  siempre  has  de  set  un  holgazan !    |  Are  you  always  to  be  a  sluggard  ! 

In  an  exclamatory  sentence,  and  when  it  precedes  a  noun 
adjective,  it  is  equivalent  to  cudn ;  as, 

/  Que  hermoso  cielo  !  I  What  a  beautiful  sky ! 

/  Que  horrenda  noche  !  |  What  an  horrific  night ! 

But  if  in  these  sentences  the  substantive  comes  first,  the  particle 
tan  must  be  put  between,  because  we  cannot  say:  /  Qu^  cido 
hermoso  1  but,  j  Qu'e  cielo  tan  hermoso ! 

In  some  sentences  a  determining  verb  is  understood ;  as, 


A  que  sf. 
A  que  no. 
A  que  lo  digo. 
A  que  lo  hago. 


I  will  bet  you  it  is. 
I  will  bet  you  it  is  not. 
I  will  bet  you  I  can  say  it. 
I  will  bet  you  I  can  do  it, 


in  which  is  understood  the  present  indicative  apttesto,  I  bet. 

In  other  sentences  it  is  equivalent  to  a  collective  noun  or  a 
plural  adjective,  and  requires  to  be  followed  by  the  preposition 
de;  as, 

;  Que  de  crimenes  se  vieron  1  How  much  crime  there  was  ! 

/  Qu^  de  injusticias  no  so  cometen  !  How  much  injustice  is  there  not  com- 

mitted ! 

instead  of  saying :  j  Cud^itos  crtmenes !    i  Cudntas  injusticias! 
or,  /  Que  multitud  de  crimenes  k,  injusticias  ! 

It  also  denotes  surprise,  and  is  used  as  an  interrogative,  and 
for  answering ;  as, 
/  Que  /  i  no  viencs  ?  |  What !  are  you  not  coming  ? 


LESSON     LV,  297 

and  is  equivalent  to  an  entire  proposition  answering ;  as, 

i  Fulano !     /  Que  ?  (i.  e.  i  Que  quieres  ?)  I  Such  a  one  !  What  ?  {i.  e.  What  do  you 

I      want  ?) 

At  other  times  it  is  employed  instead  of  the  adversative 
sino,  and  the  copulative  y,  in  periods  where  the  second  member 
denotes  opposition  to  what  is  expressed  in  the  first ;  as, 

He  will  not  get  it,  but  will  remain  with 
the  desire. 


I  shall  go  out  to  walk,  for  I  will  not  be 
always  stuck  in  the  house. 


No  lo  conseguira  ;  qtce  se  quedara  con 
el  deseo  {instead  of  slno  qv^  se  que- 
dara, etc.). 

Ir6  k  paseo,  que  no  estar6  siempre  me- 
tido  en  casa  {histead  of  y  no  estate, 
etc.). 

It  is  not  unfrequently  used  in  the  place  of  a  disjunctive  con- 
junction; as. 

Que  quiera  que  no  quiera  (i.  e.,  quiera  I  Whether  he  will  or  not. 
6  no  quiera).  | 

It  is  sometimes  substituted  for  one  or  other  of  the  causals, 
pues,  porque,  pues  que ;  as. 

No  es  hijo  mio,  que  si  lo  fuera  .  .  .  (i.  e.,  I  He  is  no  son  of  mine,  for  if  he  were  .  .  . 
porque  or  pues,  si  lo  fuera).  | 

In  this  meaning  it  is  more  used  in  poetry  than  in  prose ;  as, 
"  Qite  quien  se  opone  al  cielo, 
Cuanto  mas  alto  sube,  viene  al  suelo." 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  I  Se  habla  el  castellano  en  todas  las  provincias  de  Espafia  ?  En  los 
tribimalea,  universidades,  j  oficinas  publicas,  si  selior ;  pero  el  pueblo  ha- 
bla diferentes  dialectos. 

2.  ^Qu6  dialectos  son  estos?  El  Catalan,  que  se  habla  en  Catalufia; 
el  valenciano,  en  Valencia ;  el  gallego,  en  Gahcia ;  y  el  vascuence  que  se 
habla  en  las  provincias  vascongadas,  que  son  Alava,  Guipuzcoa  y  Vizca- 
ya ;  se  cree  que  este  tiltimo  es  lengua  madre  y  una  de  las  mas  antiguaa 
de  Europa. 

3.  ^En  d6nde  se  habla  el  castellano?  En  las  demas  provincias,  Cas- 
tilla,  Aragon  y  Andalucia. 

4.  gPorqu6  no  se  habla  el  espafiol  en  toda  Espafia?  Porque  Espafia 
estuvo  anteriormente  dividida  en  varios  reinos ;  de  estos  algunos  fueron 
conquistados  por  los  Arabes,  otros  pertenecieron  a  Francia,  y  otros  final- 
mente  permanecieron  iudependientes  por  muclios  siglos,  hasta  que  Fernan- 

13* 


298  LESSON    LV. 

do  k  Isabel,  echando  d  los  Arabes  de  Espafia,  reunieron  las  coronaa  de 
Aragon  y  Castilla. 

5.  I  Son  diferentes  las  costurabres  de  las  provincias  de  Espafia  ?  Ma- 
cho; no  solamente  no  se  habla  la  misma  lengua  en  todas,  sino  que  hasta 
poco  tiempo  hace  cada  provincia  tenia  leyes  diferentes,  y  aun  hoy  dia 
tienen  pesas,  medidas,  traje  y  hasta  caracteres  mny  distintos. 

6.  Pues  eso  debe  ser  rauy  inc6modo ;  en  los  Estados  Unidos  tenemos 
la  ventaja  de  hablar  una  misma  lengua  y  tenemos  las  mismas  pesas,  me- 
didas y  monedas. — Verdad  es,  pero  tambien  es  cierto  que  Yds.  han  hecho 
todo  esto  con  la  experiencia  adquirida  en  el  antiguo  mundo. 

7.  I Y  porqu6  no  lo  hacen  Vds.  asi  en  Espafia  ?  Porque  nosotros 
tenemos  ya  establecidas  estas  cosas  de  tiempo  inmemorial,  y  no  es  facil 
cambiar  costumbres  arraigadas  por  tantos  siglos. 

8.  Cuando  Vds.  fundan  una  ciudad  en  este  nuevo  mundo,  eligen  el 
terreno  necesario,  tiran  Vds.  lineas  rectas  y  trazan  calles  y  plazas ;  para 
esto  no  siguen  el  raodclo  de  una  antigua  ciudad  de  Europa,  pero  las  an- 
tiguas  ciudades  de  Europa  con  sus  imperfecciones  6  irregularidades  les  han 
mostrado  k  Vds.  el  modo  de  construir  ciudades,  cuyo  solo  defecto  con- 
siste  en  su  extremada  regularidad. 

9.  g  Y  no  cree  V.  que  de  esta  igualdad  resultan  grandes  ventajas  ? 
Sin  duda  alguna,  y  seria  de  desear  que  en  todo  el  mundo  se  hablase  la 
misma  lengua,  hubiese  la  misma  moneda,  pesas  y  medidas,  y,  tanto  como 
el  clima,  las  costumbres  y  otras  circunstancias  lo  permitiesen,  las  mismas 
leyes. 

10.  Tambien  me  han  dicho  que  hay  en  Espafia  varias  clases  de  socie- 
dad ;  ^  no  es  asf  ?  Si,  sefior ;  pero  eso  sucede  en  todas  las  naciones  del 
mundo. 

11.  No  en  los  Estados  Unidos.  V.  v6  que  aqui  no  se  dan  tltulos  de 
nobleza,  no  hay  diferencia  en  el  tr^'e,  y  decimos  Mr.  Johnson,  hablando  del 
presidente,  and  Mr.  Johnson,  hablando  de  un  carnicero,  y  el  mismo  Presi- 
dente  Johnson  era  dntes  sastre,  de  modo  que  la  igualdad  existe  en  las 
personas  como  en  las  cosas. 

12.  No  olvide  V.,  sin  embargo,  que  Dios  no  ha  hecho  dos  cosas  ignales 
en  el  mundo,  y  que  los  hombres  son  quizd  mas  desiguales  entre  si  que 
las  mismas  cosas. — Concedido,  y  no  hay  cosa  que  mas  ridicula  me  parezca 
que  las  lavanderas  vestidas  de  sefioras,  y  los  rowdies  del  Bowery  afectan- 
do  ser  caballeros. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Did  you  meet  them  as  you  were  going  in,  or  as  you  were  coming 
out  ?    As  we  were  going  in. 


LESSON     LVI 


299 


2.  What  is  the  name  of  that  province  in  Spain  in  which  they  speak 
the  Catalonian  language  or  dialect  ?     Catalonia. 

3.  In  which  province  do  they  speak  the  Basque  ?  In  the  three  Bas- 
que provinces. 

4.  And  do  these  dialects  differ  very  materially*  from  the  Castilian 
language?  Yes,  very  materially;  in  general  they  are  more  like  the 
French  than  the  Spanish. 

5.  Have  you  ever  heard  the  Spanish  name  for  the  natives  of  Galicia  ? 
Yes,  sir,  for  I  am  well  acquainted  with  several  Galicians  hving  in  New 
York. 

6.  Can  you  tell  me  the  weights  and  measures  principally  used  in  the 
Peninsula  (Peninsula)  ?  The  principal  weight,  entirely  different  from  all 
those  of  the  United  States,  is  the  arroha. 

7.  How  many  Isabellas  have  there  been  on  the  throne  of  Spain? 
Two ;  the  first  was  Isabella  the  Catholic,  and  the  present  queen  is  Isa- 
bella II. 

8.  By  what  event  is  the  reign  of  Tsjibella  the  Catholic  distinguished 
from  all  other  reigns  ?  By  the  discovery  of  America  by  Christopher 
Columbus  {Cristobal  Colon)^  in  the  year  1492. 

9.  Was  there  not  some  other  very  important  event  that  occurred  about 
the  same  time  ?  Ah !  yes ;  at  the  commencement  of  that  queen's  reign ; 
you  mean,  I  suppose,  the  conquest  of  the  Arabs,  and  union  of  the  crown 
of  Castile  and  Aragon. 

10.  Are  railroads  very  common  in  the  Peninsula  ?  Not  so  common  as 
in  other  European  countries ;  but  of  late  years  the  spirit  of  enterprise 
seems  to  be  revived  in  Spain,  and  to  the  few  which  now  exist  we  shall 
soon  see  a  large  number  of  others  added. 

11.  Let  us  sit  down  and  rest  for  half  an  hour,  for  I  am  very  tired,  and 
you  must  be  so  too. 

12.  How  beautiful  the  sky  looks  (is)  to  night  I  That  is  true ;  but  how 
it  rained  all  day  I 

13.  How  long  has  that  newspaper  been  published?  Ten  years,  for  it 
was  established  (founded)  in  1856. 


LESSON    LVI 


Apreciar. 
Apresurar. 
Favorecer. 
Invitar. 


To  appreciate. 
To  haste. 
To  favor. 
To  invite. 


Mucho. 


300                                                LESSON     LVI. 

Apreciable. 

Appreciable. 

Comente. 

Current,  fluent. 

Estimado. 

Esteemed. 

Excelentisimo. 

Very  (or  most)  excellent 

Favorecida. 

Favored. 

Invariable, 

Invariable. 

Intimo. 

Intimate. 

Fino. 

Fine. 

Servidor. 

Servant. 

Mercantil. 
Oomercio.        Commerce,  tra( 

Mercantile. 

le. 

Atencion.              Attention. 

Corazon.          Heart. 

Correspondencia.  Correspondence 

Convite.           Invitation,     feast, 

Esquela.                 Note. 

banquet,  party. 

Formula.                Form,  formula. 

Formulario.      List  of  formulas. 

Expresion.             Expression. 

Kespeto.           Kespect. 

Estructura.            Structure. 

Sobrescrito.      Address. 

Intimidad.              Intimacy. 

Corresponsal.    Correspondent. 

Inicial.                   Initial. 

Giros.               Manner  (of  style). 

Kesidencia.           Kesidence. 

COMPO 

3ITI0N. 

Sefior  D.  Jos6  Romero. 

Mr.  Joseph  Romero. 

Muy  Sr.  mio. 

Dear  Sir,  My  Dear  Sir. 

Muy  Sr.  nuestro. 

Dear  Sir. 

Muy  Sres.  mios. 

Gentlemen. 

Muy  Sres.  nuestros. 

Gentlemen. 

Sefiora  Da.  Isabel  Jimenez. 

Mrs.  Isabella  Jimenez. 

Muy  Sra.  mia. 

Madam. 

Muy  Sra.  nuestra. 

Madam. 

Hemos  recibido    su    ap*'«,  apreciable 

We  have  received  your  favor  {or  your 

(or  8u  est<i«,  estimada,  or  su  favor^, 

esteemed  favor). 

favorecida). 

Las  de  V.  del  2  del  comente  {or  cor**'). 

Your  favors  of  the  2d  instant 

4  del  pp***  (pr6ximo  pasado). 

4th  ult 

Se  repite  k  las  6rdene8  de  V. 

s.  s.  s. 

(Su  seguro  servidor). 

Q.  S.  M.  B. 

. 

Yours  very  truly. 

(Que  su  mano  besa). 

M.  De.  T. 

Q.  S.  P.  B. 

(  To  ladies,  que  sus  pi68  besa).  ^ 

LESSON     LVI. 


301 


Muy  Sr.  mio  y  amigo. 
Mi  querido  amigo. 

Mande  Y.  con  toda  franqueza  a  su  in- 
variable amigo  y  S.  S. 
El  Sr.  A.  De  L.  presenta  {or  ofrece)  sus 
respetos  al  Sr.  D.  I.  De  H.,  y  le  hace 
saber  que. 
.Sr.  D.  Jose  Martinez, 

Del  Comercio  de  Madrid. 
"Sres.  D.  Francisco  Sanchez, 

Hermanos  y  Ca.,  Cadiz. 

Senora  Da.  Teodora  Jim6nez  y 
Arteta,  Calle  Mayor  N".  10, 

Zaragoza. 
Al  Ex°»o.  (Excelentlsimo), 

Sr.  D.  Juan  Valero  y  Arteta. 
B.  L.  M., 

Al  Sr.  De  V. 

S.  s.  s., 

A.  De  T. 


My  Dear  Sir  and  Friend. 

My  Dear  Friend. 

Command    with    freedom    your    true 

friend  and  faithful  servant. 
Mr.  A.  De  L.  presents  his  compliments 
to  Mr.  I.  De  H.,  and  begs  to  inform 
him  that. 
Mr.  Joseph  Martinez, 

Merchant,  Madrid. 
Messrs.  Francis  Sanchez  Bros.  &  Co., 

Cadiz. 
Mrs.  Theodora  Jim6nez  y  Arteta, 
10  Mayor  Street, 

Saragossa. 
To    His    Excellency,   John  Valero    y 

Arteta. 
(Form  of  addressing  letters,  notes,  &c., 
to  persons  living  in  the  same  place  as 
the  writer.) 


EXPLANATION. 

270.  Epistolary  Correspondence. — ^We  could  not,  with- 
out overstepping  the  limits  of  a  grammar,  give  here  all  the 
terms  peculiar  to  mercantile  correspondence ;  those  desirous  to 
become  perfect  in  that  branch  may  consult  the  several  works 
written  on  the  subject,  among  which  we  particularly  recommend 
Mr.  De  Yeitelle's  "Mercantile  Dictionary,"  published  by  D. 
Appleton  &  Co.  We  merely  give  here  the  general  forms  for 
beginning  and  ending  letters. 

In  addressing  persons  of  different  classes  of  society,  except 
those  having  titles,  letters  begin  as  follows : 

Muy  Senor  mio.  My  Dear  Sir. 

•    Muy  Senor  nuestro.  Sir ;  Dear  Sir. 

Muy  Senores  mios.        ) 

Muy  Senores  nuestros.  ) 

And  to  ladies : 

Muy  Senora  mia.  j      Madam. 

These  expressions  are  most  generally  abbreviated  thus : — 
Muy  Sr.  mio ;  Muy  Sr.  n^o ;  Muy  Sres.  mios  ;  Muy  Sres.  n^^ ; 
Muy  Sra.  mia ;  Muy  Sra.  n*'^ ;  Muy  Sras.  n^<^^ 


Gentlemen. 


302 


LESSON     LVI 


In  the  body  of  the  letter,  8u  ap^^  (su  apreciable),  or  su 
est^*^  (su  estimada),  or  sufavor^"'  (su  favorecida) — carta,  letter, 
being  understood — are  equivalent  to  your  favor  or  your  es- 
teemed letter. 

Such  expressions  as  these  are  translated  thus : 

Yours  of  the  2d  inst ;  4th  ult ;  8th 
of  May,  &c. 


Las  de  V.  del  2  del  cor**  (corriente) ; 
4  del  pp^o  (proximo  pasado) ;  8  de 
Mayo,  etc. 


The  following  forms  are  employed  at  the  end  of  letters 
Se  repite  k  las  6rdenes  de  V., 

s.  s.  s. 

(Su  seguro  servidor). 
Q.  S.  M.  B. 

(Que  su  mano  besa). 
Manden  Vms.  cuanto  gusten  4 

s.  s.  s.. 


Q.  S.  M.  B. 


I  am.  Dear  Sir, 

Yours  respectfully. 


Command  at  pleasure  your  faithful 
servant. 


To  a  lady,  the  form  is  the  same,  only  changing  the  letter 
M.  into  P.,  thus  : 

s.  s.  s., 

Q.  S.  P.  B. 
(Que  BUS  pi6s  besa). 


In  a  more  familiar  style  : 

Muy  Sr.  mio  y  amigo. 
Mi  querido  amigo. 

Mande  V.  con  toda  franqueza  &  su 
invariable  amigo  y  S.  S. 


My  Dear  Sir  and  Friend. 
My  Dear  Friend. 

Command  with  freedom  your  true 
friend  and  faithful  servant. 


Eaquelas,  notes,  are  also  written  in  Spanish,  as  in  English, 
in  the  third  person ;  as, 

Mr.  A.  De  L.  presents  his  respects  to 


El  Sr.A.  De  L.  presenta  {or  ofrece)  sus 
respetoa  al  Sr.  Dn.  I.  De  H.,  y  le 
hace  saber  que,  etc. 


Mr.  I.  De  II.,  and  begs  to  acquaint 
him  that,  &c. 


The  most  usual  manner  of  addressing  letters  is : 

Sr.  Dn.  Jos6  Martinez,  del  Comercio  de  Madrid. 
Sres.  Dn.  Franco  S^chez,  Hermanos  y  Ca.,  C&diz. 
Sra.  Dfia.  Teodora  Jimenez  y  Arteta,  Calle  Mayor  N«.  10. 
Al  Ex™o  Sr.  D.  Juan  Valero  y  Arteta,  Madrid, 


LESSON     LVI.  303 

In  the  city ; 

TO  A  GENTLEMAN.  TO  A  LADY. 


B.  L.  M., 

Al  Sr.  D.  P., 

s.  s.  a, 

A.T. 


B.  L.  P., 


s.  s.  s., 

A.  T. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 


1.  ^Le  gusta  d  Y.  escribir  cartas?  Me  gusta  escribir  a  mis  amigos 
fntimos  ;  pero  me  gusta  mas  recibir  cartas  que  escribirlas. 

2.  Yo  no  s6  bien  el  ceremonial  6  formulario  de  cartas,  ^quiere  Y. 
hacerme  el  favor  de  decirme  como  se  principia  una  carta  'i  Con  mucho 
gusto,  pregTinteme  Y.  aquello  que  no  sepa. 

3.  2  Como  se  principia  una  carta  dirigida  a  nna  persona  cualquiera 
con  quien  no  tenemos  intimidad?  Si  es  un  caballero,  principiamos  con 
la  formula  de  Muy  Sr.  mio,  y  si  es  una  sefiora  con  la  de  Muy  Seflora  mia. 

4.  ^  Y  para  acabar  ?  Escribiendo  a  un  caballero  solemos  decir  entre 
otras  muchas  expresiones,     "  Queda  de  Y., 

s.  s.  s., 

Q.  S.  M.  B., 

Fulano  de  tal." 

5.  g  Y  si  es  una  sefiora  k  quien  escribimos  ?  Lo  mismo,  solo  cambia- 
mos  la  inicial  de  mano^  M.,  en  la  inicial  de  pies^  P.,  asi, 

'^Quedade  Y., 

S.  S.  S., 
Q.  S.  P.  B., 

Fulano  de  tal." 

6.  ^  Y  cudndo  es  d  un  intimo  amigo  ?  Entonces  es  mas  parecido  al  ingles 
y  principiamos  diciendo :  "  Querido  amigo,"  y  para  acabar,  cualquiera  de 
las  muchas  expresiones  que  se  usan,  como : 

"  Tu  amigo  que  te  ama  de  corazon, 

Fulano  de  tal." 

7.  I  C6mo  se  escriben  las  esquelas  de  invitacion,  etc.,  d  las  personas 
que  viven  en  la  ciudad  ?  Se  escriben,  como  en  ingMs,  en  la  tercera  persona. 

8.  I  Quiere  Y.  escribirme  una  esquela  invitandome  d  comer  ?  Si,  se- 
tior,  vea  Y.  asi :  "  Los  Sres.  De  Y.  presentan  sus  respetos  a  los  Sres.  De 
T.,  y  les  suplican  que  les  hagan  el  honor  de  venir  a  comer  con  ellos  el 
martes  a  las  cinco.    Lines,  Abril  8  de  1866." 

9.  Yeamos  si  Y.  puede  responderme  en  espafiol. — Yea  Y.,  "  Los  Sres. 
De  T.  se  apresuraran  a  acudir  al  amable  convite  de  los  Sres.  De  Y.,  y  les 
presentan  sus  mas  finas  atenciones." 


304  LESSON     LVI. 

10.  Muy  bien,  muy  bien,  ahora  solo  falta  poner  la  direccion  (el  sobre). 
— Estando  las  personas  4  quien  me  dirijo  en  la  ciudad,  creo  que  el  sobres- 
orito  debe  ponerse  asl : 

B.  L.  M. 

Al  Sr.  De  V. 

S.  S.  S., 
A.  De  T. 
'  11.  ^Oree  Y.  que  podr6  ahora  traducir  una  carta  mercantil  en  ingl6s? 
Si,  senor,  y  escribirla  tambien,  puesto  que  V.  sabe  ya  la  estructura  de  Iq 
lengua,  ademas  de  poseer  un  gran  niimero  de  sus  giros,  idiotismos  y  pala» 
bras  mas  necesarias ;  pero  todavia  tendrd  Y.  necesidad  de  acudir  al  die- 
cionario,  porque  no  es  posible  introducir  en  una  gramatica  todas  las  pala- 
bras  y  frases  que  requiere  una  correspondencia  mercantil 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Do  you  ever  do  any  of  the  correspondence  in  your  ofl5ce  (escri 
torio)  ?  Not  often,  for  I  do  not  know  how  to  write  letters  in  Spanish, 
and  the  greater  part  of  our  correspondence  is  carried  on  (Jlevar)  in  that 
language. 

2.  You  ought,  in  that  case,  to  make  that  branch  the  object  of  par-, 
ticular  study  for  a  time.  That  is  what  I  desire  to  do ;  and  I  would  ba 
obliged  to  you  to  give  me  some  instructions  (instruir)  in  the  forms  most 
observed  in  Spanish  houses. 

3.  I  shall  have  much  pleasure  in  showing  you  all  I  know  myself;  but 
as  I  have  never  been  in  business,  there  are  many  points  of  which  I  am 
ignorant  (ignorar). 

4.  What  is  the  first  thing  to  write  in  a  letter?  In  Spanish,  as  in 
English,  the  date  is  generally  the  first  thing ;  it  is  written  thus : 

Cadiz,  October  1st,  1866. 
6.  What  comes  next  ?    The  name  and  residence  of  the  person  we  are 
writing  to,  thus : 
Messrs.  Laftjente,  Sons  &  Co.,  Malaga : 

6.  So  far  there  is  little  difference  between  the  two  languages.  Yery 
little ;  we  next  go  on  to  say  (luego  sepone)  : 

Gentlemen  (or  Sir,  or  My  Dear  Sir,  or  Dear  Sirs,  or,  if  we  write  to  a 
lady.  Madam)  : 

7.  Ah !  there  I  observe  a  decided  difference :  is  that  the  form  always 
followed  for  commencing  letters?  For  business  letters,  yes;  but  for  fa- 
miliar correspondence,  wo  have  many  others ;  indeed,*  they  are  mostly 
always  suited  to  the  taste  of  the  writer. 

8.  Be  good  enough  to  show  me  one  or  two.      With  the  greatest 

♦  El  hecho  M. 


LESSON     LVII, 


305 


pleasure :  My  Dear  Friend :  My  Very  Dear  Alexander :  Esteemed  Friend; 
My  Ever  Dear  Mother,  «fec.,  &c.,  &c. 

9.  How  do  you  acknowledge  {acusar)  the  receipt  of  a  favor  ?  In  this 
manner :  I  have  duly  received  your  esteemed  favor  (or  letter)  of  the  17th 
instant. 

10.  As  for  the  body  of  the  letter,  the  form  depends  entirely  on  the 
nature  of  the  business ;  and,  in  general,  all  that  is  required  is  to  say  just 
what  is  necessary  and  nothing  more,  and  to  avoid  obscurity  ioscuridad), 
in  order  that  our  ideas  may  be  completely  understood  by  our  corre- 
Bpondent  {corresponsaT). 

11.  The  usual  manners  of  closing  a  letter  are  : 

I  am,  dear  sir, 

Your  most  obd't  ser't ;  or, 

I  am,  sir. 

Yours  very  truly. 

12.  And  for  familiar  letters: 
I  am,  dear  Charles, 

Your  true  friend  and  loving  cousin ;  or. 
With  kindest  expressions  to  your  brother, 

Beheve  me  to  remain  your  ever  faithful  and  loving  friend. 


LESSON    LVII 


Abalanzarse. 

Concordar. 

Cumphr. 

Conversar. 

Entregar. 

Escapar. 

Honrar. 

Participar. 

Regir. 

Auxiliar. 

Honrado. 

Plural. 

Singular. 


To  rush,  to  spring. 

To  agree. 

To  fulfil,  to  keep,  to  do  (duty;. 

To  converse. 

To  give,  to  hand,  to  deliver. 

To  escape. 

To  honor. 

To  participate,  to  partake. 

To  govern. 

To  help. 

Honest,  honored. 

Plural. 

Singula!'. 


sod 


LESSON     LVII, 


Baron. 

BdTon. 

Alhnja. 

Jewel. 

Cr6dito. 

Credit. 

Agudeza. 

Wit,  witty  say- 

Encargo. 

Commission, 

ing. 

charge,  order. 

Cocina. 

Kitchen. 

G6nero. 

Kind,  cloth. 

Confianza. 

Confidence. 

Erapleo. 

Employment, 

Espada. 

Sword, 

office. 

Fuga. 

Flight. 

Plato. 

Plate,  dish. 

Gracia. 

Favor,      good 
graces. 

Kumero. 

Number. 

Mania. 

Mania. 

Eegimen. 

Eegimen. 

Promesa. 

Promise. 

Tema. 

Theme,  exercise. 

Pretension. 

Pretension,  claim- 

Diptongo. 

Diphthong. 

Concordancia. 

Concord,  agree- 

Triptongo. 

Triphthong. 

ment. 

Varon. 

Man. 

Version. 

Version. 

Error. 

Error,  mistake. 

COMPO 

Tema. 
3ITI0X. 

Whim. 

Acordarse  con  alguno. 

Acordarse  de  alguno. 

Caer  k  la  plaza. 

Caer  en  la  plaza. 

Caer  de  la  gracia  de  alguno. 

Caer  en  gracia  k  alguno. 

Contar  una  cosa. 
Contar  con  una  cosa. 
Convcnir  k  uno. 
Convenir  con  uno. 
Cumplir  con  uno. 
Cumplir  por  uno. 
Dar  algo. 
Dar  con  algo. 
Dar  en  una  cosa. 
Dar  per  algo. 
Dar  credito. 
Dar  k  cr6dito. 
Dar  la  mano. 
Dar  de  mano. 
Dar  en  manos  de. 
Dar  con  el  pi^. 
Dar  por  el  pi6. 


To  agree  with  any  one. 

To  remember  any  one. 

To  front  on  the  square  (said  of  a  house). 

To  fall  in  the  square. 

To  fall  from  any  one's  favor  (or  good 

graces). 
To  get  into  any  one's  favor  (or  good 

graces). 
To  relate,  to  tell  a  thing. 
To  count  upon  a  thing. 
To  suit  (to  be  convenient  for)  any  one. 
To  agree  with  any  one. 
To  do  one's  duty  toward  any  one. 
To  act  in  the  place  of  any  one. 
To  give  any  thing. 
To  find  any  thing. 
To  be  obstinate. 
To  give  for  any  thing. 
To  give  credit,  to  beUeve. 
To  give  on  credit. 

To  give  the  band  (or  to  shake  hands). 
To  lay  aside,  to  abandon. 
To  fidl  into  the  hands  of. 
To  despise,  to  scorn,  to  make  light  of. 
To  overthrow. 


LESSON     LVII, 


307 


Dar  fin  {or  cabo)  a  una  C08a. 
Dar  fin  de  una  cosa. 
Declararse  a  alguno. 
Declararse  por  alguno. 

Dejar  hacer  algo. 
Dejar  de  hacer  algo. 
Deshacerse  alguna  cosa. 
Deshacerse  de  alguna  cosa. 
Disponer  sus  alhajas. 
Disponer  de  sus  alhajas. 
Echar  tierra  a  una  cosa. 

Echar  un  genero  en  tierra. 

Entender  una  cosa. 
Entender  en  una  cosa. 
Entregarse  al  dinero. 
Entregarse  del  dinero. 
Escapar  a  buenas. 
Escapar  de  buenas. 
Estar  en  alguna  cosa. 
Estar  sobre  alguna  cosa. 
Estar  a  todo. 
Estar  en  todo. 
Estar  con  cuidado. 
Estar  de  cuidado. 
Estar  en  si. 
Estar  sobre  si. 
Estar  con  alguno. 

Estar  por  alguno. 

Estar  en  hacer  alguna  cosa. 

Estar  para  hacer  alguna  cosa. 

Estar  por  hacer  alguna  cosa. 

Estar  alguna  cosa  por  hacer. 

Gustar  un  plato. 

Gustar  de  un  plato. 

Hacer  confianza  a  una  persona. 

Hacer  confianza  de  una  persona. 

Hacer  una  cosa  con  tiempo. 


To  bring  to  an  end,  to  finish. 

To  destroy. 

To  confide  one's  secrets  to  any  one. 

To  side  with  any  one,  to  declare  one's 

self  in  favor  of  any  one. 
To  let  any  thing  be  done. 
To  leave  any  thirg  undone. 
(Speaking  of  things)  to  be  destroyed. 
To  dispose  of  (or  part  with)  any  thing. 
To  arrange  one's  jewelry. 
To  dispose  of  one's  jewelry. 
To  forget  any  thing,  to  cast  it  into  ob- 
livion. 
To  throw  any  thing  on  the  ground  (or 

down). 
To  understand  a  thing. 
To  be  a  judge  of  a  thing. 
To  make  a  god  of  one's  money. 
To  receive,  to  take  charge  of  money. 
To  make  the  best  of  one's  escape. 
To  make  a  happy  escape. 
To  be  aware  of  any  thing. 
To  push  an  affair. 

To  be  ready  for  whatever  may  come. 
To  pay  attention  to  every  matter. 
To  be  anxious,  solicitous. 
To  be  dangerously  ill. 
To  have  complete  consciousness. 
To  be  proud. 
To  be  with  any  one,  to  be  of  any  one's 

opinion. 
To  favor  any  one. 
To  be  resolved  (or  disposed)  to  do  any 

thing. 
To  be  about  to  do  any  thing. 
To  be  inclined  to  do  something. 
To  remain  to  be  done. 
To  taste  a  dish  (of  any  kind  of  food). 
To  be  fond  of  a  dish. 
To  tell  a  secret  to  any  one. 
To  make  a  confident  of  any  one,  to 

trust  to  any  one. 
To  do  a  thing  at  one's  leisure  (so  as  not 

to  be  pressed  for  time). 


808 


LESSON     LVII. 


Hacer  una  cosa  en  tiempo. 
Hacerse  a  una  cosa. 
Bacerse  con  una  cosa. 
Hacerse  de  una  cosa. 
Hallarae  algo. 
Hallarse  con  algo. 

Ir  con  alguno. 


Ir  sobre  alguno. 
Mayor  de  edad. 
Mayor  en  edad. 
Participar  una  cosa. 
Participar  de  una  cosa. 
Poner  una  cosa  en  tierra. 
Poner  una  cosa  por  tierra. 
Poner  con  cuidado. 
Poner  en  cuidado. 
Preguntar  k  uno. 
Preguntar  por  uno. 
Quedar  en  hacer  una  cosa. 
Quedar  una  cosa  por  hacer. 

Responder  una  cosa. 
Responder  de  una  cosa. 
Saber  4  cocina. 
Saber  de  cocina. 

Salir  con  una  empresa. 
Salir  de  una  empresa. 
Salir  k  su  padre. 
Salir  con  su  padre. 
Salir  de  su  padre. 

Salir  por  su  padre. 
Ser  con  alguno. 
Ser  de  alguno. 
Ser  para  alguno. 
Teuer  consigo. 
Tener  para  ui. 
Tener  de  hacer  algo. 
Tener  que  hacer  alga 
Tirar  la  espada. 


To  do  a  thing  in  time,  at  a  suitable  time. 

To  get  used  to  a  thing. 

To  get  (or  procure)  a  thing. 

To  provide  one's  self  with  a  thing. 

To  find  any  thing. 

To  be  in  possession  of  (or  have)  any 

thing. 
To  go  with  anybody,  to  be  of  any  one's 

opinion,  to  be  on  any  one's  side,  to 

listen  to  any  one. 
To  fall  upon  (or  attack)  any  one. 
To  be  of  age. 
To  be  older. 

To  communicate  any  thing  (to  another). 
To  participate  in  any  thing. 
To  lay  any  thing  on  the  ground. 
To  make  little  of  a  thing. 
To  put  (or  place,  or  lay)  with  care. 
To  alarm,  to  give  anxiety. 
To  ask  any  one  (interrogate). 
To  ask  (or  inquire)  for  any  thing. 
To  agree  to  do  any  thing. 
To  remain  to  be  done  (speaking  of 

things). 
To  answer  something  (giving  an  answer). 
To  answer  for  any  thing. 
To  smell  (or  taste)  of  the  kitchen. 
To  be   skilful  in  (or  to   imderstand) 

cooking. 
To  carry  out  an  enterprise. 
To  give  up  an  enterprise. 
To  resemble  one's  father. 
To  go  out  with  one's  father. 
To  be  released  from  the  wardship  of 

one's  father. 
To  go  bail  for  one's  father. 
To  be  of  any  one's  opinion. 
To  belong  to  any  one's  party. 
To  be  for  any  one  (of  things). 
To  have  with  (or  about)  one. 
To  be  persuaded. 
To  be  going  to  do  any  thing. 
To  have  to  do  any  thing. 
To  throw  down  (or  away)  one's  sword. 


LESSON     LYII. 


309 


Tirar  de  la  espada. 
Tratar  de  vinos. 
Tratar  eu  vinos. 
Vender  al  contado. 
Vender  de  contado. 
Volver  a  la  razon. 
Volver  por  la  razon. 

Volver  en  razon  de  tal  cosa. 


To  draw  one's  sword. 

To  talk  about  wines. 

To  deal  in  wines. 

To  sell  for  cash. 

To  sell  on  the  instant. 

To  recover  one's  reason. 

To   stand  up  for  reason  (or  what  is 

right). 
To  return  for  such  a  reason  (or  motive). 


EXPLANATION. 

271.  It  is  a  general  custom,  amongst  authors  of  Spanish 
grammars  and  Spanish  methods,  to  copy  entire  the  forty  pages 
devoted  by  the  Spanish  Academy  in  its  Grammar  to  a  list  of 
verbs  requiring  certain  prepositions  after  them.  But  we,  not- 
withstanding our  most  profound  respect  for  the  body  just 
mentioned,  I'efrain  from  following  in  the  footsteps  of  our  pre- 
decessors, and  that  not  merely  on  account  of  the  useless- 
ness  of  the  list,  but  for  the  more  potent  reason  that  we  believe 
it  to  be  calculated  to  misguide  the  student  at  every  step.  An 
example  : — Any  one  not  thoroughly  acquainted  with  Spanish 
syntax  would,  on  reading  the  very  first  article  in  the  list  above 
referred  to,  Ahalanzarse  a  los  peligros,  naturally  conclude  there- 
from that  the  verb  ahalanzar  governs  at  all  times  and  under 
all  circumstances  the  preposition  d.  jN'ow  that  would  be 
absurd,  for  nothing  is  more  usual  than  to  see,  and  hear  the  ex- 
pressions : — Ahalanzarse  contra  {or  sobre)  su  enernigo^  ahalan- 
zarse con  (or  sin)  juicio^  ahalanzarse  para  sacudir^  de  repente, 
<fec.  And  so  of  all  the  other  verbs,  each  of  which  may,  accord- 
ing to  the  idea  to  be  conveyed,  govern  almost  any  preposition 
in  the  lano^uasre. 

It  would  be  vain  to  attempt  to  give,  in  a  work  of  the 
nature  of  the  present  one,  a  complete  set  of  rules  for  determin- 
ing the  various  significations  of  every  verb  as  decided  or 
modified  by  the  attendant  preposition  ;  but,  as  much  can  be 
done,  even  here,  toward  helping  the  student  through  the  most 
difficult  parts,  we  could  not  resist  giving  in  this  day's  Composi- 
tion a  list  composed  of  those  verbs  which  are  at  the  same  time 
of  most  frequent  occurrence  in  general  every-day  conversation. 


810  LESSON     LVII. 

and  susceptible  of  the  greatest  diversity  of  meaning,  according 
to  the  preposition  by  which  they  are  followed. 

Before  dismissing  this  subject  we  deem  it  convenient  to  re- 
mark that  a  large  number  of  English  verbs,  to  determine  the 
meaning  of  which  a  preposition  is  indispensable,  are  rendered 
in  Spanish  by  a  verb  alone.     For  example : 


Bajar. 

Entrar. 

SaUr. 

Subir. 

Sacar. 

Partir. 

Caer. 


To  go  down. 
To  come  in. 
To  go  out. 
To  go  up. 
To  draw  out. 
To  set  out. 
To  fall  down. 


This  may  be  the  reason  why  many  Spanish  grammarians 
have  thought  that  in  Spanish  the  same  thing  does  not  exist. 
We  regret  that  the  dimensions  of  our  book  do  not  allow  of  our 
giving  a  more  complete  list  in  corroboration  of  the  fact  that 
Spanish  verbs  too  enjoy  that  transition  of  signification  which 
is  so  frequent  in  English  verbs. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  ^  A  qu6  lado  caen  las  ventanas  de  su  ciiarto  de  V.  ?  Tres  caen  i 
la  plaza  de  Madison  y  las  otras  trcs  caen  d  la  calle  Veinte  y  cinco. 

2.  ^Le  cae  a  V.  en  gracia  ese  muchachito?  Si,  seflor,  porque  res- 
ponde  con  mucha  agudeza. 

3.  I  Puedo  contar  con  su  promesa  de  Y .  ?  V.  pnede  contar  con  ella, 
porque  yo  cumplo  siempre  lo  que  proraeto. 

4.  ^Da  V.  orddito  d  todo  lo  que  oye?  No,  sefior,  A  radnos  quo 
conozca  las  personas. 

5.  ^Da  y.  la  raano  d  aquel  pobre?  Si,  sefior,  porque  aunque  pobre 
es  honrado. 

6.  I  Ila  dado  V.  fin  d  su  tarea  ?  Todavia  no ;  pero  pronto  dar6  de  mano. 

7.  Si  v.  doja  esos  libros  en  raanos  de  ese  muchacho,  pronto  dard  fin 
de  ellos. — Asi  lo  oreo ;  pero  es  necesario  que  los  nifios  tengan  algo  para 
entretenerse. 

8.  jC6mo  ha  dispnesto  V.  de  sus  alhajas?  Las  he  guardado,  porque 
pude  encontrar  dinero  sin  venderlas. 

9.  jQu6  so  hizo  do  aqnol  mal  negocio  en  qne  se  mcti6  su  primo  de 
V.  ?    Se  le  ha  echado  tierra,  y  nadie  se  acuerda  mas  do  61. 

10.  jEn  qu6  se  ocupa  su  amigo  de  V.  ?    Entiende  en  vinos;  pero  et 
oosa  que  no  entiende. 


LESSON     LVII.  311 

11.  ^  Como  Gsta  su  csposa  de  V.  ?  Ella  estd  de  cuidado,  y  yo  con  cnidado. 

12.  I  Esta  V.  en  hacer  aquel  negocio  ?    Estoy  para  hacerlo. 

13.  gQueda  V.  en  hacer  ese  encargo  por  mi?  Qucdo  en  hacerlo  y 
pierda  V.  cuidado,  que  no  se  quedara  por  hacer. 

14.  ^  Es  y.  mayor  de  edad  ?  No,  seiior,  todavia  no ;  pero  soy  mayor 
en  edad  con  respecto  a  mis  hermanos. 

15.  No  ponga  V.  eso  por  tierra. — No  lo  pongo  por  tierra,  sino  en  tierra. 

1 6.  2  Piensa  V.  salir  con  su  empresa  ?  No,  sefior,  pero  pienso  salir 
pronto  de  ella. 

17.  ^  Tii-6  ese  hombre  de  la  espada  ?  Tir6  de  la  espada,  porque  la  sac6 ; 
pero  el  miedo  le  hizo  emprender  la  fuga  y  la  tir6. 

18.  Don  Juan,  ^le  gusta  d  Y.  vender  al  fiado?  No,  sefior,  me  gusta 
vender  al  contado  y  de  contado. 

19.  gVolvi6  D.  Francisco  por  la  razon?  No,  sefior,  D.  Francisco  no 
ha  vuelto  a  la  razon,  y  por  consiguiente  no  volvio  por  la  razon. 

20.  I  Se  acuerda  ese  hombre  con  su  esposa  ?    No,  sefior,  no  se  acuerdan. 

21.  ^Se  acuerda  Y.  de  lo  que  le  dije  a  Y.  ayer?  No,  sefior,  lo  he 
ohidado. 

22.  I  Conviene  Y.  ahora  conmigo  en  que  el  espafiol  es  mas  facil  que  el 
ingles  ?     Convengo  con  Y.  en  ello. 

23.  I  Le  conviene  d  Y.  hacer  eso  ?    No,  sefior,  no  me  conviene. 

24.  I  Dio  Y.  por  fin  con  lo  que  buscaba  ?  No,  sefior,  todavia  no  lo  he 
encontrado. 

25.  Este  hombre  ha  dado  en  la  tema  de  querer  aprender  sin  estudiar ; 
^no  le  parece  a  Y.  que  es  una  pretension  muy  ridicula  ?    Eidiculisima. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Has  the  Baron  given  up  his  project  ?  He  told  me  he  would  like  to 
give  it  up,  if  he  could  do  so  honorably. 

2.  I  understand  he  is  an  honorable  man  ?  Yes,  and  he  is  therefore 
respected  by  aU  who  know  him. 

3.  Has  your  brother  come  to  an  agreement  with  that  dealer  for  the 
purchase  of  the  horse  he  was  speaking  of?  It  appears  not,  and  that,  on 
the  contrary,  he  desires  to  get  rid  of  the  one  he  has. 

4.  Did  you  inform  the  merchant  of  the  order  you  received  from  the 
"West  ?    Not  yet ;  but  I  intend  to  let  him  know  of  it  this  very  day. 

5.  Does  that  woman  understand  cooking  ?  She  says  she  does ;  and 
she  handed  me  a  letter  from  a  lady  with  whom  she  lived  two  years. 

6.  Did  the  captain  draw  his  sword  as  soon  as  he  heard  his  antagonist's 
reply?     He  had  already  drawn  it;  but  when  he  heard  the  reply  he 
threw  down  his  sword,  and  ran  and  gave  his  hand  to  the  man  whom,  a  " 
few  moments  before,  he  was  resolved  to  kill. 


312 


LESSON     LVIII. 


7.  Has  your  brother  sent  you  the  books  he  promised  you  ?  Ko,  and 
that  need  not  surprise  you,  for  I  can  never  rely  (count)  on  him  for  any 
thing. 

8.  That  is  to  say,  he  never  keeps  his  promise  ?  That  is  precisely 
what  I  mean  to  say.  ^ 

9.  Do  past  participles  always  agree  in  gender  and  number  with  the 
subject  of  the  verb  ?  Yes,  always,  except  when  governed  by  the  auxili- 
ary to  have. 

10.  Are  there  not  some  participles,  past  and  present,  that  do  not  re- 
tain the  regimen  of  the  verbs  to  which  they  belong  ? — ITiere  are  very 
many;  and,  if  you  like,  I  will  mention  some  of  them. — Be  good  enough 
to  do  so. 

11.  I  hope  you  have  provided  yourself  with  every  thing  necessary  for 
your  journey?  Everything,  except  one  or  two  articles  which  I  have 
been  unable  to  find. 

12.  How  do  you  advise  me  to  arrange  (dispose)  all  these  books  ?  I 
have  only  one  advice  to  give  you  in  the  matter,  and  that  is,  to  disj>ose 
of  them  as  quickly  as  you  can. 

13.  Would  you  like  to  taste  this  dish  ?  No,  thank  you,  I  am  not  fond 
of  it. 

14.  Is  he  not  of  your  opinion  ?  Not  at  all ;  he  always  goes  (sides) 
with  his  father. 


LESSON    LYIII 


Notar. 

To  note,  to  observe,  to  perceive. 

Cazar. 

To  hunt,  to  chase. 

Chancear. 

To  jest. 

Combinar. 

To  combine. 

Concertar. 

To  concert,  to  agree. 

Concluir. 

To  conclude,  to  finish. 

Enfriarse. 

To  cool,  to  get  (or  grow)  cold.     > 

Eucargar. 

To    charge,  to    commission,    to 

order. 

Flotar. 

To  float. 

Iraprovisar. 

To  improvise. 

Inspirar. 

To  inspire. 

Repartir. 

To  divide. 

Saltar. 

To  leap,  to  jump. 

Trinchar. 

To  carve,  to  cut. 

Cobrar.     Brindar. 

To  collect    To  toast. 

LESSON     LVIII 


313 


A  lo  16J03. 

A  cuestas. 
A  la  espafiola. 
Atras. 


Abanico. 

Apetito. 

Aficionado. 

Baul. 

Buey. 

Brindis. 

Carro. 

Canasto. 

Conductor. 

Pretexto. 

Pefiasco. 

Embarcadero. 

Piropos  (pi.). 


Sitio. 

Salon. 

Vooabulario. 


Fan. 

Appetite. 
Amateur,  one 

fond  of. 
Trunk. 
Ox. 
Toast. 
Car,  cart. 
Basket. 
Conductor. 
Pretext. 
Eock. 
Ferry. 

Sweet  things. 
Fare. 

Place,  spot. 
Saloon. 
Vocabulary. 


At  a  distance,  in  the  distance. 
On  one's  back,  on  one's  shoulder. 
In  the  Spanish  fashion. 
Backward,  ago,  behind. 


Blanco. 

White. 

Bonito. 

Pretty. 

Durable,  duradero. 

Durable. 

Elocuente. 

Eloquent. 

Galante. 

Gallant 

Bello  sexo. 

Fair  sex. 

Magnifico. 

Magnificent. 

Negro. 

Black. 

Rodeado. 

Surrounded, 

Vacio. 

Empty. 

Ala. 

Botella. 

Gaza. 

Chanza, 

Oima. 

Colina. 

Dama. 

Imaginacion. 

Llave,  clave. 

Milla. 

Pechuga. 

Fuerza. 

Suerte. 

Tarea. 

Vocal. 

Voz. 

Sombra. 

Elocuencia. 


Wing. 

Bottle. 

Hunt. 

Jest. 

Top,  summit. 

HiU. 

Lady. 

Imagination. 

Key. 

Mile. 

Breast  (of  fowl). 

Force,  strength. 

Luck,  sort. 

Task. 

Vowel. 

Voice,  word. 

Shade,  shadow. 

Eloquence. 


COMPOSITION. 


Quedamoa   en  qae    saldriamos    a  las 

cinco. 
Este  canasto  es  superior  k  mis  fuerzas. 

A  la  salud  de  las  senoras. 
14 


We  agreed  (or  appointed)  to  set  out  (or 

start)  at  five  o'clock. 
This  basket  is  more  than  I  am  able  to 

manage. 
To  the  health  of  the  ladies. 


314 


LESSON    LVIII. 


Decir  piropos  &  las  sefioritas. 
Sirvase  V.  pagar  al  conductor, 
i  Mire  V.  qu6  gracia ! 
(,  Que  tal  le  gusta  a  V.  ? 
Pongamos  los  canastos  k  la  sombra. 
La  subida  de  la  colina  con  un  gran 

canasto  4  cuestas,  me  ha  abierto  el 

apetito. 
Me  alegro  de  ver  4  V. 
Se  alegro  de  la  noticia. 
Lo  siento  mucho. 

Me  pesa  mucho  saberlo. 

I  Cu^ntas  personas  caben  en  esta  igle- 

sia? 
No  cabiamos  todos  en  el  salon. 
^Puede  caber  en  tu  imagmacion  tal 

cosa? 
Cabe  mucho  en  este  haul. 
No  caber  de  pi  69. 
A  mi  me  cupo  en  suerte  venir  4  la 

America. 
No  caber  de  gozo. 


To  say  sweet  things  to  the  young  ladiea 

Please  pay  the  conductor. 

Only  think  ! 

How  do  you  like  ? 

Let  us  set  the  baskets  in  the  shade. 

Coming  up  the  hill  with  a  large  basket 
on  my  back  has  sharpened  my  appe- 
tite. 

I  am  glad  to  see  you. 

He  was  rejoiced  at  the  news. 

I  am  very  sorry  for  it  (i.  «.,  I  feel  it 
much). 

I  am  very  sorry  to  know  it  [i.  c,  it 
grieves  me  much  to  know  it). 

How  many  persons  does  this  church 
hold? 

The  saloon  could  not  hold  us  all. 

Can  such  a  thing  enter  your  imagina- 
tion ? 

This  trunk  holds  a  great  deal 

To  have  no  room  to  stand. 

It  was  my  lot  to  come  to  America. 

To  be  overjoyed. 


EXPLANATION. 
IDIOMATIC  USE  OF  CERTAIN  VERBS. 

272.  Alegrarse. — The  verbs  to  be  glad  and  to  be  rejoiced 
at  are  translated  by  the  reflective  verb  alegrarse ;  as. 

Me  aleffro  de  ver  &  V.  I      I  am  glad  to  see  you. 

Se  aleffrd  de  la  noticia.  j      He  was  rejoiced  at  the  news. 

273.  Sentir  and  pesar. — To  be  sorry  and  to  grieve^  are 
translated  by  these  verbs ;  as, 

Lo  siento  mucho. 


Me  pesa  mucho  saberlo. 


I  am  very  sorry  for  it  (t.  «.,  I  feel  it 

much). 
I  am  very  sorry  to  know  it  (t.  e.,  it 

grieves  me  much  to  know  it). 

274.  Caber,  to  be  capable  of  containing,  <fcc. — ^Thls  verb 
fs  employed  in  different  manners  in  Spanish ;  as, 


^Cu&ntas    personas    cabai  en  esta 
iglesia  J 


How  many  persons  do«s  this  church 
bold  (or  is  it  capable  of  contain- 
ing)? 


LESSON-      LVIII. 


315 


No  cabiamos  todos  en  el  salon. 
iPuede   caber   en  tu  imaginacion  tal 

cosa? 
Cabe  mucho  en  este  baul. 
No  caber  de  pies. 
A  mi  me  cupo  en  suerte  venir  d  la 

America. 
No  caber  en  si. 
No  caber  de  gozo. 


The  saloon  could  not  hold  us  all. 
Can  such  a  thing  enter  your  imagina- 
tion? 
This  trunk  holds  a  great  deal. 
To  have  no  room  to  stand. 
It  was  my  lot  to  come  to  America. 


To  be  well  satisfied  with  one'i 
To  be  overjoyed. 


self. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  Buenos  dias,  sefiores,  ^conque  ya  todos  estan  listos?  Pues  no 
habiamos  de  estar,  si  son  ya  las  seis  y  quedamos  en  que  saldriamos  a  las 
cinco. 

2.  Habriamos  estado  aqui  de  los  primeros,  si  no  hubiera  sido  que,  des- 
pues  de  baber  andado  dos  6  tres  manzanas,  eclio  de  ver  mi  esposa  que 
habia  olvidado  la  Have  del  cuarto,  el  paraguas,  el  abanico,  y  yo  no  s6 
cudntas  otras  cosas  mas ;  pero  en  fin  ya  estamos  aqui,  i  cuando  partimos  ? 
Estamos  esperando  el  carro  que  va  al  embarcadero  de  la  calle  Treinta 
y  tres. 

3c  Sefioras,  esten  Vds.  prontas,  porque  veo  venir  el  carro. — ^Don  Mar- 
tin, ayudeme  V.  k  Uevar  este  canasto,  porque  es  superior  a  mis  fuerzas. — 
Llame  V.  a  Don  Pepito,  que  no  hace  mas  que  decir  piropos  d  las  selio- 
ritas,  porque  yo  tengo  ya  dos  paraguas  y  tres  nifios  de  que  cuidar. 

4.  Don  Pepe,  V.  que  no  tiene  nifios,  ni  canastos,  etc.,  sirvase  Y.  pagar 
al  conductor. — (;  El  diantre  del  hombre !  ahora  me  pesa  no  haber  tornado 
un  canasto.) 

5.  jEl  pasaje  caballeros!  jCuantos  somos?  uno,  dos,  tres,  cuatro, 
caballeros ;  una,  dos,  tres,  cuatro,  siete  sefioras,  esto  es :  once  personas 
mayores  y  catorce  nifios. 

6.  Papa,  I  esta  muy  lejos  el  sitio  d  donde  vamos  a  pasar  el  dia?  No, 
Luisita,  solamente  unas  diez  millas. 

7.  I  De  este  lado  6  del  otro  del  rio  ?  Del  otro,  desde  aqui  lo  puedes  ver. 

8.  I  No  ves  alia  d  lo  16jos,  en  la  cima  de  aquella  colina,  una  casa  blanca 
en  donde  flota  la  bandera  americana  ?  Si,  sefior,  es  muy  bonito  sitio  y 
debe  tener  muy  buenas  vistas. 

9.  Cuidado  con  los  nifios  al  saltar  en  tierra,  no  se  caiga  alguno  al  agua. 
—J  Estan  todos  fuera  ?  gNo  se  ha  olvidado  nada?— No,  sefior.— Pues  en 
marcha. 

10.  Don  Pepito,  tome  V.  ese  canasto,  y  cuidado  no  lo  deje  caer  y 
rompa  las  botellas  que  contiene. — j  Hombre,  por  Dios !  con  el  pretexto  de 
que  venia  con  las  manos  vacias,  me  ha  hecbo  V.  pagar  los  carros  y  el  va- 


316  LESSON     LVIII. 

porcito  por  veinte  y  tres  personas,  y  ahora  me  quiere  V.  hacer  cargar 
con  el  canasto  del  vino. 

11.  Vamos,  Don  Pepito,  lldvelo  V.  ahora  hasta  la  cima  de  aquella  co- 
lina,  que  d  la  vuelta  a  casa  yo  me  encargo  de  llevarlo. — jMire  V.  que 
gracia !  d  la  vuelta  1  qu6  es  lo  que  quedara  de  una  docena  de  botellas, 
despues  de  beber  veinte  y  tres  personas. 

12.  Nada;  el  que  no  ayude  a  llevar  los  canastos  no  pai-ticipard  de  su 
contenido. — Sres.,  repartamos  la  tarea ;  que  los  hombres  lleven  los  ca- 
nastos,  las  mamas  a  los  ninos,  los  ninos  los  paraguas,  y  las  sefioritas  a 
Don  Pepito. 

13.  Da.  Delfina  i  qu6  tal  le  gusta  a  Y.  este  sitio  ?  j  Oh  !  es  delicioso; 
J  qu6  vistas  tan  bonitas ! 

14.  Pongamos  los  canastos  d  la  sombra  de  ese  hermoso  drbol. — Si,  y 
pongamonos  nosotros  tambien  d  la  sombra,  que  al  sol  hace  calorcito. 

15.  gNo  le  parece  d  V.,  Don  Enrique,  que  es  tiempo  de  poner  la  mesa? 
Asi  me  parece,  porque  la  subida  de  la  colina  con  un  gran  canasto  a 
cuestas  me  ha  abierto  el  apetito. 

16.  Sres.,  la  coraida  esta  en  la  mesa. — Sefloras,  ^qu6  es  lo  que  Vds.  di- 
cen  ?  I  en  la  mesa !  |  Ah !  si,  ya  vemos,  sobre  un  gran  pefiasco  a  la  sombra 
de  aquel  drbol  j  magnifica  idea ! 

17.  Don  Pepito,  traiga  V.  un  par  de  sillas  mas,  que  faltan  para  dos 
sefloras.  Alld  voy,  j  cdspita  con  las  sillitas !  cada  una  pesa  cien  libras ; 
pero,  eso  si,  son  durables,  no  haya  niiedo  de  que  se  rompan. — Tomen 
Vds.  asiento,  sefloras. 

18.  Pase  v.,  Don  Martin,  primero.  No,  sefior,  despues  de  Y. — Sefio- 
res  sin  cumplimientos  que  se  enfria  la  comida. 

19.  ^Qui6n  quiere  sopa?  jHombre,  sopa!  yo,  yo,  sirvame  Y.  un 
plato,  Don  Enrique. 

20.  Poco  d  poco,  Don  Pepito,  en  el  campo,  no  tenemos  sopa. — Pues  yo 
crci  que  Y.  me  la  ofrecia. — Yo  pregunt6  por  saber  qui6n  era  aficionado 
d  la  sopa. 

21.  Scflor  Don  Pedro  ^quiere  Y.  hacerme  el  favor  de  trinchar  ese 
polio  ?    Con  mucho  gusto. 

22.  Da.  Margarita  i  voy  d  mandarle  d  Y.  un  pedazo  de  pechuga  ?  l^o, 
sefior,  gracias,  radndeme  Y.  el  ala  6  la  pierna,  que  me  gusta  mas. 

23.  Don  Pepito,  un  brindis,  vamos  un  brindis. — Exciiseume  Yds., 
seflores,  yo  no  86  hacer,  y  m6nos  improvisar  brindis. 

24.  Pero  hombre,  \  eso  dice  Y.  que  es  tan  galante  y  elocuente  con  las 
damas !  j  No  le  inspira  d  Y.  algo  el  bello  sexo  de  que  se  halla  Y.  ro- 
deado  ?    Pues  bien,  d  la  salud  de  las  sefloras. — Y  iporqu6  no  ? 


LESSON     LVIII.  317 


EXERCISE. 


1.  Has  the  baker  not  come  yet  ?  You  are  in  a  jesting  mood  (humor) 
this  morning ;  he  came  long  before  you  were  up. 

2.  Never  mind ;  1  have  got  change  enough  to  pay  for  all. — You  are 
too  late,  I  have  already  paid ;  the  conductor  has  no  time  to  wait  half  an 
hour  collecting  the  fare  of  each  passenger. 

3.  Your  appetite  seems  to  be  a  little  better  to-day  than  usual ;  how 
do  you  account  for  that  ?  Really  you  flatter  my  appetite  beyond  what  it 
deserves ;  I  am  happy  to  say  that  it  is  at  all  times  in  excellent  order. 

4.  Do  you  not  find  it  good  exercise  to  climb  to  the  top  of  the  hill 
with  that  heavy  basket  on  your  arm  ?  The  fact  is  I  shall  have  to  give  it 
to  some  one  else  for  a  while,  for  my  strength  is  not  equal  to  the  task. 

5.  I  wonder  whom  you  can  give  it  to;  you  see  that  we  have  each  of 
us  something  to  carry.  Well,  in  that  case,  I  must  change  with  some  one 
that  has  a  lighter  burden  (cargo)  than  my  own. 

6.  Does  not  John  intend  to  become  a  soldier  ?  He  does,  though  en- 
tirely contrary  to  the  will  of  his  father,  who  set  his  face  against  it  in  the 
most  determined  manner. 

7.  How  many  trunks  is  each  passenger  (pasajero)  allowed  to  keep 
with  him  in  his  berth  (camarote)  ?  Only  one,  supposed  to  contain  the 
articles  he  will  require  to  have  at  hand  during  the  passage. 

8.  Did  you  ever  go  to  a  lion-hunt  while  you  were  in  South  Africa  ? 
Several  times,  and  I  can  assure  you  it  is  a  most  interesting  and  exciting 
scene. 

9.  Did  you  go  there  entirely  for  pleasure  ?  !N^o,  I  managed  to  com- 
bine business  and  pleasure,  otherwise  I  should  probably  never  have  seen 
that  country,  for  you  know  that  such  a  voyage  as  that  costs  a  great  deal 
of  money. 

10.  Did  they  drink  many  toasts  during  the  dinner?  A  good  many, 
and  the  first  one  I  proposed  was  to  the  fair  sex. 

11.  Nothing  surprising  in  that ;  I  know  it  would  scarcely  be  possible  to 
surpass  you  in  gallantry.  You  are  flattering  me  now,  for  the  ladies  agree 
on  all  hands  in  calling  you  the  most  gallant  young  gentleman  in  the 
country. 

12.  Just  try  if  your  eloquence  will  not  succeed  in  persuading  your 
young  friend  to  come  with  us  to-morrow.  With  all  my  heart ;  but  un- 
fortunately  he  does  not  speak  French,  and  you  know  how  much  my  elo- 
quence loses  in  English. 

13.  Does  the  art  of  pleasing  depend  on  what  we  do  and  what  we  say  ? 
It  does  not,  in  my  opinion,  depend  so  much  on  what  we  do  and  say  as  on 
how  we  do  things  and  how  we  say  them. 


318 


LESSON     LIX, 


14.  Is  it  not  surprising  that  your  sister  has  not  yet  come?  I  believe 
she  has  gone  round  to  see  her  young  Spanish  friend  {fem.\  although  she 
left  me  but  half  an  hour  ago,  under  pretext  of  having  to  write  a  letter. 

15.  Do  you  generally  dine  in  the  Spanish  fashion  at  home  ?  We  gen- 
erally eat  in  the  French  fashion,  notwithstanding  we  are  all  very  fond 
of  the  Spanish  manner  of  cooking. 


LESSON    LIX 


Amenazar. 

Cojear. 

Colgar. 

Corregir. 

Cubrir. 

Cubrirse. 

Descubrir. 

Descubrirse. 

Despedir. 

Definir. 

Durar. 

Rodar. 

Prestar. 

Veneer. 

Cosa  de. 

Capaz. 

Condicional. 

Cariredondo. 

Casero. 

Compafiero. 

Claro. 

Copulative. 

Generoso. 

Defectivo. 

Libre. 

Vulgar. 

Vistoso. 


To  menace. 

To  be  lame,  to  limp. 

To  hang. 

To  correct. 

To  cover. 

To  put  on  one's  hat. 

To  discover,  to  uncover. 

To  take  oflf  one's  hat 

To  send  away,  to  put  away,  to 

give  up. 
To  define. 
To  last. 

To  roll,  to  run  on  wheels. 
To  lend. 
To  conquer. 


About. 

Capable,  able. 

Conditional. 

Roundfaced. 

Household,  family,  domestic 

Companion. 

Clear. 

Copulative. 

Generous. 

Defective. 

Free,  unembarrassed. 

Vulgar,  common,  usuaL 

Showy. 


LESSON     LIX. 


319 


Asesino. 

Assassin. 

Barba. 

Beard,  chin. 

Aumento. 

Increase,  augmen- 

Carcajada. 

Burst  of  laughter. 

tation. 

Decena. 

About  ten. 

Cerrojo. 

Bolt. 

Delinicion. 

Definition. 

Campo. 

Field,  country. 

Evidencia. 

Evidence. 

Corredor. 

Broker. 

Espalda. 

Back. 

Dedo. 

Finger. 

Gana. 

Desire,  mind. 

Dialogo. 

Dialogue. 

Hoja. 

Leaf. 

Dolor  de  costado.  Pain  in  the  side. 

Loteria. 

Lottery. 

Deseo. 

Desire,  wish. 

Llave. 

Key. 

Descuido. 

Carelessness. 

Pena. 

Difficulty,  pain.' 

Grito. 

Shout. 

Pera. 

Pear. 

Gemido. 

Groan,  moan. 

Pobreza. 

Poverty. 

Pagare. 

Promissory  note. 

Pascua. 

Easter. 

Presidio. 

State-prison. 

Rodilla. 

Knee. 

Peral. 

Pear-tree. 

Yuelta. 

Turn,  change. 

P6same. 

Condolence. 

Posicion. 

Position. 

Premio. 

Prize,  premium, 
reward. 

Excuaa. 

Excuse,  apology. 

Salto. 

Jump,  spring. 

Semblante. 

Look. 

Trago. 

Draught,  drink. 

COMPO 

SITION. 

Su  pagare  de  V.  cae  el  mes  que  viene. 

Le  ha  caido  la  loteria. 

Este  edificio  cae  al  {or  hdcia  el)  Norte. 

Mis  ventanas  caen  a  la  mano  derecha. 

Este  vestido  te  cae  bien. 

No  cay  6  en  la  cuenta. 

Ya  caigo  en  ello. 

Estar  al  caer. 

Caer  de  pies,  de  rodilla3. 

JjO  doy  por  hecho. 

Lo  dieron  por  libre. 

Me  doy  por  vencido. 

Le  dio  un  dolor  de  costado. 

La  lectura  de  ese  libro  te  dar 'i  gaiias 

de  dormir. 
Al  fin  dio  en  la  dificultad. 
Dar  los  buenos  dias. 
Dar  las  pascuas. 


Your  note  falls  due  next  month. 
He  has  won  a  prize  in  the  lottery. 
This  building  looks  toward  the  North. 
My  windows  are  on  the  right  hand. 
This  dress  fite  her  well. 
He  did  not  see  the  drift  (of  what  was 

said). 
Ah,  now  I  see ! 
To  be  about  to  take  place. 
To  fall  on  one's  feet,  on  one's  knees. 
I  take  for  granted  it  is  done. 
They  let  him  free. 
I  give  it  up. 

He  took  a  pain  in  his  side. 
Reading  this  book  wiU  put  you  asleep 

(or  make  you  sleep). 
Finally  he  fell  upon  the  diflficulty. 
To  wish  one  good  day. 
To  wish  a  happy  Easter. 


S20 


LESSON     LIK, 


Dar  el  p6same. 

Dar  la  enhorabuena. 

Dar  gritos. 

Dar  gemidos. 

Dio  una  carcajada. 

Dar  a  comprender. 

Darse  u  conocer. 

Dar  una  vuelta. 

Dar  pena. 

Dar  gusto. 

Dar  gana. 

Dar  saltos, 

Dio  que  deeir. 

Esto  no  dice  bien  con  aquello. 

El  bianco  dice  bien  con  el  azul. 

Su  vestido  dice  su  pobreza. 

El  semblante  de  Juan  dice  bien  ga  mal 

genio. 
Este  peral  echa  mnehas  peras. 
Esta  planta  no  ha  echado  hojas. 
He  ecbado  un  trago. 
Eche  V.  la  llave  k  la  puerta. 
Echar  pid  k  tierra. 
Echar  el  cerrojo. 
Echarlo  4  juego  {or  chanza). 
Hoy  echan  la  comedia  nueva. 
Ha  echado  coche. 
Echar  a  presidio. 
Echar  por  los  campos. 
Echaron  &  correr. 
Lo  echo  todo  &  perder. 
Echar  h  rodar. 
No  echo  de  ver  este  defecto. 
i  Echa  V.  de  m6nos  algo  ? 
No,  seSor ;  echo  de  m6no8  &  ^Iguicn. 
Me  ech6  h  dormir. 
Se  ech6  d  rcir. 
Se  eeh6  &  corredor. 
Lo  puso  de  patitas  en  la  c&Qe. 


To  express  condolence. 

To  congratulate. 

To  give  shouts. 

To  utter  groans. 

He  burst  out  laughing. 

To  give  to  understand. 

To  make  one's  self  known. 

To  take  a  turn,  to  go  round. 

To  cause  displeasure. 

To  ^ve  pleasure. 

To  have  a  mind  ;  to  take  the  notion. 

To  jump  about. 

He  left  room  for  talk. 

This  is  not  in  strict  accordance  with 

that. 
White  goes  very  well  with  blue. 
Her  dress  tells  of  her  poverty. 
John's  bad  temper  is  pictured  on  his 

countenance. 
This  pear-tree  bears  a  great  many  pears. 
This  plant  has  not  had  any  leaves. 
I  have  taken  a  drink. 
Lock  the  door. 
To  dismount. 
To  draw  the  bolt. 
To  take  it  in  play  (or  in  jest). 
The  new  play  comes  out  to-night. 
He  has  bought  a  carriage. 
To  send  to  State-prison. 
To  set  out  across  the  fields. 
They  set  out  running. 
He  spoiled  all. 
To  send  rolling. 
1  do  not  perceive  the  defect. 
Do  you  miss  any  thing  ? 
No,  sir ;  I  miss  some  one. 
I  wait  asleep. 
He  began  to  laugh. 
He  became  a  broker. 
He  threw  him  mto  the  street. 


EXPLANATION. 

275.  Tlie  verbs  caer,  to  fall ;  dar,  to  give ;  decir,  to  tell, 
or  to  say ;  echar,  to  throw  ;  differ  from  the  English  in  meaning 


LESSON     LIX.  ,321 

as  conveyed  by  the  sentences  which  are  given  in  the  Composi- 
tion, and  to  which  we  refer  without  putting  them  here,  in  order 
to  avoid  repetition. 

There  they  are  to  be  found,  with  their  English  translations, 
which  is  the  only  explanation  they  admit  of. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  Don  Gonzalo,  i  le  ha  caido  a  Y.  la  loteria  ?  No,  sefior ;  pero  mi 
pagare  ha  caido. 

2.  Luisita,  i  quien  ha  hecho  ese  vestido  que  te  cae  tan  hien  ?  Mi  mama 
lo  corto  V  yo  lo  cosi. 

3.  gNo  sabe  Y.  porqu6  me  hace  ahora  tantos  cumplimientos  Don  En- 
rique ?  No,  sefior,  no  s6  qu6  motivo  tenga  para  ser  ahora  mas  politico 
con  Y.  que  lo  ha  sido  hasta  aqui. 

4.  I  No  sabe  Y.  que  me  ha  caido  el  preraio  de  los  cien  mil  pesos  en  la 
loteria  de  la  Habana  ?     Si,  sefior ;  ya  me  lo  ha  dicho  Y.  antes. 

6.  Pues  bien,  g  no  cae  Y.  ahora  en  la  cuenta  ?  j  Ha !  ya  caigo  en  ello, 
Don  Enrique  quiere  pedu^le  a  Y.  dinero  prestado. 

6.  ^  Han  dado  las  doce  ?    Estan  al  caer. 

7.  I  Dieron  garrote  4  los  asesinos  ?  No,  sefior,  al  fin  los  dieron  por 
libres,  porque  no  habia  evidencia  suficiente  para  sentenciarlos. 

8.  ^  Que  ha  tenido  su  hermano  de  Y.  que  no  lo  he  visto  por  tanto 
tiempo  ?  Le  di6  un  dolor  de  costado  y  ha  tenido  que  guardar  cama  por 
una  semana. 

9.  ^A  que  no  adivina  Y.  lo  que  acabo  de  hacer?  Seguramente  que 
no  lo  adivinar6,  porque  Y.  es  capaz  de  hacer  muchas  cosas  buenas  y  malas. 

10.  ^  Se  da  Y.  por  vencido  ?    Me  doy. — Pues  vengo  de  echar  un  trago. 

11.  ^Que  comedia  echan  hoy?  Hoy  dan  la  tragedia  de  "Medea,"  en 
donde  representa  la  Sefiora  Eistori ;  i  ira  Y.  ? 

12.  Siendo  en  italiano  no  ire,  porque  no  comprendo  el  italiano  y  me 
daria  ganas  de  dormir. 

13.  Sr.  D.  Alejandro,  vengo  a  darle  a  Y.  los  buenos  dias. — T6ngalos  Y. 
muy  buenos. 

14.  ^No  me  quiere  Y.  dar  alguna  otra  cosa?  Si,  sefior,  le  doy  a  Y.  la 
enhorabuena  por  el  aumento  que  ha  tenido  Y.  en  su  familia. — Yiva  Y. 
mil  afios. 

15.  Todo  eso  es  muy  bueno,  D.  Pepito ;  pero  sea  Y.  generoso  y  deme 
Y.  alguna  cosita  mas. — Hombre,  si  Y.  no  se  da  a  comprender  yo  no  s6 
qu6  mas  darle  a  Y.  |  Ha  1  si,  ya  caigo !  que  estamos  en  tiempo  de.  .  .  . 
Doy  a  Y.  felices  pascuas. 

16.  Dale,  Dale,  si  no  es  eso,  yo  hablo  del  dinero  que  prest6  a  Y.  hace 

14* 


322  LESSON    LIX. 

mas  de  un  afio.— jHa!  Sefior  D.  Alejandro,  no  crca  Y.  que  yo  lo  haya 
echado  en  saco  roto. 

17.  Pues  bien;  ^porqud  no  me  lo  da  V.  ?  ;Porqu6!  hombre,  ahora 
ha  dado  V.  en  la  dificultad,  y  esta  es  que  yo  no  ten  go  dinero,  y  por  consi- 
guieute  no  puedo  darlo. 

18.  Entonces,  i  que  es  lo  que  V.  puede  dar  ?  ;  0 !  en  cuanto  k  eso  yo 
puedo  dar  muchas  cosas. 

19.  I  Ha  I  me  alegro  mucho,  veamos  lo  que  V.  puede  dar. — En  primer 
lugar  puedo  dar  gemidos. 

20.  |Puf!  (pshaw). — Tarabien  puedo  dar  gritos. 

21.  I  Dale! — Puedo  dar,     ....     que  decir. 

22.  InTo  lo  dudo. — Puedo  dar  nn  pdsame. 

23.  iDios  me  libre  ! — Puedo  dar  saltos. 

24.  Vaya  acabe  V.,  hombre,  acab6  V. — Puedo  dar  d  comprender. 

25.  Si,  eso  si,  demasiado  comprendo. — Puedo  darme  d  conocer. 

26.  Ya,  ya,  conozco  de  qu6  pi6  cojea  V. — Puedo  dar  una  vuelta. 

27.  Pues  vu61vase  Y.,  por  donde  ha  venido  y  nunca  de  Y.  mas  vueltas 
por  esta  casa.— Y  todavia  mas,  puedo  dar  una  carcajada. 

28.  I  Juan  !  Juan !  echa  a  ese  hombre  de  casa,  y  despues  echa  la  Have 
y  el  cerrojo  a  la  puerta.     j  Haya  picaro !  lo  he  de  echar  d  un  presidio  I 

29.  I  Has  echado  a  ese  hombre  d  la  calle  ?  Si,  selior,  ya  lo  puse  de  pa- 
titas  en  la  calle. 

30.  Y  I  qu6  dijo  ?  Primero  se  echo  d  reir,  yo  le  amenac6  que  lo  echaria 
a  rodar  y  ent6nces  echo  d  correr. 

31.  El  diantre  del  hombre  siempre  esta  pidiendo  dinero  prestado  y 
sobre  no  pagarlo  se  viene  a  reir  de  uno  en  sus  barbas.— Sefior,  jmanda  - 
Y.  alguna  otra  cosa  ?     No,  te  puedes  ir,  yo  voy  a  echarme  d  dormir,  ese 
bribon  me  ha  dado  un  gran  dolor  de  cabeza. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Is  there  any  thing  in  the  papers  this  morning  relative  to  the  trial 
of  the  murderer  of  Smith  ?  I  understand  his  trial  is  not  to  take  place 
before  a  month  from  this  time. 

2.  Why  did  you  not  bring  your  friend  with  you  ?  He  is  not  able  to 
walk  very  far  to-day,  owing  to  a  pain  in  his  side,  which  has  troubled  him 
for  the  last  three  days. 

3.  Did  you  tell  the  servant  to  draw  the  bolt  of  the  door  ?  No,  but  I 
told  him  to  lock  the  door. 

4.  Who  is  that  I  hear  groaning  ?  You  hear  no  one  groaning ;  it  is 
some  one  shouting  in  the  distance. 

5.  How  did  your  cousin  lose  his  situation  ?  He  owes  that  misfortune 
entirely  to  his  own  carelessness. 


LESSON     LX. 


323 


6.  Charles,  are  you  not  going  to  say  good  morning  to  that  gentleman? 
I  need  not  say  good  morning  to  him  now,  for  I  have  already  wished  him 
a  happy  Easter. 

7.  Did  that  merchant  pay  his  correspondent  at  Malaga  after  all?  lie 
did  not  pay  him ;  but  he  gave  him  a  note  at  three  months. 

8.  What  do  you  understand  by  parlor  plays  (household  comedies)  in 
Spain  ?  They  are  plays  represented  by  private  individuals* sometimes  in 
private  houses,  from  which  circumstance  they  take  their  name. 

9.  Do  you  know  that  round-faced  little  man  who  is  sitting  next  to 
your  uncle  ?  That  is  one  of  the  principal  actors  {actor)  in  the  parlor 
plays  given  at  Mr.  Gutierrez'. 

10.  What  became  of  the  offender  ?  The  evidence  not  being  sufficient 
to  prove  the  crime  of  which  he  was  accusedf  he  was  let  off;  otherwise 
he  would  have  been  sent  to  State-prison. 

11.  Did  they  refuse  to  give  him  the  things  he  wanted  on  credit  ?  Of 
course  they  did,  because  no  one  can  rely  on  him  nor  give  credit  to  any 
thing  he  says. 

12.  Will  that  young  man  probably  obtain  the  employment  he  has  ap- 
plied for  ?  Most  probably  he  will,  because  he  has  had  the  good  fortune 
to  get  into  the  president's  favor. 

13.  How  I  do  you  not  attend  your  classes  this  week  ?  No,  I  am  not 
very  well ;  and  so  a  friend  of  mine  was  good  enough  to  offer  to  act  in 
my  place. 

14.  Was  the  error  corrected  before  the  letter  was  dispatched  ?  No,  it 
was  not  discovered  in  time  to  be  corrected. 


LESSON    LX. 


Decidir. 

To  decide. 

Ejecutar. 

To  execute. 

Ejercer. 

To  exercise. 

Ensuciar. 

To  dirty,  to  soil. 

Enemistar. 

To  put  at  enmity. 

Escuchar. 

To  listen  to,  to  hearken  to. 

Exagerar. 

To  exaggerate. 

Exhibir. 

To  exhibit. 

Extraliar. 

To  wonder  at,  to  find  strange. 

Enfriarse. 

To  grow  cold,  to  get  (become) 

cold. 

*  AJieionndos. 

+  Acusar. 

324 


LESSON     LX, 


Eacargar. 

Exclamar. 

Exceptuar. 

Esforzar. 

Estrechar. 

Sospechar, 

Tardar. 


Atolladero. 

Camino. 

Astr6nomo. 

Colera, 

Cometa. 

Cofre. 

Cajon. 

Oapricho. 

Cuello. 

Cargo. 

Exterior. 

Extranjero. 

Embarcadero. 

Espejo. 

Estrecho. 
Elemento. 
Gobernador. 
Grado, 


To  commission,  to  order,  to  give 

charge. 
To  exclaim. 
To  except. 

To  endeavor,  to  make  effort. 
To  press. 
To  suspect. 
To  delay. 


Extra. 

Extra. 

Empero. 

But. 

Eliptico. 

Elliptical. 

Agrio. 

Sour. 

Estrecho. 

Close,  narrow. 

Preciso. 

Essential,  indispensable,  precise. 

Elocuente. 

Eloquent. 

Tonto. 

Foolish,  stupid. 

Travieso. 

Mischievous. 

Entrdmbosw 

Both. 

Entretanto. 

In  the  mean  time. 

Excepto. 

Except. 

Difficulty. 
Road,  way. 
Astronomer. 
Cholera. 
Comet. 
Chest. 

Drawer,  box. 
Caprice. 
Neck. 

Cargo,  charge. 
Exterior,  outside. 
Foreigner. 
Landing. 
Mirror,  looking- 
glass. 
Strait. 
Element. 
Governor. 
Grade,  degree. 


Casaca, 

Colocacion. 

Civilizacion. 

C61era. 

Corte. 

Cometa. 

Cita. 

Charla. 

Claridad. 

Compatlia. 

Caja. 

Cartilla. 

Calentura. 

Casualidad. 

Cantidad. 

Capa. 

Cara. 


Coat,  dress-coat 
Situation. 
Civilization. 
Anger. 
Court. 
Kite. 

Appointment. 
Chat 
Clearness. 
Company. 
Box,  case,  cash 
(commercial). 
Primer. 
Fever. 
Chance. 
Quantity. 
Cloak. 
Faoe. 


LESSON     LX. 

325 

Horno. 

Oven. 

Carga. 

Charge  (of  a  gun, 

Luto. 

Mourning. 

&c.). 

Litro. 

Litre.* 

Cuchara. 

Spoon. 

Matematico. 

Mathematician. 

Culpa. 

Fault,  blame. 

Tonel. 

Cask. 

Criatura. 

Creature,  infant. 

Term6metro. 

Thermometer. 

Costa. 

Cost,  coast. 

Ferro-carril. 

Railroad. 

Disculpa. 

Apology. 

Fruto. 

Fruit  (result). 

Estacion. 

Season. 

Fondo. 

Bottom. 

Existencia. 

Existence. 

Fliiido. 

Fluid. 

C0MP05 

Fragata. 
Mascara. 
Tontera. 
Pretension. 

Yerba. 

3ITI0N. 

Frigate. 
Mask. 

Foolish  action. 
Pretension, 

claim. 
Grass. 

Hoy  entra  la  primavera. 
Manana  entra  el  mes  de  Octubre. 

Entra  en  el  numero  de  los  sabios. 

Entro  a  reinar  k  los  quince  anos. 

Este  tonel  hace  cien  litres. 

No  le  hago  tan  tonto. 

Yo  le  hacia  mas  rice. 

Haz  por  venir. 

Hace  de  gobemador. 
vEsa  pobre  muchacha  est4  haciendo  de 
madre  a  sus  hermanos. 

A  eso  voy. 

Voy  de  paseo. 

Yan  de  mascara. 

Ya  de  luto. 

Le  va  en  ello  la  vida. 

Yengo  en  ello. 
\^  I  Cuanto  me  lleva  Y.  per  esto  ? 

Estos  dos  amigos  se  llevan  muy  bien. 

No  nos  llevamos  bien. 
Este  camino  lleva  d  Madrid. 
Le  llevo  dos  anos  y  medio. 
Me  Ueve  chasco. 


Spring  commences  to-day. 

The  month  of  October  commences  to- 
morrow. 

He  is  of  the  number  of  the  learned. 

He  began  to  reign  at  fifteen  years  of  age. 

This  cask  holds  100  litres. 

I  do  not  take  him  for  such  a  fool. 

I  took  him  to  be  richer. 

Try  to  come. 

He  is  acting  as  governor. 

That  poor  girl  is  acting  the  part  of  a 
mother  to  her  brothers  and  sisters. 

That  is  the  point  I  am  coming  to. 

I  am  going  for  pleasure. 

They  are  going  in  masks. 

He  is  in  mourning. 

His  life  is  at  stake. 

I  agree  to  that. 

How  much  will  you  charge  me  for  this  ? 

These  two  friends  agree  very  well  to- 
gether. 

We  do  not  agree  well  together. 

This  road  leads  to  Madrid. 

I  am  two  years  and  a  half  older  than  he. 

I  was  disappointed. 


*  Equal  to  2.113  American  pints. 


326 


LESSON     LX. 


Lleva  una  casaca  k  la  francesa. 

Se  hizo  a  la  vela. 

Manda  que  nos  traigan  el  almuerzo. 

Har6  que  nos  lo  traigan. 

(,  Hace  V.  tenir  su  vestido  de  azul  ? 

No,  senor,  lo  he  mandado  tenir  de  verde. 

Saldra  buen  matemdtico. 

Sail  6  muy  travieso. 

Ya  he  salido  de  todos  mis  granos. 

Me  salio  una  buena  coloeacion. 

Este  negoeio  me  ha  salido  bien. 

Le  salio  mal  su  empresa. 

Este  niiio  ha  salido  4  su  padre. 

Salio  de  la  regla. 

Pronto  saldr6  de  hijo  de  familia. 

Esta  capa  me  sale  en  cincucnta  pesos. 

Se  salio  con  su  pretension. 

Sirve  al  rey. 

No  sirve  para  nada. 

Sirvase  V.  admitir  mis  disculpas. 

El  tarda  mucho  en  decidir. 

1  Cuanto  tarda  en  responder ! 

;  Adios  !    Volver6  k  ver  k  V.,  y  le  vol- 

ver6  a  hablar  de  eso. 
Este  vino  se  vuelve  agrio. 
Se  volver4  bueno  con  el  tiempo. 
/Este  melon  sabe  k  melocoton. 
Este  vino  huele  k  vinagre. 
D.  Juan  hace  un  gran  papel  en  la  corte. 
Napoleon  III  hace  un  gran  papel  en  la 

politica  del  mundo. 


He  wears  a  coat  made  in  the  French 

fashion. 
He  set  sail. 

Order  the  breakfast  to  be  served  up. 
I  shall  have  it  brought  to  us. 
Are  you  getting  your  dress  dyed  blue  ? 
No,  sir,  I  have  ordered  it  to  be  dyed 

green. 
He  shall  turn  out  (to  be)  a  good  mathe* 

matician. 
He  (or  she — ^the  child)  turned  out  very 

naughty. 
I  have  got  rid  of  all  my  grain. 
A  good  situation  turned  up  for  me. 
This  business  has  turned  out  well  for  me. 
His  imdertaking  turned  out  badly. 
This  child  resembles  his  father. 
He  departed  from  the  rule. 
I  shall  soon  be  of  age. 
This  cloak  cost  me  fifty  dollars. 
He  obtained  what  he  desired. 
He  serves  the  king. 
It  is  good  for  nothing. 
Be  good  enough  to  accept  my  apology. 
He  is  slow  in  deciding. 
How  long  he  is  in  answering ! 
Good-by !    I  shall  see  you  again,  and 

talk  more  to  you  on  the  subject 
This  wine  is  turning  sour. 
It  will  become  good  again  in  time. 
This  melon  has  the  taste  of  a  peach. 
This  wme  smells  of  vinegar. 
John  makes  a  great  noise  at  court. 
Napoleon  III.  plays  a  great  part  in  the 

politics  of  the  world. 


EXPLANATION. 

276.  In  the  Composition  of  this  lesson  we  give  the  princi- 
pal idioms  with  the  verbs  entrar,  to  go  (or  come)  in  ;  haccTy  to 
do,  to  make ;  iV,  to  go ;  Uevar,  to  take,  to  charge ;  mandar, 
hacer,  in  the  sense  of  to  order,  to  cause  to  be  done ;  oler  d,  to 
to' smell  of;  and  saber  d,  to  taste  of;  scdiry  servir,  tardar  and 
volver. 


LESSON     LX.  327 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 


1.  ^Cuando  entra  la  primavera?  Debo  confesar  francamente  que  no 
s6  el  dia  precise  en  que  entra  y  sale  cada  estacion. 

2.  Entonces  V.  no  entra  en  el  mimero  de  los  sabios,  puesto  que  no 
Babe  cuando  estamos  en  invierno  j  cuando  en  verano. — Poco  a  poco, 
senor  Don  Pedro,  eso  seria  hacerme  entrar  en  el  mimero  de  los  idiotas. 

3.  I  Pues  no  acaba  V.  de  decirlo  ?  Yo  acabo  de  decir  que  no  s6  el 
dia  preciso  en  que  entra  cada  estacion ;  pero  cuando  veo  crecer  la  yerba 
J  las  bqjas  de  los  arboles,  y  abrirse  las  flores,  sospecho  que  estamos  en  la 
primavera. 

4.  j  Ha !  V.  sospecba !  Yamos,  ya  es  algo. — Si,  sefior,  y  del  mismo 
modo,  cuando  veo  el  terraometro  en  la  sombra,  que  marca  98°,  creo 
adivinar  que  estoy,  una  de  dos,  6  en  un  borno  6  en  Nueva  York  en  la 
estacion  del  verano. 

5.  Vamos,  yo  le  hacia  a  Y.  mas  ignorante  de  lo  que  en  efecto  es; 
^y  c6mo  adivina  Y.,  6  sospecba,  que  se  encuentra  Y.  en  el  otoflo? 
Cuando  los  melocotones  se  acaban  y  las  hojas  caen. 

6.  I  Bien !  bien !  ^  y  el  invierno  ?  Cuando  por  la  mafiana  no  puedo 
lavarme  por  hallar  que  se  ha  helado  el  agua  en  la  palangana. 

7.  Ya  veo  que  es  Y.  un  sabio  perfecto.  Yeamos  en  bistoria  i  k  qu6 
edad  entro  a  reinar  el  Key  Pepino? — jCaspita!  Sefior  Don  Pedro!  es 
mas  facil  criticar  que  ejecutar,  y  mas  facil  hacer  preguntas  que  respon- 
derlas,  y  sino  respondame  Y.  que  la  ecba  de  sabio. 

8.  I  Cuantos  litros  bace  ese  tonel  ?  |  Hombre !  yo  i  que  be  de  entender 
de  medir  toneles  ? 

9.  Pues  cambiar6  de  materia,  ^qui^n  bace  de  gobernador  en  Manila? 
;  Y  a  mi  qu6  me  importa ! 

10.  I  Yaya !  ese  es  un  buen  modo  de  salir  del  atolladero.— No,  sefior,  sir- 
vase  Y.  recibir  mis  disculpas,  tengo  que  irme  abora,  pero  volver6  a  ver  A 
v.,  y  volver^mos  a  tratar  de  esa  materia.     Adios,  sefiores. 

11.  gQu6  le  parece  a  Y.,  Don  Enrique,  de  ese  caballero?  Me  parece 
que  este  joven  saldra  buen  matematico,  porque  ha  salido  en  todo  a  su 
padre. 

12.  I  Sabe  Y.  si  sali6  bien  6  mal  de  su  emprcsa  ?  Es  un  negocio  que 
le  ha  salido  muy  bien. 

13.  ^  Se  lleva  bien  Luisa  con  sus  hermanos  ?  Si,  sefior,  y  aunque  no  les 
lleva  mas  de  tres  6  cuatro  afios,  les  sirve  de  madre. 

14.  ^Cuanto  le  cuesta  i  Y.  esa  capa?  Me  sale  en  unos  cincuenta 
pesos. 

15.  I  Cudnto  tardara  la  fragata  en  hacerse  a  la  vela  ?  No  s6,  creo  que 
el  capitan  es  hombre  que  tarda  en  decidirse. 


I 


828  LESSON     LX. 

16.  ^Do  qu6  color  hace  V.  teflir  su  vestido?  Lo  mand6  tetiir  de 
amarillo. 

17.  Don  Manuel,  mande  V.  que  nos  suban  el  almuerzo. — Har^  que  nos 
lo  traigan. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  "When  does  Spring  commence?  It  commences  in  March  and  ends 
in  May. 

2.  Has  your  young  friend  passed  his  examination  yet  ?  The  exami- 
nations have  not  taken  place ;  but  when  they  do,  he  will  prove  to  be  the 
best  Spanish  scholar  in  the  country. 

3.  In  what  month  does  the  cold  weather  generally  commence  in  the 
North  of  Spain  ?     Winter  usually  sets  in  about  the  middle  of  November. 

4.  How  much  does  this  cask  hold  ?    It  holds  from  100  to  120  litres. 
6.  How  soon  do  you  set  out  for  Europe  ?    As  soon  as  the  fine  weather 

sets  in. 

6.  Are  you  going  on  business,  or  for  pleasure  ?    For  pleasure  only. 

7.  How  are  they  going  to  the  ball  ?     They  are  going  in  masks. 

8.  How  much  did  your  tailor  charge  you  for  that  coat?  It  cost  me 
forty-five  dollars. 

9.  "What  age  do  you  take  my  cousin  to  be  ?  I  would  take  him  to  be 
about  the  same  age  as  his  friend. 

10.  You  had  better  guess  again.    I  give  it  up. 

11.  How  old  is  he,  then  ?  He  is  two  years  and  four  months  older  than 
his  friend. 

12.  Do  you  know  whether  the  pianist's  brother  succeeded  in  obtaining 
the  position  he  applied  for?  He  did  not;  but  an  excellent  situation 
turned  up  for  him  a  short  time  after. 

13.  How  long  will  you  take  to  dye  this  dress  for  me?    About  a  week. 

14.  "What  color  do  you  wish  it  to  be  dyed  ?  I  wish  to  have  it  dyed 
blue. 

15.  Do  you  think  this  boy  will  turn  out  to  be  as  good  a  musician  as 
his  father  ?  I  have  not  the  least  doubt  about  it,  for  he  resembles  him  in 
every  respect  (en  todo). 

16.  Be  good  enough  to  accept  my  apology  for  not  having  come  yester- 
day as  I  had  promised.  Certainly,  sir;  I  know  very  well  that  you  have 
a  great  deal  of  business  to  attend  to. 

17.  "Who  is  Mr.  Terrero  in  mourning  for?  For  his  uncle,  who  died 
about  a  year  ago  in  Manila. 


LESSON     LXI. 


32a 


LESSON    LXI 


Felicitar. 

To  felicitate,  to  congratulate. 

Fiar. 

To  trust. 

Ignorar. 

To  be  ignorant  of,  unaware  of. 

Tiastimar. 

To  burt,  to  wound. 

Improvisar. 

To  improvise,  to  do  (any  thing) 

off-hand. 

Inquietar. 

To  make  uneasy,  to  cause  anxiety. 

Intentar. 

To  attempt,  to  intend. 

Interrogar. 

To  interrogate,  to  question. 

Invertir. 

To  invert,  to  invest. 

Interesar. 

To  interest,  to  be  of  interest. 

Invitar. 

To  invite. 

Imprimir. 

To  print. 

Obligar. 

To  force,  to  oblige. 

Eehusar. 

To  refuse. 

Lisonjear. 

To  flatter. 

Llevar. 

To  carry,  to  take,  to  charge. 

Descuidado. 

Careless. 

Final. 

Final 

Ignorante. 

Ignorant. 

Impersonal. 

Impersonal. 

Increible. 

Incredible. 

Indefinido. 

Indefinite. 

Inexplicable. 

Inexplicable. 

Ingenioso. 

Ingenious. 

Inmediato. 

Immediate,  close  by,  next 

Inquieto. 

Uneasy,  restless. 

Justo. 

Just,  right. 

Ultimo. 

Lnst. 

Lisonjero. 

Flattering. 

Especiero. 

Grocer. 

Loco. 

Mad. 

Lento. 

Slow. 

Solemne. 

Solemn,  cruel. 

De  Zeca  en  Meca. 

To  and  fro. 

A  ciegas. 

With  one's  eyes  shut 

A  galas. 

On  all  fours. 

En  el  interin. 

In  the  mean  time. 

830 

LESSON     LXI. 

Ampo  de  la  nie-  Whiteness  of 

Anchuras  (f.j)!.).  Ease. 

ve. 

snow. 

Cuba. 

Cask,  toper, 

Asno. 

Ass. 

drunkard. 

Descuido. 

Carelessness. 

Cara. 

Face. 

Hueso. 

Bone. 

Cartilla. 

Primer. 

Golpe, 

Blow,  stroke. 

Calabaza. 

Pumpkin,  refusal. 

Dares  y  tomares.  Dispute. 

Imaginacion. 

Imagination. 

Indicc. 

Index. 

Intencion. 

Intention. 

Ingenio. 

Genius. 

luterrogacion. 

Interrogation. 

Insecto. 

Insect. 

Inversion. 

Inversion. 

Instinto. 

Instinct. 

Justicia. 

Justice. 

Instrumento. 

Instrument. 

Llave. 

Key. 

Interrogante. 

Question,  note  of 

Lluvia. 

Eain. 

interrogation. 

Lista. 

List. 

Italian©. 

Italian. 

Lisonja. 

Flattery. 

Arco  iris. 

Rainbow. 

Luna. 

Moon. 

Galicismo. 

Gallicism. 

Luz. 

Light 

Hierro. 

Iron. 

Latitud. 

Latitude. 

Juego- 

Play. 

Longitud. 

Longitude. 

Loco. 

Madman. 

Legua. 

League. 

Lugar. 

Place. 

Letra. 

Letter. 

Latin. 

Latin. 

Limosna. 

Alms. 

Sonido,      I 
Son.           1 

Sound. 

Limpieza. 

Cleanness. 

Liuea. 

Line. 

Pico. 

Beak. 

Levita. 

Frock-coat. 

Levita. 

Levite. 

Kama. 

Branch. 

Uso. 

Use,  custom. 

Teja. 

Tile. 

Objeto. 

Object. 

Ocasion. 

Occasion. 

Oido. 

Ear,  hearing. 

Vergtlenza. 

Shame, 

Olfato. 

SmeU. 

COMrOS 

3ITI0N. 

A  maa  tardar. 

At  latest. 

A  media  palabra. 

At  the  slightest  hint 

A  medida  do  sus 

ieseoa. 

According  to  one's 

wishes. 

A  sus  anchuras. 

At  one's  ease. 

Al  descuido  y  con 

cuidado. 

Studiously  careless 

Abrir  el  ojo. 

To  be  upon  the  alert. 

Alia  se  las  haya. 

Let  him  look  to  that 

Andar  k  ciegaa. 

To  grope  in  the  dark. 

Andar  &  gatas. 

To  creep  on  all  fours. 

A  todo  corrcr. 

With  all  speed. 

LESSON     LXI. 


331 


Vaya  V,  con  Dios. 

El  va  de  capa  caida. 

El  va  de  Zeca  en  Meca. 

Ir  de  puntillas. 

Andar  en  dares  y  tomares. 

Andarse  por  las  ramas. 

De  tejas  abajo. 

Asir  la  ocasion  por  los  cabellos. 

Bailar  al  son  que  se  toca. 

Beber  los  aires  or  los  vientos. 

Beber  como  una  cuba. 

BLmco  como  el  ampo  de  la  nieve. 

Bocado  sin  hueso. 

Burld  burlando. 

Buscar  cinco  pies  al  gato. 

No  caber  de  gozo. 

No  caber  en  si. 

No  cabe  en  el. 

Caor  de  su  asno. 

Caersele  a  uno  la  cara  de  vergUenza. 

Callar  el  pico. 

Chanzas  aparte. 

Con  mil  amores. 

Con  su  pan  se  lo  coma. 

Conque,  hasta  la  vista. 

Cosa  que  no  esta  en  la  cartilla. 

Dar  a  alguno  con  las  puertas  en  la  cara. 

Dar  a  luz. 

Dar  por  supuesto,  or  por  scntado. 

Dar  chasco. 

Dar  el  si. 

Dar  golpe  una  cosa. 

Dar  calabazas. 
No  se  le  da  nada. 


Go  in  peace. 

He  is  crest-fallen. 

He  goes  roving  about,  to  and  fro. 

To  go  on  tiptoe. 

To  quarrel. 

Not  to  come  to  the  point. 

Humanly  speaking. 

To  take  time  by  the  forelock. 

To  go  with  the  stream. 

To  desire  anxiously. 

To  drink  like  a  fish. 

White  as  the  driven  snow. 

An  employment  without  labor ;  a  sine- 
cure. 

Between  joke  and  earnest. 

To  pick  a  quarrel. 

To  be  overjoyed. 

To  be  bursting  with  pride. 

He  is  not  capable  of  such  a  thing. 

To  acknowledge  one's  fault. 

To  blush  with  shame. 

To  hold  one's  tongue. 

Jesting  aside. 

Most  willingly. 

That  is  his  own  business. 

I  hope  we  may  soon  meet  again. 

Something  out  of  the  common  way. 

To  shut  the  door  in  one's  face. 

To  pubUsh ;  to  give  birth  to. 

To  take  for  granted. 

To  disappoint. 

To  consent. 

To  strike  one  with  admiration,  or  as- 
tonishment (said  of  things). 

To  give  the  mitten. 

He  cares  nothing  about  it. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  ^Le  salen  a  Y.  las  cosas  k  medida  de  sus  deseos?  Chanzas  aparte, 
Don  Juan,  V.  sabe  bien  que  de  tejas  abajo  eso  nunca  sucede. 

2.  Si,  pero  como  V.  baila  al  son  que  se  toca  y  sabe  asir  la  ocasion  por 
/os  cabellos,  siempre  esta  a  sus  anchuras  y  tiene  siempre  algun  bocado 
sin  hueso. — Amigo,  caiga  V.  de  su  asno  y  confiese  de  buena  f6  que  si 


832  LESSON     LXl. 

anda  de  capa  caida,  es  porque  va  siempre  de  Zeca  en  Meca,  y  porque 
bebe  mas  que  una  cuba. 

3.  Adios,  Don  Pedro,  me  voy,  porque  no  quiero  buscar  cinco  pies  al 
gato. — Vaya  Y.  con  Dios,  Don  Juan. 

4.  Don  Pedro,  me  parece  que  V.  ha  dado  con  la  puerta  en  la  cara  d 
Don  Juan. — No,  seflor,  Don  Enrique,  4  otro  se  le  caeria  la  cara  de  ver- 
guenza,  pero  a  61  no  se  le  da  nada,  y  pronto  lo  volvera  V.  k  ver  por  aed. 

6.  Eut6nces  61  no  entiende  a  media  palabra. — A  mas  tardar  lo  vera 
V.  aqui  otra  vez  dentro  de  media  hora. 

6.  El  pobre  hombre  anda  k  ciegas,  y  si  no  abrc  el  ojo,  ira  a  parar  a 
un  hospital. — Con  su  pan  se  lo  coma,  y  alia  se  las  haya ;  yo  lo  siento  so- 
lamente  por  su  nifia,  que  es  una  sefiorita  perfecta. 

7.  Me  ban  dicho  que  Y.  queria  casarse  con  ella,  i  es  verdad,  Don  En- 
rique ? — Si,  sefior,  y  lo  hubiera  hecho  con  mil  amores,  porque  ademds  de 
ser  muy  araable  6  instruida,  es  muy  bonita,  tiene  ojos  negros  muy  her- 
mosos  y  es  tan  blanca  como  el  ampo  de  la  niev©. 

8.  Pues  gporqu6  no  se  cas6  Y.  con  ella?  Por  una  pequefia  difi- 
cultad. 

9.  Quizd  Y.  86  andaria  por  las  ramas  y  no  sabria  asir  la  ocasion  por 
los  cabellos. — No,  sefior,  nada  de  eso,  dntes  al  contrario  yo  lo  daba  todo 
por  supuesto,  porque  Y.  sabe  que  soy  rico,  y  crei  que  la  nifia  me  daria 
el  si  sin  hacerse  de  rogar. 

10.  ^Pues  qu6,  no  se  lo  di6  ?  No,  sefior,  no  me  di6  el  si,  pero  me  di6 
calabazas. 

11.  jMiren  la  rapazuela!  ^y  Y.  que  hizo?  Yo  que  bebia  los  vientos 
por  ella,  y  creia  que  sus  calabazas  eran  cosa  que  no  estaban  en  la  cartilla, 
recurri  a  su  padre,  creyendo  que  61  no  me  negaria  la  mano  de  su  hija. 

12.  ^Y  bien  y  qu6?  Que  me  llev6  un  solemne  chasco,  el  padre  me 
rehu86  la  mano  de  su  hija  ni  mas  ni  m6nos  que  ella  lo  habia  hecho. 

13.  J  Pero  qu6  razon  le  di6  a  Y.  para  ello?  Me  dijo  que  su  hija,  aun- 
que  pobre,  era  hija  de  un  caballero  y  que  ni  ella  querria  ni  61  la  obligaria 
jamas  a  casarse  con  un  especiero  comun  6  ignorante ;  que  el  dinero  era 
una  gran  cosa,  pero  que  no  lo  compraba  todo. 

14.  ^Y  Y.  qu6  dijo?  Yo,  por  no  andar  en  dares  y  tomares  y  dimes 
y  dir6tes,  me  call6  el  pico  y  sali  do  su  casa  d  todo  correr. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  "Would  you  not  bo  more  likely  to  obtain  what  you  wish,  if  you 
came  to  the  point  at  once  ?  Perhaps  I  would ;  but  the  matter  is  an  im- 
portant one,  and  I  considered  it  necessary  to  enter  into  some  explanation 
relative  to  it. 


LESSON     LXI.  333 

2.  Do  yon  tWnk  he  would  understand  me  ?  Of  course  he  would,  at 
the  slightest  hint. 

3.  How  did  your  cousin  Charles  succeed  in  that  affair  ?  Every  thing 
turned  out  according  to  his  wishes. 

4.  How  soon  do  you  suppose  this  book  will  he  published  ?  I  hope  it 
will  be  published  in  a  very  short  time ;  I  know  they  are  working  at  it 
with  all  possible  speed. 

5.  Have  you  ever  seen  a  more  active  man  than  that  merchant? 
ITever ;  and  I  have  never  seen  a  less  active  man  than  his  brother,  he 
always  goes  with  the  stream,  and  troubles  himself  about  nothing. 

6.  Ought  you  not  to  have  shown  that  letter  to  your  brother  ?  I 
would  have  done  so,  of  course,  but  I  took  for  granted  that  he  had  already 
heard  the  news. 

7.  You  had  better  tell  your  friend  to  be  upon  the  alert,  and  not  get 
into  a  quarrel  with  that  man.  That  is  his  own  business,  let  him  look  to 
it  himself. 

8.  Is  it  possible  that  he  could  be  capable  of  such  an  action?  Yes, 
but  the  worst  of  all  is,  that  he  is  not  ashamed  to  acknowledge  it  to  every 
one  he  meets. 

9.  When  is  Peter  to  be  married  ?  I  cannot  say  certainly ;  but  I 
suppose  in  about  a  month  at  latest. 

10.  I  don't  know  any  one  who  has  a  better  position  than  your  uncle  : 
plenty  of  money  and  scarcely  any  thing  to  do.  That  is  a  fact,  his  situ- 
ation is  a  real  sinecure. 

11.  What  has  occurred  to  that  gentleman  ?  he  looks  quite  crest-fallen. 
Bo  not  be  astonished  at  that ;  he  has  been  unfortunate  in  business,  and 
has  lost  almost  all  he  possessed  in  the  world. 

12.  Are  you  trying  to  pick  a  quarrel  with  me?  Ko,  I  assure  you, 
jesting  aside,  that  the  matter  stands  exactly  as  I  say. 

13.  How  was  he  received  by  the  lady's  father?  He  was  not  received 
at  all,  they  shut  the  door  in  his  face. 

14.  If  you  desire  so  anxiously  to  see  him,  why  do  you  not  go  to  his 
house  ?  I  cannot  make  up  my  mind  (decidirme)  to  do  that ;  you  know 
he  is  bursting  with  pride,  and  he  would  very  probably  refuse  to  receive  me. 

15.  Well,  I  hope  we  may  soon  meet  again;  present  my  respects  to 
your  family.  With  the  greatest  pleasure. — Please  not  to  forget  the  letter. 

16.  That  I  care  nothing  about ;  all  I  desire  to  know  is  whether  he  will 
be  here  in  time  or  not.     I  think  you  may  rely  on  his  being  punctual. 

17.  I  have  been  told  that  your  brother  was  about  to  be  married  to 
Miss  Ramirez ;  is  it  true  ?  I  really  cannot  say  how  the  matter  wiU  turn 
out ;  so  far  every  thing  seems  to  go  on  according  to  the  desire  of  both 
parties. 


334 


LESSON     LXII, 


LESSON    LXII, 


Aplicar. 

To  apply. 

Cebarse. 

To  feed,  to  gloat 

Echar  a  perder. 

To  spoil. 

Errar. 

To  err,  to  miss. 

Ocurrir. 

To  occur. 

Murmurar. 

To  murmur,  to  grumble. 

Madrugar. 

To  rise  early. 

Medir. 

To  measure. 

Montar. 

To  mount,  to  amount. 

Mudar. 

To  change,  to  move. 

Nacer. 

To  be  born,  to  spring  up,  to  pro- 
ceed. 

Sazonar. 

To  season,  to  ripen. 

Reunirse. 

To  unite,  to  collect  together,  to 
assemble. 

Modificar. 

To  modify. 

Desprevenido. 

Unawares,  unprepared. 

Intachable. 

Unimpeachable,  unquestionable- 

Maldito. 

Perverse,  confounded. 

Mayiiscula. 

Capital  (letter). 

Miniiscula. 

Small  (letter). 

Numeral. 

Numeral. 

Noble. 

Noble. 

Nominativo. 

Nominative. 

Neutro. 

Neuter. 

Masculino. 

Masculino. 

Objetivo. 

Objective. 

Quieto. 

Quiet,  at  rest. 

Cumpleafios. 

Birthday. 

Apariencia.           Appearance. 

Menoscabo. 

Detriment,  less- 

Bravata.               Bravado. 

ening. 

Botica.                  Drug  store. 

Pique. 

Point,  verge. 

Fiesta.                   Feast,  holiday. 

Rayo. 

Thunderbolt. 

Centella.               Spark,  flash. 

Socio. 

Associate,  partner. 

Siesta.                  Siesta  (afternoon 

Sabor. 

Taste,  savor. 

nap). 

Menudo, 

Change,  small 

Suerte.                  Luck,  fortune, 

change. 

chance. 

LESSON     LXII. 


335 


Meridiano. 

Meridian. 

Murmuracion. 

Murmurings. 

Metal. 

Metal. 

Malicia. 

Malice. 

Miembro. 

Member. 

Mente. 

Mind. 

Mineral. 

Mineral. 

Muestra. 

Sample,  sign. 

Momento. 

Moment. 

Manera. 

Manner. 

Mozo. 

Youth,  waiter. 

Manteca,  orman 

-  Butter. 

Macho. 

Male. 

tequilla. 

Maestro. 

Master,  teacher. 

Medida. 

Measure. 

Manuscrito. 

Manuscript. 

011a  podrida. 

Sort  of  mixed 

Mar. 

Sea. 

dish. 

Olor. 

Smell,  odor. 

Ostra. 

Oyster. 

Olivar. 

Olive  ground. 

Negacion. 

Negation. 

Ostion.    (See 

Oyster. 

Mar. 

Sea. 

Ostra.) 

Negativa. 

-N'egative. 

Palo. 

Wood,  stick. 

Nota. 

Note. 

Polvo. 

Dust,  powder. 

Zaga. 

Rear-guard. 

Pane. 

Cloth. 

Parabien. 

Felicitation,  con- 
gratulation. 

COMPO 

SITION. 

Debuenas  a  primeras. 

Without  ceremony. 

De  buena  fe. 

With  sincerity. 

De  mala  fe. 

Deceitfully. 

De  intento. 

On  purpose. 

De  oidas. 

By  hearsay. 

Decir  por  decir. 

To  talk  for  the  sake  of  talkmg. 

Dejar  k  uno  colgado. 

To  frustrate  one's 

hopes. 

Dejar  4  uno  en  la  calle. 

To  strip  one  of  his  all. 

Dejar  atras  los  vieutos. 

To  go  quicker  than  the  wind. 

Dejar  correr. 

To  go  with  the  world. 

Dejar  el  campo  libre. 

To  yield  to  one's 

competitors. 

Dejar  en  bianco. 

To  leave  blank. 

Dejarse  alguna  cosa  en  el  tintero. 

To  forget  to  say  something. 

Dia  de  eumpleano 

3. 

Birthday. 

Saber  algo  de  buena  tinta. 

To  know  any  thing  on  good  authority. 

De  dia  en  dia. 

From  day  to  day. 

De  un  dia  para  otro. 

From  one  day  to  another. 

De  hoy  en  ocho  dias. 

This  day  week. 

Un  dia  si  y  otro  no. 

Every  other  day. 

Hoy  dia. 

Now-a-days. 

Dicho  y  hecho. 

No  sooner  said  than  done.                    , 

336 


LESSON     LXII 


Dormir  4  pierna  suelta. 

Dormir  la  siesta. 

Echar  a  perder  algo. 

Echar  bravatas. 

Echar  rayos  y  centellas. 

Echar  la  culpa  a  alguno. 

Echar  suertes. 

Empeuarse  en  hacer  algo. 

Empenarse  por  alguno. 

En  un  abrir  y  cerrar  de  ojos. 

Encenderse  en  colera. 

Errar  el  tiro. 

Erre  que  eire. 

Escarmentar  en  cabeza  agena. 

Estar  a  pique  de  perderse. 

Estar  de  casa. 

Estar  de  fiesta. 

Estar  en  ascuas. 

Estar  en  lo  que  se  dice. 

Estar  k  sus  anchuras. 

Estar  sobre  si. 

Estar  desprevenido. 

Estar  mano  sobre  mano. 

i  Estus  en  tua  cinco  sentidos  ? 


To  sleep  at  one's  ease. 

To  take  an  afternoon  nap. 

To  spoil  any  thing. 

To  brag,  to  boast. 

To  be  furious,  enraged. 

To  throw  the  blame  on  any  one. 

To  cast  lots. 

To  insist  upon  doing  any  thing. 

To  interest  one's  self  for  any  one. 

In  the  twinkling  of  an  eye,  in  a  trice. 

To  fly  into  a  passion. 

To  miss  one's  aim. 

Obstinately. 

To  take  warning  by  others'  misfortunes. 

To  be  within  an  ace  of  being  lost. 

To  be  in  dishabille. 

To  be  merry. 

To  be  upon  thorns. 

To  comprehend  what  is  said. 

To  be  at  one's  easa 

To  be  on  one's  guard. 

To  be  oflf  one's  guard. 

To  be  idle. 

Are  you  in  your  senses  ? 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  Sefiores,  dcjen  Vds.  el  campo  libra,  que  aqiii  viene  Don  Pepito 
echando  bravatas  j  rayos  y  centellas. — Bien  venido,  Don  Pepito,  iqu6 
trae  V.  de  nuevo,  qne  parece  estar  fuera  de  si  ? 

2.  No,  sefior,  yo  estoy  en  mis  cinco  sentidos,  pero  hay  gentes  de  mala 
f6  que  hablan  por  hablar  y  se  ocnpan  <Je  criticar  al  pr6jinio. — ^  Y  eso  4 
qu6  viene? 

8.  Yo  no  lo  digo  por  V.,  Don  Enrique,  pero  V.  sabe  qne  hay  muchos 
desocupados  que  se  vienen  d  sii  botica  de  V.  y  critican  d  todo  el  mnndo. — 
I  Vamos,  vamos  1  Don  Pepito,  que  d  V.  tambien  le  gusta  un  poquito  la 
murmuracion. 

4.  Ciertamente,  porque  sino  i  qu6  seria  de  la  conversacion  sin  un  po- 
quito de  critica  que  la  sazono  y  le  d6  interns  ?  Muy  bien,  pero  ent6nces 
no  eche  V.  la  culpa  d  nadie  de  hacer  lo  mismo  que  V.  hace. 

5.  Si,  pero  yo  hablo  sin  nialicia,  de  buena  f6  y  digo  lo  que  me  ocurre 
por  decirlo,  nada  mas. — Asi  pueden  decir  los  demda. 

6.  Si,  pero  yo  no  soy  como  Don  Cdrlos,  que  viene  aqui  de  dia  en  dia, 


LESSON     LXII.  337 

y  de  la  inaflana  i  la  tarde  hablando  mas  que  un  sacamuelas  y  sin  dejar  a 
nadie  hueso  sano. — Si,  pues  apliquese  V.  el  cuento. 

7.  No,  sefior,  yo  no  soy  ni  tan  hablador  ni  tan  murmurador  como 
ninguno  de  los  que  se  reunen  aqui,  y  si  no,  observe  V.  un  poquito  a  cada 
uno  de  ellos,  D.  Gonzalo,  por  ejemplo,  ^ha  venido  hoy?  No,  senor,  no 
ha  venido,  ni  vendra,  porque  es  el  dia  de  su  cumpleafios  y  lo  celebra  con  su 
familia  en  el  campo,  por  consiguiente  puede  V.  cebarse  en  61  a  su  sabor. 

8.  D.  Gonzalo  es  hombre  de  buenos  sentimientos  y  hombre  honrado, 
no  haya  miedo  que  yo  diga  nada  en  menoscabo  suyo,  pero  tiene  un 
maldito  genio  que  le  hace  echar  a  perder  toda  conversacion. 

9.  Pues  yo  no  habia  observado  eso. — ;  06mo  hombre !  pues  si  viene 
aqui  un  dia  si  y  otro  no,  A  criticar  a  los  que  se  reunen  en  la  botica  de  la 
esquina,  y  los  dias  que  no  viene  aqui  va  a  la  botica  de  la  esquina  a  criti- 
carnos  a  nosotros. 

10.  ^  Y  que  es  lo  que  le  hace  echar  a  perder  las  conversaciones  como 
decia  V.  pocos  minutos  ha  ?  Que  en  un  abrir  y  cerrar  de  ojos  se  en- 
ciende  en  c61era. 

11.  Bien,  por  D.  Gonzalo,  ^y  nuestro  vecino,  D.  Alberto,  ese  si  que  es 
intachable,  no  le  parece  a  V.  ?  ;  Ho !  en  efecto  es  un  excelente  hombre, 
lastima  que  errase  el  tiro. 

12.  ^Que  quiere  V.  decir  con  eso  de  errar  el  tiro?  Hablo  con  respecto 
d  sus  negocios. 

13.  Y  bien,  i  qu6  le  sucedio  ?  Que  escogi6  malos  socios,  y  le  han  de- 
jado  en  la  calle. 

14.  Pero  eso  no  puede  ser,  Don  Alberto  goza  de  muy  buena  reputa- 
cion,  Y.  habla  de  oidas. — No,  senor,  que  lo  s6  de  buena  tinta,  y  hoy  dia 
esta  a  pique  de  perderse. 

15.  Pues  61  parece  dormir  i  pierna  suelta. — Esta  obligado  d  hacerlo  asi 
por  guardar  las  apariencias. 

16.  ^  No  se  ha  dejado  Y.  algo  en  el  tintero  ?  Sin  duda  que  me  he  de- 
jado,  pero  es  tarde  y  voy  a  dormir  la  siesta. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Is  the  custom  of  taking  an  afternoon  nap  as  common  in  Spain 
now-a-days  as  in  former  times  ?  It  is  quite  as  common  now-a-days  as  it 
ever  was,  not  only  in  Spain,  but  in  almost  every  country  of  Europe. 

2.  Are  you  perfectly  certain  that  he  acted  with  sincerity  in  that  mat- 
ter ?     I  am  quite  sure,  as  I  know  it  on  good  authority. 

8.  Who  told  you  that  young  man  had  acted  deceitfully  toward  your 
cousin?     I  do  not  care  to  say  much  in  the  matter,  especially  as  all  I 
know  respecting  it  I  only  know  by  hearsay. 
15 


338 


LESSON     LXIII, 


4.  Can  yon  tell  me  how  that  merchant's  enterprise  turned  out  ?  Very 
badly ;  for  shortly  after  he  had  engaged  in  it,  he  heard  of  his  brother's 
misfortune,  which  frustrated  all  his  hopes. 

5.  Did  Alexander  manage  to  pay  his  debts  after  all  ?  No,  he  did  not ; 
and  although  his  intentions  were  strictly  honorable,  his  creditors  {acree- 
dores)  would  wait  no  longer,  and  they  stripped  him  of  all  he  possessed  in 
the  world. 

6.  What  date  do  you  wish  me  to  put  here  ?  Just  leave  a  blank,  and 
Charles  will  put  in  the- date  before  he  sends  the  letter  off. 

Y.  When  do  you  think  they  will  be  able  to  give  me  some  of  the 
papers  ?    Probably  by  this  day  week. 

8.  What  did  he  say  when  he  saw  how  the  tailor  had  spoiled  his  coat  ? 
Fortunately  for  the  latter  he  was  in  a  merry  mood,  and  did  not  fly  into  a 
passion  as  he  usually  does  when  any  tiling  occurs  to  displease  him.    . 

9.  Are  you  in  your  senses,  my  dear  friend  ?  are  you  not  aware  that 
such  a  thing  is  impossible  ? 

10.  Did  he  shut  the  door  on  purpose  ?  Yes,  but  he  sent  his  servant  to 
take  us  into  another  room,  for  he  was  in  dishabille,  and  did  not  wish  to 
be  seen  until  he  had  dressed. 

11.  How  often  do  you  go  to  dine  at  your  nncle's?  I  generally  go 
every  other  day. 

12.  Have  your  friends  returned  yet  from  the  country  ?  No,  they  have 
been  putting  it  off*  from  day  to  day  for  some  time,  and  I  shall  not  be  in 
the  least  astonished  if  they  do  not  return  before  November. 

13.  Why  did  you  not  bring  your  sister  with  you  ?  I  did  all  I  possibly 
could  to  persuade  her  to  come,  but  she  insisted  upon  staying  at  home. 

14.  How  did  they  decide  on  who  should  go  first  ?   They  cast  lots  for  it 


LESSON    LXIII. 


Retirar. 

To  retire,  to  withdraw. 

Pegar. 

To  stick,  to  adhere,  to  beat. 

Pescar. 

To  fish. 

Posponer. 

To  place  after. 

Preceder. 

To  precede. 

Prometer. 

To  promise. 

Razonar. 

To  reason. 

Eesfriarse, 

To  take  cold. 

Eegalar, 

To  regale,  to  present. 

»Posi 

yoner. 

LESSON     LXIII 


339 


-[ 


En  frente. 
Frente  por  frente 
De  hito  en  hito. 
De  grado. 
Por  fas  6  por  nefas, 


In  front,  opposite. 

Fixedly,  with  open  eyes. 
By  fair  means. 
Justly  or  unjustly. 


1  Oascaras  I 

Dear  me!  Oh! 

Afortunado. 

Fortunate. 

Ageno. 

Foreign,  belonging  to  others. 

Formal. 

Formal,  steady,  respectable. 

Pasivo. 

Passive. 

Perezoso. 

Lazy. 

Personal 

Personal. 

Posesivo. 

Possessive. 

Potencial. 

Potential. 

Precise. 

Precise,  necessary,  obligatory. 

Preliminar. 

Preliminary. 

Pret6rito. 

Preterit. 

Puntual. 

Punctual. 

Partitivo. 

Partitive. 

Eadical, 

Radical. 

Raro. 

Rare,  curious. 

Reciproco. 

Reciprocal. 

Reflexivo. 

Reflective. 

Rubio. 

Fair  (of  the  hair  and  complexion). 

Ruin. 

Mean. 

Alarde. 

Bulto. 

Ganso. 

Bledo. 

Diente. 

Desafio. 

Espadachin. 

Estribo. 

Mequetrefe. 

Pasaje. 

Pedazo. 

Perro. 

Plazo. 

Plomo 


Boast. 

Bulk,  bundle. 
Goose. 
Straw. 
Tooth. 

Challenge,,  duel. 
Bully. 
Stirrup. 
Trifling  fellow, 
meddler. 


Piece. 
Bog. 
Term. 
Lead. 


Bulla. 
Baza. 

Hu^speda. 

Puntuacion. 

Puntualidad. 

Paciencia. 

Paja. 

Polvora. 

Perseverancia. 

Porcion. 

Prenda. 

Pronunciacion. 


Koise,  uproar. 

Trick   (card-play- 
ing). 

Hostess. 

Punctuation. 

Punctuality. 

Patience. 

Straw. 

GunpoM^der. 

Perseverance. 

Portion,  number. 

Good     quality, 
jewel. 

Pronunciation. 


340 


LESSON     LXIII. 


Porqu6. 

Reason  why. 

Propiedad. 

Propriety,    prop- 

Ptiblico. 

Public. 

erty. 

Principio. 

Principle,  begin- 

Pulgada. 

Inch. 

ning. 

Raiz. 

Root. 

Kasgo. 

Trait. 

Rebanada. 

Slice. 

Recado. 

Message,  errand. 

Reforma. 

Reform,  reforma- 

Recibo. 

Receipt. 

tion. 

Rector. 

Rector,  director. 

Regla. 

Rule. 

ftefran. 

Proverb. 

Reina. 

Queen. 

Reldmpago. 

Flash  of  light- 

Repeticion. 

Repetition,     re- 

ning. 

hearsal. 

Relojero. 

Watchmaker. 

Resolucion. 

Resolution. 

Regalo. 

Present. 

Rosa. 

Rose. 

Reposo. 

Rest,  repose. 

Rutina. 

Routine. 

Resfriado. 

Cold. 

Suma. 

Sum. 

ReumAtismo. 

Rheumatism. 

Sutileza. 

Subtilty,  fineness. 

Rev^s. 

Wrong  side,  back. 

Salida. 

Departure. 

Rincon. 

Corner. 

Silaba. 

SyUable. 

Ruisefior. 

Nightingale. 

Soledad. 

Solitude. 

Sustancia. 

Substance. 

Subida. 

Rising     ground, 
going  up. 

Suegra. 

Mother-in-law. 

COMPO 

SITION. 

Faltar  4  su  palabra. 
Guardarse  de  alguna  cosa. 

Hablar  k  bulto. 

Hablar  k  tontas  y  k  locaa. 

Hablar  al  aire. 

Hablar  al  oido. 

Hablar  al  alma. 

Hablar  entre  dientes. 

Hablar  por  boca  de  ganso. 

Hacer  k  uno  perder  los  estribos. 

Hacer  de  las  suyas. 

Hacer  alarde  de. 

Hacer  la  cuenta  sin  la  hu6speda. 

Hacer  caso  de. 

Haberla  {or  hab^rselas)  con  alguno. 

Irse  de  la  memoria. 

Irselc  k  uno  la  cabeza. 


To  break  one's  word. 

To  take  care  not  to  do  a  thing  (not  to 

attempt  to  do  a  thing). 
To  speak  at  random. 
To  speak  without  rhyme  or  reason 
To  talk  vaguely. 
To  whisper  into  one's  ear. 
To  speak  one's  mind. 
To  mutter. 

To  echo  what  another  has  said. 
To  make  one  lose  his  temper. 
To  show  off  one's  tricks. 
To  boast  of. 

To  reckon  without  the  host 
To  pay  attention  (or  respect)  to. 
To  dispute  (or  contend)  with  any  ona 
To  escape  one's  memory. 
To  lose  one's  reason. 


LESSON     LXIII, 


341 


Van  cien  duros  4  que  es  cierto. 

Llevar  a  mal. 

Mai  de  su  grado. 

Mal  que  le  pese. 

Manos  a  la  obra. 

Meter  bulla. 

Meterse  a  caballero. 

Meterse  a  sabio. 

Meterse  con  alguno. 

Meterse  en  camisa  de  once  varas. 

Meterse  en  todo. 

Meterse  en  vidas  agenas. 

Mirar  de  hito  en  hito. 

Mostrar  las  suelas  de  los  zapatos. 

Nacer  de  pies. 

Nada  se  me  da  de  ello. 

No  dejar  meter  baza. 

No  cabe  mas. 

No  estar  para  fiestas. 

No  le  pesa  de  haber  nacido. 

No  se  me  da  un  bledo. 

No  tener  arte  ni  parte  en  alguna  cosa. 

Perder  cuidado. 

For  ce  6  por  be. 

Por  fas  6  nefas. 

No  Uegard  la  sangre  al  rio. 


I  wager  a  hundred  dollars  that  it  is  true. 

To  take  any  thing  amiss. 

Unwillingly. 

In  spite  of  him. 

To  set  about  a  work. 

To  make  a  noise,  a  bustle. 

To  assume  the  gentleman. 

To  affect  learning  and  knowledge. 

To  pick  a  quarrel  with  any  one. 

To  interfere  in  other  people's  business. 

To  meddle  in  every  thing. 

To  dive  into  other  people's  affairs. 

To  look  steadfastly  at. 

To  take  to  one's  heels. 

To  be  bom  to  good  luck. 

I  care  nothing  about  it. 

Not  to  allow  one  to  slip  in  a  word. 

Nothing  more  can  be  desired. 

To  be  out  of  temper. 

He  has  no  mean  opinion  of  himself 

I  do  not  care  a  straw. 

To  have  no  hand  in  any  thing. 

Not  to  fear,  to  make  one's  self  easy. 

Some  way  or  other. 

Right  or  wrong. 

There  is  nothine;  to  be  feared. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  D.  Pepito  ha  faltado  a  su  palabra,  6  i  cree  Y.  qu6  vendra  todavia? 
I  Que  ha  de  venir !     Si  61  habla  siempre  a  tontas  j  a  locas. 

2.  Pues  yo  crei  que  prometid  formalmente  venir  hoy. — Don  Pepito 
no  habla  nunca  formalmente. 

3.  iDe  qu6  manera  habla  ent6nces?  De  muchas,  61  habla  al  aire, 
4  bulto,  al  oido,  entre  dientes,  por  boca  de  ganso;  pero  nunca  habla 
al  alma. 

4.  Eeto  hara  perder  d  cualquiera  los  estribos. — A  esto  le  Uama  61,  ha- 
clendo  alarde,  hacer  de  las  suyas. 

5.  Si ;  pero  61  se  las  habra  conmigo,  porque  ha  hecho  la  cuenta  sin 
la  liu6speda. — D.  Luis,  no  haga  V.  caso,  es  un  mequetrefe,  si  Vds.  quieren 
yo  ir6  a  su  casa  y  le  har6  venir  mal  de  su  grado,  6  mejor  dicho,  mal  que 
le  pese. 

6.  No,  sefior,  no  vaya  Y.,  es  un  horabre  que  se  mete  en  todo. — Y  en 
eso  tiene  Y.  razon,  porque  61  se  mete  con  todo  el  mundo. 


842  LESSON     LXIII. 

7.  T  hasta  se  mete  d  sabio  y  a  caballero.  —  Lo  pcor  es  que  mete 
mucha  bulla. 

8.  jVaraos,  sefiores,  en  qu6  mas  se  mete  el  pobre  D.  Pepito?  Se 
mete  en  camisa  de  once  varas,  en  vidas  agenas,  etc.,  etc. 

9.  Pero,  sefiores,  no  olviden  Vds.  que  si  por  ce  6  por  be,  lo  llegase  & 
saber,  D.  Pepito,  y  por  fas  6  por  nefas  hubiese  un  desaf  io,  no  lo  olviden 
Vds.,  vuelvo  a  repetir  que  Don  Pepito  es  un  gran  espadachin.  j  Yaja! 
pierda  V.  cuidado,  que  no  llegara  la  sangre  al  rio. 

10.  I  Don  Pepito  espadachin  I  Cascaras! — Van  cien  pesos  i  que  si  le 
miro  de  hito  en  liito,  muestra  las  suelas  de  los  zapatos. 

11.  V.  no  debe  llevarlo  d  mal,  aunque  Don  Pepito  sea  tan  su  amigo; 
pero  es  muy  hablador  y  no  deja  d  nadie  meter  baza. — Yo  no  teogo  arte 
ni  parte  en  ello  y  no  se  me  da  un  bledo. 

12.  ^Se  acordd  V.  de  decir  aquello  i  su  vecino  el  Sr.  Foster?  Ko,  se- 
Cor,  se  me  fue  de  la  memoria. 

13.  ^  Es  un  j6ven  muy  afortunado  ?  Si,  sefior,  ha  nacido  de  pi6s ;  pero 
s6  que  no  le  pesa  de  haber  nacido. 

14.  V.  no  debe  criticarlo,  porque  ahora  no  esta  para  fiestas. — A  mi  no 
se  me  da  un  bledo  de  que  est6  6  no  de  mal  humor. 

15.  Hable  V.  bajo  6  hdbleme  V.  al  oido,  porque  veo  al  Sefior  Foster 
alii  en  frente  y  V.  debe  guardarse  de  que  le  oiga  hablar  de  ese  modo, 
porque  lo  llevaria  d  mal. — Pierda  Y.  cuidado  que  no  llegara  la  sangre  al 
rio. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Does  that  man  always  keep  his  word  ?  I  have  never  known  him 
to  break  his  word  on  a  single  occasion. 

2.  Peter  is  very  sorry  that  Alexander  went  away  without  him,  and 
I  do  not  know  what  he  would  have  done  if  John  had  left  him. 

3.  John  took  good  care  not  to  start  at  the  same  time  as  his  elder 
brother,  for  he  well  knew  that  he  would  have  been  obliged  to  show  him 
every  thing  worth  seeing  in  the  city. 

4.  He  very  often  talks  for  hours  together  without  rhyme  or  reason, 
to  the  very  great  annoyance  of  those  who  have  to  listen  to  him. 

5.  BeUeve  me,  it  is  no  proof  of  talent  to  talk  away  at  random  for  an 
hour  at  a  time,  without  saying  any  thing  that  could  be  called  either  new 
or  agreeable. 

6.  I  cannot  support  a  man  who  is  so  ignorant  as  to  come  and  whisper 
something  in  my  ear  while  I  am  engaged  in  conversation  with  another. 

7.  iSTot  one  of  those  ideas  is  his  own,  he  only  echoes  what  he  has 
heard  said  by  others. 

8.  I  would  advise  you  to  pay  no  attention  to  any  thing  ho  tells  yon. 


LESSON     LXIV. 


343 


9.  Judging  by  his  manner  of  speaking,  one  would  say  he  had  lost  his 
reason. 

10.  I  will  wager  fifty  dollars  that  not  one  word  of  all  you  have  read 
and  heard  on  that  score  {solve  esa  materia)  is  true. 

11.  I  suppose  you  have  already  heard  of  my  good  fortune?  I  V'ave; 
and  I  need  not  tell  you  how  glad  I  was  to  know  you  had  succeed(  ^. 

12.  Did  you  hear  all  the  president  said  ?  Every  thing ;  he  spoke  very 
loud,  so  that  all  those  that  were  present  might  not  lose  a  word. 

13.  Although  he  affects  great  learning  and  knowledge,  I  have  had  oc- 
casion to  find  out  (discover)  that  he  is  a  very  ignorant  man. 

14.  I  know  very  well  that  he  has  no  mean  opinion  of  himself;  but, 
after  all,  his  greatest  fault  is  to  dive  a  little  too  much  into  other  people's 
affairs. 


LESSON    LXIV 


Alumbrar. 

Soltar. 

iSuponer. 

Situar. 

Significar. 

Saludar. 

Sobrar. 

Sonreirse. 

Soplar. 

Sonrojarse. 

Sufrir. 

Suplicar. 

Suspirar. 

Rasgar. 

JRebajar. 

Rebanar. 

Recitar. 

Recomendar. 

Referir. 

Regular. 

Remendar, 

Remediar. 


To  light. 

To  loose,  to  let  go. 

To  suppose. 

To  situate. 

To  signify. 

To  salute,  to  bow  to. 

To  remain  over,  to  be  too  much, 

too  many. 
To  smile. 

To  blow,  to  prompt. 
To  blush. 
To  suffer,  to  bear. 
To  supplicate,  to  beseech. 
To  sigh,  to  long  after. 
To  tear. 
To  lower. 
To  cut  in  slices. 
To  recite. 
To  recommend. 
To  refer,  to  tell,  to  relate. 
To  regulate. 
To  mend. 
To  remedy,  to  help. 


S44 


LESSON     LXIV 


Kepasar. 
Representor, 
Kesolver. 
Zafar. 


To  look  over  (a  lesson,  &c.). 
To  represent,  to  lay  before. 
To  resolve. 
To  disembarrass. 


fi'gorra. 

Sponging,  at  the  expense  of  others. 

Deperilla. 

To  the  purpose,  at  the  proper 

time. 

Oascos  i  la  gineta. 

On  one's  high  horse. 

A  raya. 

Within  bounds,  at  bay. 

A  solas. 

All  alone. 

Siquiera. 

Even,  only. 

En  suina. 

In  a  word,  in 

fine. 

Santo. 

Holy,  saintly. 

Sutil. 

Subtil,  fine. 

Silencioso. 

Silent. 

Sordo. 

Deaf. 

Sustantivo. 

Substantive. 

Sucio. 

Dirty,  filthy. 

Atrevimiento. 

Assurance,  dar- 

Blanca. 

Mite. 

ing. 

Bula. 

BuU  (of  the  Pope). 

Caerpo. 

Body. 

Flaqueza. 

Weakness. 

Inconveniente. 

Objection. 

Gorra. 

Cap,  lady's  bon- 

Esfuerzo. 

Effort,  endeavor. 

net. 

Descaro. 

Barefacedness. 

Calzas(/cwi.^Z.) 

.  Breeches. 

Fondos  (pL). 

Funds. 

Pieza. 

Piece. 

Matrimonio. 

Matrimony. 

Trastienda. 

Back  shop. 

Modismo. 

Idiom. 

Tienda. 

Store,  shop. 

Prove  cho. 

Profit,  benefit. 

Tigeras. 

Scissors. 

Yugo. 

Yoke. 

Tai-jeta. 

Card  (visiting  or 

Trapo. 

Rag. 

business). 

Saber. 

Learning,  knowl- 

Traza. 

Mien,  appearance. 

edge. 

Trampa. 

Trap,  cheat. 

Sacacorchos. 

Corkscrew. 

Traduccion. 

Translation. 

Saldo. 

Balance. 

• 

Salto. 

Leap,  jump. 

COMPO 

SITION. 

Quedarse  en  bianco. 

Quedarse  heebo  una  pieza  [or  helado). 


To  be  left  in  the  lurch. 
To    be   thunderstruck,  to   remain  aa- 
tonished. 


LESSON     LXIV. 


345 


Querer  decir. 

Sacar  fuerzas  de  flaqueza.  * 

Sacar  provecho. 

Sacudir  el  yugo. 

Salir  a  luz. 

Salir  con  algo. 

Salir  los  colores  k  la  cara. 

Saiga  lo  que  saliere. 

Salirse  con  la  suya. 

Santo  y  bueno. 

Sin  mas  aca  ni  mas  all4. 

Sin  qu6  ni  para  qu6. 

En  nombrando  al  ruin  de  Roma  luego 

asoma. 
Sobre  la  marcha. 

Tan  claro  como  el  sol  [cr  como  el  agua). 
Tener  k  m^nos  hablar  a  uno. 
Tener  k  uno  a  raya. 
Tener  algo  en  la  punta  de  la  lengua. 

Tener  buen  diente. 
Tener  bula  para  todo. 

Tener  el  pie  en  dos  zapatos. 
Tener  los  cascos  a  la  gineta. 

Tener  su  alma  en  su  cuerpo. 
Tomar  el  cielo  con  las  manos. 

Tomar  la  ocasion  por  los  cabellos. 

Tomar  las  (calzas)  de  Villadiego. 

Vamos  claros. 

Venir  a  m6nos. 

Venir  al  caso. 

Venir  con  las  manos  lavadas. 

Venir  de  perilla. 

Venir  una  cosa  pintada. 

Verse  negro. 

Vestirse  con  veinte  y  cinco  alfileres. 

Dicho  y  hecho. 


To  mean. 

To  make  a  virtue  of  a  necessity. 

To  turn  to  account. 

To  shake  oflf  the  yoke. 

To  be  produced,  to  be  published. 

To  gain  one's  end. 

To  blush. 

Come  what  may. 

To  have  one's  own  way,  to  accomplish 
an  object. 

Well  and  good. 

Without  ifs  and  ands. 

Without  rhyme  or  reason. 

Speak  of  the  devil,  and  his  imps  ap- 
pear. 

Off-hand  (instantly). 

As  clear  as  daylight. 

Not  to  deign  to  speak  to  one. 

To  keep  one  at  bay. 

To  have  any  thing  on  the  tip  of  one's 
tongue. 

To  have  a  good  appetite. 

To  have  permission   to  do  what  one 
likes. 

To  have  two  strings  to  one's  bow. 

To  be  hare-brained,  to  have  little  judg- 
ment. 

To  do  what  one  thinks  proper. 

To  be  transported  with  rapture,  to  be 
enraged. 

To  profit  by  the  occasion. 

To  take  to  one's  heels. 

Let  us  understand  one  another. 

To  decline  in  any  way. 

To  come  to  the  point. 

To  wish  to  enjoy  the  fruit  of  another's 
labor. 

To  come  at  the  nick  of  time,  or  to  fit 
exactly. 

A  thing  to  suit  (or  fit)  exactly. 

To  be  afflicted,  embarrassed. 

To  be  dressed  in  style,  to  be  decked 

out. 
No  sooner  said  than  doce. 
Hacer  de  la  necesidad  virtud. 


346  LESSON     LXIV. 


Vivir  de  gorra. 

Vivir  k  8U8  anchas  (anchuras). 

Zifarse  de  alguna  cosa. 


To  live  at  another's  expense. 

To  live  at  one's  ease. 

To  get  clear  (or  rid  of)  any  thing. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  iQu6  qm'ere  decir  quedarse  en  bianco?  Quiere  decir  lo  mismo 
que  quedarse  A  la  luna  de  Valencia,  esto  es,  quedarse  sin  nada. 

2.  ^  Y  quedarse  hecbo  una  pieza  6  belado,  qu6  quiere  decir  ?  Son 
modismos  que  indican  admiracion  6  sorpresa. 

3.  I  Quiere  V.  explicarme  algunos  modismos  espafioles  ?  No  tengo 
inconveniente,  pregtinteme  V.  el  significado  de  los  que  no  comprenda  V. 
— Muy  bien. 

4.  Sacar  fuerzas  de  flaqueza,  i  qu6  quiere  decir  ?  Yo  creo  que  es  hacer 
esfuerzos ;  pero  tambien  significa,  hacer  de  la  necesidad  virtud. 

5.  Sacar  provecbo,  creo  que  no  necesita  explicacion  j  si  la  ocasion  sc 
presenta,  creo  que  sabr6  sacarlo. — i  Y  qu6  me  dice  V.  acerca  de  sacudir  el 
yugo  ?  Que  aquellos  que  tengan  algun  raal  yugo  que  sacudir  deben  na- 
cerlo  sobre  la  marcba. 

6.  Santo  y  bueno,  pero  V.,  i  no  tiene  ningun  yugo  que  sacudir  ?  No, 
^eflor,  es  verdad  que  estoy  bajo  el  yugo  del  raatrimonio ;  pero  no  deseo 
zafarme  de  61,  porque  para  mi  aunque  es  yugo,  es  un  yngo  santo  que  me 
ha  hecbo  muy  feliz  y  bajo  el  cual  deseo  vivir  todavia  muchos  alios. 

7.  J  No  le  parece  &  V.  que  aquel  horabre  vive  de  gorra  ?  Si,  sefior, 
aqui  se  venia  todos  los  dias  con  sus  manos  lavadas  y  se  nos  comia  un  codo. 

8.  ^  Y  porqu6  no  lo  ecb6  V.  de  su  casa  ?  j  Asi  lo  bice  ayer,  y  si  V.  lo 
bubiera  visto!  parecia  querer  tomar  el  cielo  con  las  manos ! 

9.  I  Vaya  un  atrevimiento  I  Al  fin  me  vi  obligado  d  amenazarle  con 
una  silla,  y  ent6nces  tom6  las  de  Villadiego. 

10.  Creo  que  dntes  era  rico,  pero  ahora  ha  venido  d  m^nos. — No,  lo  que 
ea  tener,  todavia  tiene. 

11.  No  hombre,  si  no  tiene  sobre  qu6  caerse  muerto. — Perdone  V.,  si 
V.  quiere  que,  para  practicar  en  los  modismos  del  verbo  tener,  le  diga  a 
V.  lo  que  ese  buen  sefior  tiene,  se  lo  dir6  d  V. 

12.  Santo  y  bueno. — Pues  ent6nces  alld  va  sin  qu6  ni  para  qu6. 

13.  Pero  hombre,  gpara  qu6  sacar  d  la  colada  los  trapos  de  ese  buen 
hombre  ?     Si  eso  es  tan  claro  como  el  sol  que  nos  alumbra. 

14.  Vamos  claros,  i  quiere  V.  6  no  que  le  diga  lo  que  ese  sefior,  que 
se  viste  con  veinto  y  cinco  alfilerea,  tiene  ?    Pero  si  no  viene  nl  cnso. 

15.  Entonces  se  acabard  el  ejercicio  sin  poder  introducir  en  la  prdctica 
la  mitad  de  los  modismos  que  tenemos  en  la  leccion. — j  Ah  !  si,  si,  tiene 
V.  mil  razones,  escucho,  i  qu6  cs  lo  quo  esc  buen  sefior  tiene  ? 


LESSON     LXIY.  347 

16.  En  primer  liigar  tiene  buen  apetito  y  buen  diente. — jCaspital  qu6 
si  lo  tiene  I  IJ  ^  quien  se  lo  cuenta  V.  ? 

17.  Tiene  siempre  algo  en  la  punta  de  la  lengua  y  nunca  tiene  nada  en 
el  bolsillo. 

18.  Y  segun  el  descaro  con  que  obra,  parece  tener  bula  para  todo; 
tambien  tiene  los  cascos  a  la  gineta  y  con  tanto  tener  creo  que  es  mas  lo 
que  le  falta  que  lo  que  tiene. 

1 9.  Yo  no  s6  c6mo  tenerlo  a  raya,  i  no  me  hara  V.  el  favor  de  aconse- 
jarle  que  no  venga  mas  por  aqui  ?  Amigo  mio,  digaselo  V.  mismo,  por- 
que  yo  tengo  a  m6nos  hablar  a  una  persona  de  su  especie. 

20.  Y  sin  embargo,  vea  V.,  61  tiene  el  pi6  en  dos  zapatos,  i  y  que  mas 
tiene  ? 

21.  D6jeme  Y.  pensar,  j  ab !  si,  el  pobre  sefior  tiene  todavia  otra  cosa 
mas. — Bien,  pues,  digala  V.,  que  se  acaba  el  ejercicio. 

22.  Tiene  su  alma  en  su  cuerpo.  Hombre,  calle  Y.,  que  aqui  viene 
^1  en  persona. — Si,  en  nombrando  al  ruin  de  Eoma,  luego  asoma. 

23.  Buenos  dias,  D.  Juan. — T^ngalos  Y.  muy  buenos,  D.  Periquito, 
I  qu6  se  ofrece  ?  Yengo  a  pedirle  a  Y.  diez  pesos  prestados,  que  me  ven- 
drian  de  perilla,  j  porque  me  veo  negro ! 

24.  Hombre  pidaselos  Y.  al  Sr.  De  Y.  que  estd  en  fondos,  en  cuanto  a 
mi  me  encuentro  sin  blanca. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  I  understand  your  brother  was  left  entirely  in  the  lurch  ?  Not  at 
•All ;  on  the  contrary,  he  came  off  (turned  out)  much  better  than  I  did. 

2.  How  did  he  feel  when  he  learned  that  I  had  heard  of  the  whole 
matter  ?     He  was  thunderstruck,  and  could  not  give  me  any  reply. 

3.  How  are  you  going  to  manage  in  such  a  case  as  that  ?  I  have  only 
to  make  a  virtue  of  necessity. 

4.  I  think  there  is  little  danger  of  his  not  succeeding ;  what  do  you 
think  (what  appears  to  you)  ?  Not  the  least ;  he  is  very  prudent,  and 
knows  how  to  turn  every  thing  to  account. 

5.  Do  you  remember  when  that  article  was  published  ?  I  do  not  re- 
member exactly ;  but  it  appears  to  me  it  must  have  been  some  time  in 
last  November. 

6.  You  see  that  is  what  I  told  you  the  other  day  would  take  place. 
Yes,  that  is  true ;  but  you  seem  to  have  forgotten  the  condition  I  men- 
tioned to  your  friend  as  he  was  going  out. 

7.  Is  Mr.  Martinez  not  going  to  be  here,  as  he  promised  ?  I  am  ex- 
pecting him. — We  shall  wait  until  seven  o'clock ;  if  he  comes  before  that 
time,  well  and  good ;  if  not,  we  shall  go  on  with  the  business  of  the 
evening  without  him. 


348 


LESSON     LXV, 


8.  Well,  let  ns  tmderstand  each  otlier  before  going  any  farther.  It 
seems  to  me  we  understand  each  other  perfectly ;  the  thing  is  as  clear  as 
daylight. 

9.  Oh,  Charles  I  I  am  so  glad  to  see  you !  you  have  just  come  at  the 
nick  of  time ;  we  shall  have  the  pleasure  of  your  company  at  dinner. 
You  are  very  kind ;  but  really  you  must  excuse  me ;  I  have  a  friend 
waiting  for  me. 

10.  You  lost  your  coat  ?  how  did  you  come  home  in  the  cold  without 
it  ?    Alexander  lent  me  one  of  his  that  fitted  me  exactly. 

11.  No  sooner  said  than  done ;  he  took  his  hat  and  went  out  in  search 
\>f  him,  notwithstanding  it  rained  in  torrents. 

12.  You  may  be  at  ease  in  your  mind  on  that  score ;  I  shall  manage  to 
get  rid  of  him  very  soon. 

13.  I  wish  you  would  come  to  the  point,  for  up  to  the  present  I  have 
been  unable  to  find  out  what  you  mean. 

14.  One  would  have  said,  from  the  manner  in  which  he  was  (viendolo) 
decked  out,  that  he  was  going  to  the  theatre  or  to  a  ball  instead  of  to 
the  office. 


LESSON    LXV. 


Aventurarse. 

Apretar, 

Cobrar. 

Desafiar. 

Escaldar. 

Enhebrar. 

Enzarzar. 

Enfadarse. 

Hilar. 

Juntar. 

Madrugar. 

Prevenir. 

Relucir. 

Sustentar. 

Trasquilar. 

Tapar. 

Trampear. 

Tragar. 


To  venture. 

To  tighten,  to  urge. 

To  collect. 

To  challenge. 

To  scald. 

To  thread  (a  needle),  to  link. 

To  sow  discord. 

To  get  angry. 

To  spin. 

To  join. 

To  rise  early. 

To  warn,  to  infonu. 

To  shine. 

To  sustain. 

To  shear. 

To  cover  up,  to  close  up. 

To  impose  upon,  to  deceive. 

To  swallow. 


LESSON     LXV. 


349 


Trasnochar. 

To  sit  up  all  night. 

Terminar. 

To  terminate. 

Tolerar. 

To  tolerate. 

Tornar. 

To  return,  to  do  over  again. 

Tranquilizar 

• 

To  tranquillize,  to  make  any  one's 
mind  easy. 

Tutear. 

To  address  any  one  in  the  second 
person  singular,  to  speak  fa- 
miliarly to. 

Expresivo. 

Expressive. 

Justo. 

Just. 

Duro. 

Hard. 

Necio. 

Silly,  foolish. 

Practico. 

Practised,  experienced. 

Ciego. 

Blind. 

Tuerto. 

Blind  of  one  eye. 

Trigueflo. 

Dark  (of  the  complexion). 

Tin  to. 

Colored,  red. 

Tonto. 

Foolish. 

Tramposo. 

Deceitful,  swindling. 

Terminante. 

Decided. 

Tranquilo. 

Tranquil,  quiet. 

A  borbotones. 

Bubbling,  hurriedly,  confusedly. 

Palabras  mayores. 

Offensive  words  or  expressions. 

No  ser  rana 

To  be  able  and  expert. 

J  Caramba ! 

Dear  me  ;  Hah ! 

Asador. 

Spit  (for  roasting). 

Cola.                    Tail. 

Copo. 

Flake  (of  snow). 

Danza.                  Dance. 

Entendedor. 

One  who  under- 

Divisa.                 Motto. 

stands. 

Familiaridad.        Familiarity. 

Herrero. 

Blacksmith. 

Miel.                     Honey. 

Menosprecio. 

Scorn,  contempt. 

Mona.                    Monkey. 

Hortelano. 

Gardener. 

Fama.                   Fame,  notoriety. 

Dado. 

Dye. 

Moderacion.          Moderation. 

Proverbio. 

Proverb. 

Oveja.                   Sheep. 

Sayo. 

Sort  of  loose  coat 

Kecesidad.            Necessity. 

or  jacket. 

Pareja.                  Pair. 

Pecbo. 

Breast. 

Rana.                    Frog. 

350 


LESSON     LXV. 


Raton. 

Mouse. 

Yiga. 

Beam. 

Tio. 

Uncle. 

Tenacidad. 

Tenacity. 

Bebedor. 

Toper,  tippler. 

Tos. 

Cough. 

(All  these  are  masculine.) 

Soliloquio. 

Soliloquy. 

Tirabuzon. 

Corkscrew. 

Suegro. 

Father-in-law. 

Trineo. 

Sleigli. 

Sugeto. 

Person,    indi- 

Tacto. 

Touch. 

vidual. 

Talento. 

Talent. 

Sobrino. 

Nephew. 

Tel6grafo. 

Telegraph. 

Sin6nimo. 

Synonjme. 

Tenedor. 

Fork. 

Silencio. 

Silence. 

T6rraino. 

Term. 

Sentido. 

Sense. 

Trigo. 

Wheat. 

Semblante. 

Countenance, 

Term6metro. 

Thermometer. 

looks. 

Torno. 

Lathe. 

Secreto. 

Secret. 

Toque. 

Touch,  ringing 

Trato. 

Intercourse, 

(of  bells). 

treatment. 

Titulo. 

Title. 

Trav6s. 

Breadth  (of  a 
thing). 

COMPOJ 

Trago. 
3ITI0N. 

Draught,  drink. 

A  buena  gana  no  hay  pan  dure. 

A  Id  hecho  pecho. 

A  quien  se  hace  do  miel  las  moscas  se 

lo  comen. 
A  quien  madruga  Dies  le  ayuda. 
Al  buen  entendedor  con  media  palabra 

basta. 
Al  fin  se  eanta  la  gloria. 
Antes  que  te  cases  mira  lo  que  haces. 
Antes  cabeza  de  raton  que  cola  de  leon. 

Aunque  la  mona  se  vista  de  seda  mona 

se  queda. 
Bien  vengas  mal  si  vicncs  solo. 
Cada  oveja  con  su  pareja  {or  Dies  los 

cria  y  ellos  se  juntan). 
Cada    uno   juzga  por  su    corazon  el 

agcno. 
Cada  uno  hacc  de  su  capa  un  sajo. 


Hunger  is  the  best  sauce. 
What  is  done  cannot  be  helped. 
Smear  yourself  with  honey,  and  you 

■will  be  devoured  by  flies. 
The  early  bird  catches  the  worm. 
A  word  to  the  wise  is  sufficient. 

Boast  not  till  the  victory  is  won. 

Look  before  you  leap. 

Better  be  the  head  of  a  mouse  than 

the  tail  of  a  lion. 
A  hog  in  armor  b  still  but  a  hog. 

Misfortune  never  comes  alone. 
Birds  of  a  feather  flock  together. 

Every  man    measures    other  people's 

com  in  his  own  bushel. 
Every  one  may  do  as  he  likes  with  his 

own. 


LESSON     LXV. 


351 


Cada  uno  sabe  donde  le  aprieta  el  za- 

pato. 
Cobra  buena  fama  y  Achate  k  dormir. 

Como    el  perro  del  hortelano,  que  ni 

come  ni  deja  comer. 
Cuenta  y  razon  sustentan  amistad. 
Del  mal  el  menos. 
Debajo  de  una  mala  capa  se  encuentra 

un  buen  bebedor. 
Dime  con  quien  andas,  y  te  dire  quien 

eres. 
Donde  fueres  haz  como  vieres. 
Lo  mejor  de  los  dados  es  no  jugarlos. 

En  boca  cerrada  no  entran  moscas. 
En  casa  del  herrero  asador  de  palo. 

En  tierra  de  ciegos  el  tuerto  es  rey. 

Gato  escaldado  del  agua  fria  huye. 
Ir  por  lana  y  volver  trasquilado. 
Hombre  prevenido  nunca  fue  vencido. 
La  caridad  bien  ordenada  empieza  por 

uno  mismo. 
La  mucha  familiaridad  es  causa  de  me- 

nosprecio. 
La  necesidad  carece  de  ley. 
La  tenacidad  es  divlsa  del  necio. 

Lo  que  no  se  puede  remediar  se  ha  de 

aguantar. 
Mas  vale  tarde  que  nunca. 
Mar  vale  pajaro  en  mano  que  ciento 

volando. 
Mientras  en  mi  casa  estoy  rey  soy. 
Nadie  puede  decir  de  esta  agua  no  be- 

hevL 
No  es  oro  todo  lo  que  reluce. 
No  hay  mal  que  por  bien  no  venga. 
No  la  hagas  no  la  temas. 
Poquito  a  poco  hilaba  la  vieja  el  copo. 
Quien  bien  te  quiere  te  hara  Uorar. 

Quien  mucho  habla  mucho  yerra. 


Every  one  knows  where  the  shoe  pinch- 
es him. 

Get  the  name  of  early  rising,  and  you 
may  he  a-bed  all  day. 

Like  the  dog  in  the  manger. 

Short  reckoning  and  long  friends. 

Of  two  evils,  the  lesser. 

We  should  not  judge  the  book  by  the 
cover. 

Tell  me  your  company  and  I  will  teU 
you  what  you  are. 

When  at  Rome,  do  as  Rome  does. 

The  best  throw  at  dice  is  to  throw  them 
away. 

A  close  mouth  catches  no  flies. 

No  one  goes  worse  shod  than  the  shoe- 
maker's wife. 

In  the  land  of  the  blind,  the  one-eyed 
man  is  king. 

A  burnt  child  dreads  the  fire. 

The  biter  bit. 

Forewarned,  forearmed. 

Charity  begins  at  home. 

Too  much  familiarity  breeds  contempt. 

Necessity  has  no  law. 

A  wise  man  will  change  his  mind ;  a 

fool  never. 
What  can't  be  cured  must  be  endured. 

Better  late  than  never. 

A  bird  in  the  hand  is  worth  two  in  the 

bush. 
A  man's  house  is  his  castle. 
No  one  can  tell  what  is  to  happen  to 

him. 
All  is  not  gold  that  glitters. 
It's  an  ill  wind  that  blows  nobody  good. 
Do  no  evil,  and  fear  no  harm. 
Rome  was  not  built  in  a  day. 
Spare  the  rod,  and  you  will  spoil  the 

child. 
Who  speaks  much  often  blunders. 


352 


LESSON     LXV, 


Quien  no  sc  aventura  no  pasa  la  mar. 
Ya  que  la  casa  se  quema  caleatemonos. 
Vemos  la  paja  en  el  ojo  ageno  y  no  la 

viga  en  el  nuestro. 
Tu  enemij]ro  es  de  tu  oficio. 


Never  ventjjre,  never  win. 

Let  us  make  the  best  of  a  bad  job. 

We  see  the  mote  in  our  neighbor's  eye, 

and  not  the  beam  in  our  own. 
Two  of  a  trade  never  agree. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  J  Hay  muchos  proverbios  en  espafiol  ?  Hay  muchisimos ;  en  todas 
las  lenguas  los  hay,  pero  en  la  espafiola  creo  que  hay  tantos  que  si  se  reu- 
niesen  todos  formarian  varies  voldmenes. 

2.  iLe  gustan  4  Y.  los  proverbios?  Si,  sefior,  son  muy  expresivos, 
pero  debemos  usarlos,  como  decia  D.  Quijote,  con  moderacion  y  no  a 
borbotones  como  Sancho  Panza. 

3.  En  eso  tiene  Y.  razon,  porque  quien  mucho  habla  mucho  yerra.— 
Y.  acaba  de  aplicar  ese  muy  bien ;  pero  es  imposible  que  practiquemos  con 
todos  los  que  trae  esta  leccion,  en  este  ejercicio. 

4.  Sin  embargo,  al  que  madruga  Dios  le  ayuda. — Y.  dice  bien,  y  quien 
no  se  aventura  no  pasa  la  mar. 

5.  Espero  que  quien  nos  oiga  conversar  introduciendo  tanto  refran, 
no  diga  de  ellos  lo  que  se  dice  de  los  males. — i  Qu6  dicen  de  los  males  ? 
Bien  vengas  mal  si  vienes  solo. 

6.  I  Oh !  no,  selior,  en  primer  lugar  los  proverbios  no  son  males,  y  en 
segundo  lugar  a  nosotros  nos  gustan,  y  queremos  practicar  con  ellos,  para 
aprenderlos. — Y.  esta  en  lo  justo,  y  ademds,  cada  imo  hace  de  su  capa  un 
sayo. 

7.  i  Ola,  amiguito  1  Y.  me  parece  practice  en  la  materia,  pero  no  piense 
Y.  quo  yo  soy  rana,  porque  deb^yo  de  una  mala  capa  se  encuentra  un 
buen  bebedor. — Caramba  jque  no  me  deja  Y.  meter  bazal  no  se  dir4  de 
Y.  aquello  de,  en  boca  cerrada  no  entran  moscas. 

8.  Yamos  amigo,  ese  refran  vino  por  los  cabellos. — Pues  si  vino  per 
los  cabellos,  d  pelo  vino,  ademds,  que  Y.  me  parece  ser  de  aquellos-que 
ven  la  paja  en  el  ojo  ageno  y  no  la  viga  en  el  suyo. 

9.  No  se  enfade  Y.,  amigo,  que  quien  bien  lo  quiere  le  hard  llorar.— 
No,  sefior,  no  me  enfado,  pero  ya  veo  que  no  es  oro  todo  lo  que  reluce. 

10.  j  Bravo  I  bravo!  ya  va  Y.  aprendiendo  d  enzarzar  refranes,  lo 
hace  Y.  cual  otro  Sancho  Panza,  y  yo,  con  toda  mi  prdctica,  he  ido  pot 
lana  y  he  vuelto  trasquilado. — Su  ejemplo  de  Y.  me  ird  enseCando;  pa* 
quito  d  poco  hilaba  la  vieja  el  copo,  y  dime  con  qui6n  andas  y  te  dir6 
qui6n  eres. 

11.  iQu6  hombrel  si  Y.  va  d  ganar  d  su  maestro  1  pero  no  hay  mal 
que  por  bien  no  venga;  Y.  me  hace  reir  con  sus  refranes.— Bien,  del  mal 
cl  m6nos,  pero  D.  Manuel,  i  cs  posible  que  lo  haya  de  ganar  su  discipulo  ? 


LESSON     LXV.  353 

12.  No  se,  no  puedo  decir  de  esta  agua  no  bebere,  y  lo  que  no  se  puede 
remediar  se  lia  de  aguantar,  y  al  fin  se  canta  la  gloria.— jZape,  como  los 
enhebra !  pero  yo  no  me  doy  por  vencido,  seiior  maestro,  porque  yo  ya 
s6  aquello  de  cobra  buena  fama  y  echate  a  dormir. 

13.  La  tenacidad  es  divisa  del  necio,  y  al  buen  entendedor  con  media 
palabra  basta. — Si,  pero  esas  ya  son  palabras  mayores,  y  a  quien  se  hace 
de  miel  las  moscas  se  lo  comen,  y  mientras  en  mi  casa  estoy,  rey  soy. 

14.  Espero,  D.  Carlos,  que  no  me  quiera  Y.  poner  fuera  de  su  casa.— ^ 
No  hombre,  pero  estos  refranes  son  tan  expresivos  que  le  hacen  decir  a 
uno  mas  de  lo  que  quiere ;  pero  a  lo  hecho  pecbo  y  ya  que  V.  me  desa- 
ii6,  siga  la  danza. 

15.  Bueno,  si  Y.  lo  quiere,  ya  que  la  casa  se  quema  calent^monos ;  pe- 
ro bien  haria  Y.  antes  que  se  case  en  mirar  lo  que  hace,  porque  cada  uno 
sabe  donde  le  aprieta  el  zapato. — Amigo  mio,  Y.  no  sabe  de  la  misa  la 
media ;  yo  nunca  doy  mi  brazo  a  torcer,  y  antes  quiero  ser  cabeza  de 
raton  que  cola  de  leon. 

16.  Si,  sellor,  pero  aunque  la  mona  se  vista  de  seda,  mona  se  queda,  no 
sea  Y.  como  el  perro  del  hortelano,  que  ni  come  ni  deja  comer,  y  acu6r- 
dese  Y.  que  cuenta  y  razon  sustentan  amistad  y  lo  mejor  de  los  dados  es 
no  jugarlos. — Basta,  basta,  bombre  me  doy  por  vencido. 

17.  No  la  hagas  no  la  temas ;  tu  enemigo  es  de  tu  oficio. — Pero,  D. 
Carlos,  le  repito.     .     .     . 

18.  La  caridad  bien  ordenada  entra  por  si  misraa. — Pero  si  repito 
que.     .     .     . 

19.  Donde  quiera  que  fucres  baz  como  vieres. — Sefior,  me  rindo. — ^Mas 
vale  tarde  que  nunca. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Well,  Charles,  so  you  have  come  at  last.  Yes,  better  late  than 
never,  you  know ;  but  if  it  had  continued  raining  I  would  not  have 
come  at  all. 

2.  Are  you  going  out  ?  I  thought  we  were  going  together  to  the 
theatre  this  evening. — I  must  go  out  now ;  but  should  I  get  back  as  soon 
as  I  expect,  we  shall  still  have  time  to  go  to  the  theatre. 

3.  If  you  undertake  that  journey,  I  should  like  to  be  your  companion. 
It  is  rather  doubtful  at  present  whether  I  shall ;  but  if  I  do,  I  would  be 
delighted  to  have  your  company. 

4.  If  the  directors  establish  that  as  a  general  rule,  very  many  persons 
will  sufi'er  great  loss. 

5.  The  conditions  were,  that  if  he  did  not  discover  the  error,  or  if, 
after  having  discovered  it,  he  could  not  rectify  it,  he  should  lose  his  place. 


354  LESSON     LXV. 

6.  lie  said  he  would  have  no  rest  until  he  should  hear  some  news  of 
that  poor  young  man. 

7.  He  promised  that  I  should  have  the  place,  if  it  were  in  his  power 
to  procure  it  for  me. 

8.  In  case  his  efforts  should  not  he  attended  with  success,  you  may 
rely  upon  me  to  do  all  in  my  power  to  advance  {proinover)  your  interests. 

9.  Their  embarrassments  will  not  cease  so  long  as  they  do  not  intro- 
duce some  system  of  reasonable  economy. 

10.  Peter  tells  his  stories  so  well,  and  with  such  an  appearance  of 
truth,  that  one  is  actually  tempted  to  believe  them. 

11.  They  made  so  many  conditions,  that  it  was  clear  they  had  no  wish 
to  help  us. 

12.  Why  did  you  not  take  that  book?    I  would  not  take  it  because 
some  leaves  were  wanting. 

13.  If  there  is  any  thing  within  (in)  my  reach  with  which  I  can  serve 
you,  ju8t*  let  me  know. 

14.  Whatever  he  may  have  been  in  his  youth,  he  is  now  a  respectable 
man,  and  beloved  (loved)  by  everybody  that  knows  him. 

*  English  words  In  italics,  not  to  be  translated. 


GENERAL  OBSERVATIONS 


GRAMMATICAL  AND  IDIOMATICAL  PECULIARITIES  OP  THE  SPANISH  LAN- 
GUAGE,  NOT  HITHERTO  TREATED  OF  LN  THE  GRAMMAR. 


In  order  to  acquire  a  thorough  knowledge  of  a  language,  it 
is  necessary  to  compare  carefully  the  different  uses  of  the 
several  parts  of  speech  in  the  native  language  and  in  the  one 
proposed  to  be  learned. 

The  sense  of  a  whole  passage  is  very  often  changed  by  the 
undue  suppression  or  omission  of  an  article,  a  preposition,  or  a 
conjunction;  by  using  one  tense  of  a  verb  for  another;  placing 
an  adjective  before  its  noun  when,  in  order  to  convey  the  idea 
intended,  it  should  go  after  it ;  and  not  unfrequently  by  trans- 
lating a  certain  part  of  speech  by  a  word  which,  although  its 
appearance  would  lead  us  to  take  it  for  the  equivalent  of  the 
word  to  be  interpreted,  bears  in  reality  no  relation  to  the  sense 
designed  to  be  expressed. 

We  have  deemed  it  convenient,  therefore,  to  devote  a 
few  pages  of  our  Combined  Method  to  such  general  remarks 
as  are  necessary  to  guide  the  learner,  and  which,  if  attentively 
observed,  will,  after  the  study  of  the  Spanish  exercises  con- 
tained in  the  preceding  lessons,  enable  him  to  compose  purely 
and  idiomatically  in  the  Castilian  language. 

The  Definite  Article. 
1.  It  has  already  been  observed  in  previous  lessons,  which 
are  the   most  usual   cases   where   the   definite   article  is   ex- 
pressed in  the  Spanish  language ;    but  there  are  many  others 
in  which  it  would  be  altogether  incorrect  to  express  or  omit  it 


366 


GRAMMATICAL     PECULIARITIES, 


in  Spanish,  as  in  English,  as  may  be  seen  from  the  following 
examples,  which  may  serve  as  a  general  rule  for  all  those  of 
the  same  kind : 


6  Est4  el  rey  en  palacio  ? 
Es  costumbre  en  Espana. 
Su  tio  firmo  por  61,  en  ausencia  de 

su  padre. 
Decia  verdad. 
A  tres  de  junio. 
Tuvo  valor  para  responder. 
A  mediado3  de  agosto. 


Is  the  king  in  the  palace  ? 
It  is  the  custom  in  Spain. 
His  uncle  signed  for  him,  in  the  absence 

of  his  father. 
He  told  the  truth. 
On  the  3d  of  June. 
He  had  the  courage  to  answer. 
In  the  middle  of  August. 


2.  In  Spanish  the  article  is  at  times  accompanied  by  a 
preposition  not  required  in  English ;  as, 

Hace  del  caballero.  (  He  plays  Oie  gentleman. 


Indefinite  Article. 

3.  The  so-called  indefinite  article  (more  properly  adjective) 
is,  as  has  been  observed  in  one  of  the  early  lessons,  frequently 
employed  in  English;  and  when  translating  from  the  latter 
language  into  Spanish,  we  either  suppress  it  entirely  or  render 
it  by  some  other  part  of  speech ;  as, 


Tiene  derecho  sobre  este  caudal 

A  distancia  de    .    .     . 

C&diz  es  puerto  de  mar. 

Es  otro  Alejandro. 

En  medio  siglo  {or  dentro  de  medio 

siglo). 
Volver6mos  dentro  de  media  hora. 
Las  obras  de  otro  {or  obras  agenas). 

Hubo  tiempo  en  que    .    .    . 


He  has  a  right  to  (or  a  claim  upon) 

this  capital. 
At  a  distance  of    ,    .     , 
Cadiz  is  a  seaport  (town). 
He  is  another  Alexander. 
In  half  a  century. 

We  shall  return  in  half  an  hour. 

The  works   of  another  (or  another's 

works). 
There  was  a  time  in  which    ,    .    . 


Personal  and  Possessive  Pronouns. 
4.  The  use  and  repetition  of  the  personal  and  possessive 
pronouns  are  more  frequent  in  English  than  in  Spanish ;  and 
that  seeming  redundance  is  essential  to  the  clearness  and  pre- 
cision of  the  English  language ;  but  Spanish  syntax  does  not 


GRAMMATICAL     PECULIARITIES.  357 

submit  to  such  encumbrances,  and  they  are,  therefore,  generally 
suppressed,  as  will  be  seen  from  the  following  examples  : 


Es  verdad. 

Llueve. 

Hace  frio. 

i  Porque  es  menester  ? 

El  mismo  principe. 

Su  misma  madre. 

]S1  mismo  lo  vio. 


It  is  true. 

It  is  raining  (or  it  rains). 

It  is  cold. 

Why  is  it  necessary  ? 

The  prince  him&elt 

His  mother  herself. 

He  saw  it  Aimself. 


5.  Before  leaving  the  pronouns,  it  is  proper  to  remark  that 
one  and  ones,  so  often  used  in  English  composition,  to  avoid 
the  unpleasant  repetition  of  nouns,  have  no  equivalent  what- 
ever in  Spanish,  and  are  hence  to  be  left  out  in  translating  from 
the  former  language  to  the  latter ;  as, 

f,  Tiene  V.  caballos  ?  I  Have  you  horses  (or  any  horses)  ? 

Tengo  dos  buenos.  |  I  have  two  good  ones. 

6.  Personal  pronouns,  when  used  redundantly  in  Englisli, 
as  in  the  following  example,  are  never  expressed  in  Spanish : 

Ambos  perecieron.  |  Both  of  them  perished  (or  were  lost). 

7.  Even  whole  members  of  sentences  are,  not  unfrequently, 
suppressed  in  translating  from  English  into  Spanish ;  as, 

Todo  no  podia  entrar  en  un  elogio,  I  All  could  not  find  place  in  a  eulogy, 
mas  81  en  una  satira.  j      but  all  could ^nd  place  in  a  satire. 

Observe  that  the  repetition  of  the  words  italicized  in  the 
English  sentence  is  avoided  by  means  of  the  adverb  si  in  Span- 
ish, which  serves  to  correct  the  negation  expressed  in  the  first 
member  of  the  phrase,  thus  rendering  the  latter  at  once  shorter 
and  more  elegant. 

Ellipsis. 

8.  There  are  certain  short  modes  of  expression,  certain 
grammatical  laconicisms,  peculiar  to  the  English  language, 
w^hich  are  not  admissible  in  Spanish ;  the  ellipses  must  in  such 
cases  often  be  filled  up ;  as, 


Jamas    hubo    orador    qiie    hablase 

mejor. 
De  ahi  dimanan  estos  errores. 


Never  did  orator  speak  better. 
Hence  these  errors. 


358 


GRAMMATICAL     PECULIARITIES, 


No  puede  pensar  en  hactr  mal. 
La  ciudad  reducida  k  cenizas. 
No  va  mal  para  »er  nino. 
Su  madre  banada  en  lagrimas. 
Aungne  todos  estuviesen  juntos. 
Esto  €s  por  lo  que  toca  d  su  persona. 

En  pro  y  en  contra. 

Con  la  espada  en  la  mano. 


He  cannot  think  of  evil. 

The  city  in  ashes. 

Not  bad  for  a  child. 

Her  mother  in  tears. 

They  were  all  together. 

So   much  for  his  person  (or  personal 

appearance). 
For  and  against. 
Sword  in  hand. 


N.  B. — ^It  is  also  correct  to  say,  Espada  en  mano. 


Inversion. 

Although  we  have  spoken  at  some  length,  in  Lesson  LI.,  on 
the  subject  of  inversion,  we  imagine  the  learner  will  not  be 
displeased  to  meet  here  a  few  well-chosen  examples  which  will 
give  him  a  still  clearer  idea  of  the  order  observed  in  Spanish 
for  the  expression  of  ideas,  and  the  consequent  difference  of 
construction  between  that  language  and  the  English. 

9.  The  substantive  often  precedes  its  adjective ;  as, 

Es    el    hombre    mas    perfect©    del 

mundo. 
Llave  falsa. 


) 


Testigo  falso. 

Su  hijo  mas  joven. 


He  is   tho  most  perfect  man  in  the 

world. 
False  key. 
False  witness. 
Her  youngest  son. 


10.  Instances  occur,  however,  of  the  inversion  talcing  place 
in  English,  while  the  natural  construction  is  followed  in  Span- 
ish ;  especially  in  the  case  of  past  participles  acting  as  verbal 
adjectives ;  as, 

Una  vez  destruido  este  fundamento, 
todo  se  viene  abajo. 


Admitida  esta  libortad, 
puede    .     .     . 


el  hombre 


This  foundation  being  once  destroyed, 
the  whole  (edifice)  comes  to  the 
groimd. 

This  liberty  (being)  once  admitted,  roan 
may    .     ,    . 


11.  In  all  cases  similar  to  that  of  the  following  example, 
the  possessives  mio,  tuyo^  suyo  are  placed  after  the  substantive, 
and  then,  of  course,  they  retain  their  final  syllable ;  as. 

El  otro  hijo  suyo.  (  His  other  son. 

12.  The  same  ideas  are  in  not  a  few  instances  presented  in 


GBAMMATICAL     PECULIARITIES. 


359 


Spanish  in  an  order  very  different  from  that  followed  in  Eng- 
lish : 

It  is  not  to  destroy  that  he  has  come, 

but  to  build  up. 
I  see  (very)  well  that    .     .    . 
If  you  had  an  agreement  to  make. 

{If  you  had  to  make  an  agreement  would,  of  course,  also  be  an  allowable  construction 
in  English.) 


No  ha  veuido  para  destruir,  sino  para 

edificar. 
Bien  veo  que     ,     .    . 
Si  tuviese  V.  que  hacer  una  contrata. 


No  tenia  razon  aquel  filosofo   que 

decia  que    .     .     . 
Toea  remunerar  los  servicios  al  que 

los  recibio. 
Entre  los  Griegos,  los  que    .     .     . 
£l  que  mas  hablaba. 
Cien  veces  mas  quisiera  yo  que  .  .  . 
Solo  Dios  es  inmutable. 


That  philosopher  who  said  that    .    ,    , 

was  wrong. 
It  is  for  him  who  received  the  services 

to  reward  them. 
Those  amongst  the  Greeks,  who    .    .   . 
He  who  spoke  the  most. 
I  would  prefer  a  thousand  times  that .  . 
God  alone  is  unchanging. 


Nouns. 
13.  There  is  a  striking  difference  to  be  observed  in  the  use 
of  nouns  in  the  two  languages;  we  sometimes  meet  nouns  in 
the  singular  in  English,  while  in  Spanish  they  are  used  in  tlie 
plural  only,  and  vice-versd : 


FluraL 
Mirar  con  malos  ojcs. 
Puso  los  ojos  en  mi. 
Dar  oidos  k    ,    »    , 
Prestar  oidos. 
Depies  a  cabeza. 
Por  todas  partes. 
Juego  de  manos. 
Se  present©  con  los  ojos  en  el  suelo. 

Singular. 
A  pie  descalzo. 
Estar  en  pie. 
A  rerru)  y  vela. 
En  toda  stierte  de  negocios. 
No  son  dueiios  de  si. 


Singular. 
To  look  with  evil  eye. 
He  set  his  eye  on  me. 
To  give  ear  to    ,     .     . 
To  lend  an  ear. 
From  head  to  foot. 
In  every  direction. 
Sleight  of  hand. 
He  came  forward  with  downcast  eye. 

Plural. 
With  bare/<?rf  (or  in  (his)  hoxefeet) 
To  stand  on  (one'c)/ee<. 
With  oars  and  sails. 
In  all  sorts  (or  kinds)  of  business. 
They  are  not  masters  of  themselves. 


One  Part  of  Speech  for  Another. 
14.  It  is  not  uncommon,  in  comparing  English  and  Spanish 
composition,  to  see  adjectives  translated  by  substantives,  ad- 


860  GRAMMATICAL     PECULIARITIES. 

verbs  by  substantives,  substantives  by  verbs,  and  vice-versd. 
Sometimes,  in  translating,  difficulties,  appearing  at  first  sight 
almost  insurmountable,  are  overcome  by  the  simple  substitu- 
tion of  one  part  of  speech  for  another. 

Adjectives  for  Substantives. 


Pica    de    guapo    (or  presumido  de 

guapo). 
Es  acusado  de  impio. 
Se  pone  furioso. 


He  piques  himself  on  his  bravery. 


He  is  accused  of  impiety. 
He  gets  into  a  fury. 

Substantives  for  Adverbs,  and  vice-vers&. 

Aunque  idolatras  de  origen.  I  Although  originally  idolaters. 

Come  excesivamente.  I  He  eats  to  excess. 

^uvo  la  dicha  de  salvarse.  |  Happily  for  him  he  escaped. 

Por  desgracia  nada  oyeron.  I  Unfortunately  they  heard  nothing. 

Substantives  for  Verbs,  and  vice-versA. 


Habl6  lo  mejor  que  jourfb. 
Debe  probar  su  dicJio. 
Como  acostumbra. 
Despues  de  almorzar. 
Antes  de  comer. 


He  spoke  to  the  best  of  his  ability. 
He  must  prove  what  he  says. 
According  to  his  custom. 
After  breakfast. 
Before  dinner. 


Verbs  for  Pronouns. 
ffay    historiadores     que     aseguran  I  Some  historians  assure  us  that     .     . 
que    .    .     .  I 

Of  Verbs  in  General. 
15.  We  very  often  find  verbs  active  with  the  indefinite  «€, 
and  sometimes  the  passive  verb  with  the  particle  se,  used  in 
Spanish  to  express  the  same  idea  conveyed  in  English  by 
passive,  and  sometimes  also  by  active  verbs ;  one  tense  trans- 
lated by  another  different  tense,  one  number  substituted  in  the 
place  of  another,  one  person  for  other  persons,  and  at  times 
even  the  same  person  translated  by  any  or  all  the  others,  ac- 
cording to  the  sense  desired  to  be  conveyed. 

Passive  in  Engrlish. 


El  concilio  se  celchraba  en  Pisa. 
El  libro  que  se  le  atribuyc. 
Esto  se  encierra  en  la  proposicion. 
Esto  debe  contarse  por  nada. 
Cuando  se  les  ruega  que  respondan. 


The  council  toas  held  at  Pisa. 
The  book  which  is  attributed  to  him. 
That  is  contained  in  the  proposition. 
This  is  to  be  counted  for  nothing. 
When  they  are  requested  to  answer. 


GEAMMATICAL     PECULIARITIES, 


361 


Active  in  English.. 

Viene  k  juntarse  con  su  familia. 
Se  caso  con  la  duquesa. 
Se  hicieron  a  la  vela. 


He  comes  io  join  his  family. 
He  married  the  duchess. 
They  set  sail. 


The  Indicative  or  Subjunctive  for  the  Infinitive. 


Le  mando  que  callase. 

Es  reputado  por  hombre  que  nada 

posee. 
Espero  me  responda  Y. 


He  ordered  him  to  hold  his  tongue  (or 

to  be  silent). 
He  is  supposed  to  possess  nothing. 

I  expect  you  to  answer  me. 


One  Tense  for  Another. 


^Te  habre  yo  dado  un  derecho  que 

no  tengo  ? 
^  Porque  solo  los  hombres  Jiabrdn  de 

degenerar  ? 
Cuanto  mas  hagan^  m^uos  ganaran. 

Que  un  muerto  resuscite,  no  es  cosa 
comun. 


Have  I  then  given  thee  a  right  which  I* 

do  not  possess  myself? 
Why  must  mankind  alone  degenerate  ? 

The  more  they  do,  the  less  they  will 

gain. 
It  is  no  common  thing  for  a  dead  (man) 

to  resuscitate. 


One  Number  for  Another  in  Verbs. 
Son  las  seis.  I  It  is  six  o'clock. 

No  le  quedan  mas  que  tres  bijos.         |  He  has  only  three  children  left. 

One  Person  for  Another. 

Nosotros  somos  los  b4rbP''?<)s.  I  It  is  we  that  are  barbarians. 

Si  hubiesen  sido  ellos  los  vituperados.  |  IfitAac?  been  they  that  they  had  blamed. 

Iffode  of  Asking-  Questions  and  forming  Negations  with  Verbs. 

16.  The  auxiliary  do,  used  in  English  in  asking  questions, 
whether  negatively  or  positively,  is  to  be  lost  sight  of  in  trans- 
lating into  Spanish,  inasmuch  as  the  simple  form  of  the  verb 
contains  all  that  is  required  for  that  purpose,  as  may  be  seen  in 
the  following  examples : 


yVan  Yds.  aJgunas  veces  4  la  opera  ? 
/  Sabia  V.  que  debiamos  venir  tan 

temprano  ? 
No  creia  que  debiesen  Yds.  venir 

hasta  las  tres. 


Do  you  sometimes  go  to  the  opera  ? 
Did  you  know  that  we  were  to  come  so 

early  ? 
I  did  not  think  you  were  to  come  until 

three  o'clock. 


17.  Nor  is  it  to  be  translated  into  Spanish  when  it  stands 
16 


362  GRAMMATICAL     PECULIARITIES. 

in  the  English  sentence  merely  for  the  purpose  of  giving  more 
emphasis  to  the  expression ;  as, 

y  o  creia  que  no  iban  nunca  al  teatro.  I  I  thought  they  never  went  to  the  theatre. 

SI,  senor,  van  a  meaudo.  |  Yes,  sir,  they  do  go  often. 

18.  It  sometimes  takes  the  place  of  a  verb,  to  avoid  the 
repetition  of  the  latter ;  in  all  such  cases  it  is  to  be  rendered 
into  Spanish  by  a  simple  particle  (positive  or  negative,  as  re- 
quired by  the  sense),  or  else  the  verb  expressing  the  action 
must  itself  be  repeated  ;  as, 

I  Escribe  V.  todos  los  meses  a  su  tio  ?     Do  you  write  to  your  uncle  every  month  ? 
Si,  senor  {or  le  escribo  todos  los     Yes,  sir,  I  do. 
moses). 

19.  To  what  has  already  been  remarked  relative  to  conju- 
gations, we  have  but  a  few  words  to  add,  respecting  a  limited 
number  of  verbs  of  the  third  conjugation.  Those  which  have 
either  of  the  letters  cA,  U,  or  n,  immediately  preceding  the  ter- 
mination, make  their  past  participle  in  endo,  instead  of  iendo ; 
as,  cinendo,  muUendo,  rinendo,  hinchendo,  bnmendo,  gnmendOj 
tane?ido,  instead  of  citiiendo,  muUiendo,  rituendo,  hinchiendOy 
bruniendo,  gruniendo,  tamendo. 

For  the  same  reason  the  i  is  also  suppressed  in  the  third 
persons  singular  and  plural  of  the  preterit  definite  of  the  indica- 
tive, and  in  all  the  persons  of  the  second  and  third  terminations 
of  the  imperfect  subjunctive,  and  of  the  future  of  the  same 
mood ;  as,  cind,  mulld,  rineron,  hinchera,  brufiese,  gru?iere,  in- 
stead of  cinid,  mullid,  rinieron,  hinchiera,  brufiiese^  grumere. 

There  is  but  one  exception  allowable  to  this  rule,  and  that 
occurs  in  the  verb  henchlr,  which  generally  retains  the  i  in  the 
third  person  singular  preterit  definite  of  the  indicative,  making 
it  hinchid^  in  order  to  avoid  confounding  it  with  hinchd,  same 
person  and  tense  of  hinchar,  a  regular  verb  of  the  first  conju- 
gation. 

The  reason  of  the  suppression  of  the  i  in  the  cases  pointed 
out  above  is  obvious,  inasmuch  as  the  lettei-s  cA,  //,  or  /?,  When 
forming  a  syllable  with  e,  cannot  be  sounded  without  the  con- 
currence of  the  i  element  to  a  certain  extent.  If,  therefore,  the  i 
were  retained  in  those  combinations,  a  fj?rcgd  and  disagreeable 
sound  would  be  the  result. 


GRAMMATICAL     PECULIARITIES.  363 

20.  There  are  in  English  certain  verbs  of  very  frequent 
occurrence,  and  whose  signification,  if  not  detennined  by  some 
other  part  of  speech,  it  would  often  be  dilKcult  to  explain. 
Amongst  this  class,  the  verb  to  get  plays  a  very  important,  if 
not  the  most  important  part,  and  English  persons  are  some- 
times at  as  great  a  loss  to  know  how  exactly  to  translate  it  into 
a  foreign  language,  as  foreigners  are  to  know  how  and  when 
to  use  it  idiomatically  in  Englishc  This  verb  {to  get)  has  no 
exact  equivalent  in  Spanish,  but  there  are  in  that  language 
many  verbs  of  something  of  a  like  nature,  and  by  w^hich  it  may 
at  times  be  correctly  rendered,  according  to  the  signification  in 
which  it  is  used.  We  venture  to  say  that,  in  the  most  knotty 
cases,  a  little  thought,  a  moment's  reflection  would  go  far  in 
removing  all  difficulty. 

Before  making  some  uncouth  makeshift  of  a  translation, 
pause  a  moment,  and  look  what  is  the  real  meaning  of  to  get  in 
the  case  before  you  ;  then  see  what  other  verb  would  serve  in 
its  place,  or  what  other  form  of  expression  you  can  substitute 
for  the  one  proposed  to  be  translated.  This  you  will  soon  dis- 
cover, for  perhaps  in  no  language  can  an  instance  be  found  of 
the  impossibility  to  express  the  same  idea  in  more  than  one 
way.  For  instance,  let  it  be  required  to  translate  into  Spanish, 
To  GET  IN  by  the  window  ;  here  is  a  difficulty  just  as  great  as 
any  other  case  where  the  verb  to  get  can  be  used. 

Let  us  now  see  how  else  we  can  express  that  idea :  To  go 
IN,  or  to  come  in  by  the  window ;  that  is  to  say,  we  have  to 
convey  the  idea  of  motion  into.  This  same  idea  is  to  be  ex- 
pressed thus  :  To  ENTER  by  the  window =entrar  por  la  ven- 
tana ;  entrar  then  is  the  standard  and  usual  verb  expressive 
of  motion  into.  Let  us  now  change  the  preposition  and  reverse 
the  sense,  for  the  preposition  in  determines  the  signification  of 
get  in  the  case  under  consideration. 

Required  to  translate  i  To  get  out  by  the  window ;  the 
same  process  as  above  gives  us  motion  out ;  hence,  salir  por 
la  ventana,  salir  being  the  standard  and  usual  Spanish  vei'b 
expressive  of  motion  out. 

This  mode  of  reasoning  will  in  all  cases  lead  to  the  desired 
end.     Let  your  object  be  to  find  some  verb  in  English  which 


364 


GRAMMATICAL     P  E  C  XT  LI  A  E  I  T  I  E  S  . 


alone  will  mean  the  same  thing  as  get  and  its  determining  prepo- 
sition together. 

Get,  used  in  connection  with  adjectives,  is  no  more  difficult 
to  be  disposed  of  than  when  accompanied  by  prepositions,  and 
it  may  in  general  be  turned  into  Spanish  by  one  of  the  three 
verbs  ponerse^  hacerae,  or  volverse  (according  to  the  nature  of 
the  case),  and  an  adjective  corresponding  to  the  English  one 
determining  get ;  as, 


Hacerse  rico. 

Volverse  or  ponerse  rojo. 

I*o}iersc  furioso. 


To  ffet  rich. 
To  ffet  red. 
To  ffet  furious. 


These  ideas  in  Spanish  may  be  expressed  by  single  verbs 
derived  from  each  of  the  adjectives  respectively ;  as, 

To  ffet  rich. 

To  ffet  red  {i.  e.,  to  redden). 
To  ffet  furious. 

21.  To  GET,  as  an  active  verb,  is  usually  translated  into 
Spanish  by  any  of  these  :  conseguir,  ohtener,  procurar^  hacerse 
<Ze,  hacerse  C07i,  according  to  the  sense  ;  as. 


Enriquecerse. 

Enrojecerse. 

Enfurecerse. 


Comiffuid  lo  que  deseaba. 

Obtendrdn  el  privilegio. 

i  Puede  V.  cojiseffuirme  or  procurar. 

me  un  ejemplar  de  ese  libro  ? 
Se  hizo  de  un  caballo  para  el  viaje. 


He  ffot  what  he  wanted. 
They  will  ffet  the  patent. 
Can  you  ffet  me  a  copy  of  that  book  ? 


He  ffot  (L  €.,  bought)  a  horse  for  his 
journey. 

22.  As  for  to  get,  used  redundantly  (and  incorrectly)  with 
the  verb  to  have,  it  disappears  in  the  Spanish  translation ;  as, 

Tenemosuno.  |      We  have  ^o^  one. 

23.  The  above  remarks  are  equally  applicable  to  all  verbs 
of  the  class  alluded  to,  as  for  instance  to  become;  which  latter, 
as  well  as  to  get,  is  often  elegantly  translated  by  Uegar  d  ser;  as, 


Se  hizo  ciudadano   de  los  Estados 

Unidos. 
L'effd  d  aer  hombre  muy  distinguido. 


He  became  a  citizen  of  the  United 

States. 
He  became  a  very  distinguished  man 


REG  APITUL  AGIO  N 

DE   LAS   REGLAS   DE   LA   GRAmItIOA. 


LEOOIOl^    I. 

1.  I  En  qu6  letras  acaban  los  infinitivos  de  todos  los  verbos  en  espafiol  ? 

—  ^Ouantas  conjugacioneshay? 

2.  I  C6mo  se  llaman  las  letras  que  anteceden  (precede)  a  las  termina- 
ciones  ar^  er,  ir  ? 

8.  I  Como  se  forman  las  conjugaciones  de  todos  los  verbos  regulares 
de  la  lengua  ? 

—  I  Se  puede  suprimir  el  pronombre  nominativo  ? 

—  ^Porqu^? 

—  I  Puede  suprimirse  el  pronombre  Usted  ? 

4.  J  En  qu6  persona  se  pone  el  verbo  cuando  se  emplea  el  pronombre 
Usted? 

—  I  En  qu6  casos  se  emplea  la  segunda  persona  del  verbo  ?   esto  es, 

I  cuando  se  tutea  en  espafiol  ? 

■   ♦   '■■ 

LECOIOIT    II. 

5.  I  Qu6  significa  la  palabra  aeftor  cuando  se  usa  en  vocativo  ? 

—  I  Qu6  palabra  se  debe  emplear  en  lugar  de  seflor  en  el  caso  vocativo  ? 

—  I  Cuando  se  emplea  la  palabra  seflor  ? 

—  I  Cuando  se  emplean  las  palabras  seflora^  seflorita  j  seflorito  f 

6.  jDe  qu6  modo  se  usan  los  vocablos  {words)  Don  y  Doflaf 

7.  i  En  donde  se  coloca  la  negacion  tw,  con  respecto  al  verbo  ? 


LECCION-    III. 

8.  J  Cuando  se  cambia  la  conjuncion  y  por  la  vocal  et 

9.  ^Cuando  se  escribe  el  acento  sobre  el  que? 


366  BECAPITULACION. 

10.  ^En  qu6  casos  se  traduce  lut  por  sinof 

11.  ^En  qu6  caso  se  traduce  lut  por  perof 

12.  ^Pueden  las   palabras   espaflol,  frances^   tien^  j  otras  muchas, 
pertenecer  d  diferentes  partes  de  la  oracion  (speech)  ? 


LEOCION    IV. 

13.  ^  Cuundo  rigen  los  verbos  activos  d  su  objeto  con  aynda  de  la  pre- 
posicion  d  ? 

14.  Qu6  preposicion  sirve  para  denotar  la  posesion  6  la  materia  de 
que  una  cosa  esta  hecha  ? 

15.  iQu6  noinbres  determina  el  articulo  elf 

—  I  Qu6  variacion  sufre  el  articulo  el  cuando  viene  despues  de  la  pre- 
posicion a  6  de? 

16.  ^Delante  de  qu6  parte  de  la  oracion  se  coloca  el  articulo  indefini- 
do  un  f 

—  I  Cual  es  el  uso  de  la  palabra  uno  f 


LECCION    V. 

17.  jCuantos  g^neros  Lay  en  espafiol  ? 

—  I  Cudndo  se  emplea  el  articulo  femenino  una  t 

18.  ^C6mo  se  traduce  your? 


LECCION    VI. 

19.  J  En  qu6  letra  acaban  todos  los  verbos  en  la  primera  persona  de 
indicative  ? 

—  J  En  qu6  se  diferencia  la  segunda  conjugacion  de  la  primera,  en 
el  presente  de  indicative  ? 

20  I  C6mo  se  traduce  muy  ? 

21.  I  C6mo  se  forma  la  terminacion  femenina  de  los  nombres  acaba- 
dos  en  0  / 


LEOOION    VII. 

22.  I  C6mo  forman  su  terminacion  femenina  los  adjetivos  que  acaban 
en  0,  an  li  on? 


EECAPITTJLACION.  367 

—  g  Y  los  gentilicios  ? 

—  ^  En  d6nde  se  colocan  generalmente  los  adjetivos  con  respecto  d 
Jos  sustantivos  ? 

—  ^  En  donde  se  colocan  los  adjetivos  nsados  metaforicamente  {metor' 
phorically)  ? 

—  ^Pierden  algnnos  adjetivos  su  tiltima  letra6  silaba  cuando  se  colo- 
can delante  de  los  snstantivos  ? 


LEOOION    VIII. 

23.  ^En  qu6  se  diferencian  las  terminaciones  de  la  segnnda  y  tcrcera 
conjugacion  en  el  presente  de  indicativo  2 

24.  I  Cudndo  se  cambia  la  conjuncion  6  por  la  letra  u  f 

25.  I  Como  se  traduce  neither  j  nor  f 

26.  I  Como  se  forma  el  plural  de  los  nombres  ? 

27.  ^Concuerda  el  adjetivo  con  el  sustantivo? 

28.  I  Concuerda  el  articulo  con  el  nombre  a  que  se  refiere  ? 
—  I  Qu6  nombres  femeninos  toman  el  articulo  masculine  ? 

29.  2  Cuando  se  nsa  el  articulo  neutro  lo  ? 


LECCION    IX. 
80.  I  C6mo  forman  el  plural  los  nombres  papd^  mama  y  pie  ? 

31.  I  C6mo  forman  el  plural  los  nombres  de  mas  de  una  silaba  que 
acaban  en  »,  tales  como  lunes^  mdrtes  ? 

—  I  Cual  es  el  plural  dejuez,  Idpiz^  y  demas  nombres  que  acaban  en  z  ? 

82.  I  C6mo  se  forma  el  plural  de  los  nombres  compuestos  ? 

83.  I  Cuando  toman  articulo  los  dias  de  la  semana  ? 

84.  I  Qu6  lugar  ocupan  en  la  oracion  los  adverbios  donde^  adonde  y 
cudndo f 

35.  g  Cudndo    requieren    el  acento  los  adverbios  donde^  adonde  y 
cuando  f 


LECCION    X. 

36.  I  Que  son  verbos  irregulares? 

—  I  Qu6  se  advierte  acerca  de  tener  y  los  demas  verbos  auxiliares  ? 


368  EECAPITULACION. 

—  I  C6mo  se  traduce  los  pron  ombres,  regimen  directo  de  nn  verbo 

ingles  ? 

37.  I  C6rao  se  usard  del  Ze  y  el  fo  en  el  caso  acusativo,  esto  es,  como 
r6gimen  directo  ? 

—  1 06mo  se  traducen  en  algunos  casos  it  j  sof 

38.  ^Reqnieren  el  articulo  los  pronombres  interrogativos  quien^  eudly 
que^  de  quien  f 

39.  Caando  en  una  pregunta  estd  re^do  un  pronombre  interrogativo 
por  una  preposicion  i  qu6  debe  hacerse  en  la  respuesta  ? 


LECCION    XI. 

40.  I  Cuando  se  eraplea  dlguien^  j  cudndo  alguno  f 

—  J  En  qu6  caso  se  traducira  any  one^  6  anybody  por  eualquieraf 

41.  ^C6mo  se  usa  de  nadie  j  ninguno? 

42.  I  Cuando  pierden  alguno  j  ninguno  la  o  final  ? 

43.  ^En  qu6  caso  se  usara  de  algo  y  alguna  cosa  ? 

44.  I  Cuando  se  usard  de  nada  y  ninguna  cosa  f 

45.  ^  Qu6  negaciones  se  colocan  delante  del  verbo  ? 

—  I  Qu6  efecto  producen  en  espafiol,  dos  negativas  en  la  misma  sen- 
tencia  ? 

46.  jEn  qu6  casos  no  se  traduce  el  articulo  indefinido  a  6  ant 


LEOOION    XII. 

47.  I  Cuando  so  usa  del  verbo  Tiaher  y  cudndo  del  verbo  tener  f 

—  I  C6mo  se  traducen  los  auxiliares  to  have  y  tole  seguidos  de  un 
intinitivo  ? 

48.  iEn  qu6  casos  se  emplea  eipreterito  ind^nidof 


LECCION    XIII. 

49.  I  De  qu6  modo  forman  su  terrainacion  femenina  los  pronombres 
mw,  tuyo^  8uyo^  nueatro,  vuestro  f 

60.  I  Qu6  concordancia  tienen  los  pronombres  posesivos  ? 

51.  J  En  d6nde  se  colocan  y  qu6  letras  pierden  cuando  so  usan  corao 
adjctivos  pronominales  ? 


BECAPITULACION.  369 

62.  I  En  ddnde  se  coloca  el  pronombre  mio^  cuando  se  usa  en  el  caso 
Yocativo  ? 

53.  I  Que  concordancia  tieneu  los  adjetivos  posesivos  cuando  se  usan 
como  pronombres  ? 

—  I  Requieren  el  articulo  en  esta  caso  ? 

64.  I  Qu6  articulo  requieren  cuando  se  usan  de  un  modo  indefinido  ? 

65.  I  Cuando  se  omite  el  articulo  con  los  pronombres  posesivos  ? 

66.  ^  Cuando  se  emplean  los  pronombres  vuestro  j  vuestra  f 


LECCION    XIV. 
57.  I  Qu6  6rden  se  sigue  en  la  formacion  de  los  niimeros  compuestos  ? 

68.  I  Cudles  son  los  ntimeros  declinables  ? 

69.  ^  Cudndo  pierde  uno  la  letra  o  ? 

60.  I  Qu6  concordancia  tiene  ciento  j  cuando  pierde  la  ultima  silaba  2 


LECCION   XV. 

61.  ^  Qu6  concordancia  tienen  los  numeros  ordinales  y  d6nde  se  colo- 
can? 

—  I  Qu6  ntimeros  ordinales  pierden  su  tiltima  letra  ? 

62.  I  Qu6  niimeros  ordinales  se  usan  y  cuando  ? 


LECCION    XVI. 

63.  I  Cuando  se  usa  el  preterito  definido^  j  en  que  se  diferencia  del 
preterito  indefinido  ? 

64.  I  Que  significa  la  preposicion  ante  f 

65.  I  C6mo  se  usan  los  adverbios  mas  j  menos^  j  en  d6nde  se  colocan 
en  la  oracion  ? 


LEOCION    XVII. 

66.  ^De  que  modo  se  eraplea  el  pronombre  relativo  quient 

67.  i  Cuando  se  traduce  who  por  que  j  cuando  por  quien  f 

68.  i  Cual  J  que  pueden  referirse  a  personas  y  cosas  ? 

16* 


370  EECAPITULACION. 

69.  ^Con  qn6  palabra  concuerda  cuyof 
—  I  Qa6  especie  de  pronombre  es  ? 

70.  I  Se  usa  del  pronombre  relativo  en  espafiol  del  mismo  mode  que 
en  ingl6s ;  esto  es,  precedido  6  no  de  una  preposicion  ? 

71.  jPuede  suprimirse  el  pronombre  relativo? 


LECCION    XYIII. 

72.  I  C6mo  se  declinan  los  pronombres  deraostrativos  este^  ese^  aquel  t 

73.  I  En  qu6  caso  se  emplea  este  ? 

74.  I  Qu6  sucedia  en  lo  antiguo  cuando  eate  y  ese  precedian  al  adjetivo 
otro  f 

75.  I  C6mo  se  emplean  los  pronombres  demostrativos  en  su  calidad  de 
adjetivos  ? 

76.  iQ6mo  se  traducen  las  palabras  the  former  y  the  latter  f 

77.  I  C6mo  se  traduce  el  pronombre  demostrativo  ingles  that^  seguido 
de  la  preposicion  ^  6  de  cualquiera  de  los  relativos  wTio  6  lohich  t 

78.  I  C6rao  se  traducen  generalmente  los  pronombres  personales  in- 
gleses,  cuando  van  seguidos  de  un  relativo  ? 

79.  I  Qu6  diferencia  hay  entre  el  significado  de  los  adverbios  dqui  j 
alliy  J  acd  J  alUt 


LECCION    XIX. 

80.  I  Cuando  debe  usarse  de  la  preposicion  para^  j  cuando  de  par  t 

81.  I  CxxQl  es  el  significado  de  la  preposicion  entre  f 

82.  I  Cu61  es  el  significado  de  la  preposicion  hasta  t 


LECOION    XX. 

83.  I  Cudndo  piorden  los  adverbios  tanto  j  ctianto  sii  ultima  silaba  ? 

84.  I  C6mo  se  forma  el  comparativo  de  igiLaldad  t 

85.  iEn  qu6  caso  puede  emplearse  euan  t 

86.  I  C6mo  se  forma  el  comparativo  de  superioridad  t 


RECAPITULACION.  371 

87.  I  C6mo  se  forma  el  comparativo  de  inferioridad  f 

88.  I  Porqu^  los  adjetivos  may  or ^  menor^  mejor  j  peor,  no  necesitan 
de  las  palabras  mas  6  menos,  para  formar  sas  grados  de  comparacion  ? 

89.  ^En  que  caso  se  traduce  than  por  de  j  en  cual  otro  por  que? 

90.  I  Pueden  tambien  formar  grados  de  comparacion  los  nombres,  ver- 
boa  J  adverbios  ? 


LECCION    XXI. 

91.  I  C6mo  se  traducen  los  superlativos  ingleses  que  acaban  por  est^ 
6  se  forman  con  la  palabra  most  f 

92.  ^En  qu6  caso  se  traduce  most^  6  most  of^  por  la  mayor  parte? 

93.  I  Qu6  preposicion  corresponde  en  espafiol  al  in  ingles  despues  de 
un  superlativo  ? 

94.  Los  superlativos  que  se  forman  en  ingles  por  medio  de  most^  very^ 
&c.,  I  c6mo  se  forman  en  espafiol  ? 

95.  I  Cuando  pierden  los  adjetivos  la  ultima  vocal  ? 

96.  gDigame  Y.  lo  que  se  advierte  acerca  de  los  superlativos  en 
errimo  ? 

97.  I  Qu6  adjetivos  cambian  sus  letras  finales  antes  de  recibir  la  ter- 
minacion  isimo  ? 

98.  I  Ouales  son  los  superlativos  en  isimo  formados  irregularmente  ? 

99.  ^CuaJes  son  los  comparativos  j  superlativos  irregulares? 
100.  I  Ouando  admiten  grados  de  comparacion  los  sustantivos  ? 


LECCIOIT    XXII. 

101.  I  Qu6  se  advierte  acerca  de  los  verbos  ser  y  estar  ? 

102.  I  Cuando  se  traduce  el  verbo  to  he,  por  ser,  j  cuando  por  estar  ? 
—  I  Cuales  son  los  verbos  cuyos  gerundios  no  admiten  el  verbo  estar 

como  auxiliar  ? 


LECCION    XXIII. 

103.  I  Cuando  se  emplea  oifuturo  simple  ? 

104.  I  C6mo  se  usan  los  numerales  que  indican  las  horas  del  dia  ? 


872  EECAPITUL  ACIOIT. 

105.  I  Porqa6  palabra  se  traduce  evening  6  night  f 

106.  I  En  qu6  caso  no  rige  al  subjuntivo  la  conjuncion  si  f 


LECCION    XXIY. 

107.  i  Cudndo  se  emplea  el/uturo  compuesto  ? 

108.  I  C6mo  se  traduce  en  ingl6s  acdbar  de  f 

109.  gEn  qu6  letra  acaban  en  espanol  la  mayor  parte  de  las  palabras 
que  en  ingl6s  terminan  en  Hon  ? 

110.  I  Con  qu6  ntimeros  se  cuentan  los  dias  del  mes? 


LECCION    XXV. 

111.  jQn6  diferencia  se  encuentra  en  el  significado  de  los  verbos 
frXber  j  conocer  ? 

112.  g  Qu6  diferencia  existe  entre  los  adverbios  aun,  ya  y  todavia  f 

—  I  C6mo  se  traduce  (mce^  twice,  etc.  ? 

—  ^  Qu6  se  observa  en  el  uso  de  la  palabras  miedo,  tdlor,  vergHen- 
za,  Idstima,  j  tiempo  f 

113.  Cuando  el  verbo  to  he  precede  k  los  adjetivos  hungry,  thirsty^ 
afraid,  ashamed,  right,  wrong,  cold,  sleepy,  i  qu6  verbo  se  emplea  en 
espaflol  ? 

114.  I  Como  se  emplean  jam<f«  y  nunca  ? 


LECCION    XXYI. 

115.  ^En  d6nde  se  colocan  los  pronombres  nominativos  con  respecto 
al  verbo  ? 

116.  J  Qu6  peculiaridad  se  nota  en  los  pronombres  persouales? 

117.  jEn  d6nde  se  coloca  el  complemento  directo  (objective  ease) 
cuando  no  le  precede  una  preposicion,  y  el  verbo  estd  en  infinitive  6 
imperativo  ? 

118.  ^  En  qu6  tiempos  pierde  el  verbo  la  letra  final  cuando  se  le  afiade 
uno  de  los  pronombres  nos  A  est 

—  I  Con  que  objeto  se  hace  esto  ? 

119.  ^Cuando  podr4  colocarse  el  pronombre  complemento  directo 
despues  del  verbo  en  el  modo  indicativo  6  subjuntivo  ? 


EECAPITULACION.  373 

120.  Cuando  un  verbo  rija  a  otro  en  infinitivo,  i  en  d6nde  se  colocara 
el  pronombre  objeto  ? 

121.  I  Que  caso  rigen  las  preposiciones  expresas  ? 

122.  I  Qu6  se  nota  cuando  la  preposicion  con  antecede  d  los  pronom- 
bres  mij  ti,  %%  ? 

123.  I  Cuando  se  usa  de  la  preposicion  entre  con  el  caso  nominativo  ? 

]      124.  I  Qu6  pronombre  complemento  {i.  e.^  1st  objective  or  2d  objec- 
'tive  case)  se  usa  despues  de  los  comparativos  ? 

125.  Cuando  en  ingles  el  caso  objetivo  de  la  primera  6  segunda  per- 
sona es  el  regimen  del  verbo  6  de  la  preposicion  to^  tacita  (understood) 
6  expresa,  i  como  se  traduce  ? 

126.  I  C6mo  se  traduce  el  complemento  indirecto  ingles  de  la  tercera 
persona  ? 


LECCIOIT    XXYII. 

127.  Cuando  la  tercera  persona  va  regida  de  la  preposicion  to  en 
ingles,  tacita  6  expresa,  siendo  el  regimen  del  verbo  un  pronombre  de  la 
tercera  persona,  g  por  que  palabra  se  traduce  ? 

—  I  Cual  es  la  razon  de  esto  ? 

128.  En  caso  de  encontrarse  en  una  sentencia  dos  pronombres,  uno 
complemento  directo  j  el  otro  indirecto,  i  cual  se  coloca  primero  ? 

129.  I Y  cudndo  el  regimen  del  verbo  es  un  pronombre  reflexivo  ? 

130.  I  Qu6  se  observa  cuando,  para  dar  mas  energia  d  la  frase,  se  ponen 
dos  pronombres  de  la  misma  persona  ? 

131.  g  Qu6  debe  observarse  con  respecto  a  las  frases,  a  el  quiero^  a  t% 
amof 

132.  I  Qu6  se  debe  tener  presente  para  no  confundir  los  pronombres 
personales  e?,  la.  lo^  los  j  las^  con  los  articulos  eZ,  Za,  lo^  los  y  las  f 

133.  I  Para  qu6  sirve  el  adjetivo  mismo  ? 


LECCIOK    XXVIII. 

134.  I  Cuando  se  usa  el  imperfecto  f 

135.  ^Cuando  se  usa  el  pltLscuamperfecto? 


374  EECAPITULACION. 

136.  I  C6mo  se  traducen  las  expresiones  to  have  just  j  tohe  jttst  de- 

lante  de  un  participio  pasado  ? 

♦ 

LECCION    XXIX. 

137.  I  Caando  se  usa  el  pret^rito  anterior  ? 

138.  ^De  donde  se  derivan  los  adverbios  de  modo  y  calidad  ? 

139.  iC6mo  se  forman  los  adverbios  que  se  derivan  de  adjelivos? 

140.  I  Qu6  adverbios  admiten  grados  de  comparacion  ? 

141.  ^Qu6  adverbios  pueden  sustituirse  sin  cambiar  de  significado? 


LEOCION    XXX. 

142.  I  Qu6  son  verbos  impersonales  ? 

143.  I  En  qu6  caso  se  usan  los  verbos  amaneeer  j  anochecer  en  las  tres 
personas  ? 

144.  I  C6mo  se  traducen  en  ingl6s  los  verbos  hdber  y  Jiacer  cuando  se 
usan  corao  impersonales  ? 

—  I  Qu6  se  observa  con  respecto  4  la  primera  persona  del  presente  de 
indicativo  del  verbo  haher^  usado  impersonalmente  ? 

—  I  Hay  otros  verbos  que  pueden  usarse  como  impersonales  ? 

145.  ^En  qu6  caso  no  se  traduce  el  pronombre  ingl6s  itf 

—  i  Kequieren  articulo  los  nombres  tomados  en  sentido  indefinido  ? 

—  I  Toman  el  articulo  los  nombres  nsados  en  toda  la  extension  de  su 
significado? 

146.  jLlevan  articulo  los  nombres  de  naciones,  paises,   provincias,- 
montes,  rios  y  estaciones  ? 

147.  I  Cudndo  no  admiten  articulo  los  nombrej  de  naciones,  paises  y 
provincias,  etc. 

—  I  Cudles  requieren  siempre  el  articulo  ? 


LECOION    XXXI. 

148.  I  C6mo  se  conjuga  el  verbo  gustar  cuando  significa  to  please  t 

149.  I  Qu6  significa  el  verbo  gustar  seguido  de  la  preposicion  de  t 

150.  I  Qu6  significa  y  c6mo  se  coiyuga  el  verbo  gustar  como  verbo 
aotivo? 


RECAPITULACION.  375 

151.  ^  Qu6  otros  verbos  requieren  la  misma  construccion  idiomdtica 
del  verbo  gtcstar  ? 

152.  I  Qu6  se  observa  en  la  conjugacion  del  verbo  ^e«ar  cnando  signl- 
fica  to  regret  ? 


LECCIOX    XXXII. 

153.  I  C6mo  se  forma  la  voz  pasiva  ? 

—  I  Cuando  se  forma  con  el  verbo  estar  ? 

154.  j  En  qu6  caso  no  podra  usarse  la  voz  pasiva  con  el  verbo  ser  en 
el  presente  y  el  imperfecto  de  indicativo  ? 

155.  I  Cuando  se  usara  de  la  preposicion  de  y  cuando  de  por  en  la  voz 
pasiva  ? 

156-157.  ^En  qu6  casos  se  forma  la  voz  pasiva  con  el  pronombre  sef 


LEOCIOl^    XXXIII. 

158.  I  C6mo  se  conjugan  los  verbos  reflexivos  ? 

159.  I  Cudndo  se  usa  la  forma  reflexiva  ? 

160.  },  C6mo  se  conjugan  los  verbos  reciprocos  ? 


LEOCIOK    XXXIY. 

161.  g  Que  constituye  la  irregulandad  de  los  verbos  ? 

162.  I  Qu6  debe  tenerse  presente  para  no  confundir  con  los  verbos 
irregulares  algunos  que  aunque  sufren  un  cambio  ortografico  no  dejan  por 
eso  de  ser  regulares  ? 

163.  I  Qu6  cambio  sufren  los  verbos  que  acaban  en  eer  ? 

164.  I  Qu6  cambio  se  nota  en  los  que  acaban  en  uir  ? 

165.  ^En  cuantas  clases  6  grupos  se  dividen  los  verbos  irregulares? 

166.  I  Qu6  se  observa  en  la  construccion  del  verbo  pagar  ? 


LECCION    XXXY. 

167.  jCual  es  la  irregularidad  del  verbo  acostar  ? 

168.  I  Cudndo  se  usa  el  modo  imperative  ? 


376  EECAPITULACION. 

169.  I  Qu^  letras  pierde,  y  en  qu6  personas,  el  modo  imperativo  cuando 
se  le  afiade  el  pronombres  tws  j  os  ? 

170.  I  En  d6nde  se  colocan  los  pronombres  en  espafiol  cnando  el  im- 
perativo se  usa  en  la  forma  negativa  ? 

171.  J  Puede  usarse  el  future  de  indicative  per  el  imperativo  ? 

172.  gC6mo  se  traducen  en  espafiol  los  adjetives  ingleses  acabades 
en  0U8  ? 

173.  ^  Y  los  nombres  y  adjetives  ingleses  que  acaban  en  ic  6  ical  t 


LEOOION    XXXVI. 

174.  I  QxxQ.  es  la  irregularidad  del  verbo  mover  f 

1 75.  Cuando  se  usa  del  se  come  pronombre  indefinido,  i  a  qud  palabraa 
corresponde  en  ingl6s  ? 

176.  I  Cudles  son  las  cuatro  funciones  que  desempefia  el  pronombre  se  t 

177.  jC6mo  se  traducen  en  espafiol  los  nombres  ingleses  que  acaban 
en  tyf 

—  ^  A  qu6  genero  pertenecen  estos  nombres  ? 

178.  I  Qu6  peculiaridad  se  nota  en  el  verbo  doler  f 


LECCION    XXXVII. 
179.  I  Cudl  es  la  irregularidad  del  verbo  atendert 
180-181-182-183.  I  Oudnde  se  emplea  el  modo  subjuntivo  ? 

184.  I  Cuando  se  usa  el  presente  de  subjuntivo  ? 

185.  I  Cu4nde  se  usa  el  perfecte  de  subjuntivo  ? 


LECCIOIT    XXXVIII. 

186.  I  Tienen  los  verbes  espafioles  etro  participio  ademds  del  pasade  ? 
—  iQu6  terminacion  tienen  los  participles  presentes,  y  c6me  se  usant 

187.  i  Cudndo  se  usan  los  gerundios  ? 

188.  jCudl  es  el  auxiliar  de  los  gerundios? 

189.  I  C6mo  se  traduce  en  espafiol  el  participio  presente  ingUs,  pre* 
cedide  de  una  preposicion  ? 

190.  J  Puede  usarse  el  infinitive  come  nembre  verbal? 


EECAPITULACION.  377 

191.  ^  C6mo  se  traduce  en  ingles  el  infinitivo  espaiiol,  regido  por  otro 
verbo? 


LEOOIOIsr    XXXIX. 

192.  I  Cual  es  la  irregularidad  del  verbo  pedir  f 

193.  ^Cuales  son  las  formas  mas  usuales  para  saludart 


LEOOION    XL. 

194.  I  Cual  es  la  irregularidad  del  verbo  conducirf 

195.  I  Qu6  se  nota  sobre  la  palabra  segun  f 

196.  i  C6mo  conouerdan  los  nombres  colectivos  ? 


en 


LEOOION    XLI. 

197.  ^Qu6  son  verbos  defectives? 

198.  ^En  qu6  personas  y  cuando  se  usa  el  verbo  yaceri 

199.  jEn  qu6  tiempos  se  usa  el  verbo  soler  j  qu6  peculittridad  se  nota 
61? 

200.  I  Qu6  significaoion  tiene  la  preposicion  desde  f 

201.  I  C6mo  se  usa  la  preposicion  contra  ? 

202.  I  Cual  es  la  significacion  de  la  preposicion  sdbref 

203.  I  Cual  es  la  significacion  de  la  preposicion  tras  f 

204.  I  Cuando  se  usa  de  la  conjuncion  pues  ? 

* 
LEOOIOIT    XLII 

205.  J  En  que  se  dividen  las  conjunciones? 

206.  I  Qu6  debe  observarse  acerca  del  regimen  de  las  conjunciones  ? 

207.  I  Qu6  conjunciones  rigen  el  verbo  al  modo  subjuntivo  ? 

208.  I  Cuales  le  rigen  al  modo  infinitivo  ? 

209.  J  Oudles  le  rigen  al  modo  indicativo  ? 


378  EECAPITXJLACION. 

LECCION    XLIII. 

210.  ^Cuando  se  eniplea  el  imperfecto  de  subjantivo,  y  cuAndo  el 
pluscuamperfecto  ? 

211.  ^C6mo  se  traducen  en  espaliol  los  auxiliares  wiay,  mighty  can, 
couldy  loill^  would  v  should  ? 

212.  ^De  qu6  manera  expresa  la  accion  del  verbo  el  imperfecto  de 
subjuntivo? 

213.  J  De  qu6  macera  la  representa  el  pluscuamperfecto  ? 


LECCION    XLIV. 

214.  iQu6  son  nombres  aumentativos  y  diminutivos,  y  c6mo  se 
forman  ? 

215.  ^Hay  algunos  nombres  que  forman  sus  diminutivos  con  otras 
terminaciones  distintas  de  las  designadas  por  este  objeto  ? 

216.  I  Pueden  formarse  diminutivos  con  otras  partes  de  la  oracion  ? 

21 V.  ^  Qu6  nombres  primitivos  no  admiten  algunas  de  las  terminaciones 
designadas  ? 

218.  J  A  qu6  nombres  se  designa  con  el  de  despreciativosf 


LEOCION    XLV. 

219.  I  C6mo  representa  la  accion  del  verbo  el  futuro  simple  de  sub- 
juntivo ? 

220.  I  Cuando  puede  sustituirse  el  presente  de  subjuntivo  al  futuro 
simple  ? 

221.  gComo  representa  la  accion  del  verbo  el  futuro  compuesto  de 

subjuntivo? 

222.  I  Cudndo  puede  sustituirsele  el  perfecto  de  subjuntivo  ? 

223.  I  Qu6  debe  tenerse  presente  para  no  confundir  el  imperfecto  y 
pluscuamperfecto  del  modo  subjuntivo,  con  el  futuro  simple  y  compuesto 
del  mismo  modo  ? 

224.  Cuando  el  verbo  que  estd  en  futuro  simple  6  compuesto  funciona 
como  verbo  determinante  l  d  qu6  modo  y  tiempos  puede  regir  al  verbo 
dcterminado  ? 


EECAPITULACION.  379 

LECCION    XLVI. 

225-226,  I  Qu6  son  conjunciones,  j  cual  es  el  significado  de  las  prin- 
cipales  ? 


LECCIOiT    XLYII. 

227.  I  Qu6  partes  de  la  oracion  pueden  Uevar  articulo  ? 

228.  ^Llevan  articulo  los  nombres  comunes  que  se  usan  en  toda  la 
extension  de  su  significacion  ? 

229.  ^Se  pone  articulo  delante  de  los  nombres  de  imperios,  reinos, 
provincias  y  paises  ? 

—  I  Ouando  se  omite  ? 

230.  I  Cuando  reqnieren  articulo  los  nombres  de  medidas,  pesos,  &c. 

231.  I  Cuando  se  repite  el  articulo  ? 

232.  I  En  que  case  se  pone  el  articulo  delante  de  los  nombres  que 
expresan  rango,  oficio,  profesion  6  titulo  de  personas  ? 

233.  I  En  qu6  caso  se  usa  el  articulo  en  lugar  del  adjetivo  posesivo  ? 

234.  I  En  qu6  caso  se  usa  el  articulo,  como  en  ingles  ? 


LEOCION    XLYIII. 

235.  I  Como  se  corresponden  los  verbos  cuando  estan  unidos  por  un 
relativo  ? 

236.  I  Cudndo  se  pone  en  infinitivo  el  verbo  determinado  ? 

237.  Si  el  verbo  determinante  fuere  ser,  6  cualquiera  de  los  imperso- 
nales,  i  en  qu6  modo  se  pondra  el  verbo  determinado,  en  el  caso  de  care- 
cer  este  de  sugeto  ? 

—  I  Porqu^  sucede  esto  asi  ? 

238.  Y  cuando  dicbo  verbo  tuviere  sugeto,  i  en  qu6  modo  se  pondra  ? 

—  Los  verbos  que  expresan  mandato,  i  a  qu6  modo  rigen  el  verbo 
determinado  ? 

239.  Cnando  el  verbo  determinante  esta  en  infiuitivo,  en  presente  6 
futuro  de  indicativo,  6  en  imperativo  unido  al  verbo  determinado  por 
una  conjuncion  i  en  que  modo  se  pone  este  liltimo  ? 

240.  I A  qu6  modo  y  en  qu4  tiempos  rlge  aJ  verbo  determinado  cI 


380  EECAPITULACION. 

determinante,  cuando  este  liltimo  se  encuentra  en  el  pret^iito  indefinido 
6  en  el  future  compuesto  de  indicative  ? 

241.  Cuando  el  nominativo  es  el  mismo  para  dmbos  verbos  y  el  de- 
terminante se  encuentra  en  indicative,  ^  4  que  modo  rige  este  al  deter- 
minado  ? 


LECCION    XLIX. 

242.  I  Qu6  son  n  ombres  derivados  ? 

243,  244,  245,  246,  247,  248,  249,  250,  251,  252.  j  Qu6  denotan,  y 
cuales  son  las  principales  terminaciones  ? 


LEOOION    L. 
253.  1 06mo  se  forman  los  nombres  compuestos? 


LECOION    LI. 

254.  I  Oual  es  la  construccion  natural  ? 
256.  I  Cu41  es  la  figurada  ? 

256.  I  De  cudntos  modos  puede  construirse  una  frase  ? 

257.  I  Qu6  construccion  es  la  preferible  ? 


LEOOION    LII. 

258.  I  Conservan  algunos  participios  el  regimen  de  sus  verbos  ? 

259.  I  Oudl  es  la  concordancia  del  participio  pasado  ? 

260.  Ouando  un  verbo  tiene  dos  participios  pasados,  uno  regular  y 
otro  irregular,  j  c6mo  se  emplcan  ? 

261.  I  Ou^es  son  los  participios  pasados  irregulares  que  se  pueden 
nsar  con  el  verbo  haber  ? 

262.  i  Qu6  irregularidad  peculiar  tiene  el  verbo  morirt 

263.  I  Ilay  algunos  participios  pasados  6  pasivos  que  toman  una  signi- 
ficacion  activa? 


BECAPITULACION.  381 

264.  I  Pneden  algunos  participios  pasados  hacer  las  veces  de  sustan- 
tivo? 

265.  I  Qu6  se  debe  observar  acerca  de  otros  tiempos  que  algunos  gra- 
maticos  agregan  al  modo  infiiiitivo  ? 


LEOCION    LIII. 

266.  ^  Qu6  son  modismos  6  idiotismos  ? 

—  I  C6mo  se  traducen  en  espaflol  las  frases  en  que  la  preposicion 
inglesa  toma  un  significado  diferente  de  aquel  que  generalmente  se  le 
atribuje  ? 


LEOOION    LIV. 

267.  I  C6mo  se  traducen  en  espafiol  las  conjunciones  inglesas  que  se 
tisan  frecuentemente  en  lugar  de  otras  palabras  ? 

268.  I  Hay  tambien  en  espafiol  conjunciones  que  se  usan  en  lugar  de 
otras  palabras? 

—  I  Cuales  son  los  principales  usos  de  la  conjunoion  si  f 


LEOOION    LV. 
269.  J  Cuales  son  los  principales  usos  de  la  conjuncion  que  f 


LEOCIO:^'    LYI. 

270.  J  Cuales  son  las  formas  mas  usuales  para  principiar  j  acabar 
cartas  ? 


LECCION    LYII. 

271.  jQu6  se  advierte  acerca  de  las  preposiciones  que  cambian  su 
significado  de  los  verbos  a  que  se  juntan  ? 


LECCION    LVIII. 

272.  I  C6mo  se  traducen  los  verbos  to  le  glad  y  to  he  rejoiced  at  f 


382  EECAPITULACION. 

273.  1 06mo  se  traducen  los  verbos  to  he  sorry  y  to  grieve  t 

274.  I  C6mo  se  emplea  el  verbo  caber  f 


LECOION    LIX. 
275.  I A  qu6  modimos  se  prestan  los  verbos  caer,  dar,  decir  j  echar  t 


LEOOION    LX. 

276.  I  Cudles  son  los  principales  idiotismos  k  qne  se  prestan  los  verbos 
entrar^  hacer^  ir,  llevar,  mandar^  oler  d,  saber  d,  salir^  servir^  tardar  y 


COMPLETE    LIST 

OF  THE 

CONJUGATIONS  OF  ALL  THE  SPANISH  VEEBS,  AUXILIARY,  EEGULAE,  XR- 

REGULAR,  REFLECTIVE,  IMPERSONAL  AND  DEFECTIVE,  WITH 

AN  EXAMPLE  OF  THE  PASSIVE  VOICE. 


ATTXILIARY  VEEBS. 

INFINITIVE. 

PEESENT. 


To  Jiate. 


Haber. 


Tener. 


I      Ser. 


Tole. 


Estar. 


GEEUND. 

Having 

. 

Being. 

Habiendo. 

Teniendo. 

1      Siendo. 

PAST  PAETICIPLE. 

Estando. 

Had. 

Been. 

Habido. 

Tenido. 

1      Sido. 
INDICATIVE. 

PEESENT. 

Estado. 

I  Time. 

I  am. 

1.  He. 

Tengo. 

Soy. 

Estoy. 

2.  Has. 

Tienes. 

Eres. 

Estas. 

8.  Ha. 

Tiene. 

Es. 

Esta 

1.  Hemos. 

Tenemos. 

Somos. 

Estamos. 

2.  Habeis. 

Teneis. 

Sois. 

Estais. 

8.  Han. 

Tienen. 

Son. 

Estan. 

IMPEEFECT. 

lUd. 

I  was. 

1.  Habia. 

Tenia. 

Era. 

Estaba. 

2.  Habias. 

Tenias. 

Eras. 

Estabas, 

8.  Habia. 

Tenia. 

Era. 

Estaba. 

384 


CONJUGATIONS. 


1.  Habiamos. 

2.  Habiais. 
8.  Habian. 


Teniamos. 

Teniais. 

Tenian. 


Eramos. 

Erais. 

Eran. 


Estabamos. 

Estabais. 

Estabao. 


/  had. 

1.  Hube.  Tu^e. 

2.  Hubiste.  Tuviste. 

3.  Hubo.  Tuvo. 


PEETERIT  DEFINITE. 

I  was. 

Fui.  Estuve. 

Fuiste.  Estuviste. 

Fu6.  Estuvo. 


1.  Habimos.         Tuvimos. 

Fuiraos. 

Estnvimos. 

2.  Hubisteis.         Tuvisteis. 

Fuisteis. 

Estuvisteis. 

3.  Hubieron.        Tuvieron. 

Fueron. 

Estuvieron. 

FTITTJBB 

SIMPLE. 

/  shall  have. 

I  shall  le. 

1.  Habr6.             Tendr6. 

Ser6. 

Estar6. 

2.  Habrds.            Tendrds. 

Serds. 

Estards. 

3.  Habrl             Teiidrd. 

Serd. 

Estard. 

1.  Habr^mos.       Tendr^mos. 

Ser6mos. 

Estar^mos. 

2.  Habr^is.           Tendr^is. 

Sereis. 

Estar6is. 

8.  Habrdn.           Tendran. 

IMPER 

Serdn. 
ATIYE. 

Estardn. 

Let  me  have. 

Let  mi 

)le. 

2.  Have  thou.          Ten  tti. 

S6. 

Estd. 

3.  Let  him  have.      Tenga  61. 

Sea. 

Est6. 

1.  Let  ns  have.        Tengamos. 

Seamos. 

Estemos. 

2.  Have  ye.              Tened. 

Sed. 

Estad. 

8.  Let  them  have.    Tengan. 

Sean. 

Esten. 

SUBJUJ 

ACTIVE. 

PEES 

ENT. 

I  may  have. 

I  may 

le. 

1.  Haya.              Tenga. 

Sea. 

Est4. 

2.  Hayaa.             Tengas. 

Seas. 

Estes. 

3.  Haya.              Tenga. 

Sea. 

E8t6. 

1.  Hayamos.         Tengamos. 

Seamos. 

Estemot, 

2.  Hayais.            Tengms. 

Seais. 

Esteis. 

3.  Hayan.            Tengan. 

Sean. 

Esten. 

CONJUGATIONS. 


385 


IMPEEFECT. — First  Termination.* 

* 

I  would  have. 

I  would  he. 

1. 

Habria. 

Tendria. 

Seria. 

Estaria. 

2. 

Habrias. 

Tendrias. 

Serias. 

Estarias. 

8. 

Habria. 

Tendria. 

Seria. 

Estaria. 

1. 

Habriamos. 

Tendriamos. 

Seriaraos. 

Estariamos. 

2. 

Habriais. 

Tendi'iais. 

Seriais. 

Estariais. 

3. 

Habrian. 

Tendrian. 

Serian. 

Estarian. 

Second  Termination. 
I  would  have.  I  would  he, 

1.  Hubiera.  Tuviera.  Euera.  Estuviera. 


2. 

Hubierais. 

Tuvieras. 

Fueras. 

Estuvieras. 

3. 

Hubiera. 

Tuviera. 

Fuera. 

Estuviera. 

1. 

Hubieraraos. 

Tuvieramos. 

Fueramos. 

Estuvieramos. 

2. 

Hubierais. 

Tuvierais. 

Fuerais. 

Estuvierais. 

3. 

Hubieran. 

Tuvieran. 

Third  Tei 

Fueraii. 
^mination. 

Estuvieran. 

I  should  have. 

I  should  le. 

1. 

Hubiese. 

Tuviese. 

Fuese. 

Estuviese. 

2. 

Hubieses. 

Tuvieses. 

Fueses. 

Estuvieses. 

3, 

Hubiese. 

Tuviese. 

Fuese. 

Estuviese. 

1.  Hubieseraos.     Tuvieseraos. 

2.  Hubieseis.        Tuvieseis. 

3.  Hubiesen.         Tuviesen. 


Fuesemos.         Estuviesemos. 
Fueseis.  Estuvieseis. 

Fuesen.  Estuviesen. 


FUTUEE. 


I  might  or  should  have. 

1.  Hubiere.  Tuviere. 

2.  Hubieres.         Tuvieres. 

3.  Hubiere.  Tuviere. 


I  might  or  should  le. 
Fuere.  Estuviere. 

Fueres.  Estuvieres. 

Fuere.  Estuviere. 


1.  Hubieremos.     Tuvieremos. 

2.  Hubiereis.         Tuviereis. 

3.  Hubieren.         Tuvieren. 


Fueremos.         Estuvieremos. 
Fuereis.  Estuviereis. 

Fueren.  Estuvieren. 


*  It  will  be  observed  that,  dlfTering  from  almost  all  other  grammars,  we  give  ria  as  the 
first  termination,  this  order  appearing  to  us  more  logical  and,  above  all,  more  grammatical, 
and  more  in  accordance  with  the  signiQcation  and  uses  of  the  three  terminations. 

17 


386 


CONJUGATIONS. 


MODELS  OF  THE  THEEE  REGULAR  CONJUGATIONS. 
FIRST  CONJUGATION. 


Hablar. 

Hablando. 

Hablado. 


Ilablo. 

Hablas. 

Habla. 


1.  Hablaba. 


Hablabas. 
Hablaba. 


r. 
I  speak. 


INFINITIVE. 

I         To  speak. 


GEBUND. 


Speaking. 


PAST   PAETICIPLE. 

I         Spoken. 
INDICATIYE. 

PEE8ENT. 


Plural 

1.  Hablamos. 

2.  Hablais. 

3.  Hablan. 


lAlPEEFECT. 


I  spoke,  was 
speaking,  &c. 


1.  Hablabamoa» 

2.  Hablabais. 

3.  Hablaban. 


PRETERIT  DEFINITE. 


EahU. 

Hablaste. 

Habl6. 


1.  Hablar^. 


2. 


Ilablards. 
Hablari. 


Habla. 
liable. 


I  spoke. 


1.  Hablamos. 

2.  Hablasteis, 

3.  Hablaron. 


FUTURE   SIMPLE. 

I  shall  or  will  l.  Hablar^raos. 


speak. 


Speak  (thou). 


2.  Hablar^is. 

3.  IlablarAn. 


IMPERATIVE. 

1.  Ilablemos. 

2.  Hablad. 

3.  Hablen. 


1.  Hable. 

2.  Hables. 

3.  Hable. 


1.  Hablaria. 

2.  Hablarias. 

3.  Hablaria. 


1.  Hablara. 


2.  Hablaras. 

3.  Hablara. 


CONJUGATIONS, 
SUBJUNCTIVE. 


387 


PRESENT. 


I  may  speak. 


1.  Hablemos. 

2.  Hableis. 

3.  Hablen. 


iMPEEFECT. — First  Termination. 


I  should  or  would 
speak. 


1.  Hablariamos. 

2.  Hablariais. 

3.  Hablarian. 


Second  Termination. 


I  might,  could, 
would,  or  should 


1.  Hablaramos. 


2.  Hablarais. 

3.  Hablaran. 


Third  Termination. 


1.  Hablase.  I  might,  &c., 


2.  Hablases. 

3.  Hablase. 


1.  Hablasemos. 

2.  Hablaseis. 

3.  Hablasen. 


rUTUEK. 


1.  Hablare. 

2.  Hablares. 

3.  Hablare. 


I  might,  &c., 
speak. 


Aprender. 

Aprendiendo. 

Aprendido. 


1.  Hablaremos. 

2.  Hablareis. 

3.  Hablaren. 


SECOND  COXJCGATIOBf. 

INFINITIVE. 

I         To  learn. 

GEEUOT). 

I         Learning. 

PAST   PAETICIPLE. 

I         Learned. 


388 


CONJUGATIONS. 


INDICATIVE. 

PRESENT. 

1.  Aprendo. 

2.  Aprendes. 

3.  Aprende. 

I  learn. 

1.  Aprenderaoa, 

2.  Aprendeis. 

3.  Aprenden. 

IMPEEFECT. 

1.  Aprendia. 

2.  Aprendias. 

3.  Aprendia. 

I  learned,  was 
learning,  &c. 

1.  AprendiamosL 

2.  Aprendiais. 

3.  Aprendian. 

PRETEEIT   DEFINITE. 

1.  Aprendi. 

2.  Aprendiste. 

3.  Aprendi6. 

I  learned. 

1.  Aprendimos. 

2.  Aprendisteis. 

3.  Aprendieron. 

FUTURE  BIMPLE. 

1.  Aprender6. 

2.  Aprenderas. 
8.  Aprenderd. 

I  shall  or  will 
learn. 

1.  Aprenderemoa. 

2.  Aprender^is. 

3.  Aprenderdn. 

IMPERATIVE. 

2.  Aprende. 
8.  Aprenda. 

Learn  (thou). 

1.  Aprendaraos. 

2.  Aprended. 

3.  Aprendnn. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PRESENT. 

1.  Aprenda. 

2.  Aprendas. 
8.  Aprenda. 

I  may  learn. 

1.  Aprendamos. 

2.  Aprendais. 
8.  Aprendan. 

IMPERFECT. — First  Termination. 

1.  Aprenderia. 

2.  Aprenderias. 
8.  Aprenderia. 

I  would  or  should 
learn. 

1.  Aprenderiamos. 

2.  Aprenderiais. 

3.  Aprenderian. 

CONJUGATIONS. 


889 


Second  Termination. 


1.  Aprendiera. 

I  might,  could, 
would,  or  should 
learn. 

1.  Aprendieramos. 

2.  Aprendieras. 

2.  Aprendierais. 

3.  Aprendiera. 

3.  Aprendieran. 

Third  Termination. 

1.  Aprendiese. 

I  might,  &c., 
learn. 

1.  Aprendiesemos. 

2.  Aprendieses. 

2.  Aprendieseis. 

3.  Aprendiese. 

3.  Aprendiesen. 

FUTIJEE. 

1.  Aprendiere. 

I  might,  &c., 
learn. 

1.  Aprendieremos. 

2.  Aprendieres. 

2.  Aprendiereis. 

3.  Aprendiere. 

3.  Aprendieren. 

THIBD  CONJUGATION. 

INFINITIVE. 

Escribir. 

1          To  write. 

GEBUND. 

Escribiendo 

1          Writing. 

PAST   PARTICIPLE. 

Escrito* 

1          Written. 

INDICATIVE. 

PRESENT. 

1.  Escribo. 

I  write. 

1.  Escribimos. 

2.  Escribes. 

2.  Escribis. 

3.  Escribe. 

3.  Escriben. 

IMPERFECT. 

1.  Escribia. 

I  wrote,  was 
writing. 

1.  Escribiamos. 

2.  Escribias. 

2.  Escribiais. 

3.  Escribia. 

3.  Escribian. 

This  is  the  only  instance  of  irregularity  in  the  verb  Escribir. 


390 


CONJUGATIONS 


PEETEEIT   DEFINITE. 

1.  Escribi.  I  wrote.  1.  Escribimos. 

2.  Escribisto.  2.  Escribisteis. 

3.  Escribi6.  3.  Escribieron. 


FUTURE   SIMPLE. 


1.  Escribir^. 

2.  Escribiras. 

3.  Escribii'd. 


I  shall  (or  will) 
write. 


1.  Escribir^moa. 

2.  Escribir^is. 

3.  Escribirdn. 


2.  Escribe. 
8.  Escriba. 


1.  Escriba. 

2.  Escribas. 

3.  Escriba. 


1.  Escribiria. 

2.  Escribirias. 

3.  Escribiria. 

1.  Escribiera. 


2.  Escribieras. 

3.  Escribiera. 


1.  Escribiese. 


2.  Escribieses. 

3.  Escribiese. 


Write  (thou). 
Let  him,   &c. 
write. 


IMPERATIVE. 

1.  EscribamoB. 

2.  Escribid. 

3.  Escriban. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PKESiNT. 


I  may  write. 


1.  Escribamos. 

2.  Escribais. 

3.  Escriban. 


IMPEEFEOT. — First  Termination. 


I     would     (or 
should)  write. 


1.  Escribiriamoa. 

2.  Escribiriais. 

3.  Escribirian. 


Second  Termination. 


I  might,  could, 
would,  or  should 
write. 


1.  Escribieramos. 


2.  Escribierais. 

3.  Escribieran. 


Third  Termination. 


I  might,  could, 
would,  or  should 
write. 


1.  Escribiesemos, 


2.  Escribieseis. 

3.  Escribiesen. 


CONJUG  ATI  ONS. 


391 


FUTCEE. 


1.  Escribiere. 

2.  Escribieres, 

3.  Escribiere. 


I    might,    &c., 
write. 


1.  Escribieremos. 

2.  Escribiereis. 

3.  Escribieren. 


COMPOUND   TEXSES. 

These  are  formed  bj  joining  the  several  tenses  of  the  auxiliary  haher 
to  the  past  participle  of  the  verb  expressing  the  action. 


INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

PEETERIT  INDEFINITE. 

I  have  spoTcen. 

To  he  hahlado. 

I  have  learned. 

To  he  aprendido. 

I  have  written. 

To  he  escrito. 

1. 

He 

hablado. 

Hemos           ^      hablado. 

2. 

Has 

aprendido. 

Habeis            I      aprendido. 

3. 

Ha 

. 

escrito. 

Han                J       escrito. 

PLUPE 

RFECT. 

I  had  spoken. 

To  hahia  hatlado. 

I  had  learned. 

To  habia  aprendido. 

I  had  written. 

To  habia  escrito. 

1. 

Habia 

hablado. 

Habiamos      ^       hablado. 

2. 

Habias 

aprendido. 

Habiais           I-      aprendido. 

3. 

Habia 

escrito. 

Habian          J       escrito. 

PEETEEIT   ANTERIOR. 


/  had  spoTcen. 

I  had  learned. 

I  had  written. 
Ilube  1      hablado. 

Hubiste         \      aprendido, 
Hnbo  j       escrito. 


To  hube  hablado. 

To  hube  aprendido. 

To  hube  escrito. 
Hubimos        -\      hablado. 
Hubisteis        I      aprendido. 
Hubieron       J       escrito. 


COMPOUND   FUTURE. 


I  shall  have  spoTcen. 
I  shall  have  learned. 
I  shall  have  written. 


1.  Habre 

^       hablado. 

2.  Habras 

aprendido. 

3.  Habra 

escrito.  * 

To  habre  hablado. 

To  habre  aprendido. 

To  habre  escrito. 
Habr^mos      ^       hablado. 
Habreis  I      aprendido. 

Habran  escrito. 


The  other  compound  tenses  are  cooiii^ated  in  like  manner. 


392 


CONJUGATIONS 


THE  SEVEN  PRINCIPAL  CLASSES  OF  lEREGXTLAR 
VERBS. 


FIRST 

CLASS. 

AUEKTAB. 

1 

To  hit  the  marh. 

INDICATIVE. 

PRF.fiENT. 

1.  Acierto. 

I  hit  the  mark. 

1.  Acertaraos. 

2.  Aciertas. 

2.  Acertais. 

3    Acierta. 

IMPER 

3.  Aciertan. 
iTIVE. 

1.  Acertemos. 

2.  Acierta. 

2."Acertad. 

3.  Acierte. 

SUBJUJ 

PKES 

3.  Acierten. 
fCTIVE. 

ENT. 

1.  Acierte. 

1.  Acertemos. 

2.  Aciertes. 

2.  Acerteis. 

3.  Acierte. 

3.  Acierten 

The  following 

verbs^  and  their  comp 

ounds^  are  conjugated  like  Acertar: 

Acrecentar. 

To  increase. 

Derrengar. 

To  break  the  back. 

Adestrar. 

To  render  skilful. 

Despernar. 

To  cut  off  the  lees. 

Alentar. 

To  breathe. 

Despertar. 

To  awake. 

Apacentar. 

To  feed. 

Desterrar. 

To  banish. 

Apretar. 

To  squeeze. 

Empedrar. 

To  pave. 

Arrendar. 

To  hire. 

Empezar. 

To  begin. 

Asentar. 

To  place. 

Encerrar. 

To  lock  up. 

Aserrar. 

To  saw. 

Encomendar. 

To  recommend. 

Aterrar. 

To  throw  down. 

Entcrrar. 

To  bury. 

Atestar. 

To  stuff. 

Escarmentar. 

To  take  warning. 

Atravesar. 

To  cross. 

Fregar. 

To  rub. 

Aventar. 

To  winnow. 

Gobernar. 

To  govern. 

Calentar. 

To  warm. 

Helar. 

To  freeze. 

Cegar. 

To  blind. 

Ilerrar. 

To  shoe. 

Cerrar. 

To  shut. 

Invemar. 

To  winter. 

Comcnzar. 

To  commence 

Mentar. 

To  mention. 

Concertar. 

To  agree. 

Merendar. 

To  take  a  coUatioa 

Confesar. 

To  confess. 

Negar. 

To  deny. 

Dccentar. 

To  taste  for  the 

Nevar. 

To  snow. 

first  time. 

Pcnsar. 

To  think. 

CONJUGATIONS 


393 


Quebiar. 

To  break. 

Sosegar. 

To  quiet 

Hecomendar. 

To  recommend. 

Soterrar. 

To  bury. 

Regar. 

To  water. 

Temblar. 

To  tremble. 

Reventar. 

To  burst. 

Tentar. 

To  tempt. 

Segar. 

To  cut  down. 

Trasegar. 

To  rake. 

Sembrar. 

To  sow. 

Tropezar. 

To  stumble. 

Sentar. 

To  set. 

SECOND  CLASS. 

ACOSTAB, 

To  put  in  led. 

INDICATIVE. 

PEESENT. 

1.  Acuesto. 

I  put  in  bed. 

1.  Acostamos. 

2.  Acuestas. 

2.  Acostais. 

3.  Acuesta. 

IMPER 

3.  Acuestan 
ATIVE. 

• 

1.  Acostemos. 

2.  Acuesta. 

2.  Acostad. 

3.  Acueste. 

SUBJUI 

3.  Acuesten 
rcTIVE. 

• 

PEES 

EXT. 

1.  Acueste. 

1.  Acostemos. 

2.  Acuestes. 

2.  Acosteis. 

3.  Acueste. 

3.  Acuesten 

• 

TJie  following 

verbs^  and  their  compi 

')unds^  are  conjugated  lilce  Acost^ 

Acordar. 

To  agree. 

Consolar. 

To  console. 

Agorar. 

To  divine. 

Contar. 

To  count. 

Almorzar. 

To  breakfast. 

Costar. 

To  cost. 

Amolar. 

To  grind. 

Degollar. 

To  behead. 

Aporcar. 

To  hoe. 

Demostrar. 

To  demonstrate. 

Apostar. 

To  bet. 

DescoUar. 

To  surpass. 

Aprobar. 

To  approve. 

Desconsolar. 

To  discourage. 

Asolar. 

To  waste. 

Desolar. 

To  desolate. 

Atronar. 

To  thunder. 

Desollar. 

To  skin. 

Avergonzar. 

To  shame. 

Desvergonzarse. 

To  be  impudent. 

Colar. 

To  strain. 

Emporcar. 

To  dirty. 

Colgar. 

To  hang. 

Eneordar. 

To  string. 

Comprobar. 

To  verify. 

Encontrar. 

To  meet. 

17^ 


394 


CONJUGATIONS 


Engrosar. 

To  engross. 

Resollar.                  To  breathe. 

Forzar. 

To  force. 

Rodar.                     To  rolL 

Holgar. 

To  rest. 

Rogar.                      To  entreat. 

Hollar. 

To  tread. 

Soldar.                      To  solder. 

Mostrar. 

To  show. 

Soltar.                      To  lessen. 

Poblar. 

To  people. 

Sonar.                       To  sound. 

Probar. 

To  prove. 

Sonar.                       To  dream. 

llecordar. 

To  remind. 

Tostar.                      To  toast. 

Recostar. 

To  lie  down 

. 

Trocar.                     To  barter. 

Regoldar. 

To  belch. 

Tronar.                     To  thunder. 

Renovar. 

To  renew. 

Volar.                       To  fly. 

Reprobar. 

To  reprove. 

Volcar.                    To  overturn. 

Rescontar. 

To  compens 

ate. 

THIRD  a.ASS. 

Moves. 

1              To  move, 
INDICATIVE. 

PEESEXT. 

1.  Muevo. 

1.  Movemos. 

2.  Mueves. 

2.  Moveis. 

3.  Mueve. 

3.  Mueven. 

IMPERATIVE. 

1.  Movamos. 

2.  Mueve. 

2.  Moved. 

3.  Mueva. 

3.  Muevan. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PEESENT. 

1.  Mueva. 

1.  Movamos. 

2.  Muevas. 

2.  Movais. 

3.  Mueva. 

3.  Muevan. 

The  following 

verU^  and  their  compounds^  are  conjugated  like  Movf 

Absolver. 

To  absolve. 

Morder.                     To  bite. 

Disolver. 

To  dissolve. 

Retorcer.                  To  twist  again. 

Doler. 

To  grieve. 

Solver.                      To  solve. 

LI  over. 

To  rain. 

Torcer.                     To  twist 

Molcr. 

To  grind. 

Volver.                   To  turn. 

FOURTH 

CLASS. 

Atendee. 


To  attend. 


CONJUGATIONS. 


395 


INDICATIVE. 

PRESENT. 

1.  Atiendo. 

1. 

Atendemos. 

2.  Atiendes 

2. 

Atendeis. 

3.  Atiende. 

3. 

Atienden. 

IMPERATIVE. 

1. 

Atendaraos. 

2.  Atiende. 

2. 

Atended. 

3.  Atienda. 

3. 

Atiendan. 

SUBJUNCTIVE 

PRESENT. 

1.  Atienda. 

1. 

Atendamos. 

2.  Atiendas 

2. 

Atendais. 

3.  Atienda. 

3. 

Atiendan. 

The  following  verhs^  and  their  compounds, 

have  the  same  irregularii 

as  Atender : 

Ascender. 

To  ascend. 

Entender.                To  understand. 

Cerner. 

To  sift. 

Extender.                 To  extend. 

Condescender. 

To  condescend. 

Heder. 

To  stink. 

Contender. 

To  contend 

Hender 

To  split. 

Defender. 

To  defend. 

Perder. 

To  lose. 

Desatender. 

To  neglect. 

Tender. 

To  stretch  out 

Descender. 

To  descend. 

Trascender.              To  transcend. 

Encender. 

To  kindle. 

Verier. 

To  pour  out. 

nFTH  CLASS. 

Sentir. 

1 

INDICATIVE. 

present. 

To/eel 

1.  Siento. 

1. 

Sentimos. 

2.  Sientes. 

2. 

Sentis. 

3.  Siente. 

3. 

Sienten. 

IMPERATIVE. 

1. 

Sintaraos. 

2.  Siente. 

2. 

Sentid. 

3.  Sienta. 

3. 

Sientan. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

present. 

1.  Sienta. 

1. 

Sintaraos. 

2.  Sientas. 

2. 

Sintais. 

3.  Sienta. 

3. 

Sientan. 

396 


CONJUGATIONS 


IMPERFECT. 

First  Termination. 

1.  Sentiria,  &c. 

Second  Termination. 

1.  Sintiera. 

1.  Sintieramos. 

2.  Sintieras. 

2.  Sintierais. 

3.  Sintiera. 

3.  Sintieran. 

Third  Termination. 

1.  Sintiese. 

1.  Sintiesemos. 

2.  Sintieses. 

2.  Sintieseis. 

3.  Sintiese. 

3.  feintiesen. 

FITTTTRE. 

1.  Sintiere. 

1          1.  Sintieremos. 

2.  Sintieres 

2.  Sintiereis. 

3.  Sintiere. 

3.  Sintieren. 

The  following  verhSy  and  their  compounds,  have  the  same  irregul 

as  Sentir: 

Adherir. 

To  adhere. 

Digerir.                    To  digest 

Advertir. 

To  advert. 

Herir.                       To  wound. 

Arrepentirsc. 

To  repent. 

Hervir.                      To  boil. 

Asentir. 

To  assent. 

Ingerir.                     To  ingraft 

Conferir. 

To  confer. 

Invertir.                   To  invert. 

Consentir. 

To  consent. 

Pervertir.                 To  pervert 

Controvertir. 

To  controvert 

Preferir.                   To  prefer. 

Convertir. 

To  convert. 

Referir.                    To  refer. 

Diferir. 

To  defer. 

Requerir.                 To  require. 

Diferir. 

To  diflfer. 

SIXTH  CLASS. 

Pedib. 

1              To  ash 
INDICATIVE. 

PRESENT. 

1.  Pido. 

1.  Pedimos, 

2.  Pides. 

2.  Pedis. 

3.  Pide. 

8.  Piden. 

PBETEKIT. 

1.  Pedi. 

1.  Pedimos. 

2.  Pediste. 

2.  Pedisteis. 

8.  Pidi6. 

8.  Pidieron. 

CONJUGATIONS. 


397 


IMPERATIVE. 

1.  Pidamos. 

2.  Pide. 

2.  Pedid. 

3.  Pida. 

3.  Pidan. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PEESENT. 

1.  Pida. 

1.  Pidamos. 

2.  Pidas. 

2.  Pidais. 

3.  Pida. 

3.  Pidan. 

IMPEEFECT.— i^iVsi  Termination, 
1.  Pediria,  &c. 


Second  Termination. 

1.  Pidiera.  1.  Pidieramos. 

2.  Pidieras.  .  2.  Pidierais. 

3.  Pidiera.  8.  Pidieran. 


1.  Pidiese. 

2.  Pidieses. 

3.  Pidiese. 


Third  Termination. 

1.  Pidiesemos. 

2.  Pidieseis. 

3.  Pidiesen. 


1.  Pidiere. 

2.  Pidieres. 

3.  Pidiere. 


FUTUEE. 


1.  Pidieremos. 

2.  Pidiereis. 

3.  Pidieren. 


The  following  verbs^  and  their  compounds^  have  the  same  irregularities 


as  Pedie  : 


Arrecir. 

Cenir. 

Colejir. 

Competir. 

Concebir. 

Constrenir. 

Derretir. 

Desleir. 

Elejir. 

Embestic. 


To  benumb. 
To  belt. 
To  collect. 
To  contend. 
To  conceive. 
To  constrain. 
To  melt. 
To  dissolve. 
To  elect. 
To  attack. 


Gemir. 

Medir. 

Regir. 

Rendir. 

Reiiir. 

Repetir. 

Seguir. 

Servir. 

Tenir. 

Vestir. 


To  groan. 
To  measure. 
To  rule. 
To  render. 
To  quarrel 
To  repeat. 
To  follow. 
To  serve. 
To  dye. 
To  dress. 


398 

CONJUG  ATI  ONS. 

SEVEiXTU  CUSS. 

CONDTTCTB. 

1              To  conduct. 

INDICATIVE. 

PRESENT. 

1.  Conduzco. 

2.  Conduces,  &c. 

1.  Conducimos. 

2.  Conducis,  &c. 

PRETERIT. 

1.  Conduje. 

2.  Condujiste. 

3.  Condujo. 

1.  Condujimos. 

2.  Condujisteis. 

3.  Condnjeron. 

IMPERATIVE. 

2.  Conduce. 

3.  Conduzca. 

1.  Conduzcaraos. 

2.  Conducid. 

3.  Conduzcan. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

. 

PRESENT. 

1.  Conduzca,  &c. 

1         1.  Conduzcaraos,  &c. 

IMPERFECT. — First  Termination, 

1.  Conduciria,  &c. 

1          1.  Conduciriamos,  &c. 

Second  Termination. 

1.  Condujera,  &c. 

1          1.  Condujcramos,  &c. 

Third  Termination. 

1.  Condujese,  &c. 

1         1.  Condujesemos,  &c. 

FUTURE. 

1.  Condujere,  &c. 

1          1.  Condujeremos,  &c. 

The  following  terbs  are  conjugated  like  Conducir  . 

Adncir.                     To  adduce. 
Deducir.                   To  deduce. 
Introducir.               To  introduce. 

Producir.                  To  produce. 
Reducir.                   To  reduce. 
Traducir.                 To  translate. 

N.  "R.—  Conocer,  and  all  verbs  ending  in  cer,  of  more  than  two  pyllablce.  follow  the 
irregularity  of  Condricir  in  the  present  indicative  and  Bubjunctive,  and  in  the  imperative. 
Elsewhere  regular. 


CONJUGATIONS 


399 


w. 

^ 
p^ 


r    g 

^. 

I 

vo3 

^ 

d 

i 

i 

% 

d 

U 

;2 

*s 

^  s 

'C 

;g 

'C 

s 

.S 

•a 

*G 

*c 

•rj 

M    .g 

'3 

*3 

'3 

'3 

'3 

•3 

"3 

'3 

*3 

& 

cy 

o^ 

^ 

o* 

a' 

cr 

cr 

cr 

cri 

■TS 

TJ 

■TJ 

13 

'^ 

'5 

13 

'O 

'O 

'C 

OS 

03 

03 

rt 

c3 

03 

03 

03 

03 

« 

crT 

xn 

wT 

aT 

oT 

.2" 

S 

.2 

tT 

oT 

•3 

*§ 

'i 

■§ 

>«o 

oT 

0 

CQ 

1 

'C 

a> 

:s 

■£^ 

!S 

'S 

;g 

•c 

*S 

'C 

!S 

^  '3 

*3 

'3 

'3 

*E 

'3 

•3 

'3 

•3 

'3 

=?  1 

'^     CT' 

cr 

cr 

cr 

sy 

cr" 

o^ 

cr 

a* 

CT- 

S 

'O 

'O 

'^ 

13 

'^ 

t3 

-13 

13 

•rj 

■73 

C3 

03 

:3 

03 

03 

03 

03 

03 

c3 

^ 

1 

o 

g 

1 

^2 

1 

1 

§ 

oT 
o 

o 

a 

.2 

ri  "C 

•a 

;c 

*c 

•c 

•§ 

*C 

•3 

•3 

"3 

'3 

*3 

f3 

•3 

'3 

•3 

*3 

a< 

o^ 

a* 

cr' 

^ 

& 

c 

o^ 

a* 

a* 

n3 

TJ 

'a 

'O 

•^ 

•73 

T3 

13 

'^ 

-a 

L     <i 

-^ 

<1 

<1 

<^ 

<1 

<1 

< 

-^ 

^ 

P^ 
P^ 

l-H 

o 

H 

02 


\\ 


S3  3  3 

a*  o^  CT- 

■^3  -^3  13 

^  -^  <1 


l1 


CO    '3 


% 

TS 


'3      U 


^3 


•3      '3 

T3         13 


i 


•e 


;a     :s     :g 


•s 

hi 

oi 

Q> 

•a 

•a 

•a 

'3 

•=5 

*3 

9 

rf* 

a* 

o^ 

rf 

T3 

'O 

■73 

Tl 

03 

a 

03 

e3 

.s"      2" 


►5    o    pui 


3 

<1 


n3 


I 


■73 


I 


ii 

•J 

•a 

iS 

:s 

'3 

3 

'3 

'3 

'p. 

cr" 

a- 

o* 

a* 

o- 

-o 

13 

13 

13 

'^ 

^ 

-< 

<1 

-< 

<1 

si 

l! 

tJ 

^ 

^ 

^ 

1 

2 

^ 

sf 

1 

V 

/ 

s 

•P9/U,9dwj 

p? 

e4 

H 

t^ 

B 

» 

t3 

fri 

n 

400 


CONJUGATIONS. 


1' 

g 

'1 

e 

T 

z/l 

W 

03 

P^ 

k 

^ 

1-3 

U) 

O     .ii 

w     ^ 

IRR 

to  W( 

1* 

3 
1 

1 

a      1 

1 

1 

A 

^ 

^ 

i 

H 

g 

Pm 

5 

i 

1 

1 

i  ^ 


.2       .o 


.2      43 
0 


1 

oT 

o 

1 

1 

f^ 

^ 

0 

^ 

^ 


09    -13 


3  0  0  0 

'2  73  Ts  -a 

S  fl  c  c 

«  es  08  eS 


O 

4 


ef 

rQ 

ea 


•E 


>►  ►  k 

Sis 

S        S        <=> 

03  08  eS 


i   s,  -s-  5 
<  ^  ti;  (? 


I  I 


^  'P9/J9dwj         Sf 


I 


CONJUGATIONS 


401 


i.2" 

¥ 

1 

*3 

•73" 

& 

g 

s 

i 

ei 

1 

U 

^ 

s 

es 

m 
es 

1 

« 

n 

oT 

rr- 

m 

0 

-  a 

s 

§ 

)js 

S 

i 

1 

s 
0 

a 

^ 

•3 
-< 

< 

^ 

1 

< 

^ 

4 

<i 

<i 

00     oa        'oa 
ei         ei 


O 


I     I.    ^     I 


.S3       .2 


f!;  'p9/MdlUJ        Ct, 


402 


CONJUGATIONS 


'B* 


K-H         (^  rO  lO 


^      a       o 
Js      .2      12       o 


J3 


m    pQ 


^    o 


s 

, 

, 

fl 

fl 

• 

a 

1 

1 

5? 

1 

1 

1 

3? 

g 

^ 

z? 

CO  '3 

ts 

'2 

-o 

'O 

TS 

t3 

1 

is 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

2" 

OB 

.2~ 

•N 

2 
'3 

.'S 

m 
g 

•N 

f 

1 

!§ 

^ 

^2 

1 

13^ 

8 

13 

es 

1 

5* 

'^'l 

1 

<v 

a 

g 

g 

1 

s 

'fl 

fl 

J 

^ 

^ 

^ 

JO 

^ 

^ 

^ 

^ 

pS 

t\ 

« 

•> 
» 

•> 

2 

0 

i 

.  a 

f 

C 
g 

J 

C 

1 

be 

•IN 

1 

a 

.2 

1 

a 

g 

g 

9 

4^ 

0 

0 

Si 

fl 

fl 

CJ 

r] 

«2 

-S 

D 

Q 

a> 

« 

« 

« 

« 

• 

• 

ea 

• 
9 

^2 

ei 

?*' 

,2 

fe 

I 

»•! 

1 

? 

1 

4f 

tf 

5 

1 

? 

i* 

4> 

c 

fj 

fl 

fl 

ca 

0 

fl 

fl 

fl 

O) 

s 

<D 

S 

c3 

3 

x> 

•^ 

J2 

^ 

Z 

^ 

^ 

•O 

•^ 

-^ 

^  •" 

1 

1 

«3 

i 

1 

i 

aT 

n 

4) 

73 

"a 

'O 

'3 

s 

t3 

*mr 

-3 

'O 

a 

a 

rt 

d 

fl 

fl 

fl 

^ 

^ 

ja 

1 

^ 

^ 

Z 

^ 

•< 
4  5 

•> 

vcT 

.^ 

g 

i 

2 

.2^ 
o 

n3 

4^ 

T3 

1 

1 

E 
1 

4> 

5» 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

fl 

1 

^  <^  ^ 


'pifj^mj 


CONJUGATIONS. 


403 


?  I 

5<       g 


'2       ft 


9 

I 
I 


S       v'        2 
tS      •'^       'N 


58      .2 
•1^      '^ 


4) 
•N 


I 


•pdfxddwj      fc^ 


404 


CONJUGATIONS. 


I   I    i" 
6    6    6 


•s     -c 


%<  en 


§ 

S 

1 

o 

i 

i 

1 

•  : 

1 

o 

g 

u 

§ 

•3 

o 

1 

O 

o 

o 

O 

6 

8    i 


5    ^ 


I    I     I 
^     fti     ^ 


■p^/u^wj       C^ 


^         CO 


CONJUGATIONS. 


405 


cc    eg 


(M    ^  as 


i 


o 

§     a 


§  §  g 

a       C  ^  ^ 

r^            rS  "S  .N 

"O             'O  rO  'O 


.2       -I 


c3  XI 

^  OS 


1 

o 

o 

2 

ti 

9 

V 

if 

s 

s 

s 

•g 


53      ^      ^ 


iS 


•c 


-i5        o 


^ 

U2 

» 

^ 

e8 

•a 

i 

2 

4^ 

9 

Is 

VN 

gj 

«r 

eS 

M 

•N 

•N 

o 

P 

Q 

ft 

ft 

ft 

ft 

§3 

ft 

^ 

^ 

Eh 

H 

H 

1 

I 

ci 

1 

1 

2 

'C3 

CO 

1 

•pifMdmi 

^ 

1 

t 

s 

>- 

E 

P 

5 

t-H 

^ 

406 


CiONJUGATIOXS, 


^3        rs 


-a 


I      11     I    I    t 


eS        J2  ^  as  u 

I  s   5*  =?  =? 

■X3  'O  no  173  ry 


Q 

0 

0 

1 

i 

O) 

CJ 

0 

5» 

» 

s» 

Q 

« 

« 

g    g 


4J      o 


1 1 1 


•      V 

.2 

d 

? 

CO     0 

0 

•!5 

h 

^ 

^ 

M     ■§ 


J 


OOP 


I 


C3     5      2      S      £ 

bi    t    ^    .Si    j: 
2    5    5*   5*   :? 


if  s 


5»  5»  » 


cf     <      2      S      2^ 

.N     .3     S»    S*    I? 

O       P       O       ft       Q 


'p^/u^uij 


CONJUGATIONS, 


407 


I       1 


I       1 


•I        ^        § 
I       0       (5 

■73         'O         no 


-^  I 


•SI        ^ 


i    i    i    t 

p       o       S       <: 


I       1      1      1 

i     0     a     BS 


5^ 


GQ 


f    s 


i   g 


•ii^  <X>  o  <V        f 

1 1 1 1  ^ 

'73  TS  ^3  'O        plj 


t-  •■-< 


6    I 


p 


s     e 


'p^/jsdwj 


408 


CONJUGATIONS. 


T 

CO 


« 


t 


& 

H 


8" 

o 


0 
0 

Hi 

CO     h 


H 


.2       ^      :5? 


B      J 
I      §5 


pq      » 


o 

S 

so 

t-t 

•l 


5  sS 


fell     ^"      .    -2 

r-t      «  So  So  & 

F     w     w     w 


I  .^'  I 


|)         go         §3         |)  ^ 


©  © 

s  a 

^  ^   If  If 

H           M  H 


I 


I       |)       I       ^ 


?      s     2 
ill    ;n      s 


g) 


|)        go        g)        S, 
«        iN        «N        <3 


fii    k; 


cti  'P^/u3diUJ        fe, 


CONJUGATIONS 


409 


1j 


B      ^ 


f 

o 

a 

§ 

o*^ 

g 

*2 

Q 

t 

§ 

g 

g 

m 

pE) 

W 

ps] 

i  i 


•E 


H 


S    i 


o 
S 

i 

1 

2 

1 

1 

^ 

^ 

» 

^.  I 


5 

-§ 

o" 

u 

g 

§ 

(^ 

;^ 

W 

H 

S 

k 

. 

■< 

H 

g 

pu 

S 

o 

Ph 

e         fc         fc 


^-  S 


Pi  b 


cT 

-o 

of 

"S 

^ 

u 

fc 

P4 

© 

(^ 

M 

>< 

1 

'^ 

*& 

Cl 

t 

g 

-^ 

^ 

•0 

4 

i 

d; 

pq     H 


I    I 


'p9fjusdmi 


18 


410 


CONJUGATIONS. 


1 


T 


•p4  e«  OS 


0) 
o4    g       -3        «        fa 


o 

.  a 


a 

fa 


Gi     'C      V      V      g 

c9        a       m*       m       m 
^       A       M       ^       M 


o 

i 

ti 

a 


a      H      K 


R 


•S   1  o» 


w 


►5      O 


•3     *S 


"•» 


'o        V        fa 

^     K!     ^ 

ana 


III 

►^    fti    ^ 


^  ^      .a 


S      8 


ef         J-       i        J   '   ^ 

^12  2  2 

a    a    a    a    a 


t^         E-l         Eh 

r-1  (N  TO  K 

V r '         "jj 


1 


CONJUGATIONS 


411 


81 

a 

CS 

es 

^ 

^ 

es 

63 

^ 

<► 

a     2 


«     «     « 

•5         «rt         'N 


IB      . 

I' 


I 

2 

4) 

£ 

K 

oT 

c> 

4> 

4) 

:s 

•§ 

0 

S 

s 

^ 

*E 

C 

C 

c 

^ 

« 

T? 

m 

e 

0 

e 

9 

n 

1 

S 

1 

ss 

;^ 

» 

{u 

K 

1 
2 

4^ 

&) 

4> 

s 

d 

0 

n 

^ 

2 

fa 

fa 

fa 

^   s 


I      I 


C3 


«  «  !» 

es  «  §^ 

h  %  ti^ 

«  «  $ 

^  ^  i 


CS        4) 

fa   fa 


E    «    ^ 

.25      C5      (l4 


I 


^ 
f^ 


R,       fe, 


-^         -g        13        -rS  5> 

^        " . '        I 


412 


CONJUGATIONS. 


•     fciD 
CO     g 


2     I 


gill 


<^»    tc 


I   1 

bo        bO 

3  S 


s 

1 

S 

a 

s 

1 

o 

a 

^•l 

t 

1 
to 

s 

•s 

3 

s 

3 

3 

3 

•-5 

•rs 

•-8 

•-» 

•-s 

»-5 

•-» 

*g    '§    I 

S)         go         §3 


to 

3 
•-8 


« 

pjj 

M 

> 

M 

-tl 

^ 

P 

1 

> 

t— I 

>i 

i* 

1 

o 

i 

i 

1 

H 

■s 

o" 

i 

1 

1 

3 

3 

3 

S 

*-z 

•-5 

g4 

i 

g 

g 

Plh 

&5 

OS 

C5 

1 

.  S)    -S    o 

eo    I       S)      ^ 


to  So         §D 

3  3  3 


bo  Id  d  ^ 

9        bo  bo  bO 

3          3  3  3 

1-5  *-5  l-S  1-8 


I.   «•     " 


4 


!  I 


V  &         3)         U)         U3 

3  3  3  3  3 


CONJUGATIONS 


413 


2    i 

O  O 


i 

.2 

s 

^2 

o 

O 

o 

o 

k    K    k 

o       o       o 


§ 

§ 

8 

o 

o 

o 

1 

^ 

S^ 

1 

>> 

o 

o 

o 

o 

O 

O 

i  4  1 

^  '^  •< 

5  el  - 

^  o  o 

o  o  o 

»  ^ 

5  5  &! 

S  I  23 

^  O  t^ 


o 


-o 

.2       K 
o       o 


i>%      .2 
o       o 


.    o 


o 


^    t^    ?? 

o       o       o 


o     o 


(^        -pB/uddtuf      (^ 


414 


CONJUG  ATIONS. 


C3 

a 

c 

v 

c 

e3 

-i 

a 

»5j 

S3 

"5 

n 

o 

« 

S 

.2 

Ji 

.1 

.2i 

s 

0 

S 

A 

'o 

"o 

"o 

.4 

.a 

o 

o       o  o 


.2    -n 


o 


o 

J 

s 

§ 

1 

a 

o 

o 

o 

"o      "o       "o 


o 


i 


CO  fli 

u  a 


^  ej  e) 

s    i    I 

pfl       "o       "o 


►2     o 


B     o     o     o 


IV,  'J99/U9duiJ 


I 


CONJUGATIONS, 


416 


2  ^ 

3  o 


1=5 


V5S 

o 


3     s 

&4  CLi 


'CJ  'O  t3 

0      EJ      IS 

P<         S=U         p4 


■2  J 


O 


'3  .2  ^ 

'-S  ^  '3 

o  3  o 

p.  p*  P« 


§  2  o 

•  I  §  a 

o  o  S 

CL,  f^  Ph 


•1 

03 

•s 

'73 
O 

1 

1 

1 

p. 

eu 

& 

p. 

p. 

m 

m 

«r 

./* 

O 

o 

o 

~ 

s 

a 

2 

g 

OQ 

g 

a 

03 

.2 

V 

o 

^ 

'Eh 

'S 

''3 

'S 

P^ 

^3 

5 

£ 

s 

•§ 


^      '^      -^ 
Ph       Ph       CM 


O) 

d 


3 

p. 


O 

P, 


o 

■  »  4 

3       o 

<^      p-t  p-( 


3 

p- 


3 

p< 


O 

P. 


U 
o 

P4 


T3 

3 

p. 


p.      p. 


o        3 
p.      p^ 


^      '3 
p.      p> 


»5      O 


f^    4    f^ 


{^        'psfjLddwj      ^ 


416 


CONJUGATIONS 


I 

T 

g 

« 
O 


.    2      .23 


^3 

O 

P4 


03 

1 


•E 

O 


o 


o 

a 

12 

•c 

no 
o 


> 


I-      ? 

I  ^ 


S        I        H 

g   s   I 

»3     O     Cu 


73 
O 

P. 


Pep 


i"  I  I 

a  73  73 
POO 
Oi        O.        P. 


5    £ 


I,  ^   I 


g 
p 

a. 


•T3 


I    I     -S     -S 

fill 

P4      P.      a,      p. 


5  I 


2J    -S 
I    ^ 


i  I 


Rj       ')^/u9dtui 


3 

I 
« 

li 


CONJUGATIONS, 


417 


a 
o 


(N  fl     a 

o       o 


u 

o 

P4 


I  I 

P         o 
Ai      a. 


at 

I 

i 


I 

a 
o 
II4 


I 


1    ! 


.      S      .2 


2 

S 

£ 

4} 

a> 

V 

'S 

1 

% 

PI 

El 

A 

A 

p. 

oT 

rfT 

oa" 

0 

Q 

0 

a 

g 

s 

£ 

2 

4> 

0} 

'in 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1. 

^ 

1 

S 

(S 

^ 

1 

H 

^ 

^ 

g 

g 

Ph 

s 

& 

H 

s 

g 

5 

t5 

0 

&4 

r 


CO      fl 

o 
p* 


o 
&1) 


r     «> 


I 


•E 

o 
p. 


1 

Pi 


I  1  ■§  I   S 

PL(        PL|        pL,        p^        Ph 


O  0)  O) 

H       H       H 


'ps/u&dwi      ^ 


18* 


418 


CONJUGATIONS, 


<N    §3 


I 

I      t 


i 

1 

« 

1 

"S 

"5 

3 

•s 

•g 

•g 

cr 

C 

cr 

cr 

cr 

_r 

2 

.2 

^- 

oT 

•1 

1 

i 

"i 

1 

1 

*s 

• 

§ 


•S     "S.    -5 


g  e  i  i 

C  IS  •s  •< 

c  «  «  • 

§  "S  "5  •? 

C  C  O?  o* 


O        ^       o       S 


ffi 


J? 


5  t)  H 

I    s    ^ 

A      O       Pi 


CO  "S 


•g    s 


2 

•§ 

i 

1 

•p* 

3 

^ 

^ 

& 

"§ 

^ 

'ii 

t* 

q 

1 

i 

1 

K 

^  b  m  b 

'r  (iM  (Pi  W4 

<u      C  •  •  a 

•3    s  -s  •?  -g 

cr      cr  c  cr  o" 


2 

•g 

cr 


•g 


g  £  «p4  w4  •N 

o  C  ■  •  J5 

«<  a>  «p4  (M  tpt 

3  3  3  3  3 

D*  O"  O'  O?  O' 


ftj         jog/Mdwf 


CONJUGATIONS. 


419 


•2 


I    . 


d  d  d 

g  QJ  g 

OJ  <D  O) 

s  T!  •a 


.2"      S 


(S 


o 

o 

O 

o 

§ 

a 

B 

a 

B 

cS 

CJ 

<x> 

'C 

(^ 

02 

fr. 

eS 

<u 

QJ 

Ml 

*53 

•N 

•N 

•N 

s 

« 

S 

w 

PH 

'^  s 


OS    aj       .2       o       .fa 


5"     4§ 


-s  §  «^  s 


.    .g     g    s     £ 
•a    2    "a    •s    T! 


.fa  CD 


I         I 


•a    "a 


•E     s     g     2 

r^  0?  C?  <D 

s  a  2 


•pa/xadwf 


420 


CONJUGATIONS. 


1J 


1 


»•  8     I 


'a  S  6 

s  §  a 

a  .3  ^ 

(^  w  w 


o      4 


^    S    S 


J 


1 


i  I 


04         h 


1    •£ 

5?    ^ 


08         V 


ft    ft    fr 


•S     .s     .s 
ft    ft    ft 


ft    ft    ft 

9        0        0 
C/2        cS        ^ 


ft  'ft   ft 

0        0        0 


ft       ft 
0        0 


ft      I        ft 


ft       ft 
0       0 

M        CC        M 


^        O 


I  I,  ^-  I 


I    2 


Eh       H 

(M  CO 


'pi/Mdutf         ^ 


CONJUGATIONS, 


421 


.  S      §      I 

CO    S  '^  i=i 


d      ^      g 

61  5  ;2 

73      'S      c? 


r 


1 1 


^     S      ;S 


-•Ills 


o 

a 


i  i 


to 


a  ^ 


a;      a. 


'=3      'rt      'rt 


I- 


3 


2         P         f< 

I         I         I 
»5       O      Ph 


»© 


a       ;:3       ^ 


.^"       »« 


^ 

•1 

1 

f 

3 

3 

3 

1 

1 

r-l          (M          CC 

f^ 

'P9/U9duij 

H 

» 

> 

1 

1 

g 

5 

3 

^ 

s 


422 


CONJUGATIONS 


•I 

a 

T 

a 
> 


I 


i   i 


r 


I    o 


.     5 

p-t 


^-       ri       «      ^«  ^         &     .2       2       ^       e     « 

"•  i  I  ?  I    I    f  I  ^  ^  9 1 


.2       *d       M 


I 


?  ?  ■? 


o 


CO      c3 


a    J 


6 
i 

^ 

S 

2 

1 

1 

H 

H 

H 

t^ 

E-t 

2      $' 


.2       5 

7    I 


^ 


f  f 


•E 


?  ?  ? 


4f  .3    ^    s 


I-  ?  I 

4   «i;   ^ 


i 

f  i  i 

rl 

1 

Trae 
TraJ 
TraJ 

?f 

H 

01 

Ter. 
Ter. 
Ter. 

1 

1* 

t2          (N          CO 

5> 

.S    o 

fi; 

'P9/j9dtUJ 

^  1 

H 

1 

1 

C9 

c3 

CONJUGATIONS. 


423 


>        >        > 


tl)     '^      .2^ 


s^  ^      ui      a 

C3  e3  83 

>  t*-  t> 


"3    'rt 


I     a     S 
-III 

"d        '3        'S 
fc>        >        k 


:d 


O 


o 
51) 


.2      ^2      'w 

'eS        "eS        "^ 
>  >  t* 


^2      ,2      ~ 

''^     ^     's 
t»      >      > 


'3      [3      ^ 
>     ^     ^ 


^ 


1.     •^' 


6i    5     ^ 


CO  >3  f- 


*■ •^ 


424 


CONJUGATIONS. 


CO   a 


'a 


O  CO 

I     I 

I   i 


^  i 


i>    > 


I  a 


> 


2      g      ft 
►5      O      Ph 


5» 


CO     o)         £3 


•2       © 


fl        2        to 

JJ      'a      '3 
t      2?     T! 


& 

«r 

«^ 

-i   ^ 

'3 

a 

(S 

(S 

1 

! 

1 

< 

-w         t1 


I «  I 


3      -3 


I  §  i  I 

I   i   I   3 
>   >   ^   t> 


'p9fM)dxuj 


CONJUGATIONS, 


425 


o   d 


i    i 


.S 


<1>         .?5         'r> 


V 


cj        o)        a> 


«8 


T     •? 


a       B       H 

S    I    ^ 
5    o    (5 


05         «4 

«     *S     ^r     w? 
>-     k     P>     >• 


^ 


^     ^ 


(^  'P9/U9diuj         ftj 


I 


426 


CON  JUG  ATI  ONS. 


CONJUGATION  OF  A  VEEB  IN  THE  EEFLECTIVE  FORM. 


Lavarse. 


INFINITIVE. 

I  To  wash  one's  self. 


Lavaadose. 


GEEIJND. 


Washing  one's  self. 


Lavadose. 


PAST   PARTICIPLE. 

I         Washed  one's  self. 


INDICATIVE. 

PRESENT. 


1.  Me  lavo.  I  wash  myself. 

2.  Te  lavas. 

3.  Se  lava. 


1.  Nos  lavamos. 

2.  Os  lavais. 

3.  Se  la  van. 


IiMPKRFECT. 


1.  Me  lavaba.        I    was     washing, 

washed,  or  used 
to  wash  myself. 

2.  Te  lavabas. 

3.  Se  lavaba. 


1.  Nos  lavabamos. 


2.  Os  lavabais. 
8.  Se  lavaban. 


PRETERIT   DEFINITE. 

1.  Me  lave.  I  washed  myself.    I  1.  Nos  lavdmos. 

2.  Te  lavaste.  2.  Os  lavasteis. 

3.  Se  lav6.  I  3.  Se  lavaron. 


FUTURE    SIMPLE. 


1.  Me  lavar6.        I  shall  wash  my- 

self. 

2.  TelavarAs. 

3.  Se  lavard. 


1.  Nos  lavar^mos. 

2.  Os  lavar^is. 

3.  Se  la  varan. 


2.  LAvate. 

3.  Lavese. 


Wash  thyself. 


IMPERATIVE. 

1.  Lav^raonos. 

2.  Lavaos. 

3.  Ldvense. 


CONJUGATIONS. 


427 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PRESENT. 


1.  Me  lave. 

2.  Te  laves. 

3.  Selave. 


I  may  wash  my- 
self. 


1.  Noslavemos. 

2.  Oslaveis. 

3.  Se  laven. 


IMPERFECT. — First  Termination. 


1.  Me  lavaria.       I  would  wash  my- 

self. 

2.  Te  lavarias. 

3.  Se  lavaria. 


1.  Nos  lavariamos. 

2.  Os  lavariais. 

3.  Se  lavarian. 


Second  TermiTiation. 


1.  Me  lavara.        I    might,    could, 

would,  or  should 
wash  myself. 

2.  Te  lavaras. 

3.  Se  lavara. 


1.  Nos  lavaramos. 


2.  Os  lavarais. 

3.  Se  lavaran. 


Third  Termination. 


1.  Me  lavase. 


2.  Te  lavases. 

3.  Se  lavase. 


I  might,  could, 
would,  or  should 
wash  myself. 


FUTURE. 


1.  Me  lavare.        I  might  or  should 

wash  myself. 

2.  Te  lavares. 

3.  Se  lavare. 


1.  Nos  lavasemos. 


2.  Os  lavaseis. 

3.  Se  lavasen. 


1.  JSTos  lavaremos. 

2.  Oslavareis. 

3.  Se  lavaren. 


Ayudarse. 

Ayuddndose. 

Ayudddose. 


INFINITIVE. 

I         To  help  each  other. 

GKETJND. 

j  Helping  each  other. 

PAST   PARTICIPLE. 

I  Helped  each  other. 


428 


CONJUGATIONS, 
INDICATIVE. 


PRESENT. 

1.  Nos  ayuda-     We  help  eacli 

mos.  other. 

2.  Oa  ajudais. 

3.  Se  ayudan. 


IMPERFECT. 

1.  Nos  aynda-     We  used  to  help 

bamos.  each  other. 

2.  Os  ajudabais. 

3.  Se  ayudaban. 


PRETERIT   DEFINITE. 

1.  Nos  ayuda-     We  helped   each 

mos.  other. 

2.  Os  ayudasteis. 

3.  Se  ayudaron. 


FUTURE   8IMPLB. 

1.  Nos  ayuda-     We     shall     help 

r^raos.  each  other. 

2.  Os  ayudar^is. 

3.  Se  ayudaran. 


1.  Ayud^monos. 

2.  Ayudaos. 

3.  Aytidense. 


IMPERATIVE. 


Let  us  help  each  other. 

Help  each  other. 

Let  them  help  each  other. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 


PRESENT. 

1.  Nos  ayude-     We  may  help  each 

mos.  other. 

2.  Os  ayudeis. 
8.  Se  ayuden. 

Second  Termination. 

1.  Nos  ayuda-      We  might,  could, 

ramos.  would,  or  should 

help  each  other. 

2.  Os  ayndarais. 
8.  Se  ayudaran. 


IMPERFECT. — First  Terminxition. 

1.  Nos  ayudaria-  We    would    help 

mos.  each  other. 

2.  Os  ayudariais. 

3.  Se  ayudarlan. 

Third  Termination. 

1.  Nos  ayudase-  We  might,  cou!d, 

mos.  would,  or  should 

help  each  other. 

2.  Os  ayudaseis. 

3.  Se  ayudasen. 


FUTURE. 


1.  Nos  ayudaremos, 

2.  Os  ayudareis. 

3.  Se  ayudaren. 


We  might  or  should  help  each 
other. 


CONJUGATIONS. 


429 


IMPERSONAL  VERBS. 
Amankoes.  I  To  grow  light. 


INDICATIVE. 

Simple  Tenses. 
Present.  Amanece.  It  grows  light. 

Imperfect.         Amanecia.  It  was  growing  light. 

Pret.  Def.         Amaneci6.  It  grew  light. 

Fut.  Simple.     Amanecera.  \         It  will  grow  light. 


Compound  Tenses. 
Ha  amanecido.  [  It  has  grown  light. 

It  had  grown  light. 
It  had  grown  light. 
It  will  have  grown  light. 


Habia  amanecido. 


Pret.  Indef. 

Pluperfect. 

Anterior.  Hubo  amanecido. 

Gomp.  Future.  Habra  amanecido 


IMPERATIVE. 

Amanezca. 

1          Let  it  grow  light. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Simple 

Tenses. 

ient.             Amanezca. 

'  Amaneceria. 

erfeet.      \  Amaneciera. 

Amaneciese. 

J 

It  may  grow  light. 

r   might,    "^ 
It  \  should,  or  I  grow  liglit. 
1           [    would 

ure.             Amaneciere. 

1      It  should  grow  light. 

Compound  Tenses. 
Perfect,  Haya  amanecido.       i      It  may  have  grown  light. 

r   might  have,    1 
It  ^should  have,  or  U^^^^'^ 
[    would  have    J     ^'^^^^• 
It  should  have  grown  light. 


fHabria      1 
jHubiera    l^^"^"^" 
[Hubiese    J      ^^^«- 
Gomp.  Future.  Hubiere  amanecido. 


Pluperf. 


N.  B. — Anochecer,  to  grow  dark,  is  conjugated  in  the  same  maimer, 
and  has  the  same  irregularity. 


430 


Nktar, 


CONJUGATIONS. 

I  To  871010. 


Present. 
Imperfect. 
Fret.  Def. 
Future. 


Nieva. 
Nevaba. 
Nev6. 
Nevara. 


INDICATIVE. 

Simple  Tenses. 


It  snows. 
It  was  snowing. 
It  snowed. 
It  will  snow. 


Pret.  Indef.      Ha  nevado. 
Pluperfect.       Habia  nevado. 
Anterior.  Hubo  nevado. 

Comp.  Future.  Habra  nevado. 


Compound  Tenses. 

It  lias  snowed. 
It  had  snowed. 
It  had  snowed. 
It  will  have  snowed. 


Nieve. 


IMPERATIVE. 

I  Let  it  snow 


Present. 

Imperfect. 

Future. 


Nieve. 

Nevada. 

Nevara. 

Nevase, 

Nevare. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Simple  Tenses. 


It  may  snow. 

r  might, 
It  \  should,  or  \  snow. 

I  would 
It  should  snow. 


Perfect. 
Pluperfect. 


Compound  Tenses. 

Ilaya  nevado.  i      It  may  Iiave  snowed. 

Ilabria  1  |  f   might  have,    ^ 

Ilubiera  I  nevado.  It  -{•  should  have,  or  Isnowed. 

IlubieseJ  [     would  have    J 


Comp.  Future,  llubiere  nevado. 


It  should  have  snowed. 


N.  B. — Helar.^  to  freeze,  is  conjugated  in  the  same  manner,  and  haa 
the  same  tenses  irregular. 


Tronae. 


CONJUGATIONS. 

I  To  thunder. 


431 


Present. 
Imperfect. 
Pret.  Def. 
Future. 


Truena. 
Tronaba. 
Troii6. 
Tronara. 


INDICATIVE. 

Simple  Tenses. 


It  thunders. 
It  was  tlnmdering. 
It  thundered. 
It  will  thunder. 


Compound  Tenses. 


Pret.  Indef.      Ha  tronado. 
Pluperfect.       Habia  tronado. 
Anterior.  Hubo  tronado. 

Comp.  Future.  Habra  tronado. 


It  has  thundered. 
It  had  thundered. 
It  had  thundered. 
It  will  have  thundered. 


Truene. 


IMPERATIVE. 

I  Let  it  thunder. 


Present. 


Imperfect. 


Future. 


Truene. 
f  Tronaria. 
■I  Tronara. 
[Tronase. 

Tronare. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Simple  Tenses. 


It  may  thunder. 

r  might,  1 
It  J  should,  or  I  thunder. 

[  would  J 
It  should  thunder. 


Compound  Tenses. 


Perfect.  Haya  tronado. 

f  Habria  1 
Pluperfect.     J  Hubiera   I  tronado. 

[Hubiese  J 
Comp.  Future.  Hubiere  tronado. 


It  may  have  thundered. 

(  might  have,  1 
It  J  should  have,  or  I  thundered. 

[  would  have  J 
It  should  have  thundered. 


N".  B. — Lloter^  to  rain,  is  conjugated  like  this  verb,  and  changes  also 
the  0  into  ue  in  the  same  tenses.  Escarchar.,  to  freeze ;  granizar,  to 
hail ;  lloviznar,  to  drizzle ;  and  relampaguear,  to  lighten,  are  all  regular. 


432 


CONJUGATIONS. 


Haceb,  to  he  (when  employed  in  reference  to  time  and  weather), 

INDICATIVE. 
Simple  Tenses. 
Present.  Hace.  It  is. 

Imperfect.         Hacia.  It  was. 

Pret.  Def.         Hizo.  It  was. 

Future.  Hara.  It  will  be. 

Compound  Tenses. 
Pret.  Indef.      Ha  hecho.  It  has  been. 

Pluperfect.       Habia  hecho.  It  had  been. 

Anterior.  Hubo  hecho.  It  had  been. 

Comp.  Future.  Habra  hecho.  It  will  have  been. 


Haga. 


IMPERATIVE. 

)  Let  it  be. 


Present. 

Imperfect. 

Future. 


IIa2:n. 
r  Ilaria.     1 
J  Hiciera.   I 
[lliciese.  J 

Hiciere. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Simple  Tenses, 

It  may  be. 

r    might, 
It  -j  should,  or 

[    would 
It  should  be. 

Compound  Tenses. 


be. 


Perfect.  Haya  hecho. 

fHabria  1 
Pluperfect.     \  Hubiera   I  hecho. 

[llubiese  J 
Comp.  Future.  Hubiere  heclio. 


It  may  have  been. 

r  might  have,  1 
It  J  should  have,  or  j-been. 

(^  would  have  J 
It  should  have  been. 


Haber,  when  signifying  there  to  he. 


Hay. 

Ilabia. 
Huba 
HabrA. 


( There  is, 
( There  are. 
( There  was. 
I  There  were. 
There  will  be. 


Ha  habido. 

Habia  habido. 
Hubo  habido. 
Habrd  habido. 


J  There  has  been. 
J  There  have  been. 

There  had  been. 

There  had  been. 

There  shall  have 
been. 


CONJUGATIONS. 

433 

Haya. 

Let  there  be. 

Haya  habido 

There  may  have 

Haja. 

There  may  be. 

been. 

Habria. 

'There  might, 

Habria  habido. 

'There  might, 

Hubiera. 

could,  would,  or 

Hubiera  habido. 

could,  would,  or 

Hubiese. 

.     should  be. 

Hubiese  habido. 

should  have 
been. 

Hubiere. 

There  might  or 

should  be. 

Hubiere  habido. 

There  might  or 
should    have 
been. 

DEFECTIVES, 

The  following  verbs  are  found  used  only  in  the  tenses  and  persons  giv^n 
in  the  annexed  examples : 


Placer. 


To  please. 


INDICATIYK 


Present,  dd  pera.  sing.,  Place. 
Imperf.      "  *'       Placia. 

Fret  Def  "  "       Plugo. 


It  pleases. 

It  was  pleasing. 

It  pleased. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 


Present.  2>d  pers.,  sing.,  Plegue. 

Imperf.      "  "     J  PJ°g"i«™- 

{ Plugmese. 

Comp.  Future.       "       Pluguiere. 


SOLEE. 


It  may  please. 
It  would  please. 
It  might  please. 
It  should  please. 

To  he  wont. 


Suelo. 

Sueles. 

Suele. 

Solemos, 

Soleis. 

Suelen. 


INDICATIYE. 

PEESENT. 


I  am  wont. 
Thou  art  wont. 
He  is  wont. 
We  are  wont. 
You  are  wont. 
They  are  wont. 


19 


434 


CONJUGATIONS. 


IMPEEFECT. 


Solia. 

Soli  as. 

Solia. 

Soliaraos. 

Soliais, 

Soliaa. 


Tacer. 


I  was  wont 
Thou  wast  wont. 
He  was  wont. 
We  were  wont. 
You  were  wont. 
They  were  wont. 


To  lie  dead. 


No  part  of  this  verb  is  made  use  of  except  the  third  persons  of  the 
present  indicative,  yace  and  yacen^  which  are  generally  inscribed  on 
tombstones. 


CONJUGATION  OF  A  VERB  IN  THE  PASSIVE  VOICE. 

Ser  perdonado. 


INTINITIVE. 

I         To  be  pardoned. 


GEEUND. 

Siendo  perdonado.  |         Being  pardoned. 

PAST  PARTICIPLE. 

Habiendo  sido  perdonado.  j  Having  been  pardoned. 


1.  Soy  perdona-   I  am  pardoned. 

do. 

2.  Eres  perdo- 

nado. 
8.  Es  perdonado, 


INDICATIVE. 

PRESENT. 

1.  Somos  perdonados. 


2.  Sois  perdonados. 
8,  Son  perdonados. 


IMPERFECT. 


1.  Era  perdona-       I  was  or  used  to 

do.  be  pardoned. 

2.  Eras  perdonado. 
8.  Era  perdonado. 


1.  Eramos  perdonados. 

2.  Erais  perdonados. 
8.  Eran  perdonados. 


CONJUGATIONS. 


435 


PEETERIT  DEFINITE. 


1.  Fui  perdona-      I  was  pardoned. 

do. 

2.  Fuiste  perdonado. 

3.  Fue  perdonado. 


1.  Fuimos  perdonados. 

2.  Fuisteis  perdonados. 

3.  Fueron  perdonados. 


FUTUEE   SIMPLE. 


1.  Sere  perdo-        I  shall    be  par- 

nado.  doned. 

2.  Seras  perdonado. 

3.  Sera  perdonado. 


1.  Seremos  perdonados. 

2.  Sereis  perdonados. 

3.  Seran  perdonados. 


IMPERATIVE. 


2.  S6  perdonado.    Be  pardoned. 

3.  Sea  perdonado. 


1.  Seamos  perdonados. 

2.  Sed  perdonados. 

3.  Sean  perdonados. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PEESENT. 


1.  Sea  perdonado.  I  may  be  par- 

doned. 

2.  Seas  perdonado. 

3.  Sea  perdonado. 


1.  Seamos  perdonados. 

2.  Seals  perdonados. 

3.  Sean  perdonados. 


iMPEEFEOT. — First  Termination. 


1.  Seria  perdona-   I  would  be  par- 

do.  doned. 

2.  Serias  perdonado. 

3.  Seria  perdonado. 


1.  Seriamos  perdonados^ 

2.  Serials  perdonados. 

3.  Serian  perdonados. 


Second  Termination. 


1.  Fuera  perdona-  I  might,  could, 

do.  would,  or 

should  be  par- 
doned. 

2.  Fueras  perdonado. 

3.  Fuera  perdonado. 


1.  Fueramos  perdonados. 


2.  Fuerais  perdonados. 

3.  Fueran  perdonados. 


436 


CONJUGATIONS 


Third  Termination. 


1.  Fuese  perdona-  I  might,  could, 

do.  would,  or 

should  be  par- 
doned. 

2.  Fueses  perdonado. 
8.  Fuese  perdonado. 


1.  Fuesemos  perdonados. 


2.  Fueseis  perdonados. 

3.  Fuesen  perdonados. 


FUTUEE. 


1.  Fuere  perdona-  I  might  or 

do.  should  be  par- 

doned. 

2.  Fueres  perdonado. 

3.  Fuere  perdouado. 


1.  Fueremos  perdonados. 


2.  Fuereis  perdonados. 

3.  Fueren  perdonados. 


Compound  Tenses. 

INDICATIVE. 

PEETERIT   INDEFINITE. 


1.  He  sido  perdo- 

nado. 

2.  Has  sido  per- 

donado. 
8.  Ha  sido  perdo- 
uado. 


I  have  been  par- 
doned. 


1.  Hemos  sido  perdonados. 

2.  Habeis  sido  perdonados, 

3.  Han  sido  perdonados. 


PLUPERFECT. 


1.  Habia  sido 

perdonado. 

2.  Habias  sido 

perdonado. 
8.  Habia  sido 
perdonado. 


1.  Ilube  sido 

perdonado. 

2.  Hubiste  sido 

perdonado. 
8.  Hubo  sido 
perdonada 


I  had  been  par- 
doned. 


1.  Habiamos  sido  perdonados. 

2.  Habiais  sido  perdoandos. 
8.  Habian  sido  perdonados. 


ANTERIOR. 


I  had  been  par- 
doned. 


1.  Hubiraos  sido  perdonados. 

2.  Hubisteis  sido  perdonados. 
8.  Hubieron  sido  perdonados. 


CONJUGATIONS. 


437 


1.  Habre  sido 

perdoDado. 

2.  Habras  sido 

perdonado. 

3.  Habra  sido 

perdonado. 


1.  Haja  sido 

perdonado. 

2.  Hayas  sido 

perdonado. 

3.  Haya  sido 

perdonado. 

1.  Habria  sido 

perdonado. 

2.  Habrias  sido 

perdonado. 

3.  Habria  sido 

perdonado. 

1.  Hubiera  sido 
perdonado. 


2.  Ilubieras  sido 

perdonado. 

3.  Hubiera  sido 

perdonado. 

1.  Hubiesesido 
perdonado. 


2.  Hubieses  sido 

perdonado. 

3.  Hubiesesido 

perdonado. 


COMPOUND   FUTIJEE, 

I  sball  have  been 
pardoned. 


1.  Habr^mos  sido  perdonados. 

2.  Habr^is  sido  perdonados. 

3.  Habran  sido  perdonados. 


-    SUBJUNCTIYE. 

PERFECT. 


I  may  have  been 
pardoned. 


1.  Hayamos  sido  perdonados. 

2.  Hayais  sido  perdonados. 

3.  Hayan  sido  perdonados. 


PLUPERFECT. — First  Termination. 


I  would  have  been 
pardoned. 


1.  Habriamos  sido  perdonados. 

2.  Habriais  sido  perdonados. 

3.  Habrian  sido  perdonados. 


Second  Termination. 


I  might,  could, 
would,  or 
should  have 
been  pardoned. 


1.  Hubieramos  sido  perdonados. 

2.  Hubierais  sido  perdonados. 

3.  Hubieran  sido  perdonados. 


Third  Termination. 


I  might,  could, 
would,  or 
should  have 
been  pardoned. 


1.  Hubiesemos  sido  perdonados. 

2.  Hubieseis  sido  perdonados. 

3.  Hubiesen  sido  perdonados. 


438 


CONJUGATIONS. 


FUTURE  COMPOUND. 


1.  Habiere  sido    I  might  or  should 

perdonado.        have  been  par- 
doned. 

2.  Hubieres  sido 

perdonado. 

8.  Hubiere  sido 

perdonadoi 


1.  Hubieremos  sido  perdonadi 


08. 


2.  Ilubiereis  sido  perdonados. 
8.  Hubieren  sido  perdonados. 


LIST 

OF  THE  PRINCIPAL  IRREGULAR  VERBS  IN  THE  SPA:JfISH 
LANGUAGE. 


TS  ^.— The  figures  jUaced  after  each  verb  refer  to  the  page  at  which  the  model  conjugatUm 

for  that  verb  is  to  be  found.    For  instance.,  the  number  398  shows  that  Aducib 

is  conjugated  like  Cothx>vcvel,  found  at  page  398. 


Absolver,  394. 
Abstraer,  422. 
Acertar,  392. 
Acordar,  893. 
Acostar,  393. 
Acrecentar,  392. 
Adestrar,  392. 
Adherir,  395. 
Adquirir,  399. 
Advertir,  395. 
Aducir,  398. 
Aj?orar,  393. 
Alentar,  392. 
Almorzar,  393. 
Amolar,  393. 
Andar,  400. 
Apacentar,  392. 
Apostar,  393. 
Aprobar,  393. 
Aprctar,  392. 
Arrecirse,  396. 
Arrendar,  392. 
Arrepentirse,  395. 
Ascender,  394. 
Asentar,  392. 
Asentir,  395. 
Aserrar,  392. 
Asestar,  392. 
Asir,  401. 
A  solar,  393. 
Asoldar,  393. 
Atender,  394. 
Atentar,  392. 
Aterrar  (echar  por  tier- 

ra),  392. 
Atestar  (rellenar),  392. 
Atraer,  422. 
Atravesar.  392. 
Aventar.  392. 
Aventarse,  392. 
Avergonzar,  393. 

Bendecir,  402. 


Caber,  403. 
Caer,  422. 
Calentar,  392. 
Cegar,  392. 
Ceilir,  390. 
Cemer,  394. 
Cerrar,  392. 
Cimentar,  392. 
Cocer,  404. 
Colar,  393. 
Colegir,  396. 
Colgar,  393. 
Comedirse,  .396. 
Comenzar,  392. 
Competir,  .396. 
Concebir,  390. 
Concernir,  395. 
Concertar,  .392. 
Concordar.  393. 
Condescender,  394. 
Condolerse,  394. 
Conducir,  398. 
Conferir,  395. 
Confesar,  .392. 
Conocer,  .398. 
Consesfuir,  .396. 
Consentir,  .395. 
Consolar,  393. 
Constrefiir,  396. 
Contar,  393. 
Contener,  like  Teneb. 
(See  auxiliary  verbB.) 
Contender,  394. 
Contradecir,  406. 
Controvertir.  395. 
Contraer,  422. 
Convertir,  .395. 
Corregir,  396. 

Dar,  405. 
Decaer,  422. 
Decentar.  392. 
Decir,  406. 


Deducir,  398. 
Defender,  394. 
Deferir,  395. 
Degollar,  393. 
Demoler,  394. 
Demostrar,  393. 
Denegar,  392. 
Denostar,  393. 
Derrengar,  .392. 
Derretir,  390. 
Desavenir,  424. 
Descender,  394. 
Descollar,  393. 
Descordar,  393. 
Descomedirse,  31 
Desfiocar,  393. 
Deshacer,  410. 
Deshelar,  C02. 
Desteir,  396. 
Desembrar,  392. 
Desolar,  393. 
Desollar,  .393. 
Desovar,  ,393. 
Despedir,  396. 
Despernar,  392. 
Despertar,  392. 
Desterrar,  392. 
Desplegar.  392. 
Desvergonzarse, 
Dezmar,  ,392. 
Discemir.  395. 
Diferir,  395. 
Digerir.  395. 
Discordar.  39,3. 
Disolver,  ,394. 
Divertir.  ,395. 
Doler.  .394. 
Dormir,  407. 


Elegir.  396. 
Embestir,  396. 
Empedrar,  392. 


440 


LIST    OF    IKREGULAB    VERBS. 


Empezar,  392. 
Einporcar,  S93. 
Encendcr,  3t>4. 
Enceuaar,  392. 
Encerrar,  392. 
Encomcndar,  392. 
Eua)ntrar,  393. 
Encordar,  393. 
Engreirse,  396. 
Eiigrosar,  39;i 
Eniueiidar,  3J^ 
Enrodar,  393. 
Ensangreutar,  392L 
Enteiulur,  394. 
Euterrar,  392. 
Envestir,  39(V. 
Erguir,  408. 
Errar,  409. 
Escarmentar,  3^ 
Escocer,  404. 
Esforzar,  393. 
EsTAB.    {iicQ  auxiliary 

verbs.) 
Estrenir,  39C. 
Expedir,  39G. 
Exteader,  394. 


Forzar,  39!I. 
Fregar,  3^ 


Gemir,  .396. 
Gobernar,  3SS. 


Hakek.    ^See  auxiliaries 

and  impereonals.) 
Ilacer,  410. 
Heder,  394. 
Helar,  392. 
H^nchir,  396, 
Header,  394. 
Henir,  396. 
Herir,  395. 
IJerrar,  392. 
Hervir,  395. 
Holirar,  ;i93. 
HoHar,  393. 


hnpedir,  806. 
Incensar,  392. 
Tndudr.  398. 
Infcrir,  395. 
Ingcrir,  396. 
Tnqnirir,  399. 
Introdncir.  398. 
Invemar,  392. 
Invertir,  395. 
Invest  ir,  396. 
Ir,  411. 


Llover,  394. 


Maldeclr,  402. 
Manifestar,  392. 
Maulencr,  like  Tenkb. 
(See  auxiliary  verbti.) 
Medir,  396. 
Mentar,  392. 
Mentir,  395. 
Merendar,  392. 
Moier,  394. 
Morder,  394. 
Morir,  407. 
Mostrar,  392, 
Mover,  396. 


Jngar,412. 


Negar,  392. 
Nevar,  392. 


Oir,  413. 
Oter,  414- 


Pedir.  396. 
Pensar,  392. 
Perder,  394. 
Pervertir,  39&. 
Placer,  433. 
Pleirar,  392. 
Poblar,  393. 
Poder  415. 
Podrir,  416. 
Poner,  417. 
Preferir,  395. 
Probar,  393. 
Producir,  398. 
Proferir,  395. 


Quebrar,  392. 
Querer,  418. 


Raer,  422. 
Eecomendar,  893L 
Recordar,  393. 
Rccostar,  393. 
Reducir,  398. 
Rcfcrir.  395. 
Repar,  392. 
Regir,  .396. 
Regoldar,  392. 
Reir,  419. 
Rcmendar,  392. 
Rendir,  396. 
Renovar,  893. 
Refiir.  396. 
Repctlr,  396. 
Requobrar,  392. 
Reqiierir,  .SJ)5. 
Reacoutrar,  393. 


Resollar,  393. 
Retentar,  :i92. 
Reventar,  392. 
Revolcar.  393. 
Rodar,  393. 
Rocr. 
Rogar,  393. 


Saber,  420. 
Saiir,  421. 
SatiBfacer,  410. 
Segar,  392. 
Seguir,  396. 
Sembrar,  392. 
Sentar,  392. 
Betir,  395. 
Seb.    (See  auxiliarj 

verbs.) 
Servir,  396. 
Berrar,  392. 
Boldar,  393. 
Soler,  4.33. 
Soltar,  39.3. 
Solver,  394. 
Sonar,  .393. 
Soflar,  S<M. 
Sosegar,  392. 
Soterrar,  .392. 
Sugerir,  395. 

Temblar,  392. 

Tender,  394. 

Teneb.    (See  auxiliarj 

verbs.) 
Teiiir,  396. 
Tentar,  392. 
Torcer,  404. 
Tostar,  393. 
Traducir,  398. 
Traer,  422. 
Trasccnder,  394. 
Trascordarse.  393. 
Traseerar,  392. 
Trocar,  39a 
Tronar,  393. 
Tropezar,  392. 


Valcr,  423. 
Vcnir,  424. 
Ver,  425. 
Vertcr,  394, 
VePtir,  396. 
Volar,  393. 
Volcar,  393. 
Volver,  384. 


Tacer,  434. 
Zaherir,  S9E 


700ABULAET, 

CONTAINING  ALL  THE  SPANISH  WORDS  USED  IN  THE  GRAMMAR. 

N.  B.-The  figures  after  each  definition  refer  to  the  lessons  in  which  the  words 
have  been  explained  in  the  Grammar. 


A,  ah,  prep.,  to,  at,  in.— Voy  d  Francia,  I 
am  going  to  France;  a  lo  mcnos,  at 
least ;  a  la  verdad,  indeed ;  d  la  espaflola, 
in  the  Spanish  fashion.    L.  4. 

Abajo,  ah-bah'-ho,  adv.,  below,  down, 
down-stairs.    L.  33. 

Abalanzar,  ah-bah-lan-tJiar\  to  spring,  to 
rush.    L.  57.  ,      ^        i. 

Abandonar,  ah-ban-do-nar\  to  abandon,  to 

five  up,  to  leave.    L.  58, 
anico,  ah-bah-ne'-co,  s.  m.,  fan.    L.  52. 
Abierto,  ah-be-air'-to,  p.  p.  irr.  of  Abbir, 

(which  see).    L.  52. 
Abogado,  ah-bo-gah'-do,  s.  m,,  lawyer,  ad- 
vocate.   L.  49. 
Aborrecible,  ah-bor-rai-thd'-blai,  adj.,  hate- 
ful.   L.  24. 
Abril,  ah-breel',  s.  m.,  April.    L.  28. 
Abrir,  ah-breer\  to  open.     Abrirse,  to  be 

opened,  to  blow  (of  flowers).    L.  28. 
Aca,  a\-ca\  adv.,  here.— J.ca  y  alia,  here 

and  there.    L.  18. 
Acabar,  ah-cah-bar\  to  finish,  to  end.— J.ca- 

bar  de,  to  be  just,  to  have  just.— ^m^ar 

con,  to  kUl,  to  put  an  end  to,  to  destroy. 

L.  28. 
Academia,  ah-cah-dai'-me-a,  s.  f.,  academy. 

L.  51. 
Acaso,    ah-cah'-so,    adv.,    perchance,    by 

chance.— Si  acaso,  if  at  all.— For  si  acaso, 

in  case  that.    L.  32. 
Accidente,  ac-thl-dain' -tai,  s.  m.,  accident. 

L.  40. 
Accion,  ac-thd-dne',  s.  f.,  action,  share.    L. 

24. 
Acento,  ah-thain'-to,  s.  m.,  accent.     L.  47. 
Aceptar,  ah-thaip-tar' ,  to  accept.    L.  45. 
Acerca,  ah-thair'-ca,  prep.  Acerca  de,  about. 

L.  49. 
Acertar,  ah-lhair-tar' ,  to  make  out,  to  hit 

the  mark,  to  succeed,  to  be  right  {i.  €.,  to 

conjecture  right).    L.  34. 
Acierto,  ah-tM-air'-to,  s.  m.,  success.  L.  52. 
Acomodar,  ah-cb-ma-dar' ,  to  accommodate, 

to  suit.    L.  31, 
Acompaiiar,   ah-cQm-pan-yar\   to    accom 

pany.    L.  47. 
Aconsejar,  ah-cbn-sai-har' ,  to  counsel,  to 

advise.     L.  45. 
Acordar,  ah-cor-dar' ,  to  accord,  to  atrree,  to 

iMHii.—Acordarse,  to  remember.    iL.  46. 


Acostar,  ah-cos-tar\  to  lay  down.— J.co<- 

tarse,  to  lie  down,  to  go  to  bed.    L.  35. 
Actual,  ac-twal',  adj.,  present.    L.  52. 
Acudir,  ah-coo-deer' ,  to  haste,  to  run,  to 

turn  (to),  to  refer  (to).    L.  49. 
Acuerdo,  ah-cwair'-do,    s.  m.,  agreement, 

accord,  decision  (of  a  court).    L.  42.  ^ 
Aculla,   ah-cool-ya\    adv.,  there.— Aqui  y 

(WuUd,  to  and  fro ;  here  and  there.    L.  18. 
Adelantar,  ah-dai-lan-tar' ,  to  advance,  to 

make  progress.    L.  36. 
Adelante,  ah-dai-lan'-tai,  adv.,  forward.— 

En  adelante,  henceforward.— /J.rfe/a/ife.' 

fo  on  !   go  ahead !    L.  43. 
eman,  ah-dai-man',  s.  m.,  posture,  air. 
L.  44. 

Ademas,  ah-dai-mas',  prep.,  besides ;  adv., 
moreover,  besides.    L.  37. 

Adentro,  ah-daia'-tro,  adv.,  in,  within,  in- 
side.   L.  47. 

Adivinar,  ah-dee-vee-nar' ,  to  guess,  to  di- 
vine.   L.  46. 

Adjetivo,  ad-hai-tee'-vo,  b.  m.,  adjective. 
L.  43. 

Admirable,  ad-mee-rah'-blai,  adj.,  admira- 
ble, wonderful.    L.  51. 

Admiracion,  ad-mee-rah-the-bne' ,  s.  f.,  ad- 
miration, wonder.    L.  51. 

Admirar,  ad-mee-rar',  to  admire,  to  won- 
der at.    L.  61. 

Adonde.    (See  Donde.)    L.  9. 

Adquirir,  ad-M-reer',  to  acquire.    L.  42. 

Adverbial,  ad-vair-bl-al' ,  adj.,  adverbial. 
L.  50. 

Adverbio,  s.  m.,  adverb.    L.  43. 

Advertir,  ad-rair-teer' ,  to  advise,  to  men- 
tion, to  point  out,  to  warn,  to  observe. 
L.  43. 

Aereo,  ah-ai'-rai-o.  adj..  aerial.    L.  48. 

Afectacion,  ah-faik-tdh-the-one',  s.  f.,  affec- 
tation.   L.  24. 

Afectar,  ah-faik-tar' ,  to  affect.    L.  45. 

Afeitar,  ah-fai-e-tar' ,  to  shave,  to  paint  (the 
face).    L.  as. 

Afirmacion,  ah-feer-mah-the-bne',  s.  f.,  af- 
firmation.   L.  24. 

Afirmar,  ah-feer-mar' ,  to  affirm,  to  make 
firm,  to  strengthen.    L.  48. 

Aflijir,  ah-flee-heer' ,  to  afflict.    L.  48. 

Afortunado,  ah-fore-too-nah'-do,  adj.,  fortu- 
nate.   L.  63. 

Ageno.  ah-hai'-no,  adj.,  foreign,  belonging 
to  others.    L.  63. 


442 


VOCABULARY 


Agitacion,  ah-hee-tafi-tM-One\  b.  f.,  agita- 

liou.    L.  24. 
Agradar,  ah-grah-dar\  to  please.    L.  53. 
Agradecer,  afi-grah-d<u-thair\  to  thank,  to 

be  obliged  to.    L.  39. 
Agregar,  aJi-grai-gar\  to  add,  to  unite.    L. 

4y. 

Agrio,  ah'-grl-o^  adj.,  sour.    L.  22. 

Agua,  ak'-gwa,  s.  1.,  water,    L.  7. 

Aguantar,  ali-gwan-tar\  to  support,  to  put 
up  with,  to  bear,  to  bear  wiili.    L.  &3. 

Aguardiente,  ah-gwar-de-ain'-taiy  8.  m., 
brandy.    L.  50. 

Agudeza,  ah-goo-dai'-tha^  s.  f.,  wit,  witty 
(jaying.    L.  57. 

Agjiero,  ah-gwai'-rOy  8.  m.,  augury,  omen. 
JL.  45. 

Ahora,  ah-b-ra^  adv.,  now.    L.  27. 

Aire,  i'-rai^  s.  in.,  air.    L.  4(5. 

Ajedrez,  aU-hai-draith\  s.  m.,  chess.    L.  42. 

Ala.  ali'-la^  s.  f.,  win^.    L.  6«. 

Alabanza,  ah4ali-baw -tha^  8.  f.,  praise.  L. 
53. 

Alarde,  s.  m.— Ilacer  cUarde,  to  boast.  L. 
G3. 

Alberto,  al-bair'-to,  s.  m.,  Albert.    L.  38. 

Alcance,  al-kan'-thai,  s.  m.,  reach.    L.  53. 

Alcanzar,  al-can-tliar\  to  reach,  to  over- 
take, to  take  up  with,  to  catch.    L.  53. 

Alegrar,  ah-lai-grar\  to  give  joy,  to  make 
glad.    L.  37. 

Alegrc,  aJi-lai'-graiy  adj.,  joyful,  glad,  merry. 
L.  21. 

Alejandro,  ah4(U-han'-dr0y  s.  m.,  Alexan- 
der.   L,  3. 

Aleli,  ah-laz-lee',  s.  m.,  gilliflower,    L.  9. 

Aleman,  ah-lai-man',  b.  m.,  German  (lan- 
guage).   L.  2. 

Aleman,  s.  m.,  German ;  adj.,  German.  L.  3. 

Alemania,  ah-lai-rnah-ne-a,  8.  f.,  Germany. 
L.  9. 

Alfiler,  al-fee-lair\  s.  m.  and  f.,  pin.    L.  46. 

Algazara,  al-gahthah'-ray  s.  f.,  shouts  of 
joy.    L.  54. 

Algodon,  al-gd-ddne',  b.  m.,  cotton.    L.  5. 

Als):uien,  al'-gdin,  pron.,  somebody,  any- 
body, some  one,  any  one.    L.  17. 

Algnno,  &,'  cU-goo'-tw,  adj.,  some.    L.  17. 

Alguno,  a,  prbn.  ind.,  and  ad,].,  somebody, 
some  one,  anybody,  any  one,  some.  L. 
17. 

Alhaja,  aJ-aJi'-hn,  s.  f..  jewel.    L.  57. 

Alimentar.  ah-lee-main-tar\  to  feed. — Ali- 
mentarse  de  csperanzas,  to  live  on  hope. 
L.  53. 

jMimcnto,  8.  m.,  food.    L.  49. 

Alia,  al-va\  adv..  there,  yonder.    L.  18. 

Alma,  ai'-mn,  s.  f..  sonl.    L.  47. 

Almacen,  a/-mah-f?inm\  s.m..  store.  L.  fR. 

Almorzar,  al-mdr-fhar\  to  breakfast,  to  take 
breakfast.    L.  35. 

Almtierzo,  al-mu-cUr'-tho,  s.  m.,  breakfast. 
L.  55.  ^     , 

Alrededor,  al-ral-dai-ddr\  adv.,  around.   L. 

Alteraclon,  al-tah-rnh-tM-dne\  s.  f ,  altera- 
tion, change.    L.  50. 

Alto,  al'-t!i,  ad.1.,  hisrh.  tall.    L.  21. 

Altnra.  al-too'-rn.  s.  f.,  hcicht.    L.  37. 

Alumbrar.  nh-loom-hrnr\  to  light.    L.  61. 

..mable,  ah-mah'-blai,  adj.,  amiable.  L. 
47. 

Amador,  ah-maJi-ddr\  s,  m.,  lover.    L.  49. 


Amanecer,  ah-mah-nai-t?ialr\  to  get  morn- 
ing, to  be  in  a  place  at  dayurealc,  or 
morning,    L.  30. 

Amante,  ah'man'-iai,  p.  p.  and  b.,  loving, 
lover,  sweetheart.    L.  38, 

Auiar,  ah-mar\  to  love.    L.  21. 

Amanllo,  ah-mah-red' -yd,  adj., yellow,  L,  54. 

Ambicion,  a7n-bl-t/u-orie\  b.  f.,  ambition. 
L.  GO. 

Ambos,  am'-bds,  pron.,  both.    L.  28. 

Amenazar,  ah-mai-/iuh-tkar\  to  menace,  to 
threaten.    L.  59. 

Ameuidad,  ah-mcU-nii-dath' ^  b.  f.,  amenity. 
L.  32. 

Amigo,  ah-mZ'-go,  s.  m.,  friend.    L.  13. 

Amibtad,  ak-mees-tatti\  s.  f.,  fiiendship. 
L.  61. 

Amor,  ah-more'y  b.  m.,  love.    L.  45. 

Amplio,  a7n'-pll-Oy  adj.,  ample.    L.  52. 

Ampo,  8.  m.,  whiteness  (ot  snow).    L.  61. 

Aualltico,  ah-nak-ll'-ll-cOy  adj.,  analytical. 
L.  35. 

Anaranjado,  ah-nah-ranfiah'-do,  adj.,  or- 
ange (color).    L.  54. 

Ancho,  an'-chOs  adj.,  wide,  broad.    L.  47. 

Anchura,  an-ciux)' -ra,  b.  f.,  widtti,  breadth. 
L.  61. 

Anciano,  an-thl-ah'-nOy  a^j.  and  b.,  old,  old 
man.    L.  48. 

Andar,  an-dar\  to  walk,  to  go.    L.  44. 

Anecdota,  ah-ncUk'-do-iay  s.  f.,  anecdote, 
L.  44. 

Angel,  an'-haU,  s.  m.,  angel.    L.  60.  ^ 

Angulo,  an'goo-io,  s.  ra.,  angle.— En  anffuto* 
rectos,  at  right  angles.    L.  60. 

Animal,  ah-n^-7nal\  s.  m.,  animal.    L.  62. 

AaimaT.ah-ni-mar\  to  animate,  to  encour- 
age.   L.  38. 

Anoche,  ah-nd'-chai,  adv.,  last  night.   L.  28. 

Anochecer,  ah-m-chai-thair'y  to  get  night, 
to  be  (in  such  a  place)  at  nightfall.    L.  30, 

Antagonista,  an-(ah-gd-nees'-ta,  s.  m.,  an- 
tagonist.   L.  36. 

Ante,  an'-tai,  prep.,  before,  in  presence  of. 
L.  16. 

Anteayer,  an-fai-ah-yair',  adv.,  the  day  be- 
fore yesterday.    L.  16. 

Antcccdente,  an-tai-thai-dain'-taU  s.  m, 
antecedent.    L.  61. 

Antcnochc,  an-tai-nd'-chai,  the  night  be- 
fore last.    L.  23. 

Anteojo,  an-tai-d'-ho,  s.  m.,  eye-glasB.— 
AnteQJa<,  spectacles.    L.  63. 

Antcpenultimo,  an-tai-pai-nod'-thmo,  a^. 
ana  s.  m.,  antepenultimate.    L.  50. 

Anterior,  an-(ai-ri-or\  adj.,  preceding,  fore- 
going, previous,  former.    L.  49. 

Antes,  an'-taiss,  prep.— Antes  de,  before. 
L.  42. 

Antes,  adv.,  rather,  first,  sooner  than.  L.  16. 

Antepuesto,  an-faJ-pwais'-io,  p.p.,  prefixed : 
8.,  prefix.    L.  52. 

Antiguo,  an-t?'-giro,  adj.,  ancient,  old.  L. 
52. 

Antisocial,  an-tZ-ed-tM-al\  acU,,  antisocial, 
L.  50, 

Antoio,  an-W-ho,  b.  m.,  whim,  longing. 
L.  63. 

Aflndir,  an-vah-deer\  to  add.    L.  49. 

Ann,  an-ved\  s.  m.,  indigo  ("olor).    L.  54. 

Afio,  crn-?>),  s.  m.,  year.    L.  1*^. 

Apariencla,  ah-pm-ri-oin'-thl-a,  s.  f.,  ap. 
pearancc,    L,  53. 


VOCABULARY 


443 


Apegar,  ah-pai-gar^  to  adhere,  to  attach. 
L.  54. 

Apenas,  ah-pai'-nas,  adv.,  scarcely,  hardly. 
L.  29. 

Aplicar,  ah-pl^-car\  to  apply.    L.  62. 

Apostar,  ati-pbs-tar\  to  bet,  to  wager.   L.  63. 

Apoyar,  ah-po-yar\  to  lean,  to  support,  to 
protect.    L.  50. 

Apreciable,  ah-prah-the-ah'-Uai,  apprecia- 
ble, respectable.    L.  56. 

Apremiar,  ak-prai-me-ar' ,  to  press,  to  urge. 
L.  43. 

Aprender,  ah-prain-dair' .    L.  6. 

Apretar,  alc-prai-tar\  to  tighten,  to  press, 
to  urge.    L.  65. 

Aprisa,  ah-pre'-sa^  adv.,  quickly.    L.  6. 

Aprobacion,  ali-prd-bak-Uie-one\  6.  f.,  ap- 
probation.   L.  '2A. 

Aprobar,  ah-pro-bar\  to  approve.    L.  35. 

Aprovechar,  ah-pro-v(d-cltar\  to  progress, 
to  make  the  most  of.    L.  52. 

Aproximar,  ak-prd-kse-mar\  to  approxi- 
mate, to  approach.    L.  44. 

Apto,  ap'-to,  adj.,  apt,  fit.    L.  51. 

Apurado,  ak-poo-ratt'-do,  adj.,  embarrassed. 
L.  44. 

Aquel,  ah-TcaU\  pron.,  that  one,  he;  the 
tormer.    L.  18. 

Aqui,  ah-ke\  adv.,  here.    L.  18. 

Arbol,  ar'-bol^  s.  m.,  tree.    L.  49. 

Arboleda,  ar-bo-lai'-da,  s.  f.,  grove,    L.  49. 

Arenal,  ah-rai-nai\  s.  m.,  sandy  ground. 
L.  49. 

Arguir,  ar-goo-eer' ^  to  araue.    L.  34. 

Anstocracia,  ah-rees-tb^rah' -thl-a^  6.  f., 
aristocracy.    L.  60. 

Aristocratico,  adj.,  aristocrat.    L.  35. 

Aritmetica,  ah-reet-mai'-te-ka^  s.  f.,  arith- 
metic.   L.  21. 

Armar,  ar-mar\  to  arm.    L.  59. 

Arpa,  ar'-pa^  s.  f.,  harp.    L.  15. 

Arquitecto,  ar-kl-taik' -to^  s.  m.,  architect. 
L.  48. 

Arquitectura,  ar-ke-taik-too'-ra^  s.  f.,  archi- 
tecture.   L.  51. 

Arreglar,  ar-rai-glar\  to  regulate,  to  ar- 
range, to  settle.    L.  60. 

Arrepentirse,  ar-rai-pain-teer'-sai,  to  re- 
pent.   L.  38. 

Arrcstar,  ar-rais-tar' ,  to  arrest.    L.  37. 

Arriba,  ar-re'-ba^  adv.,  above,  up-stairs.  L. 
33. 

Arte,  s.  ar'-tai,  m.  and  f.,  art.    L.  31. 

Articulo,  ar-te'-coo-lo^  s.  m.,  article.    L.  43. 

Artificial,  ar-te-fe-the-al' .  adj.,  artificial.  L. 
49. 

Artista,  ar-tees'-ta,  s.  m.,  artist.    L.  36. 

Asador,  s.  m.,  spit  (for  roasting).    L.  65, 

Ascender,  af!-thain-dair\  to  ascend,  to 
amount.    L.  37. 

Ascension,  as-tham-s?-one\  8.  f.,  ascension. 
L.  49. 

Asegurar,  ah-sai-goo-rar',  to  secure,  to  as- 
sure.   L.  38. 

Asesino,  ah-sai-s^'-no^  s.  m.,  assassin.  L. 
59. 

Asi,  ah-sl\  adv.,  so,  thus.  L.  20.— ^^.<f»  ctue, 
BO  that,  as  soon  as.  L.  29, — Asi  asi,  so 
so.    L.  39. 

Asiento,  ah-s^-ain'-to,  s.  m.,  seat.    L.  39. 

Asir,  ah-seer',  to  seize,  to  make  the  most  of. 
L.42. 

Aino,  as'-no,  s.  m.,  ass.    L.  61. 


[L.  46. 

Asombro,  ah-sdni'-bro,  s.  m.,  amazement. 

Astronomia,  ass-tro-nd-me'-a,  s.  f.,  astrono- 
my.   L.  49. 

Atencion,  ahtain-tM-one',  s.  f„  attention. 
L.  56. 

Atender,  ah-tain-dair\  to  attend.    L.  37. 

Atlantico,  at-lan'  le-ko,  s.  m,  and  adj.,  At- 
lantic.   L.  46. 

Atolladero,  ah-tbl-lya-dai' -ro,  s.m.,  diflicul- 
ty.    L.  60. 

Atraccion,  ah-trak-the-one\  s.  f.,  attraction. 
L.  24. 

Atras,  ah-tras\  adv.,  behind,  ago.    L.  58. 

Atreverse,  ah-trai-vair'-sai,  to  dare.    L.  48. 

Atrevimiento,  ah-trai-ve-me-ain'-to,  s.  m., 
assurance,  daring.    L.  64. 

Atrocidad,  ah-tro-the-dath' ,  s.  f.,  atrocity. 
L.  36. 

Atropellar,  a-trb-paU-yar' ,  to  trample  upon, 
to  run  over.    L.  51. 

Aullar,  ah-ool-yar\  to  howl.    L.  44. 

Aumento,  ah-oo-main' -to,  s.  m.,  augmenta- 
tion, increase.    L.  59. 

Aun,  ah-oon',  adv.,  still,  yet.    L.  25. 

Aunque,  ah-oon-ke',  adv.,  although,  though. 
L.  36. 

Aut^encia,  ah-oo-sain'-ihe-a,  s.  f.,  absence. 
L.  35. 

Ausente,  ah-oo-sain'-tai,  adj.,  absent.  L. 
59. 

Autor,  ah-oo-tbr' ,  s.  m.,  author.    L.  47. 

Autoridad,  ah-oo-to-re-dath' ,  s.  f.,  authority. 
L.59. 

Auxiliar,  ah-oo-kse-le-ar',  s.m.  and  adj.,  aux- 
iliarv.    L.  57. 

Auxiliar,  to  help,  to  aid.    L.  62. 

Auxilio,  ah-oo-kse'-le-o,  s.  m.,  help,  assist- 
ance.   L.  55. 

Avenida,  ah-vai-ne'-da,  s.  f.,  avenue.  L. 
15. 

Aventurarse,  ah-vain-too-rar'-sai,  to  ven- 
ture.   L.  65. 

Avisar,  ah-ve-sar\  to  inform,  to  let  know. 
L.  45. 

Ay  I  ah-e\  int.,  alas !    L.  46. 

Ayer,  ah-yair',  adv.,  yesterday.    L.  16. 

Ayudar,  ah-yoo-dar',  to  aid,  to  help.  L. 
38. 

Azul,  ah-thod',  adj.,  blue.    L.  54. 

B. 

Bailar,  bah-l-lar' ,  to  dance.    L.  28. 
Baile,  bah-e-lai,  s.  m.,  dance,  ball.    L.  30. 
Bajar,  bah-har\  to  go  or  come  down,  to 

lower.    L.  53. 
Bajo,  bah'-ho,  adj.,  low,  base,  mean.    L.  21, 
Banco,  ban' ko,  s.  m.,  bench,  bank.    L.  31. 
Bandera,   ban-dai'-ra,  s.  f.,  flag,  standard. 

L.  58. 
Banar,  ban-yar\  to  bathe.    L.  49. 
Barato,  bah-rah'-to,  adj.,  cheap.    L.  13. 
Barba,  bar'-ba,  s.  f.,  chin,  beard.    L.  59. 
Barberia,  bar-bai-re' -a,  s.  f.,  barber's  shop. 

Barbero,  bar-bai'-ro,  s.  m.,  barber.    L.  33. 
Barbilampiiio,     bar-be-lam-peen'-yo,     adj., 

having  a  thin  beard.     L.  50. 
Barco,  s.  m.,  vessel,  boat.    L.  60. 
Baron,  bah-rbne',  s.  m.,  baron.    L.  51. 
Barrer,  bar-rair\  to  sweep.    L.  24. 
Basta !  bas'-ta,  int.,  enough  !    L.  30. 
Bastante,  bas-tan'-tai,  adv.,  enough.    L.  25. 


444 


VOCABULAEY. 


Bastar,  bas-tar',  to  be  enough,  sufficient. 
L.  30. 

Baston.  bas-mne,  b.  m.,  cane,  stick.    L.  10. 

Baza,  hah'tha,  s.  f.,  trick  (at  cards).— No 
dejar  meter  baza^  not  to  let  any  one  put 
in  a  &ini,'le  word.    L.  63. 

Bebedor,  bai-beU-dOre' ,  8.  m.,  tippler,  toper, 
drinker.    L.  (55. 

Beber,  bai-bair\  to  drink.— J5e6er  los  vien- 
to3  por  algo,  to  solicit  with  much  eager- 
ness, to  desire  ardently. —jSefter  como  uua 
Cuba,  to  drink  like  a  fish.    L.  7. 

Belleza,  balt-yai' -tha,  s.  f.,  beauty.    L.  51. 

Bello,  baU'-yo.  adj.,  beautiful,  handsome. 
L.  31. 

Bendecir,  baia-dal-theer' ,  to  bless.    L.  41. 

Bendito.  bain-dl' -to^  adj.,  blessed.    L.  52. 

Besar,  oai-sar\  to  kiss.    L.  39. 

Beso,  bai'-so,  s.  ra.,  kiss.  L.  39. 

Biblioteca,  bi-ble-o-tai'-ka,  s.  f.,  library.  L. 
52. 

Bleu,  b^-ain'  (pronounce  in  one  syllable), 
adv.,  well.  L.  3.— Esta  bien,  very  well, 
all  right.— No  bien,  scarcely,  no  sooner. 
L.  29. 

Bienhechor,  bS-ain-ai-chdr\  s.  m.,  benefac- 
tor.   L.  .50. 

Bien  venido !  bd-ain'  vai-nS'-do,  int.,  wel- 
come !    L.  45. 

Billete,  beel-yai'-tai,  s.  m.,  note,  ticket.  L. 
7. 

Blanca,  blan'-ka,  s.  f.— Encontrarse  sin  blan- 
ca,  not  to  have  a  cent.    L.  64. 

Blanco,  blan'-ko,  adj.,  white.    L.  58. 

Blanco,  s.  m.,  mark  (to  aim  at). — Quedarse 
en  bianco,  to  be  left  in  the  lurch.    L.  57. 

Bledo,  blai'-do,  s.  m.,  straw.— No  se  me  da 
un  bledo,  I  do  not  care  a  straw  for  it.  L. 
03. 

Boca,  b5'-ka,  s.  f ,  mouth.     L.  44.— Ilablar 

{)or  boca  de  ganso,  to  repeat  what  another 
las  said.    L.  63. 

Bocado,  bo-kak'-do,  s.  m.,  mouthful,  bite.— 
Bocado  sin  hueso,  sinecure.    L.  61. 

Bolsa,  bbl'-sa,  s.  f.,  purse.    L.  45. 

Bolsillo,  bdl-seel'-yo,  s.  m.,  pocket,  purse. 
L.  47. 

Bondad,  bdne-dath',  b.  f.,  goodness,  kind- 
ness.   L.  39. 

Bondadoso,  bone-dah-do'-so,  a4J.,good,  kind. 
L.  5-1. 

Bonito,  bd-nV-to,  adj.,  pretty.    L.  58. 

Borboton,  br/re-'/H-ton-e' .—X  borbotoneit,  bub- 
bling, hurriedly,  confusedly.    L.  63. 

Bo.sque,  bda'-kal,  b.  m.,  wood,  woody  place. 
L.  40. 

Bota,  bd'4a,  s.  f ,  boot.    L.  10. 

Botica,  bb-ll'-ka,  s.  f.,  drug-store.    L.  C2. 

Boticario,  bo-tl-kah' -rl-o,  s.  m.,  druggist. 
L.  49.  °^ 

Bravata,  brah^ah'-ta,  s.f.,  bravado.— Echar 
braratas,  to  bra;j,  to  boast.    L.  62. 

Bravo,  brah'-vo,  adj.,  brave.    L.  41. 

Bravo  I  int.,  bravo  I    L.  48. 

Brazo,  brah'-t/io,  s.  m.,  arm.    L.  44. 

Bribon,  brl-bonl',  b.  m.,  scoundrel,  rascal. 
L.  32. 

Bruto,  broo'-to,  b.  m.,  brute,  ignorant  per- 
son.   L.  48. 

Bruto,  adj.,  brutish,  ignorant.    L.  48. 

Bucno,  bwai'-no,  adj.,  good.  L.  1.— Buenos 
dias,  good  morning,  good  day.— De  buenas 
4  priineras,  all  at  once.    L.  62. 


Buey,  bwai'-^,  fl.  m.,  ox.    L.  B8. 

Bula,  boo'4a,  s.  f.— Tener  bula  para  todo,  to 

act  according  to  one's  fancy.    L.  64. 
Bulla,  bool'-ya,  b.  f.,  noise.- Meter  btiUa, 

to  make  a  noise.    L.  63. 
Bullicio,  bool-yS'-thi-o,  8.  m.,  bustle,  noise, 

uproar.    L.  54, 
Bulto,  bool'-to,  8.  m..  bundle.  — Hablar  a 

bul^,  to  talk  at  random.    L.  63. 
Buria.  boor'-la,  s.  f.,  jest,  joke.— Hablar  de 

bunas,  to  speak  in  jest.    L.  33. 
Burlar,  boor-iar',  to  jest. — Burlarse  de  al- 

guno,  to  make  fun  of,  to  laugh  at  any  one. 

— Burla  burlando,  half  jest,  half  earnest. 

L.  3;}. 
Burlon,  boor-l^ne',  8.  m.,  wag,  jester.  L.  44. 
Busca,  boos'-ka,  s.  f.,  search.- En  busca  de, 

in  search  of.    L.  55. 
Buscar,  boos-kar',  to  search,  to  look  for. 

L.  A.—Buscar  cinco  pies  al  gato,  to  pick 

a  quarrel.    L.  4- 


C. 


Caballcjo,  kaJi-bal-yai'-Jw,  s.m.  (dhn.  of  Ca- 

BALLo),  nag,  contemptible  old  horse.    L. 

49. 
Caballero,  kah^al-yai'-ro,  b.  m.,  gentleman, 

knight.— Buenos  tardes,  cabaUero,  good 

afternoon,  sir.    L.  2. 
Caballo,  kah-bal'-yo,  s.  m.,  horse.    L.  4. 
Cabcllo,  kah-baU'-yo,  s.  m.,  hair.  .L.  33. — 

Tomarla  ocasion  por  los  cabeUos,  to  profit 

by  the  occasion.    L.  61. 
Caber,  kah-bair',  to  hold,  to  contain.— No 

caber  de  gozo,  to  be  overjoyed.— i  Puedfe 

caber  en  tu  imaginacion  ?    can   such   a 

thing  enter  into  your  imagination  *— No 

cdbe  mas,  nothing  more  can  be  desired. 

L.  42. 
Cabeza,  kah-bai'-tha,  s.  f .  head.    L.  28. 
Cable,  kah'-blai,  s.  m.,  cable.    L.  46. 
Cabo,  kah'-bo,  s.  m.,  end. — Al  ca^,  at  last. 

L.  &1. 
Cada,  kah'-da,  pron.,  each,  every.— Cada 

vez,  every  time. —  Cada  uno,  each,  every 

one.    L.  4S. 
Caer,  kah-air\  to  fall,  to  see,  to  understand, 

to  be,  fall  due.    L.  4\.—  Caer  de  pies,  to 

fall  on  one's  feet.— Ya  caigo  en  cllo,  now 

I  see,  understand.— Las  ventanas  caen  k 

la  plaza,  the  windows  look  on  the  square. 

—  Cairrsele  a  uno  la  cara  de  vergQenza,  to 

blush  with  shame.    L.  59. 
Cafe,  kah-fai',  8.  m.,  coffee,  coffee-house. 

L.  14. 
Caja,  kah'-ha,  s.  f,  case,  box,  cash  (com- 
mercial).   L.  (50. 
Cal,  s.  f.,  lime.— De  cal  y  canto,  of  stone. 

L.  48. 
Calabaza,  kah-iah-bah'-t/ta,  s.  f.,  pumpkin. 

— Dar  calabaza^,  to  give  the  mitten.  L.  61. 
Calcular,  kal-koo4ar',  to  calculate.    L.  51. 
Caldo,  kal'-do,  s.  m.,  broth.    L.  44. 
Calducho,  kal-doo'-c/io,  b.  m.,  poor  broth. 

L.  44. 
Calentar,  kah-lcUn-tar' ,  to  heat,  to  wami. 

L.  84. 
Calcntura,  kah-lain-too'-ra,  s.  f,  fever.    L. 

(50. 
Caliente,  kah-U-ain'-taL,  ac^.,  hot,  warm. 

L,  44, 


VOCABULARY. 


445 


Callado,  kaZ-yah'-do^  adj.,  silent,  taciturn. 

L.  20. 
Callar,  kal-yar'^  to  be  silent,  to  keep  si- 
lence.—CW/ar  su    pico,  to   hold    one's 

tongue,  to  say  nothing.    L.  42. 
Calle,  kal'-yai^  s.  f.,  street. — Dejar  a  uno  en 

la  caUe^  to  strip  one  of  his  all.    L.  15. 
Calor,  kah-lor\  s.  m.,  heat,  warmth.    L.  25. 
Calva,  kal'-va^  s.  f.,  bald  place,  bald  part  of 

the  head.    L.  45. 
Calvo,  kcU'-vo,  adj.,  bald.    L.  45. 
Calza,  kal'-tha,  s.  f.,  stockings. — Tomar  las 

calzas  de  V^illadiego,  to  make  off,  to  make 

a  hurried  escape.    L.  50. 
Cama,  kah'-ma,  s.  f.,  bed.— Guardar  cama, 

to  be  confined  to  one's  bed.    L.  14. 
Cambiar,  kam-be-ar\  to  change.    L.  59. 
Cambio,  kam'-be-o,  s.  m.,  change.    L.  46. 
Camino,  kah-me'-no^  s.  m.,  way,  road.  L.  60. 
Camisa,  kah-me'-sa,  s.  f.,  shirt. — Meterse  en 

camisa  de  once  varas,  to  interfere  in  other 

people's  affairs.    L.  46. 
Campo,  kam'-po,  s.  m.,  field,  camp. — Dejar 

el  campo  libre,  to  leave  the  field  to  one's 

competitors.    L.  59. 
Canasto,  kah-nas'-to,  s.  m.,  basket.    L.  58. 
Candidamente,  kan'-de-dah-main-tai,  adv., 

candidly.    L.  48. 
Cansado,  kan-sah'-do,  adj.,  tired,  tiresome. 

— Estar  cansado,  to  be  tired.— Ser  cansa- 
do, to  be  tiresome.    L.  20. 
Cansar,  kan-sar\  to  tire,  to  fatigue.    L.  33. 
Cantar,  kan-tar\  to  sing.    L.  15. 
Cautatriz,  kan-tah-treeth' ,  s.  f.,  singer.    L. 

15. 
Cantidad,  kan-te-dath\  quantity,  sum.    L. 

60. 
Canto,  kan'-to,  s.  m.,  singing,  stone. — De 

cal  y  canto,  of  stone.    L.  48. 
Cantor,  kan-tor\  ,s.  m.,  singer.    L.  15. 
Canon,  kan-yone' ,  s.  m.,  cannon.    L.  44. 
Canonazo,  kan-yo-nah'-tho,  s.  m.,  cannon- 
shot,  gun-shot.    L.  44. 
Capa,  kah'-pa,  s.  f.,  cloak.— Andar  de  ca2>a 

caida,  to  be  crestfallen.    L.  60. 
Capacidad,  kah-pah-the-dath' ,  s.f.,  capacity, 

capability.    L.  36. 
Capaz,  kah-path',  adj.,  capable.    L.  59. 
Capitan,  kah-pe-tan',  s.  m.,  captain.    L.  62. 
Capricho,  kah-prl'-clw,  s.m.,  caprice,  fancy, 

whim.    L.  60. 
Cara,  kah'-ra,  s.  f,  face.— Dar  a  alguno  con 

la  puerta  en  la  cara,  to  shut  the  door  in 

any  one's  face.    L.  60. 
Caracter,  kah-rak'-fair  (pi.  caracteres),  s. 

m.,  character,  disposition.    L.  40. 
Caramba !    kah-ram'-ba,    inter.,   strange  1 

zounds !    L.  65. 
Carcajada,    kar-kah-hah'-da,    s.    f.,    loud 

laugh,  burst  of  laughter.    L.  54. 
Ciircel,  kar'-thail,  s.  f ,  prison.    L.  .34. 
Carga,  kar'-ga,  s.  f.,  load,  burden,  charge. 

L.  60. 
Cargar,  kar-gar\  to  charge,  to  load,   to 

heap.    L.  47. 
Cargo,  kar'-go,  s.  m.,  load,  employment, 

charge,  office.    L.  60. 
Caridad,  kah-re-dath' ,  s.  f.,  charity.    L.  41. 
Cariredondo,      kah-rl-rai-done' -dx>^      adj., 

roundfaced.    L.  59. 
Carne,  kar'-nai,  s.  f.,  flesh,  meat.    L.  7. 
Carnero,  kar-nai'-ro,  s.  m.,  mutton,  sheep. 

L.  40. 


Carniceria,  kar-nMhai-r^'-a,  s.  f.,  butcher's 
shop,  meat  market.    L.  11. 

Carnicero,  kar-ne-thai'-ro.  s.  m.,  butcher. 
L.  11. 

Carnuza,  kar-noo'-tha,  b.  f.,  bad,  disgust- 
ing, spoiled  meat.    L.  49. 

Caro,  kah'-ro,  adj.,  dear,  at  a  high  price. 
L,  13. 

Carpintero,  kar-peen-tai'-ro,  s.  m.,  carpen- 
ter.   L.  33. 

Carrera,  kar-rai'-ra,  s.  f.,  career,  course, 
race,  profession.    L.  48. 

Carro,  kar'-ro,  s.  m.,  car,  wagon.    L.  58. 

Carruage,  kar-roo-ah'-hai,  s.  m.,  carriage. 
L.  51. 

Carta,  kar'-ta,  s.  f.,  letter.    L.  7. 

Cartilla,  kar-teel' -ya,  s.  f.,  primer.— Cosa 
que  no  esta  en  la  cartilla,  something 
strange  or  uncommon.    L.  61. 

Casa,  kah'-sa,  s.  f.,  house.    L.  9. 

Cascaras !  kas'-kah-ras,  int.,  oh !  dear  me  I 
L.  63. 

Casero,  kah-sai'-ro,  adj.,  domestic,  house- 
hold.— Comedia  casera,  parlor  play.  L.  59. 

Casi,  kah'-se,  adv.,  almost.    L.  32. 

Caso,  kah'-so,  s.  m.,  case,  event.- No  haga 
V.  caso  de  eso,  take  no  notice  of  that. 
L.  60. 

Castaiia,  kas-tan'-ya,  s.  f.,  chestnut.    L.  40. 

Castellano,  kas-tail-yah'-no,  s,  m.,  Castiliau 
languagij.    L.  55. 

Castellano,  adj.,  Castilian.    L.  55. 

Castillo,  kas-teel' -yo,  s.  m.,  castle. — Hacer 
castillos  en  el  aire,  to  build  castles  in  the 
air.    L.  48. 

Casualidad,  kah-soo-ah-U-dath' ,  s.  f.,  casual- 
ty, chance,  hazard.    L.  60. 

Casucha,  kah-soo'-cha,  s.  f.,  contemptible 
old  house.    L.  44. 

Catolicismo,  ka-to-le-thcess'-mo,  s.  m.,  Ca- 
tholicism.   L.  49. 

Catorce,  kah-tor' -thai,  num.  adj.,  fourteen, 
—Luis  Catorce.  Louis  the  Fourteenth. 
L.  14. 

Causa,  kah'-oo-sa,  s.f.,  cause. — A  causa  de, 
on  account  of.    L.  40. 

Causar,  kah-oo-sar',  to  cause.    L.  51. 

Caza,  kah'-tha,  s,  f.,  chase,  hunt,  hunting. 
— Ir  a  la  caza,  to  go  hunting.    L.  58. 

Cazar,  kah-thar',  to  chase,  to  hunt.    L.  58. 

Celebracion,  thai-lai-brah-the-one' ,  s.  f., 
celebration.    L.  39. 

Celebrar,  thai-lai-brar' ,  to  celebrate. — Cele- 
bro  que  V.  haya  venido,  I  am  glad  you 
have  come.    L.  39. 

Celeste,  thai-lais' -tai,  adj.,  heavenly,  celes- 
tial.—Los  cuerpos  celestes,  the  heavenly 
bodies.    L.  49. 

Celestial,  thai-lais-te-al' ,  adj.,  celestial, 
heavenly.    (See  Celeste.)    L.  49. 

Celico,  thai'-ll-ko,  adj.,  heavenly  (used  in 
poetry  only).    L.  49. 

Celo,  ^^a«'-to,  s.m.,  zeal.    L.  55. 

Cena,  thai'-na,  s.f.,  supper,  Last  Supper. 
L.  52. 

Cenar,  thai-nar',  to  sup,  to  take  supper. 
L.  39. 

Centavo,  thain-tah'-vo,  s.m.,  cent.    L.  14. 

Centella,  thain-taU'-ya,  s.  f.,  flash,  spark.— 
Echar  rayos  y  centellas,  to  foam  with  rage. 
L.  62. 

Centena,  thain-tai'-na,  s.f.,  about  a  hun- 
dred.   L.  40. 


446 


VOCABULARY 


Ccntenar,  thainrtai-nar\  s.  m.,  a  hundred, 
L.  40. 

Cerca,  thair'-ka^  adv.,  near,  close  by.     Cer- 
ca  dc  8u  casa,  near  his  house.    L.  31. 

Ceremonial,  thai-rai-md-ni-al\  adj., ceremo- 
nial, ceremonious.    L.  54. 

Cerrar,  ttiair-rar\  to  shut,  to  close.    L.  &4. 

Cerrojo,  thair-ro'-ho^  s.  m.,  bolt.    L.  59. 

Cerveza,  thair-vai'-tka^  s.  f.,  ale,  beer.  L.  7. 

Chaleco,  chak-lai'-ko,  s.  m.,  vest.    L.  10. 

Chaucear,  chan-thai-ar' ,  to  jest,  to  joke. 

L.  58. 
Chanza,  chan'-tha,  b.  f.,  jest,  joke.    L.  58. 
Charla,   char'-la,    s.  f.,  chit-chat,   prattle. 

L.  60. 
Charlar,  char-lar\  to  chat,  to  prattle.  L.  37. 
Chasco,  chas'-ko,  s.  m.,  disappointment. — 
Llevarse  un  chasco  eolemne,  to  be  greatly 
disappointed.    L.  46. 
Chelin,  chai-leen\  s.  ra.,  shilling.    L.  61. 
Chico,  che'-ko,  adj.,  little,  small.    L.  44. 
Chiquirritico,  che-keer-rMl'-ko,  adj.,   very 

small,  very  little.    L.  44. 
Chito  !  che'-to,  int.,  hush !  silence  1    L.  46. 
Chocolate,  clio-ko-lak'-tai,  s.  m.,  chocolate. 

L.  14. 
Cic^o,  thl-ai'-QO,  e.  m.  and  adj.,  blind.— A 

ctegas^  blindly,  in  the  dark.    L.  48. 
Ciclo,  thl-ai'-lo^  s.  m.,  heaven,  sky.— Tomar 

cl  cielo  con  las  manos,  to  be  transported 

with  joy,  grief,  or  passion.    L.  45. 
Clen,  the-ain'   num.  adj.,  a  hundred. — (See 

ClENTO.)     L.  14. 
Cioncia,  thl-ain' -thl-a^  s.  f.,  science.    L.  49. 
Ciento,  thl-ain'-to^  num.  adj.,  a  hundred. — 

(Sec  CiEN.)    L.  14, 
Cierto,  thl-air'-to^  adj.,  certain.    L.  48. 
Cimiento,  the-me-ain'-to,  s.  m.,  foundation. 

L.  51). 
Cinco,  theen'-h)y  num.  adj.,  five,  fifth.   L.  14. 
Cincucnta,  )!/i6(?n-^wa2'/i'-to,  num.  adj.,  fifty, 

fiftieth.    L.  14. 
Circunspeccion,    tlieer-koonss-paik-tfil-dne' , 

8.  f.,  circumspection.    L.  34. 
Circunstancia,  Uteor-koonsn-ian'-th^-a,  s.  f., 

circumstance.    1^  40. 
Cita,  ihe'-ta,  8.  f.,  appointment,  quotation. 

L.  00. 
Citar,  tM-tar',  to  make  an  appointment 

(with  any  one),  to  quote.    L.  52. 
Ciudadano,  i/ii-oo-dah-ciah'-no,  citizen.    L. 

47. 
Civilizacion,    thZ-vl-lMhah-thl-one\    b.  f., 

civilization.    L.  60. 
Claridad,  klaJi-rc-dath\  s.  f.,  clearness,  per- 
spicuity.   L.  36. 
Claro,  klah'-ro,  adj.,  cle^r,  bright.    L.  59. 
Clase,  klah'-sai,  s.  f.,  class.    L.  54. 
Cliisico,  klah'-nl-ko,  adj.,  classic,  classical. 

L. ;«. 
Clasificacion,    klah-sl-fl-ka-thl-one\    b.  f., 

classification.    L.  24. 
Clima,  kW-via^  s.  m.,  climate.    L.  40. 
Cocer,  ko-thair',  to  boil,  to  cook.    L.  42. 
Coche,  kd'-c/iai,  b.  m.,  coach,  carriage  in 

general.— Ir  en  coc/ie,  to  go  in  a  carriage. 

L.  42. 
Cocincro,  ko-tM-nai'-ro^  b.  m.,  cook.    L.  11. 
Coft-e,  ko'-frai,  8.  ni.,  chest,  trnnk.    L.  60. 
Coger,  kd-hair\  to  catch,  to  take,  to  pick 

up.    L.  46. 
Cojcar,  kO-hat-ar\  to  limp,  to  walk  lamo. 

L.  39. 


Cojo,  W-ho,  a4).  and  s.  m.,  lame.    L.  44. 
Colada,  k54ah'-da,  s.f.,  etifiening  of  clothes 
— Todo  saldra  en  la  colada,  all  will  be 
brought  to  light.    L.  65. 
Colectivo,  ko-laik-tl' -vOy  adj.,  collective,    L. 

40. 
Colgar,  kdl€-gar\  to  hang,    L.  59. 
Colina,  ko-le'-na,  s.  f.  hill.    L.  58. 
Colocacion,    kd40-kah-thi-l^e\    b.  f.,    em- 
ployment, place,  eituation,    L.  00. 
Colocar,  ko-W-kar',  to  put,  to  arrange,  to 

place,  to  employ.    L.  46. 
Colorado,  ko-lo-rah' -do,  adj.,  red.    L.  54. 
Colorido,  ko-lb-rl' -do,  s,  m,,  coloring  (paint- 
ing).   L.  52. 
Color,  ko-Wr',  8.  m.,  color,    L.  52. 
Combatir.    kdnie-bah-teer' ,   to  combat,   to 

fight.    L.  54, 
Combinacion,    kome-bl-nah-thZ-dne' ,   s.  f., 

combination.    L.  24. 
Combinado,  kome-bl-nah'-do,  p.p.  and  adj., 

combined.    L.  58. 
Combinar,  kovie-bl-nar' ,  to  combine.     L. 

58. 
Comedia,  ko-mai'-d?-a,  b.  f.,  comedy,  L.  52, 
Comer,  ko-mair',  to  eat,  to  dine.    L.  7. 
Comerciante,     ko-mair-thl-an'-tai,    8.  m., 

merchant.    L.  5. 
Cometa,    ko-mai'-ta,   s.  m.,   comet;  s.  f., 

kite  (toy).    L.  60. 
Cometer,  ko-mai-lair' ,  to  commit.    L.  43. 
Comico,  ko'-me-ko,  s.  m.,  actor,  comedian. 

L.  63. 
C6mico,  atlj.,  comic,  comical.    L.  35. 
Como,  ko'-tno,  adv.,  how,  as,—/  Corno  eeta 
V.  ?  how  are  you  ?— Yo  sere  tan  rico  coi/io 
61,  I  shall  be  as  rich  as  he,    L.  15, 
Comodidad,  ko-md-de-dath',  s,  f.,  commodi- 
ty, convenience,  comfort.    L.  29. 
C6modo,  ko' -mo-do,  adj.,  commodious,  com- 
fortable.   L.  29. 
Compaflero,  kome-pan-yai'-ro,  s.  m.,  com- 
panion, comrade.    L.  60. 
Compailia,  konie-pan-yl'-a,  s.  f.,  company. 

L.  60. 
Comparativo,     kdme-pah-rah-ii'-ro,     adj., 

comparative.    L.  61. 
Compasion,  kome-pa/i-sl-Dne' ,  s.  f.,  compas- 
sion.   L.  45. 
Complacencia,  kdme-plah-thain'-Uiz-a,  8.  f., 

complacency,  pleasure.    L.  39, 
Complemento,   kOnie-plai-main'-to,   B.   m,, 

complement.    L.  51. 
Componente,  kd7iie-pd-nain'-tai,  part.,  com- 
ponent.   L.  49. 
Componer,  kome-pd-nair' ,  to  compose,  to 

mend,  to  arrange,  to  compound.    L.  49. 
Compotticion,  kdffie-j)d-ftl-(hi4}tie',  e.  f.,  com- 
position, mending,  arranging,  compound- 
ing.   L.  2t. 
Comprar,  kdme-prar\  to  buy,  to  purchase. 

L.  4. 
Comprender,  kdme-pratn-dair',  to  compre- 
hend, to  understand,  to  comprise.    L.  60. 
Con,  kdtie,  nrep.,  with,  by.    L.  10. 
Coucebir,   Kone-ihai-beer' ,  to  conceive  of. 

L.  54. 
Conceder,  kdm-thal-dair' ,  to  grant,  to  con- 
cede.   L.  5.3. 
Concertar,   kdne-thair-tar' ,  to  concert,  to 

agree.    L.  58. 
Conciencia,  kdne-t/il-ain'-t/iha,  b.  f.,  con- 
Bcieuce.    L.  40. 


VOCABULARY. 


44^ 


Coacierto,  kdne-the-air'-to.,  s.  m.,  concert, 
agreemeut.     L.  17.  ,    ,  ^ 

Couciair,  kone-doo-eer ,  to  conclude,  to  fin- 
ish, to  be  over.    L.58.  ^     ,  ^^_ 

Coiicordaacia,  kone-lcore-dan' -the-a,  s.  f., 
concordance,  agreement.    L.  50. 

Condescender,  kone-daia-tham-dair' ,  to  con- 
descend, to  agree.     L.  48. 

Condicion,  kone-de-the-oae',  s.  f.,  condition. 

Condicional,  Tcone-de-the-one-al' ,  adj.,  con- 
ditional.   L.  59. 

Conducir,  kdm-doo-theer\  to  conduct,  to 
convey,  to  lead,    L.  40. 

Confeiar,  kdne-fai-sar\  to  confess,  to  ac- 
knowledge, to  avow.     L.  34. 

Confaso,  koiie-foo' -so^  adj.,  confused,  con- 
founded.   L.  54. 

Conjugacion,  kdae-hoo-ga?i-the-dne\  8.  f., 
coajugatioa.     L.  43. 

Coajugar,  k5iie-lioo-gar\  to  conjugate.  L. 
43. 

Coajuncion,  kdm-hoon-the-one\  s.  f.,  con- 
juactioa.     L.  43. 

Connaigj,  kone-mV -go^  pron.,  with  me,  witlx 
myself.     L.  26. 

Coaocer,  kono4hair\  to  know,  to  be  ac- 
qaainted  with.     L.  25. 

Cjnociiniento,  ko-no-tM-m^-aiii'-to,  s,  m., 
kaowledge,  bill  of  lading  (commerce). 
L.  43. 

Consecuencia,  kone-sai-kwain'-t/iS-a,  s.  f., 
coa^e:iiience.     L.  31. 

Consegair,  kdiii-sal-gheer\  to  obtain,  to 
get,  to  succeed.     L.  42. 

Coasejo,  kjiie-sai' -Iw,  s.  m.,  counsel,  ad- 
vice.   L.  53. 

Conseatir,  kjns-sairi-teer',  to  consent,  to 
agree  (to).     L.  3S. 

Coaiistir,  koris-seess-teer\  to  consist.    L.  52. 

Consular,  kons-sd4ar\  to  console.    L.  35. 

Constaacia,  kans-tan' -t/iS-a,  s.  f.,  constancy, 
steadiness.     L.  40. 

Coastruocioa,  kdns-trook-thd-dne\  construc- 
tioa.    L.  51. 

Coataate,  kjm-tan'-tai,  s.  m.  and  adj., 
reaiy  moaey.     L.  38. 

Coutar,  kd.is-iar'y  to  count,  to  relate,  to  tell. 
L.  35. 

Coateaer,  Wm-t!ii-nair\  to  contain,  to  re- 
strain, to  stop,  to  cliecv.     L.  49. 

ConteaiJo,  kone-tai-nee'-do,  s.  m.,  contents. 
L.  4). 

Conteatar,  kdm-tain-tar' ,  to  content,  to 
make  glal.    L.  33. 

Conteato,  kom-tam'-to.  adj.,  content,  con- 
tented, glal,  satisfied.     L.  3-3. 

Conti^o,  k)iie-f^'-go^^Toa.,  with  thee.  L.  26. 

Coatiaaar,  kom-t^-aoo-ar' ,  to  continue.  L. 
54. 

Contra,  klm'-tra,  prep.,  against.    L.  41. 

Coatradecir,  koiX2-trah-d(d-tlieer\  to  contra- 
dict.   L.  41. 

■Coatrario,  kom-trah' -rl-o,  adj.,  contrary.— 
AI  Oiitrario,  on  the  contrary.     L.  53. 

Cou veneer,  kom-vain-thair' ,  to  convince. 
L.  43. 

Coavenir,  kone-vai-mer',  to  suit,  to  be  con- 
venient, to  agree.     L.  30. 

Conversacion,  kone-vair-sah-thl-dne'^  s.  f., 
coaversation.     L.  24. 

Conversar,  kdne-vair-sar\  to  converse.  L. 
53. 


Convertir,  kone-vair-teer',  to  convert.  L.  45. 

Couvicto,  kOne-veek'-to,  irr.  past  part,  (of 
CoNVENCEB),  convicted.    L.  52. 

Convite,  kone-vee'-tai,  s.  m.,  invitation,  feast 
or  banquet  to  which  any  one  is  invited. 
L.  5b. 

Copulativo,  ko-poo-la/i-te'-vo,  adj.,  copula- 
tive.   L.  59. 

Coqueta,  ko-kai'-ta,  s.  f.,  coquette.    L.  32. 

Corazou,  kd-ra/i-t/iom',  s.  m.,  heart.    L.  56. 

Corbata,  kOre-baJi'-ta,  cravat.    L.  10. 

Corona,  ko-rO'-na,  s.  1'.,  crown.    L.  56. 

Correcto,  kor-raik'-to,  adj.,  correct.    L.  29. 

Corredor,  kor-rai-dore',  s.  m,,  corridor, 
broker.    L.  49. 

Corregir,  kor-rai-heer\  to  correct. —  Corre- 
girse^  to  mend.    L.  59. 

Correo,  kor-rai'-o^  s.  m.,  courier,  post.— Ca- 
sa  de  correos,  post-office.    L.  29. 

Correr,  kor-rair\  to  run.— Co/rer^g,  to  be 
ashamed  or  confused,  to  blush.    L.  51. 

Corretear,  kdr-rai-tai-ar\  to  run  about.  L. 
53. 

Correveidile,  kor-rai-vai-e-d^'-lai^  s.m.,  tale- 
bearer, tattler.    L.  50. 

Corriente,  kor-re-ain' -tai^  adj.,  current; 
6.  m.,  al  coiTiente  de,  aware  of;  s.  f.,  cur- 
rent, stream.    L.  56. 

Corrientemente,  kor-rl-ain-tai-mcdn'-tai^ 
adv.,  currently,  fluently.    L.  49. 

Corro,  kor'-ro^  s.  m.,  circle  of  people  col- 
lected together  for  talking.    L.  44. 

Cortante,  kore-tan' -tai,  adj.,  cutting,  sharp, 
edged.     L.  38. 

Cortaplumas,  kdre-tah-ploo'-mass^  penknife. 
L.  9. 

Cortar,  kore-tar\  to  cut.    L.  33. 

Corto,  kore'-to,  adj  ,  short.    L.  21. 

Cosa,  ko'-sa,  s.  f.,  thing.— A  cosa  de  las  seis, 
about  six  o'clock.    L.  11. 

Coser,  ko-scur',  to  sew.    L.  24. 

Cosmopolita,  kos-rno-po-lee'-ta,  s.  m.,  cos- 
mopolite.   L.  51. 

Costa,  kdce'-ta^  s.  f,,  cost,  coast.— A  costa 
mia,  at  my  expense.— A  casta  de,  at  the 
expense  of.    L.  60. 

Costado,  kos-tah'-do,  s.  m.,  side.    L.  61. 

Costar,  kds-tar\  to  cost.    L.  61. 

Costumbre,  kos-ioom'-brai,  s.  f.,  custom, 
habit.    L.  54, 

Creacion,  krai-ah-tM-one',  s.  f.,  creation. 
L.  41. 

Crear,  krcu-ar\  to  create.    L.  41, 

Credito,  krai'-de-to,  s.  m.,  credit,  credence. 
L.  57. 

Creencia,  krai-ain'-thl-a,  s.  f.,  credence,  be- 
lief.   L,  49, 

Creer,  krai-<ur\  to  believe,  to  think.  L.  27. 

Creyente,  krai-yain'-tai.,  present  part,  (of 
Cbeeb),  s.  m.  and  f.,  believing,  believer. 
L.  38. 

Criado,  krl-ah'-do^  s.  m,,  servant.    L.  17. 

Criado,  past  part,  of  Criar.    L.  54. 

Criar,  kre-ar',  to  breed,  to  bring  up.    L.  M, 

Criatura,  kre-afi-too'-ra,  s.  f.,  creature,  in- 
fant.   L.  60. 

Crimen,  krl'-main,  s.  m.,  crime,    L.  59. 

Criticar,  krl-tl-kar\  to  criticise,    L,  48. 

Critico,  krl'-te-ko^  s.  m.,  critic.    L.  45. 

Cronologista,  kro-no-lo-heess'-ta,  chronolo. 
gist.    X.  36. 

Crueldad,  kroo-ail-daih',  s.  f.,  cruelty.  I* 
36. 


448 


VOCABULAEY 


Caademo,  cwah-dair'-no,  s.  m.,  copy-book. 
L.  4. 

Cuul,  c«i;a/,  pron.,  which.    L.  10. 

(Juuudiul,  cwali-ll-dalti\  s,  f.,  quality.  L.  36. 

Cuaiquiem,  cwal-lce-cU'-ra^  prun.  aud  adj., 
any  ouc,  whosoever,  Bome  one.    L.  34. 

Cuau,  cwa/i,  adv.,  how,  as  (used  only  be- 
fore adjectives  or  other  adverbs;.    L.  14. 

Cuundo,  cwa/i'-do,  adv.,  when.    L.  9. 

(Juunto  ?  cwan'-to,  adj.,  how  much?  how 
many  'i—  Ouanto  antes,  at  once,  immedi- 
ately.—Por  cuanto^  inasmuch  as,    L,  14. 

Cuarto,  cwar'-to,  orU.  adj.  and  s.  m.,  fourth, 
room,  chamber.    L.  40. 

Cuatro.  cwati'-tro,  num.  adj.,  four.    L.  15. 

Cuba,  koo'-bu,  s.  !.,  cask,  tub.— Cuba  (island 
of).    L.  61. 

Cubrir,  hoo-breer\  to  cover.    L.  59. 

Cuchara,  koo-cluili'-ra^  s.  f.,  spoon.    L.  60. 

Cuchillo,  hoo-ched' -yOy  8.  m.,  knife.    L.  33. 

Cuello,  cwaU'-yOy  s.  m.,  neck,  collar.    L.  60. 

Cuenta,  cwain'-ta,  s.  f.,  account,  bill,  L.  46. 

Cuento,  cwcUn'-to,  s.  m.,  story,  tale.    L.  44. 

Cuerpo,  cwair'-po,  s.  m.,  body.    L.  64. 

Cuervo,  cwair'-vo,  s.  m.,  crow.    L.  45, 

Cuesta,  cwai^s'-ta.  s.  f.,  hill,— A  cueatas^  on 
one's  back  or  shoulders,    L.  63. 

Cuestion,  cwcUn-lS-one',  s.  f.,  question.  L. 
40. 

Cuidado,  cwl-dah'-do^  s.  m.,  care.— Estar 
de  cuidadOy  to  be  dangerously  ill.— Estar 
con  cuidado,  to  be  very  anxious,    L.  Ha. 

Cuidar,  cwe-dar'.  to  care,  to  take  care.  L. 
44. 

Culpa,  kool'-pa,  s.  f.,  fault,  blame.    L.  60. 

Culpar,  kool-pur',  to  blame.    L.  60. 

Cultivar,  kool-tl-var' ,  to  cultivate.    L.  60. 

Cumpleaflos,  koom-plai-an'-yos,  s,m.,  birth- 
day.   L,  62, 

Cumplimiento,  koom-plZ-ml-ain'-tOy  s.  m., 
compliment.    L.  48. 

Cumplir.  komn-jdeer',  to  accomplish,  to  fvX- 
ill.— C'u?nplir  por  otro,  to  act  for  or  in 
the  name  of  another.    L.  57. 

Cufiado,  a,  k/x>/i-7/ah'-do,  da,  s.  ra.  and  f., 
brother-in-law,  sister-in-law.    L.  64, 

Curioso,  koo-1'l-o' -80,  adj.,  curious,  worthy 
of  note,    L,  51, 

Curso,  koor'-so,  s,  m.,  course,    L.  64. 

Custodia,  koos-tO'-dl-a,  s,  f.,  custody.  L,  53, 

Ctitis,  koo'-tees8,  s,  m,  and  f.,  skin,    L,  64. 

Cuyo,  koo'-yo,  pron.,  of  whom,  of  which, 
whose,  which.    L.  17. 


Dale  I  dah'-lai,  int.,  have  at  It !    L.  64. 
Dania,  da/i'-tna,  s.  f.,  lady,  dame. — Uanias, 

draughts,  or  checkers.    L.  58. 
Danza,  dan'-tha,  s.  f.,  dance.    L.  64, 
Dailar,  dan-yai-',  to  damage,  to  hurt,  to 

harm,    L,  47. 
Dailo,  dan'-yo,  s.  m.,  damage,  hart,  harm. 

L.  42. 
Dar,  to  give.— Z)arcv ytomarcB,  disputes,  ifs 

and  ands.— X'a/ve  a  la  vela,  to  set  sail. 

L.  26, 
Pc,  rfrti,  prep.,  of,  ttom.—De  dla,  by  day.— 

J)e  intcnto,  on  purpose.    L.  4, 
Bcbcr,  dcU-bair\  s.  m. ,  duty.    L,  28. 
Dcbcr,  to  owe,  muf^t.—Deben  eer  las  ocho, 

it  must  be  eight  o'clock.    L.  26. 


Decena,  dai-iJiai'-na,  s.  f.,  about  ten.  L.  59. 
,  UeciUif,  dai-thl'detr' ,  to  decide,    L,  60, 
;  Decimo,  dai'-Uii-mo^  ord.  adj.,  and  s.  m., 
I      tenth.    L.  15. 

Dccir,  dai-tlieer' ,  to  say,  to  tell.    L.  27. 

Declarar,  dai-claJc-rar' ,  to  declare,    L.  48. 

Dedal,  dai-dai',  s.  m,,  thimble,    L,  24. 

Dedo,  dai'-do,  s.  m.,  finger,    L.  59, 

Defectivo,  dtU-fuik-tZ'-vo,  adj,,  defective. 
L,  63, 

Defecto,  dai-faik'-to,  b.  m,,  defect,  failing. 
L,  55, 

Defender,  dai-fain-dair' ,  to  defend,     L,  37. 

Delinicion,  dai-jS-ud-i/ii'dne',  b,  f,,  defini- 
tion,   L.  59, 

Definir,  dui-fi-neer' ,  to  define,    L,  59. 

Dejar,  dai-har',  to  leave,  to  let,  to  allow. 
L.  44. 

Delante,  dai-lan'-tai,  prep. — Ddante  de,  be- 
fore, in  the  presence  of,    L,  16, 

Dcleitar,  dai-lcd-e-tar' ,  to  delight,    L,  47, 

Delicado,  dai-U-kali'-do,  adj,,  delicate,  L, 
39. 

Delicioso,  dai-li-ihS-d'-so,  adj.,  delicious. 
L.  35. 

Delincuente,  dai-leen-cwain'-fai,  b.  m.,  de- 
linquent, transgressor,    L,  &4, 

Delinquir,  dai-leen-keei'' ,  to  transgress.  L. 
34. 

Delito,  dai-W-to,  s.  m.,  crime,  transgres- 
sion.   L.  51, 

Demas,  dai-mass',  adv.,  over  and  above,  too 
much;  adj.  (generally  used  with  lo,  los, 
las),  the  rest,  the  others,  others,    L,  43, 

Demasiado,  (lai-mah-sl-ah'-do,  adj.  and 
adv.,  too  much,  too.    L.  25. 

Dentro,  dain'-t?v,  prep.,  in,  within,  inside 
(always  followed  by  de).    L.  31. 

Derecho,  dai-rcd'-c/io,  acy.,  right,  even, 
straight.    L.  50. 

Desafiar,  dai-sah-fl-ar',  to  challenge.  L. 
65. 

Desafio,  dai-saJi-fl'-o,  s.m.,  challenge,  duel. 
L.  63, 

Desanimar,  dai-sah-n^-mar',  to  dishearten, 
to  discourage,    L,  38, 

Descansadamente,  dais-kan-sah-dah-main'' 
tai,  adv.,  easily,  at  one's  ease.    L,  33, 

Descansado,  dais-kan-sah'-do,  adj,,  easy, 
quiet,  refreshed,    L,  33, 

Descansar,  dcUs-kan-sar' ,  to  rest.    L,  33. 

liescanso,  dais-kan'-so,  s.  m.,  rest,  repose, 
ease.    L.  33. 

Descaro,  dcUs-kah'-ro,  b.  m.,  bare&cedness. 
L,  (U, 

Descender,  dais-thain-dair',  to  descend.  L. 
87. 

Descomponcr,  dais-kiHne-pd-nair',  to  disar- 
range, to  discompose,  to  put  out  of  order. 
L.53. 

Descompuesto,  dais-kHme-pwaifs'-to,  adj., 
disarranged,  discomposed,  out  of  order, 
disorderly,    L.  5.3, 

Desconfiar,  dau-kOne-fi-ar'^  to  distrust,  to 
mistrust.    L.  43. 

Dcsgracia,  dais-grah'-thl-a^  B.  f.,  misfor- 
tune, ill-luck.    L,  48, 

Deshacer,  dais-ah-thair',  to  undo,  to  de- 
stroy, to  take  or  put  asunder,    L.  57. 

Desierto,  dai-^-aii-'-to,  s,  m,,  desert,  wil- 
derness,   L.  64, 

Desigual,  dai-^l-gwal\  adj,,  unequal,  uii 
even.    L.  65. 


■VOCABULARY. 


449 


Desocupar,  dai-sd-Jcoo-par' ,  to  quit,  to 
evacuate,  to  empty,    h,  56. 

Despacio,  dais-jjati' -tlie-o,  adv.,  slowly.  L.  6. 

Despedir,  dapi-jjui-deer' ,  to  dismiss,  to  send 
or  put  away,  to  discharge.    L.  59. 

Despertar,  aaiii-pair-tar' ,  to  awake,  to 
awaken,  to  arouse,  to  rouse.    L.  'M. 

Despierto,  daiii-2)e-air' -to,  adj.,  awake, 
brisk,  sprightly,  lively.    L.  5:;i. 

Desproporcionadisimamente,  d«w-^r5-j95r€- 
tiil-dne-ah-Ue'-se-mah-main-tai,  adv.,  out 
of  all  proportion.    L.  50. 

Despues,  dais-pwaiss',  prep,  and  adv.,  after, 
atterward.    L.  16. 

Determinante,  dai-tair-rvl-nan'-tai,  adj.,  de- 
termining.—Verbo  detenninante,  deter- 
mining verb.    L.  53. 

Determinar,  dai-tair-ml-nar' ,  to  determine. 
L.  53. 

Detras,  dcu-tras8\  prep,  and  adv.,  behind. 
L.  33. 

Deudor,  dai-oo-dore\  s.  m.,  debtor.    L.  45. 

Devolver,  dai-vole-vaii'\  to  return,  to  give 
back.    L.  43. 

Dia,  de'-a,  s.  m,,  day.— De  dia,  by  day.  In 
the  daytime.— Dar  los  dias,  to  say  good 
morning  (to  any  one).    L.  9. 

Diablo,  dl-ah'-blo,  s.  m.,  devil.    L.  65. 

Dialecto,  de-ah-laik'-to,  s.  m.,  dialect.  L. 
55. 

Dialogo,  dl-ah' -Id-go,  s.m.,  dialogue.  L.  59. 

Diautre,  de-an'-trai,  s.  m,,  deuce.    L.  46. 

Dibujo,  de-boo'-ko,  s.  m.,  drawing,  design. 
L.  51. 

Diccionario,  deek-the-o-nali' -rl-o,  s.  m.,  dic- 
tionary.   L.  49. 

Dicha,  de'-cha,  s.  f.,  happiness,  good  luck, 
good  fortune.    L.  64. 

Dicho,  de'-dio,  s.  m.,  saying.    L.  54. 

Diciembre,  de-the-aim' -brai,  s.  m.,  Decem- 
ber.   L.  34. 

Diente,  de-am'-iai,B.m.,  tooth.— Hablaren- 
tre  dientes,  to  mumble,  to  mutter.    L.  63. 

Diez,  dd-aith',  num.  adj.,  ten.    L.  14. 

Diferencia,  de-fai-rain'-the-a,  b.  f.,  differ- 
ence.   L.  48. 

Diferenciar,  de-fai-rain-the-ar',  to  differ. 
L.  48. 

Dificil,  de-fl'-theeJ.,  adj.,  difficult.    L.  21. 

Dificultad,  de-fe-kool-tath' ,  s.  f.,  diiliculty. 
L.  36. 

Dimio,  deeg'-no,  adj.,  worthy,  deserving. 
L.  53. 

Diluviar,  dl-lco-vl-ar' ,  to  rain  like  a  deluge, 
to  pour.    L.  30. 

Dimes,  rfe'-m«m.— Andar  en  dimes  y  dire- 
tcs,  to  use  ifa  and  auds,  to  quibble.  L.  47. 

Dimiuutivo,  dl-ml-noo-te' -vo,  s.m.,  diminu- 
tive.   L.  44. 

Dinero,  de-nai'-ro,  B.  m.,  money.    L.  13. 

Dios,  de-oce',  s.  m.,  God.    L.  31. 

Diptongo,  deep-tone' -go,  s.  m.,  diphthong. 
L.  57. 

Direccion,  d?-raik-the-dne\  b.  f.,  direction, 
address.    L.  24. 

Dirccto,  dl-raik'-to,  adj.,  direct.    L.  51. 

Director,  dl-raik-tar' ,  director.    L.  50. 

Dirigir,  dl-rl-heer\  to  direct.— Dirigirse,  to 
apply.    L.  63. 

Discipulo,  dees-tM'-poo-lo,  s.  m.,  pupil,  dis- 
ciple.   L.  18. 

Discrete,  deess-krai'-to,  adj.,  discreet,  cir- 
cumspect.   L.  39. 


Disculpa,  deess-kool'-pa,  s.  f.,  apology,  ex- 
cuse.   L.  60. 

Discurso,  deess-koor'-so,  s.  m.,  diecotirse, 
speech,  course.    L.  53. 

Disgustar,  deess-goos-tar' ,  to  disgust,  to 
displease.    L.  50. 

Disgusto,  deess-goos'-to,  s.  m.,  disgust,  dis- 
pleasure, unpleasantness.    L.  5U. 

Disponer,  deess-po-nair' ,  to  dispose,  to  lay 
out,  to  arrange,  to  prepare.    L.  48. 

Disposicion,  deess-po-se-the-one' ,  b.  f.,  dis- 
position, arrangement,  distribution.  L. 
33. 

Distancia,  deess-tan'-the-a,  B.  f.,  distance. 
L.  51. 

Distante,  deess-tan'-tai,  adj.,  distant.   L.  88. 

Distar,  deess-iar',  to  be  distant,  far  from. 
L.  53. 

Distinguir,  deess-teen-gheer' ,  to  distinguish. 
L.  43. 

Divertir,  de-vair-teer' ,  to  divert,  to  amuse. 
L.  89. 

Dividir,  dd-ve-deer',  to  divide.    L.  51. 

Divisar,  de-ve-sar',  to  descry,  to  perceive, 
to  catch  a  glimpse  of.    L.  42. 

Doble,  do'-blai,  adj.,  double.    L.  40. 

Doble,  8.  m.,  double.    L.  40. 

Doce,  do' -thai,  num.  adj.  and  s.  m.,  twelve, 
twelfth.    L.  14. 

Docena,  do-thai' -na,  s.  f.,  dozen.    L.  40. 

Doler,  do-lair' . — Dolerle.  a  uno  la  cabeza, 
los  dientes,  to  have  a  headache,  tooth- 
ache.   L.  36. 

Dolor,  do-lore',  B.  m.,  pain.    L.  50. 

Domingo,  do-meen'-go,  s.  m.,  Sunday. 

Donde,  done'-dai,  adv.,  where.    L. 


9. 
madam. 


Mrs. 


Dona,  done'-ya,  s.  f.,   lady, 

±j.  2. 

Dormir,  dore-meer',  to  sleep.    L.  41. 
Dos,  doce,  num.  adj.  and  s.  m.,  two,  second. 

L.  14. 
Drama,  drah'-ma,  b.  m.,  drama.    L.  52. 
Dramatico,  drah-mah' -te-ko,  adj.,  dramatic. 

L.  52. 
Duda,  doo'-da,  s.  f.,  doubt.    L.  43. 
Dudar,  doo-dar',  to  doubt.    L.  28. 
Durable,  doo-rak' -blai,  adj.,  durable.   L.  58. 
Durante,   doo-ran' -tai,  pres.  part.,  during. 

L.  59. 
Durar,  doo-rar',  to  last,  to  continue.  L.  59. 
Duro,  doo'-ro,  adj.  and  s.  m.,  hard;  dollar. 

L.  60. 

E. 

Ea !  ai'-a,  int.,  eay  !  hollo  !    L.  46. 

Echar,  ai-char\  to  throw,  to  put,  to  cast.— 
Echar  de  ver,  to  notice,  to  observe.— 
Echar  a  correr,  to  run  ei\i&y.— Echar  a 
perder,  to  spoil.     L.  53. 

Econ6mico,  ai-ko-no' -me-ko,  a^.,  economi- 
cal.   L.  35. 

Edad,  s.  f.,  affe.     L.  53. 

Edicion,  ai-de-thl-one' ,  b.  f..  edition.    L.  60. 

Edificar,  ai-d'e-fe-kar' ,  to  edify.    L.  48. 

Efecto,  ai-faik'-to,  s.  m.,  effect.    L.  47. 

Ejecutar,  ai-hai-koo-tar' ,  to  execute^  to  put 
into  execution,  to  put  into  practice.  L. 
60. 

Ejemplo,  ai-haim'-pU),  s.  m.,  example.  L. 
32. 

Ejercer,  ai-hair-thair' ,  to  exercise,  to  prac- 
tise.   L.  60. 


450 


VOC ABULAEY, 


Eyercicio,  ai-kair-thi'-thi-o,  s.  m.,  exercise. 

L.  8. 
El,  la,  lo,  los,  las,  def.  art.,  the.    L.  1. 
EI,  ella,  ail^  aU'-j/a,  pers.  pron.,  he,  bhe,  it. 

L.  1. 
Eleccion,   ai-laitikd-o/ie',    s.   f..    election, 

choice.    L.  21. 
Elegancia,  ai4ai-gan' -Ihl-a,  s.  f.,  elegance. 

L.  5;i. 
ElcLrante,  ai-lai-gan'-tal,  adj.,  elegant.  L.  65. 
Ele;,'ir,  ai-lai-heer\  to  elect,  to  cnoose.    L. 

Eleraento,  ai-lai-main'-to,  s.  m.,  element, 
constituent  part.    L.  fW. 

Elena,  ai-lai'-na,  s.  f.,  Helena,  Ellen.    L.  19. 

Elipticq,  ai-kep'te-kOy  adj.,  eliiptic,  ellipti- 
cal.   L.  GO. 

Embarcadero,  aim-bar-kah-dai'-w,  B.  m., 
landing,  ferry.    L.  58. 

Embargo,  aiin-bar'-go,  s.  m.,  embargo.— Sin 
embargo^  notwithstanding,  however.    L. 

Erapeflar,  aim-pain-yar\  to  engage,  to 
pledge,  to  hind.—Empenarfie,  to  bind 
one's  self,  to  persist,  to  desire  eagerly. 
L.  45. 

Eiupero,  aim-jjai'-ro,  conj.,  yet,  however, 
but.    L.  60.  -^  w    , 

Emplear,  ai/n-p!al-ar\  to  employ.    L.  44. 

Empleo,  airn-plai'-o,  s.  m.,  employ,  em- 
ployment, omce.    L.  57. 

En,  aia^  prep.,  in,  at,  on.    L.  8. 

Enamorar,  ai-nah-mo-rar\  to  court,  to 
make  love  {.o.—Enamararse  de,  to  be 
enamoured  of,  to  fall  in  love  with.    L.  30. 

Encargo,  ain-kar'-go,  s.  m.,  charge,  com- 
mis:?ion,  command.    L.  57. 

Encarga  •,  a  a-kar-gar',  to  charge,  to  com- 
mi-sion,  to  order.    L.  58. 

Encender,  aiii-thaia-dair\  to  light,  to  kin- 
dle.   L.  37. 

Encerrar,  am-thair-rar\  to  shut  up,  to  con- 
tain, to  comprehend.    L.  05. 

Encima,  ain-thl' -ma^  prep,  and  adv.,  above 
over.    L.  ;i3.  ' 

Encontrar,  ala-kdne-trar\  to  meet,  to  find. 
L..  35. 

Enemigo,  a2-na/-m2'-«7o,  8.  m.,  enemy.  L  51 

Lnemistar,  ai-/iai-mees.s-tar\  to  set  at  ca- 
m\ty. —Erie/zmfar  a  alguno  con  olro  to 
put  any  one  at  enmity  with,  or  aga  net 
another.    L.  GO.  '  » 

Energia,  ai-nair-hd'-a,  s.  f.,  energy.    L  61 

Enfermar,  ain-f air-mar' ,  to  become  or  tret 

Enfermo,  ain-fair'-tm,  adj..  sick,  ill.    L  48 
Enfrente,  uin-frain'-tai,  adv.,  opposite,  iii 

ftont.    L.  51.  ' 

Engailar,  aingan-yar\  to  deceive,  to  take 

in.    L.  32. 
Enhebrar,  ain-aibrar\  to  thread,  to  link 

L.  65. 
Enhorabuena     ai-nd-rah-bwai'-na     b    f 

congratulation,  felicitation.    L.  39    '     '' 
EnrKjuc,  uin-re'-kai,  s.  m.,  Henry     L  15 
EMscilar,  a*n-sain-ijar\  to  show,  to  teach 

Li.  27. 

^'to"d!Uib  ^^£-**2f '^^-«^''  to  dirty,  to  soil, 

Entondedor,   (Un-tain-dai-ddre',  s.  m     ho 

who   undcrstand8.-A   buen  entmdedcyr 


Entender,  ain-tain-dair',  to  understand. 
L.  37. 

Eutonces,  ain-tOne'-thaiss.,  adv.,  tlien.  L.  23. 

J:.uirambos,  aiu-lra7n'-0bai,  pron.  pi.,  bock. 
L.  GO. 

Eulrar,  ain-trar\  to  enter,  to  begin,  to 
commence,  to  come  or  go  lu,  to  got  in, 
L.  28. 

Entre,  ain'-trcd,  prep.,  between,  in  the 
course  of.     Li.  lu. 

Eutreiauto,  ain-trai-tan'-to^  adv.,  in  th» 
mean  lime.    JL.  GO. 

Eutreteuer,  aiii-iraitai-nair',  to  entertain, 
to  amuse,  to  iii\(irL—Jii/itrete/t£rtte,  to 
spend  one's  time,  to  be  engaged  m.    L.  46. 

Euiusiasmo,  ain-too-s't-asa  -uu>,  8.  m.,  en- 
thusiasm.   L.  54. 

Enviar,  aiii-vl-ar\  to  send.    L.  14. 

Envidiar,  airirOi-al-ar\  to  envy.    L.  40. 

Equivocacion,  ai-ke-vd-kaJi.-tki-one\  8.  £,, 
mistake,  misconception.    L.  50. 

Equivocar,  ui-kl-vo-kar' .,  to  mistake.— .£^J/*- 
vocarse,  to  be  mistaken.    L.  47. 

Erguir,  air-gheer\  to  hold  erect  (as  the 
head,  &c.).    L.  42. 

Errar,  air-rar\  to  err,  to  miss.    L.  41. 

Erudicion,  ai-ivo-de  thl-dfUi\  8.  f.,  erudi- 
tion.   L.  52. 

Escaldar,  aiss-kal-dar\  to  scald.    L.  65. 

Escena,  aiss-thai'-na,  s.  f.,  scene.    L.  tJS. 

Esceptico,  aiss-thaip'-ti-ko,  adj.,  skeptical. 
L.  45. 

Escoba.  als8-kd'-ba,  s.  f.,  broom.    L.  49. 

Escobajo,  aiss-ko-bah'-ho,  s.  m.  (augmenta- 
tive of  EscoBA),  stump  of  a  broom.  L. 
49. 

Esco^er,  aiss-kd-hair\  to  choose.    L.  65. 

Escribano,  aiss-krS-bah'-no,  s.  m.,  notary. 
L.  19.  ' 

Escribiente,  aijfs-kr?-b?-ain'-tai,  s.  m., 
amanuensis,  clerk,  writer  (in  an  office). 
L.  38. 

Escribir,  aiss-krl-beer\  to  write.    L.  8. 

Escritor,  al<)s-krS-tOre\  s.  m.,  writer,  au- 
thor.   L.  19. 

Escritura,  aiss-krStoo'-ra,  8.  f.,  writing, 
document,  conveyance.    L.  19. 

Escuchar,  aiss-koo-ckar' ,  to  hearken,  to  lis- 
ten.   L.  60. 

Escuela,  aiss-kioai'-la,  s.  f.,  school.    L.  21. 

Escultor,  aiss-kool-Wre',  s.  m.,  sculptor.    L. 

Escultura,  aiss-kod-too'-ra,  s.  f.,  sculpture. 

i-i.  31. 
Esforzar,  ai^s-fdre-thar\  to  etronirthpn,  to 

exert.— ^orsa;*^,  to  make  effort,  to  en- 

doavor.    L.  60. 
Esfiierzo,  aisf>-firair'thn^  p.  m.,  effort,  en- 

doavor  (pi.),  conra-c.  bravery.    L.  47. 
Espacio,  aiss-pak'-m-o,  s.  m.,Vpace.  L.  48. 
^spada,  atAs-pa/i'-da,  p.  f.,  sword.    L.  57. 
Espadachin,     avff^pah-dah-cheen\     s.  m.. 

bully,    L.  63.  ' 

bS""'  ^'"'^^'-^^^  8-  '•'  shoulder,  (pi.) 
Kspafla  aii'i.p^n'-i/a.  b.  f.,  Spain.    L.  9. 
J-spanol,  am-pan-ydlf\  g.  and  a^i..  Spanish 

anonia-o :    Spanish.-.\  la  wpo^oto,   m 

the  Spanish  fishion.    L.  2 

sort'^^'L^'To'"^^'''''^""''  P.  f.,  species,  kind, 
^  J?.'g5*"^'  ^i^t./Mti-Wa-o/'-ro,  s.  m.,  grocer. 


VOCABULAKY 


451 


flspejo,  aiss-pai'-JWy  s.  m,,  looking-glass. 

L.  «JU. 

Esperanza,  aiss-pai-ran'-tha,  s.  f.,  hope.    L. 

Esperar,  azss-pai-rar\  to  hope,  to  await,  to 

wait  lor.    L.  ii2. 
Espiritu,  aiss-pe' -rl-too,  s.  m,,  spirit.  L.  45. 
Esposa,  am-po-m,  a.  f.,  spouse,  wile.  L.  ay. 
Esposo,  aiS6-po'-so,  s.  m.,  spouse,  husband. 

Esqueia,  aiss-kai'-la,  s.  f.,  note.    L.  56. 
Esquma,  aias-lce'-na^  s.  f.,  corner.    L.  51. 
EsLuDiecer,  (ma-ta/i-Olai-t/iuir' ,  to  establish. 

L.42. 
Estacion,    aiss-tah-the-oiie' ,    s.  f,,  station, 

season.    L.  tiU. 
Estado,  aiss-ia/i'-do,  s.  m.,  state,  State. — 

Los  j£titados  Unidos,  the  United  btates. 

L.  19. 
Estar,  aiss-tar\  to  be,   to  understand.— 

Estar  para  saiir,  to  be  about  to  set  out.— 

Esiar  por  alguno,  to  be  lor,  or  in  favor  of, 

any  one.— ^'  J^sta  V.  ?  do  you  understand '/ 

L.  22. 
Este,  aiss'-tai,  s.  m.,  east.    L.  22. 
Este,  esta,  esto,  deni.  pron.,  this,  this  one. 

L.  18. 
Estilo,  aiss-te'-lo,  s.  m.,  style.    L.  52. 
Estimable,  aiss-te-7nah'-0lai,  a^.,  estimable. 

L.  39. 
Estimar,  aiss-te-mar',  to  esteem,  to  esti- 
mate.   L.  39. 
Esto,  aiss'-lo.    (See  Este.)    L.  18. 
Estocada,  aiss-W-kah' -da^  s.  f.,  stab,  thrust. 

L.  53. 
Estrafio,  aiss-tran'-yo,  adj.,  strange,  foreign. 

L.  48. 
Estratagema,    aiss-trah-tah-hai'-ma^   s.  f., 

stratagem,  ruse.    L.  44. 
Estrechar,    aiss-irai-char' ,    to   tighten,    to 

make  narrow,  to  squeeze,  to  press.  L.  60. 
Estrecho,  aiss-trai' -cho,  adj.,  narrow,  tight, 

close,  miimdXQ.— Estrecho,  s.  m.,  strait. 

L.  60.  ^    ^ 

Estribo,  aiss-trW-bo,  s.  m.,  stirmp.    L.  38. 
Estudiante,  aiss-too-de-an'-tai,  s.  m.,  stu- 
dent.   L.  38. 
Estudiar,  aiss-foo-d^-ar',  to  study.    L.  3. 
Estudio,   iuss-too'-dl-o,   s.   m.,   study.    L. 

25. 
Etemidad,  ai-tair-ne-dath' ,  s.  f.,  eternity. 

L.  36. 
Etenio,  al-tair'-no,  ad].,  eternal.    L.  41. 
Evidencia,  ai-ve-dain'-the-a,  s.  f.,  evidence. 

L.  59. 
Evitar,    ai-r?-tar',    to   avoid,  to  help  (do 

otherwise  than  has  been  dene).    L.  47. 
Exageracion,  aik-sah-hai-rah-the-dne\  s.  f., 

exaggeration.    L.  48. 
Exa^erar,  aik-sah-hai-rar' ,  to  exaggerate. 

L.'60.  .     ,. 

Examen,  aik-sah'-main,  b.  m.,  examination. 

L,  38.  .  _ 

Examinar,  aik-sah-ml-nar' ,  to  examine.    L.. 

41. 

Exceder,  alk»-thai-dair\  to  exceed,  to  over- 
step, to  surpass.    L.  53. 

Excelente,  aiks-thai'lain'-tat,  adj.,  excel- 
lent.   L.  53. 

Excepcion,  aiks-thaip-thl-dne' ,  s.  f.,  excep- 
tion.   L.  45.  ^  ^     _ 

Exceptuar,  aiks-thaip-ioo-ar\  to  except.    L. 


Exclamacion,  aiks-Mah-mah-thl-dm\  s.  f., 
exclamation.    L.  24. 

Exciamar,  ailcs-ktak-7nar\  to  exclaim.    L. 
UU. 

Excusa,  aiks-koo'-sa,  s.  f.,  excuse,  apology. 
L.  bO. 

Excufcar,  aiks-koo-sa?'',  to  excuse,  to  apolo- 
gize.   L.  xl. 

Exuibiciou,  aik-sl-be-the-dne\  s.  f,,  exhibi- 
tion.   L.  46. 

Exhibir,  aik-ae-beer' ,  to  exhibit.    L.  60. 

Exigir,  aik-sl-heer' y  to  exact,  to  require,  to 
demand.    L.  38. 

Existeucia,  aik-seess-tain' -thl-a,  s.  f.,  exist- 
ence, (pl.)  stock.    L.  52. 

Existir,  aik-seess-teer' ,  to  exist.    L.  40. 

Exito,  aik'-se-to,  s.  m.,  result,  issue.— Con 
buen  exito,  successfully.    L.  46. 

Experieucia,  aiks-pai-?e-azn'-the-a,  s.  f.,  ex- 
perience.   L.  41. 

Expiicacion,  aiks-ple-kah-thl-dne\  s.  f.,  ex- 
planation.   L.  48. 

Explicar,  aiks-ple-kar\  to  explain.    L.  45. 

Exponer,  aiks-pd-nair\  to  expose,  to  ex- 
pound, to  explain.    L.  51. 

Expresar,  aiks-irrai-sar',  to  express.    L.  52. 

Expresion,  aiks-prai-se-dne\  s.  f.,  expres- 
sion.   L.  56. 

Expresivo,  aiks-pj-at-s^'-vo,  adj.,  expressive. 
L.  65. 

Exterior,  aiks-tai-re-ore\  exterior.    L.  48. 

Extra,  aiks'-tra,  adv.,  extra.    L.  60. 

Extrangero,  aiks-tran-hai'-ro,  s.  m.,  foreign- 
er.   L.  60. 

Extrafiar,  aiks-tran-yar' ,  to  wonder  at,  to 
find  (a  thing)  strange,    L.  60. 

Extrano,  aiks-tran'-yo,  adj.,  strange.    L.  48. 

Extraordinario,     aiks-trah-dre-de-nah'-re-o, 
adj.,  extraordinary.    L.  46. 

Extremado,     aiks-trai-mah'-do,    adj.,    ex- 
treme.   L.  55. 


F. 

Fabricar,/a^-5re-Aar',  to  make,  to  manu- 
facture, to  build.    L.  48. 

YaccioM, fak-the-one\  s.f.,  feature;  faction. 
L.  35. 

Facilfah'-iheel,  adj.,  easy.    L.  21. 

Facilidad,  fah-the-le-daih' ,  s.  f.,  facihty, 
ease.    L.  36.  „    .,.    .      x 

Facilitar,  fah-the-le-tar' ,  to  facilitate,  to 
make  easy,  to  procure.    L.  49. 

Facilmente,  fah'-theel-main-tai,  adv.,  easi- 
ly.   L.  49. 

¥acti\ral  fa'k-too'-ra,  s.  f.,  invoice.    L.  63. 

FacuUad,  fah-kool-iath',  s.  f.,  faculty,  power 
of  doing  any  thing,  liberty  to  do  anv 
thing.    L.  63. 

Falso, /a^'-so,  adj.,  false.    L.  45. 

Falta,/ar-^a,  s.  f.,  fault,  want     L.  27. 

FaUar,  fai-tar\  to  want,  to  lack,  to  be  lack- 
iner.    L.  31.  ^  ,. 

Fama,  fah'-ma,  s.  f.,  fame,  reputation,  re- 

FamUia,  fah-rk^ '-l?-a,  s.  f   family.    L.  23. 
FamiMar,  fah-m€-le-ar\  adj.,  familiar   L.  40. 
Fammaridad,  fah-me-lhah-re-dat/i ,  s.  I.,  ia- 

miliarity.    L.  65. 
Famoso^fah-md'-ro.  adj.,  famous.    L.  45. 
Fanatico,/a/t-na/i'-^e-Ao,  adj.,  fanatical.    L 

35. 


452 


VOCABULARY. 


Fas,  fai^s.— Par  fas  6  por  nCfas,  right  or 
wrong ;  juhtly  or  unjuatly.    L.  63. 

Faslidio,  J(u>s-lS'-iiS-o,  a.  m.,  trouble,  annoy- 
ance.   L..  47. 

Fsi\or,  fak-VM'e'^  a.  m.,  favor,  mercy,  help. 
—Ajavor  de,  m  bcliall'  ol'.    L.  yj. 

Favorecer,  Ja/i-vO-rai-thair' ,  to  favor.  L. 
50. 

Fa\orito,fah-vd-7-^'-fo,  adj.,  favorite.  L.  54. 

¥6.fai,  8.  f.,  faith.    L.  45. 

YchrGTO,  fai-brai'-ro^  8.  m.,  February.  L.  2i. 

Fccha.,  fai'-cha,  b.  f.,  date.    L.  20. 

Felicidad,  fai-lS-tM-daih\  s.  f.,  happiness, 
felicity.    L.  48. 

Feiicitar,/a^/2-^AS-tor',  to  felicitate,  to  con- 
gratulate.   L.  (U. 

Feliz,  j'ai-lee(h\  adj.,  happy,  fortunate, 
lucky.    L.  21. 

Felizmente,  fai-leetk-main'-tai,  adv.,  happi- 
ly, fortunately,  luckily.    L.  49. 

Femenino,  fai-rnai-nS'-nOy  a^j.,  feminine. 
L.  47. 

rco,/ae'-o,  adj.,  ugly,  unbecoming.    L.  7. 

Feroz, /ai-ro(h\  adj.,  ferocious,  herce,  rav- 
enous.   L,  54. 

FGrrocaiTil,  fair-r5-car-red\  s.  m.,  railroad. 
L.  60. 

Fia(io,fS-ah'-do,  adj.,  confident,  trusting. — 
Al  Jlado,  on  credit,  on  trust.    L.  61. 

Fiar,/g-ar',  to  trust,  to  bail.    L.  61. 

Ficl,/t'-ai;',  adj.,  faithful.    L.  21. 

Fi(iiita,/i-aiss'-fa,  s.  f.,  feast,  festival.— Dia 
de  Jlesla,  holiday.    L.  62. 

Figura, /?-.^oo'-ra,  s.  f.,  figure,  form,  shape. 
— Ilacer  Jigura,  to  make,  to  cut  a  figure. 
L.  63. 

Fi-'urado,  fi-goo-rah'-do^  adj.,  figurative. 
L.  51. 

FWoaoiasiro  J'^-ld-sd-fass'-tro,  s.  m.,  philoso- 
phastcr.    L.  49. 

Filosofo,  fl-lO'-sO-fo,  8.  m.,  philosopher.  L. 
49. 

Fin,  feen,  s.  m.,  end,  object,  point.— A  fin 
de,  in  order  to.    L.  45. 

Final, /?-/ta^',  s.  m.  and  adj.,  end,  termina- 
tion ;  final.    L.  61. 

F'miiimQniCy  fi-nal-main'-taiy  adv.,  finally. 
L.  49. 

Fino,/?'-no,  adj.,  fine.    L.  56. 

Firnia, /^6r'-;/ia,  s.  f.,  signature.    L.  56. 

Fisonomia,/S-«5-w5-we'-a,  b.  f.,  physiogno- 
my.   L.  45. 

Flaqueza,  flah-kai'-tha,  b.  f.,  leanness, 
wiakncss,  foible,  frailty.    L.  (54. 

Fondo,  tone' -do,  b.  ni.,  bottom,  ground 
(of  colored  articles);  pi.,  funds,  cash, 
money.    L.  60. 

Formal,  fore.-mal\  adj.,  fonnal,  reliable, 
respectable.    L.  45. 

FonnaIidad,/3re-ma/i-^-rfa)!7i',  s.  f,  formali- 
ty, reliabiluy,  respectability.    L.  45. 

Formar,yc>?'c-7/jar',  to  form,  to  yhapc.   L.  43. 

Fort  una,  fdre-too'-na,  B.  f.,  fortune,  luck. 
L.  42. 

Fra.!j:ata,/m^-7a^'-<a',  s.  f.,  frigate.    L.  60. 

YraWiij'rah'-e-lai,  s.  f.,  friar.    L.  41. 

Frances,. /mw-//<or/.sy,  s.  m.  and  adj.,  French 
(langua^re),  French.    L.  3. 

Francia,./ra/i'-^/ir'-rt,  s.  f.,  France.    L.  9. 

Francisco,  J'ran-ihcess'-ko,  b.  m.,  Francis. 
L.  14. 

Franco,  fran'-Jco,  adj.,  f^ank,  flrco,  open- 
hearted,  intimate.    L.  34. 


Franqucza,  fran-kai'-tha,  b.  f.,  frankneftJ, 

open-hearledness,  intimacy.    L.  4tt. 
Fr&tie,jra/i,'-mi,  s,  f.,  phrase,  sentence.    L, 

51. 
Fray,/raA'-2,  s.  m.,  friar.    L.  41. 
Frecuenie,  J'rai-kwain' -tai,  adj.,  frequent. 

L.  29. 
Fr eit,frai-€er\  to  trj.    L.  52. 
Frente,  frain'-tai,  s.  f.    forehead,  front,— 

Enfrente,  opposite.    L.  45. 
Fresco,  frcwm'-ko,  adj.,  fresh,  cool.— Pintu- 

ra  al  jresco,  fresco  painting.    L.  46. 
Fresco,  s.  m.,  cool  breeze,  cool,  refreehiiig 

air,  fresco  (painting).    L,  46. 
Frio,  fre'-o,  adj.  and  s.  m.,  cold.    L.  25. 
Fno\{iTii,fre-u4ai'-i'a,  s.  f.,  trifle.    L.  37. 
Fruta, /roo'-^a,  s.  f.,  fruit.    L.  31. 
Fruto,  froo'-tOy  s.  m.,  fruit  (produce).    L. 

40. 
Fuego,/M'a^'-<70,  8.  m.,  fire.    L.  .34. 
Fuente,  fwain'-tai,  B.  f.,  fountain,  spring, 

source.    L.  52. 
Fviiiva,fwai'-ray  adv.,  out.— Fuera  de  que, 

besides.    L.  31. 
Fuera  1  inter.,  out  I  be  gone  1  away !    L.  31. 
Fuerza,  fwair'-tha,  s.  f.,  force,  strength.— 

A  fuerza  de,  by  dint  of.    L.  58. 
F\i"&,foo'-ga,  s.  f.,  flight,  escape.    L.  57. 
Fmano,foo-lah'-no,  b.  m.,  such  a  one.    L.  &> 
Fumar,y<x)-war',  to  smoke.    L.  42. 
FusW,  foo-seel\  s.  m.,  gun.    L.  49. 
Fusilar, /oo-w-Zar',  to  shoot  (military).    I, 

45. 
Futuro, /oo-^oo'-ro,  s.  m..  future  (tense).    L 

43. 
Futuro,  adj.,  future.    L.  43. 


Q. 

Galan,  gah4an\  s.  m.  and  adj.,  gallant,  ac> 
tor ;  gallant.     L.  58. 

Galante,  gak-lan' -tai,  adj.,  gallant,  courtly. 
L.  58. 

Galicismo,  gah-lS-theess'-mo,  b.  m.,  galli- 
cism.   L.  61. 

Gallcgo,  gal-yai'-go,  b.  m.,  Galician.    L.  55. 

Gallina,  gal-ye'-na,  s.  f.,  hen.    L.  5. 

Gana,  ga/i'-na,  s.  f.,  desire,  will,  appetite. 
L.  59. 

Ganapierde,  gah-nah-pl-air'-dai,  b.  m., 
game  of  draughts,  or  checkers,  at  which 
the  loser  wins.    L.  50. 

Ganar,  gah-nnr',  to  gain,  to  win.    L.  27. 

Ganso,  gan'-so,  s.  m.,  goose.— Hablar  por 
boca  de  ganso,  to  eciio  what  has  been 
said  by  others.    L.  6Ji. 

Garrotazo,  gar-rd-tah' -tJiO,  8.  m.,  blow  with 
a  cudgel.    L.  44. 

Garrote",  gar-rv'-(ai,  b.  m.,  cudgel.    L.  44. 

Gastar,  gaas-iar',  to  waste,  to  use,  to  spends 
to  expend.     L.  50. 

Qatillo,  gah-tM'-yo,  b.  m.  (dim.),  little  cat, 
trigger  of  a  gun.    L.  53. 

GatOj  qah'-to,  s.  m.,  cat.    L.  46. 

Gemido,  hai-tni'-do,  s.  m.,  groan,  lamenta- 
tion, moan,  howling.     L.  59. 

General,  hai-nai-ral\  s.  m.  and  a<y.,  gen- 
eral.   L.  4.5. 

G6nero,  hai'-nai-ro,  b.  m.,  gender,  genus, 
kind,  sort,  cloth.    L.  57. 

Gcntillcio,  hain-(?-li'-thl-dy  a^.,  peculiar  to 
a  nation.    L.  -49. 


VOCABULAET, 


453 


Gcntio,  hain-te'-o,  s.  m.,  great  crowd,  mul- 
titude.   L.  40. 

Gentualla,  hain-too-cd'-ya,  s.  f.,  rabble, 
dreg3  of  the  people.    L.  49. 

Genmdio,  hai-rooa'-dl-o,  s.  m.,  gerund.  L. 
43. 

Gigantesco,  hl-gan-taiss'-Jco,  adj.,  gigantic. 
L.  49. 

Gineta,  he-nai'-ta.—Tener  los  cascos  a  la 
ginefa,  to  be  hare-brained.    L.  64. 

Globo,  glo'-bo,  s.  m.,  globe,  balloon.    L.  37. 

Goberu'ador,  gd-bair-nah-dore' ,  s.  m.,  gov- 
ernor.   L.  60. 

Gobernante,  go-balr-nan'-tal,  pres.  part., 
governing.    L.  38. 

Gobernar,  go-bair-nar\  to  govern.    L.  34. 

Gobierno,  gO-be-air'-no,  s.  m.,  government. 
L.  40. 

Goce,  go'-thai,  s.  m.,  enjoyment,    L,  54. 

Golpe,  gole'-pai,  s.  m.,  blow,  stroke.    L.  61. 

Gonzalez,  gone-thah'-laith,  s.  m.  (dim)., 
Spanish  proper  name  signifying  son  of 
Gonzalo.    L.  49. 

Gorra,  gore'-ra^  s.  f.,  bonnet.— Yivir  de 
gorra,  to  live  at  others'  expense,  to 
sponge.    L.  64. 

Gozar,  go-thar\  to  enjoy.    L.  25. 

Gozo,  go'-tho^  s.  m.,  joy,  satisfaction,  pleas- 
ure.   L.  51. 

Grabado,  grah-bah'-do,  s.  m.,  engraving, 
cut  (picture).    L.  5*2. 

Grabar,  grah-bar\  to  engrave.    L.  52. 

Gracia,  grah'-thZ-a^  s.  f.,  grace,  favor,  grace- 
fulness, pardon.    L.  51. 

Gracias,  s.  m.  pi.,  thank  you.    L.  23. 

Grado,  grah'-do^  s.  m.,  grade,  degree.— De 
grado,  willingly.    L.  60. 

Gramatica,  grah-mah'-te-ka^  s.  f.,  grammar. 
L.  5. 

Gramatical,  grah-mah-tl-TcaV ^  adj.,  gram- 
matical.   L.  51. 

Grande,  gran'-dai,  adj.,  great,  large.    L.  7. 

Granizar,  grah-ne-thar\  to  hail.    L.  30. 

Grato,  grah'-to,  adj.,  grateful,  pleasing, 
agreeable.    L.  56. 

Grito,  grl'-to^  s.  m.,  cry,  shout,  scream.  L. 
59. 

Guerra,  gair'-ra,  s.  f.,  war.    L.  56. 

Guinada,  gheen-yah'-da,  s.  f.,  wink.     L.  54. 

Guipuzcoa,  ghl-pooih'-kwa,  s.  f.,  Guipuzcoa 
(province  in  Spain).    L.  55. 

Gustar,  gooss-iar',  to  like,  to  please,  to 
taste.    L.  31. 

Gusto,  gooss'-to,  s.  m.,  taste,  pleasure.— Con 
muclio  gusto,  with  great  pleasure.    L.  23. 


Habana  (La),  lah-ah-bah'-na,  s.  f.,  Havana. 
L.  12. 

Habanero,  ah-bah-nai'-ro,  adj.  and  s.  m., 
Havancse.    L.  49. 

Haber,  ah-bair\  to  have  (used  only  as  an 
auxiliary  verb  in  this  sic^iiiication ;  for 
exceptions  see  Lesson  66);  impersonal 
verb,  there  to  "be.— Hay  dos  iglesias  en 
esta  calle,  there  are  two  churches  in  this 
street.    L.  12. 

Habil,  ah'-bed,  adj.,  able,  skilful,  expert, 
clever.    L.  21. 

Habilidad,  ah-b7.-U-dath\  s.  f.,  ability,  skil- 
falness,  cxpertness,  cleverness.    L.  36. 


Habitante,  oh-be-tan'-taL  s.  m.,  inhabitant 

L.  40. 
Hablador,  ab-lah-dore',  adj.  and  s.  m.,  talka- 
tive ;  talker.    L.  20. 
Hablar,  ab-lar\  to  talk,  to  speak.— fio^/ar 

a  bulto,  to  talk  at  random.    L.  1. 
Hacer,  ah-thair\  to  do,  to  make.— ^acer 

muy  bien,  to  do  well  or  right,  to  be  right. 

—Hacer  de,  to  act  as.    L.  19. 
Hacia,  ah'-the-a,  adv.,  toward,  towards.    L. 

19. 
Hallar,  al-yar\  to  find.    L.  37. 
Hambre,    am'-brai,    s.  f.,  hunger.— Tener 

hamfyre^  to  be  hungry.    L.  25. 
Hasta,  ass'-ta,  adv.,  until,  till,  as  far  as, 

even.    L.  19. 
Hazmereir,  ath-^mai-rai-eer\  s.m.,  laughing- 
stock.   L.  50. 
Hel  ai,  inter.,  hoi  what?  what  do  you 

say  ?    L.  44. 
Hecho,  ai'-clvo^  s.  m.,  action,  fact.    L.  52. 
Helar,  ai-lar\  to  freeze.    L.  30. 
Helena,  ai-lai'-na,  s.  f.,  Helen,  Ellen.    L.  19- 
Hermanastro,  air-mah-nass'-tro,  s.  m.,  aug., 

step-brother,  half-brother,    L.  49. 
Hermano,  (ur-mah'-no,  s.  m.,  brother.    L.  6. 
Hermoso,  air-mo' -so,  adj.,  beautiful,  hand- 
some.   L.  7. 
Hermosura,    air-m5-soo'-ra,    s.  f.,   beauty, 

handsomeness.    L.  53. 
Herrero,  air-rai'-ro,  s.  m.,  blacksmith.  L.  65. 
Hielo,  yai'-lo,  s.  m.,  ice,  frost.    L.  30. 
Hierro,  yair'-ro,  s.  m.,  iron.    L.  61. 
Higo,  e'-go,  s.  m.,  fig.    L.  40. 
Hijastro,  Z-hass'-tro^  s.  m.,  step-son.    L.  49. 
Hijo,  ?'-/w,  s.  m.,  son.    L.  6. 
Hilar,  e-lar\  to  spin.    L.  65. 
Hilo,  g'-to,  s.  m.,  thread.    L.  24. 
Hinchar,  een-char\  to  swell.    L.  53. 
Historia,  eess-td'-r?-a,  s.  f.,  history.    L.  15. 
Hoja,  o'-ha,  s.  f.,  leaf  (of  a  tree  or  a  book). 

L.  59. 
Hola  I  o'-la,  inter.,  hallo  1    L.  46. 
Holgazan,  ole-gah-than' ,  adj.  and  s.  m.,  idle, 

lazy,  loitering ;  idler,  loiterer.    L.  6. 
Hombre,  ome'^rai,  s.  m.,  man.— Es  mas 

ho?nbre  que  su  hermano,  he  is  more  of  a 

man  than  his  brother.    L.  6. 
Honor,  o-nore',  s.  m.,  honor.    L.  39. 
Honroso,  one-ro'-so,  adj.,  honorable.    L.  52. 
Hora,  o'-ra,  s.  f.,  hour.    L.  23. 
Homo,  ore' -no,  s.  m.,  oven. — Cocer  enhorno, 

to  bake.    L.  60. 
Horrendo,  ore-rain'-do,  adj.,  horrific  (poet.). 

L.  55. 
Hortelano,  dre-tai-lah'-no,  s,  m.,  gardener. 

L.  65. 
Hospital,  bce-pl-tal',  s.  m.,  hospital.    L.  47. 
Hotel,  o-taW,  s.  m.,  hotel.    L.  17. 
Hueso,  wai'-so,  s.  m.,  bone.— Bocado  sin 

Imeso,  sinecure,    L.  61, 
Huesped,  waiss'-paid,  s.  m.,  guest,  host.— 

Echar  la  cnenta  sin  la  huespeda,  to  reckon 

without  the  host.    L.  63. 
Huir,  loeer,  to  flee,  to  make  off.    L.  34. 
Human o,  oo-mah'-no,  adj.,  human.    L.  48, 
Humor,  oo-more'  s,  m.,  humor,  wit.     L.  27. 


Idea,  ^-dai'-a,  s.  f,  ideal.    L.  54. 
Ideal,  l-dal-al',  adj..  Ideal.    L.  43. 


454 


VOCABULARY, 


Idioma,  Z-di-5'-ma,  s.  m.,  idiom,  language. 
L.  55. 

Idiota,  l-dl-d'-ta,  s.  m.,  idiot.    L.  48. 

Idiotismo,  d-de-d-feess'-nu),  8.  m.,  idiom, 
form  of  expression  peculiar  to  a  language. 
L.  49. 

fgleriia,  l-glai'-sl-a,  s.  f.,  church.    L.  10. 

■guoraucia,  eeg-nd-ran' -tfit-a^  s.  f.,  igno- 
rance.   L.  52. 

■gnoraute,  eeg-no-ran'-tcU^  adj.,  ignorant. 
L.  Gl. 

iguorar,  eeg-nd-rar\  to  be  ignorant  of,  not 
to  know.    L.  61. 

Igual,  e-giocU\  adj.,  equal,  alike,  like.  L.  48. 

Igualdad,  e-qwcU-datfi',  s.  f.,  equality.  L.  55. 

llusion,  d-loo-se-one',  s.  f.,  illusion.    L.  48. 

Imaginacion,  i-mah-hl-nah-thl-dne' y  b.  f., 
imagination.    L.  58. 

Impedir,  eem-pai-deer\  to  impede,  toliinder. 
L.  43. 

imperative,  eem-pai-rah-tl'-vo^  adj.  and  s. 
m.,  imperative,  imperative  mood.    L.  43. 

Imperfeccion,  eem-pair-faik-tM-one\  s.  f., 
imperfection.    L.  55. 

Xmperfecto,  eem-pair-faik'-to,  adj.,  imper- 
fect.   L.  43. 

Impersonal,  eem-pair-so-nal\  adj.,  imper- 
sonal.   L.  01. 

Imponer,  eem-pd-nair',  to  impose,  to  in- 
form, to  acquaint.    L.  44. 

Importaute.  eem-pore-tan' -tai,  adj.,  impor- 
timt.    L.  38. 

Lmportar,  eem-pdre-tar' ,  to  import,  to  be  of 
importance,  to  amount  to.    L.  31. 

mposible,  eetn-po-oS'-blai,  adj.,  impossible. 
L.  31. 

Lmpreso,  eem-prai'-so,  past  part,  of  Impri- 
MIR.     L.  61. 

imprimir,  eem-prlmeer\  to  print.    L.  61. 

Improvisar,  eem-pro-vl-sar' y  to  improvise, 
to  extemporise.    L.  .53. 

Improviso,  eem-prd-vS'-so. — De  improviso, 
unexpectedly,  on  a  sudden.    L.  32. 

Imprudencia,  eem-jrroo-dain'-thl-a,  s.  f.,  im- 
prudence.   L.  43. 

imprndente,  eem-proo-dain'-tal,  adj.,  im- 
prudent.   L.  20. 

Impuesto,  eem-pwaiss'-tOy  past  part,  of  Im- 
poner.   L.  52. 

n,  een,  Latm  prep,  ufled  in  Spanish  as  a 
prefix  onlv.  and  generally  with  a  ncm- 
tive  Pinrniflcation.    L.  Tif). 

Inccndiar,  een-fhaln-(f7-ar' ,  to  kindle.    L.  51. 

Inchiir,  em-cJoo-eer' ,  to  include.    L.  49. 

Inc6modamentc,  fim-l-7i'-mn-d(ih-m.ain-frti, 
adv.,  lncommodioH<'ly,  inconveniently, 
nncomfortnblv.    L.  20. 

incomodar,  een-M-md-dar\  to  Incommode, 
to  put  out.    L.  47. 

Inc6mndo,  epn-W -m^i-do,  ftdl.,  Incommodl- 
ons.  Inconvenient,  uncomfortable.    L.  99. 

Incompleto,  efrt-kome-plai'-to,  adj.,  Incom- 

'    plete.    L.  48. 

Inconveriiente,  e/>n-'k7in.e-vni.n7-rtin'-taf,  b. 
m.,  difficulty.  obst<»c1e.  obioction.    L.  Rl. 

Increlble,  een-krai-i'-blai.  adj..  Incredible. 
L.61. 

Indeflnido,  f>m-dai-n-ni'-do,  adj.,  indefi- 
nite.   L.  01. 

IndependoTicia,  e^n-dai-nain-daln'-tM-ay  B. 
f. .  indopendencf'.     L.  35. 

Indlcatlvo,  p.en-dl-kah-tl'-vo,  ad}.,  indica- 
tive.   L.  43. 


Indice,  een'-dS-tkai,  8.  m.,  index.    L.  61. 
ludigno,  een-deeg'-nOy  adj.,  unworthy,  un« 

deserving.    L.  53. 
Indigo,  een'-dS-go,  e.  m.  L.  54.   (See  ARil  ) 
Indirecto,    eeu-dl-rcUk' -to,    adj.,    indirect. 

L.  51. 
Individuo,  een-di-vl' -doo-d^  s.  m.,  individu- 
al, member  (of  academies,  universities, 

&c.).    L.  51. 
Industrioso,  een-doos-tri-d'-so,  adj.,  indus- 
trious.   L.  35. 
Inepto,  een-aip' -to,  adj.,  inept,  unfit.    L.  61. 
Inexplicable,  een-cukti-pli-kuJi' -blai,  adj.,  in- 
explicable.   L.  61. 
Infaucia,  een-fan'-tli^-a,  s.  f.,  infancy.  L.  54. 
Inferior,  een-fai-ri-ore' ,  «dj.,  inferior.  L.  21. 
Iniimo,  een'-jl-nu),  adj.,  lowest.    L.  21 . 
Intinidad,  een-fl-nl-daUi\  s.  f.,  infinity.    L. 

40. 
Infinitivo,  een-fi-nl-tZ'-vo,  adj.,  infinitive. 

L.  43. 
Intinito,  een-fi-riS'-to,  adj.,  infinite.    L.  39. 
Inlluir,  een-jloo-eer\  to  influence.    L.  48. 
Infortunio,  een-jore-too'-ne-o^  s.  m.,  misfor- 
tune.   L.  41. 
Ingenio,  een-hai'-nl-o,  s.  m.,  genius.    L.  61. 
Ingeuioso,  eeiirhai-nl-o'so,  tulj.,  ingenious. 

L.  01. 
Inglaterra,  een-glah-tair'-ra,  s.  f.,  England. 

L.  9. 
Ingles,  een-glaiss'.  b.  m.  and  a^.,  English. 

L.  2. 
Inicial,  ?-nUh?-(il\  a_4j.,  initial.    L.  56. 
Injusticia,  een-hooss-te'-ihe-a,  b.  f.,  injustice. 

L.  45. 
Inmediato,  een-mai-dl-ah'-tOy  a4j.,  immedi 

ate,  near,  next.    L.  01. 
Inmemorial,  een-nuU-md-ri-al',  a^.,  imme* 

morial.    L.  66. 
Inocente,    l-nd  tJiain'-tcU.    adj.,   innocent. 

L.  34. 
Inquietar,  een-kZ-ai-tar' .  to  make  uneasy. 

L.  01. 
Inquicto,  een-k^-ai'-to,  adj.,  uneasy,  restless. 

L.  01. 
Insecto,  eensaik'-fo,  b.  m..  insect.    L.  61. 
Tnspirar,  eens-pl-rar',  to  inspire.    L.  68. 
Instante.    eena-fav'-ffi.   8.  m.,    instant.— Al 

iv.ofar)fe.  immedintely.    L.  49. 
Tnstinto.  eem-icen'-fo,  p.  m.,  instinct.   L.  61. 
InPtniccion,    eenx-trook  thp-7>ne\    s.  f.,    In- 

Ptrnotion.  leamin?.    L.  52. 
Instniido,  een.<>,<>-fTVO^'-do.  a<^..  Instructed, 

learned,  educated.    L.  49. 
luBtruir,  eem-troo-eer' ,  to  instruct,  to  teach. 

L.  47. 
Instrumento,  ^enxfroo-main'-fo,  b.  m.,  in- 

strnmont.    L.  61. 
Intacbnblp.   een-fah-rhnh'-Nai.  nf^l.,  anlnv- 

ponchnble.  irropronrhnble.    I.,  c-l. 
Intencion,  e€n-tain-thl-dne\  s.  f.,  intention. 

L.  61. 
Tntentar,  fen-fafn-far'.  to  attempt.    L.  61 . 
Interfp.  ffin-faj-rahx'.  p.  m..  interepf.  L.  M. 
Interepanto.  efin-tai-rai-san'-tai,  adj.,  inter- 

cptiner.    L.  47.. 
Interesar,  een-tai-rai-sar'.  to  Interest.    L. 

61. 
Interln,  een'-tai-reen,  adv..  In  the  Interim 

L.  61. 
Interior,  een-tat-rl-dre',  acH.,  Interior.     L 

4«. 
Interior,  s.  m.,  interior.    L.  46. 


VOCABULAEY 


456 


Interjeccion,  een-tair-haik-thl-one' ,  s.  f.,  in- 
terjection.   L.  43. 

Interrogacion,  een-tair-ro-gah-the-one\  s.  f., 
interrogation.    L.  61. 

Interrogante,  een-tair-ro-gan'-tai^  s.m.,  note 
of  interrogation.  (Pres.  part,  of  Inter- 
BOGAR.)    L.  61. 

Interrogar,  een-tair-rd-gar\  to  interrogate, 
to  question.    L.  61. 

Interrumpir,  een-iair-room-peer\  to  inter- 
rupt.   L.  64. 

Intimidad,  een-te-m^-dath',  s.  f.,  intimacy. 

.    L.  56. 

/Intimo,  een'-tl-mo,  adj.,  intimate.    L.  56. 

lutroducir,  een-trd-doo-tlieer\  to  introduce. 
L.  40. 

Inutil,  een-oo'-teel^  adj.,  useless.    L.  50. 

Invariable,  een-vah-re-alt' -blai,  adj.,  uivari- 
able.    L.  56. 

Inversion,  een-vair-sl-dne'^  s.  f.,  inversion. 
L.  61. 

Invertir,  een-vair-teer\  to  invert.    L.  61. 

Invierno,  een-ve-air'-no,  s.  m.,  winter.  L. 
S4. 

Invitar,  een-vl-tar\  to  invite.    L.  56. 

Ir,  eer,  to  go.    L.  18. 

Iris,  e'-reess^  s.  f.,  rainbow.    L.  61. 

Irlanda,  eer-lan'-da,  s.  f.,  Ireland.    L.  40. 

Irregular,  eer-rai-goo4ar\  adj.,  irregular. 
L.  43. 

Lregularidad,  eer-rai-goo-lah-r1-dath\  b.  f., 
Irregularity.    L.  55. 

Isabel,  l-sah-baU\  s.  f.,  Isabella,  Elizabeth. 
L.  55. 

Isla,  eess'-la^  s.  f,,  island.    L.  61. 

Italia,  e-tah'-m-a,  s.  f.,  Italy.    L.  40. 

Italiano,  l-tah-le-ah'-no^  s.  m.  »nd  adj.,  Ital- 
ian.   L.  61. 

Izquierdo,  eeth-kl-air'-do^  adj.,  left-handed. 
— Mano  izquierda^  left  hand.    L.  50. 


Jabon,  hah-bdne\  s.  m.,  soap.    L.  5. 
Jamas,  hah-mass\  adv.,  never.    L.  25. 
Jaque,  hah'-kaU  check  (at  chess).— Jogwe  y 

mate,  checkmate.    L.  42. 
Jarrlin,  har-deen\  s.  m.,  garden.    L.  18. 
Jardinero,  har-dl-nai'-ro,  s.  m.,  gardener. 

L.  34. 
Jose.  k5-.oai\  s.  m.,  Joseph.    L.  43. 
J6ven,  ho'-vain,  adj.  and  s.  m.  and  f.,  young; 

young:  man,  youii'?  woman.    L.  13. 
Jnan,  whan.  s.  m.,  John.    L.  17. 
Juana,  whah'-na,  s.  f.,  Jane.    L.  17. 
Jueeo,  whai'-go^  s.  m.,  game,  play,  set.    L. 

6i: 
Jn^ves.  vfhai'-vaiss,  s.  m.,  Thursday.    L.  9. 
Jnez,  whaifh,  s.  m..  iuflge.    L.  9. 
Jncror,  hon-'^nr'.  to  play.    L.  41. 
Juido,  v^M'-fhl-o,  s.  m.,  judgment,  sense, 

trial.    L.  53. 
Julio.  hoo'-T?-n.  s.m.,  July,  (prop,  name) 

Julius.    L.  24. 
Juntar,  ho(m-tar\  to  join,  to  place  together. 

L.  65. 
Junto,  hoon'-to,  adv.,  near,  close  to.    L.  39. 
Juramento,  hno-ra-main'-to,  s.m.,  oath,  affi- 
davit.   L.  53. 
Justicia.  hoofn^-tl' -fM-a.  s.  f.  justice.    L.  61. 
Ju«to.  hooas'-to,  adj.,  Inst.  nVht.    L.  61 . 
JHventnd,  7ioo-ven-tooth' ,  s.  f.,  youth.    L.  48. 


L. 

La,  def.  art.  f.  sin^.,  the.    L.  5. 

La,  pron.  f.  sing.,  ner,  it.    L.  8. 

Laconico,  lah-ko'-nS-ko,  adj.,  laconic.    L.  38. 

Laboriosidad,  lah-bo-re-o-ie-daih' ,  s.  f.,  in- 
dustry.   L.  51. 

Lacre,  lah'-krai,  s.  m.,  sealing-wax.    L.  5, 

Lado,  lah'-do,  s.  m.,  side.    L.  18. 

Ladron,  lah-drone',  s.  m.,  tliief.    L.  44. 

Lago,  lali'-go.  s.  m.,  lake.    L.  40. 

Lagrima,  lah' -gre-ma,  s.  f.,  tear..    L.  51. 

Lapiz,  lah'-peeth,  s.  m.,  pencil.    L.  51. 

Largo,  lar'-go,  adj.,  \ong.— Largo  tiempo,  a 
long  time.— A  lo  largo,  alongside.    L.  21. 

Lastima,  lass'-ie-ma,  8.  f.,  pity.    L.  25. 

Lastimar,  lass-te-mar\  to  hurt,  to  wound, 
to  ofl'end.    L.  61. 

Latin,  lah-teen',  s.  m.,  Latin.    L.  61. 

Latinajo,  lah-ie-nah'-ho,  8.  m.  aug.,  Dog- 
Latin.    L.  49. 

Latitud,  lah-il-tcoth\  8.  f.,  width,  latitude. 
L.61. 

Lavandera,  lah-van-dai'-ra,  s.  f,,  washer- 
woman.   L.  5. 

Lavar,  lah-var\  to  wash.    L.  24. 

Le,  lai,  pron.,  him,  it;  to  him,  to  it.    L.  10. 

Leccion,  laik-thl-one\  s.  f.,  lesson,    L.  8. 

Leche,  lai'-chai^  s.  f.,  milk.    L.  7. 

Lectura,  laik-too'-ra,  s.  f.,  reading.    L.  38 

Leer,  lai-air\  to  read.    L.  7. 

Legua,  lai'-gu-a,  s.  f.,  league.    L.  61. 

Leido,  lai-e'-do,  adj.— Hombre  bien  Mdo,  a 
well-read  man.   (Past  pt.  of  Leer.)   L.  52. 

Lejos,  lai'-hoce,  adv.,  far  ofl".— A  lo  l^os,  in 
the  distance.    L.  31. 

Lengua,  lain'-gwa,  s.  f.,  tongue,  language. 
L.  23. 

Lenguage,  lain-gwa'-Jiai,  s.  m.,  language, 
manner  of  speaking  or  writing.    L.  66. 

Lento,  lain'-to,  adj.,  slow,  lardy.    L.  61. 

Leon,  lai-dne\  s.  m.,  Hon.    L.  54. 

Letra,  lai'-tra,  s.  f.,  letter  (character),  hand- 
writing, letter  (of  credit)  ;  pi.,  letters,  lite- 
rature.—Bellas  letras,  Belles-lettres.  L. 
61. 

Levantar,  lai-van-tar\  to  raise,  to  lift  up.— 
Levantarse,  to  rise,  to  get  up.    L.  S3. 

Levita,  lai-ie'-ta,  s.  m.,  Levite.— ZcteYa, 
s.  f.,  frock-coat.    L.  61. 

Ley,  lai'-S,  s.  f.,  law.    L.  8. 

Liberal,  U-bai-ral\  adj.,  liberal.    L.  62. 

Libertad,  le-bair-tath\  s.  f.,  liberty.    L.  40. 

Libra,  te'-bra.  s.  f.,  pound.— X?6m  esterlina, 
pound  sterling.    L.  47. 

Librar,  U-hrar'l  to  free,  to  deliver :  (com- 
mercial)  to  draw.    L.  45. 

Libre,  Ve'-hraL  adj.,  free.    L.  59. 

Libren'a,  U-brai-rl'-a,  s.  f.,  bookstore,  book- 
seller's shop,  book -trade.    L.  11. 

Llbrero.  l?-brai'-ro,  s.m.,  bookseller.  L.  11. 

Libro,  ir-bro,  s.  m.,  book.    L.  4 

Lieero,  l?-?>a)/-ro,  adj.,  light,  swift. -A  la 

ligera,  lin-htly.    L.  46. 
Limosna,  U-moce'-na,  s.  f.,  alms.    L.  bi. 
Limpiar,  leem-pl-ar',  to  clean     ^- ?^j, 
Limpieza,  leem-p^-ai' -tha,  s.f.,  cleanliness. 

Limpio,  leem'-pS-d,  adj.,  clean,  cleanly.    L. 

20. 
Lfnea,  W  nai-a,  s.  f.,  line.    L.  61. 
Lisboa.  l^^.ta-bd'-a.  s.  f.,  Lisbon.     L.  55. 
Lisonja,  U-sone'-ha,  s.  f,  flattery.    L.  61. 


456 


VOCABULARY, 


Lisonjear,  lS-sdne-kal-ar\  to  flaftter.    L.  61. 
Litioujero,    IS-KO/ie-hai'-ro,    adj.  and  s.  m., 

flattering,  flatterer.    L.  01. 
Lista,  leess'-ta,  s.  f.,  list.    L.  61. 

Listo,  leess'-lo^  adj.,  ready,  Bliarp,  quick.  L. 
46. 

Literato,  R-tai-rah' -to,  s.  m.,  man  of  letters, 
literatus.    L.  51. 

Literatura,  U-tcU-rah-ioo' -ra,  s.  f.,  literature. 
L.  52. 

Litro,  «'-<ro,  s.  m.,  litre.    L.  60. 

La,  art.  neut.,  the.     (See  explanations  in 
Lessons.) 

Lo.  pron.,  it.  (and  sometimss)  him.     L.  26. 

Local,  l(i-k(il\  adj.,  local.    L.  51. 

Loco,  W-lca,  a  Jj.,  mid  —A  tontas  y  a  loca% 
inconsiderately,  without  reilection.   L.  61. 

Loco,  s.  m.,  madman.    L.  61. 

Lodo,  lo'-do,  s.  m.,  mid,  mire.     L.  45. 

Lo^rar,  l5-grar\  to  succeed,  to  obtain.    L. 
38. 

Londres,  Idne' -drains,  s.  m.,  London.    L.  12. 

Loni'itud,  lon,2-hS4ooth\  s.  f.,  length,  longi- 
tude.   L.  61. 

Loleria,  lo-lai-rd'-a,  s.  f.,  lottery.    L.  65. 

Lucir,  loo-theer',  to  shine,  to  glitter.    L.  65. 

LuejfO,  loo-ai'-go,  adv.,  by  and  by,  immedi- 
ately ;—conj.,  then,  therefore.    L.  33. 

Lu^ar,  loo-gar\  s.  m.,  place,  village.— Ea 
lujar  de,  instead  of.    L.  29. 

Luis,  l09-eers\  s.  m.,  Levtris,  Louis.    L.  15. 

Luisa,  loo-S'-sa,  a.  f.,  Louisa.    L.  2. 

Luna,  loo'-na,  s.  f.  moon.    L.  61. 

Luto,  loo'-to,  8.  m.,  mjurning.    L.  60. 

Luz,  lootk,  9.  f.,  light.— Dar  a  luz,  to  pub- 
lish, to  give  birth  to.    L.  61. 


liL. 

Llamar,  lijah-mir',  to  call,  to  know.    L.  27. 

Llave,  Imli'-vai,  s.  f.,  key.    L.  5,). 

Lle^ar,  lycii-gar\  to  arrive.— negar  aser,  to 

become.    L.  37. 
Llenar,  Itjai-nar',  to  All,  to  fulfll.    L.  54. 
Lleno,  luai'-no,  adj.,  full.    L.  54. 
Llevar.  hjai-nar\  to  take,  to  carry,  to  bear. 

to  bring  forth.    L.  14. 
Llorar,  hj5-rar\  to  cry,  to  weep.    L.  51. 
Lloro,  lyd'-ro,  s.  m,,  tear,  act  of  crying.    L. 

51.  " 

LL)ver,  li/d-vair'to  r&m.—Llover  6  cantar- 

ros,  to  pour.    L.  3:). 
Lloviznar,  lya-veeth-iiar',  to  drizzle.     L  30. 
Lluvia,  lyoo'-vl-a,  s.  f.,  rain,    L.  30. 


Macho,  mah'-cho,  b.  m.,  male  (of  animals), 

mule.    L.  62. 
Madera,  rnak-dai' -ra,  b.  f.,  wood,  timber, 

luuioer.    Li.  4. 

"^•^^^ff^^^^^mah-drass'-tra,  b.  f.,  Btcp-moth- 

Madre.  mah'-drat,   b.  f.,   mother.— Lengua 
i,m"'F-.'  '^'^  original  language.     L.  6. 
Madrid,  mah-drppfh'.  s.  m.,  Madrid.    L.  12. 
Madrilefio,  mah-drli.lfjin'yo,  8.  m.,  Madrlle- 

man,  native  of  Madrid.     L.  49. 
Madrugada,   mah-droogah'-da,  b.  f.,    that 

P'lrt  of  the  night  from  12  p.  m.  until  sun 

rise.     L.  65. 


Madrugar,  muh-droo-gar\  to  rise  very  early. 

L.  62. 
Madurez,  mah-doo-raUh\  b.  f.,  maturity, 

ripeness.    L.  51. 
Maestro,  inah-azss' -tro,  b.  m.,  master,  teach- 
er.   L.  62. 
Magnifico,  mag-)ii'-fl-ko,  adj.,  magnificent. 

L.  68. 
Mai,  8.  m.,  evil,  harm,  disease.    L.  48. 
Mai,  adv.,  badly.— J/a^  de  bu  grado,  m  epite 

of  him.    L.  3. 
Maldito,  mcU-Ul'-to,  adj.,  accursed,  perverse. 

L.  62. 
Maiicia,  mah-ll' -Uii-a,  b.  f.,  malice,  wicked- 
ness.   L.  62. 
Malo,  mah'-lo,  a^.,  bad,  ill,  wicked.— Estar 

7ncdo.^  to  be  sick.— ber  jiuUo,  to  be  bad,  to 

be  wicked.    L,  7. 
Mama,  iiiah-ina\  s.  f.,  mamma.    L.  5. 
Mandar,  man-dar'y  to  send,  to  command,  to 

order.    L.  17. 
Manera,    mah-nai'-ra,    b.  f.,  manner.— De 

inanera  que,  so  as,  so  that.    L.  42. 
Mania,  mcUi-nl'-a,  e.  f.,  mania,  whim.  L.  57. 
Manifestar,  mah-n^-fam-tar' ,  to  manifest, 

to  show.     L.  51. 
Maniflesto,    mah-ni-fl-uiss' -to,  adj.,  mani- 
fest.   L.  52. 
Mano,  mah'-no,  s.  f.,  hand,  quire  (of  ppper). 

— Veuir  con  bus  ma/im  lavadas,  to  wish 

to  enjoy  the  fruit  of  another's  labor.    L. 

28. 
Mantcca,    man-tai'-Tca,    s.  f.,   butter,   lard 

(South  America).     L.  62. 
Mantequilla,  man-tai-keel' -ya^  B.  f.,  butter 

(South  America),  lard.    L.  62. 
Manuel,  mafi.-noo-aU\  8.  m.,  Emanuel.  L.  2. 
Manuscrito,  mah-nooss-krl -to,  s.  m.,  mann- 

Bcript.    L.  62. 
Manzana,  man-thah'-na,  8.  f.,  apple,  block 

(of  houses).     L.  31. 
Manzanar,  man-thah-nar'.  b.  m.,  apple-or- 
chard.   L.  49. 
Mafiana,   man-yah'-na,   s.  f.,  morning,  to- 
morrow.—Pasado  mananay  the  day  after 

to-morrow.     L.  .30. 
Mar,  9.  m.  and  f.,  sea.— Quien  no  se  arrles- 

ga  no  pasa  la  mar,  faint  heart  never  woa 

fair  lady.     L.  62. 
Marca,  mar'-ka,  s.  f.,  mark,  brand.    L.  42. 
Marcha,  mar'-cha,  s.  f.,  march.— Sobre  la 

marcha,  ofl'-hand,  on  the  spot.    L.  51. 
Marchar,  mar-char\  to  march.    L.  19. 
Margarita,  mar-gah-ri'-ta,  s.  f.,  Margaret. 

L.  3. 
Maria,  mah-rl'-a,  b.  f..  Marv.    L.  44. 
Martea,  mar'-faUi,  b.  m..  Tuoedav.    L.  9. 
Marzo,  mai-'-th!),  s.  m.,  March.    L.  24. 
Mas,  7/?a.<.f,  adv.,  more.— i/cw  que  (or  do\ 

more  than.    L.  16.. 
Mascara,  moM'  kah-rn.  h.  f ,  mask,    L.  60. 
Masculino,  mass-koo-ll'-no,  adj.,  masculine. 

L.  47. 
Matar.  mah-taV.  to  kill.    L.  44. 
Matomatico.     wah-t(ti-mah'-ff-ko.     b.    m., 

mathematician;  adj.,  mathematical.    L. 

60. 
Materia,  mafifai'-rl-a,  B.  f.,  matter,  subject, 

afTair.     L.  .'iA. 
Material,  mah-tai^Sal\  adj.,  material.    L. 

48. 
Matoriallsta.  mah-fai-ri-ah-kess'-ta^  b.  m., 

materialist.    L.  96. 


VOCABULAKSr 


457 


Matrimonio,  mah-tre-md'-nl-o,  s.  m.,  matri-  i 
iiiouy,  wedlock,  marriage.    L.  (34.  | 

Mauiiiuo,  7nah-ool-ye'-Uo^  a.  m.,  mew  (of  a  : 
cat),    L.  4tj. 

Maximo,  mak'-se-mo,  adj.  (superlative  of 
GBANDEh  chief,  principal,  very  great. 
L.  '^1. 

Mayo,  mah'-yo,  s.  m.,  May.    L.  24. 

Mayor,  ma1i-yure\  adj.,  greater,  larger.— 
ii.i  mayor,  tae  greatest,  ttie  largest.  L.  20. 

Maydscula,  malt-yooss'-koo-la,  adj.,  capital 
(said  of  letters).    L.  62. 

Me,  mat,  pron.,  me,  to  me.    L.  26. 

Meca,  mai'-ka,  s.  f.— JJe  zeca  en  meca,  from 
pillar  to  post,  to  and  fro.    L.  61. 

Media,  mai'-dl-a,  s.  f.,  stocking.    L.  10. 

Medianamente,  mai-de-ah-nali-niam' -tai, 
adv.,  middling.    L.  39. 

Mediania,  mai-Ue-ah-ne' -a,  s.  f.,  mediocrity, 
moderation.     L.  52. 

Mediauo,  mai-dl-ah'-iw,  adj.,  medium,  mid- 
dling, moderate.    L.  39. 

Medico,  mai'-de-ko,  s.  m.,  pliysician.    L.  19. 

Medida,  maz-de-da,  s.  f.,  measure.    L.  55. 

Medio,  mai'-de-o,  adj.,  hali.—Mediodia,  mid- 
day, noon.—Medianoche,  midnight.  L.  30. 

Medio,  8.  m.,  middle,  means.— For  medio 
de,  b^  means  of.    L.  37. 

Mediodia,  tnai-de-o-de'-a,  s.  m.,  noon,  mid- 
day, south.    L.  30. 

Medir,  mai-deer\  to  measure.    L.  39. 

Mejicano,  mai  he-kah' -no,  s.  m.  and  adj.. 
Mexican.    L.  47. 

Mejico,  mxxi' -hl-ko,  s.  m.,  Mexico.    L.  20. 

Mejor,  mai-hore',  adj.  and  adv.,  better. 
—El  mejor,  the  best.    L.  20. 

Melocoton,  mai  lo-ko-tone' ,  s.  m.,  peach.  L. 
31. 

Melon,  mai-lom',  s.  m.,  melon.    L.  31. 

Memoria,  mai-mo'-re-a,  s.  f.,  memory,  re- 
collection.—Aprender  de  memoria,  to 
learn  by  heart.    L.  38. 

Mcmorias,  rnai-mo-re-as,  s.  f.  pi.,  my  com- 
pliments.   L.  39. 

Mencion,  main-the-dne' .  s.  f.,  mention.  L. 
52. 

Mencionar,  muin-thl-o-nar',  to  mention.  L. 
45. 

Menester,  mai-naits-tair' ,  s.  m.,  need,  want, 
necessity.— Ser  m£nester,  to  be  necessary ; 
must.— ilabcr  menester,  to  want,  to  re- 
quire,   L.  30. 

Mcnor,  mai-7xdre',  adj.,  less,  smaller,  minor, 
younger ;  s.  m.,  minor.    L.  20. 

Monos,  mai'-noce,  adv.,  less. — A  lo  menos, 
at  least.— Ni  mas  mi  menos,  neither  more 
nor  less.    L.  16. 

Menoscabo,  mai-noce-kah' -Ix).  s.  m.,  deteri 
oration,  detriment,  prejudice,  diminu 
tion.    L.  02. 

Meno«precio,  mai-ndr.e-prai'-thl-d,  s.  m., 
contempt,  scorn.— Mucha  familiaridad  es 
can^ia  de  m^enosprecio.  much  familiarity 
broeds  contempt.    L.  65. 

Mente,  main'-fni.  s.  f..  mind.    L.  62. 

Montir,  m,ain-teer',  to  lie.    L.  45. 

Mcnudo,  m.ai-r)00'-do,  adj.,  small,  slender, 
mean.— A  menvdf>.  often.    L.  25. 

Mequetrefe,  mai-kai-trai' -fed,  s.  m.,  trifler, 
jackanapes.    L.  63. 

Mercader,  mair  kah-dair' .  8.  m.,  dealer, 
trader,  shopkeeper.    L.  52. 

alercado,  mair-kah' -do,  s.  m.,  market.  L.  17. 

20 


Mercantil,  mair-kan-teel' ,  adj.,  mercantile. 
L,.  56. 

Merecer,  mai-rai-lhair' ,  to  merit,  to  de- 
serve.   L.  52. 

Mercndar,  mai-rain-dar' ,  to  lunch,    L,  34. 

Meridiano,  mai-re-de-ah'-no,  s.  m.,  merid- 
ian.   L.  62. 

Merino,  mai-re'-no,  s,  m.,  merino  (sort  of 
Spanish  sheep).    L.  40. 

Merito,  mcu'-re-to,  s.  m.,  merit.    L.  55. 

Mes,  maiss,  s.  m.,  month.— Al  mes,  by  the 
month.     L.  16. 

Mesa,  mai'-sa,  s.  f.,  table,    L.  14, 

Metal,  mai-ial',  s.  m.,  metal.    L.  62. 

Meter,  mai-tair',  to  put,  to  -^iacQ.— Meter 
ruido,  to  make  noise.    L.  46. 

MetOdico,  mai-to'-de-ko,  adj.,  methodical. 
L.  35, 

Metodo,  mai' -to  do.  s.  m.,  method.    L.  47. 

MelrOpolt,  mai-tro'  po-le,  s.  f.,  metropohs, 
L.  51. 

Mi,  me,  pron.,  me.    L.  25. 

Mi,  poss.  pron.,  my.    L.  5. 

Miedo,  me-ai'~do,  s.  f.,  fear.— Tener  miedo, 
to  be  afraid.    L.  25. 

Miel,  me-ail',  e.  f.,  honey.    L.  65. 

Miembro,  me-aim'-bro,  s.  m.,  member,  limb. 
L.  62. 

Miercoles,  m6-air'-kd-laiss,  s.  m.,  Thursday. 
L.  9. 

Mil,  7neel,  num.  adj.  and  s.  m.,  a  thousand, 
one  thousand.     L.  14. 

Mi  11a,  meel'-ya,  s.  f.,  mile.    L.  62. 

Millar,  med-yar',  s.  m.,  the  number  of  a 
thousand,  thousand.    L.  40. 

Millou,  meel-yoae',  num.  adj.  and  s.  m.,  mil- 
lion.—J/eYto/i^  de  pesos,  millions  of  dol- 
lars.   L.  40. 

Mineral,  me-nai-ral' ,  s.  m.,  mineral.    L.  62. 

Miniiscula,  me-nooce'-koo-la,  .  adj.,  small 
(said  of  letters),  as  opposed  to  capital. 
L.  ()2. 

Minuto,  ml-noo'-to,  s.  m.,  minute,    L.  23. 

Mio,  mia,  m'e'-d,  me.' -a,  poss.  pron.  and  poss, 
adj.,  mine,  (As  a  poss.  adj.,  mio  is  al- 
ways placed  after  the  substantive.)  L.  13. 

Mirar,  me-rar',  to  look,  to  look  at,  to  ob- 
serve.   L.  29. 

Mismo,  rmess'-mo,  adj.,  same,  self,  self- 
same.— El  mismo,  he  himself.    L.  27. 

Mitad,  ml-tath',  s.  f.,  half.    L.  40. 

Moda,  mb'-da,  s.  f.,  fashion.    L.  25. 

Modelo,  mo-dai'-lo,  s.  m.,  model.    L.  55. 

Moderacion,  md-dai-rah-the-one' ,  s.  f.,  mod- 
eration.   L.  65. 

Modemo,  mo-dair' -no,  adj.,  modern.    L.  .52. 

Modificar,  mo-de-fe-kar',  to  modify.    L.  61, 

Modismo,  mo-deess'-mo,  s.  m.,  peculiar 
manner  of  expressing  the  same  ideas 
in  the  same  language.    L.  64. 

Modo.  mo'-do.  s.  m.,  mode,  manner.— De 
ningun  modo.  by  no  means.— De  modo 
one.  so  that.    L.  42. 

Molestar,  mo-laiss-tar' .  to  molest,  to  dis- 
turb.  to  trouble.    L.  43. 

Momento,  mo-main'-to,  s.  m.,  moment.  L. 
62. 

Mona.  mo'-na.  s.  f.,  female  monkey.— Aun- 
que  la  mona  se  vista  de  seda.  rnxma  se 
queda,  a  hog  in  armor  is  still  but  a  hog. 
L.  65. 

Monarouico.  mo-var'-kl-ko,  adj.,  mooarchi- 
cal.     L.  35. 


458 


VOCABULARY. 


Moneda,  md-nai'-da,  s.  f.,  money,  coin.— 

Papt'l  moneda^  paper  money.    L.  55. 
Mouuir,  mdiie-tar\  to  mount,  to  ascend,  to 

ride  (on  horseback).    L.  Ga. 
Monturaz,  mbm-tah-ratk\  adj.,  mountain, 

wild.    L.  54. 
Monte,  inane' -lai,  s.  m.,  mountain.— ifa/ii^ 

dc  piedad,  pawn-office.    L.  40. 
Morder,  /nore-dair',  to  bite,  to  nip.— No  se 

rnuerde  \oa  labios,  he  epeaks  out  hie  mind. 

L.  ;3G. 
Moribundo,  rm-ri-boon'-do,  adj.,  dying.    L. 

47. 
Morir,  md-reer\  to  die.    L.  41. 
Mosca,  moce'-ka,  s.  f.,  fly.    L.  44. 
Mostrar,  7ndce-irar\  to  show.    L.  35. 
Motivo,  mo-tl'-vo^  e.  in.,  motive.    L.  34. 
Mover,  md-vair\  to  move.    L.  ;j6. 
Mozo,  rnO'-tho,  s.  m.,  youth,  young  man, 

waiter.    L.  G2. 
Muchacha,  nioo-chah'-cha,  b.  f.,  girl.    L.  6. 
Muchaclio,  moo-chali'-cho^  s.  m.,  boy.    L.  6. 
Mucho,  inoo'-clio,  adj.  and  adv.,  much,  a 

great  deal,  very.    L.  8. 
Mudablc,     nwo-dah'-blai,     adj.,     mutable, 

changeable,  fickle.    L.  49. 
Mudar,  moo-dar',  to  change.— 3/Mrfars(?.  to 

move  (from  one  place  to  another).    L.  (iS. 
Mucla,  moo-ai'-la,  s.  f.,  back  tooth.— Dolor 

de  muelas^  toothache.    L.  50. 
Muerte,  moo-air' -tai,  s.  f.,  death.    L.  38. 
Muerto,  moo-air'-lo^  past  part,  (of  Mobik), 

dead,  killed.    L.  52. 
Muestra,  moo-aiss' -tra,  s.  f.,  sample,  sign. 

L.  02. 
Mujcr,  moo-hair',  s.  f,  woman,  wife.    L.  6. 
Multitud,  mool-tl-tooth\  s.  f.,  multitude.    L. 

40. 
Mundo,  mwn'-do,  s.  m.,  world.— Todo  el 

innndOy  everybody.     L.  35. 
Murmuracion,  moor-moo-rah-th'S-dne' ^  b.  f., 

murmuring,  backbitinc:.    L.  C2. 
Murinurar,  mwr-moo-rar',  to  munnur,   to 

backbite.    L.  02. 
Mupco,  moo-sai'-d,  b.  m.,  museum.    L.  51. 
Musica,  7noo'-s?-ka,  s.  f.,  mneic.    L.  15. 
Mu'^ico,  moo'-sZ-ko^  a.  m.,  musician.    L.  15. 
Muy,  moo'-H^  very.    L.  0. 


N. 

Nacer,  nahthair',  to  be  horn.— Xaeer  de 
pies,  to  be  born  to  good  luck.    L.  62. 

Nacion,  na/i-f/i?-one',  p.  f.,  nation.    L.  24. 

Nada,  nah'-da.  adv.,  in  no  degree.— iVarfa 
menos,  nothing  less.     L.  11. 

Nada,  8.  f..  nothinsr.  nononlitv.    L.  H. 

Nadar,  nah-dar',  to  swim.    L.  53. 

Narlie,  vnh'-df-aU  Ind.  pron.,  nobody,  no 
one.    L.  11. 

Njipolof«.  vnh'-pd-lnifm,  b.  f,  Naples.    L.  47. 

Nnrnnja,  vnh-ran'ha,  e.  f..  orange.    L.  31. 

Natnr.nl.  r>nh-ton-raJ\  8.  m.  and  adj.,  natu- 
rnl :  native.    T,.  44. 

Natiirale7a,  nah-too-rali-Iai'-tJia,  b.  f.,  na- 
ture,   li.  40. 

Naturaliflta,  nah-too-rah-leeM'-ta,  s.  m.,  na- 
turalist.   L.  SO. 

Navarra,  nah-var'-ra,  8.  f..  Navarre.  L. 
m. 

N^vnrm.  nnh.vnr'-ro.  «  ti.,  Xfudire-t'  dm- 
Uve  of  Navarre).    L.  .'i^. 


Navegacion,  nah-vai-gah-thi-dne' ,  b.  f,  navi- 
gation.   L.  '^. 

Navidad,  naJt-i£-dat/i\  8.  f.,  nativity,  Chriat- 
mas.    L.  43. 

Navio,  nah-ti'-d.  8.  m.,  chip.    L.  53. 

Necesario,  nai-l/iai-m/i'-te-6,  adj.,  necea- 
sary.    L.  27. 

Necesidad,  nai-thai-(>l-dalh\  b.  C,  neceesity 
need,  want.     L.  44. 

Necesitar,  nai-t/iai-tS-tar',  to  be  necesBary 
to  neceseilate,  to  require,  to  want.    L.  5*. 

Necio,  nai'-tke-o,  adj.  and  s.  m,  foolit^h  • 
fool.    L.  05.  ' 

Nefas,  nai'-fass.—Por  fas  6  per  n^of,  right 
or  wrong.    L.  63. 

Negacion,  nai-gahthl-dne',  s.f.,  negation. 
L.  02. 

Negar,  nai-gar'^  to  deny,  to  refuse.    L.  34. 

Negativa,  nai-qahte'-ia,  b.  I.,  negation,  neg- 
ative, refuea'l.    L.  62. 

Negligente,  nai-glhhain'-tai,  adj.,  negli- 
gent.   L.  50. 

Negocio,  nai-gd'-t/iS-d,  b.  m.,  buBincBS, 
ahair,  matter,     L.  27. 

Negro,  nai'-gro,  b.  m.  and  adj.,  negro,-  black. 
L.  02. 

Neutro,  nai'-oo-tro,  adj.,  neuter.    L.  C2. 

Ncvar,  nai-var',  to  Know.    L.  80. 

Ni,  7?2,  conj..  neither,  nor.—Ni  mas  ni  m6- 
no8,  ncitlier  more  nor  less.    L.  8. 

Nieve,  itl-ai'-tai,  b.  f.,  enow.    L.  30. 

Ninguno,  neen-gco'-no,  prcn.j  no  one.  no- 
hody. —AingvTia  coea.  nothing.    L.  11. 

Nifia,  neen'-ya,  B.f.,  little  girl,  young  girl, 
maiden.    L.  17.- 

Nifio,  neen'-yo,  s.  m.,  child,  infant.    L.  17. 

No.  adv.,  no,  not.    L.  1. 

Noble,  Jio'-Uai,  adj.,  noble.    L.  02. 

Nobleza,  iio-blai'  tha,  b.  f.,  nobieneeB,  no- 
bility.   L  65. 

Noche,  nd'-cfiai,  b.  f.,  evening,  night.— Pue- 
nas  hccfifs,  gcod  evening,  good  ni^iht.— 
Aoc/ie  buena,  Chrisimab  eve. — AiiUhe, 
last  night.    L.  23. 

Nombrar,  7iotne-l/i'ar\  to  name,  to  appoint. 
L.  48. 

Nombre,  nome'-brai,  b.  m..  name,  noun.— 
h'cvibre  propio,  proper  name,  proper 
noun.    L.  40. 

Nominativo,  iw-ml-nah-tl'-tOy  s.  m.,  nomi- 
native.   L.  62. 

Nono.     (See  Novzno.)    L.  15. 

No  obstante,  voZtc-dan' -tai,  adv.,  never- 
theless, notM'ithelanding,  however.   L.  54. 

Nolle,  ndre'-iai,  s.  m.,  north.    L.  22. 

Nop.  noce,  pers.  pron.,  ub.  to  us.    L.  26. 

Nosotros,  nd-sD'-troc(,  pron.,  we,  oureelvee. 
L.  1.  ,    ^ 

Nota,  nd'-ta.  p.  f.,  note.    L.  62. 

Notar.  n^-tar',  1o  note,  to  observe.    L  58 

Noticia,  vr-tr-thha,  s.  f., notice,  nev^e,  pi., 

NoveciontoP.  vti-rai-fhi-ain'-tOce,  num.  adj., 

nine  hundred.     I-.  14.  ,      ♦rnnble 

Novoriad,  v^vat-datfi',  ex,  novelty,  trouble. 

NoVc'la',  nd-vai'-ia.  e.  f.,  novel,  romance.  L. 

R2  J  in 

Novono,  nd-rai'-no,    ord.  a^.  and  s.  m- 

ninth.  L. 15.  .     ♦„    T 

Noveuta.  nd-vatn'-ta,  num.  adj.,  ninety,  i^ 
14. 


VOCABULARY. 


459 


Noviembre,  nd-v^-aim'-brai,  s.  m.,  Novem- 
ber.   L.  24. 
Nue.4ro,  noo-aiss'-tro.  pose,  pron.,  our,  ours. 

L.  13. 
Nueva,    noo-at'-va,    s.  f.,  news    (generally 

used  in  the  pi).    L.  60. 
Nueva  York,  noo-ai'-va,  s,  f.,  New  York. 

L.  9. 
Nueve,  noo-ai'-vai,  num.  adj.,  nine.    L.  14. 
Nuevo,  noo-ai'-vo,   adj.,    new.— De  nuevo, 

anew.     L.  21. 
Nuez,  noo-aith\  s.  f.,  walnut.    L.  40. 
Numeral,  noo-mcd-rcU',  adj.,  numeral.    L. 

14. 
Numero,  noo'-mai-ro,  a.m., number.— i Que 

numero  tiene  su  casa  de  V.  ?   what  is  tlie 

number  of  your  house  ?    L.  14. 
Nunca,  noon'-ka,  adv.,  never.    L.  25. 


O. 

O,  conj.,  or,  either.     L.  8. 

O  !  inter.,  oh  !     L.  39. 

Obedecer,  o-bai-dai-thair' ,  to  obey.    L.  48. 

Objetivo,  obe-hai-te' -vo,  adj.  and  s,  m.,  ob- 
jective.   L.  62. 

Objeto,  obe-hai'-to^  s.  m.,  object.    L.  48. 

Obiiijacion,  o-bll-gah-lh^-dite' ,  s.  f.,  obliga- 
tion, duty.    L.  24. 

Obligar,  d-ble-gar\  to  oblige,  to  force,  to 
compel.    L.  61. 

Obra,  o'-bra,  s.  f.,  work  (any  thing  made,  as 
a  book,  a  house,  &c.).    L.  15. 

Obrar,  d-brar\  to  work,'  to  act,  to  operate. 
L  40. 

Ob3c?rvar,  dbe-sair-var\  to  observe,  to  re- 
mark.   L.  48. 

Obstante,  obestan'-tai,  present  part.— No 
obstante.    (See  no  obstante.)    L.  54. 

Obvio,  obe'-vl-o,  adj.,  obvious.    L.  43. 

Ocasion,  o-kah.-se-bm\  s.  f,,  occasion,  oppor- 
tunity.—Tomar  isiocasion  por  los  cabsllos, 
to  take  time  by  the  forelock.    L.  39. 

Occidente,  oke-the-dain'-lai,  s.  m.,  the  west. 
L  51. 

Ochenta,  5-cAam'-^a,  num.  adj.,  eighty.    L. 

Ocho,  o'-cho,  num.  adj.,  eight.    L.  14. 
Ochocientos,  o-cho-thl-ain' -toce^  num.  adj., 

ei'.?ht  hundred.    L.  14. 
Octavo,  oke-tah'-vo,  ord.  adj.,  eighth.— Eu 

octavo,  8vo.    L.  15. 
Octubre,  oke-too' -brai^  s.  m.,  October.     L 

24. 
Ocultar,  b  kool-tar',  to  hide.    L.  48. 
Oculto,  b-lcool'-to,  adj.,  hidden.    L.  52. 
Ocupacion,  bkoo-pah-thl-bne\  s.  f.,  occupa- 
tion, business,  concern.    L.  54. 
Ocupar,  b-koo-par',  to  occupy,  to  engage,  to 

fill  (a  post).    L.  47. 
Ocurrir,  b-koor-reer\  to  occur,  to  strike.— 
-   Le  ocurre  una  idea,  an  idea  strikes  him. 

L.  62. 
Oeste,  b-aiss'-tai,  s.  m.,  west.    L.  .51. 
Ofender,  b-Jam-dair',  to  offend.    L.  27. 
Oficio,    b-je'-tM-o.,    s.  m.,    office,   employ, 

trade.    L.  38. 
Ofrecer,  b-frai-lJiair\  to  offer     L.  49. 
Oido,  b-l'-do,  s.  m.,  hearing,  ear.— Hablar  al 

oido,  to  whisper  in  one's  ear.    L.  61. 
Oir,  b-eer\  to  hear.— (Jeja  !  just  listen !    L. 

41. 


Ojalal  bhah4a\  inter.,  would  to  God  I  L. 
37. 

Ojo,  b'ho^  s.  m.,  eye.    L.  29. 

Oler,  b-lair\  to  smell.    L.  41. 

Oll'ato,  ble-fah'-lo,  s.  m.,  the  sense  of  smell. 
L.  61. 

011a,  bte'-ya,  s.  f.,  earthen  j^oi.—  OUa  podri- 
da,  Spanish  mixed  dish  of  meats,  vegeta- 
bles, &c.,  cooked  together.     L.  62. 

Olor,  b-lbre\  s.  m.,  odor,  scent,  smell.   L.  62. 

Olivar,  b-ll-var\  s.  m.,  olive  ground.    L.  63. 

Olvidar,  ble-ve-dar',  to  forget.    L.  40. 

Omnibus,  brne' -nl-hooce.,  s.  m.,  omnibus. 
L.  51. 

Once,  bm'-thai,  num.  adj.,  eleven.— Hacer 
las  orice,  to  lunch  about  noon.    L.  14. 

Opera,  b'-pai-ra,  s.  f.,  opera.    L.  25. 

Opinion,  b-pe-ne-bm' ,  s.  f.,  opinion.    L.  42. 

Oponer,  b-pb-nair\  to  oppose.    L.  51. 

Optimo,  bpe'  tS-mo,  adj.,  best,  extremely 
good.    L.  21. 

Opuesto,  b-pwaiss'-to,  adj.,  opposite,   op- 

Eosed.    (Irreg.   past.  part,   of  Oponer.) 
.52. 
Oracion,  b-rah-the-bne\  s.  f.,  prayer,  speech, 

discourse.     L.  45. 
Orden,  bre'-dain,  s.  m.  and  f.,  order.— A  la 

orderi  de  V.,  at  your  service.    L.  39. 
Ordenar,  bre-dai-iiar' ,   to    order,  to  com- 
mand.   L.  51. 
Organista,  bre-gah-neess' -ta,  s.  m.,  organist. 

L.  36. 
Oriente,  b-rl-aia' -tai,  east.    L.  51. 
Oro,  5'-ro,  8.  m.,  gold.— No  es  oro  todo  lo 

que  reluce,  all  is  not  gold  that  glitters. 

L.  8. 
Os,  bee,  pron.,  you  (objective  of  verbs).    L. 

26. 
0%\A<yi\^bcethbne' ,%.vci.  (SeeOsTEA.)  L.62. 
Ostra,  bce'-tra,  s.  f.,  oyster.    L.  62. 
Otono,  b-tbne'-yo.,  s,  m.,  autumn,  fall.   L.  24. 
Otro,  b'-tro.,  indef.  pron.,  other,  another, 

L.  18. 
Oveja,  b-vai'  ha,  s.  f.,  sheep.    L.  65. 
Ox  !  blcs,  inter,   used  to  frighten  off"  fowls, 

&c.    L.  46. 


P. 

Paca,  pah'-ka,  s.  f.,  Fanny.    L.  44. 

Paciencia,  pah-tM-ain' -ihe-a,  s.  f.,  patience. 
L.  63. 

Paco,  pah'-ko,  s.  m.,  (contraction  of  Fran- 
cisco, Francis),  Frank.     L.  44. 

Padeccr,  pah-dai4hair\  to  suffer  pain.  L. 
47. 

Padrastro,  pah-drass' -tro,  s.  m.,  step-father. 
L.  49. 

Padre,  7?«A'-c?m^,  s.  m.,  father.— Parirenuea- 
tro,  the  Lord's  prayer.     L.  6  and  45. 

Pagar,  pah-gar',  to  pay.    L.  14. 

Pagare,  pah-gah-rai' ,  s.  m.,  (comm.)  prom- 
issory note.    L.  59. 

Pasma,  pah'he-na.,  s.  f.,  page  (of  a  book, 
&c.).    L.  50. 

Pais,  pah-eess',  s.  m.,  country.— i  Cuanto 
licmpo  hace  que  esta  V.  en  este  pai^f 
how  long  have  you  been  in  this  country  ? 
L.  19. 

Paisano,  pah-l-sah' -no,  e.  m.,  countryman 
(one  from  the  same  country).    L.  50. 

Paja,  pah'-ha,  s.  f.,  straw.    L.  63. 


460 


VOCABULARY. 


Pajaro,  paJi' -hah-ro,  s.  m.,  bird.    L.  48. 
Pajurraco,  pafi-har-rah' -kOy  s.  m.,  (aug.  of 

Pajaro),  an  u;,'ly,  clumsy  bird.    L.  49. 
Palabra,  pah-lak' -bra,  s.  f.,  word,  promise. 

—PakUtras  may  ores,  oflensive  words.    L. 

1.5  and  G5. 
Palacio,  pahlah'-tM-o,  s.  m.,  palace.     L. 

48. 
Palanf,'ana,;)a/i-/aw-fii'a/i'-na,  s.  f.,  washbowl. 

L.  46. 
Palo,  pah'-lo,  s.  m.,  stick  of  wood.    L.  62. 
Pan.  pan,  s.  m.,  bread,  loaf.    L.  7. 
Panaderla,  pah-rmh-dai-rl' -a,  s.  f.,  bakery. 

L.  11. 
Panadero,  pah-nah-dai' -ro,   8.  m.,  baker. 

L.  11. 
Pantalon,  pan-tah-ldne\  s.  m.,  pantaloons, 

trousers.    L.  17. 
Pano,  pan'-yo,  s.  m.,  cloth.    L.  62. 
Pafuiclo,  pxin-yoo-ai'-lo,  s.  m.,  pocket-Iiand- 

kerchief.    L.  5. 
Papa,  pah-pa\  s.  m.,  papa.    L.  5. 
Papel,  pak-jmW,  s.  m.,  paper,  part  (in  a 

play).— Ilacer  papel,  to  cut  a  figure.    L.  4. 
Paquito,  pah-kl'-to,  s.  m.,  (contraction  of 

Francisco,  Francis),  Franky.    L.  44. 
Par,  par,  s.  m.,  pair,  couple.    L.  40. 
Para,  pah'-ra,  prep.,  for,  to,  in  order  to, 

toward.— Tiene  una  carta /jora  V.,  he  has 

a  letter  for  you.— Esta  para  partir,  he  is 

about  to  set  out.    L.  19. 
Parabien,  pah-rah-hl-ain' ,  s.  m.,  congratu- 
lation, compliment.— Dar  el  parabien,  to 

congratulate.    L.  62. 
Pariiguas,  pah-rah'-gwass,  s.  m.,  umbrella. 

L.  50. 
Parar,  pah-rar',  to  stop,  to  end  (in).    L.  51. 
Parasol,  pah-rah-fole' ,  s.  m.,  parasol.   L.  50. 
Parecer,  pah-rai-lkair' ,  to  appear,  to  seem. 

L.  .30. 
Pared,  pah-raith' ,  s.  f.^  wall.    L.  50. 
Paris,  pah-reess',  s.  m.,  Paris.    L.  12. 
Parque,  par'-kai,  s.  m.,  park.    L.  17. 
Parte,  par'tai,  s.  f.,  part.— Alguna  parte, 

somewhere.— Ninguna  parte,  nowhere.— 

I)e  ocho  dias  ji  esta  parte,  for  the  last 

eight  davs;- 8.  m.,   message,  dispatch, 

information.    L.  27.  ' 

Participar,  par-tMhi-par' ,  to  participate,  to 

partake.     L.  57. 
Participio,  par-li-tM'-pl-d,   s.  m.,  partici- 
ple.    L.  43. 
Particula,  par-tl'-hoo-la,  s.  f.,  particle.    L. 

50. 
Particular,  par-tS-koo-tar',  adj.,  particular, 

private.     L.  49. 
Partida,  jmr-tl'-da,  s.  f.,  departure.    L.  42. 
Partir.  par-teer',  to  depart,  to  set  out,  to 

divide,  to  split.     L.  19. 
Piirtitivo,  par-ilti'-vo,  a4j.,  partitive.     L. 

6!). 
Pasaie,  pah-,<>ah'-hai,  b.  m.,  passage,  fare. 

L.  .'iS  and  63. 
Pasar,  pah-sar',  to  pass,  to  go  (from  place 

to  place).     L  16. 
Pascua,  j)af^s'  kwa,  s.  f.,  Easter.    L.  59. 
Paseante,  pah  sai-an'-iai.  s.  m.,  passerby, 

walker,  promenader.     (Pres.  part,  of  Pa- 
sear.)    L.  :58. 
Pascar,  jmh-sai-ar' ,  to  walk,  to  promenade. 

L.  M. 
Paseo,  pah-sai'-o,  ».  m.,  walk,  promenade. 

J..  51. 


Pasiva,  pah-sl'-va,  b.  f.,  the  passive  voice 

L.  50. 
Pasivo,  pah-cd'-vo,  adj.,  passive.    L.  63. 
Paso,  pah'-so,  s.  m.,  step,  pace.    L.  54. 
Patio,  pah'-tl-o,  s.  m.,  yard,  pit  (in  theatres). 

L.  46. 
Patronimico,  pah-trO-nl'-mi-ko,  adj.,  patro- 
nymic.   L.  49. 
Paz,  path,  s.  f.,  peace.    L.  43. 
Pecho,  pai'-cho,  s.  m.,  breast.— A  lo  hecho 

pecho,  what  is  done  cannot  be  he'ped.    L. 

65. 
Pechuga,  pai-choo'-ga,  s.  f.,  breast  of  fowl 

L.  58. 
Pedazo,  pai-dah'-tlw,  s.  m.,  piece,  morsel. 

bit.    L.  63. 
Pedir,  pai-deer',  to  ask,  to  demand,  to  ask 

iov.—A.pedir  dc  boca,  as  well  as  could  be 

desired.    L.  39. 
Pedro,  pai'-dro,  s.  m.j  Peter.    L.  19. 
Pegar,  pai-gar',  to  stick,  to  paste,  to  beat 

L.  63. 
Peinar,  pai-Z-nar',  to  comb.    L.  46. 
Peine,  pai-e'-nai,  s.  m.,  comb.    L.  46. 
Peligro,  pai-lS'-gro,  sr.  m.,  danger,  peril.    L. 

51. 
Pelo,  pai'-lo,  s.  m.,  hair.— A  pelo,  to  the 

purpose.    L.  33  and  44. 
Pelota,  pai-lO'-ta,  s.  f.,  ball  (for  playing). 

L.  54. 
Pena,  pai'-na,  s.  f.,  pain,  penalty.— A  duras 

pcnOr",  with  mnchdifiicult}-.    L.  59. 
Pensamiento,   pain-saJi-vi6-ain'-to,    s.    m., 

thought.    L.  48. 
Pensar, /?ai/?-sar',  to  think,  to  intend.     L. 

31. 
Ponultimo,   pai-noot' -ti-mo,   adj.,    penulti 

mate,  last  but  one.    L.  50. 
Penasco,  pain-yass'-ko,  s.  m.,  a  large  rock. 

L.  5(). 
Pcor,  pai-Ore',  adj.  and  adv.,  worse.     L.  20. 
Pepa,  pai'-pa,  s.  f.,  (contraction  of  Fean- 

ciscA,  Frances),  Fanny.    L.  44. 
Pepe.    (See  Pepito.)    L.  44. 
Pepito,  pai-pi'-to,    s.  m.   (contraction  of 

JcsE,  tfoseph),  Joe.     L.  44. 
Pequeilo,  pai-kain'-yo,  adj.,   Bmall,  llttl", 

youn^.    L.  7. 
Per,  jHiir,  Latin  prep,  used  in  Spanish  as  a 

prefix  only ;  as,  jxrtitrbar.    L.  50. 
Pera.  pai'-ra,  s.  f.,  pear.    L.  59. 
PcraJ,  pai-ral',  s.  m.,  pear-tree.    L.  59. 
Perder,  pair-dair',  to  lose.    L.  37. 
Perdonar,  pair-do-nar' ,  to  pardon.    L.  27. 
Perczoeo,  pai-rai-lho'-so,  adj.,  lazy,  sloth 

fUl.    L.  38. 
Perfeccionar.  pair-faik-thi-d-nar',   to  per- 
fect, to  improve.    L.  38. 
Perfecto,  patr-faik'-to,  nc\j.,  perfect.    L.  29. 
Perilla,  pai-reel'-ya,  s.  f..  small  pear.— Ve- 

nir  de  pertUa,  to  suit  exactly.    L.  64. 
Peri6dico,  pai-ri-O'-ili-ko,  s.  m.,  newspaper. 

L.  8. 
Permanecer,    pair-mah-nai-thair' ,    to    re- 
main, to  stop,  to  stay.     L.  45. 
Permanoncia,   pair-mah-nain'-th?-a,    b.    f., 

permanence,  duration,  stop.  stay.    L.  51. 
Permitir,  pair-mi-teer' ,  to  permit,  to  allow. 

L.  44. 
Pcro,  /xti'-ro,  conj.,  but.    L.  3. 
Perpendicular,    jxiir-pain-di-kochlar' ,   adj. 

perpendicular.    L.  51. 
Perro,  pair'-ro,  s.  m.,  dog.    L.  03. 


VOCABULARY. 


461 


Perseverancia,  pair-sai-vai-ran'-thl-a,  s.  f., 

perseverance.    L.  63. 
Persistir,  pair-seess-teer' ,  to  persist.    L.  50. 
Persona,  pair-so'-na,  s.  f.,  person.    L.  38. 
Personal,  pair-sd-nal\  adj.,  personal.     L. 

63. 
Pesa,  pai'-sa,  s.  t,  weight  (for  weighing). 
L.  55. 

Pesame,  pai'-sa/i-mal,  s.  m.,  condolence. 
Jj.  — . 

Pesar,  pai-mr\  to  weigh,  to  regret.— No  le 
pesa  de  haber  nocido,  he  has  an  excellent 
opinion  of  himself.    L.  31. 

Pesar,  s.  m.,  regret,  grief,  sorrow.— A  ^jesar 
de,  in  spite  ot,  notwithstanding.    L.  31. 

Pescado,  paiss-kah'-do,  s.  m.,  fish.    L.  7. 

Pescar,  pcUss-kar\  to  fish.    L.  63. 

Pesimo,  pai'-se-mo,  adj.,  worst,  very  bad. 
L.  21. 

Peso, /?a^'-so,  s.  m.,  weight,  heaviness,  dol- 
lar.   L.  14. 

Pianista,  pl-ah-neess' -ta,  s.  m,,  pianist.  L. 
15. 

Piano,  pe-ah'-no,  s.  m.,  piano.    L.  15. 

Picante,  pe-kan'-tai,  adj.,  piquant,  high- 
seasoned,  pungent.    L.  54. 

Picar,  pe-kar\  to  prick,  to  bite,  to  pique. 
L.  46. 

Picaresco,  pe-kah-raiss'-ko,  adj.,  roguish, 
L.-19. 

Picaro,  pe'-kah-ro,  adj.,  rogue,  rascal, 
scoundrel.     L.  32. 

Pico,  pe'-ko^  8.  m.,  beak,  bill.— Callarse  el 
pico,  to  hold  one's  tongue.    L.  61. 

Pie,  pS-ai\  s.  m.,  foot.— A  pie,  on  foot.— 
Nacer  de  pies,  to  be  born  to  good  luck. 
L.  39. 

Pierna,  pS-air'-na,  a.  f.,  leg.    L.  33. 

Picza,  pe-ai'-tha,  s.  f.,  piece.    L.  64. 

Pinar,  pe-nar\  s.  m.,  pme-^rove.    L.  49. 

Pino,  pe'-no,  s.  m.,  pine.    L,  40. 

Pintar,  peen-iar\  to  paint,  to  represent.  L. 
54. 

Pintor,  peen-tore\  s.  m.,  painter.    L.  31. 

Pintura,  peen-ioo'-ra,  s.  f.,  painting.    L.  31. 

Pipa,  pe'-pa,  s.  f.,  pipe.    L.  42. 

Pique,  pe'-kai,  s.  m.,  pique,  oflence.— Esta- 
bia  piqi/e  de  perderse,  he  was  on  the  brink 
of  ruin.    L.  62. 

Piropos  (Decir)  pS-ro'-pdce,  to  say  soft 
things  (to  the  ladies).    L.  58. 

Pisaverde,  pe-safi-vair'-dai,  s.  m.,  fop,  cox- 
comb.   L.  50. 

Piso,  pe'-so,  8.  m.,  floor,  story  (of  a  house). 
— Tercer  plso,  third  floor.    L.  53. 

Pistola,  peess-to' -la,  s.  f.,  pistol.    L.  44. 

Pistoletazo,  mess-io-lai-tah'-tho,  s.  m.,  pis- 
tol-shot.   L.  44. 

Placer,  plah-thair',  to  please.    L.  31. 

Placer,  s.  m.,  pleasure.    L.  31. 

Plata,  plah'-ta,  s.  f.,  silver.    L.  8. 

Plato,  plah'-to,  s,  m.,  plate,  dish  (of  viands). 
Li.  57. 

Plaza,  plah'  tha,  s.  f,  place,  situation, 
square,  market-place.— Pto^a  de  toros. 
Arena  (for  bull-fights).    L.  17  and  54. 

Plazo,  plah'-tho,  s.  m.,  term  (of  payment). 
L.  63. 

Plomo,  ptb'-mo,  8.  m.,  lead.    L.  63. 

Pluraa,  ploo-wa,  s.  f.,  pen,  feather.     L.  5. 

Plural,  ploo-rnl',  adj.,  plural.     L.  57. 

Plnscuamperfecto.  ptooce-ktvam-pair-faik'- 
to,  8.  m,,  pluperfect.    L.  43. 


Pobre,  pd'-t^rai,  adj.,  poor,  needy,  wretched. 

L.  13. 
Pobreza,  po-brai' -tha,  s.  f.,  poverty.    L  59 
Poco,  po'-ko,  adv.,  little ;  pi.,  few.— Poco  a 

poco,  gently,  softly.    L.  32. 
Poco,  8.  m.,  little.    L.  6. 
Poder,  po-dair',  to  be  able.— No  poder  mas, 

to  be  exhausted.    L.  32. 
Poder,  8.  m.,  power,  possession.    L.  35. 
Podrir,  po-dreer' ,  to  rot.    L.  41. 
Poesia,  pc-ai-se'-a,  s.  f.,  poesy,  poetry,    L. 

Poeta,  po-ai'-ta,  s.  m.,  poet.    L.  31. 
Poetastro,  po-ai-tass' -tro,  s.  m.,  poetaster. 

L.  44. 
Poetico,  po-ai'-il-ko,  adj.,  poetic,  poetical. 

L.  35. 
Polca,  pote'-ka,  s.  f.,  polka.    L.  23. 
Politica,  po-te'-tl-ka,  s.  f.,  politics ;  polite- 
ness.   L.  52. 
Politico,  po-le'-f^-ko,  adj.,  political;  polite. 

L.  52. 
Politico,  s.  m.,  man  of  politics.    L.  52. 
Polio,  pole'-yo,  s.  m.,  chicken.    L.  5. 
Polvo,  pole'-vo,  s.  m.,  powder,  dust.    L.  62. 
Polvora,  pole'-vo-ra,  s.  f.,  gunpowder,  h.  63. 
Ponderar,  pone-dai-rar' ,  to  exaggerate,  to 

cry  up.    L.  54. 
Poner,  po-nair',  to  put,  to  place,  to  lay,  to 
set  (as  the  s\m).—P(merse,  to  become,  to 
get.— Se  puso  serio,  he  became  serious. 
L.  41. 
Por,  pore,  prep.,  by,  for,  in  behalf  of,  in  fa- 
vor of,  about,  through.— Por  las  calles, 
through  the  streets.— Ir  por  pan,  to  go 
for  bread.— Por  si  acaso,  in  case,  if  by  any 
chance.    L.  19. 
Porcion,  pore-lhl-one' ,  s.  f.,  portion,  part, 

lot,  number,  quantity.    L.  63. 
Pormenor,  pore-mai-nore' ,  s.  m.  (generally 
used  in  the  plural).— Por»^moreA^  details, 
particulars.    L.  50. 
Porque,  pore'-kai,  conj.,  because.    L.  18. 
Porque,   pore-kai',  conj.,   why  ?   for  what 
reason  V- s.  m.,  reason  wherefore.    L.  18. 
Portarse,  pore-tar' -sai,  to  behave,  to  conduct 

one's  self.    L.  55. 
Portugal,  pdre-too-gal\  s.  m.,  Portugal.    L. 

60. 
Portugues,  pdre-too-ghaiss' ^.  m.  and  adj., 
Portuguese  (language),  Portuguese  (na- 
tive of  Portugal).    L.  34. 
Poseer,  po-sai-atr',  to  possess.    L,  34. 
Posesivo,  po-sai-sl'-vo,  adj.,  possessive.    L. 

63. 
Posible,  po-se'-blai,  adj.,  possible.    L.  31. 
Positivo,  po-fMe'-vo,  adj.,  positive.    L.  48. 
Posponer,    poce-po-nazr' ,   to   postpone,  to 

place  after.    L.  63. 
Potencial,   po-iain-ihe-at' ,   adj.,   potential. 

L.  63. 
Practica,  prak'-tl-la,  s.  f.,  practice.    L.  23. 
Practicante,  »ra^-<e-A:an'-to,  e.  m.,  practi- 
tioner.    (Present  part,  of  Pkacticak.) 
L.  38. 
Practicar,  prak-tl-kar' ,  to  practise.    L.  23. 
Practico,  prak'4l-ko,  adj.,  practical.    L.  65. 
Pre,  prai,  Latin  prep,  used  in  Spanish  as  a 

prefix  only.    L.  50. 
Preceder,  prai-thai-dair' ,  to  precede,  to  go 

before.     L.  63. 
Precepto,  prai-thaip' -to,  s.  m.,  precept.    L. 
53. 


462 


VOCABULARY. 


Precio,  prai'-thl-dy  s.  m.,  price,  prize.  L.  50. 

Prcciso,  prai-tkl' -so,  adj.,  nccer<sary,  oblig- 
atory, precise.— Es  preclso  que  la  leau, 
they  must  read  it.     L.  G3. 

Preferir,  prai-fai-reer\  to  prefer.    L.  38. 

Prei^unta,  pral-goon' -ta,  e.  f.,  question,  in- 
quiry.   L.  33. 

Preguntar,  prai-goon-tar\  to  ask  questions, 
to  question.     L.  33. 

Preliminar,  prai-ld-m^-nar' ,  adj.,  prelimi- 
nary.   L.  63. 

Premiar,  prai-tnl-ar',  to  reward.     L.  b2. 

Premio,  prai'-7tiS-(},  a.  m.,  premium,  reward, 
prize.     L.  59. 

Prenda,  prain'-da,  s.  f.,  pledj^e,  jewel ;  pi., 
endowments,  talents,  parts.     L.  41,  03. 

Prender,  prain-(lair\  to  take,  to  take  up,  to 
arrest.    L.  39. 

Preposicion,  prai-pd-sS-tM-dne\  preposi- 
tion.   L.  43. 

Presencia,  prai-sain' -tM-a,  s.  f.,  presence. — 
Presencia  de  animo,  presence  of  mind. 
L.  (53. 

Prcsentar,  prai-sain-tar' ,  to  present,  to  in- 
troduce, to  offer.     L.  39. 

Presente,  prai-min'taU  adj.,  present.— Te- 
ner  pre>iente,  to  bear  in  raind.    L.  43, 

Presidente,  prai-sS-dain'-tai,  s.  m.,  presi- 
dent.   L.  4G. 

Presidio,  prai-s?'-dS-d,  s.  m.,  state  prison. 
L.  59. 

rrc-«idir,  prai-s^-deer\  to  preside.     L.  54. 

Preso,  prai'-sOy  irre^.  past  part,  (of  Pren- 
der), taken.    L.  52. 

Prestar,  pram-tar\  to  lend.    L.  59. 

Presto,  praiss'-to,  adj.,  quick,  ready, 
prompt.    L.  20, 

Presto,  adv.,  soon,  quickly.    L.  20. 

Pretender,  prai-tam-dair',  to  pretend,  to 
lay  claim  to,  to  claim,  to  solicit,    L.  48. 

Pretension,  prai-fain-s^-dne',  s.  f,  preten- 
sion, claim,  thins?  solicited.     L.  57. 

Prcterito,  lyrai-tai' -rl-to,  adj.,  preterit,    L. 

m. 

Pretesto,  prai-talss'-to,  s.  m.,  pretext.  L. 
58. 

Prevenir,  prai-vai-neer\  to  prevent,  to  fore- 
see, to  warn,  to  prepare.    L.  65. 

Prever,  prai-vai>-\  to  foresee.    L.  39. 

Prlmavera,  pri-mah-vai'-ra,  b.  f.,  Spring. 

Primcro,  pr^-mai'-ro.  adj.,  first.- De  buenas 

dprimef'os,  all  at  once,  rashly.— adv.,  first, 

rather,  sooner.    L.  15. 
Primo,  prd'-mo,  ».  m.,  cousin.    L.  13. 
Principal,    preen-tM-pal\    adj.,    principal, 

cliief.    L.  36. 
Principiante,  preen-(M-p^-an'-fai,  s.  m.  and 

pres.  part,  (of  Principiar),  beginner.    L. 

;J8. 
Principiar,  preen-tM-phar\   to   begin,  to 

commence.     L.  23. 
Principio,  preen-fhF-pS-o,  s.  m.,  be':!:inning, 

commencement,  principle.     L.  63. 
Prisa,  pr?'-sa,  a.  f.  haste,   hurry.— Tener 

prh'a,  to  ba  in  a  hurry.     L.  30. 
Prisionero,  pri-ol-d-tuii'-ro,  s.  m.,  prisoner. 

L.  48. 
Prisma,  preefn'-ma,  p.  m.,  prism.    li.  54. 
Probable,  prd-bah' -blaL  adj.,  probable.    L. 

29. 
Probar,  prd-bar\  to  try,  to  prove,  to  taste. 

—El  clima  de  es>te  palsle  prueba  blen,  the 


climate  of  this  country  agrees  well  with 
him.    L.  35. 

Vrocti^'ion,  irrd-thai-sl-dne' ,  8.  f.,  processioa 
L.  46. 

Procurar,  pro-koo-rar\  to  procure,  to  en- 
deavor, to  try.    L.  51. 

Produccion,  prb-'iook-Uil-bn£\  s.  f.,  produc- 
tion,   L.  4U. 

Prcjducir,  pro-doo-theer',  to  produce.    L.  40, 

Proeza,  prb-ai' -Ika,  s.  f,  prowess.    L.  54. 

Profccia,  prb-fai-tkl' -a^  b.  f,,  prophecy,  L. 
45. 

Profesion,  pro-fai-8l-dne\  s,  f. ,  profession. 
L.  38. 

Profesor,  pro-fai-8dre\  s,  m,,  professor,  JL 
18. 

Prohibir,  prb-l-beer\  to  prohibit.    L.  53. 

Pr6jimo,  prb'-hl-mo^  s,  m.,  neighbor  (fellow- 
creature).    L.  28. 

Promesa,  prb-mai'-sa,  b,  f.,  promise.    L.  57. 

Prometer,  pr5-mai-tair\  to  promise.    L.  25. 

Pronombre,  prb-nJbme' -braU  s,  m,,  pronoun. 
L.  43. 

Pronominal,  pr5-nd-Tru--nal\  adj.,  pronomi- 
nal,   L.  61. 

Prontitud,  prbne-tMooth\  s.  f.,  promptness, 
promptitude,  quickness.    L.  4.3. 

Pronto,  j!7r5M^'-to,adj.,  prompt,  quick,  ready; 
—adj.,  soon,  promptly,  quickly.     L.  20. 

Pronunciacion,  prb-noon-thl-ah-lM-bm\  b. 
f.,  pronunciation.    L.  63. 

Pronunciar,  prb-ivoon-th^-ar' .  to  pronounce, 
L.  15. 

Propiedad,  prd-pi-ai-dath\  s.  f.,  propriety, 
property.     L.  6;3. 

Propio,  pro'-pi-b,  adj.,  proper,  own,  self- 
same, same.    L.  49. 

Proponer,  prd-pb-nair\  to  propose,    L.  51, 

Prosa,  pro  -sa,  s.  f.,  prose.    L.  31. 

Proporcionar,  pro-pdre-thl-b-nur\  to  pro- 
portion, to  procure,  to  offer.    L.  48. 

Protcstante,  pro-taiss-tan'-tai,  s.  m.,  Prot- 
estant.   L.  49. 

Protestantismo,  prb-taiss-tan-teess'-mo,  s. 
m.,  Protestantism.    L.  49. 

Provecho,  prb-vai'-cho,  s.  m.,  profit,  benefit. 
L.W, 

Proveer,  pr5-vai-air'  to  provide.    L.  34. 

Proverbio,  prb-vair  -bi-d.  s.  m.,  proverb. 
L.  6.5. 

Provincia,  prd-veen'-tM-a,  s.  f.,  province. 
L.  19. 

Provisto,  prb-veess'-to,  past  part,  (of  Pro- 
veer),  provided.    L.  52. 

Pr6ximo,  prbke' -si-mo,  adj.,  proximo,  next, 
nearest.- El  mhado  proximo,  next  Satur- 
day.   L.  2.3. 

Pnidencia,  proo-dain'-tfii-a,  s.  f.,  prudence. 
L.  *1. 

Pnidente,  proo-dain'-tal,  adj.,  prudent.  L. 
20. 

Prueba,  proo-ai'-ba,  s,  f..  proof,    L.  46. 

Prnsln.  proo'-s?-a,  s.  f ,  Prussia.    L.  46. 

Pn))licar,  poo-ftti-kar' ,  to  publish.    L.  48. 

Pfiblico,  poo'-bti-ko,  s.  m.  and  adj.,  publi 
L.  51. 

Pueblo,  pwni'-bh,  s.  m.,  town,  people,  L. :. 

Piierta.  pwair'-ta.  s.  f .  door.     L.  27. 

Puos.  piraisn,  coni.,  then,  therefore,  in  ' 
much  as,  since,  because :— inter.,  well  :— 
Pwft*,  qud  ?  well,  what  of  it  ?    L.  41. 

Pucsto  que.  ptraif^'-fo.  adv.,  since,  inas- 
much as,  supposing  that.    L.  87. 


VOCABULARY. 


463 


Pulgada,  pool-gah'-da,  s.  f.  inch.    L.  63. 

Puntapie,  pooii-tah-pe,-ai\  s.  m.,  kick.    L.  50. 

Puuta,  poon'-ta,  poiut,  stitch.    L.  50. 

Puntilla,  poan-teel' -ya^  s.  f.,  small  point.— 
Do  puntiUas,  on  tiptoe.    L.  44. 

Punio,  poon'-to^  s.  m.,  point  (of  time  or 
space),  spot,  place.— Al  punto,  at  once. 
L.  51. 

Punluacion,  poon-too-ah-the-dne\  s.  f.,  punc- 
tuation.   L.  63. 

Puutual,  poon-too-aV ^  adj.,  punctual,  exact, 
accurate.    L.  63. 

Puntualidad,  poon-too-ah-U-dath\  s.  f., 
punctuality.    L.  63. 

Purista,  poo-reess' -ta^  s.  m.,  purist.    L.  36. 


a. 

Que,  Jcai,  rel.  pron.,  that,  which,  who.— 
;Que  bueno !  how  ^ood  \—jQue  desgracia ! 
what  a  misfortune!— §w<s  venga,  let  him 
come.— s  Que  se  dice  de  bueno  ?  what  is 
the  good  news  ? — Tarde  grue  temprano, 
sooner  or  later.    L.  3,  16,  17. 

Quebrar,  kai-brar\  to  break,  to  smash.    L. 

;m. 

Quedar,  Tcai-dar',  to  stay,  to  stop,  to  re- 
main, to  become.— El  campo  quedo  por 
los  Americanos,  the  Americans  were  vic- 
torious.   L.  38. 

Quejarse,  Mi-har'-sai,  to  moan,  to  com- 
plain.   L.  48. 

Quemar.  kai-mar\  to  bum.    L.  32. 

Querer,  kai-rair\  to  wish,  to  desire,  to  will, 
to  love,  to  like,  to  be  willing.    L.  13. 

Querido,  kai-re'-do,  adj.,  dear.    (Past  part. 

of  QUEBER.)     L.  13. 

Queso,  kai'-so,  s,  m.,  cheese.    L.  7. 

Quien,  ke-ain',  rel.  pron.,  who,  whom.  L. 
17. 

Quienquiera,  M-ain-ke-ai'-ra,  indef.  pron., 
whosoever.    L.  50. 

Quieto,  kl-ai'-to.  adj.,  quiet,  still,  at  rest. 
L.  62.  . 

Quijada,  kl-7iah'-da,  s.  f,  jaw.    L.  50. 

Quince,  keen'-thai^  num.  adj.,  fifteen.   L.  14, 

Quinientos,  kl-ne-ain' -toce,  adj.,  five  hun- 
dred.   L.  14. 

Quinto,  keen' -to,  ord.  adj.  and  s.  m.,  fifth. 
L.  50. 

Qui  tar,  k^-tar\  to  remove,  to  take  away, 
ofl",  out ;  to  prevent.     L.  53. 

Quitasol,  ki-tah-sole\  s.  m.,  parasol.    L.  50. 

Quiza,  quizas,  ke-thah\  -thass\  adv.,  per- 
haps.   L.  34. 

R. 

Radical,  rah-de-kal\  adj.,  radical.    L.  63. 

Raiz,  rah-eeth\  s.  f.,  root.    L.  63. 

Rama,  rah' -ma,  s.  f.,  branch  (of  trees,  fami- 
lies, &c.)    L.  61. 

Ramillete,  rah-med-yai' -tai,  s.  m.,  bouquet. 
L.  27. 

Ramo,  rah'-mo,  e.  m.,  branch,  department. 
L.  .56. 

Rana,  rah'-na,  s.  f.,  frog.— No  ser  rana,  to 
be  wide  awake,  expert.    L.  65. 

Kapaza,  rah-pah' -tha,  s.  f.,  little  girl.— jMi- 
ren  la  rapazuda  !  the  little  vixen !    L.  61. 

Baro,  rah'-ro,  adj.,  rare,  odd,  curious, 
scarce.    L.  63. 


Rasgar,  rass-gar',  to  tear,  to  scratch.  L.  64. 

Rasgo,  rass'-go,  s.  m.,  trait,  stroke,  in- 
stance.   L.  63. 

Rato,  rah'-to,  s.  m.,  while,  moment.— A  ra- 
tos,  from  time  to  time.    L.  44. 

Raton,  rah-tone',  s.  m.,  mouse.    L.  65. 

llaya,  rah'-ya,  s.  f.,  stroke,  dasli.— Tener  a 
raya,  to  keep  within  bounds.    L.  64. 

Rayo,  rah'-yo,  s.  m.,  ray,  thunderbolt.— 
Echar  rayos  y  centellas,  to  foam  with 
rage.    L.  62  and  63. 

Razon,  rah-thone',  s.  f,  reason,  right.-^ 
Tener  razon,  to  be  right.    L.  25. 

Razonar,  rah-tho-nar' ,  to  reason.    L.  63. 

Re,  rai,  always  used  as  a  prefix.    L.  50. 

Real,  rai-al',  adj.,  real,  royal;— s.m.,  real 
(Spanish  coin).    L.  47  and  48. 

Realidad,  rai-ah-le-dath' ,  s.  f.,  reality.  L. 
48. 

Rebajar,  rai-bah-har' ,  to  reduce,  to  abate, 
to  lower  (prices,  &c.).     L.  64. 

Rebanada,  rai-bah-nah'-da,  s.  f.,  slice  (of 
bread,  &c.).    L.  63. 

Rebanar,  rai-bali-nar' ,  to  slice.    L.  64. 

Rebafio,  rai-ban'-yo,  s.  m.,  flock  of  sheep. 
L.  40. 

Eecado,  rai-kah'-do,  s.  m.,  message,  errand. 
L.  63. 

Recepcion,  rai-thaip-the-one' ,  s.  f.,  recep- 
tion.   L.  54. 

Recibimiento,  rai-thl-bl-m^-ain' -to,  s,  m., 
act  of  receiving,  reception.    L.  55. 

Recibir,  rai-tlie-6eer' ,  to  receive.    L.  8. 

B,ec\\>o,rai-the'-bo,  s.  m.,  receipt.    L.  63. 

Reciproco,  rai-thl' -prb-ko,  adj.,  reciprocal. 
L.  63. 

Recitar,  rai-ihe-tar' ,  to  recite.    L.  64. 

Recomendacion,  rai-ko -main-dah-tlil-dne' , 
s.  f.,  recommendation.    L.  60. 

Recomendar,  rai-k^-main-dar' ,  to  recom- 
mend.   L.  64. 

Reconocer,  rai-ko-no-thair' ,  to  recognize, 
to  acknowledge.    L.  39. 

Recordar,  rai-kore-dar' ,  to  remember,  to 
remind.    L.  35. 

Recto,  raik'-to,  adj.,  right.- En  angulos 
rectos,  at  right  angles.    X.  55. 

Rector,  raik-tore',  s.  m.,  rector,  director. 
L.  63. 

Recurrir,  rai-koor-reer' ,  to  recur,  to  have  re- 
course.   L.  50. 

Recurso,  rai-koor'-so,  s.  m.,  recourse,  re- 
source.   L.  40. 

Reducir,  rai-doo-theer' ,  to  reduce.    L.  54. 

Referir,  rai-fai-reer',  to  refer,  to  relate.  L. 
&4. 

Reflexivo,  rai-flaik-sl'-vo,  adj.,  reflective. 
L.  63. 

Reflexionar,  rai-flaik-se-o-nar' ,  to  reflect. 
L.  48. 

Reforma,  rai-fore'-ma,  s.  f.,  reform,  refor- 
mation.   L.  63. 

Reformar,  rai-f ore-mar' ,  to  reform,  to  form 
anew,  to  discharge  (from  an  employment 
or  ofl^ce).    L.  48. 

Refran,  rai-Jran',  s.  m,,  refrain,  proverb. 
L.  63  and  65. 

Resralar,  rai-gah-lar' ,  to  regale,  to  present 
with,  to  make  a  present  of.    L.  63. 

Recralo,  rai-gah'-lo,  s.  m.,  gift,  present.  L. 
63, 

Regimen,  ro,i' -M-main,  s.  m.,  regimen,  gov- 
ernment, object  (of  verbs).    L.  57. 


464 


VOCABULARY. 


Rcgimiento,  raiM-mZ-ain'-to,  s.  m.,  regi- 
meut.    L.  19. 

Regir,  rai-heer\  to  govern.    L.  57. 

Regla,  raig'-la,  s.  f.,  rule,  ruler.    L.  63. 

Rei,'ular,  rai-goo-lar' ,  adj.,  re^^ular,  tolera- 
ble, moderate,  ordinary ;— adv.,  tolerably, 
middling ;— v.,  to  regulate.  L.  27,  67,  and 
01. 

Regularidad,  rai-goo-lah-rl-dath\  b.  f.,  regu- 
larity.   L.  55. 

Regularizar,  rai-goo-lah-rl-thar\  to  regu- 
late.   L.  48. 

Rehusar,  rai-oo-sar'.  to  refuse.    L.  61. 

Reina,  rai-S'-na,  e.  f.,  queen.    L.  63. 

Reinante,  rai-l-nan'-tai^  pres.  part.,  reign- 
ing.   L.  38. 

Reinar,  rai-l-nar\  to  reign.    L.  15. 

Reino,  rai-l'-no,  s.  m.,  kingdom.    L.  45. 

Reir,  rcu-eer\  to  laugh.    L.  41. 

Relacion,  rai-lah-the-om' ,  s.  f.,  relation,  ac- 
count, recital.    L.  43. 

Relampago,  rai-lam' -pah-go,  e.  m.,  flasli  of 
lightning.    L.  63. 

Relanipaguear,  rai-lam-pah-gai-ar\  to 
lighten,    L.  30. 

Rclalar,  rai-lah-tar' ,  to  relate.    L.  45. 

Religion,  rai-lS-M-one',  s.  f.,  religion.  L. 
35. 

Religioso,  rai-H-hl-o'-so,  adj.,  religious.  L. 
35. 

Reloj,  rai-lo\  s.  m.,  watch,  clock.    L.  28. 

Relojcro,  rai-lo-hai'-ro,  b.  m.,  watchmaker. 
L.  63. 

Relucir,  rai-loo-theer' ,  to  sparkle,  to  glitter. 
—No  es  oro  todo  lo  que  reluce,  allis  not 
gold  that  glitters.    L  65. 

Remcdiar,  rai-mai-d^-ar\  to  remedy.  L.  64. 

Remedio,  rai-mai'-dS-o,  s.  m.,  remedy.  L. 
53. 

Remendar,  rai-main-dar\  to  repair,  to 
mend.    L.  64. 

Remunerar,  rai-moo-nai-rar\  to  remuner- 
ate.   L.  52. 

Rendir,  rain-deer',  to  render,  to  subdue.— 
Rendivfie,  to  surrender.    L.  39. 

ReRir,  rain-yeer\  to  quarrel,  to  dispute,  to 
scold.    L.  39. 

Reo,  rai'-o,  s.  ra.,  culprit,  offender.    L.  53. 

Repartir,  rai-par-teer,  to  divide.    L.  58. 

Rcpasar,  rai-pah-sar\  to  repass,  to  reex- 
amine, to  glance  over  again.    L.  64. 

Repaso,  rai-pah'-so,  s.  m.,  revision,  act  of 
going  over  anew.    L.  61. 

Repente,  rai-nain'-tai.—'De  repenie,  sudden- 
ly, on  a  sudden.    L.  5"!. 

Repeticion,  rai-pai-te-thl-dne' y  b.  f.,  repeti- 
tion,   L.  63. 

Repetir,  rai-jmi-teer',  to  repeat.    L.  39. 

Reposar,  rai-pO-8ar\  to  repose,  to  rest.  L. 
39. 

Rcposo,  rai-pd'-80,  e.  m,,  repose,  rest.  L. 
63. 

Rcprendcr,  rai-prain-dair\  to  reprehend, 
reprimand.    L.  42. 

Roprescntar,  rai-jrrai-min-tar' ,  to  repre- 
sent, to  make  appear ;  to  perform  (a  part), 
to  enact.    L.  64. 

Rcprobar,  rai-prb-bar\  to  reprove,  to  up- 
braid.   L.  60. 

Ropfiblica,  rai-poo'-Mi-ka,  b.  f.,  republic. 
L.  35.  I 

Repiitacion,  ra?.-])oo-tah-thS-One\  8.  f.,  repa 
tation.    L.  24. 


Resarcir,  rai-sar-t7ieei'\  to  indemnify,  to 
compensate,  to  make  up  for.    L.  59. 

Resentirse,  rai-saiii-teer' -mi,  to  feel  the 
effects  (of),  to  resent.     L.  59. 

Reafriado,  raU>i-frl-ah' -do,  s.  m.,  cold  (dis- 
ease caused  by  cold).     L.  03. 

Resfriarse,  rains-frl-ar' -sai.  to  catch  cold. 
L.  63. 

Residente,    rai-Hl-dain' -tai,  adj.   and   papt 

Eart.  (of  Residlb),  resident,  residing. 
I.  38. 

Residir,  raUl-deer\  to  reside.    L.  9. 

Resistir^  rai-seess-teer' ,  to  resist.    L.  51. 

Resolucion,  rai-sd-loo-thl-dne' ,  b.  f.,  resola- 
tion.    L.  63. 

Resolver,  rai-sole-vair',  to  solve,  to  resolve. 
L.  64. 

Respecta,  raiss-paik'-ta. — En  lo  que  respecta, 
with  respect  to.    L.  51. 

Respetable,  raiss-pai-iah'-blai,  adj.,  re- 
spectable.   L.  39. 

Respetar,  raiss-pai-tar\  to  respect.    L.  36. 

Respeto,  raies-pai'-to,  b.  m.,  respect,  regard. 
L.  56. 

Responder,  raiss-pone-dair' ,  to  respond,  to 
answer.    L.  33. 

Respondon,  raiss-pdne-done',  adj.,  always 
ready  to  reply.    L.  33. 

Respuesta,  raiss-pivaiss'-ta,  b.  f.,  response, 
reply,  answer.    L.  30. 

Restante,  raiss-tan' -tai,  b.  m.,  and  pres. 
part,  (of  Restar),  remainder,  rest;  re- 
maining.   L.  46. 

Resultar,  rai-sool-iar\  to  result,  to  turn  out, 
to  occur.    L.  43. 

Retirar,  rai-tl-rar',  to  retire,  to  withdraw, 
to  retreat.    L.  63. 

Retrato,  rai-trah'-to,  B.  m.,  portrait,  like- 
ness.   L.  17. 

Reumatismo,  rai-oo-mah-teess'-mo,  e.  m., 
rheumatism.    L.  63. 

Reunir,  rai-oo-neer' ,  to  reunite,  to  assem- 
ble.   L.  52. 

Reves,  rai-vaiss',  b.  m.,  back  part,  wrong 
side.- Al  reves,  on  the  contrary;  upside 
down.    L.  63. 

Revoltoso,  rai-vdk-td'so,  ac^j.,  tiubulent, 
rebellious.    L.  44. 

Rey,  rai'-d,  s.  m.,  king.    L.  15. 

Reyezuelo,  ral-mi-thwai'-lo,  s.  m.  (dim.  of 
Key),  pettv  kin";.    L.  44. 

Ricacho,  re-mh'-cho,  adj.,  very  rich.    L.  49. 

Rico,  r^'-ko,  adj..  rich.    L.  13. 

Ridiculez,  rl-dl-koo-laith\  b.  f,  ridicule. 
L.  45. 

Ridiculizar,  rl-di-koo-H-thar',  to  ridicule. 
L.  48. 

Ridiculo,  rl-dl'-koo-lo,  adj.  and  b.  m.,  ridicu- 
lous, reticule  (sort  of  lady's  bas^kct).   L.  5. 

Rigodon,  rl-gd-ddne\  b.  m.,  rigadoon,  coun- 
try dance.    L.  23. 

Rincon,  reen-kSne',  s.  m.,  comer.    L.  61. 

Rio,  r2'-5,  s.  m..  river.    L.  40. 

Riqueza,  rl-kai'-tfia,  s.  f.,  riches.    I:.  48. 

Rlsa.  ri'-sa,  s.  f..  laugh,  laughter.    L.  48. 

Rivalizar,  ri-mh-ti-lMr',  to  rival,  to  ^ie 
with.    L.  51. 

Robar.  rd-bar\  to  rob,  to  steal.    L.  4i. 

Rodar,  rd-dar',  to  roll.    L.  54. 

Rodear.  ro-dai-nr\  to  surround,  to  go  round, 
to  revolve.    L.  64. 

Rodoado,  rd-dai-ah'-do,  adj.  and  past  part, 
(of  RoDEAR),  surrounded.    L.  58. 


VOCABULARY, 


465 


Rodilla,  ro-ded'-ya,  s.  f.,  knee.— De  roddlas, 
on  one's  knees.    L.  59.  . 

Rodriguez,  ro-drl-gaith' ,  8.  m.,  Rodriguez. 
L  49 

Rogar,'?o-f7«^',  to  pray,  to  beg  of.    L.  35. 

Rojo,  ro'-luo,  adj.,  red.    L.  54. 

Romano,  ro-7tiati'-m.  adj.,  Roman     L.  54. 

Romper,  rome-vair\  to  break,  to  tear.- 
Romper  el  silencio,  to  break  the  silence. 

Ropa,'/5'-iJa,  s.  f.,  clothes,  wearing  apparel. 
L.  28. 

Rosa,  rb'-sa,  s.  f.,  rose.    L.  63. 

Roto,  7-5'-i!o,  irr.  past  part,  (of  Rompeb), 
broken.    L.  53. 

Rubio,  roo'-hl-o,  adj.,  fair  (of  the  complex- 
ion), ruddy.    L.  63. 

Ruido,  roo-e'-do^  s.  m.,  noise.    L.  46. 

Rum,  roo-een\  adj.,  mean,  churlish.     L.  63. 

Ruindad,  roo-een-dath\  s.  f.,  meanness, 
churlishness.    L.  48. 

Ruisenor,  roo-l-saln-yore\  s.  m,,  nightin- 
gale.   L.  63. 

R'.imor,  roo-more',  s.  m.,  rumor.    L.  54. 

Rutina,  roo-tl'-na,  s.  f.,  routine.    L.  63. 


S. 

Sabado,  sah'-bah-do,  s.  m.,  Saturday.    L.  9. 
Saber,  sak-dair',  to  know,  to  have  knowl- 
edge of,  to  hear  from ;   to  savor,  to  taste ; 
—8.  m.,  learning,  knowledge.    L.  42  and 
21. 
Sabio,  sah'-bl-o,  adj.,  wise,  sage,  learned. 

L.  21. 
Sabor,  sah-bore',  s.  m.,  savor,  taste.— A  su 

saoor,  at  his  pleasure,  taste.  L.  62  and  66. 
Sacacorchos,    sah-kah-kore'-choce,    s.    m., 

corkscrew.    L.  64. 
Sacamuelas,    sah-kah-mwai' -lass^     s.    m., 

tooth-drawer,  dentist.    L.  50. 
Sacar,  sah-kar',  to  take  or  draw  out,  to  pull 

out.    L.  50  and  66. 
Saco,  mh'-ko,  s.  m.,  sack,  bag.    L.  61. 
Sacudir,  sah-koo-deer\  to  shake  off,  to  shake. 

L.  51. 
Sal,  s.  f.,  salt,  wit.    L.  .5.5. 
Saldo,  sal' -do,  e.  m.,  balance  (of  accounts, 

&c.).    L.  64. 
Salida,  sah-ld'-da,  s.  f.,  going  out,  departure, 

start.    L.  63. 
Saliente,  sah-le-ain'-tai,  adj.  and  pres.  part. 

(of  Salir),  projecting,  salient.    L.  38. 
Salir,  sah-leer',  to  go  or  come  out,  to  set 

out,  to  leave,  to  start,  to  go  out,  to  end  or 

finish,  to  rise  (said  of  the  sun,  &c.) :  to 

turn  out,  to  turn  w(i.—Sali6  a  su  padre, 

he  resembled  his  father.    L.  20. 
Salon,  sah-loiie\  s.  m.,  saloon,  large  hall.  L. 

58. 
Saltar,  sal-tar\  to  jump,  to  leap,  to  bound, 

to  spring.    L.  58. 
Salto,  $al'-(o,  s.  m.,  leap,  jump,   bound, 

spring.    L.  59. 
Salud,  sah-looth'  s.  f.,  health.— A  '[^salud  de 

las  seiioras,   to  the   good  health  of  the 

ladies.    L.  25. 
Saludar,  sah-loo-dar\  to  salute.    L.  64. 
Sanchez,  san' -chaith,  s.  m.,  Spanish  family 

name,  signifying  son  of  Sancho.    L,  49. 
Sansrc,  san'-f/rai,  s.  f.,  blood.    L.  64. 
SantiScar,  sah-td-jf?-kar\  to  sanctify.  L.  45. 

20* 


Santo,  san'-to,  adj.,  holy,  saintly.— /Santo  y 

bueno,  well  ana  good.    L.  64. 
Sastre,  sass'-trai,  a.  m.,  tailor.    L.  11. 
feastreria,  sa^s-Li ai-re' -a,  s.  1".,  tailor's  shop. 

Satirico,  sah-ie' -rl-ko,  adj.,  satirical.    L.  85. 

Satisfacer,  sah-teess-jati-UMtr',  to  saiisly. 
L.  42. 

Satisiecho,  sah-teess-fai' -clw,  adj.  and  past 
part,  (of  bATisFACEB),  satisued.  L.  4-i 
and  52.  „  .  ^ 

Sayo,  sah'-yo,  s.  m.,  sort  of  loose  coat  or 
jacket.    L.  65. 

Sazonar,  sah-iho-nar\  to  season.    L.  62. 

Se  saL  pers.  pron.  (instead  of  Le,  les,  to 
him  to  her,  to  them).  L.  26.— Pron.  (used 
to  form  the  passive  voice).  L.  32.— Ke- 
flective  pron.  L.  33.-lmper8.  pron.,  we, 
they  pe»Pl«'  Ac-'Se  dice,  they  say.->I^ 
cree '  it  is  believed.    L.  36. 

Se  prep.,  used  as  a  prefix  m  composition. 
L.  50.  "' 

Secreto,  mi-krai'-to,  s.  m.,  secret,  secrecy. 

Sed"  saith,  s.  f.,  thirst.-Tener  sed,  to  be 
thirsty.    L.  25. 

Seda.  sai'-da,  s.  f.,  silk.    L.  5. 

Seguir,  sai-gheer\  to  follow;  to  continue. 
L.  39. 

Segun,  sai-goon\  prep.,  accordinc:  to.— 513- 
gun  y  como,  just  as.    L.  40  and  66. 

Segundo,  sai-goon'-do,  ord.  adj.  and  s.  m., 
second.    L.  15  and  23. 

Seguro,  mi-goo' -ro.  adi.,  sure,  secure.  L.  43. 

Seis,  sai'-eess,  num.  adj.,  six.    L.  14. 

Seiscientos,  sai-eests-the-ain'-toce,  num.  adj., 
six  hundred.    L.  14. 

Semana,  sai-mah'-na.  s.  f ,  week.    L.  8. 

Semblante,  saim-Uan' -tat  s.  m-.  counte- 
nance, face,  aspect,  appearance,  look.    L. 

Sentar,  min-lar\  to  set  down,  to  enter  (in 
a  book) ;  to  fit,  to  become.    L.  34. 

Sentencia,  sain-tain'-tM-a,  s.  f.,  sentence, 
phrase.    L.  43. 

Sentido,  sain-t^'-do,  s.  m.,  sense.    L.  65. 

Sentir,  sain-teer',  to  feel;  to  be  sorry  for. 
L.  38. 

Sefior.  sain-yore',  s.  m..  Lord,  sir,  Mr.— 
Muy  senor  mio,  my  dear  sir.    L.  1. 

Senora,  sain-yo'-ra,  s.  f.,  lady,  madam.,  Mrs. 
L.  2. 

Seiiorita,  sain-yd-rd'-fa,  s.  f.,  young  lady, 
miss.    L.  2. 

Senorito,  sain-j/o-r^'-fo,  s.  m.,  young  gentle- 
man, sir  (used  generally  by  servants), 
Mr.    L.  2. 

Septimo,  saip'-tS-mo,  ord.  adj.,  seventh.  L. 
15. 

Ser,  sair,  to  be,  to  exist.  (Not  to  be  con- 
founded with  EsTAR,  which  see.)  L.  11 
and  22. 

Ser,  s.  m.,  bdnpi-,  existence.    L.  ,54. 

Servidor.  sair-i:?-dbre' ,  s.  m.,  servant.— >Si?r- 
vidor  de  V.,  your  servant.    L.  P^. 

Servir,  sair-veer'.  to  serve,  to  oblige,  to  do 
a  ^Qr\\ce.—Serrirse.  to  be  good  enough, 
kind  enough,  to  please.— 5f?T^<"'  V.  to- 
mar  asiento,  please  to  take  a  ^eQ,t.—Ser' 
virf^e  de,  to  use.    L.  39. 

Sepenta,  sai-frtin'-ta,  num.  adj..  sixty.  L.  14. 

Setenta,  sai-tain'-ta,  num.  adj.,  eeventr. 
L.  14. 


466 


VOCABULARY 


Setecientoe,  sai-tai-tM-ain'-tdce,  num.  adj., 
Bcveu  liuudred.    L.  14, 

Setiembre,  nai-le-aim'-Orai,  s.  m.,  Septem- 
ber.   L.  HA. 

Sexo,  sailc'-sOy  s.  m.,  sex.— El  bello  sexo,  the 
fair  sex.    L.  5». 

Sexto,  aaiks'-tOy  ord.  adj.  and  s.  m.,  sixth. 
L.  15. 

Si,  nee,  adv.,  yes.    L.  1. 

Si,  iiidet.  prun.,  self,  one's  self.— Habl6 
para  «{,  he  spoke  to  himtself.    L.  26. 

Si,  coiij.,  il;  OMt.—tii  no  viene,  hombre, 
but  he  is  not  comin<^,  my  dear  lellow.    L. 

Siempre,  si-aim' -prai^  adv.,  always. — Por 
sieinpre 'yjunuHy  lor  ever  and  ever.    L.  25. 

Siecita,  se-ui^n'-ta,  b.  1".,  Bieata,  afternoon 
nap.    L.  m. 

Siete,  sd-ai'-iai,  num.  adj.,  seven.    L.  14. 

Siglo,  seeg'-lo,  s.  m.,  century.    L.  52. 

Signiticado,  seeg-m-J'd-ka/i'-Uo,  s.  m.,  signi- 
lication,  meaning.    L.  49. 

Siguilicar,  seeg-ni-/S-kar'.  to  signify.  L.  64. 

Silaba,  si'-lah-ba,  s.  f.,  syllable.    L.  63. 

Silencio,  sS-lain'-thS-o,  s.  m.,  silence.   L.  65. 

Silencioso,  s?-/awi^/i2-i/'-so,  adj.,  silent.  L. 
04. 

Silla,  fteel'-ya,  s.  f.,  chair.    L.  14. 

Simpatizar,  s.ee7n-pah4S- thar\  to  sympa- 
thize.   L.  .51. 

Simple,  seem'-p?al,  adj.,  simple,  single; 
simple,  silly.    L.  43. 

Sin,  f:eer),  prep.,  without.— -Sin  embargo, 
notwithsfandinir,  howcver.—Sin  que  ni 
para  que,  without  any  cause  or  reason. 
L.  10. 

Sinceridad,  seen-thai-rl-dath' ,  s.  f.,  sinceri- 
ty.   L.  45. 

Siricero.  aeen-thai'-m.  adj..  sincere.    L.  40. 

Singular,  seev-noolar' .  adj..  singular.  L.  .57. 

Sine,  fl'-no.  conj.,  but:  if  not.— No  es  el. 
nino  su  hormano,  it  is  not  he,  but  his 
brother.    I..  3. 

Sin6nimo,  sl-nO' -nl-mo,  s.  m.,  synonyme. 
L.  65. 

Sinrazon,  aeenrdh-thdne'^  b.  f.,  wrong,  in- 
justice.   L.  .50. 

Siquiera,  sZ-kl-ai'-ra,  conj.,  even,  at  least. 
L.  40. 

Sitio.  «2'-/2-5,  s.  m.,  place,  pos^ition,  siege. 
L.  68. 

Situado,  si-too-ah'-do,  past.  part,  of  Situab. 
L.  20. 

P.!tnar,  f'i-tco-ar' ,  to  situate.    L.  64. 

So,  .»<5.  prep.,  under.— *Sl9  pretesto  de,  under 
pretext  of.    L.  41 . 

Sobrar,  sd-brar',  to  be  over  and  above,  to 
have  more  of  any  thing  than  one  needs. 
L.  64. 

Sobre.  nd'-hrai^  prep.,  upon,  above,  over, 
about.— Vino  unf/re  las  ocho,  he  came 
fibout  pi<rht  o'clock.    L.  41. 

Sobroescrito.  sfi-hrai-ais.<i-kre' -fo,  s.  m.,  sn- 
por«cription.  address  (of  a  letter).    L.  56. 

Sobrlna,  so-h)?'-va,  s.  f.,  niece.    L.  65. 

Sobrino.  fd-hrT'-rto.  s.  m.,  nephew.    L.  65. 

Socinlismo.  sr^-thP-ah-leess' -mo,  s.  m.,  social- 
ism.   L.  50.  I 

Socicdad,  nd-fhT^-ai-finth'^  s.  f.,  society.  Arm,  j 

partnorsbip  (commerciaH.     L.  32.  j 

Socio.  eO'-thl-o,  B.  m.,  partner,  companion,  i 

L.  62. 
SofS.  ed-fa\  8.  m.,  so(h.    L.  34.  ' 


Sol,  s<>le,  8.  m.,  sun.    L.  46. 

Solas  (A;,  so'-lass,  all  alone.    L.  64. 

Soldado,  HoLe-dak' -dOy  b.  m.,  soldier.    L.  52. 

Soledad,  so-lai-datk' ,  s,  f.,  solitude,  loneli- 
ness.   L.  63. 

Soiemne,  so-laim'-nai,  adj.,  eolenin;  thor- 
ough, downright.     L.  61. 

Soler,  6o-lair\  lo  be  accustomed  to,  to  be 
wont.    L.  41. 

Solicitar,  no-ll-thl-tar' ^  to  solicit.    L.  47. 

Soliloyuio,  bO-ll-io'-m-Oy  s.  m.,    soliloquy. 
L.  65. 

Solo,  hO'-Io^  adj.,  alone;— adv.,  only.    L.  25. 

Soitar,  sole-tar',  to  untie,  to  loose,  to  liber- 
ate, to  let  go,  to  let  free.    L.  64. 

Soltero,  soktai'-ro,  s.  m.,    bachelor,    un- 
married man.    L.  51. 

Sombra,  saim'-bra,    s.  f.,  shade,  shadow 
L.  58. 

Sombrero,  sdme-brai'-ro,  s.  m.,  hat.    L.  10. 

Son,  sOne,  s.  m.,  sound.— bin  ton  y  sin  son^ 
without  rhyme  or  reason.    L.  47. 

Sonar,  sd-ruir',  to  sound.    L.  45. 

Souido,  so-nd'-do,  s.  m.,  sound.    L.  47. 

Soureirse,  sdne-rai-eer'-sai,  to  smile.    L.  64. 

Sonrisa,  sone-re'-sa,  s.  f.,  smile.    L.  .54. 

Sonrojar,  sone-ro-har' ,  to  malie  one  blush. 
L.  W. 

Sofiar,  sdne-yar'.  to  dream.    L.  35. 

Sopa,  sd'-pa,  s.  r.,  soup.    L.  44. 

Sopeton,   85-pai-(dne' . — De  sopeton,  nnez 
pectedly.    L.  44. 

Soplar,  sd-plar\  to  blow ;  to  prompt.  L.  64. 

Sordo,  H/re'-do.  adj.,  deaf.    L.  64. 

Sorprender,   sore-prain-dair' ,  to  surprise. 
L.  42. 

Sorpresa.  adre-prai'-sa,  b.  f.,  surprise.  L.  51. 

Sospcchar,  f<dce-r>ai-char' ,  to  suspect.  L.  60. 

Su.  Roo,  poss.  adj.,  his,  her,  its,  their.    L.5. 

Sub,  soch,  Latin  prep,  used  in  Spanish  as 
a  prefix  only.    L.  50. 

Subida,  soo-bd-da,  s.  f.,  rising,  rise:  ascent. 
L.  m. 

Subir,  Koo-beer',  to  eo  or  come  up,  to  ascend, 
to  mount,  to  rise.     L.  .50. 

Subjuntivo,  soob-hoon-d'-vo.  adj.,  subjunc- 
tive.   L.  43.  '  •--  ' 

Suceder,  soo-thaf-dair'.  to  happen,  to  take 
place,  to  succeed  (come  after).    L.  45. 

Sucesivo,  soo-fhai-sl'-vo.— En  lo  sucesivo,  in 

future.    L.  32. 
Sucio,  soo'-th^-d,  adj..  diriy.    L.  64. 

Sud,  sood,  8.  m.,  south.    L.  26. 

Suegra,  swai'-gra,  s.  f.,  mother-in-law.    L. 

63. 
Suegro,  sttai'-gro,  8.  m.,  fether-in-Iaw.     L. 

m. 

Suela,  fiimi'-Ia,  s.  f.,  sole.    L.  61. 

Suelo,  fncai'-lo,  b.  m.,  ground,  floor,  soil. 

Snelto,  ftivail'-fo,  adj.  and  past   part,  (of 

SoT.TAR),  loose,  free.— A  rienda  mielta, 

with  loose  rein.    L.  64. 
Supflo,  sirain'-yo,  s.  m..  sleep,  dream.— Te- 

ner  siiefw,  to  be  sleepy.    L.  25. 
Suerte.  swair'-tai,  s.  f.."lnck,  chance,  sort 

Echar  tn/crffiR,  to  cast  lots.     L.  58. 
Snflcionte,  .ooa-fH-l/if-oin'-fai,  adj.,  sufBcient. 

L.  49. 
Suft-ir,  f!oo-fTver'.  to  suffer,  to  bear  M-lth,  to 

undergo.    L.  (V4. 
Sugeto,  soo-fiai'-fo,  8.  m..  Individual,  pe^ 

eon ;  topic,  matter,  subject.    L.  27. 


VOCABULARY 


467 


Sujeto,  soo-hai'-to,  adj.  and  past  part,  (of 
buJETAR),  subject ;  subjected,  tied,  fast- 
ened.   L.  65. 

Suma,  soo'-ma,  s.  m.,  sum.— En  mma^  in 
short.    L.  68  and  64. 

Superior,  soo-pai-rl-ore' ^  adj.,  superior.  L. 
iil. 

Superlativo,  soo-pair-lah-te'-vo,  adj.,  super- 
lative.   L.  5U. 

Supersticioso,  soo-pairss-te-the-o'-so,  adj.,  su- 
perstitious.   L.  45. 

Suplicar,  soo-pll-kar\  to  supplicate,  to  beg, 
to  crave.    L.  64. 

Suponer,  soo-pd-nair\  to  suppose.    L.  64. 

Supremo,  soo-prai'-mo,  adj.,  supreme,  high- 
est, most  excellent.    L.  21. 

Supuesto,  soo-pwaiss'-to,  past  part,  of  Supo- 
ner.—For  supuestx)^  of  course.    L.  64. 

Sur.    (See  Sud.)    L.  66. 

Sus  !  sooce,  inter.,  holla !    L.  46. 

Suspirar,  sooce-pe-rar\  to  sigh.    L.  64. 

Sustancia,  sooce-iati'-the-a,  s.  f.,  substance. 
L.  63. 

Sustantivo,  sooce-tan-te'-vo,  s.  m.  and  adj., 
substantive.    L.  64. 

Sustentar,  sooce-tain-tar' ,  to  sustain.   L.  65. 

Sutil,  soo-ied',  adj.,  subtle,  thin,  slender. 
L.  64. 

Sutileza,  soo-te-lai'-tha,  s.  f.,  subtlety,  cun- 
ning, thinness,  slendemess.    L.  63. 

Suyo,  soo'-yo,  his,  hers,  its,  theirs,  one's. 
L.  13. 

T. 

Tabaco,  tah^ah'-Tco,  s.  m.,  tobacco,  cigar. 

L.  42. 
Tablero.  tah-blai'-ro,  s.  m.,  a  smooth  board. 

—  TaUero  de  ajedrez,  chess-board.    L.  51. 
Tacto.  tak'-to,  s.  m.,  the  sense  of  touch. 

L.  65. 
Tal,  adi..  such,  ^o.—  Tal  cital,  middling,  so 

■^o.—  Tal  vez.  perhaps.    L.  32. 
Talento,  tah-lain'-to,  s.  m.,  talent,  abilities. 

L.  65-  ,    , 

Tambien,  tam-M-ain',  conj.  and  adv.,  also, 

as  well,  morever.    L.  29. 
Tampoco,    tam-po'-ko,    adv.,  neither,   not 

either,  nor.    L.  29. 
Tan,  adv.,  so,  so  much,  as,  as  much.    L.  20. 
Tanto,  fan'-fo.  adj.,  so,  in  such  a  manner.— 

Tanto  mejor,  so  much  the  better.— For  lo 

tanto,  therefore.    L.  20. 
Tapar,  tah-par',  to  cover  up,  to  stop  up 

(with  a  cover).    L.  65. 
Tapete,  iah-pai'-tai,  s.  m.,  table-cover.    L. 

Tardar,  tar-dar',  to  delay,  to  put  off.    L.  60. 

Tarde,  tar'-dai,  s.  f ,  afternoon  ;— adv.,  late. 
— Algo  tarde,  rather  late.    L.  20. 

TsLxaSi^tah'-rai-a,  s.  f.,  task.    L.  58. 

Tarjeta,  tar-hai'-ta,  s.  f ,  card,  visiting  card. 
L.  64. 

Tate !  tah'-tai,  inter.,  easy !  take  care !  L. 
4<>. 

Taza,  tah'-tha,  s.  f.,  cup.    L.  55. 

To,  tai,  8.  m.,  tea.    L.  55. 

Te,  pron.,  thee,  to  thee.    L.  26. 

Teatro,  tai-ah'-tro,  s.  m.,  theatre.    L.  17. 

Teja,  tai'-ha,  e.  f.,  tile.— De  tejas  abajo,  hu- 
manly spealdnc:.    L.  61. 

Telegrafico,  tai-lai-grah'-fl-lco,  adj.,  tele- 
graph.   L.  65. 


Telegrafo,  tai-lai'-grah-fo,  b.  m.,  telegraph. 

L.  46. 
Tema,  tai'-ma^  s.  m.,  theme,  exercise; — 

s.  f ,  dispute,  contention.    L.  57. 
Temer,  tai-mair' ,  to  fear.    L.  28. 
Temerario,  tai-mai-rali'-re-o,  adj.,  rash,  in- 
considerate.   L.  54. 
Temor,  tai-more'  .—Fov  temor  de,  for  fear  of. 

L.  42. 
Temprano,  taim-prah'-no,  adv.,  early,  soon. 
L.  20. 

Tenacidad,  tai-nah-thl-dath\  e.  f.,  tenacity.' 
L.  65. 

Tenedor,  tai-nai-dore\  s.  m.,  fork.    L.  65. 

Tener,  tai-nair\  to  have,  to  hold;  to  be,  to 
take  (place).— Te/ier  hambre,  frio,  sed,  to 
be  hungry,  cold,  thirsty.— Tener  lugar,  to 
take  place.— Tener  que  hacer,  to  have 
something  to  do.— Yo  tengo  para  mi,  it  is 
my  opinion.— Tew(/a  V.  la  bondad  de  de- 
cirme,  be  good  enough  to  tell  me.    L.  10. 

Tentacion,  tain-tah-thl-one',  s.  m.,  tempta- 
tion.   L.  61. 

Tefiir,  tain-yeer',  to  dye.    L.  39. 

Teoria,  tai-o-re'-a,  s.  f,,  theory.    L.  23. 

Tercero,  tair-thai'-ro,  ord.  adj.,  third.  L. 
15. 

Tercio,  tair'-tTil-o,  s.  m.,  third,  third  part. 
L.  40. 

Terminacion,  tair-nie-nah-the-one' ,  s.  f.,  ter- 
mination.   L.  49. 

Terminante,  tair'-ml-nan'-tai^  aaj.,  conclu- 
sive.   L.  65. 

Terminar,  tair-me-nar' ,  to  terminate.  L. 
65.  ^       .     ^. 

Termino,  tair'-me-no,  s.  m.,  termination, 
end ;  term.    L.  65. 

Termometro,  tair-mo'-mai-tro,  s.  m.,  ther- 
mometer.   L.  60. 

Terrenal,  tair-rai-nal\  adj.,  terrestrial.  L. 
49. 

Terreno,  tair-rai'-no,  s.  m.,  ground.    L.  55. 

Terrible,  tazr-re'-blai,  adj.,  terrible.    L.  53. 

Terron,  tair-rone\  s.  m.,  turned  up  earth. 
L.  49. 

Terroso,  tair-ro'-so,  adj.,  terreous,  earthy. 
L.  49. 

Terrestre,  tair-raiss' -trai,  adj.,  terrestrial, 
earthly.    L.49. 

Tertulia,  tair-too'-le-a,  s.  f.,  party.    L.  39. 

Tl,  te,  pron.,  thee  (governed  by  a  prep.). 
L.26. 

Tiempo,  tl-aim'-po,  s.m.,  time,  weather.— 
Con  el  tiewpo,  in  the  course  of  time.  L. 
23 

Tienda,  te-ain'-da,  s.  f.,  store,  shop.    L.  64. 

Tierra,  td-air'-ra,  s.  f.,  earth,  land,  native 
soil.    L.  45.  ■      ^    T    C4 

Tijeras,  ie-hai'-ras,  s.  f.  pi.,  scissors.  L.  64. 

Tinta,  i;ee??/-to,  s.  f,  ink.    L.  5. 

Tintero,  teen-tai'-ro,  s.  m.,  inkstand.-DeJ 
jaree  algo  en  el  tintero,  to  forget  to  eay 
something.    L.  4.  ,_-..,„„\     t 

Tinto,  teen'-tx),  adj.,  red  (said  of  wines),    h. 

Tio,  i!2'-o,  s.m.,  uncle.    L.  65. 
Tirabuzon,   tl-rah-boo-thone' ,    s.  m.,  cork- 
screw.   L.  65,  •  „i     T 
Tiranico,  tl-rah' -nl-ko,  adj.,  tyrannical.    L,. 

Tirar  t:^-rar',  to  throw,  to  cast,  to  take 
(speaking  of  a  road).-T?re  V.  por  aqm, 
take  this  way.    L.  54. 


468 


VOCABULARY, 


Tiro,  ti'-ro^  s.  m.,  throw,  cast. — A  tiro  de 
pistola,  within  a  pistol-shot.    L.  53. 

Titulo,  tl'-too-lo,  B.  m.,  title.    L.  55. 

Tocante  a,  tu-kan'-tai  a,  prep.,  concern- 
in;?,  relatin;,'  to,  touching.     L.  38. 

Tocar,  to-kar',  to  touch,  to  play  (on  an  in- 
strument).   L.  15. 

Todavia,  W-dah-ve'-a.,  adv.,  yet,  still.    L.  25. 

Todo,  to' -do,  adj.,  aW.—  Todos  loa  diaa,  every 
day.— Del  todo,  entirely.— Con  todo,  how- 
ever, notwithstanding.    L.  11. 

Todo,  s.  m.,  the  whole.    L.  61. 

Tolerar,  tO-lai-rar\  to  tolerate.    L.  65. 

Toma!  to' -ma,  inter.,  indeed!    L. 45. 

Tomar,  td-mar',  to  take.    L.  14. 

Tomo,  to' -mo,  s.  m.,  volume.— Un  libro  de 
tres  tomx)s,  a  book  in  three  volumes.  L. 
15. 

Toncl,  to-naW,  s.  m.,  cask,  barrel.    L.  60. 

Tonto,  tdne'-to.  adj.,  foolish.— A  tontas  y  a 
locas,  at  random.    L.  GO. 

Tontera,  tone-tai'-ra,  s.  f.,  foolish  action. 
L.  00. 

Toque,  to'-kai,  s.  ra.,  roll  (of  a  drum),  ring- 
ing (of  bells).— Ahi  esta  el  toque,  that  is 
where  the  difficulty  lies.    L.  65. 

Torero,  td-rai'-ro,  s.  m.,  bull-fighter.     L.  53. 

Tornar,  tore-nar',  to  return,  to  begin  anew. 
L.  65. 

Torno,  t5re'-no,  s.  m.,  lathe.— En  tomo, 
round  about.    L.  65. 

Toro,  t5'-ro,  s.  m.,  bull.    L.  53. 

Tos,  toce,  B.  f.,  cough.    L.  (55. 

Trabajador,  trah-bah-hah-ddre' ,  adj.  and  s. 
m.,  hardworking,  worker.    L.  17. 

Trabajar,  trah-baJi-har' ,  to  work,  to  labor. 
L.  17. 

Trabajo,  trah-bah'-ho,  s.  m.,  work,  labor, 
occupation.    L.  47. 

Traauccion,  trah-dook-thl-5ne\  s.  f.,  trans- 
lation.   L.  6t. 

Traducir,  trah-doo-theer\  to  translate.  L. 
40. 

Traer,  trah-air',  to  bring,  to  carry,  to  wear. 
L.  42. 

Tragar,  trah-gar',  to  swallow.    L.  65. 

Tragedia,  trdh-hai' -dl-a,  s.  f.,  tragedy.  L. 
52. 

Tragico,  trah'-M-ko,  adj.,  tragic.     L.  35. 

Trago,  trah'-go,  s.  m.,  draught,  drink.— 
Echar  un  trago,  to  take  a  dram.     L.  59. 

Traje,  trah'-hdi,  b.  m.,  dress,  costume.  L. 
54. 

Trampa,  tram' -pa,  s.  f.,  trap,  swindle.— 
Caer  en  la  trampa,  to  fall  into  the  snare. 
L.  64. 

Trampeais  tram-pai-ar' ,  to  swindle,  to  im- 
pose upon.    L.  65. 

Trampoao,  tram-j^'-so,  adj.,  deceitful, 
swindling;— 8.  m.,  cheat,  swindler.  L. 
65. 

Tranqullidad,  fran-kS-K-dath',  s.  f.,  tran- 
quillity, peace,  quietness.    L.  46 

Tranqullizar,  tran-kUMhar' ,  to  tranquil- 
lize.   L.  65.  * 

Tranquilo,  tran-kl'-lo,  adj.,  tranquil,  quiet, 
peaceful.    L.  60.  ^     '  i 

Trapo,  trah'.po.  s'  m.,  rag.    L.  64 

rras,  prep.,  behind,  after.    L.  41. 

Xrascnrao.  tnm-koor'-w,  b.  m.,  course,  pro- 
cess (of  time).    L.  51. 

Trasnochar,  frass-nd-ckar',  to  sit  up  all 
night.    L.  05.  ^ 


Trasquilar,  trass-k^-lar',  to  shear  (sheep).— 

Ir  por  lana  y  volvcr  tmsquilado,  the  biter 

bit.    L.  05. 
Trastienda,  trass-iS-ain'-da,  b.  f.,  back  shop. 

L.  01. 
Tratado,  trah-tah'-do,  s.  m.,  treatise,  treaty. 

L.  40. 
Tratante,  trah-tan' -tai,  b.  m.,  dealer.   L.  38. 
Tratar,  trah-tar',  to  treat,  to  have  inter- 
course or   relations  with,  to   trade,   to 

deal,  to  traffic,  to  try.    L.  32. 
Trato,  trah'-to,  s.  ni.,  treatment,  dealings, 

intercourse.    L.  65. 
Traves,   trah-vaiss',  prep.— Al  traves  de, 

through.    L.  65. 
Travesura,  trah-vai-soo'-ra,  s.  f.,  trick,  mis- 
chief, naughtiness.    L.  53. 
Travieso,  trah-ve-ai'-so,  adj.,  tricky,  naugh- 

ty,  mischievous.    L.  52. 
Traza,  trah'-tha,  s.  f.,  trace.— Tener  buena 

traza,  to  look  well.    L.  64. 
Trece,  trai'-thai,  num.  adj.,  thirteen.  L.  14. 
Treinta,  trai-een'-ta,  num.  adj.,  thirty.    L. 

14. 
Tres,  traiss,  num.  adj.,  three.    L.  14. 
Tribunal,  tre-boo-nal' ,  s.  m.,  tribunal,  court 

of  justice.    L.  53. 
Trigo,  tre'-go,  s.  m.,  wheat.    L.  65. 
Triguefio,    trl-gaiii' -yo,  adj.,  brown,  dark 

(complexion).    L.  05. 
Trinchar,  treen-cJiai'',  to  cut  up,  to  carve. 

L.  58. 
Trineo,  trl-nai'-d,  s.  m.,  sleigh.    L.  65. 
Trinidad,  irhriS-dath',  s.  f..  Trinity.    L.  21. 
Triptongo,  treep-tdne'-go,  s.  m.,  triphthong. 

L.  57. 
Triple,  treess'-tai,  adj.,  sad,  mournful,  dull. 

L.  21. 
Tristeza,  treess-tai'-tha,  s.  f.,  sadness,  dul- 

ness.    L.  41. 
Tronar,  tro-nar',  to  thunder.    L.  30. 
Tropa,  tro'-pa,  s.  f.,  troop.    L.  40. 
Trueco,  trwai'-ko,  s.  m.,  barter,  exchange. 

—A  trueco,  provided  that.    L.  61. 
Tnieno,  trwai'-no,  b.  m.,  thunder,  clap  of 

thunder.    L.  30. 
Trueque.    (See  TRtrECO.)    L.  48. 
Tu,  too,  pers.  pron.,  thou ;— poss.  adj.,'  thy. 

L.  1. 
Tuerto,  twair'-to,  a4).,  blind  of  one  eye. 

L.  65. 
Tutear,  too-tai-ar',  to  speak  familiarly  (In 

the  second  person  singular).    L.  r>5. 
Tuteo,  ioo-tai'-d.  s.  m.,  thoning.    L.  65. 
Tuyo,  too'-yo,  poss.  pron.,  thine.    L.  13. 


U.  00.  conj.,  used  instead  of  p,  before  words 

beginninir  with  o  or  ho.    L.  8. 
Ff!  w/;  inter..  u?h!    L.  46. 
Ultimo,  ool'-f7>-mo.  adi.,  last.— Por  {tlllmo 

at  last,  flnally.    L.  61. 
Un.  ooTt.  adj.  and  indef.  art.,  one.  a  (always 

used  before,  never  nfler.  words).    L.  4. 
Una.  oo'-nn.  fern,  of  Uno.  which  see.    L.  .'5. 
Universidad.  on-n^-vnir-s^-dafh',  a.  f.,  uni- 

versitv.    L.  .'>5. 
Uno.  oo'-no.  indof.  art.  and  adj.,  a,  one.— 

Un/)  i\  ■uno.  one  bv  one.    L.  14. 
Ufla.  oon'-ya.  s.  f..  flnger-nnil.    L.  33. 
Usar,  oo-mr',  to  use.    L.  02. 


VOCABULARY, 


469 


TJso,  oo'-so,  s.  m.j  use.    L.  61. 

TJsted,  coss-tait/i\  s.  m.  and  f.,  you.  (Con- 
traction of  VuBSTRA  MERCKD,  your  Wor- 
ship.)   L.  1. 

TJtil,  co'-ted^  adj.,  useful.    L.  13. 

Uva,  oo'-va^  s.  f.,  grape.    L.  40. 


Vaca,  vah'-ka,  s.  f.,  cow,  beef.    L.  55. 

Vacio,  vah-the'-o,  adj.,  empty.    L.  58. 

Valencia,  vah-lain'-the-a,  s.  f.,  Valencia, 
L.  55. 

Valentla,  vah-lain-ie'-a,  s.  f.,  valor,  bravery. 
L.  54. 

Valer,  vah-lair\  to  be  worth,  to  be  good 
for.— Mas  vcUe  tarde  que  nuuca,  better 
late  than  never.  — Vulgame  DiosI  bless 
met    L.  41. 

Valiente,  vah-le-ain'-tai,  adj., valiant,  brave. 
L.  47. 

Valor,  vah-ldre\  s.  m.,  valor,  bravery; 
worth,  value.    L.  25. 

Vals,  valce,  s.  m.,  waltz.    L.  23. 

Vamos !  vah'-moce,  inter.,  come  1  come 
sxloncr  I    L.  46. 

Vapor,  vah-pore\  s.  m.,  steam,  steamboat, 
steamer.    L.  37. 

Vara,  vah'-ra.  s.  f.,  rod ;  yard  measure.  L. 
47. 

Vario,  vah'-re-o,  adj.,  various,  variable;— 
pi.,  several.    L.  43. 

Varon,  vah-rdp.^\  s.  m.,  man,  male  human 
being.    L.  62. 

Vascongadas,  (Las  Provincias),  vass-kone- 
gah'-dass,  s.  f.  pi.,  the  three  Spanish  pro- 
vinces of  Alava,  Guipuzcoa,  and  Biscay. 
L.  55. 

Vascuence,  vass-kwain'-thai,  s.  m.,  the  Bis- 
cayan  dialect.    L.  55. 

Vasija,  vah-se'-ha^  s.  f.,  cask  for  liquors. 
L.  52. 

Vaso,  vah'-so,  s.  m.,  vase,  glass  (for  drink- 
ing), tumbler.    L.  61. 

Vaya !  vah'-ya,  inter.,  come  now  I  indeed  I 
L.  42. 

Vecino,  vai-thl'-no,  s.  m.,  neighbor.    L.  28. 

Veinte,  vai'-een-tai,  num.  adj.,  twenty.  L. 
14. 

Vela,  vai'-la,  s.  f.,  sail  (of  a  ship),  candle. 
L..53. 

Veneer,  vain-thair\  to  vanquish,  to  over- 
come, to  conquer.    L.  59. 

Vender.  rain-dair\  to  sell.    L.  6. 

Venlr.  rai-neer',  to  come ;  to  fit,  to  suit.— 
Venir  i\  pelo,  to  be  just  the  thing.— No 
hay  mal  que  por  bienno  mnqa.  it's  an  ill 
wind  that  blows  trood  to  nobody.    L.  18. 

Ventaja,  vain-tah'ha,  s.  f.,  advantage.  L. 
43. 

Ventana.  vain-tah'-na.  s.  f.,  window.  L.  28. 

Ver,  vair,  to  see.  to  look. — A  vr.  let  us 
9.ee.— Verse  negro,  to  be  in  great  distress, 
L.  29. 

Verano,  vai-rah'-vo.  s.  m..  summer.    L.  24. 

Verbal,  vair-hnl\  adj.,  verbal.    L.  49. 

Verbo.  vair'-ho,  s.  m.,  verb.    L.  41. 

Verdad,  rnir-dath'.  s.  f,  truth.— A  la  ver- 
dad.  truly :  indeed.    L.  43. 

Verdaderamente.  vair-dah-dat-rah-main'- 
frii,  adv..  trulv.  veritablv.    I-.  s^. 

Verde,  valr'-dai,  adj,  green.    L.  54. 


Verdura,  vair-doo'-ra.,  s, f.,  verdure;  vegeta- 
bles.   L.  34. 
Vergiienza,  vair-gwain' -tha^  s.  f.,  shame, — 

Teuer  vergiienza.,  to  be  ashamed.  L.  25. 
Version,  vair-se-dne\  s.  f.,  version.  L.  64, 
Verso,  vair'-so,  s.  m,,  verse;  line  of  poetry, 

L,  52. 
Vestido,  vaiss-te'-do,  s.  m,,  dress,  wearing 

apparel.    L.  39. 
Vestir,  vaiss-teer\  to  dress,  to  clothe.  L.  25, 
Vez,  vaith,  s.  f.,  time.— Una  vez,  once.— 

Dos  veces,  twice. — En  vez  de,  instead  of, 

— llacer  las  veces  de,  to  act  as,  serve  as. — 

Tal  vez,  perhaps.— A  mi  vez,  in  my  turn. 

—A  veccfi,  at  times.    L.  25. 
Viajar,  ve-ah-liar',  to  travel.    L.  21. 
Vicerector,  ve-tfiai-raik-tore' ,  s.  m.,  vice- 
rector.    L.  50. 
Vice  versa,  ve'-thai  vair'-sa,  vice  versa.    L. 

47. 
Vicio,  v^'-i/iS-o,  s.  m.,  vice.    L.  41. 
Victoria,  veek-to'-re-a,  s.  f.,  victory.     L.  46. 
Vida,  ve'-da,  s.  f.,  life.    L.  50. 
Vicjo,  ve-ai'-ho,  adj.,  old.    L.  13. 
Viena,  ve-ai'-na,  s.  f.,  Vienna.    L.  12. 
Vieuto,  ve-ain'-to,  s.  m.,  wind.    L.  30. 
Viernes,  ve-air'-naiss,  s.  m.,  Friday.—  Vier- 

nes  santo.  Good  Friday.  L.  9. 
Viga,  ve'-ga,  s.  f.,  beam.  L.  65. 
Villadiego,  veel-rjah-de-ai' -go,  s.  m.— Tomar 

las  de  Villadiego,  to  run  away  ;  to  take  to 

one's  heels.     L.  50. 
Vinacho,  ve-nah'-cho,  s.  m.,  bad  wine.    L. 

49. 
Vino,  ve'-no,  s.  m.,  wine.    L.  7. 
Violado,  ve-o-lah'-do,  s.  m.  and  adj.,  violet 

(color).     L.  54. 
Violeta,  ve-o-lai'-ta,  s.  f.,  violet.    L.  54. 
Violin,  vl-o-Uen',  s.  m.,  violin.    L.  15. 
Violinista,  ve-o-ll-neess'-ta,  s.  m.,  violinist. 

L.  36. 
Virtud,  veer-tooth',  s.  f.,  virtue.— En  vlrtud 

de,  by  virtue  of.    L.  41. 
Visita,  ve-se'-ta,  s.  f.,  visit.    L.  28. 
Visitar,  ve-sd-iar',  to  visit ;  to   examine. 

L.  52. 
Vista,  veess'-ta,  s.  f.,  view,  sight. -A  vista, 

at  sight.— Perder  de  vista,  to  lose  sight  of. 

L.  29  and  51. 
Visto,  veess'-to,  past  part,  (of  Vek),  seen, 

L.  52. 
Vistoso,    veess-to'-so,     adj.,    conspicuout 

showy    L.  54. 
Viva!    ve'-va,   inter.,  long  live!    hurrah  1 

huzza !    L.  46. 
Vivionte,  ve-t^-ain'-tai,  s.  ra.  andpres.  part., 

living  bein.T;  living,  animated.    L.  38. 
Vivir,  vl-reer'.  \<^  live.    L.  9. 
Vivo,   ve'-vo,  adj.,  alive,  lively,  sprightly. 

L.  90. 
Vizcaino,   ree^'h-l-n'h-l'-no,  s.  m.  and  adj., 

Biscayan.     L.  t^'S. 
Vizcnva.  rMh-i-nh'-iin.  s.  f.  F-iacay.    L.  .^.'>. 
Vocabulario.  ro-lmh-boo-lah'-rl-d,  s.  m.,  vo- 
cabulary.   L.  f-^. 
Vocal.  vo-kaV,  adj.  and  s.  m.,  vocal ;  vowel. 

L.  .58. 
Volar,  vo-lnr'.  to  fly.    L.  45. 
Voliimpn,  vo-Joo'-main.  s.  m.,  volume.  L.  15. 
Voluntad.  rd-lom-ta.tJi' .  s.  f..  will.    L.  45. 
Volver,  vole-^'air',  to  come  or  ^o  'hfick.  to 

return,  to  do  atrain.  to  turn.— Fo'rvr  on 

sf,  to  recover  one's  senees.— Ferrer  Alas 


470 


VOCABULARY, 


andadas,  to  retam  to  one's  old  habits. 
L.  36. 

VoB,  voce,  pers.  pron.,  you.    L.  66. 

Vosotros,  vO-so'-trOce,  pers.  prou.,  you,  ye. 
L.  1. 

Voz,  vdth,  8.  f.,  voice;  word;  rumor;  re- 
port.—Corre  la  voz  que  .  .  .  ,  it  is 
rumored  that    .    .    .    L.  58. 

Vuelta,  vwaU'-ta,  s.  f.,  return,  turn,  trip.— 
A  vuella  de  correo,  by  return  mail.— Dar 
una  vuelta,  to  take  a  walk.— Dar  la  vv^lta 
al  parque,  to  go  round  the  park.    L.  46. 

Vuelto,  vwaU'-to,  past  part,  (of  Volvek), 
returned.    L.  52. 

Vuestro,  vwaiss'-tro,  poss.  adj.,  your.  L.  13. 

Vulgar,  vool-gar',  adj.,  vulgar.    L.  59. 


Y. 

Y,  e,  conj.,  and.    L.  3. 

Ya,  adv.,  already,  yet;  eometimes.- Fo  lo 
lino,  ya  lo  otro,  sometimes  one,  some- 
times the  other.    L.  25  and  37. 

Yaccr,  yah-thair\  to  lie.    L.  41. 

Ycrba,  yair'-ba,  s.  f.,  herb,  grass.    L.  60. 

Yemo,  yaiT'Tio^  s.  m.,  son-iu-law.    L.  60. 


Yo,  pers.  pron.,  l.—To  mismo,  I  my  Belt 

L.  1. 
Yugo,  yoo'-go,  b.  m.,  yoke.    L.  64. 


Z. 

Zafarse,  thah-far' -sai,  to  escape,  to  get  rid 

Zaga,  thah'-ga,  s.  f.,  rear.-No  irlc  a  uno 
en  zaga,  not  to  be  liar  behind  any  ont-, 
L.  44. 

shoo 


Zapateria,     thah-vah  tai-il'-a,  b.  f., 
trade  ;   shoemaker's  thop.    L.  17. 

Zapatero,  thahjiuh-lai'-io,  s.  m.,  shoe- 
maker.   L.  8. 

Zapato,  thah-pah' -to,  s.  m.,  shoe.    L.  10. 

Zape!  thah'  pai,  inter.,  used  to  frighten 
away  the  cats  ;  God  forbid  I    L.  46. 

Zas  I  zas  1  thass,  inter.,  used  to  imitate 
the  sound  of  repeated  knocks  or  blows. 
L.  62. 

Zeca  en  Mcca  (Andar  de),  thai'-la  ain 
mai'-ka,  to  wander  about  from  pillar  to 
post.    L.  61. 

Zutano,  thw-tah'-no,  s.  m.,  such  a  one.  X.. 
55. 


Ollendorff's  New  Method  of  Learning  Languages. 


s:E>.A.isrisia:. 


A  NEW  METHOD  OF  LEARNING  TO  READ, 

Write,  and  Speak  the  Spauish  Language,  after  the  System  of  OllenJ 
dorff.  By  Mno.  Velazquez  and  T.  Simonne.  1  vol.,  12mo.  500 
pages.     Price,  $1.30. 

KEY  TO  THE  EXERCISES  IN  THE  NEW  METHOD 

of  Learning  to  Read,  Write,  and  Speak  the  Spanish  Language,  after 
the  System  of  Ollendorff.  By  M.  Velazquez  and  T.  Simonne.  1 
vol.,  12mo.     174  pages.     Price,  85  cents. 

NUEVO  MfiTODO   PARA  APRENDER  1  LEER, 

Hablar,  y  Escribir  el  espanol,  segun  el  Sistema  de  Ollendorff.  Para 
uso  de  los  Alemane.  Arreglado  por  D.  H.  Wrage  y  H.  M.  Mon- 
santo. (Neue  Methode  die  Spanische  Sprache  lesen,  sprechen  und 
schreiben  zu  lernen,  nach  dem  OUendoiff  schen  System.)  1  vol., 
12mo.     Price,  $1.50. 

CLAVE  DEL  ANTERIOR.     Price,  $1.00. 

M£tODO  para  APRENDER  X  LEER,  ESCRIBIR 

y  Hablar  el  Ingles,  segun  el  Sistema  de  Ollendorff.  Por  Ramon 
Palenzuela  y  Juan  de  la  C.  (Darrefio.  Un  tomo  de  45*7  paginas,  en 
12°.     Price,  $1.50. 

CLAVE    DE    LOS    EJERCICIOS    DEL    M^TODO 

Para  aprender  a  Leer,  Escribir  y  Ha]3lar  el  Ingles  segun  el  Sistema 
de  Ollendorff.  Por  Ramon  Palenzuela  y  Juan  de  la  C.  Carreuo.  Un 
tomo  de  111  paginas,  en  12°.     Price,  $1.00. 

UN  M£T0D0   para   APRENDER  1  LEER,  ES- 

cribir  y  Hablar  el  Frances  segun  el  Sistema  de  Ollendorflf.  Por  Teo- 
doro  Simonn^.     Un  tomo  de  341  paginas,  en  12°.     Price,  $1.50. 

CLAVE    DE    LOS    EJERCICIOS    DEL    M^TODO 

Para  aprender  a  Leer,  Escribir  y  Hablar  el  Frances  segun  el  Sistema 
de  Ollendorff.  Por  Teodoro  Simonne.  Un  tomo  de  80  paginas,  en 
12°.     Price,  $1.00. 


D.  APPLETON  &  CO.,  Publishers,  1,  3,  &  5  Bond  Street,  N.  Y. 


SCHOOL  AND  COLLEGE  TEXT-BOOKS. 


SPANISH. 

AHN.  A  New,  Practical,  and  Easy  Method  of  Learning  the  Spanish 
Language,  after  the  System  of  F.  Ahn,  Doctor  of  Philosophy  and 
Professor  at  the  College  of  Neuss.     12mo.     85  cents. 

Key  to  Spanish  Grammar.     25  cents. 

BUTLER.  The  Spanish  Teacher  and  Colloquial  Phrase-Book:  An 
Easy  and  Agreeable  Method  of  acquiring  a  Speaking  Knowledge 
of  the  Spanish  Language.  By  Francis  Butler.  293  pagea 
18mo.     50  cents. 

DE  BELEM.  The  Spanish  Phrase-Book;  or,  Key  to  Spanish  Con- 
versation :  containing  the  Chief  Idioms  of  the  Spanish  Language, 
with  the  Conjugations  of  the  Auxihary  and  the  Regular  Verbs — 
on  the  Plan  of  the  late  Abb6  Bossuet.  By  E.  M.  de  Belem.  88 
pages.     18mo.     30  cents. 

DE  TOR  NOB.  The  Combined  Spanish  Method.  A  New,  Prac- 
tical, and  Theoretical  System  of  Learning  the  Castilian  Language, 
embracing  the  most  advantageous  Features  of  the  bpst  known 
Methods.     With  a  Pronouncing  Vocabulary.     12mo.     $1.25. 

y\.^ Key  to  the  Combined  Spanish*  Method.     75  cents. 

DE  VERE.  Grammar  of  the  Spanish  Language,  with  a  History 
of  the  Language  and  Practical  Exercises.  By  Schele  de  Verb. 
12mo.     $1.00. 

\ DICTIONARY.     See  Meadows  and  VelXzqukz. 

MEADOWS'S  Spanish-English  and  English-Spunish  Dictionary. 
18rao.     Half  roan,  $2.20. 

MORALES.  Progressive  Spanish  Reader,  with  an  Analytical  8tudy 
of  the  Spanish  Language.  By  Augustin  Jose  Morales,  A.  M. 
H.  M.,  Professor  of  the  Spanish  Language  in  the  New  York  Free 
Academy.     886  pages.     12mo.     $1.25. 


School  and  College  Text-Books. — (Continued.) 

OLLENDORFF.     A  New  Method  of  Learning  to  Read,  Write, 

and  Speak  the  Spanish  Language,  after  the  System  of  Ollendorff. 
By  Mariano  Velazquez  and  T.  Simonne.     12mo.     $1.00. 

Key  to  the  Exercises  in  the  New  Method  of  Learning  to  Read,  Write, 
and  Speak  the  Spanish  Language,  after  the  System  of  Ollendorff 
By  M.  Velazquez  and  T.  Simonne.     Hi  pages.     12mo.     75  cts. 

TOLON.  The  Elementary  Spanish  Reader  and  Translator.  With 
Spanish  and  English  Vocabulary,  containing  all  the  words  used 
in  the  Lessons.     By  Miguel  T.  Tolon.     12mo.     15  cents. 

VELAZQUEZ.  New  Spanish  Reader;  consisting  of  Extracts  from 
the  Works  of  the  most  approved  Authors,  in  Proee  and  Verse, 
arranged  in  progressive  order,  with  Notes  explanatory  of  the 
Idioms  and  most  difficult  Constructions,  and  a  copious  Vocabu- 
lary.    By  Mariano  Velazquez  de  la  Cadena.     12mo.     $1.25. 

Seoane's  Nemnan  and  Baretti.  By  M.  Velazquez.  A  Pronouncing 
Dictionary  of  the  Spani-sh  and  English  Languages:  composed 
from  the  Spanish  Dictionaries  of  the  Spanish  Academy,  Terreros, 
and  Salva,  upon  the  Basis  of  Seoane's  edition  of  Neuman  and 
Baretti,  and  from  the  English  Dictionaries  of  Webster,  Worcester, 
and  Walker ;  with  the  addition  of  more  than  8,000  Words,  Idioms, 
and  Familiar  Phrases,  the  Irregularities  of  all  the  Verbs,  and  a 
Grammatical  Synopsis  of  both  Languages.  In  Two  Parts,  I. 
Spanish-English;  IL  English-Spanish.  1,310  pages,  large  8vo. 
$5.00. 

Seoane's  Neuman  and  Baretti,  abridged.  By  M.  Velazquez.  A 
Dictionary  of  the  Spanish  and  English  Languages,  abridged  from 
the  author's  larger  work.     84V  pages.     12mo.     $1.50. 

An  Easy  Introduction  to  Spanish  Conversation.  By  Mariano  Vei  az- 
QUEZ  DE  LA  Cadena.     100  pages.     18mo.     35  cents. 


£>.  APFLETON  &  CO.,  Publishers,  1,  S,  db  5  Bond  Street,  New  York, 


D.  APPLETON  &  CO:S  PUBLICATIONS. 


SPANISH  GEAMMAES. 


Ollendorff s  Spanish  Grammar. 

A  New  Method  of  Learning  to  Read,  "Write,  and  Speak  the  Spaiuah 
Language,  with  Practical  Rules  for  Spanish  Pronunciation,  and 
Models  of  Social  and  Commercial  Correspondence.  By  M.  VE. 
LASQUEZ  and  T.  T.  SIMONNE.     12rao,  5G0  pages. 

The  admirable  system  introduced  by  Ollendorff  is  applied  in  this  vol> 
ume  to  the  Spanish  language.  Having  received,  from  the  two  distinguished 
editors  to  whom  its  supervision  was  intrusted,  corrections,  emendations, 
and  additions,  which  specially  adapt  it  to  the  youth  of  this  country,  it  is 
believed  to  embrace  every  possible  advantage  for  imparting  a  thorough 
and  practical  knowledge  of  Spanish.  A  course  of  systematic  grammar 
underlies  the  whole  ;  but  its  development  is  so  gradual  and  inductive  as 
not  to  weary  the  learner.  Numerous  examples  of  regular  and  irregular 
verbs  are  presented  :  and  nothing  that  can  expedite  the  pupil's  progress, 
in  the  way  of  explanation  and  illustration,  is  omitted. 

KEY  to  the  Same.     Separate  volume. 

Grammar  of  the  Spanish  Language : 

With  a  History  of  the  Language  and  Practical  Exercises.  By  M. 
SCHELE  DE  VERE.    12mo,  273  pages. 

In  this  volume  are  embodied  the  results  of  many  years'  experience  on 
the  part  of  the  author,  as  Professor  of  Spanish  in  the  University  of  Virginia. 
It  aims  to  impart  a  critical  knowledge  of  the  language  by  a  systematic 
course  of  grammar,  illustrated  with  appropriate  exercises.  The  authoi 
has  availed  himself  of  the  labors  of  recent  grammarians  and  critics ;  and, 
by  condensing  his  rules  and  principles  and  rejecting  a  burdensome  suptt* 
fluity  of  detail,  he  has  brought  the  whole  within  comparatively  small  conv 
pass.  By  pursuing  this  simple  course,  the  language  may  be  easily  asd 
quickly  mastered,  not  only  for  conversational  purposes,  but  for  reading  i% 
Quently,  and  writing  it  with  elegance. 


B.  APPLETON  db  C0:8  PUBLICATIONS. 

Elementary  Spanish  Reader : 

By  M.  F.  TOLON.     12mo,  156  pages. 
This  is  one  of  the  best  Elementary  Spanish  Readers,  not  only  for  th* 
purposes  of  self-instruction,  but  also  as  a  class-book  for  schools,  that  has 
e^er  been  published.     A  full  Vocabulary  of  all  the  words  employed  is  ap- 
pended, rendering  a  large  dictionary  unnecessary. 

Progressive  Spanish  Reader : 

With  an  Analytical  Study  of  the  Spanish  Language.  By  AUGUSTIN 
JOSE  MORALES,  A.  M.,  Prof,  of  the  Spanish  Language  and  Litera- 
ture in  the  College  of  the  City  of  New  York.     12mo,  336  pages. 

The  prose  extracts  in  this  volume  are  preceded  by  an  historical  account 
of  the  origin  and  progress  of  the  Spanish  Langurge,  and  a  condensed, 
scholarlike  treatise  on  its  grammar  ;  the  poetical  selections  are  introduced 
with  an  Essay  on  Spanish  versification.  Prepared  in  either  case  by  the 
preliminary  matter  thus  furnished,  bearing  directly  on  his  work,  the  pupil 
enters  intelligently  on  his  task  of  translating.  The  extracts  are  brief, 
spirited,  and  entertaining ;  drawn  mainly  from  writers  of  the  present  day, 
they  are  a  faithful  representation  of  the  language  as  it  is  now  written  and 
spoken.  The  arrangement  is  progressive,  specimens  of  a  more  difficult 
ciiaracter  being  presented  as  the  student  becomes  able  to  cope  with  them. 

New  Spanish  Reader : 

Consisting  of  Extracts  from  the  Works  of  the  Most  Approved  Authors 
in  Prose  and  Verse,  arranged  in  Progressive  Order ;  with  Notes 
explanatory  of  the  Idioms  and  Most  Difficult  Constructions,  and  a 
Copious  Vocabulary.      By  M.  VELAZQUEZ  BE  LA  CADENA. 
12mo,  351  pages. 
This  book,  being  particularly  intended  for  the  use  of  beginners,  has  been 
prepared  with  three  objects  in  view :  First,  to  furnish  the  learner  with 
pleasing  and  easy  lessons,  progressively  developing  the  beauties  and  diffi- 
culties of  the  Spanish  language ;  secondly,  to  enrich  their  minds  with  valu- 
able knowledge ;  and  thirdly,  to  form  their  character,  by  instilling  correct 
principles  into  their  hearts.     In  order,  therefore,  to  obtain  the  desired  ef- 
fects, the  extracts  have  been  carefully  selected  from  those  classic  Spanish 
writers,  both  ancient  and  modem,  whose  style  is  generally  admitted  to  be 
a  pattern  of  elegance,  combined  with  idiomatic  purity  and  sound  morality. 


D.  APPLETON  &  CO:S  PUBLIC  A  TIONS. 

Grammar  for  Teaching  English  to  Spaniards. 

Gramatica  Inglesa : 

Un  Mctodo  para  Aprender  a  Leer,  Escribir,  y  Habler  el  Ingl6s,  segun 
el  Sisteraa  de  Ollendorff.  Acompanado  de  un  Apendice  que  com- 
prende  en  Compendio  las  Reglas  contenidas  en  el  Cuerpo  Princi- 
pal de  la  Obra ;  un  Tratado  sobre  la  Pronuneiacion,  Division  y 
Formacion  de  las  Palabras  Inglesas ;  una  Lista  de  los  Yerbos 
Kegulares  e  Irregulares,  con  sus  Conjugaciones  y  las  Distintas 
Preposiciones  que  rigen  ;  Modelos  de  Correspondencia,  etc.,  todo 
al  Alcance  de  la  Capacidad  mas  Mediana.  For  RAMON  PALEN- 
ZUELA  y  JUAN  DE  LA  C.  CARRENO.     12mo,  457  pages. 

Key  to  Exercises.     Separate  volume. 

Spaniards  desirous  of  learning  English  will  find  in  this  volume  all  that 
is  needed  for  its  speedy  and  thorough  acquisition.  The  system  adopted 
is  clear,  simple,  philosophical,  and  practical. 

Grammar  for  Teaching  French  to  Spaniarda 

Gramatica  Francesa : 

Un  M6todo  para  Aprender  a  Leer,  Escribir,  y  Hablar  el  Frances,  seguD 
el  Verdadero  Sistema  de  Ollendorff.  Ordenado  en  Lecciones  Pro- 
gresivas,  consistiendo  de  Ejercicios  Orales  y  Escritos;  enrique- 
cido  de  la  Pronuneiacion  Figurado  corao  se  Estila  en  la  Conver- 
sacion ;  y  de  un  Apendice,  abrazando  las  Reglas  de  la  Sintaxis, 
la  Formacion  de  los  Verbos  Regulares,  y  la  Conjugacion  de  los 
Irregulares.  For  TEODORO  SIMONNE.  12rao,  341  pages. 
Key  to  Exercises.     Separate  volume. 

M.  Simonn6  has  done  a  good  work  in  bringing  the  French  language 
within  the  reach  of  Spaniards  by  this  application  of  the  Ollendorff  system. 
A  few  weeks'  study  of  his  "  Gramatica  Francesa  "  will  impart  a  knowl- 
edge of  the  more  common  conversational  idioms,  and  a  thorough  mastery 
of  it  will  insure  as  perfect  an  acquaintance  with  French  as  can  be  deeired. 
With  the  aid  of  the  Key  the  study  can  be  pursued  without  a  master ;  for 
the  illustrative  exercises  at  once  show  whether  the  grammatical  rules  and 
principles  successively  laid  down  are  properly  understood. 


D.  AFPLETON  &  CO:S  PUBLICATIONS. 

The  Spanish  Teacher  and  Colloquial  Phrase- 
Book. 

An  Easy  and  Agreeable  Method  of  Acquiring  a  Speaking  Knowledge 
of  the  Spanish  Language.     By  Professor  BUTLER.     ISmo,  293 
pages. 
The  object  of  the  author  is  to  make  the  Spanish  language  a  living, 
speaking  tongue  to  the  learner ;  and  the  method  he  adopts  is  that  of  na- 
ture.    He  begins  with  the  simplest  elements,  and  progressively  advances, 
applying  all  former  acquisitions  as  he  proceeds,  until  the  learner  has  mas- 
tered one  of  the  most  perfect  languages  of  modern  times. 

From  the  New  York  Jouimal  of  Commerce. 
"This  is  a  good  book,  and  well  fitted  for  the  purposes  for  which  it  is  designed.    The 
Spanish  language  is  one  of  great  simplicity,  and  more  easily  acquired  than  any  other 
modern  tongue.    For  a  beginner,  we  recommend  this  little  book,  which  is  small  and  de- 
signed to  be  carried  in  the  pocket." 

An  Easy  Introduction  to  Spanish  Conver- 
sation. 

By  MARIANO  VELAZQUEZ  DE  LA  CADENA.     18mo,  100  pages. 
This  little  work  contains  all  that  is  necessary  for  making  rapid  prog- 
/ess  in  Spamsh  conversation.     It  is  well  adapted  for  schools,  and  for 
persons  who  have  little  time  to  study  or  are  their  own  instructors. 

Spanish  Grammar. 

Being  a  New,  Practical,  and  Easy  Method  of  Learning  the  Spanish 
Language ;  after  the  System  of  A.  F.  AHN,  Doctor  of  Philoso- 
phy, and  Professor  at  the  College  of  Neuss.     First  American 
Edition,  revised  and  enlarged.     12mo,  149  pages. 
Prof.  Ahn's  method  is  one  of  peculiar  excellence,  and  has  met  with 
great  success.     It  has  been  happily  described  in  his  own  words  :  "  Learn 
a  foreign  language  as  you  learned  your  mother  tongue  " — in  the  same  sim- 
ple manner,  and  with  the  same  natural  gradations.     This  method  of  the 
distinguished  German  Doctor  has  been  applied  in  the  present  instance  to 
the  Spanish  Language,  upon  the  basis  of  the  excellent  Grammars  of  Les* 
**pada  and  Martinez,  and  it  is  hoped  that  its  simplicity  and  utility  will  pro- 
cure for  it  the  favor  that  its  German,  French,  and  Italian  prototypes  have 
already  found  in  the  Schools  and  Colleges  of  Europe. 


1).  ArPLETON  dt  CO:S  PUBLICATIONS. 

Seoane,  Neuman^  and  Baretti's  Spanish- 
and-English  and  English-and-Span- 
ish  Pronouncing  Dictionary. 

By  MARIANO  VELAZQUEZ  DE  LA  CADENA,  Professor  of  the 
Spanish  Language  and  Literature  in  Columbia  College,  N.  Y.,  and 
Corresponding  Member  of  the  National  Institute,  Washington- 
Large  8vo,  1,300  pages.    Neat  type,  fine  paper,  and  strong  binding. 

The  pronunciation  of  the  Castilian  language  is  so  clearly  set  forth  in 
this  Dictionary  as  to  render  it  well-nigh  impossible  for  any  person,  who 
can  read  English  readily,  to  fail  of  obtaining  the  true  sounds  of  the  Span- 
ish words  at  sight. 

In  the  revision  of  the  work,  more  than  eight  thousand  words,  idioms, 
and  familiar  phrases,  have  been  added. 

It  gives  in  both  languages  the  exact  equivalents  of  the  words  in  gen> 
eral  use,  both  in  their  literal  and  metaphorical  acceptations. 

Also,  the  technical  terms  most  frequently  used  in  the  arts,  in  chemistry, 
botany,  medicine,  and  natural  history,  as  well  as  nautical  and  mercantile 
terms  and  phrases — most  of  which  are  not  found  in  other  Dictionaries. 

Also  many  Spanish  words  used  only  in  American  countries  which  were 
formerly  dependencies  of  Spain. 

The  names  of  many  important  articles  of  commerce,  gleaned  from  the 
price  currents  of  Spanish  and  South  American  cities,  are  inserted  for  the 
benefit  of  the  merchant,  who  will  here  find  all  that  he  needs  for  carryuig 
on  a  business  correspondence. 

The  parts  of  the  irregular  verbs  in  Spanish  and  English  are  here,  for 
the  first  time,  given  in  full,  in  their  alphabetical  order. 

The  work  likewise  contains  a  grammatical  synopsis  of  both  languages; 
arranged  for  ready  and  convenient  reference. 

The  new  and  improved  orthography  sanctioned  by  the  latest  edition 
of  the  Dictionary  of  the  Academy — now  universally  adopted  by  the  press 
— is  here  given  for  the  first  time  in  a  Spanish-English  Dictionary. 

An  Abridgment  of  Velazquez's  Large  Dictionary, 

Intrnded  koe  Schools,  Collbgbs,  ajhv>  Tbavellkrs. 

In  Two  Parts  :— I.  Spanish -Eng-lish  :  H.  Engrlish-Spanish. 

By  MARIANO  VELAZQUEZ  DE  LA  CADENA.     12mo,  888  pagesL 


En  el  lAhro  Primero  de  Zoologia,  del  Curso  de  Hisioria  Natural,  por 
el  Dr.  D.  Juan  Garcia  Puron,  obra  dedicada  a  hacer  conocer  la  Historia 
Natural  a  los  ninos,  el  autor  no  se  limita  a  hacer  una  relacion  de  lo  con- 
cerniente  a  aquella  materia,  sino  que,  con  especial  habilidad  pedagogica, 
ha  conscuido  armonizar  los  adelantos  de  la  ciencia,  con  el  desarroUo 
intelectuai  de  los  nifios,  haciendo  la  obra  sumamente  interesante. — Los 
Avisos,  Revista  Cienttjica,  1886  (Madrid). 


El  Libra  Primero  de  Zoologia,  correspondiente  al  Curso  de  Historia 
Natural,  por  el  Dr.  D,  Juan  Garcia  Puron,  que  hemos  leido  con  deteni 
miento,  puede  considerarse  como  una  de  las  mejores  obras  de  su  clase 
hasta  hoy  publicadas.— ii7  Magisterio  Toledano,  IBS'?  (Toledo,  Espana). 


El  Curso  de  Historia  Natural,  por  el  Dr.  D.  Juan  Garcia  Puron,  es 
una  obra  de  relevante  merito,  tanto  considerada  desde  el  punto  de  vista 
cientifico  y  literario,  como  del  artistico.— A'^  Clamor  del  Magisterio,  1885 
(Barcelona,  EspaiiaJ. 


El  Lihro  Primero  de  Zoologia,  por  el  Dr.  D.  Juan  Garcia  Puron,  co- 
rresponde  4  un  importante  Curso  de  Historia  Natural,  debido  a  la  pluma 
de  dicho  Sr.  El  metodo  que  sigue  en  dicha  obra  es  intuitive  y  deduc- 
tivo,  y  la  exposicion  de  doctriua,  clara  y  breve,  ayudando  a  la  interpreta- 
cion  de  las  ideas  una  serie  de  grabados  de  una  ejecucion  tan  exacta  como 
esmerada. 

Recomendamos  la  adquisicion  de  tan  importante  obra,  que  considera- 
mos  de  la  mayor  utilidad  para  propagar  el  conocimiento  de  las  ciencias 
fisico-naturales  entre  la  juventud. — El  Pro/esorado,  1886  (Barcelona, 
Espana). 

*  * 

El  Libro  Primero  de  Mineralogia  y  Geologia,  del  Curso  de  Historia 
Natural,  por  el  Dr.  D.  Juan  Garcia  Puron,  viene  a  llenar  el  vacio  que  se 
observa  en  las  obras  destinadas  a  las  Escuelas  Normales,  Superiores,  e 
Institutos  de  segunda  enseiianza. — El  Clamor  del  Magisterio,  1889  (Bar- 
celona, Espana). 


El  Libro  Primero  de  Zoologia,  per  el  Dr.  D.  Juan  Garcia  Puron,  es 
verdaderamente  un  libro  util,  lleno  de  interns  y  de  amenidad,  que  cautiva 
la  atencion  del  nino  enseiiandole  los  raedios  de  observacion  sencillos,  y 
lo  eleva  a  la  contemplacion  de  la  naturaleza  y  de  su  Creador,  haciendole 
adquirir  insensiblemente  un  caudal  de  conocimientos  provechosos  para 
estudios  superiores.  No  vacilamos  en  recomcndarlo  como  utilisimo  para 
la  enseiianza  primaria. — Aiuiles  de  Instruccion  Publica  de  la  Republica  de 
Colombia,  1887  (Bogota). 


El  Libro  Primero  de  Zoohgia^  por  el  Dr.  D.  Juan  Garcia  Pur  on,  es 
un  libro  verdaderamente  util,  no  solo  come  obra  de  texto  en  un  curse  ele- 
mental de  Ilistoria  Natural,  slno  como  libro  de  Icctura  en  las  Escuelas. — 
El  Inslructor,  1886  (Aguascalicntes,  M6jico). ' 


En  el  Curso  de  Historia  Natural,  per  cl  Dr.  D.  Juan  Garcia  Puron, 
las  explicaciones  estan  puestas  al  alcance  de  las  mks,  tiernas  inteligencias, 
y  es  una  obra  que  ha  tenido  la  mas  favorable  acogida  en  la  America 
espanola,  algunos  de  cuyos  paises  la  ban  adoptado  como  de  texto  en 
sua  escuelas. — El  Diario  de  la  Marina,  1887  (Habana). 


Recomendamos  vivamente  cl  Libro  Primero  de  Mineralogia  y  Geo- 
logia,  por  el  Dr.  D.  Juan  Garcia  Puron,  obra  que  se  distingue  por  ru 
buen  estilo  y  sus  exceleutes  grabados. — II.  VVieghardt,  Profesor  de  cien- 
cias  naturales  y  Geografia  de  la  Escuela  Normal  de  Preceptores  de 
Santiago. — La  lievista  de  Lnstruccidn  Primaria^  1889  (Chile). 


Nuestras  escuelas  y  colegios  carecen  de  un  texto  tan  apropiado  para 
la  ensenanza  elemental,  como  el  Curso  de  Historia  Natural  debido  k  la 
pluma  del  Dr.  D.  Juan  Garcia  Puron. — Biario  ^e  Centro-America,  18St> 
(Guatemala).  '^' 


El  Libro  de  Zoologla  del  Dr.  D.  Juan  Garcia  Puron  es  utillsimo, 
ameno  y  muy  instructive,  porque  en  un  Jenguaje  claro  se  dan  nociones 
complctas  de  Zoologla,  pareciendo  incrcible  que  en  tan  pocas  paginas 
haya  condensado  el  autor  tan  prcciosaa  6  iutcresantes  lecciones.— ii7 
Tiempo,  1886  (M6jico). 


El  Libro  Primero  de  Zoologia,  por  el  Dr.  D.  Juan  Garcia  Puron,  es  la 
mcjor  obra  que  para  la  cnscMliinza  se  ha  publicado  en  nuestros  dias. — El 
Protector  de  la  Lnfancia,  1887  (Barcelona,  Espafia). 


El  Libro  Primero  de  Zoologla  del  Dr.  D.  Juan  Garcia  Pur6n.  Esta 
obra  en  nucstro  jiilcio  estii  llamada  i\  resolver  para  la  ensenanza  de  esta 
asignatura,  cl  diflcil  probloma  de  facilitar  su  conocimiento,  atcndiendo  & 
las  especiallsiif  as  condiciones  que  en  la  misma  concurren  por  su  m6todo 
y  e:*posici6n,  por  cl  orden  y  claridad  que  en  cUa  jiresidc,  sin  que  decaiga 
un  momento  ol  inter6s  que  despicvta. — Lm.  Scr/ni^da  Ensenanza,  ^rgaoo 
General  de  los  Establccimicntos  de  la  Enscfiauza,  1886  (Cordoba,  Espafia). 


t 


^■■^ca^t 


f 


m  3570 


/v 


1,1,^4/  tfic 


